Collins Divisions

Rapids, Iowa 52498

Cedar
(319) 395-1000
Rockwell
Cable COLINRAD Cedar Rapids IDÌ8tnatiORSI

August 30, 1993

TO: HOLDERS OF COLLINS EFIS-85B(2/12) AND EFIS-86B(2/12) ELECTRONIC FLIGHT

INSTRUMENT SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL (523-0773940)

THIRD EDITION HIGHLIGHTS

The attached installation manual completely replaces the existing instruction book. The manual was revised to
provide 4-tubeand 3-tube interconnects and to expand the existing 5-tube drawing. In addition, updated and
enhanced information in the form of revised schematics, installation control drawings, and block diagrams is
incorporated. New and expanded operating text and maintenance testing provide further insight.
All changes have been implemented in a manner that retains information required to service earlier equipment
models. All revisions are identified with black bars in the margin of the page.

This new edition does not include copies of the service bulletins (SBs) and service information letters
(SILs) issued for this equipment. A listing of all service bulletins and service information letters issued to
date is on the new edition of the bulletins section title page. Remove any SBs and SILs from your old edi-
tion and add them to the bulletins section of your new edition. Discard the remainder of the old edition.

PUBLICATIONS DEPARTMENT

1/2
 e523-0773940-00311A
3rd Edition, 30 August 1993

WARNING
INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS
This document may contain information subject to the Interna-
tional Traffic in Arms Regulation (ITAR) or the Export Adminis-
Rockwell .

tration Regulation (EAR) of 1979 which may not be exported, intemâÌlOnal

released, or disclosed to foreign nationals inside or outside of the
United States without first obtaining an export license. A violation
of the ITAR or EAR may be subject to a penalty of up to 10 years
imprisonment and a fine of up to $1,000,000under 22 U.S.C.2778 of
the Arms Export Control Act of 1976 or Section 2410 of the Export
manual
.

Administration Actof 1979. Include this notice with any reproduced IDStallation
portion of this document.

Collins EFIS-85B(2/12)
and EFIS-86B(2/12)
Electronic Flight
Instrument Systems
(Using DPU-85G/MPU-85G
or DPU-86G/MPU-86G)

Thís publication includes:

General Information 523-0773941
Installation 523-0773942
Operation 523-0773943
Theory of Operation 523-0773944
Maintenance 523-0773945
Bulletins 523-0773946

Collins General Aviation Division

Rockwell International Corporation
Cedar Rapids, lowa 52498

Printed in the United States of America

 Caution

The material in this publication is subject to change. Before

attempting any maintenance operation on the equipment covered in
this publication, verify that you have complete and up-to-date publi-
cations by referring to the applicable Publications and Service Bul-
letin Indexes.

We welcome your comments concerning this publication. Although every effort

has been made to keep it free of errors, some may occur. When reporting a
specific problem, please describe it briefly and include the publication part
number, the paragraph or figure number, and the page number.

Send your comments to: Publications Department

Collins General Aviation Division
Rockwell International Corporation
Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52498

SOFTWARE COPYRIGHT NOTICE

Copyright, 1982 through 1993
Rockwell International Corporation
All software resident in this equipment is protected by copyright.
 GENERAL ADVISORIES FOR ALL UNITS

Warning

The area within the scan arc and within 5 metres (15 feet) of an operating weather radar system
constitutes a hazardous area. Do not operate the system in any mode other than standby (STBY) or
test (TEST) when the antenna might scan over personnel within that range. Never turn on the
transmitter while in a hanger. FAA Advisory Circular 20-68B, or superseding documents, provide
additional details regarding the radiation hazards associated with ground operation of airborne
weather radar.

Warning

Service personnel are advised to observe standard safety precautions, such as wearing safety glasses,
to prevent personal injury while installing or performing maintenance on this unit.

Warning

Use care when using sealants, solvents, and other chemical compounds. Do not expose to excessive heat
or open flame. Use only in adequate ventilation. Avoid prolonged breathing of vapors and avoid
prolonged contact with skin. Observe any additional cautions and warnings provided by the manufac-
turer.

Warning

Remove power cable before disassembling any portion of the equipment. Disassembling the equipment
with power connected is dangerous to life and may also cause voltage transients that can damage the
equipment.

Warning

This equipment may have components that contain sealed materials (such as beryllium oxide, acids,
lithium, radioactive material, mercury, etc) that can be hazardous to your health. If the component
enclosure seal is broken, precautions must be taken against personal contact or inhalation, in accor-
dance with OSHA requirements 29CFR 1910.100 or superseding documents. Since it is virtually impos-
sible to determine which components do or do not contain such hazardous materials, it is recommended
that no sealed component be opened or disassembled for any reason.

Warning

These units exhibit a high degree of functional integrity. Nevertheless, users must recognize that it is
not practical to provide monitoring for all conceivable system failures and, however unlikely, it is
possible that erroneous operation could occur without a fault indication. The operator has the respon-
sibility to detect such an occurrence by means of cross-checks with redundant or correlated informa-
tion available in the cockpit.

Caution

Turn off power before disconnecting any unit from wiring. Disconnecting the unit without turning
power off may cause voltage transients that can damage the unit.

i
 GENERAL ADVISORIES FOR ALL UNITS (Cont)

Caution

This equipment contains electrostatic discharge sensitive (ESDS) components that can be damaged by
static voltages present in most repair facilities. The following precautions should be observed when
handling all ESDS components and units containing ESDS components.

ELECTROSTATIC
SENSITIVE DEVICES
OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS
FOR HANDLING

a. Deenergize or disconnect all power, signal sources, and loads used with the unit.
b. Place the unit on a grounded conductive work surface.
c. Ground the repair operator through a conductive wrist strap or other device using a 470-ka or 1-MG
series resistor to protect the operator.
d. Ground any tools (including soldering equipment) that will contact the unit. Contact with the
operator's hand provides a sufficient ground for tools that are otherwise electrically isolated.
e. All ESDS replacement components are shipped in conductive foam or tubes and must be stored in
the original shipping container until installed.
f. When ESDS devices or assemblies are removed from unit, they should be placed on a conductive
work surface or in conductive containers.
g. When not being worked on, wrap disconnected circuit cards in aluminum foil or in special plastic
bags that have been coated or impregnated with a conductive material.
h. Do not handle ESDS devices unnecessarily or remove them from their packages until actually used
or tested.

Failure to observe all of these precautions can cause permanent damage to the ESDS device. This
damage can cause the device to fail immediately or at a later date when exposed to an adverse
environment.

ii
 Collins EFIS-85B(2/12)
and EFIS-86B(2/12) Rockwell
International
Electronic Flight
Instrument Systems generai inforrnation
Collins General Aviation Division

Rated a USA e523-0773941-003118

3rd Edition, 30 August 1993

table of contents

Paragraph Page

1.1 Introduction.................... .. . . . . . .. ..............

1-1

1.2 Purpose of Equipment .................. . . . ...............

1-1

1.2.1 Electronic Attitude Director Indicator (EADI) ................... . . ...............

1-1
1.2.2 Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator (EHSI) ................... ..............
1-1
1.2.3 Display Select Panel (DSP) for EFIS-85B(2) and -86B(2) Systems................... .............
1-5
1.2.4 Display Control Panel (DCP) for EFIS-85B(12) and -86B(12) Systems ................... ..............
1-5
1.2.5 Course Heading Panel (CHP) for EFIS-85B(12) and -86B(12) Systems ................. ..............
1-5
1.2.6 Display Processor Unit (DPU) ................... ........ . . .............
1-5
1-5
I 1.2.7
1.2.8
Multifunction Display (MFD)
Multifunction Processor Unit (MPU)
...................

...................
. .

.
. . . ..............

...............
1-6

1.3 System Specifications ................... . . . . .. . . ..............

1-6

1.4 Equipment Required But Not Supplied ................... . . . . . . . ...............

1-34

1.4.1 Purpose of Equipment .................... . . . ... . . . . . . ................

1-34
1.4.1.1 Fan Monitor Module (FMM-85) ................... . . . . .. . ...............
1-34
1.4.1.2 Remote Data Programmer (RDP-300) ................... . . . ................
1-34
1.4.1.3 Checklist Entry Unit (CEU-85/85A) ................... . . .. .. . . . . ................
1-34
1.4.2 Related EFIS Equipment Specifications................... . . ...... .. . . . . ... .. . ................
1-34

NOTICE: This section replaces second edition dated 6 April 1989.

 List of Effective Pages *The asterisk indicates pages changed, added, or deleted by the current change.

Page No Issue

*Title............................. 30 Aug 93
*List of Effective Pages ......... 30 Aug 93
*1-1
thru 1-34....................30 Aug 93
*1-35
thru 1-41 Added ........... 30 Aug 93
*1-42
Blank Added............... 30 Aug 93

RETAIN THIS RECORD IN THE FRONT OF MANUAL.

Record of Revisions ON RECEIPT OF REVISIONS, INSERT REVISED PAGES IN THE MANUAL,
AND ENTER DATE INSERTED AND INITIALS.

REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER

NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED

1st Ed 15 Sep 86 None

2nd Ed 6 Apr 89 None

3rd Ed 30 Aug 93 SIL 1-90

 section I
general information

1.1 INTRODUCTION 1.2.1 Electronic Attitude Director Indicator

(EADI)
This publication provides all the specifications,
installation instructions, principles of operation, and The EFD-85/86( ) used as an electronic attitude
system maintenance for the Collins EFIS-85B(2/12) director indicator (EADI) shows:
and EFIS-86B(2/12) Electronic Flight Instrument
Systems (EFIS). Refer to table 1-1 for a list of equip- e Aircraft attitude and flight control system steer-
ment covered. A typical EFIS system is shown in ing commands
figure 1-1. e VOR, TACAN, RNAV, LNAV, MLS azimuth, or
localizer deviation
Note e Glideslope, MLS glidepath, or preselected altitude
deviation
Throughout this instruction book the term e Flight control system mode annunciation
EFIS is used when referring to the EFIS- e Autopilot engage annunciation
85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) systems. Dif- e Attitude source annunciation
ferences between the systems will be e Marker beacon annunciation
explained as necessary. e Radio altitude
e Decision height set and annunciation
Information and instructions in this publication are e Flat-slow deviation or angle-of-attack deviation
Collins General Aviation Division of Rockwell Inter- e Indicated airspeed
national Corporation recommendations. Information e Reference airspeed
in this book does not necessarily correspond with any e Airspeed trend vector
STC or actual aircraft installation and wiring. This e Preselected altitude alert
publication can not be used instead of an STC· · Excessive ILS deviation (Category II configura-
tions)
1.2 PURPOSE OF EQUIPMENT
The EFD also has a high-temperature warning out-
An EFIS system consists of two or more electronic annuncia-
put to drive an external installer-supplied
display units and their associated drive and control tor. The annunciator turns on if the internal
units. The display units use high resolution,
.

black
temperature of the EFD reaches +95 °C (+203°F) in
matrix, shadow mask, color cathode ray tubes (crt's)
still air.
as the display medium. The separate equipments
may be configured into a variety of system configu-
rations. Typical configurations consist of three or 1.2.2 Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator
five crt's. (EHSI)

The crt's display information such as: The EFD-85/86( ) used as an EHSI shows the air-
craft's horizontal navigation situation. The informa-
e Aircraft attitude tion shown includes:
e Horizontal situation
e Annunciators e Compass heading
e Weather radar • Selected heading
e Navaid/waypoint locations • Select VOR, localizer, MLS azimuth, or LNAV
e FCS mode annunciation course and deviation (including annunciation of
e Airspeed information deviation type)
• Checklists • Navigation source annunciation
e Diagnostic messages e Digital selected course/desired track readout

Revised 30 August 1993 1-1

 general information 523-0773941

DSP-85/85A

EADI (EFD-85) MFD-85A

CHP-85D

EHSI (EFD-85) CHP-86B DCP-85E

DPU-85G MPU-85G TP6-3677-017

EFIS-85B(2/12) Electronic Flight Instrument System

Figure 1-1

Revised 30 August 1993 1-2

 general information 523-0773941

Table 1-1. Equipment Covered.

UNITS REQUIRED
COLLINS
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
2-TUBE 3-TUBE 4-TUBE 5-TUBE

EFIS-85B(2)

DPU-85G Display processor unit 622-7448-00X6 1 1 2 2

DSP-85A Display select panel 622-7728-00X4 1 1 2 2

EFD-85 Electronic flight display 622-6020-0XXI 2 2 4 4

MFD-85A Multifunction display 622-7236-0XX3 -

1 -
1
MPU-85G Multifunction processor unit 622-7454-00X6

EFIS-86B(2)

DPU-86G Display processor unit 622-7710-00X6 1 1 2 2

DSP-85A Display select panel 622-7728-00X4 1 1 2 2

EFD-86 or Electronic flight display 622-6342-0XXI 2 2 4 4

EFD-86A Electronic flight display 622-6535-0XXI 2 2 4 4

MFD-85A Multifunction display 622-7236-0XX3 -

1 -
1

MPU-86G Multifunction processor unit 622-7715-00X6 -

1 -
1

EFIS-85B(12) and EFIS-86B(12)

Same as EFIS-85B(2) and EFIS-86B(2) except the DSP-85A is replaced with the following:
ICHP-85D Course heading panel 622-6898-00X2 - -
61 61

ICHP-86B Course heading panel 622-6899-00X2 1 1 62 62

IDCP-85E or Display control panel 622-6794-00X2 1 1 2 2

IDCP-85G Display control panel 622-8680-00X2 1 1 2 2

Note
IAll panel lighting is 5 V or 28 V.

2-00X = -001
for black or -002
for gray.
3-0XX and
= (with thermal switch) for black or
-001 -011 -002
and -012
(with thermal switch) for gray. Panel lighting for
MFD is 5 V or 28 V as determined by the interconnect.
4DSP-85A: and -001 -003
for black; -002
and -004
for gray; -001
and -002
have VNAV; -003
and -004
are without VNAV.
All lighting is 28 V.
6Can use two CHP-86B units or one CHP-85D.

6DPU-85G/86G and MPU-85G/86G: Service Bulletin No 25 converts -001

to -002.

Revised 30 August 1993 1-3

 general information 523-0773941

Table 1-1. Equipment Covered (Cont).

UNITS REQUIRED
COLLINS
EQUIPMENT PART NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
2-TUBE 3-TUBE 4-TUBE 5-TUBE

2The available EFDs are:

BEZEL LIGHTED
PANEL MOUNTING INCLINOMETER* HIRF
EFD-85 EFD-86A EFD-86 COLOR HOLES AND TEMP SWITCH CERTIFIED
-001
Black Yes No No
-002

Gray Yes No No
-011 -011
Black Yes No No
-012 -012
Gray Yes No No
-021 -021
Black Yes Yes No
-022 -022
Gray Yes Yes No
-121 -121
Black Yes Yes Yes
-122 -122
Gray Yes Yes Yes

-011
Black No No No
-012
Gray No No No
-013
Black Yes No No
-014 Gray Yes No No
-021
Black No Yes No
-022
Gray No Yes No
-023
Black Yes Yes No
-024
Gray Yes Yes No
*An inclinometer is a separate element which is mounted on the proper EFD. The available inclinometers are:

PART NUMBER EFD COLOR LIGHTING VOLTAGE (AC OR DC)

634-2056-001 -001, -011, -013 Black Unlighted
634-2056-002 -002, -012,
-014
Gray Unlighted
634-4320-001 -021, -023,
-121
Black 5V (requires 0.23 A nominal)
634-4320-002 -022, -024,
-122
Gray 5V (requires 0.23 A nominal)
634-4320-003 -021,
-023
Black 28V (requires 0.05 A nominal)
634-4320-004 -022,
-024
Gray 28V (requires 0.05 A nominal)

Mounts are required for some EFIS equipment. The available mounts are listed below. The UMT-14 and -15
have no built-in
cooling fans. The UMT-14A/15A have built-in ac cooling fans; the UMT-14B/15B, built-in dc cooling fans.

TYPE COLLINS PART NUMBER USED WITH

UMT-14 622-6171-001 DPU-85G/86G

UMT-14A 622-6901-001 (optional) DPU-85G/86G
UMT-14B 022-7265-001
(optional) DPU-85G/86G
UMT-15 622-6172-001 MPU-85G/86G
UMT-15A 622-6902-001 (optional) MPU-85G/86G
UMT-15B 622-7266-001 (optional) MPU-85G/86G
IMT-300 622-4333-001 MFD-85A
IMT-85 622-6878-001 MFD-85A and WXP-85A/C or WXP-850A
**FMM-85 622-7154-001 Rotron dc blower motor, pn 032105
**FMM-85 622-7154-002 UMT-14B/15B dc blower motor

**The optional FMM-85 Fan Monitor Module checks the rpm of the dc blower motor used for forced-air cooling. A signal is
sent to
control an external annunciator should the rpm drop below a certain level. Refer to EFIS-85/86 SIL 1-83 for additional
instructions about system forced-air cooling.

Revised 30 August 1993 1-4

 general information 523-0773941

e Excessive ILS deviation (when Category II con- on the EHSI. A DH SET knob that allows decision
figured) height to be set on the EADI and a button for initiat-
e Heading source annunciation ing radio altimeter test is also provided. Dual con-
e ILS and heading comparator warnings (ILS only if centric knobs are provided for EADI and EHSI
Category II configured) display dimming. In the 5-tube EFIS system, two
• To/From information DCPs are required.
e Back course localizer annunciation
e Distance to station/waypoint 1.2.5 Course Heading Panel (CHP) for EFIS-
e Glideslope or VNAV deviation (VNAV not availa- 85B(12) and -86B(12) Systems
ble when certain statuses of the display select
panel are used) The course heading panel provides control of the
• Ground speed, time-to-go, elapsed time, or wind course and heading select functions for the system.
direction/speed The CHP also provides for selection of the course
• Course information and source annunciation from direct to and heading sync functions. Additionally,
a second navigation source ground speed, time-to-go, elapsed time, and wind
e Weather radar target alert direction/speed are selected from the CHP. An ET
e Waypoint alert when LNAV or RNAV is the navi¯ button for initiating and completing timing func-
gation source tions is also provided. In the 5-tube EFIS system, one
• A bearing pointer driven by VOR, LNAV, or ADF CHP-85D or two CHP-86Bs are required.
sources as selected on the display select panel
1.2.0 Display Processor Unit (DPU)
The EHSI operates in an approach or en route for-
mat with or without weather radar. The EFD also
The display processor unit provides sensor input
has a high-temperature warning output to drive an
processing and switching, the necessary deflection
external installer-supplied annunciator. The annun-
and video signals, and power for the electronic flight
ciator turns on if the internal temperature of the
displays. The DPU is capable of driving two elec-
.

EFD reaches +95 °C (+203°F) in still air.

tronic flight displays with different deflection and
video signals; for example, an EADI on one display
1.2.3 Display Select Panel (DSP) for EFIS- and an EHSI on the other. The DPU also provides a
85B(2) and -86B(2) Systems high-temperature warning output that can drive an
external installer supplied annunciator. This annun-
The display select panel provides navigation sensor ciator will illuminate if the internal temperature of
selection, bearing pointer selection, EHSI format the DPU reaches +100
°C (+212°F) in still air.
selection, navigation data selection (groundspeed,
time-to-go, elapsed time, and wind direction/speed), 1.2.7 Multifunction Display (MFD)
and the selection of VNAV (if the airplane has a
VNAV system), weather, or second navigation source The multifunction display is a multicolor crt display
on the EHSI. A DH SET knob that allows decision unit that mounts in the instrument panel in the
height to be set on the EADI and a button for initiat- space normally provided for the weather radar indi-
ing radio altimeter test (TST) is also provided. Addi- cator. Standard functions displayed by the unit
tionally, course, course direct to, heading, and include weather radar, pictorial navigation map, and
heading sync are selected from the DSP. (Display page data.
dimming and the start/stop function for the elapsed
timer are controlled by external airframe supplied Additional functions are available when the mul-
controls.) tifunction display is used with a compatible flight
management system such as the Collins FMS-90.
1.2.4 Display Control Panel (DCP) for EFIS- Additional functions available include waypoint def-
85B (12) and -86B (12) Systems inition, display of multiple waypoints, and remote
data. The MFD also provides a high temperature
The display control panel provides navigation sensor warning output that can drive an external installer
selection, EHSI format selection, bearing pointer supplied annunciator. This annunciator will illumi-
selection, selection of weather, preset course from a nate if the internal temperature of the MFD reaches
second navigation source, or course transfer function +78
°C (+172°F) in still air.

Revised 30 August 1993 1-5

 general information 523-0773941

1.2.8 Multifunction Processor Unit (MPU) b. Input Signals and Format (Table 1-3)

The multifunction processor unit provides sensor AC ANALOG DC ANALOG

input processing and switching and the necessary
Roll angle ADF bearing
deflection and video signals for the multifunction
Pitch angle Radio altitude
display. The MPU can provide the deflection and
.

Heading MLS/LOC deviation

video signals to the EADI and EHSI displays in the
.

event of failures to either or both display processor AC ANALOG DC ANALOG

units. The MPU is similar to the DPU except that the
MPU has expanded input/output capabilities for a Desired track VNAV/MLS/GS deviation
second set of airplane sensors. The MPU also pro. Drift angle Roll steering
vides a high-temperature warning output that can WPT bearing Pitch steering
drive an external installer-supplied annunciator. RNV/TCN/ Crosstrack deviation
This annunciator will illuminate if the internal tem- VOR bearing Longitudinal acceleration
perature of the MPU reaches +135 °C (+275°F) in ADF bearing AOA or F/S deviation
still air.
SERIAL DIGITAL DC DISCRETES
1.3 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS WXP data Comparator reset
FCS modes Master warn reset
Refer to table 1-2 for system specifications that ADC data DG mode
include environmental, physical size, weight, mount- DME distance Marker beacon
ing, cooling, and input power requirements. Table 1-3 VLF/INS/RNV/ To/from
provides input specifications and table 1-4 provides
LRN data Instrument flags
output specifications for the EFIS-85B(2/12) and
EFIS-86B(2/12). Attitude/heading Instrument modes
VNAV data EFIS and I/O straps
A summary of EFIS system interfaces is listed below DCP/DSP data FCS modes
by associated equipment and by signal format. MPU cross-side Accelerometer monitor
data CAT II request
a. Associated Equipment Reference airspeed Localizer mode
VOR test
ASSOCIATED PRIMARY
DME hold
EQUIPMENT DATA FORMAT
ALT-50/55, AL-101 De analog AC DISCRETE AUDIO
ADS-80/82 Manchester serial digital
Marker beacon
-

VIR-30A/32 DME identification

Ac sin/cos
DME-40/42 ARINC 568 6-wire c. Output Signals and Formats (Table 1-4)
ADF-60A/60B De sin/cos
332D-11( ) 3-wire synchro
AC ANALOG DC ANALOG
MC-103/MCS-65 3-wire synchro
AHS-85 CSDB Heading error Vertical deviation
FCS-80 Ac/de analog, discretes Course datum Crosstrack deviation
APS-65 Ac/de analog, CSDB error
APS-85 CSDB
LRN-85, FMS-90, Analog, ARINC 561 digital, SERIAL DATA DC DISCRETES
VLF,INS/LNS discretes, CSDB or ARINC
561 digital DCP/DSP control To/from
VNI-80A/C FMS-90 WPT load Back LOC
De analog
VNI-80B/D CSDB FCS data Modes/status/flags
De analog Cross-side data Master warn
AOA
TCN Ac sin/cos, 6-wire ARINC Individual comparator
561 warn(s)
LAC-80 De analog CAT II warn output
MSI-80F Serial digital Overtemperature sensor
PRE-80 Discrete Decision height out
WXP-85( )/850() Serial digital Radio altimeter test

Revised 30 August 1993 1-6

 general information 523-0773941

Table 1-2. EFIS System Spec(fications.

CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION

Certification EFIS units are certified to FAA TSO categories as listed below:

TSO DSP-85( ) -C6c, -52a

DCP-85( ) -C6e
CHP-85( )/86( ) -C52a
MFD-85A -C6c, -C63b
DPU-85G/86G -C3b, -C4c, -C6c, -C34c, -C36c, -C40b, and -C52a
MPU-85G/86G -C3b, -C4c, -C6c, -C34c, -C36c, -C40b, and -C52a
EFD-85/86/86A -C3b, -C4c, -C6c, -C34c, -C36c, -C40b, and -C52a

Maintenance requirements On condition

Environmental Listed below are the DO-160A categories to which the EFIS units are tested.

D1/A/KS/XXXXXXAZAAA CHP-85D/86B, DCP-85E/G, DSP-85A, EFD-85/86( ), MFD-85A

F2/A/MNO/XXXXXXAZAAA DPU-85G/86G, MPU-85G/86G

Temperature and altitude Category D1. Temperature -20 to +55 °C (-4 to +131 °F).
(operating) Altitude -305 to +16 764 m (-1000to 55 000 ft)

Category F2. Temperature -55 to +70 °C (-67 to +158 °F).

Altitude to +16 764 m (-1000to 55 000 ft)
-305

Vibration FREQUENCY AMPLITUDE (G LEVEL)

Category KS

5 to 55 Hz 0.02 in double amplitude

55 to 500 Hz 0.5 g peak
500 to 2000 Hz 0.25 g peak

Category MNO

5 to 17 Hz 0.01 in double amplitude

17 to 500 Hz 1.5 g peak
500 to 2000 Hz 1.0 g peak

Explosion Category X. Not required

Waterproofness Category X. Not required

Hydraulic fluid Category X. Not required

Sand and dust Category X. Not required

Fungus Category X. Not required

Salt spray Category X. Not required

Magnetic effect Category A. 1 degree allowable deflection at a distance between 0.3 and 1.0 m

Power input Category Z. High variation +29.5 V dc, low variation +22.0 V dc, emergency low +18 V
de

Voltage spikes Category A. 50 spikes/minute at +600 volts peak and -600 volts peak

Audio susceptibility Category A. Sine wave applied to ungrounded power lines. 0.01 to 150 kHz, 2 V peak

Electromagnetic interference Category A

Induced signal susceptibility Paragraph 19.0

Revised 30 August 1998 1-7

 general information 523-0773941

Table 1-2. EFIS System Specifications (Cont).

CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION

Rf susceptibility Paragraph 20.0

Spurious emissions Paragraph 21.0

Weight (nominal)

CHP-85D 0.59 kg (1.3 lb)

CHP-86B 0.50 kg (1.1 lb)

DCP-85E/G 0.91 kg (2.0 lb)

DPU-85G/86G 6.2 kg (13.6 lb) max. The UMT-14 weighs 0.5 kg (1.2 lb) or UMT-14A/14B weighs 0.95
kg (2.1 lb).

DSP-85A 1.31 kg (2.9 lb)

EFD-85 3.2 kg (7.0 lb)

EFD-86/86A 3.5 kg (7.7 lb)

MFD-85A 4.35 kg (9.6 lb). The mounting tray (IMT-300) weighs 0.18 kg (0.4lb).
MPU-85G/86G 7.7 kg (17.0 lb) max. The UMT-15 weighs 0.68 kg (1.5 lb) or UMT-15A/15B weighs 1.18
kg (2.6 lb).

Size (reference)
CHP-85D/86B 146.1 mm (5.75 in) wide × 38.1 mm (1.50 in) high × 165.1 mm (6.50 in) deep (measured
from rear of front panel to rear of case)

DCP-85E/G 146.1 mm (5.75 in) wide × 47.62 mm (1.875 in) high × 165.1 mm (6.50 in) deep (measured
from rear of front panel to rear of case)

DPU-85G/86G 1/2-ATR short, full height; 128.9 mm (5.08 in) wide × 194.8 mm (7.67 in) high × 371.1
mm (14.61 in) deep

DSP-85A 146.1 mm (5.75 in) wide × 47.62 mm (1.875 in) high × 203.2 mm (8.00 in) deep (measured
from rear of front panel to rear of case)

EFD-85 131.6 mm (5.18 in) wide × 121.9 mm (4.80 in) high × 248.9 mm (9.80 in) deep (measured
from rear of bezel to rear of case)

EFD-86/86A 157.0 mm (6.18 in) wide × 131.6 mm (5.18 in) high × 259.1 mm (10.20 in) deep (measured
from rear of bezel to rear of case)

MFD-85A 159.5 mm (6.28 in) wide × 120.14 mm (4.730 in) high × 314.4 mm (12.38 in) deep
(measured from rear of bezel to rear of case)

MPU-85G/86G 3/4-ATR short, full height; 195.60 mm (7.70 in) wide × 194.6 mm (7.66 in) high × 371.1
mm (14.61 in) deep

Mounting

CHP-85D/86B Mount equipment on standard 9.52-mm (0.375-in)increment rail spaces on 136.27-mm

(5.365-in) centers per MS25212.Secure unit using two Dzus fasteners.

DCP-85E/G and DSP-85A Mount equipment on standard 9.52-mm (0.375-in)increment rail spaces on 136.27-mm
(5.365-in) centers per MS25212.Secure unit using two Dzus fasteners.

DPU-85G/86G Rack mounted using UMT-14 (CPN 622-6171-001), UMT-14A (CPN 622-6901-001), or
UMT-14B (CPN 622-7265-001)

Revised 30 August 1993 1-8

 general information 523-0773941

Table 1-2. EFIS System Specifications (Cont).

CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION

EFD-85 Front mounted using mooring plate (CPN 634-2804-001) or tap panel for 0.164-32 UNC-
2A (#8-32)mounting screws per ARINC Specification No 408A. For rear mounting use
mooring plate (CPN 634-2804-001).

EFD-86/86A Front mounted using mooring plate (CPN 634-2803-001) or tap panel for 0.190-32 UNF-
2A (#10-32)mounting screws per ARINC Specification No 408A. For rear mounting use
mooring plate (CPN 634-2803-001). For EFD-86 (CPN 622-6342-001/002/011/012/021/
022), mount the unit from the front with an instrument clamp (PN 123-5060N-F)
obtained from Dexter-Wilson Corp., Seattle, Washington 98103.

MFD-85A Panel mounted using an IMT-300 Mounting Tray (CPN 622-4333-001) or IMT-85

I MPU-85G/86G
Mounting Tray (CPN 622-6878-001). The IMT-300 is equipped with self-locking nuts and
requires four no 6-32 UNC-2A flathead screws.

Rack mounted using UMT-15 (CPN 622-6172-001), UMT-15A (CPN 622-6902-001), or

UMT-15B (CPN 622-7266-001)

Power input. All units are

designed to use +27.5 V de
(±20%).Steady-state current
requirements are listed to the INPUT CURRENT INPUT CURRENT
right. (TYPICAL) AMPERES (MAX) AMPERES

I DCP-85E/G/CHP-86B
DCP-85E/G/CHP-85D
DPU-85G/86G
0.2
(Refer to the note below.)
4.0
0.25

6.7
DSP-85A 0.2 0.25
EFD (EADI) 2.0 3.6
EFD (EHSI) 1.5 2.7
MPU-85G/86G 5.2 8.7
MFD-85A 1.5 2.3

Note
e The DCP supplies power to the CHP.
e The DPU supplies power to the EFDs.
e Two DCP-85( ) and one CHP-85D require the same current as two DCP-
85( ) and two CHP-86Bs.

Controls with lighting require +5

or +28 V de supplied from a 5-V DC CURRENT 28-V DC CURRENT
dimmer-controlled lighting bus. UB (TYPICAL) AMPERES (TYPICAL) AMPERES
CHP-86B 0.36 0.12
CHP-85D 0.80 N/A
DCP-85E/G 0.82 0.03
DSP-85A N/A 0.03
MFD-85A 0.92 0.21
EFD INCLINOMETER 0.23 0.05

Cooling The EFD-85/86( ), MFD-85A, DPU-85G/86G, and MPU-85G/86G require forced-air

cooling. These units are capable of operation for a short time at the elevated operating
temperatures specified in the environmental section of this specification without
cooling air. However, operation at these levels is not considered normal. Refer to the
installation section for cooling requirements and blower recommendations.

Revised 30 August 1993 1-9

 general information 523-0773941

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Input Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

1.0 RADIO ALTITUDE

Radio Altitude, DPU(P2-6,5) Pro Line Radio Format: 2-wire, dc, single polarity
Pro Line MPU(P1-6,5)1 Altimeter Analog: -20
to +500 ft, V 0.02 h + 0.4
=

H,L MPU(P3-6,5)2 (ALT-50/55) Analog: +500 ft and greater, V 0.003 (h 500)

= -
+ 10.4
Max input voltage: less than +28 V dc
Input impedance: 100 k0 (nom) balanced to gnd
Max common mode voltage ±40 V DC
Max differential voltage ±80 V DC

Radio Altitude DPU(P2-6,5) Radio Altimeter Format: 2-wire, dc, single polarity
ARINC MPU(P1-6,5)1 (AL-101) Analog: -20 to +480 ft, V 0.02 h + 0.4
=

H,L MPU(P3-6,5)2 Analog: +480 to +2500 ft, V 10 ln (h + 20) 52.1461

= -

Max input voltage: less than +28 V de

Input impedance: 100 k0 (nom) balanced to gnd
Max common mode voltage ±40 V DC
Max differential voltage ±80 V DC

Radio Alt Valid DPU(P2-124) Radio Altimeter Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-124)1 Radio alt valid: +18 to +31 V de
MPU(P3-124)2 Radio alt invalid: 0 to +3.0 V dc
Input impedance (to gnd): NLT 10 k0

Radio Altitude Type, Go to 12.0 in this table for strapping information.

I/O Straps 7 and 8

2.0 AIR DATA SYSTEM INPUTS

Air Data Information DPU(P2-93,97) Air Data Format: 2-wire serial, binary multimessage, Manchester coded
H,L MPU(P1-93,97)1 Computer bit stream
MPU(P3-93,97)2 (ADC-80/82) Data transfer rate: 10 kHz
Input resistance: NLT 20 k0

WORDS DECIMAL LABEL UPDATE RATE/S

INDICATED AIRSPEED (IAS) 1 17
MAX ALLOWABLE AIRSPEED (Vmo/Mmo) 2 17
MACH NUMBER, INDICATED (M) 3 17
VERTICAL SPEED (VS) 4 17
TRUE AIRSPEED (TAS) 5 17
STATIC AIR TEMPERATURE (SAT) 6 17
TOTAL AIR TEMPERATURE (TAT) 7 17
ALTITUDE, PRESSURE 8 17
ALTITUDE, BAROCORRECTED 9 17
ALTITUDE, PRESELECTOR 10 17
ALTITUDE PRESELECTOR ERROR 11 17
VS BUG 12 17
IAS BUG 13 17

Fast/Slow Deviation DPU(P2-109,144) MSI-80C/80D/80E Format: 2-wire, dc, polarity reversing

+Slow/Incr, MPU(P2-146,143)1 or ASI-80D/80F Analog: 1.1 volt/dot 3
+Fast/Decr MPU(P2-157,147)2 Zero: at 0 volt
Max common mode voltage: ±17 V dc
Max diff current: ±34 milliamps
Input resistance: NLT 1 k0

Revised 30 August 1993 1-10

 general information 523-077394 i

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Input Spec(fications (Cont).

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

2.0 AIR DATA SYSTEM INPUTS (Cont)

Fast/Slow Valid DPU(P2-114) MSI-80C/80D/80E Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-114)1 or ASI-80D/80F Fast/slow valid: +18 to +31 V de
MPU(P3-114)2 Fast/slow invalid: 0 to +3.0 V de
Input impedance: NLT 30 ka

Air Data Valid DPU(P2-120) ADC-80/82 Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-120)1 Air data valid: +18 to +31 V de
MPU(P3-120)2 Air data invalid: 0 to +3.0 V de
Input impedance: NLT 10 ka

Indicated Air Speed MPU(P2-27/31) MSI-80F Format: 4-wire dedicated (2-wire clock, 2-wire data)
Reference clock 1 Transfer rate: Data is 9.8 kBd/s, clock is 156.8 kBd/s
MPU(P2-6/10) Word: IAS REFERENCE, hex label: 0D
data 1
MPU(P2-84/108)
clock 2
MPU(P2-77/80)
data 2

Speed Devn, I/O Go to 12.0 in this table for strapping information.

Straps 13 and 23

3.0 ANGLE OF ATTACK

DPU(P2-109,144) Format: 2-wire de polarity reversing

I
AOA Data Aircraft wiring
+Decr, +Incr MPU(P2-146,143)1 Analog: 1.1 volt/dot
MPU(P2-157,147)2 Zero: at zero angle
Input resistance: NLT 1 kO
Max common mode voltage: ±17 V
Max diff current: ±34 milliamps

AOA Valid DPU(P2-114) Aircraft wiring Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-114)1 Valid: +18 to +31 V de
MPU(P3-114)2 Invalid: 0 to +3.0 V de
Input impedance: NLT 10 ka

4.0 LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION

Long Acceleration MPU(P2-95,98) LAC-80 Format: 2-wire, de, polarity reversing

H, L Analog: 2.5 volt/g
Zero: at 0 V de
Max common mode voltage: ±25 V
Max diff voltage: ±50 V
Input load: NLT 50 ka

Long Acc Monitor MPU(P2-104) LAC-80 Format: 1-wire discrete

Acceleration valid: +11 to +15 V de
Acceleration invalid: open or 0 to +3.0 V de
Input resistance: NLT 30 ka

Airspeed/Trend Go to 12.0 in this table for strapping information.

Vector, I/O Strap 27

Revised 30 August 1993 1-11

 general information 523-077394 i

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Input Spec(fications (Cont).

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

5.0 NAVIGATION RECEIVER INPUTS (VOR/TCN/RNV/MLS MUST MEET THE FOLLOWING PARAMETERS.)

VOR Bearing DPU(P2-72,76,80) NAV Receiver Format: 4-wire ac sin/cos

Sin, Cos, Com MPU(P1-72,76,80)1 (VIR-30/32) Analog: 11.8 V ac max, 400 Hz
MPU(P3-72,76,80)2 Input load: NLT 100 kD
Max common mode voltage: ±30 V
Max diff voltage: ±60 V

Localizer Mode DPU(P2-101) NAV Receiver Format: 1-wire discrete

(ILS Mode Gnd) MPU(P1-101)1 LOC mode: NMT +3 V de (gnd)
MPU(P3-101)2 VOR mode: NLT 100 kD (open)
Input resistance: NLT 10 kD

LOC Deviation DPU(P2-33,34) NAV Receiver Format: 2-wire, dc, polarity reversing
+RT,+LT MPU(P1-33,34)1 Analog: ±1 mA max, 75 µA/dot, 2 dots full-scale
MPU(P3-33,34)2 Zero: at beam center
Input resistance: 1 kD
Max common mode voltage: ±200 V
Max diff current: ±10 mA

VOR/LOC Valid DPU(P2-119) NAV Receiver Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-119)1 VOR/LOC valid: +18 to +31 V de
MPU(P3-119)2 VOR/LOC invalid: 0 to +3.0 V de
Input load: NLT 10 kD

Glideslope Deviation DPU(P2-3,4) Glideslope Format: 2-wire, de, polarity reversing

+DN,+UP MPU(P1-3,4)1 Receiver Analog: ±1 mA max, 75 µA/dot, 2 dots full-scale
MPU(P3-3,4)2 Zero: at beam center
Input resistance: 1 kD
Max common mode voltage: ±200 V
Max diff current: ±10 mA

Glideslope Valid DPU(P2-113) Glideslope Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-113)1 Receiver Glideslope valid: +18 to +31 V de
MPU(P3-113)2 Glideslope invalid: 0 to +3.0 V de
Input load: NLT 10 kD

Marker Beacons AC Marker Format: 1-wire with respect to ground

Beacon Marker on: greater than 6.5 V ac
(Collins) Marker off: less than 6.5 V ac
Input load: NLT 200 kD
Outer Marker DPU(P2-13) Frequency: Inner: 3000 Hz
MPU(P1-13)1 Middle: 1300 Hz
MPU(P3-13)2 Outer: 400 Hz

Middle Marker DPU(P2-17) DC Marker Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-17)1 Beacon Marker on: greater than 3.2 V de
MPU(P3-17)2 (Non-Collins) Marker off: less than 3.2 V de
DPU(P2-21) Input load: NLT 200 ka
Inner Marker
MPU(P1-21)1 Frequency: Inner: 3000 Hz
MPU(P3-21)2 Middle: 1300 Hz
Outer: 400 Hz

Revised 30 August 1993 1-12

 general information 523-0773941

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Input Specifications (Cont).

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

5.0 NAVIGATION RECEIVER INPUTS (VOR/TCN/RNV/MLS MUST MEET THE FOLLOWING PARAMETERS.) (Cont)

VOR Reference DPU(P2-41,42) Navigation Format: 2-wire, ac

H,C MPU(P1-41,42)1 Receiver Sensor Voltage: 26 V ac, 400 Hz
MPU(P3-41,42)2 Input resistance: NLT 20 kG
Max common mode voltage: ±100 V
Max diff voltage: ±200 V

NAV, I/O Straps 21, Go to 12.0 in this table for strapping information.
10, 24

6.0 DME INPUT

DME Distance DME Receiver Format: 6-wire, ARINC 561 serial word

I (DME-40/42) Update rate: 5 times/s

Input resistance: NLT 12 kn
Words: DME Distance
Sync H,L DPU(P1-122,126)
MPU(P2-33,37)1
MPU(P2-36,40)2

Clk H,L DPU(P1-134,130)

MPU(P2-25,29)1
MPU(P2-28,32)2

Data H,L DPU(P1-142,138)

MPU(P2-17,21)1
MPU(P2-20,24)2

DME Valid DPU(P1-146) DME Receiver Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P2-41)1 DME valid: +18 to +31 V de
MPU(P2-44)2 DME invalid: 0 to +3.0 V de
Input resistance: NLT 10 kn

DME Audio Ident DPU(P1-154,158) DME Receiver Format: 2-wire, ac

H,L MPU(P2-45,49)1 Analog: 16 volts p-p max (2 volts p-p min) across 600
MPU(P2-48,52)2 Frequency: 1500 Hz (nominal)
Load: NLT 5 kD

DME Hold DPU(P2-112) CTL-30/32 or Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-112)1 External Switch DME hold: NLT 100 ka (open)
MPU(P3-112)2 DME not hold: NMT +3 V de (gnd)
Input resistance: NLT 10 ka

7.0 ADF INPUT

ADF Bearing, DC DPU(P2-14,18,22) Automatic Format: DC resolver 3-wire sin/cos

Sin, Cos, Com MPU(P1-14,18,22)1 Direction Finder Analog: 8 V de max
MPU(P3-14,18,22)2 (ADF-60A/60B) Load: NLT 10 kD
Max common mode voltage: ±30 V
Max diff voltage: ±60 V

Revised 30 August 1993 1-13

 general information 523-077394 i

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Input Spec(fications (Cont).

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

7.0 ADF INPUT (Cont)

ADF Bearing, AC DPU(P2-14,18,22) Automatic Format: 3-wire reference to gnd

I X,Y,Z MPU(P1-14,18,22)1
MPU(P3-14,18,22)2
Direction
Finder (ADF-
60A/60B)
Analog: X to Y (11.8 V rms) X (sine of bearing angle)
=

Zero: at bearing angle, equal to 180 degrees

Load: NLT 10 kD
Max common mode voltage: ±30 V dc
Max diff voltage: ±60 V de
Freq/phase: Must be phased locked to 400-Hz power.
Phasing: X-to=Y voltage shall be out of phase with the 400-Hz
power cew bearing condition.

ADF Valid DPU(P1-90) Automatic Format: 1-wire reference to gnd

MPU(P1-133)1 Direction Finder ADF valid: +18 to +31 V de
MPU(P3-133)2 ADF invalid: 0 to +3.0 V de
Input load: NLT 10 kD

ADF Reference H,C NAV Receiver Ref See 5.0 in this table.

ADF, I/O Strap 15 Go to 12.0 in this table for strapping information.

8.0 FLIGHT DIRECTOR/AUTOPILOT

8.1 Analog Flight Director/Autopilot

FD Valid DPU(P2-143) Flight Control Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-143)1 System FD valid: +18 to +31 V de
MPU(P3-143)2 FD invalid: open
Input resistance: NLT 10 kD

FD In View Bias DPU(P2-137) Flight Control Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-137)1 System FD in view bias: +18 to +31 V de
MPU(P3-137)2 FD out of view: open
Input resistance: NLT 10 kD

FD Off (Cmd Bars DPU(P2-138) External Switch Format: 1-wire discrete

I Off) MPU(P1-138)1
MPU(P3-138)2
or Wiring FD off: +18 to +31 V de
FD on: 0 to +3 V dc
Input resistance: NLT 10 kD

Pitch Command DPU(P2-1,2) Flight Control Format: 2-wire, de, polarity reversing
+DN,+UP MPU(P1-1,2)1 System Analog: FCS-80: 150 mV/deg
MPU(P3-1,2)2 FCS-65: 150 mV/deg
FCS-A: 120 mV/deg
FCS-B: 50 mV/deg
Zero: at zero volt
Input resistance: NLT 10 ka
Max common mode voltage: ±10 V
Max diff voltage: ±20 V

Revised 30 August 1993 1-14

 general information 523-0773941

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Input Spec(fications (Cont).

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

8.1 Analog Flight Director/Autopilot (Cont)

Roll Command DPU(P2-37,38) Flight Control Format: 2-wire, de, polarity reversing
+LT,+RT MPU(P1-37,38)1 System Analog: FCS-80: 150 mV/deg
MPU(P3-37,38)2 FCS-65: 150 mV/deg
FCS-A: 66 mV/deg
FCS-B: 50 mV/deg
Zero: at zero volt
Input resistance: NLT 10 kD
Max common mode voltage: ±10 V
Max diff voltage: ±20 V

FCS Reference DPU(P2-9,10) Flight Control Format: 2-wire, ac

H,C MPU(P1-9,10)1 System Voltage: 26 V ac, 400 Hz
MPU(P3-9,10)2 Input resistance: NLT 20 kD
Max common mode voltage: ±100 V
Max diff voltage: ±200 V

8.2 Annunciator Inputs (For Analog Flight Directors/Autopilots)

8.2.1 FCS-80/EFIS-85B(2/12) Mode Annunciators Strap Definition

I Annunciators
below.)
(See See below. Flight Control
System (FCS-80)
Annunciator on: gnd
Annunciator off: open
Format: 1-wire discrete

ANNUN
NO FUNCTION LEGEND COLOR DCP PIN DSP PIN FCS PIN

1 Heading select HDG Green J1-22 J1-10 FGC P3-45

2 Lateral arm Note 1 White J1-5 J1-22 FGC P3-37
3 Lateral capture Note 1 Green J1-21 J1-23 FGC P3-49
4 Approach ---- ---- J1-4 J1-11 FGC P3-25
5 Dead reckon DR White J1-18 J1-24 FGC P3-33
6 YD disconn gnd YD Note 4 J1-7 J1-12 APP P1-39
7 Roll hold ---- ----
APC P2-50
7 HDG hold ROL Green J1-2 J1-25 APC P2-42
8 Glideslope arm GS White J1-23 J1-13 FGC P2-41
9 Glideslope capture GS Green J1-36 J1-16 FGC P2-53
10 VNAV arm VNV White J1-38 J1-15 FGC P2-57
11 VNAV capture VNV Green J1-8 J1-14 FGC P2-45
12 Altitude select ALTS White J1-35 J1-17 FGC P1-60
13 Altitude hold ALT Green J1-42 J1-18 FGC P2-33
14 Mach hold MACH Green J1-24 J1-19 FGC P2-25
15 IAS hold IAS Green J1-3 J1-20 FGC P2-49
16 Vert spd hold VS Green J1-6 J1-21 FGC P2-17
17 Pitch hold PIT Green J1-37 J1-9 FGC P2-4
18 Go around GA (Note 2) Green J1-44 Jl-8 FGC P2-13
19 AP transfer **
Note 5 J1-43 J1-7 APC P2-15
20 AP disconn (logic) **
Note 5 J1-20 Jl-5 APP P2-10
21 AP disconn gnd **
Note 5 J1-39 J1-4 APP P1-18
22 Mistrim TRIM (Note 3) Yellow J1-40 J1-3 APC P3-23/43
23 Altitude track ---- ----
FGC P1-52
23 Altitude capture ALTS Green J1-19 J1-2 FGC Pl-56
24 Test ----
Note 6 J1-41 J1-1 External sw to gnd
(EFIS test)

Revised 30 August 1998 1-15

 general information 523-0773941

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(ß/1ß) and EFIS-86B(2/1ß) Input SpecVications(Cont).

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

8.2.1 FCS-80/EFIS-85B(2/12) Mode Annunciators Strap Definition (Cont)

Note 1. Lateral arm and capture annunciations reflect the active course selection on the EHSI and will be annunciated per
input strapping and DCP/DSP sensor selection.
Note 2. GA appears in the active vertical and lateral mode lines. If a new lateral mode is selected (ie, HDG) that mode
replaces GA in the lateral line. If a new vertical mode is selected, both the vertical and lateral lines are changed.

Note 3. The APC P3-23 is the elevator mistrim annunciator, P2-43 is the aileron mistrim annunciator. These may be wired
together in the interconnect to give the same message.
Note 4. The yaw damper status is annunciated as follows:

YD DISCONNECT
GROUND LEGEND COLOR

Open YD Green
Gnd YD *Yellow (flashing)
*The flashing occurs after a disconnect and will flash for 5 seconds, then disappear.

Note 5. The three autopilot modes (straps 19, 20, 21 marked**) will be annunciated as follows:
DUAL FCS-80

AP DISCONN AP DISC AP
GND (FLASH) TRANSFER LEGEND COLOR
Open Open Open AP/L Green
Open Open Gnd AP/R Green
Gnd Gnd Open AP/L Red (flashing)
Gnd Gnd Gnd AP/R Red (flashing)
Gnd Open Open AP/L White
Gnd Open Gnd AP/R White
SINGLE FCS-80

AP DISCONN AP DISC
GND (FLASH) LEGEND COLOR
Open Open AP Green
Gnd Gnd AP Red (flashing)
Gnd Open
Note
The flashing occurs after a disconnect and until canceled by flight crew.
The AP DISC (logic) APP P2-10 must be strapped to inhibit the APP flashing. That is APP P2-11 strapped
to APP P1-49.
Note 6. In a particular installation, any of these 24 unused inputs to the DCP/DSP should be grounded through the
annunciator test switch to allow the EFIS system to detect failed inputs. With these conditions met and with the test
switch applying ground to strap 24, the results are as follows:
If the test passes, then the legend PASS appears in yellow.
If the test fails, then the legend FAIL appears in yellow.

Revised 80 August 1998 1-16

 general information 523-077394 i

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Input Specifications (Cont).

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

8.2.2 FCS-65/EFIS-85B(2/12) Mode Annunciators Strap Definition

I Annunciators
(See below.)
See below. Flight Control
System (FCS-65)
Annunciator on: gnd
Annunciator off: open
Format: 1-wire discrete

ANNUN
NO FUNCTION LEGEND COLOR DCP PIN DSP PIN FCS PIN
17 Sync SYNC Yellow J1-37 J1-9 Note 3
18 Dual AP Note 1 J1-44 J1-8 Note 3
19 AP transfer Note 1 J1-43 J1-7 Note 3
20 Mistrim TRIM Yellow J1-20 J1-5 FCP J1-29
21 YD disengage Note 2 J1-39 J1-4 FCP J1-47
22 YD engage Note 2 J1-40 J1-3 FCP J1-44
23 AP disengage Note 1 J1-19 J1-2 FCP J1-48
24 AP engage Note 1 J1-41 J1-1 FCP J1-28

Note 1. DUAL FCS-65

AP ENGAGE AP DISENG AP XFER LEGEND COLOR
Gnd Open Open AP/L Green
Gnd Open Gnd AP/R Green
Gnd Gnd Open AP/L Yellow
Gnd Gnd Gnd AP/R Yellow
Open Open Open AP/L White
Open Open Gnd AP/R White
The flashing between engage (green)and disengage (yellow) occurs at disconnect and will
flash approximately 5 seconds, then steady white.

SINGLE FCS-65
AP ENGAGE AP DISENG LEGEND COLOR
Gnd Open AP Green
Gnd Gnd AP Yellow
Open Open
The flashing engage (green) and disengage (yellow) occurs at
disconnect and will flash approximately 5 seconds, then disappear.
Note 2. DUAL OR SINGLE FCS-65
AP ENGAGE AP DISENG LEGEND COLOR
Gnd Open YD Green
Gnd Gnd YD Yellow
Open Open
The flashing between engage (green)and disengage (yellow) occurs at
disconnect and will flash approximately 5 seconds, then disappear.
Note 3. A ground is supplied from an external switch.

Revised 30 August 1993 1-1't

 general information 523-077394 i

Table 1-8. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Input Specifications (Cont).

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

8.2.3 FCS-65 Digital Bus Interface

Flight Control Data DPU(P2-15,19) Flight Control Format: 2-wire Commercial Standard Digital Bus (CSDB)
A,B MPU(P1-15,19)1 System (FCS-65) Input resistance: NLT 12 k0
MPU(P3-15,19)2 Words: See below.

WORDS HEX LABEL UPDATE RATE/S

GLIDESLOPE EXT/CAP/ARM, NAV-1 CAP/ARM, SPD HOLD, AA 10
ALT PRESELECT HOLD/CAP/ARM, APP CAP/ARM, REPORT
CODE BAD, ALT HOLD, IAS HOLD, MACH HOLD, TST, VS,
CLI, GO-AROUND PITCH/ROLL, PITCH, ROLL, VNAV CAP/
ARM, BC, DR, HEADING SELECTED/HOLD, TRB, XFR,
DESCENT, HLF, NAV-2 CAP/ARM, RADIO COUPLE, OUT-OF-
TRIM RUD/AIL/ELE, DISCONNECT YD/AP, TRIM BAD, NAC
TST, V-BAR INVUE, STR VLD
HDG BUG, R-STR INVUE, P-STR INVUE, AIRCRAFT WEIGHT AB 10
HVY/MED/LIT

8.3 Digital Flight Director/Autopilot

Flight Control Data DPU(P2-15,19) FCS System Format: 2-wire Commercial Standard Digital Bus (CSDB)
A,B MPU(P1-15,19)1 (FCS-85/86) Input resistance: NLT 12 kD
MPU(P3-15,19)2 Words: See below.

WORDS HEX LABEL UPDATE RATE/S

GLIDESLOPE EXT/CAP/ARM, NAV-1 CAP/ARM, SPD HOLD, AA 10
ALT PRESELECT HOLD/CAP/ARM, APP CAP/ARM, REPORT
CODE BAD, ALT HOLD, IAS HOLD, MACH HOLD, TST, VS,
CLI, GO-AROUND PITCH/ROLL, PITCH, ROLL, VNAV CAP/
ARM, BC, DR, HEADING SELECTED/HOLD, TRB, XFR,
DESCENT, HLF, NAV-2 CAP/ARM, RADIO COUPLE, OUT-OF-
TRIM RUD/AIL/ELE, DISCONNECT YD/AP, TRIM BAD, NAC
TST, V-BAR IN VIEW, STR VLD
HDG BUG, R-STR INVUE; P-STR INVUE, AIRCRAFT WEIGHT AB 10
HVY/MED/LT
ALTITUDE REF/VALID; PITCH STEERING/VALID; ROLL 2A 10
STEERING/VALID
CRT ASC II MESSAGES 70 10
VERT SPEED REF/VS REF DISPLAY CMD, IAS REF/IAS REF 72 10
DISPLAY CMD, MACH REF/MACH REF DISPLAY CMD, VS
BUG/IAS BUG
EFIS/FCS-85/86 Annunciator Strap Definition
M FUNCTION *LEGEND COLOR DCP PIN DSP PIN FCC PIN
22 Aileron mistrim A --(boxed) Yellow J1-40 J1-3 P1 and P2-48
23 Elevator mistrim -
E -
(boxed) Yellow J1-19 J1-2 P1 and P2-52
24 Rudder mistrim - -
R (boxed) Yellow J1-41 J1-1 P1 and P2-47
*A -
(dash) in the LEGEND column indicates an empty space.

Flight Director Refer to 12.0 of this table for strapping information.

System, I/O Straps 1,
2, and 3

Revised 30 August 1993 1-18

 general information 523-0773941

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Input Specifications (Cont).

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

9.0 ATTITUDE/HEADING INPUT

9.1 Analog Attitude/Heading

Pitch Data DPU(P2-88,84,92) Vertical Gyro Format: 3-wire synchro

X,Y,Z MPU(P1-88,84,92)1 (332-D11) Analog: X to Y (11.8 V rms) × (sine of pitch angle)
=

MPU(P3-88,84,92)2 Zero: at zero pitch angle

Input resistance: NLT 10 kD
Max common mode voltage: ±30 V
Max diff voltage: ±60 V
Freq/phase: must be phase-locked to 400-Hz power
Phasing: X to Y voltage shall be out of phase with 400-Hz
power when in a noseup condition.

Roll Data DPU(P2-89,85,81) Vertical Gyro Format: 3-wire synchro

X,Y,Z MPU(P1-89,85,81)1 (332-D11) Analog: X to Y (11.8 V rms) × (sine of bank angle)
=

MPU(P3-89,85,81)2 Zero: at zero roll angle

Input resistance: NLT 10 kn
Max common mode voltage: ±30 V
Max diff voltage: ±60 V
Freq/phase: must be phase-locked to 400-Hz power
Phasing: X to Y voltage shall be out of phase with 400-Hz
power when in a right bank.

Attitude Reference DPU(P2-45,46) Aircraft Supplied Format: 2-wire, ac

H,C MPU(P1-45,46)1 Voltage: 26 V ae, 400 Hz
MPU(P3-45,46)2 Input load: NLT 10 kD

Attitude Valid DPU(P2-117) Vertical Gyro Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-117)1 Attitude valid: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-117)2 Attitude invalid: 0 to +3.0 V de
Input resistance: NLT 10 ka

Heading Data DPU(P2-96,104,100) MagneticCompass Format: 3-wire synchro

X,Y,Z MPU(P1-96,104,100)1 (MC-103/MCS-65) Analog: 11.8 V rms max, 400 Hz
MPU(P3-96,104,100)2 Zero: at zero heading angle
Input resistance: NLT 10 kn
Max common mode voltage: ±30 V
Max diff voltage: ±60 V
Freq/phase: must be phase-locked to 400-Hz power
Phasing: X to Y voltage shall be out of phase with 400-Hz
power when in a right heading.

Heading Reference DPU(P2-60,56) Aircraft Wiring Format: 2-wire, ac

H,C MPU(P1-60,56)1 Voltage: 26 V ac rms, 400 Hz
MPU(P3-60,56)2 Load: NLT 10 ka
Max common mode voltage: ±100 V
Max diff voltage: ±200 V

Heading Valid DPU(P2-118) Magnetic Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-118)1 Compass Heading valid: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-118)2 (MC-103) Heading invalid: 0 to +3.5 V de
Input resistance: NLT 10 kD

Revised 30 August 1993 1-19

 general information 523-0773941

Table 1-8. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Input Specifications (Cont).

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

9.1 Analog Attitude Heading (Cont)

DG Mode DPU(P1-95) Magnetic Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-135)1 Compass DG mode: +28 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-135)2 Slaved: 0 to +3.0 V dc

9.2 Digital Attitude/Heading

DPU(P2-7,11) Format: 2-wire Commercial Standard Digital Bus (CSDB)

I
Digital Attitude/ Attitude/Heading
Heading MPU(P1-7,11)1 System Data transfer rate: 50 kBd/s
A,B MPU(P3-7,11)2 (AHS-85) Words: See below.

WORDS HEX LABEL UPDATE RATE/S

PITCH RATE (body axis), ROLL RATE (body axis), YAW RATE 40 52
(body axis), DATA VALID, DG MODE, STRUT SWITCH, TEST,
SOURCE IDENT
LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION (body axis), LATERAL 41 52
ACCELERATION (body axis), NORMAL ACCELERATION (body
axis), DATA VALID, DG MODE, STRUT SWITCH, TEST,
SOURCE IDENT
ALONG HDG ACCELERATIONS, CROSS HDG 42 5.2
ACCELERATIONS, VERTICAL ACCELERATIONS, DATA VALID,
DG MODE, STRUT SWITCH, TEST, SOURCE IDENT
PITCH ATTITUDE, ROLL ATTITUDE, ATTITUDE VALID, 43 5.2
MAGNETIC HEADING, HEADING VALID, REV MODE, TEST,
SOURCE IDENT
MAGNETIC HEADING, ATTITUDE VALID, HEADING VALID, 47 5.2
LATITUDE, STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT, MODE 1,
DEGREES DIFF COMPASS CARD SLAVING, SOURCE IDENT
AHRS DIAGNOSTICS F3 5.2

Attitude/Heading, Refer to 12.0 of this table for strapping information.

I/O Straps 14 and 17

10.0 VERTICAL NAVIGATION

10.1 Analog Vertical Navigation

Vertical Deviation DPU(P2-4,3) Vertical Format: 2-wire, dc, polarity reversing

+Up, +Dn MPU(P1-4,3)1 Navigation Analog: ±1 mA max, 75 µA/dot, 2 dots full-scale

I VNAV Valid
MPU(P3-4,3)2

DPU(P2-113)
Indicator
(VNI-80A/80C)

Vertical
Zero: zero at beam center
Input resistance: NLT 10 k0

Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-113) Navigation Valid: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-113) Indicator Invalid: 0 to +3.0 V de
(VNI-80A/80C) Input resistance: NLT 10 k0

Revised 30 August 1993 1-20

 general information 523-0773941

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Input Specifications (Cont).

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

10.2 Digital Vertical Navigation

Vertical Deviation DPU(P2-8,12) Vertical NAV Format: 2-wire Commercial Standard Digital Bus (CSDB)
A,B MPU(P1-8,12)1 Indicator (VNI- Data transfer rate: 12.5 kBd/s
MPU(P3-8,12)2 80B/80D) Input resistance: NLT 12 ka
Words: See below.

WORDS HEX LABEL UPDATE RATE/S

PITCH CMD/VALID, VERT DEVIATION/VALID, VERT CLR, B0 10
VNAV STATE, FCS VNAV CAP, CAP ALERT, LRU IDENT,
DATA IDENT
DISTANCE TO ALT OR TRACK/VALIDS,TO OFFSET/VALID, B1 10
FCS VNAV SELECT, VNAV STATE CAP, TEST, LRU IDENT
DATA IDENT
SELECTED VERT ANGLE/VALID, COMPUTED VERT ANGLE/ B2 10
VALID, ANGLE MODE ARM, TEST, LRU IDENT, DATA IDENT
ALT AIMPOINT/VALID, VERT SPEED SELECT/VALID, VNAV B3 10
SCALE ENABLE, ELEV CORR, VS SEL MODE ARM TEST, LRU
IDENT, DATA IDENT

Vertical Navigation, Refer to 12.0 of this table for strapping information.

I/O Strap 18

11.0 LONG RANGE NAVIGATION (LNV) INPUT

11.1 Analog LNV

LNV Desired Course/ DPU(P2-47,48,52) LRN-85, FMS-90, Format: 3-wire synchro

Track MPU(P1-47,48,52)1 VLF/Omega or Analog: X to Y (11.8 V rms) x (sine of heading angle)
=

X,Y,Z MPU(P3-47,48,52)2 INS Zero: at zero desired course/track or DA + TKE

Input resistance: NLT 10 ka
Max common mode voltage: ±10 V
Max diff voltage: ±20 V
Freq/phase: must be phase-locked to 400-Hz power
Phasing: X to Y voltage shall be out of phase with 400-Hz
power when in a right angle deviation condition.

LNV Bearing to DPU(P2-23,27,31) LRN-85, FMS-90, Format: 3-wire synchro

Waypoint MPU(P1-23,27,31)1 VLF/Omega or Analog: X to Y (11.8 V rms) × (sine of bearing angle)
=

X,Y,Z MPU(P3-23,27,31)2 INS Zero: zero at zero bearing (heading related)

Input resistance: NLT 10 ka
Max common mode voltage: ±10 V
Max diff voltage: ±20 V
Freq/phase: must be phase-locked to 400-Hz power
Phasing: X to Y voltage shall be out of phase with 400-Hz
power when in a right bearing deviation condition.

Revised 30 August 1998 1-21

 general inforrnation 523-0773941

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Input Specifications (Cont).

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

11.1 Analog LNV (Cont)

LNV Crosstrack DPU(P2-150,154) LRN-85, FMS-90, Format: 2-wire, dc, polarity reversing
Deviation MPU(P1-150,154)1 VLF/Omega or Analog: ±1 mA max, 75 µA/dot, 2 dots full-scale
I +RT,+LT MPU(P3-150,154)2 INS Zero: zero at zero deviation
Input resistance: NLT 1 ka
Max common mode voltage: ±200 V
Max diff current: ±10 mA

LNV To/From DPU(P2-149,153) LRN-85, FMS-90, Format: 2-wire, dc, polarity reversing
+TO,+FROM MPU(P1-149,153)1 VLF/Omega or Analog: To: NLT +10 mV
(Selectable strap 29) MPU(P3-149,153)2 INS From: NMT -10 mV
Input resistance: 10 ka
Max common mode voltage: ±150 V
Max diff voltage: ±300 V

Remote Data MFD(P1-17, 25) LRN-85, FMS-90, Format: 2-wire, RS-422 serial bus
(Optional) (H,L) MFD(P1-32,40) VLF/Omega or Data rate: 22 500 bauds ±1%
MFD(P1-18,11) INS Data: alphanumeric character set
MFD(P1-41,33) Input impedance: 120 0 (nominal)

LNV Warn DPU(P2-157) LRN-85, FMS-90, Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-157)1 VLF/Omega or HSI warn valid: +18 to +31 V de
MPU(P3-157)2 INS HSI warn invalid: 0 to +3.5 V dc
Input resistance: NLT 10 ka

LNV Reference DPU(P2-39,43) LRN-85, FMS-90, Format: 2-wire, ac

H,C MPU(P1-39,43)1 VLF/Omega or Voltage: 26 V ac, 400 Hz
MPU(P3-39,43)2 INS Load: NLT 20 ka
Max common mode voltage: ±100 V
Max diff voltage: ±200 V

LNV Data LRN-85, FMS-90, Format: 6-wire, ARINC 561

VLF/Omega or Words: See below.
INS
Data H,L DPU(P2-24,28)
MPU(P1-24,28)1
MPU(P3-24,28)2

Clk H,L DPU(P2-32,36)

MPU(P1-32,36)1
MPU(P3-32,36)2

Sync H,L DPU(P2-40,44)

MPU(P1-40,44)1
MPU(P3-40,44)2

Revised 30 August 1998 1-22

 general information 523-0773941

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Input Specifications (Cont).

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

11.1 Analog LNV (Cont)

WORDS OCTAL LABEL UPDATE RATE/S

DISTANCE 001 4
TIME TO GO 002 4
CROSS DISTANCE 003 4
GROUND SPEED 012 4
WIND VELOCITY 015 1/(10 s)
WIND DIRECTION 016 1/(10 s)
MAGNETIC VARIATION 031 1/(10 s)
STATUS WORD 110 4
BEARING TO WAYPOINT 115 4
DISTANCE TO NTH WAYPOINT 156 1/(10 s)
*4
DESIRED COURSE TO NTH WAYPOINT 157
*4/see
to the TO waypoint, 1/(10) sec for the rest.

11.2 Digital LNV

LNV Data LRN-85, FMS-90, Format: 6-wire, ARINC 561

VLF/Omega or Words: See below.
INS
Data H,L DPU(P2-24,28)
MPU(P1-24,28)1
MPU(P3-24,28)2

Clk H,L DPU(P2-32,36)

MPU(P1-32,36)1
MPU(P3-32,36)2

Sync H,L DPU(P2-40,44)

MPU(P1-40,44)1
MPU(P3-40,44)2

WORDS OCTAL LABEL UPDATE RATE/S

DISTANCE 001 4
TIME TO GO 002 4
CROSS DISTANCE 003 4
GROUND SPEED 012 4
WIND VELOCITY 015 1/(10 s)
WIND DIRECTION 016 1/(10 s)
MAGNETIC VARIATION 031 1/(10 s)
STATUSWORD 110 4
BEARING TO WAYPOINT 115 4
VERTICAL DEVIATION 117 4
BANK COMMAND 121 10
DISPLAY DEVIATION 155 4
DISTANCE TO NTH WAYPOINT 156 1/(10 s)
*4
DESIRED COURSE TO NTH WAYPOINT 157
*4/see
to the TO waypoint, 1/(10 s) for the rest.

LNV I/O Straps 4; 5 Refer to 12.0 in this table for strapping information.
and 6; 16; and 17

Revised 30 August 1993 1-23

 general information 523-0773941

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B /12) and EFIS-86B /12) Input Specifications (Cont).

STRAP INPUTS UNIT PIN NUMBER STRAP NUMBER SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

12.0 DPU/MPU-85G/86G STRAPPING DEFINITIONS

Note
These inputs are typically hard-wired. Strap 18 is an input from the VNI-80 and strap 19 (also 12, 15, and 22) is an input
from an external switch. All display processor units must be strapped to sources according to strap 11 location
definitions.

Autopilot Type DPU(P2-61,115,121) 1 2 3

MPU(P2-1,5,9)1 0 0 0 FCS-80 dual FD
MPU(P2-4,8,12)2 1 0 0 Sperry A, (G III) FCS-A dual FD
0 1 0 Sperry B, (citation) FCS-B
1 1 0 APS-86 (dual FD)
0 0 1 APS-65
1 0 1 FCS-80 single FD
0 1 1 Sperry A, FCS-A single FD
1 1 1 APS-85 (single FD)

NAV Data Ref DPU(P2-123) 4

MPU(P2-13)1 0 Mag hdg ref for nav data
MPU(P2-16)2 1 True hdg ref for nav data

LNV Port Ann DPU(P2-128,132) 5 6

MPU(P2-53,57)1 0 0 INS annunciation select
MPU(P2-56,60)2 0 1 LRN annunciation select
1 0 LNV annunciation select
1 1 VLF annunciation select

Radio Alt Type DPU(P2-133,134) _7 8

MPU(P2-61,65)1 0 0 ALT-50 (0 to 2000 feet)
MPU(P2-64,68)2 1 0 ALT-55 (0 to 2500 feet)
0 1 AL-101 (0 to 2500 feet)
1 1 Undefined

X-Side DTA Flag DPU(P2-135) 9

Display MPU(P2-69)1 0 2-tube system (inhibits flag)
MPU(P2-72)2 1 3, 4, and 5-tube system (normal)

VOR Port DPU(P2-136,116) 10 24

MPU(P2-73,130)1 0 0 TCN/LOC (TCN enabled and annunciated
MPU(P2-76,131)2 0 1 VOR/MLS (MLS enabled and annunciated)
1 0 RNV/LOC (RNV enabled and annunciated)
1 1 VOR/LOC (VOR enabled and annunciated)

DPU Side DPU(P2-140) 11 DPU use only

0 Left DPU (left side I/O annunciated)
1 Right DPU (right side I/O annunciated)
Note

0 = Ground
1 = Open

Revised 80 August 1998 1-24

 general inforrnation 523-0773941

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Input Specifications (Cont).

STRAP INPUTS UNIT PIN NUMBER STRAP NUMBER SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

12.0 DPU/MPU-85G/86G STRAPPING DEFINITIONS (Cont)

Comparator Reset DPU(P2-141) E

MPU(P2-81) 0 Cancel/inhibit (gnd to reset or inhibit compare function; MPU:
left only)
1 Enable

Speed Deviation DPU(P2-142,159) 13 23

MPU(P2-85,126)1 0 0 Inhibit scale
MPU(P2-88,127)2 0 1 Ref airspeed enabled and annunciated
1 0 AOA enabled and annunciated
1 1 Analog fast/slow enabled and annunciated

Attitude/Heading DPU(P2-145) 14
MPU(P2-89)1 0 Gyro (3-wire synchro I/O)
MPU(P2-92)2 1 AHRS (digital bus)

ADF Type DPU(P2-146) 15

MPU(P2-93)1 0 De Bearing (de sin/cos)
MPU(P2-96)2 1 Ac synchro

LNV Synchro DPU(P2-147) 16

MPU(P2-97)1 0 Desired track (DTK)
MPU(P2-100)2 1 Track angle error + drift angle

Heading DPU(P2-148) 17
MPU(P2-102)1 0 True heading sensor
MPU(P2-103)2 1 Mag heading sensor

VNAV On/Off DPU(P2-151) 18

MPU(P2-106)1 0 VNAV on (display VNAV deviation)
MPU(P2-107)2 1 VNAV off (blank VNAV deviation)

Reversionary Mode DPU(P2-152) 19

MPU(P2-110)1 0 No change in format
MPU(P2-111)2 1 Composite format

Command Bars DPU(P2-155) 20

MPU(P2-114)1 0 Cross-pointer
MPU(P2-115)2 1 V-bars

LIN Deviation DPU(P2-156) 21

MPU(P2-118)1 0 Inhibit VOR (angular devn for VOR)
MPU(P2-119)2 1 Enable VOR (linear devn if VOR and DME)
(normally inhibited)

Master Warn Reset DPU(P2-158) 22

MPU(P2-122) 0 Cancel/inhibit (gnd to reset or inhibit)
1 Enable (open for normal comparator function)
Note

0 = Ground
1 = Open

Revised 30 August 1993 1-25

 general information 523-077394 i

Table 1-8. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Input Spec¢ications (Cont).

STRAP INPUTS UNIT PIN NUMBER STRAP NUMBER SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

12.0 DPU/MPU-85G/86G STRAPPING DEFINITIONS (Cont)

Attitude Source DPU(P1-103) 25

MPU(P2-14)1 0 Use cross-side attitude
MPU(P3-83)2 1 Use on-side attitude

Heading Source DPU(P1-107) 26

MPU(P2-3)1 0 Use cross-side heading
MPU(P3-82)2 1 Use on-side heading

Air Data/Trend DPU(P1-111) 27

Vector Enable MPU(P2-7)1 0 Disable air data/trend vector
MPU(P3-77)2 1 Enable air data/trend vector

Display Control Panel DPU(P1-135) 28

MPU(P2-11)1 0 Use cross-side display control panel
MPU(P3-79)2 1 Use on-side display control panel

Rising Runway DPU(P1-139) 29

MPU(P2-15)1 0 Enable rising runway
MPU(P3-78)2 1 Disable rising runway

Heading Select DPU(P1-99) 30

MPU(P1-134)1 0 Dual selected heading
MPU(P3-134)2 1 Single selected heading

LNV Data DPU(P2-105) 31

MPU(P1-105)1 0 All ARINC 561 data
MPU(P3-105)2 1 ARINC 561 data + analog + discretes
Note

0 =
ground
1 = open

12.1 DPU-MPU I/O Strap Pin Numbers

MPU MPU
I/O DPU LEFT PIN RIGHT PIN
STRAP NO PIN NO NUMBER NUMBER
1 P2-61 P2-1 P2-4
2 P2-115 P2-5 P2-8
3 P2-121 P2-9 P2-12
4 P2-123 P2-13 P2-16
5 P2-128 P2-53 P2-56
6 P2-132 P2-57 P2-60
7 P2-133 P2-61 P2-64
8 P2-134 P2-65 P2-68
9 P2-135 P2-69 P2-72
10 P2-136 P2-73 P2-76
11 P2-140 -

12 P2-141 P2-81 -

Revised 30 August 1993 1-26

 general information 523-0773941

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Input Spec(fications (Cont).

STRAP INPUTS UNIT PIN NUMBER STRAP NUMBER SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

12.1 DPU-MPU I/O Strap Pin Numbers (Cont)

MPU MPU
I/O DPU LEFT PIN RIGHT PIN
STRAP NO PIN NO NUMBER NUMBER
13 P2-142 P2-85 P2-88
14 P2-145 P2-89 P2-92
15 P2-146 P2-93 P2-96
16 P2-147 P2-97 P2-100
17 P2-148 P2-102 P2-103
18 P2-151 P2-106 P2-107
19 P2-152 P2-110 P2-111
20 P2-155 P2-114 P2-115
21 P2-156 P2-118 P2-119
22 P2-158 P2-122
23 P2-159 P2-126 P2-127
24 P2-116 P2-130 P2-131
25 P1-103 P2-14 P3-83
26 P1-107 P2-3 P3-82
27 P1-111 P2-7 P3-77
28 P1-135 P2-11 P3-79
29 P1-139 P2-15 P3-78
30 P1-99 P1-134 P3-134
31 P2-105 P1-105 P3-105

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

13.0 DPU/MPU-85G/86G PROCESSOR STRAP OR SWITCH DEFINITIONS

Processor Strap No 1 DPU(P1-91) *Ext Switch Ground strap = test mode

MPU(P2-2) Open normal
= operation

Drive Transfer DPU(P1-98) *Ext Switch Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-109)1 Drive normal NLT 100 ka (open)
=

MPU(P3-109)2 Drive transfer NMT +3 V de (gnd)

=

DCP(P2-42)
DSP(P2-42)

Composite/Off DPU(P2-125) *Ext Switch Format: 1-wire discrete

MP(P1-125)1 Normal operation NLT 100 ka (open)
=

MPU(P3-125)2 EADI composite/EHSI off NMT +3 V de = (gnd)

Off/Composite DPU(P2-129) *Ext Switch Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-129)1 Normal operation NLT 100 ka (open)
=

MPU(P3-129)2 EADI off/EHSI composite NMT +3 V de

= (gnd)

CAT II Request DCP(P2-43) *Ext Switch Format: 1-wire discrete

I DSP(P2-9) CAT II request: gnd (NMT +3.0 V de)

No request: open (NLT 100 ka)

*These inputs are switched externally on an individual drive unit basis or together on a same side basis.

Revised 30 August 1993 1-27

 general information 523-0773941

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Input Specifications (Cont).

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

14.0 SENSOR STRAP OPTIONS

14.1 DSP-85A Sensor Straps

Sensor strapping on the DSP-85A is used to define navigation input configurations. For example, if properly strapped, all aircraft
navigation sensors can be displayed by either EHSI. Each DSP-85A is strapped independently. These inputs are usually hard-
wired to DSP-85A pins P2-39 and P2-40.
DSP DSP
STRAP NO PIN NO FUNCTION DEFINITION
1 P2-11 VOR COURSE
0 #1 VOR CRS Course knob selects side 1 or
1 #2 VOR CRS side 2 VOR
2 P2-12 WPT BEARING
0 #1 WPT BRG Bearing knob selects side 1 or
1 #2 WPT BRG side 2 LNV
3 P2-13 ADF BEARING
0 #1 ADF BRG Bearing knob selects side 1 or
1 #2 ADF BRG side 2 ADF
4 P2-7 LNV COURSE
0 #1 LNV CRS Course knob selects side 1 or
1 #2 LNV CRS side 2 LNV

5 P2-8 2ND CRS SELECT

0 LNV2 excluded Determines inclusion of LNV2 in
1 LNV2 included second CRS selection
6 P2-10 TEST MODE SELECT
0 Test mode DSP test mode
1 Normal operation

I
14.2 DCP-85E/G Sensor Straps

Sensor strapping the DCP-85E/G is used to define navigation input configurations.

on For example, if properly strapped, all
aircraft navigation sensors can be displayed by either EHSI. Each DCP-85E/G is strapped independently. These inputs are usually
hard-wired to DCP-85E/G pins P1-9, 12, 15, 25, 28, and 31.
DCP DCP
STRAP NO PIN NO DEFINITION
1 P1-50 VOR 1 Course Select Enable
2 P1-49 VOR 2 Course Select Enable
3 P1-29 Reserved
4 P1-30 Reserved
5 P1-17 LRN 1 Course Select Enable
6 P1-16 LRN 2 Course Select Enable
7 P1-32 VOR 1 Bearing Pointer Enable
8 P1-33 VOR 2 Bearing Pointer Enable
9 P1-10 ADF 1 Bearing Pointer Enable
10 P1-11 ADF 2 Bearing Pointer Enable
11 P1-13 LRN 1 Bearing Pointer Enable
12 P1-14 LRN 2 Bearing Pointer Enable
13 P1-26 Reserved
14 P1-27 Reserved
15 P1-46 Reserved
16 P1-45 Reserved

Revised 30 August 1993 1-28

 general inforrnation 523-077394 i

Table 1-4. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Output Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER DESTINATION SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

1.0 ANNUNCIATION OUTPUTS

Cat II Amber DPU(P2-30) Ext Annunciator Format: 1-wire discrete

I MPU(P2-160)1
MPU(P3-90)2
Amber on: NMT +3 V de (gnd)
Amber off: NLT 100 kG (open)
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

Cat II Green DPU(P2-49) Ext Annunciator Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-142)1 Green on: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
MPU(P3-142)2 Green off: NLT 100 kG (open)
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

Cat II Comparator DPU(P2-29) Ext Annunciator Format: 1-wire discrete

Warn MPU(P1-141)1 Warn on: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
MPU(P3-141)2 Warn off: NLT 100 kG (open)
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

Master Warn DPU(P2-35) Ext Annunciator Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-35) Master warn on: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
Master warn off: NLT 100 kD (open)
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

Attitude Comparator DPU(P2-77) Ext Annunciator Format: 1-wire discrete

Warn MPU(P1-145)1 Warn on: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
MPU(P3-145)2 Warn off: NLT 100 kG (open)
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

Heading Comparator DPU(P2-65) Ext Annunciator Format: 1-wire discrete

Warn MPU(P1-146)1 Warn on: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
MPU(P3-146)2 Warn off: NLT 100 k0 (open)
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

Decision Height DPU(P2-139) Ext Annunciator Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P2-158)1 Annunciated: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
MPU(P3-86)2 Normal: NLT 100 kG (open)
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

Overtemperature DPU(P1-102) Ext Annunciator Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-110) Overtemperature: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
EFD(P1-g) Normal: NLT 100 kG (open)
MFD(P1-35) Trip point: 100 °C (for DPU)
135 °C (for MPU)
95 °C (for EFD)
78 °C (for MFD)

Revised 30 August 1993 1-29

 general information 523-0773941

Table 1-4. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Output Specifications (Cont).

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER DESTINATION SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

2.0 OUTPUTS TO ANALOG FCS

VOR/LOC 1 Mode DPU(P1-60) Flight Guidance Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-115)1 Computer VOR/LOC 1 is the selected primary sensor. +28 V de when VOR
MPU(P3-115)2 1 or LOC 1 has been selected as the active NAV sensor. Open
at all other times.
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

VOR/LOC 2 Mode DPU(P1-78) Flight Guidance Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-121)1 Computer VOR/LOC 2 is the selected primary sensor. +28 V de when VOR
MPU(P3-121)2 2 or LOC 2 has been selected as the active NAV sensor. Open
at all other times.
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

Lateral Deviation DPU(P2-69,73) Flight Guidance "ANG" lat devn is a reversible dc analog signal which is
+RT,+LT MPU(P1-69,73)1 Computer proportional to the angular displacement of the aircraft from
MPU(P3-69,73)2 selected VOR or localizer course. "LIN" lat devn is proportional
to the lateral displacement of the aircraft from the selected
VOR course, calculated using the above angular displacement
and distance to the station or waypoint. For long-range
navigation systems, this signal is crosstrack deviation and is
proportional to the lateral displacement of the aircraft from
the desired track.

LNV 1 Mode DPU(P1-118) Flight Guidance Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-147)1 Computer Long-range navigation sensor 1 is the active selected primary
MPU(P3-147)2 sensor. +28 V dc when LNV 1 has been selected as the active
NAV source. Open at all other times.
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

LNV 2 Mode DPU(P1-109) Flight Guidance Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-158)1 Computer Long-range navigation sensor 2 is the active selected primary
MPU(P3-158)2 sensor. +28 V dc when LNV 2 has been selected as the active
NAV source. Open at all other times.
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

FCS Clear DPU(P1-113) Flight Guidance A +28-V pulse for 200 ±20 ms when active. This pulse is used to
MPU(P1-144)1 Computer clearthe FCS when: (A)(B)(C)(D) + (C)(B) + (D)(B) where:
MPU(P3-144)2 A (hdg + nav arm)
=

B (mode chg + tru/mag chg)

=

C APS-85/86
=

D bus or annunciation valid

=

LIN Dev DPU(P1-20) Flight Guidance Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-29)1 Computer Outputs for FCS use. Deviation is linear in LNV or VOR with
MPU(P3-29)2 DME present and I/O strap 21 is open (NLT 100 k0). +28 V dc
when the signal is linear; open when it is angular.
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

NAV Flag DPU(P1-24) Flight Guidance Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-30)1 Computer Outputs the NAV flag of the active sensor selected. +28 V dc
MPU(P3-30)2 when the flag being received from the active NAV source is
valid. Open at all other times including no course present.
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

Revised 30 August 1993 1-30

 general information 523-0773941

Table 1-4. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Output Specg'ications (Cont).

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER DESTINATION SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

2.0 OUTPUTS TO ANALOG FCS (Cont)

TO/FROM DPU(P2-126,130) Flight Guidance Outputs TO/FROM status of the active sensor selected. The
+TO,+FROM MPU(P1-126,130)1 Computer output is +0.5 V dc for +TO and V dc for +FROM.-0.5

MPU(P3-126,130)2

BACK LOC DPU(P2-127) Flight Guidance Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-127)1 Computer BACK LOC: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-127)2 Not BACK LOC: 0 to +3.0 V dc
Outputs a BACK LOC indication when a selected course is
sensed to be 105° greater than aircraft heading, when there is
a localizer frequency ground input, and when active selected
navigation sensor is VOR/LOC. +28 V dc during back localizer
and open at all other times.

LOC Tuned DPU(P2-131) Flight Guidance Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-131)1 Computer Outputs a LOC tuned indication based on a LOC frequency
MPU(P3-131)2 ground input and VOR/LOC being selected on the DCP/DSP as
the primary sensor output. A ground indicates LOC is tuned
and an open indicates no LOC is tuned.
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

Course Datum Error DPU(P2-25,26) Flight Guidance Signal: 11.8 V ac max 400 Hz
H,L MPU(P1-25,26)1 Computer Analog: 30SING, where 0 is the angle between lubber line and
MPU(P3-25,26)2 course.
Phase: In phase with reference if course line is left of lubber
line.
A reversible-phase 400-Hz (NMT 11.8 V ac) signal which is
proportional to the difference between the aircraft's heading
(eg, lubber line on the EHSI display) and the selected course.

15 V-- 15.47 V MAX 15 V-- 15.47 V MAX

I
*

10 V-- 10 V-- * ±105 DEGREES

FOR BACK COURSE
5 V-- 5 V-
360° 180° 360°

90o 270° 90o 270°

-5 V-- -5 V--

-10 V-- -10 V--

*
I
-15 V-- -15 V--

400 Hz SQUARE WAVE PEAK AMPLITUDE 400 Hz SQUARE WAVE PEAK AMPLITUDE VS COURSE DATUM
VS COURSE DATUM ERROR. 270 mV PEAK/DEGREE. ERROR WITH LOC TUNED (BACK COURSE). 270 mV PEAK/DEGREE.
CGO-0508-03-AC-O CGO-0508-03-AC-O

Revised 30 August 1993 1-31

 general information 523-0773941

Table 1-4. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Output Specifications (Cont).

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER DESTINATION SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

2.0 OUTPUTS TO ANALOG FCS (Cont)

Heading Error DPU(P2-68,64) Flight Guidance Signal: 11.8 V ac max 400 Hz

H,L MPU(P1-68,64)1 Computer Analog: 30 SIN8, where 8 is the angle between the lubber line
MPU(P3-68,64)2 and heading bug.
Phase: In phase with reference if heading bug left of lubber
line.
A reversible-phase 400-Hz (NMT 11.8 V ae) signal which is
proportional to the difference between the aircraft's heading
(eg, lubber line on the EHSI display) and the selected heading.

15 V-- 15.47 V MAX

10 V- -

5V--
360°
iso
e I I I
Ill ll! 270°
90o
-5 V--

-10 V- -
-15 V--

400 Hz SQUARE WAVE PEAK AMPLITUDE

VS HEADING ERROR. 270 mV PEAK/DEGREE.
CCO-050B-03-AC-0

3.0 OUTPUTS TO DIGITAL FCS

Digital FCS DPU(P2-16,20) APS-85 Format: 2-wire Commercial Standard Digital Bus (CSDB)
A,B MPU(P1-16,20)1 (VNI-80B/80D) Data transfer rate: 12.5 kBd/s
MPU(P3-16,20)2 Words: See below.

WORDS HEX LABEL UPDATE RATE/S

EFIS STATUS, DRIVE TRANSFER LEFT, DRIVE TRANSFER CO 10
RIGHT, TEST, SOURCE IDENT, NAV DEV TYPE & SCALE
CODE (ACTIVE), NAV DEV TYPE & SCALE CODE (PRESEL),
LATERAL NAV PULSE CLEAR, GS DISPLAY ON, VNAV
DISPLAY ON, V-BAR OR XPTR, FD DISPLAY, MARKER
BEACON, VERTICAL NAV PULSE CLEAR
HEADING VALID, HEADING, ERROR VALID, MAG/TRUE, C1 10
SOURCE IDENT, HEADING (mag/true), HEADING ERROR
ACTIVE COURSE ERROR/VALID, PRE COURSE ERROR/ C2 10
VALID, SOURCE IDENT
RADIO ALTITUDE/VALID, RADIO ALTITUDE ON SCALE, C3 10
DECISION HEIGHT, RA TEST, SOURCE IDENT
LAT DEVIATION/VALID, VERT DEVIATION/VALID, C4 10
DEVIATION TYPE, BACK LOC, LOC FREQUENCY, SOURCE
IDENT
PRE LAT DEVIATION/VALID, PRE VERT DEVIATION/VALID, C5 10
DEVIATION TYPE, BACK LOC, LOC FREQUENCY, SOURCE
IDENT

Revised 30 August 1993 1-32

 general information 523-0773941

Table 1-4. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Output Specifications (Cont).

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER DESTINATION SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

3.0 OUTPUTS TO DIGITAL FCS (Cont)

WORDS HEX LABEL UPDATE RATE/S

ROLL COMMANDS/VALID, PTCH COMMANDS/VALID, C6 10
COMMAND ROLL, AVAIL PITCH, REM CAP, REM ARM,
SOURCE IDENT
LOC DEVIATION/VALID, GS DEVIATION/VALID, SOURCE C7 10
IDENT
FCS DISTANCE/VALID, PRE FCS DISTANCE/VALID, C8 10
ELEVATION CORRECTION, DME HOLD (active & pre), SOURCE
IDENT
WIND VELOCITY, WIND DIRECTION, WIND VALID, WIND C9 10
AVAILABLE, SOURCE IDENT
SELECTED COURSE/VALID, PRESEL COURSE/VALID, TO/ CA 10
FROM (active), TO/FROM (pre), SOURCE IDENT
PITCH COMMANDS VNI/VALID, VNI DEVIATION/VALID, B0 10
VNAV STATE, FCS VNAV CAP, VNAV ENABLE, SOURCE
IDENT
DPU DIAGNOSTICS F3 10

Joystick Data MPU(P1-151,155)1 FMS-90, INS, Format: 2-wire Commercial Standard Digital Bus (CSDB)
A,B MPU(P3-151,155)2 LNV Data transfer rate: 12.5 kBd/s
Words: See below.

WORDS HEX LABEL UPDATE RATE

JOYSTICK CURSOR POSITION CB *

**
MFD KEYSWITCH STATUS CC
SELECTED HEADING CD 10
TAT/PRESEL ALTITUDE (from ADC) A7 10
MPU DIAGNOSTICS F3 10
*Label CB is transmitted 20 times at each push of the ENTER key on the MFD.
**Sent at 10 times/second as long as any key is pressed.

Radio Altitude Test DPU(P2-122) Radio Altimeter Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-122) Test: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
MPU(P30122)2 Normal: NLT 100 k0 (open)

Revised 30 August 1993 1-33

 general information 523-0773941

1.4 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED BUT NOT in the MFD. The RDP-300 is normally used before
SUPPLIED and during preflight; it is rarely used during flight.
The unit should be stored (not mounted) in a location
Refer to table 1-5 for a list of the necessary equip- accessible to the flight crew.
ment categories and representative equipment types
that interface with the DPU and MPU units. The 1.4.1.3 Checklist Unit (CEU-85/85A)
Entry
letter "I" indicates that, in general, the representa-
.

tive equipment shall provide data to EFIS. The letter The hand-held CEU-85 or CEU-85A is used to enter
"O" indicates that EFIS provides outputs to the up to 100 pages of combined checklist pages and
external equipment.
emergency page data into the MFD instead of enter-
The EFIS system accepts weather radar data from a ing it manually using the RDP-300. The CEU-85 or
CEU-85A plugs into a jack on the front of the MFD-
Collins compatible Weather Radar rt unit. The
WXP-85C/85D or WXP-850A/850B Weather Radar 85A Multifunction Display where it receives power
Panel provides the pilot interface and control signals and is normally used before preflight, rarely during
to the rt similar to the control signals provided by flight. The checklist is loaded into the CEU-85 from
the weather radar indicator normally used by the an Apple* II Plus/IIe/IIe Enhanced computer that
WXT-250B. When the TWR-850 is used (with the contains a Collins Pro Line II Interface Card and
WXP-850A/850B Weather Radar Panel), advanced checklist processing disk software.
features displayed on EFIS include turbulence detec-
tion, ground clutter suppression, autotilt, stabiliza Unlike the CEU-85, the CEU-85A is designed to oper-
tion, slave mode, and gain level annunciation. ate with an IBM PC or compatible computer by con-
necting directly to the RS 232 serial port of the
1.4.1 Purpose computer using the CEU cable. A checklist is loaded
of Equipment
into the CEU-85A by an IBM PC or compatible com-
(FMM-85) puter using the software stored on the Checklist Edi-
1.4.1.1 Fan Monitor Module
tor Disk.
The FMM-85 Fan Monitor Module mounts directly
onto any one of the four fan frame sides and is used 1.4.2 Related EFIS Equipment Specifications
to monitor fan motor speed. If fan motor speed falls
below a preset level, the FMM-85 senses this change Refer to table 1-6 for a list of the related EFIS equip-
and provides a ground to energize an installer-fur- ment specifications that include environmental,
nished, instrument-panel mounted "LOW FAN physical size, weight, mounting, cooling, and input
SPEED" annunciator. power requirements. Refer to table 1-7 for a list of
related EFIS publications. Table 1-8 lists abbrevia-
1.4.1.2 Remote Data Programmer (RDP-300) tions, acronyms, and mnemonics that are used in the
publications to describe the EFIS system.
The RDP-300 is a handheld keyboard that plugs into
a jack on the front face of the MFD-85A Multifune-
tion Display, where it receives power and is used to *Apple is the registered trademark of Apple Com-
enter or change checklist page and emergency data puter, Inc.

Table 1-5. Equipment Required But Not Supplied.

EQUIPMENT CATEGORIES DPU MPU PRIMARY

I/O
(REPRESENTATIVE TYPE) PORTS PORTS DATA FORMAT

Radio altimeter
(ALT-50/55 AL-101) I 1 2 Dc analog

Air data
(ADS-80/82) I 1 2 Serial digital Manchester bus

NAV receiver
(VIR-30A/32) I 1 2 Ac sin/cos

Revised 30 August 1993 1-34

 general information 523-0773941

Table 1-5. Equipment Required But Not Supplied (Cont).

EQUIPMENT CATEGORIES DPU MPU PRIMARY

I/O
(REPRESENTATIVE TYPE) PORTS PORTS DATA FORMAT

DME
(DME-40/42) I 1 2 ARINC 6-wire

ADF
(ADF-60A/B) I 1 2 De sin/cos or 3-wire synchro

Attitude
(332D-11) I 1 2 3-wire synchro
(AHS-85) I 1 2 CSDB
Heading
(MC-103/MCS-65) I 1 2 3-wire synchro
(AHS-85) I 1 2 CSDB

Flight control
(FCS-80) I/O 1 2 Ac/de analog, discrete
(FCS-85) I/O 1 2 CSDB, discrete
(FCS-65) I/O 1 2 Ac/de analog, discrete, CSDB
Lateral NAV
(VLF/Omega or INS) I 1 2 Analog, discrete, ARINC 561 digital 6-wire,
CSDB or all 6-wire digital and CSDB
(LRN) I/O 2 4 Analog, discrete, ARINC 561 digital 6-wire,
CSDB or all 6-wire digital and CSDB

RNAV

(RNAV) I Shared with Shared with Analog + discrete + ARINC 561 digital 6-
LRN LRN wire or all 6-wire
receivers receivers

(RNAV) I Shared with Shared with ARINC 429

LRN LRN
receivers receivers

Vertical NAV
(VNI-80A/C) I 1 2 Dc analog
(VNI-80B/D) I/O 1 2 CSDB
TACAN
(BRG-40 and DME-40A) I Shared with Shared with Ac sin/cos and 6-wire
NAV/DME NAV/DME
revrs revrs

Angle of attack I 1 2 De analog

MLS I Shared with Shared with De analog
NAV/DME NAV/DME
revrs revrs

Long acceleration
(LAC-80) I 0 1 De analog
Radar
WXP-85C/85D I 1 1 CSDB, digital data
-001/-002/-021/-022)

WXP-840A/840B I 1 1 CSDB
(-001, -002, -003, -004)

WXP-850A/850B I 1 1 CSDB
(-001, -002, -003, -004)

Revised 30 August 1993 1-35

 general information 523-0773941

Table 1-6. Related EFIS Equipment Specifications.

CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION

Environmental Listed below are the DO-160A categories to which the related EFIS equipment is tested.
CEU-85/85A None, not used during aircraft flight.
FMM-85 (not TSO'ed) D2/B/JY/XXXXXXZ/BZ/AZZ
RDP-300 None, not used during aircraft flight.
Temperature and Altitude Categories A2El and D2.

Temperature

Operating Category D2: -55

to +70
°C (-67 to +158 °F)

Storage Category D2: -55

to +85
°C (-67 to +185 °F)

Altitude Category D2. Certified for installation in a nonpressurized and noncontrolled

temperature location in an aircraft that is operated at altitudes up to 15200 m (50 000
ft) msl.

Humidity Category B. 95% at +65

°C for 10 days.

Vibration Category J. Certified for uselage mounting in a fixed-wing turbojet or turbofan aircraft.

Category Y. Certified for uselage mounting in a piston or turbojet rotary wing aircraft.

Explosionproofness Category X. Certified for installation in a location where the probability of an explosive
atmosphere existing is so low that it can be disregarded.

Waterproofness Category X. Certified for installation in locations not subject to falling water (including
condensation), rain water, or sprayed water.

Fluid susceptibility Category X. Certified for installation in locations not exposed to fluid contamination
from fuel, hydraulic fluids, oil, solvent, etc.

Sand and dust Category X. Certified for installation in a location not subject to blowing sand and dust.

Fungus resistance Category X. Fungus resistance test not performed.

Salt spray Category X. Salt spray test not performed.

Magnetic effect Category Z. Unit causes a 1-degree deflection of an uncompensated compass at a

distance less than 0.3 m (1.0 ft).

Power input Category B. Certified for use on aircraft electrical systems where primary power is from
engine-driven alternator/rectifiers or dc generator where a significant capacity battery
is floating on the dc bus at all times.

Category Z. Certified for use on aircraft electrical systems not applicable to any other
category. For example, a dc system from a variable range generator where a small
capacity or no battery is floating on the dc bus.

Voltage spikes Category A. Certified for installation in systems where a high degree of voltage spike
protectionis required.

Audio frequency Category Z. Certified for use on aircraft electrical systems not applicable to any other
susceptibility category. For example, a dc system from a variable range generator where a small
capacity or no battery is floating on the dc bus.

Electromagnetic compatibility Category A. Certified for operation in systems where interference-free operation is
desired.

Category Z. Certified for operation in systems where interference-free operation is

required.

Revised 30 August 1993 1-36

 general information 523-0773941

Table 1-6. Related EFIS Equipment Specifications (Cont).

CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION

Physical
Weight (approx)
CEU-85/85A 0.32 kg (0.70lb)
FMM-85 0.08 kg (0.18lb)
RDP-300 0.32 kg (0.70lb)
Size (reference)
CEU-85/85A 91.44 mm (3.60 in) wide × 28.44 mm (1.12 in) high x 146.05 mm (5.75 in) deep
FMM-85 37.3 mm (1.47 in) wide × 31.08 mm (1.225 in) high × 114.30 mm (4.500 in) deep
RDP-300 78.11 mm (4.075 in) wide × 116.21 mm (4.575 in) high × 32.89 mm (1.295 in) deep
Mounting
CEU-85/85A Not aircraft mounted; plugs into MFD-85A DATA jack.
FMM-85 Mounts directly onto any one of the four fan-frame sides.
RDP-300 Not aircraft mounted; plugs into MFD-85A DATA jack.
Power input
CEU-85/85A +5 V dc, 350 mA. Provided by MFD-85A DATA jack.
FMM-85 +28 V dc, 0.5A
RDP-300 +5 V de, 350 mA. Provided by MFD-85A DATA jack.

Table 1-7. Related Publications.

PUBLICATION COLLINS PART NUMBER

ADS-80 Air Data System Installation Manual 523-0767654

ADS-81/82 Air Data System Installation Manual 523-0772425

AHS-85 Attitude Heading System Instruction Book 523-0772305
APS-65 Autopilot/FGS-65 Flight Guidance System Instruction Book 523-0771862
APS-85 Autopilot System Instruction Book 523-0772076
CEU-85 Checklist Entry Unit Instruction Book 523-0774328
CEU-85A Checklist Entry Unit Instruction Book 523-0776406

Collins Installation Practices Manual 523-0775254

FCS-80( ) Flight Control System Instruction Book 523-0766515

FMM-85 Fan Monitor Module Instruction Book 523-0773893

FMS-90 Flight Management System Installation Manual 523-0771082
LRN-85 Long Range Navigation System Installation Manual 523-0770599

Pro Line II Comm/Nav/Pulse System Instruction Book 523-0772719

RDP-300 Remote Data Programmer Instruction Book 523-0770244

UMT-( ) Mount and Thinline II Connectors, Instruction Book 523-0772277

Revised 30 August 1993 1-37

 general information 523-077394 i

Table 1-8 Abbreviations, Acronyms, and Mnemonics.

TERM MEANING

ACCEL Acceleration
ACT Active
A/C Aircraft
ADA Air data adapter
ADC Air data computer
ADF Automatic direction finder or ADF receiver
ADI Attitude director indicator
ADS Air data system
AER Aileron/Elevator/Rudder
AHC Attitude heading computer
AHRS Attitude heading reference system
AHS Attitude heading system
ALT Altitude or radio altimeter
ALT SEL Altitude, preselect
ALTS Altitude select
ANG Angular
ANNUN Annunciation
AOA Angle of attack
AP Autopilot
APPR Approach
ARINC Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
ASCII American standard code for information interchange
ATC Air traffic control or automatic trim coupler
ATCRBS Air traffic control radar beacon system
ATT Attitude
B/C Back course (localizer)
BARO Barometric pressure
BCD Binary coded decimal
BNK Bank
BNR Binary
BRG Bearing
BRT Brightness (stroke intensity control)
CAP Capture
CAT Category
CCW Counter-clockwise
CEU Checklist entry unit
CLM Climb
CLR Clear
COM Communication
COMM Communication
CPN Collins part number
CRS Course
CRT Cathode ray tube
CSDB Commercial standard digital bus
CW Continuous wave or clockwise
DA Drift angle
DDM Difference in depth modulation
DEG Degree
DES Descend
DEV Deviation
DG Directional gyro
DH Decision height
DIR Direct
DIST Distance
DME Distance measuring equipment or DME transceiver
DME HLD DME hold
DMR Diagnostic/maintenance routines
DN Down

Revised 30 August 1993 1-38

 general information 523-0773941

Table 1-8 Abbreviations, Acronyms, and Mnemonics (Cont).

TERM MEANING

DP Display processor
DPU Display processor unit
DR Dead reckoning
DSABL Disable
DSP Display select panel
EADI Electronic attitude director indicator
EFD Electronic flight display
EFIS Electronic flight instrument system
EHSI Electronic horizontal situation indicator
EMG Emergency
EMI Electromagnetic interference
ENABL Enable
ETA Estimated time of arrival
ETE Estimated time en route
FAR Federal air regulation
FCC Flight control computer
FCP Flight control panel
FCS Flight control system
FD Flight director
FLT PLAN Flight plan
FMC Flight management computer
FMM Fan monitor module
FMS Flight management system
FR From
G Gain
GA Go-around
GCS Ground clutter suppression
GMT Greenwich mean time
GND Ground
GND CLTR SPRS Ground clutter suppression
GS Glideslope or ground speed
GSPD Ground speed
H Hold or high-speed profile
HDG Heading
HF High frequency
HIRF High intensity radiated fields
HLD Hold
I/O Input/output
IAS Indicated airspeed
ID Identification
ILS Instrument landing system
IM Inner marker
IMT Instrument mounting tray
IN HG Inches of mercury
INS Inertial navigation system
IRS Inertial reference system
ISA International standard atmosphere temperature
KBD/S Kilo Baud/second
KN Knots
L Left, number 1, or pilot side
LAT Latitude
LIN Linear
LNAV Long range navigator
LNV Long range navigator
LOC Localizer
LON Longitude
LRN Long-range navigation
LRU Line replaceable unit

Revised 30 August 1993 1-39

 general information 523-0773941

Table 1-8 Abbreviations, Acronyms, and Mnemonics (Cont).

TERM MEANING

M Mach
MAG Magnetic
MAGVAR Magnetic variation
MAN Manual
MAZ Microwave azimuth
MB Marker beacon or millibars
MDA Minimum decision altitude
MFD Multifunction display
MGP Microwave glidepath
MKR BCN Marker beacon
MLS Microwave landing system
MM Middle marker
MMO Mach, max operating
MPR Multiport random access memory
MSG Message
MUX Multiplexer
NA Not applicable
NAV Navigation
NCD No computed data
NDB Nondirectional beacon
NEG Negative
NLT Not less than
NMI Nautical miles
NMT Not more than
NOM Nominal
NORM Normal
OM Outer marker
PIT Pitch
PRE Preset or preselect
PRES POS Present position
PRI Primary
PTCH Pitch
PTR Pointer
R Right, number 2, or copilot side; rudder
RA Radio altitude
RAD Radial
RAM Random access memory
RCL Recall
RDP Remote data programmer
RDR Radar
REV Reversion
RMI Radio magnetic indicator
RMS Root mean square
RMT Remote
RNAV Area navigation
ROL Roll
RTA Weather radar receiver/transmitter/antenna
SAT Static air temperature
SEC Sector
SEL Select
SKP Skip
SMT Servo mounting tray
SPD Airspeed
STBY Standby
STD Standard
STIM Stimulate
SYNC Synchronize
T Tilt

Revised 80 August 1998 1-40

 general information 523-077394 i

Table 1-8 Abbreviations, Acronyms, and Mnemonics (Cont).

TERM MEANING

TAS True airspeed

TAT Total air temperature
TEMP Temperature
TGT Target
TRB Turbulence
TRK Track
TRUs True
TSO Technical standard order
TST Test
TTG Time to go
TTL Transistor-transistor logic
TTS Time to station
TURB Turbulence
UART Universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter
UMT Universal mounting tray
USTB Unstabilized
VIR VHF navigation receiver
VMO Airspeed, max operating
VNAV Vertical navigation
VNV Vertical navigation
VOR VHF omnirange
WPT Waypoint
WX Weather
WXP Weather radar panel
WXR Weather radar
XFR Transfer
XTRK Crosstrack

Revised 30 August 1993 1-41/(1-4ß blomk)

Collins EFIS-85B(2/12)
and EFIS-86B(2/12) Rockwell
Intemational
Electronic Flight
Instrument Systems installation
Collins General Aviation Division

Printed in USA e523-0773942-003118

3rd Edition, 30 August 1993

table of contents

Paragraph Page Paragraph Page

2.1 General....................... . ...............

2-1 2.7 Installation Procedures .....................
2-10

2-1 2.7.1 EFD-85/86( ) Used as an Electronic

2.2 Unpacking and Inspecting Equipment 2-10
Attitude Director Indicator (E ADI)
...

........

2.7.2 EFD-85/86( ) Used as an Electronic

2-1 Horizontal Situation Indicator (EHSI) 2-10
2.3 Preinstallation Check........................ .....

2.7.3 CHP-85D/86B Course Heading Panel....... 2-11

2.7.4 DCP-85E/G Display Control Panel .........
2-11
2.4 Special Instructions .........................
2-1 2.7.5 DSP-85A Display Select Panels .............
2-11
2.7.6 MFD-85 Multifunction Display ..............
2-11
2.7.7 Combined MFD-85A and WXP-85A/C or
2.5 Planning..................... ...............
2-1 WXP-850A Installation Using IMT-85
Mounting Tray------.......-.................. 2-12
2.5.1 Configurations
Installation ...... ..
2-2 2.7.8 DPU-85G/86G Display Processor Unit
2.5.2 Strapping Options....... ...
2-2 (DPU) and UMT-14/14A/14B Mount........ 2-13
2.5.3 Loading Considerations 2-2 2.7.9 MPU-85Gl86G Multifunction Processor
......................

2.5.4 Cooling Considerations....................... 2-2 Unit (MPU) and UMT-15/15A/15B Mount 2-13
2.5.5 Power Switching (Suggestions).............. 2-3 2.7.10 Mating Connector Kit (CPN 634-1020-001)
Assembly Instructions ...................... 2-14
2.7.11 FMM-85 Fan Monitor Module .............. 2-14
2.6 Cabling Instructions .........................
2-3
2.8 Postinstallation Testing..................... 2-15
2.6.1 General........................................ 2-3
2.6.2 Connector Contact Assembly and 2.8.1 Test Equipment ..............................
2-15
Installation ................... ...............
2-9 2.8.2 Power Requirements .........................
2-15
2.6.3 Interconnect Wiring Check ..................
2-10 2.8.3 Diagnostic Information ......................
2-15

NOTICE: This section replaces second edition dated 6 April 1989.

 List of Effective Pages *The asterisk indicates pages changed, added, or deleted by the current change.

Page No Issue Page No Issue Page No Issue

*Title.........................30 Aug 93 *2-64
Blank ..................30 Aug 93 *2-97
Added..................30 Aug 93
*List of Effective Pages .....30 Aug 93 *2-65..........................30
Aug 93 *2-98
Blank Added...........30 Aug 93
*2-1
thru 2-33................30 Aug 93 *2-66
Blank ..................30 Aug 93 *2-99
Added..................30 Aug 93
2-34 Blank ...................6 Apr 89 *2-67..........................30
Aug 93 *2-100
Blank Added..........30 Aug 93
*2-35..........................30
Aug 93 *2-68
Blank ..................30 Aug 93 *2-101
Added.................30 Aug 93
2-36 Blank ................... 6 Apr 89 *2-69..........................30
Aug 93 *2-102
Blank Added..........30 Aug 93
*2-37..........................30
Aug 93 *2-70
Blank ..................30 Aug 93 *2-103
Added.................30 Aug 93
2-38 Blank .................. 15 Sep 86 *2-71..........................30
Aug 93 *2-104
Blank Added..........30 Aug 93
*2-72 *2-105
*2-39..........................30
Aug 93 Blank ..................30 Aug 93 Added.................30 Aug 93
2-40 Blank ................... 6 Apr 89 *2-73..........................30
Aug 93 *2-106
Blank Added..........30 Aug 93
*2-74
*2-41..........................30
Aug 93 Blank ..................30 Aug 93 *2-107
Added.................30 Aug 93
2-42 Blank ................... 6 Apr 89 *2-75..........................30
Aug 93 *2-108
Blank Added..........30 Aug 93
*2-109
*2-43..........................30
Aug 93 *2-76
Blank ..................30 Aug 93 Added.................30 Aug 93
*2-44
Blank ..................30 Aug 93 *2-77..........................30
Aug 93 *2-110
Blank Added..........30 Aug 93
*2-45..........................30
Aug 93 *2-78
Blank ..................30 Aug 93 *2-111
thru 2-123 Added .....30 Aug 93
*2-79..........................30 *2-124
*2-46
Blank ..................30 Aug 93 Aug 93 Blank Added..........30 Aug 93
*2-47..........................30
Aug 93 *2-80
Blank ..................30 Aug 93 *2-125
thru 2-129 Added .....30 Aug 93
*2-48
Blank ..................30 Aug 93 *2-81..........................30
Aug 93 *2-130
Blank Added..........30 Aug 93
*2-49..........................30
Aug 93 *2-82
Blank ..................30 Aug 93 *2-131
thru 2-161 Added .....30 Aug 93
*2-162
*2-50
Blank ..................30 Aug 93 *2-83..........................30
Aug 93 Blank Added..........30 Aug 93
*2-51..........................30
Aug 93 *2-84
Blank ..................30 Aug 93 *2-163
thru 2-175 Added .....30 Aug 93
*2-52
Blank ..................30 Aug 93 *2-85..........................30
Aug 93 *2-176
Blank Added..........30 Aug 93
*2-53..........................30
Aug 93 *2-86
Blank ..................30 Aug 93
*2-54
Blank ..................30 Aug 93 *2-87..........................30
Aug 93
*2-88
*2-55..........................30
Aug 93 Blank ..................30 Aug 93
*2-56
Blank ..................30 Aug 93 *2-89..........................30
Aug 93
*2-57..........................30
Aug 93 *2-90
Blank ..................30 Aug 93
2-58 Blank ................... 6 Apr 89 *2-91..........................30
Aug 93
*2-59..........................30
Aug 93 2-92 Blank ................... 6 Apr 89
*2-60
Blank ..................30 Aug 93 *2-93
Added..................30 Aug 93
*2-61..........................30
Aug 93 *2-94
Blank Added...........30 Aug 93
*2-62
Blank ..................30 Aug 93 *2-95
Added..................30 Aug 93
*2-63..........................30
Aug 93 *2-96
Blank Added...........30 Aug 93

RETAIN THIS RECORD IN THE FRONT O MANUAL.

Re cord of Revisions ON RECEIPT OF REVIS ONS, INSERT RE"ISED PAGES IN THE MANUAL,
AND ENTE t DATE INS :RTED AND INITIALS.

REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER

NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED

1st Ed 15 Sep 86 None

2nd Ed 6 Apr 89 None

3rd Ed 30 Aug 93 SIL 1-90

 section
installation

2.1 GENERAL 2.4 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS

This section provides all information needed to The following instructions must be followed to
install the EFIS system. Installation data in this see- ensure properinstallation of the EFIS-85B/86B(2/
tion consists of preinstallation checks; special 12) Electronic Flight Instrument Systems.
cabling procedures and requirements; removal and
installation of the EFIS units; and system intercon- Caution
nect and schematic diagrams.
Improper operation may occur if the follow-
Note ing instructions are not followed.

a. The minimum wire size for power lines is #20

The information and instructions provided
AWG. #22 AWG wire can be used for all other
in this section are recommendations and do
lines.
not necessarily correspond with any actual
aircraft installation and wiring. This see-
Note
tion cannot be used in place of a supplemen-
tal type certificate (STC) or type certificate Aircraft approved wire must always be used
(TC)
and extra care must be used when selecting
any wire smaller than #22 AWG.
2.2 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING
EQUIPMENT b. Read all notes on drawings and interconnects and
the planning paragraph before installing any
Unpack the equipment carefully and make a careful units or cabling.
visual inspection of each unit for possible shipping c. All straps on the DPU-85G/86G, MPU-85G/86G,
damage. All claims for damage should be filed with DCP-85E/G and DSP-85A have specific return
the transportation company involved. If claims for pins on the rear connectors. Straps used must be
damage are to be filed, save the original shipping connected to the appropriate return pin to ensure
container and packing materials. If no damage can reliable operation.
be detected, replace packing materials in the ship- d. To protect the finish and appearance of equip-
ping container and save for future use, such as stor- ment during handling and installation, some
age or reshipment. units are shipped with a protective film/cover
over the front of the unit. This film must be
Caution removed prior to flight.

Do not store or place the EFD-85/86( ) or 2.5 PLANNING

MFD-85A on metal surfaces within the
proximity of a strong magnetic field Proper and careful planning prior to installation is
because the crt display can be altered. essential for reliable performance and easy mainte-
nance. The following list is a sample of the points to
be considered in planning an installation:
2.3 PREINSTALLATION CHECK
a. Single or dual installation -
isolation of the no.1
Before installing the equipment in the aircraft, per- system from no. 2 system may be required. Refer

I
form the acceptance test in the maintenance section
of this manual or connect units in a system mock-up
to verify proper operation.
to applicable FARs for specific requirements.
b. Installation location - adequate airflow for cool-
ing, good bonding to aircraft ground, ease of cable

Revised 30 August 1993 2-1

 installation 523-0773942

routing, room for single or dual mounting (piggy- 2.5.4 Cooling Considerations
back or side-by-side).
The EFD-85/86( MFD-85A, DPU-85G/86G, and
),
c. Installation configuration.
MPU-85G/86G require that forced-air cooling be
d. Compatibility with other equipment -
loading
provided. These units are capable of operation at the
considerations.
short-time elevated operating temperatures, as spec-
e. Cooling considerations.
ified in the environmental requirements, without
forced-air cooling. However, continuous operation at
2.5.1 Installation Configurations these levels is not considered normal.
The DSP-85A, DCP-85E/G, CHP-85D, and CHP-86B
The number of display tubes determines the installa¯ perform properly with convection cooling at ambient
tion configuration of the EFIS system. The typical 4¯ air temperatures up to +55 °C (+131°F). However, as
tube EFIS system consists of two EFD-85/86( ) with all electronic equipment, lower operating tem-
Electronic Flight Displays for the EADI and EHSI peratures extend equipment life. On the average,
function on each side and one DPU-85G/86G Display reducing the operating temperature by 15 to 20
°C
Processor Unit on each side providing the drive sig- (25 to 35 °F) doubles the mean time between failure
nals to the four EFD-85/86( ) Electronic Flight Dis- (MTBF).
plays. Control of the electronic flight displays is
provided by a DSP-85A Display Select Panel or DCP- Units tightly packed in the radio rack heat each
85E/G and CHP-85B on each side. The 5-tube system other through radiation, convection, and sometimes
adds the MFD-85A Multifunction Display and the by direct conduction. If space permits, separate the
MPU-85G/86G Multifunction Processor Unit. The units from each other to significantly improve relia-
EFIS system can be strapped to accept inputs from bility.
analog or digital aircraft sensors.
Even a single unit operates at a much higher temper-
ature in still air than in moving air. Fans or some
2.5.2 Strapping Options other means of moving the air around electronic
equipment are usually a worthwhile investment. If a
Refer to general information section table 1-3 for form of ram air cooling is installed, make certain
DPU-85G/86G, MPU-85G/86G, DCP-85E/G, and that rainwater cannot enter and be sprayed on the
DSP-85A rear connector strapping functions. equipment.

. It is required that the forced air-cooling system be

Cautton
operating whenever the EFIS equipment is ener-
gized. In addition, it is required that there be at least
All connector straps should be kept as short
one blower for each DPU, MPU, and MFD, and for
as possible, preferably under 75 mm (3 in).
each pair of EFD units in the EFIS system. If the
UMT-14A/15A Mount (or other ac-powered fans) or
Caution UMT-14B/15B Mount (or other de-powered fans) are
used on the system components, the installation
To provide reliable lightning protection,
should be designed to ensure that the equipment is
each strap is assigned a unique return pin
not energized unless the fans are also energized.
on the rear connector. Always strap to the
Ground operation of the system without the cooling
assigned return pin, never strap directly to
air should not be allowed.
ground.
When any maintenance activity is performed on the
2.5.3 Loading Considerations
EFIS system, the supporting cooling system should
be checked for proper operation.

Figures 2-30 through 2-37 are EFIS system schemat- 2.5.4.1 EFD Forced-Air Cooling Requirements
ics. These diagrams are prepared for all EFIS boxes.
They show all input and output pin numbers with a The EFD is enclosed in a housing which has cooling
schematic first or last stage to show loading. The air holes on the top, bottom, both sides, and rear
system schematics are included to aid installation surfaces. The unit mounting flange is attached to the
planning. outer surface of the instrument panel. Vertical

Revised 80 August 1998 2-2

 installation 523-0773942

mounting of the circuit cards results in a low resis- Uniformly distributed air flow of 2 pounds per min-
tance internal path for cooling air entering the bot- ute (approximately 30 cubic feet per minute) is
tom and sides and flowing over the components to required for each DPU and 2.6 pounds per minute
exit through the top surface. High dissipation com- (approximately 40 cubic feet per minute) is required
ponents are mounted on a finned heat sink located on for the MPU.
the left side of the unit as viewed from the cockpit.
Note
The preferred method of forced-air cooling of the
EFD is to provide a stream of air directed at the Refer to EFIS-85/86 SIL 1-83 for additional
bottom surfaces of the lower unit as the units are
and more detailed cooling requirements.
mounted one above the other in the instrument
This service information letter is available
panel. Alternately, the airstream may impinge at the
from Collins General Aviation Division of
lower left or right sides of the units. The tempera¯
Rockwell International.
ture of the forced air should be maintained as low as
possible and must never exceed the rated operating
(Suggestions)
.

2.5.5 Power Swetching

temperature of the equipment. The air velocity
should be between 100 and 200 feet per minute. The Although the EFIS system components are exten-
forced air acts to augment the natural convection sively protected from voltage transients on the +28-V
cooling and results in substantially reduced operat- de power inputs (it meets TSO environmental
ing temperatures. requirements), it is recommended that provisions be
included that allow the systems to be powered down
2.5.4.2 MFD Forced-Air Cooling Requirements during engine starts and during any other major air-
craft electrical system activity. Improvements in
The construction of the MFD is similar to the EFD.
reliability will be seen over systems that are not
A mounting tray attaches to the inner surface of the
powered down during transients.
instrument panel, and openings are provided in the
tray for cooling air. High dissipation components are
2.6 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS
mounted on a finned heat sink at the connector end
of the unit.
2.6.1 General
Forced-air cooling of the MFD is accomplished by
providing a stream of air directed at the perforated
Interconnect cables should be prepared in accor-
lower surface and finned heat sink. The temperature dance with the interconnect diagrams, figures 2.4,
of the forced air should be maintained as low as pos_ 2.5, and 2.6. The associated equipment or system
sible and must never exceed the rated operating tem- installation manuals show the corresponding con-
perature of the equipment. The air velocity should be nections to the equipment. Since this interconnect
between 100 and 200 feet per minute. The forced air represents a typical system, variations or modifica-
augments the natural convection cooling and results tions to meet customer requirements are inevitable.
in substantially reduced operating temperatures.
Refer to paragraph 2.5, Planning, for information on
some of the options that can affect the interconnect
cabling. Refer to Collins Installation Practices Man-
2.5.4.3 DPU and MPU Forced-Air Cooling
ual (523-0776006) for guidelines concerning the
Requirements
installation of avionics equipment.
The DPU and MPU are designed to make effective
Table 2-1 lists the special tools required for mating
use of forced-air cooling. Cooling air enters through
connector installation. The mounts, mating connec-
a pattern of openings at the bottom, flows over the
components of the vertically mounted circuit cards, tors, and contacts required to install an EFIS-85B/
86B(2/12) system are listed in table 2-2. Figure 2-3
and exits through air holes in the top and side sur-
shows the mating connector pin assignments for
faces of the cover.
each unit.
It is required that forced air be introduced at the
base of the units and allowed to exit through the top Warning
surface. The inlet temperature of the forced air
should be maintained as low as possible and must Ensure that the aircraft battery master
never exceed the rated operating temperature of the switch is turned off before installing any of
equipment. the interconnect cabling.

Revised 30 August 1993 2-3

 installation 523-0773942

Table 2-1. Mating Connector Contacts and Special Tools.

PREFERRED ALTERNATE

DESCRIPTION COLLINS VENDOR NAME COLLINS VENDOR NAME

PART AND PART PART AND PART
NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER

DCP-85E/G, DSP-85A,
FMM-85

Contact, crimp socket 371-0213-110 CNN 031-1007-033

Crimp tool 359-8102-010 QPL M22520/2-01
Locator 359-8102-080 QPL M22520/2-08
Insertion/extraction tool 371-8445-010 CNN CIET-20HD 371-8053-020 AMP 91066-4
CHP-85D/86B

Contact, crimp socket 359-0032-020 QPL M39029/32-259

Crimp tool 359-8102-010 QPL M22520/2-01
Locator 359-8102-020 QPL M22520/2-02
Insertion tool 359-4078-010 QPL MS24256A20
Extraction tool 359-4078-020 QPL MS24256R20
EFD-85/86( )
Contact, crimp socket 359-0608-030 QPL M39029/57-357
Crimp tool 359-8102-010 QPL M22520/2-01 359-8101-010 QPL M22520/1-01
Locator 359-8102-100 QPL M22520/2-10 359-8101-040 QPL M22520/1-04
Insertion/extraction tool 359-8032-030 QPL M81969/14-02
MFD-85A

Contact, crimp socket 359-0608-110 QPL M39029/57-354

Crimp tool 359-8102-010 QPL M22520/2-01
Locator 359-8102-060 QPL M22520/2-06
Insertion/extraction tool 359-8032-010 QPL M81969/14-01
DPU-85G/86G, MPU-85G/86G

Contact, female tuning fork 372-2514-110 i

Contact, female tuning fork 372-2514-180 i

Kit, tool (contains all 359-0697-0X0 359-0697-080 DAN DMC593

part numbers listed below)

I Crimp tool 359-0697-010 2 DAN GMT-221 623-8579-001 3

623-8580-001 4

Insertion tool 359-0697-050 DAN DAKl88 359-8029-010 QPL MS3323-22

(tweezer type) (probe type)

I Extraction tool
a. Replacement probes
b. Replacement ejector
(qty 2)
359-0697-060
359-0697-070
359-0697-030
DAN DRKl88
DAN DRKl88-1
DAN DRKl88-3
372-8091-010

1372-2514-110 female fork-type contacts are used with wire insulation diameters up to 1.27 mm (0.050in). Wire with insulation
diameters from 1.27 mm (0.050in) to 2.03 mm (0.080in), use contact 372-2514-180. Installer must order the quantity of each
desired.
2This crimp tool has two jaw openings, one for each range of insulation diameter given.
3This crimp tool is for use with contacts 372-2514-110 only.
Ñ *This crimp tool is for use with contacts 372-2514-180 only.

Vendor codes: AMP =

AMP, CNN = ITT Cannon, DAN = Daniels Mfg., QPL =
Military Spec.

Revised 30 August 1993 0-4

 installation 523-0773942

Table 2-2. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Systems Installation Hardware Listing.

EFD-85/86( ) INSTALLATION HARDWARE

TYPE QTY/ DESCRIPTION NOTES COLLINS VENDOR NAME AND

UNIT PART NUMBER PART NUMBER

1 Mating connector without grounding fingers (41 (1) (2) 359-0635-420 QPL MS27473T20F41S
contacts supplied with connector)

Mating connector with grounding fingers (41 (1) (2) 359-0645-500 QPL MS27484T20F41S
contacts supplied with connector)

1 Clamp, strain relief, straight (1) 359-0637-070 QPL MS27506F20-2

Clamp, strain relief, 90-degree (1) 359-0637-170 QPL MS27507F20

Cable tie, strain relief, 90-degree 359-0073-240

1 Mooring plate, EFD-85 (1) 634-2804-001

Mooring plate, EFD-86/86A (1) 634-2803-001

1 or 2 Inclinometer (Refer to table 1-1 for a complete (5)

list.)

4 Machine screw (0.164-32UNC-2A) EFD-85 (1) Customer supplied

Machine screw (0.190-32UNF-2A) EFD-86/86A (1) Customer supplied

1 or 2 Cooling fan, includes hard-wired Rotron blower pn (3) (4) 009-1965-030

032105 with 3150 rpm fan motor. +28-V dc power
and 6.44 W max.
FMM-85 1 or 2 Fan monitor module, compatible with Rotron (4) 622-7154-001
(-001) blower pn 032105 with 3150-rpm fan motor. (optional)

(1) Choose one.

(2) Refer to table 2-1 for contact information.
(3) One blower is required for each pair of EFDs.
(4) Choose as required for total quantity per unit.
(5) Used for ADI position only.

DCP-85E/G INSTALLATION HARDWARE

TYPE QTY/ DESCRIPTION NOTES COLLINS VENDOR NAME AND

UNIT PART NUMBER PART NUMBER

2 Mating connector housing, 50-pin, D subminiature (1) 371-0213-050 CNN DDMA50S-A183-F0

100 Contacts, crimp socket (2) 371-0213-110 CNN 031-1007-067

2 Keying kit (2 keying plugs per kit) 629-8381-001

2 Screw lock assembly (2 per kit) 371-0040-040 CNN D20420-98

2 Hood/cable clamp 371-0148-000 CNN DD24661

(1) Mating connector part number does not include snap-in crimp socket contacts.
(2) Refer to table 2-1 for contact information.
Vendor codes: CNN ITT Cannon, QPL Military Spec, PTR Positronics
= = =

Revised 30 August 1993 2-5

 installation 523-0773942

Table 2-2. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Systems Installation Hardware Listing (Cont).

CHP-85D/86B INSTALLATION HARDWARE

TYPE QTY/ DESCRIPTION NOTES COLLINS VENDOR NAME AND

UNIT PART NUMBER PART NUMBER

1 Mating connector, Pl, 26-pin, crimp style (26 (1) 359-0301-320 QPL MS3126F16-26S
contactssupplied with connector) (CHP-86B
requiresonly the P1 connector)

1 Mating connector, P2, 19-pin, crimp style (19 (1) 359-0301-230 QPL MS3126F14-19S
contactssupplied with connector)

(1) The CHP-85D requires both connectors and the CHP-86B requires only P1 connector.

MFD-85A INSTALLATION HARDWARE

TYPE QTY/ DESCRIPTION NOTES COLLINS VENDOR NAME AND

UNIT PART NUMBER PART NUMBER

1 Mating connector without grounding fingers (55 (1) (2) 359-0635-180 QPL MS27473T16F-355B
contacts supplied with connector)

Mating connector with grounding fingers (55 (1) (2) 359-0645-170 QPL MS27484T16F-355B
contacts supplied with connector)

1 Clamp, strain relief, straight (1) 359-0637-050 QPL MS27506F16-2

Clamp, strain relief, 90-degree (1) 359-0637-150 QPL MS27507F16

IMT-300 1 Mounting tray (1) 622-4333-001

IMT-85 Combined mount for MFD and WXP (1) 622-6878-001

1 Finger guard (used with IMT-85) 009-1766-050

1 or 2 Cooling fan, includes hard-wired Rotron blower pn (3) 009-1965-030

032105 with 3150-rpm fan motor. +28-V dc power
and 6.44 W max.

FMM-85 1 or 2 Fan monitor module, compatible with Rotron 622-7154-001

(-001) blower pn 032105 with 3150-rpm fan motor. (optional)

(1) Choose one.

(2) Refer to table 2-1 for contact information.
(3) Cooling air is required for MFD.
Vendor codes: CNN ITT Cannon, QPL Military Spec, PTR
= = = Positronics

Revised 30 August 1993 2-6

 installation 523-0773942

Table 2-2. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Systems Installation Hardware Listing (Cont).

DSP-85A INSTALLATION HARDWARE

TYPE QTY/ DESCRIPTION NOTES COLLINS VENDOR NAME AND

UNIT PART NUMBER PART NUMBER

1 Mating connector housing, P1, 25-pin, D (1) 371-0213-030 CNN DBMA25S-A183-F0

subminiature
1 Mating connector housing, P2, 50-pin, D (1) 371-0213-050 CNN DDMA50S-A183-F0
subminiature
75 Contacts, crimp socket (2) 371-0213-110 CNN 031-1007-067

1 Key connector (2 per kit) 629-8339-001

1 Screw lock assembly for P1 (2 per kit) 371-0040-010 CNN D20419-20

1 Screw lock assembly for P2 (2 per kit) 371-0040-040 CNN D20420-98

1 Hood/cable clamp for P1 371-0146-000 CNN DB24659

1 Hood/cable clamp for P2 371-0148-000 CNN DD24661

(1) Mating connector part number does not include snap-in crimp socket contacts.
(2) Refer to table 2-1 for contact information.

DPU-85G/86G INSTALLATION HARDWARE

TYPE QTY/ DESCRIPTION NOTES COLLINS VENDOR NAME AND

UNIT PART NUMBER PART NUMBER

2 Mating connector kit, 4-row, full height, Collins 634-1020-001

Thinline, 160-pin
320 Contacts, female tuning fork (2) (4) 372-2514-110
(2) (4) 372-2514-180

UMT-14 1 Mount, ½-ATR short, full height (1) 622-6171-001

UMT-14A Mount, ½-ATR short, full height with built-in ac (1) (3) 622-6901-001
fan
UMT-14B Mount, ½-ATR short, full height with built-in de (1) (3) 622-7265-001
fan (19 300-rpm fan, Rotron pn 504558 (CPN 009-
0271-010))

1 Mating connector for UMT-14A/14B cooling fan (3 (2) 359-0301-790 QPL MS3126F8-3S
contacts supplied with connector)

1 UMT-14( ) grounding bracket 634-2626-001

1 or 2 Cooling fan, includes hard-wired Rotron blower pn (3) 009-1965-030

032105 with 3150-rpm fan motor. +28-V de power
and 6.44 W max. Used with UMT-14 mount.
FMM-85 1 or 2 Fan monitor module, compatible with Rotron (4) 622-7154-001
(-001) blower pn 032105 with 3150-rpm fan motor. (optional)
FMM-85 1 or 2 Fan monitor module, compatible with de blower (4) 622-7154-002
(-002) Rotron pn 504558 with 19 300-rpm fan motor. Used (optional)
with UMT-14B mount.

(1) Choose one.

(2) Refer to table 2-1 for contact information.
(3) Cooling air is required for DPU.
(4) Choose as required for total quantity per unit.
(5) UMT-14 includes openings for cooling air. The 390R-23 is an alternate mount and is approximately 0.25 inch shorter than the
UMT-14.
Vendor codes: CNN ITT Cannon, QPL Military Spec, PTR Positronics
= = =

Revised 30 August 1998 2-7

 installation 523-0773942

Table 2-2. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Systems Installation Hardware Listing (Cont).

MPU-85G/86G INSTALLATION HARDWARE

TYPE QTY/ DESCRIPTION NOTES COLLINS VENDOR NAME AND

UNIT PART NUMBER PART NUMBER

3 Mating connector kit, 4-row, full height, Collins 634-1020-001

Thinline, 160-pin
480 Contacts, female tuning fork (2) (4) 372-2514-110
(2) (4) 372-2514-180

UMT-15 1 Mount, ¾-ATR short, full height (3) (1) 622-6172-001

UMT-15A Mount, ¾-ATR short, full height with built-in ac (3) (1) 622-6902-001
fan
UMT-15B Mount, ¾-ATR short, full height with built-in de (3) (1) 622-7266-001
fan (19 300-rpm fan, Rotron pn 504558 (CPN 009-
0271-010))

1 UMT-15 grounding bracket (1) (5) 634-2627-001

1 or 2 Cooling fan, includes hard-wired Rotron blower pn (3) 009-1965-030

032105 with 3150-rpm fan motor. +28-V dc power
and 6.44 W max. Used with UMT-15 mount.
FMM-85 1 or 2 Fan monitor module, compatible with Rotron (4) 622-7154-001
(-001) blower pn 032105 with 3150-rpm fan motor. (optional)
FMM-85 1 Fan monitor module, compatible with de blower (4) 622-7154-002
(-002) Rotron pn 504558 with 19 300-rpm fan motor. Used (optional)
with UMT-15B mount.

(1) Choose one.

(2) Refer to table 2-1 for contact information.
(3) Cooling air is required for MPU.
(4) Choose as required for total quantity per unit.
(5) UMT-15 includes openings for cooling air.

FMM-85 INSTALLATION HARDWARE

TYPE QTY/ DESCRIPTION NOTES COLLINS VENDOR NAME AND

UNIT PART NUMBER PART NUMBER

1 Mating connector housing, P1, 9-pin, D (1) 371-0213-010

subminiature
9 Contacts, crimp socket (2) 371-0213-110

1 Cable clamp/latch 371-0399-240

1 Bracket, adapter (supplied with FMM-85 (-002)) (3) 653-1303-001

(1) Mating connector part number does not include snap-in crimp socket contacts.
(2) Refer to table 2-1 for contact information.
(3) Adapter bracket is required for the FMM-85 (CPN 622-7154-002 only).
Vendor codes; CNN ITT Cannon, QPL Military Spec, PTR Positronics
= = =

Revised 30 August 1993 2-8

 installation523-0773942

During preparation of the interconnect wiring 2. Place the contact into crimp tool (refer to
cables, observe the following precautions: table 2-1 for part number) with the tool loca-
tor resting between the wire barrel and the
a. Read all notes on drawings and interconnect dia- insulation barrel.
grams prior to fabricating interconnect wiring 3. Hold the contact in place and gently close the
cables. handles until the contact is held in place with-
b. Bond and shield all parts of the aircraft electrical out deforming either the wire or insulation
system, such as generator and ignition systems. barrel.
c. Keep interconnect cables away from circuits car- 4. Hold wire straight and insert the stripped
rying heavy current, pulse-transmitting equip- portion into the wire barrel until the insula-
ment, and other sources of interference. tion butts against the tool locator. The bare
d. Make all external connections to the equipment wire should extend beyond the front of the
through designated connectors listed on intercon- wire barrel but no more than 0.8 mm (½2in).
nect wiring diagrams. Insulation should be aligned with the insula-
e. For balanced connections, use a twisted-pair tion barrel.
shielded wire for minimum pickup of electrostatic 5. Hold the wire in place and complete the crimp
and magnetic fields. Avoid long runs of wire, and by closing the crimping tool handles until the
keep input and output circuits separated as much ratchet releases.
as possible. 6. Remove the crimped contact from the crimp-
f. All interconnect wires and cables should be ing tool.
marked in accordance with the Aircraft Electron-
ies Association wire marking standard (refer to Note
figure 2-7).
g. Avoid excessive cable lengths, but allow sufficient Be sure that the wire insulation has not
slack for movement due to vibration. been crimped into the wire barrel. The end
h. After installation of the cables in the aircraft and portions of the insulation barrel should
before installation of the equipment, check to meet after crimping to form a complete
ensure that aircraft power is applied to only the loop. The wire barrel section of the contact
pins specified on the interconnect diagrams and should be completely closed after crimping.
that all other wires and shields are properly ter-
minated- b. Contact Insertion Instructions

2.6.2 Connector Contact Assembly and 1. Use insertion tool (refer to table 2-1 for part
Installation number) and insert each wired contact into
the appropriate connector hole from the rear
For more detailed instructions on contact crimping, and press until locked. Pull gently on each
contact insertion, and contact extraction refer to wire to ensure that the pin is properly locked
Collins UMT-( ) Mount and Thinline II Connectors into the connector. Refer to figure 2-3 for the
manual (523-0772277). CHP-85B, CHP-86D, DCP-85E/G, DSP-85A,
DPU-85G/86G, EFD-85/86( ), MFD-85A and
Note MPU-85G/86G mating connector pin locations
and functions.
Each connecting wire must be crimped in
the contact so that the crimped portion of c. Contact Extraction Instructions
the contact can enter the connector shell.
The crimped portion must enter the shell to 1. From the mating side of connector, insert the
provide positive locking of the contact in the extraction tool (refer to table 2-1 for part
shell· number) as far as possible into the cavity con-
taining the contact to be removed.
a. Contact Crimping Instructions 2. Push the ejector plunger of the extraction tool
forward, holding the handle in position to
1. Strip approximately 3.2 mm (0.125 in) of insu- keep the tool from backing out of the connec-
lation from each interconnect wire. tor.

Revised 30 August 1993 2-9

 installation 523-0773942

3. Holding the tool in position, grasp the wire Note

and gently pull the contact free from the con-
nector. Be sure that the inclinometer is installed on
the front of the EADI. Inclinometer shall be
levelled by the installer.
2.6.3 Interconnect Wiring Check
The EADI is mounted from either the front or back
of the aircraft flight instrument panel. It is secured
All Avionics Service Information Letter 1-88, Air- by four screws. Refer to figure 2-12, 2-13 or 2-14 for
craft Wiring Checkout Techniques, contains sug- the desired panel cutout and the outline and mount-
gested methods of checking an aircraft wiring ing dimensions. Note that the EADI can be either
harness. Collins CTS-9 Breakout Box Test Set (CPN front or rear mounted and that the panel eutouts are
622-6720-001) is recommended for any DPU-85G/ different for the two methods of mounting.
I 86G and MPU-85G/86G wiring checkout and trouble-
shooting that requires a breakout box for Thinline 2.7.1.1 Installation
full-height160-pin connectors. A breakout box is also Connect the twist-lock interconnect cable to the rear
for EFD-85/86( ), DSP-85A, and DCP-

I
recommended connector of the EADI. Then slide the unit into the
85E/G wiring checkout and troubleshooting. Figure instrument panel and secure with four screws,
2-8 contains a parts list and schematic diagram to inserting one in each corner. EFD-85 is secured by
fabricate a breakout box to extend Cannon D-sub- four 0.164-32 UNC-2A (8-32) screws and EFD-86/ I
miniature connectors. Other cables may be 86( ) is secured by four 0.190-32 UNF-2A (#10-32)
fabricated as required to extend units with different screws. If a mooring plate is used, it must be
types of connectors. This assembly may be fabricated installed over the instrument case before the cable is
according to figure 2-8 or ordered from JeAIR connected.
Instrumentation (pn 01-0314-00).
2.7.1.2 Removal
Remove the four screws, one in each corner, that
2.7 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
secure the EADI to the aircraft instrument panel.
Slide the EADI out of the aircraft instrument panel
The following procedures detail how to install an until the mating connector can be reached. Discon-
EFIS system. These procedures must be performed nect the twist-lock connector, and carefully remove
as described to ensure proper operation and perform- the unit.
ance. Any deviations from these instructions may
result in reduced performance and/or damage to the 2.7.2 EFD-85/86( ) Used as an Electronic
equipment. Horizontal Situation Indicator (EHSI)
Degauss the EHSI. It should be mounted in the flight
Warning instrument panel under the EADI where it is close to
and slightly below the pilot's line of vision. It is
In the interest of personal safety, it is ree- secured by four screws. Refer to figure 2-12, 2-13, or
ommended that the aircraft battery master 2-14 for the desired panel cutout and outline and
switch be turned off to disconnect power mounting dimensions. Note that the EHSI can be
before installing or removing equipment either front or rear mounted and the panel cutouts
from the aircraft. are different for the two methods.

2.7.2.1 Installation
2.7.1 EFD-85/86 ( ) Used as an Electronic
Connect the twist-lock interconnect cable to the rear
Attitude Director Indicator (EADI)
connector of the EHSI. Then slide the unit into the
instrument panel and secure with four screws,
Degauss the EADI and mount it directly above the inserting one in each corner. EFD-85 is secured by
electronic horizontal situation indicator, laterally four 0.164-32 UNC-2A (8-32) screws and EFD-86/ |
centered on the pilot's instrument panel. Position it 86( ) is secured by four 0.190-32 UNF-2A (#10-32)
so that the top of the instrument remains visible screws. If a mooring plate is used, it must be
when the pilot's seat is in the highest and most for- installed over the instrument case before the cable is
ward position. connected.

Revised 30 August 1993 2-10

 ínstallation 523-0773942

2.7.2.2 Removal 2.7.5 DSP-85A Display Select Panels

Remove the four screws, one in each corner, that Mount the DSP-85A in the aircraft center pedestal or
secure the EHSI to the aircraft instrument panel. in any convenient location that allows pilot and
Slide the EHSI out of the aircraft instrument panel copilot easy access to the controls. Refer to figure 2-
until the mating connector can be reached. Discon- 11 for outline and mounting dimensions and connec-
nect the twist-lock connector, and carefully remove tor keying information. Remember that one DSP-
the unit. 85A is required for each side in a 4- or 5-tube system.

2.7.3 CHP-85D/88B Course Heading Panel 2.7.5.1 Installation

Mount the CHP-85D/86B in the aircraft center ped- Connect the screw-lock cable assemblies to the DSP-
estal or any convenient location that allows both the 85A rear connectors. Insert the display select panel
into the proper location and secure with the four
pilot and copilot easy access to the controls. Refer to
figure 2-9 for outline and mounting dimensions. Dzus fasteners.

2.7.5.2 Removal
2.7.3.1 Installation
Unlock Dzus fasteners, remove the display select
Connect the twist-lock connector cables to the rear panel from its mounting location, and disconnect the
connectors of the CHP-85D/86B. (There is one con- screw-lock cable assemblies.
nector on the CHP -86B and two connectors on the
CHP-85D.) Insert the course heading panel into the
2.7.6 MFD-85A Multifunction Display
center pedestal and secure with two Dzus fasteners.
The multifunction display is to be installed in the
2.7.3.2 Removal cockpit in a location on the instrument panel that
allows good visibility and control access by both the
Unlock Dzus fasteners, remove course heading panel pilot and copilot. The MFD-85A uses the IMT-300
from center pedestal, and disconnect twist-lock Mounting Tray. Refer to figure 2-15 for the data nec-
cables from unit. essary to install the MFD-85A and IMT-300.

2.7.4 DCP-85E/G Display Control Panel Note

Mount the DCP-85E/G in the aircraft center pedes. Some installations require that the MFD-
tal or in any convenient location that allows pilot and 85A and the WXP-85C/850A be stack
copilot easy access to the controls. Refer to figure 2_ mounted using a single mounting tray.
10 for outline and mounting dimensions and connec- Refer to paragraph 2.7.7 for the procedure
tor keying information. Remember that one DCP using the IMT-85 Mounting Tray.
85E/G is required for each side in a 4- or 5-tube crt
system. 2.7.8.1 Installation

. To install the MFD-85A and IMT-300, observe the

2.7.4.1 Installation
following precautions:
Connect the screw-lock cable assemblies to the DCP¯ a. The size of the panel cutout is shown in figure 2-
85E/G rear connectors. Insert the display control 15.
panel into the proper location and secure with the b. Drill the four holes as shown in figure 2-15 to
two Dzus fasteners· attach the IMT-300.
c. Clean the area of the screw holes on the back of
2.7.4.2 Removal the instrument panel where the tray will be
attached. This is to ensure a good electrical con-
Unlock Dzus fasteners, the display control
remove tact.
panel from its mounting location, and disconnect the d. Install the IMT-300 into the instrument panel
screw-lock cable assemblies. using four 0.138-32 UNC-2A (#6-32) flathead

Revised 30 August 1998 2-11

 installation 523-0773942

screws. The IMT-300 is equipped with self-locking b. Cut out the instrument panel for installation of
nuts. the equipment. The size of the panel eutout is
e. Before installing the MFD-85A into the IMT-300, shown in figure 2-24.
make sure the locking pawls on the bottom of the e. Refer to figure 2-24, read note 10, and select a y
unit are properly retracted so that unit will slide mounting hole pattern for the IMT-85. Drill the
easily into the tray- specified holes.
f. If the cable is long enough, bring the cable out d. Clean the area of the screwholes where the tray
through the panel opening and connect it to the will be attached. This is to ensure a good electri-
unit connector. Make sure that it is properly and cal contact,
securely engaged· e. Refer to figure 2-24, note 5. Install the blower fan
g. Slide the MFD-85A into the IMT-300 but do not (not supplied with the IMT-85). Mounting hole
force. If it does not slide into position easily,
. patterns (note 6) for the fan are provided on the
check alignment of the indicator with the index .

center line of the tray or 0.250 inch on either side

pins on the rear of the IMT-300. If the mating
of center line if needed to avoid aircraft structure.
connector is already installed, make sure the
f. Dress and route WXP wiring harness over the
cable assembly is not getting caught on the tray.
h. After full insertion, use a Phillips-head screw- center of the fan in a manner that will minimize
driver to tighten the two twist-lock pawls to the restriction of airflow from the blower.
secure the unit to the tray.
i. If not already connected and locked, connect mat- Caution
ing connector to MFD-85A.
Use a finger guard (CPN 009-1766-050 or
equivalent) with the blower to protect the
2.7.6.2 Removal
WXP wiring harness from the rotating fan
blades.
To remove the MFD-85A and IMT-300, observe the
following procedures:

a. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to loosen the two g. Connect the screw lock cable assemblies to the
twist-lock pawls that secure the MFD-85A to the WXP rear connectors. Insert the unit in its
IMT-300 tray. proper location and secure it with integral turn-
b. Slide the MFD-85A out of the tray far enough to lock fasteners. Use a 0.093 hexkey drive to tighten
allow access to the mating connector. Make sure the fasteners. Clearance is required on rear sur-
the cable assembly is not getting caught on the faces of panel in two places for the turnlock fas-
tray. teners.
c. Disconnect the mating connector and cable h. Before installing the MFD-85A, make sure the
assembly and remove the MFD-85A. locking pawls on the bottom of the unit are prop-
d. Remove the IMT-300 tray, if necessary, by first erly retracted so that the unit will slide easily
removing the four 0.138-32 UNC-2A (#6-32)flat- into the tray.
head screws. The IMT-300 is equipped with self- i. If the MFD-85A mating cable is long enough,
locking nuts. bring the cable out through the panel opening and
connect it to the MFD-85A rear connector. Make
I 2.7.7 Combined MFD-85A and WXP-85A/C or
WXP-850A Installation Using IMT-85
sure that it is properly and securely engaged.
j. Slide the MFD-85A into the panel opening and
Mounting Tray onto the mounting tray but do not force it. If the
mating connector cable is attached, pull or push it
2.7.7.1 Installation back through the rear opening of the tray. Make
sure that the cable is not getting caught on the
To install the MFD-85A, WXP-85A/C or -850A, and tray.
IMT-85, refer to the following steps, k. After full insertion, use a Phillips-head screw-
driver to tighten the two twist lock pawls to
a. Read all the notes on the IMT-85 outline and secure the unit.
mounting diagram, figure 2-24, before continuing. l. If the mating connector is not already connected
Pay attention to the caution in note 7. and locked, connect it to the MFD-85A.

Revised 30 August 1993 2-12

 installation 523-0773942

2.7.7.2 Removal applied to pin P3-B, power ground is P3-A, and

optional fan sensor output is P3-C.
Reverse the procedure used in paragraph 2.7.7.1. j. Secure cooling fan mating connector to connector
J3 at rear of mount.
2.7.8 DPU-85G/86G Display Processor Unit
(DPU) and UMT-14/14A/14B Mount 2.7.8.2 Removal

The DPU-85G/86G is normally mounted in the radio a. Remove safety wire, and loosen knurled knobs
equipment rack the UMT-14( ) Universal
with that secure unit to mount.
Mount. Refer to figure 2-17 for DPU outline and b. Slide the DPU straight out to disconnect it from
mounting dimensions. The UMT-14, UMT-14A, or mount connectors. Pin and socket damage may
UMT-14B is the equipment mount for the DPU. occur if the unit is moved up or sideways while
Refer to figure 2-18 (UMT-14), figure 2-19 (UMT- connectors are still engaged.
14A), or figure 2-20 (UMT-14B) outline and mounting
dimensions. The UMT-14/14A/14B connector mount- 2.7.9 MPU-85G/86G Multifunction Processor
ing accommodates 4-row Collins Thinline type con- Unit (MPU) and UMT-15/15A/15B Mount
nectors. The mating connectors are not supplied with
the mount. Two mating connector kits (CPN 634- Refer to figure 2-16 for MPU outline and mounting
1020-001) are required for installation of the DPU- dimensions. The UMT-15, UMT-15A, or UMT-15B is
85G/86G. One cooling fan mating connector kit (CPN the equipment mount for the MPU. Refer to figure 2-
371-6917-000) is required for UMT-14A or UMT-14B. 21 (UMT-15), figure 2-22 (UMT-15A), or figure 2-23
(UMT-15B) for outline and mounting dimensions.
2.7.8.1 Installation The UMT-15( ) connector mounting accommodates
4-row Collins Thinline type connectors. Mating con-
a. Assemble the two Thinline mating connector kits nectors are not supplied with the mount. Three mat-
in Collins UMT-( ) ing connector kits (CPN 634-1020-001) are required
according to procedures
Mount and Thinline II Connectors manual (523- for installation of the MPU-85G/86G. One cooling
0772277). Refer to paragraph 2.7.10 for additional fan mating connector (CPN 371-6917-000) is required
mating connector kit assembly instructions.
for UMT-15A or UMT-15B.
b. Install the UMT-14( ) Mount.
c. Verify orientation of mating connector keyway 2.7.9.1 Installation
pins (part of mating connector kits). Refer to fig-
ure 2-3 (sheets 4 and 5) for mating connector key- a. Assemble the three Thinline mating connector
way pin indexing. Darkened part of keyway kits according to procedures in Collins UMT-( )
indicates the blocked portion. Mount and Thinline II Connectors manual (523-
d. Position DPU interconnecting cables, with mat- 0772277). Refer to paragraph 2.7.10 for additional
ing connectors, into rear of mount. Secure mating mating connector kit assembly instructions.
connectors to connector bracket at rear of mount. b. Install the UMT-15( ) Mount.
e. Verify all interconnect wiring before proceeding. c. Verify orientation of mating connector keyway
Make sure that +28-V de input power is applied pins (part of mating connector kits). Refer to fig-
only to pins P1-82, 83, and P2-50, 51, 82, and 83. ure 2-3 (sheets 8, 9, and 10) for mating connector
f. Remove aircraft power and slide DPU into mount keyway pin indexing. Darkened part of keyway
until mating connectors are fully engaged. indicates the blocked portion.
g. Position knurled knobs on front of mount to d. Position MPU interconnecting cables, with mat-
engage DPU holddown hooks. Tighten knurled ing connectors, into rear of mount. Secure mating
knobs to secure unit to mount. Safety-wire the connectors to connector bracket at rear of mount.
knurled knobs. e. Verify all interconnect wiring before proceeding.
h. Ensure that a good electrical bond exists between Make sure that +28-V de input power is applied
the unit and the mount. only to pins P1-78, 79, 82, and 83.
i. Assemble the cooling fan mating connector kit. f. Remove aircraft power and slide MPU into mount
Make sure that UMT-14A 115-V ac, 1¢, 400-Hz until mating connectors are fully engaged.
input power is applied to pins P3-A and P3-B. g. Position knurled knobs on front of mount to
Make sure that UMT-14B +28-V de input power is engage MPU holddown hooks. Tighten knurled

Revised 30 August 1993 2-13

 installation 523-0773942

knobs to secure unit to mount. Safety-wire the Note

knurled knobs.
h. Ensure that a good electrical bond exists between Modify hex drive wrench (not supplied) as
the unit and the mount. shown below and use it on a long extension
i. Assemble the cooling fan mating connector kit. to aid connector installation into the mount.
Make sure that UMT-15A 115-V ac, 1¢, 400-Hz
input power is applied to pins P4-A and P4-B.
Make sure that UMT-15B +28-V de input power is
applied to pin P4-B, power ground is P4-A, and
optional fan sensor output is P4-C.
j. Secure cooling fan mating connector to connector
J4 at rear of mount.

2.7.9.2 Removal
HEX ORlVE WRENCH
MODIFICATION
a. Remove safety wire, and loosen knurled knobs
that secure unit to mount.
b. Slide the MPU straight out to disconnect it from
mount connectors. Pin and socket damage may GAO-0745-02I

occur if the unit is moved up or sideways while

connectors are still engaged.
Hex Drive Wrench Modyication
Figure 2-2
2.7.10 Mating Connector Kit (CPN 634-1020-
001) Assembly Instructions b. Install and orient the keyway as shown on the
outline and mounting diagram for the DPU (fig-
ure 2-17) and MPU (figure 2-16). The beveled por-
Refer to the illustration below and the following tion of the keyway faces the mating side of the
steps to assemble DPU/MPU mating connector kit connector as shown. Secure each indexing keyway
(CPN 634-1020-001). The assembled kit will be wired (CPN 768-3401-003) to the connector with a set-
to an interconnect cable, then it will be installed on a screw (CPN 328-5030-000).
mount such as the UMT-14( )/15( ).

KEYWAY ORIENTED PER 2.7.11 FMM-85 Fan Monitor Module

EQUlPMENT REQUIREMENT
(2 PLACES)
SECTION
CAPLSACCREE
Refer tO figure 2-25 for outline and mounting dimen-
sions and interconnect diagram. Use #22 AWG wire
o _
for interconnect wiring.

2.7.11.1 FMM-85 (-001) Installation

Refer to figure 2-24 for tubeaxial fan (CPN 009-1965-

030) outline and mounting diagram. The FMM-85
O > (-001)may be located directly on any one of the fan's
LCONNECTOR SETSCREW J f0ur sides, depending on space requirements or limi-
SHELL, MALE (2 PLACES) GAO-0745-02I
tatiORS.
Mating Connector Kit
Figure 2-1 (-002) Installation
2.7.11.2 FMM-85

a. Install capserews (CPN 324-2610-000) into coun- The FMM-85 (-002)is

attached to the UMT-14B/15B
terbore of connector (CPN 634-1388-001). The blower plenum with an adapter bracket (CPN 653-
capserews require a 0.109 hex drive socket (not 1303-001) that is supplied with the FMM-85 (-002).
supplied). Use the bracket to mount in any convenient location.

Revised 30 August 1998 2-14

 installation 523-0773942

a. Attach FMM-85 (-002)to adapter bracket with test procedure, refer to the maintenance section of
two 0.138 x 0.31 screws (CPN 343-0168-000) that this instruction book. If a FAIL indication appears on
are supplied with the FMM-85. any ert at any time, perform the test procedures that
b. Remove bottom blower plenum mounting screws are located in the maintenance section.
from mount (four from the UMT-14B and three
from the UMT-15B).
c. Attach FMM-85 (-002)and adapter bracket to 2.8.1 Test Equipment
mount with three or four 0.112-40 x 0.31 screws
(CPN 343-0134-000), supplied with the FMM-85
(-002).Install screws into screw holes vacated in The following systems or equivalent simulators must
step b. be operational to complte these tests:

2.7.11.3 Removal a. Attitude/heading system

b. VOR/LOC/GS/DME simulator
c. Radar altitude simulator
For short time removal, cap and secure connectors to
d. Flight control system
prevent wire and connector damage. No other special
e. Air data system
removal instructions are required.

2.8 POSTINSTALLATION TESTING 2.8.2 Power Requirments

Ensure that all equipment connectors and mating All power required to perform the system tests is
connectors are securely mated. After all cabling has provided by the aircraft in which the system is
been installed and equipment mounted in the air- installed.
craft, perform the followingt test procedures to ver-
ify the operation of the EFIS. The test must be
performed using the aircraft power supplies. Refer 2.8.3 Diagnostic Information
to table 2-3 for test equipment required. Refer to
table 2-4 for postinstallation tests. These test proce-
dures are intended to ensure that the system equip- Refer to the maintenance section of this manual for
ments are properly connected. For a complete system diagnostic code information.

Table 2-3. Test Equipment Required.

Collins 972Q-4VOR/ILS/MG Ramp Test A VOR/LOC ramp test set that simulates localizer and glideslope transmitters is
Set required to perform the postinstallation test. This test set must have provisions for
(CPN 622-2211-0020 or equivalent testing the localizer signal to 0.155 DDM (difference in depth modulation) and the
glideslope signal to 0.175 DDM. These modulation levels produce 2-dot indications on
localizer and glideslope deviation displays.

Revised 30 August 1993 2-15

 installation 523-0773942

Table 2-4. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Postinstallation Test.

TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULT

1.0 POWER UP

1.1 Connect the aircraft battery and apply power to the EFIS Replace any blown fuses and reset any circuit breakers that
system and turn on the cooling air blowers. Apply power to tripped. Verify that pictures appear on the EADI and
any other systems that supply data to the EFIS system EHSI The attitude and heading displays will be random
(such as FCS, NAV, DME, AHRS, air data, radio altitude, but should be steady.
and weather radar). Provide valid input signals to these
sensors as required to eliminate all warning flags.

Note
The EFIS displays in this system flag certain sensor failures by removing affected display elements. To be able
to test these elements, it is necessary to supply valid sensor inputs.

1.2 Push the PWR button on the MFD-85A front panel. Verify that a picture appears on the MFD.

Note

Beginning here, unless otherwise specified, the following steps refer to the no 1 side units, but should be
repeated for the no 2 side, reading all references to no 1 as no 2.

2.0 DCP-85E/G AND CHP-86B OR CHP-85D CONTROLS USED WITH EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12)

Note
Go to step 3.0 for DSP-85A Display Select Panel used with EFIS-85B(2)/86B(2).

2.1 Intensity

Turn the DCP-85E/G DIM controls. Verify that EADI and EHSI brightness is controlled.

2.2 Decision Height

a. Turn the DCP DH SET knob. Verify that it controls the decision height display (lower
First turn the knob slowly and observe displayed right corner) on EADI. Each click of knob should change
decision height; then turn knob fast. displayed decision height by 1 foot when turned slowly and
by larger steps when turned fast.

b. Verify DCP DH SET range is 0 to 999 feet. DH flashes at 0 foot.

c. Push the RA TST pushbutton. Verify that both the radio altitude and decision height
values are displayed on the EADI. DH annunciator is
displayed if radio altitude test value is greater than
decision height.

d. Release RA TST pushbutton.

Revised 30 August 1993 2-16

 installation 523-0773942

Table 2-4. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Postinstallation Test (Cont).

TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULT

2.3 EHSI Formats

a. Set DCP format switch to HSI. Verify a conventional compass rose appears on the EHSI.

b. Set DCP FORMAT switch to ARC and MAP positions. Verify that the EHSI picture changes to an expanded
compass sector.

c. Turn the DCP RNG (range) knob. Verify that the EHSI range is controlled by the RNG knob.

d. Push the DCP RDR switch to select weather radar. Verify the weather radar mode is annunciated at the left
end of the half-scale range are.

e. Turn the WXP RANGE knob. Verify that the EHSI range is controlled by the WXP range
knob.

Warning
The area within the scan are and within 5 meters (15 feet) of an operating weather radar system constitutes a
hazardous area. Do not operate the system in any mode other than standby (STBY) or test (TST) when the
antenna might scan over personnel within that range. Never turn the transmitter on while in a hangar. FAA
Advisory Circular 20-68B or superseding documents, provide additional details regarding the radiation hazards
associated with ground operation of airborne weather radar.

f. Turn the WXP MODE switch to TEST. Weather radar test pattern is displayed on the EHSI. EHSI
will display the mode selected on the WXP panel (see
below).

OFF -
system deenergized
STBY -
system energized, but no transmitter output
TEST -
test pattern, but no transmitter output

g. Return DCP FORMAT switch to HSI position. Weather radar display will be deleted.

2.4 Active Course Selection

2.4.1 Initial Setup

a. If a preset course annunciator is displayed on EHSI,

push the DCP CRS PRE button twice.

b. If a bearing source annunciator is displayed on EHSI,

push the DCP BRG button twice.

2.4.2 Active Course Menu

a. Verify that an active green course annunciator is

displayed at left of center on EHSI.

b. Push the DCP CRS ACT button and verify on EHSI. The active course annunciator changes to white inside a
(Cont) flashing white box.

Re'vised 30 August 1993 2-17

 installation 523-0773942

Table 2-4. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Postinstallation Test (Cont).

TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULT

2.4.2 c. Rotate the DCP SEL/RNG knob. Verify that different navigation sources are displayed on
(Cont) the left side of the EHSI. Possible sensor selections are
VOR1, LOC1, TCN1, RNV1, LNV1, INS1, VLF1, LRN1,
MLS1, VOR2, LOC2, TCN2, RNV2, LNV2, INS2, VLF2,
LRN2, or MLS2. Only those navigation sources enabled by
interconnect strapping will be shown as possible selections.

d. Select VOR1 in the white box and push DCP CRS ACT Verify white box is deleted and VOR1 annunciator changes
button. to green.

2.4.3 Preset Course Menu

a. Push DCP CRS PRE button. Verify the last selected sensor is annunciated nonflashing in
white inside a flashing white box.

b. Turn the DCP SEL/RNG knob. Note that different navigation sources are displayed on the
left side of the EHSI below the active course annunciation.
Possible sensor selections are VOR1, LOC1, TCN1, RNV1,
LNV1, INS1, VLF1, LRN1, MLS1, VOR2, LOC2, TCN2,
RNV2, LNV2, INS2, VLF2, LRN2, or MLS2. Only those
navigation sources enabled by interconnect strapping will be
shown as possible selections.

c. Select VOR2 in the white box and push DCP CRS PRE Verify white box is deleted and VOR2 annunciator changes
button. to cyan.

d. Push DCP CRS PRE button twice. Verify the preset course sensor annunciation and course
arrow are removed.

2.4.4 Course Selection (Pilot and Copilot)

a. Push CHP-85D or CHP-86B CRS CTL button repeatedly. Verify that the knob-shaped control cursor alternately
appears next to the active or preset course annunciator.

b. Place the CRS CTL cursor on the active course Verify that the active course arrow on the EHSI rotates
annunciator. Turn the CHP CRS knob. and the digital course readout matches the course arrow
heading.

c. Push CHP CRS CTL button to position the cursor on the Verify that the preset course arrow rotates.
preset course annunciator. Turn the CHP CRS knob.

d. Push the CHP CRS DIRECT button. Verify the course arrow synes to lubber line or direct to
VOR station if present and valid.

Revised 30 August 1993 2-18

 installation 523-0773942

Table 2-4. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Postinstallation Test (Cont).

TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULT

2.4.5 Course Transfer

a. Set the course arrows so they are not superimposed and

note their location and annunciations.

b. Push DCP-85E/G CRS XFR button. Verify the preset course arrow and annunciator are deleted.
Active course arrow rotates to the position previously held
by the preset arrow. Active course annunciator is changed
to the source that had been in preset.

c. Push DCP CRS PRE button twice. Verify the preset course arrow appears in location
previously held by the active course arrow and the preset
annunciator shows the previous active source.

d. Push DCP CRS PRE button twice to delete the preset

course arrow.

2.4.6 Bearing Pointer Select (if enabled)

a. Push the DCP BRG button. Verify the last selected bearing sensor appears nonflashing
in white inside a flashing white box in lower left corner of
EHSI below BRG label.

b. Turn the DCP SEL/RNG knob. Possible selections ADF1, VOR1, LOC1, TCN1, RNV1, LNV1,
INS1, VLF1, LRN1, MLS1, ADF2, VOR2, LOC2, TCN2,
RNV2, LNV2, INS2, VLF2, LRN2, MLS2, appear in a
flashing white box. Only those sensors enabled by
interconnect strapping appear as possible selections.

c. Select ADF1 and push DCP BRG button. Verify the white box is deleted and the ADF1 bearing
annunciator and bearing pointer appear in magenta.

d. Push BRG button twice. Verify that the magenta bearing pointer and annunciator
are deleted.

2.4.7 Heading Select (Pilot)

a. Rotate CHP HDG knob. Verify that the magenta heading bug moves on pilot's EHSI
compass card.

b. Push HDG SYNC button. Verify heading bug syncs under lubber line.

2.4.8 Data Select (Pilot)

a. Push the CHP NAV DTA button repeatedly. Verify that dashes appear or 00.00 appears in upper right
corner of EHSI and label changes from ET, TTG, GSP, and
->

(for wind direction).

b. Select elapsed time (ET) using the NAV DTA button. Verify that sequential pushes of the ET button starts,
Push the CHP ET button. stops, and clears the elapsed timer.

Revised 30 August 1993 E-19

 installation 523-0773942

Table 2-4. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Postinstallation Test (Cont).

TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULT

3.0 DSP-85A CONTROL USED WITH EFIS-85B(2)/86B(2)

3.1 Turn the external DIM controls. Verify that EADI and EHSI brightness is controlled.

Note

Beginning here, unless otherwise specified, the following steps refer to the no 1 side units, but should be
repeated for the no 2 side, reading all references to no 1 as no 2.

3.2 Decision Height

a. Turn the DSP DH SET knob. Verify that it controls the decision height display (lower
right corner) on EADI.

b. Verify DSP DH SET range is 0 to 999 feet. DH flashes at 0 foot.

c. Push the TST pushbutton (part of DH SET knob). Verify that both the radio altitude and decision height set
values are displayed on the EADI.

d. Release TST pushbutton.

3.3 EHSI Formats

a. Set DSP FORMAT switch to ROSE. Verify a conventional compass rose appears on the EHSI.

b. Set DSP FORMAT switch to APPR and ENR positions. Verify that the EHSI compass rose changes to an expanded
compass sector.

c. Turn the DSP RNG (range) knob. Verify that the EHSI range is controlled by the RNG knob.

d. Push the DSP WX button to select weather radar. Verify the weather radar mode is annunciated at the left
end of the half-scale range arc.

e. Turn the WXP RANGE knob. Verify that the EHSI range is controlled by the WXP
RANGE knob.

Warning
The area within the scan are and within 5 meters (15 feet) of an operating weather radar system constitutes a
hazardous area. Do not operate the system in any mode other than standby (STBY) or test (TST) when the
antenna might scan over personnel within that range. Never turn the transmitter on while in a hangar. FAA
Advisory Circular 20-68B or superseding documents, provide additional details regarding the radiation hazards
associated with ground operation of airborne weather radar.

f. Turn the WXP MODE switch to TEST. Weather radar test pattern is displayed on the EHSI. EHSI
will display the mode selected on the WXP panel (see
below).

OFF - system deenergized

STBY system energized, but no transmitter output
-

TEST test pattern, but no transmitter output

-

g. Return DSP FORMAT switch to ROSE position. Weather radar display is deleted.

Revised 80 August 1998 2-20

 installation 523-0773942

Table 2-4. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Postinstallation Test (Cont).

TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULT

3.4 Active Course Menu

a. Turn the DSP CRS switch to the OFF position. Verify a magenta heading line connects the aircraft symbol
and the heading bug.

b. Turn the DSP CRS switch to the VOR/LOC position. Verify a green single shaft course arrow appears on the
compass rose and VOR1 or LOC1 is annunciated in green on
the left side of the display.
c. Turn the DSP CRS knob. Verify that the active course arrow on the EHSI rotates.

d. Push the PUSH CRS DIRECT button. Verify that the active course arrow automatically rotates
directly toward the station or waypoint until the navigation
source selected provides zero crosstrack deviation.

e. Turn the DSP CRS switch to the LNAV position. Verify a white single shaft course arrow appears on the
compass rose and LRN1, LNV1, VLF1, or INS1 is
annunciated in white on the left side of the display.

3.5 Second Course (2ND CRS) Selection

a. Push the DSP 2ND CRS button repeatedly to cycle A dashed second course arrow appears on the compass rose
through the second course sensor menu. The last sensor and the second course annunciator appears on left side of
displayed remains in view. EHSI. Selection sequence is VOR1, VOR2, LNV1, LNV2,
MLS1, MLS2, ADF1, ADF2, and off for the pilot's DSP and
VOR2, VOR1, LNV2, LNV1, MLS2, MLS1, ADF2, ADF1, and
off for the copilot's DSP.

b. Push and hold 2ND CRS button for greater than 0.4
second to cycle directly to the off state.

3.6 Bearing Pointer Select

Turn the DSP BRG switch to all positions. The last sensor Verify a magenta is displayed and the
bearing pointer
displayed remains in view. navigation annunciators in the lower left of the
appear
EHSI below the BRG label. Possible bearing pointer
selections are OFF, VOR1, VOR2, LRN, and ADF. LRN and
ADF are strappable between sensor 1 and sensor 2.

3.7 Heading Select

a. Turn the DSP HDG knob. Verify that the heading cursor moves along the edge of the
compass card.

b. Push the DSP PUSH HDG SYNC button. Verify that the heading cursor rotates to match the
airplane heading under the lubber line on the EHSI.

3.8 NAV DATA Select

a. Push the DSP NAV DATA button repeatedly. Verify that dashes appear or 00.00 appears in upper right
corner of EHSI, and label changes to ET, TTG, GSP, and
->

(for wind direction).

b. Set NAV DATA to ET (elapsed time). Verify that 00.00 appears in upper right corner of EHSI.
Verify that sequential pushes of the external ET switch
starts, stops, and resets the elapsed timer display.

Revised 80 August 1998 2-21

 installation 523-0773942

Table 2-4. EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) Postinstallation Test (Cont).

TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULT

4.0 MFD-85A CHECKOUT

a. Verify there is a picture on the MFD-85A.

b. Push RDR button on MFD. Verify the MFD-85A displays the mode selected on the
weather radar control panel.

e. Push RDR button again. Verify the radar display is removed.

d. Push NAV button on MFD. Verify the NAV menu appears on the right side of the MFD
display.

e. Push MFD line select key next to sources desired to be Source color changes to green when selected.
displayed.

f. To enter the selected sources, push the NAV button by Display returns to the compass sector display with selected
the ENTER annunciator on the MFD-85A. NAV menu sources displayed. If VOR data is valid, VOR1
course and station ident appears on bottom left and VOR2
course and station ident appears on bottom right.

LNV waypoints appear in their proper positions. CRS to

waypoint will appear below VOR1 course for LNV1 and
below VOR2 course for LNV2. (Only one LNV can be
displayed at a time.)

g. Push RMT (Remote Data) button on MFD. Remote source menu will appear.

h. Push line select key of source desired. Data will appear if available. If no data is available, after 5
seconds NO DATA FROM REMOTE DEVICE #X will
appear.

5.0 EFIS SELF-TEST

Note
Self-test is enabled when an external installer supplied switch or switches (labeled EFIS TEST or similar) is
actuated and held for longer than 4 seconds.

5.1 Initiate EFIS self-test mode. Verify that an increment of 10 degrees is added to the
current values of pitch and roll, and 20 degrees is added to
the heading. A positive value is added to the pilot's side; a
negative value, to the copilot's side.

Verify that PIT, ROL, and HDG comparator warning

messages are displayed.

Verify that the attitude display is removed from view and

all flags associated with the EADI and EHSI displays are
brought into view.

5.2 Release the EFIS self-test switch. Verify that the displays return to normal operation.

5.3 Reset the PIT, ROL, and HDG comparators by pushing the Resetting the button or switch once stops the indications
external installer supplied comparator reset button or from flashing. Resetting a second eliminates the comparator
switch. messages if the conditions causing the comparator warning
messages have been eliminated.

Revised 30 August 1998 2-22

 installation 523-0773942

INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM CHANGES

REVISION DESCRIPTION OF REVISION SERVICE

EFFECTIVITY
IDENTIFICATION AND REASON FOR CHANGE BULLETIN

I
Upgraded for compatibility with added NA NA
features and capabilities (ie, TWR-850)
currently provided; and change formats
for tie-point and other provisions.

I EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) 5-Tube Interconnect

Figure 2-4 (Sheet A)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-33/(2-34 blank)

 installation 523-0773942

INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM CHANGES

REVISION DESCRIPTION OF REVISION SERVICE

EFFECTIVITY
IDENTIFICATION AND REASON FOR CHANGE BULLETIN

EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) 4-Tube Interconnect

Figure 2-5 (Sheet A)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-59/(2-60 blienk)

 installation 523-0773942

INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM CHANGES

REVISION DESCRIPTION OF REVISION SERVICE

EFFECTIVITY
IDENTIFICATION AND REASON FOR CHANGE BULLETIN

EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-86B(2/12) s-Tube Interconnect

Figure 2-6 (Sheet A)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-83/(2-84 blank)

 installation523-0773942

CHP-86B NO. 1
J1
U i i 28 V LIGHENG
+28V DC |LIGHENG|
TO +5V DC SiMTCH
CONVERTER
128 v i
T - +5 V L1GHTlNG
ANNUNCIATORS DCP-85E/G
AND PANEL LAMPS y - LIGHENG GND
NO.1
S - CHASS1S GND

+5 V DC P :5 V DC PWR NO. 1 ------------

29
0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 R ---
SIGNAL GND NO. 1 --
30
I T I T
NAV CRS
I ETI I DTA CTL
I I

G -
COURSE CONTROL NO. 1 --
11
X -
NAV DATA NO. 1 7
F -
EMER CONTROL NO. 1 --
10

CRS 4049
A -
COURSE D1RECEON NO. 1 18
DIRECEON/
ENCODER MOVEMENT
26LS30
DETECTOR
K COURSE NO. 1 H 14
"¯¯¯*
- -
**

L -
COURSE NO. 1 L 15

PUSH
CRS -

OlRECT
COURSE D1RECT NO. 1 ----------e
12

OSCILLATOR

HDG 4049
8 --
HEADING DIRECEON NO. 1 * --
19
DlRECTON/
ENCODER MOVEMENT
26LS30
DETECTOR
-
M -
HEADING NO. 1 H ** -----------e
16

N --
HEADING NO. 1 L 17

PUSH
HDG -

SYNC
--
HEADING SYNC NO. 1 -----------e
13

: CW ROTATON +5 V DC, CCW ROTABON

=
0 V DC =

:* FIFTY-SIX 2.5 TO 5.0 V 100 µS PULSES FOR EACH 360° REVOLULON OF THE KNOB.
CGO-2572-02-AC-1

CHP-86B Course Heading Panel, System Schematic Diagram

Figure 2-33 (Sheet 1 of 2)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-155

 installation S23-0773942

CHP--86B NO. 2
J1
U i | 28 V LIGHTING
|LIGHENG|
+28 V DC
TO +5 V DC SWITCH
CONVERTER
\ 28 V \ Ÿ
T
B T - +5 V LlGHING
DCP-85E/G
ANNUNCIATORS y - L1GHENG GND NO. 2
AND PANEL LAMPS J2
5 - CHASSlS GND

+5 V DC D | 5 V DC PWR NO. 2 -
29
0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 R -
SIGNAL GND NO. 2 30
T
NAV CRS
IIET DTA CTL
I I

G -
COURSE CONTROL NO. 2 11
X -
NAV DATA NO. 2 7
E -
EMER CONTROL NO. 2 10

CRS 4049
A -
COURSE DIRECTON NO. 2 * - 18
DIRECTON/
ENCODER MOVEMENT
26LS30
DETECTOR
-
K ----
COURSE NO. 2 H ** 14

L ---
COURSE NO. 2 L 15

PUSH
CRS
DIRECT
il COURSE DIRECT NO. 2 - 12

OSCILLATOR

HDG 4049
8 -
HEADING DIRECTION NO. 2 * - 19
DIRECTON/
ENCODER MOVEMENT
26LS30
DETECTOR
-
M -
HEADING NO. 2 H ** 16

N -
HEADING NO. 2 L 17

PUSH
HDG --

SYNC
J ||EADING SYNC NO. 2 - 13

* CW ROTATON +5 V DC,CCW ROTA ON

= OV DC =

** FIFTY-SIX 2.5 TO 5.0 V 100 µS PULSES FOR EACH 360° REVOLUTON OF THE KNOB
CGO-2572-02-AC-2

CHP-86B Course Heading Panel, System Schematic Diagram

Figure 2-33 (Sheet 2)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-156

Collins EFIS-85B(2/12)
and EFIS-86B(2/12) Rockwell
International
Electronic Flight
Instrument Systems operation
Collins General Aviation Division

Printed in USA e523-0773943-003118

3rd Edition, 30 August 1993

table of contents
Paragraph Page Paragraph Page
3.1 General .................... ...... ....... ......... .........
3-1 3.8.2 Attitude Sensor Annunciator ....................................
3-17
3.2 DCP-85E/G Display Control Panel (DCP), Displays 843 ioCom nd Bar Display .

ADes rr ato ert a

"Asics.R 11
Dn 0
2.2.1
Rn (SSEERR G) Knnobb
!!!
3.2.4 Course Active (CRS ACT), Course Preset (CRS PRE), and Bearing
D nH
n ato
.. 0

3.8.9 Radio Altitude Test 3-21

3-2 ........... .................................

(BRG) Buttons.................................................. 3.8.10 Indicated Airspeed 3-21

3-3
.............................................

3.2.5 Course Transfer (CRS XFR) Button ..............................

3.8.11 Airspeed Trend 3-21

3.2.6 Decision Height Set (DH SET) Knob 3-3 ..

3-21
.............................

3-4 3.8.12 Speed Deviation Display

3.2.7 Radio Altimeter Test (RA TST) Pushbutton ......................

3.8.13 Flight Control Mode Annunciation 3-22

3-4
..............................

3.2.8 Weather Radar (RDR) Pushbutton ...............................

3.8.14 Autopilot/Yaw Damper and Trim Annunciation.................. 3-22

3.2.9 DIM Control.................................................... 3-4 3-29
3.8.15 Marker Beacon Display.........................................
3.3 CHP-85D/86B Course Heading Panel (CHP), Displays and 3.8.16 Inclinometer ...................................................
3-29
Controla Description 3-1
.............,..............................

3.9 Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator (EHSI) Formata

3-4
3.3.1 Heading Select (HDG) Knob.....................................
3.3.2 Heading Sync (PUSH HDG SYNC) Button 3-4
Using EFD-85/86( Electronic Flight Display ) .................
3-29
.......................

3.9.1 ROSE Format (DSP-85A)/HSI Format (DCP-85E/G)....,......... 3-30

3.3.3 Course Select (CRS) Knob 3-4 3-36
.......................................

3.9.2 Approach (or ARC) Format

3.3.4 Course Direct-To (PUSH CRS DIRECT) Button................... 3-4
.....................................

3.9.3 Enroute (or MAP) Format....................................... 3-39

3.3.5 Course Control (CRS CTL) Button ...............................
3-5
3.3.6 Navigation Data (NAV DTA) Pushbutton .........................
3-5 3.10 EFIS Comparators and Master WARN .........................
3-41
3.3.7 Elapsed Timer (ET) Mode Control ....
3-6 3.10.1 Master Warn ..................................................
3-42
3 2 CEAmDpIaratorpaRreset.
3.4 DSP-85A Display Select Panel (DSP), Displays and Controls
.. .

Description 3-6 3-42

.....................................................

3.10.4 EHSI Comparator Warnings....................................

3.4.1 FORMAT Switch................................................ 3-7 3-42
3.10.5 Heading Comparator...........................................
3.4.2 Range (RNG) Knob 3-7 3-43
............................,................

3.10.6 Roll Comparator...............................................

3.4.3 Course (CRS) Switch............................................ 3-7 3-43
3.10.7 Pitch Comparator..............................................
3.4.4 Bearing (BRG) Switch........................................... 3-7 3.10.8 Category II Comparators .......................................
3-43
3.4.5 Decision Height Set (DH SET) Knob............................. 3-8 3.10.9 Category II Outputs............................................ 3-45
3.4.6 Radio Altimeter Test (TST) Pushbutton ..........................
3-8 3.10.10 Category II Excessive Deviation Warnings...................... 3-45
3.4.7 Navigation Data (NAV DTA) Pushbutton .........................
3-8 3.10.11 EFIS System Flags ...........................................
3-46
3.4.8 Second Course (2ND CRS) Pushbutton 3-8
3-47
...........................

3-8 3.11 MFD-85A Multifunction Display Display Formata

3.4.9 Weather (WX) Pushbutton
-
..........

......................................

3.4.10 Vertical Navigation (VNAV) Pushbutton......................... 3-8 3.11.1 Standard MFD-85A Functions ..................................
3-47
3.4.11 Heading Select Knob........................................... 3.9 3.11.2 Additional MFD-85A Functions................................. 3-47
3.4.12 Heading Sync (PUSH HDG SYNC) Button ......................
3-9 3.11.8 MFD-85A Display Formats .....................................
3-48
3.4.13 Course Select Knob ............................................
3.9 3.11.4 MFD-85A Multifunction Display (MFD) Operation ...............
3-50
3A.14 Course Direct-To (PUSH CRS DIRECT) Button.... 3-9 311.5 Page (PGE) and Emergency (EMG) Procedures ..................
3-53
3.11.6 EFIS Self-Test 3-59
3.5 MFD-85A Multifunction Display, Operating Controla ...........
3-9
3.12 Reversionary Modes of Operation 3-59
3.6 WXP-85( )
Weather Radar Panel ...............................
3-11
3.12.1 EFD-85/86( Electronic Flight Display (EFD) Failure)
..............................

3-59
3.6.1 MODE Control.................................................. 3-12 ...........

3-60
GAIN-MAX/MIN Control........................................ 3-12 3.12.2 DPU-85G/86G Display Processor Unit (DPU) Failure ............

3.6.2 3.12.3 DSP-85A Display Select Panel (DSP) Failure 3-60

3.6.3 TILT Control 3-12 ....................

3-61
...................................................

3-13 3.12.4 DCP-85E/G Display Control Panel (DCP) Failure ................

3.6.4 RANGE Control ................................................

3.12.5 MPU-85G/86G Multifunction Processor Unit (MPU) Failure 3-61

3-13
......

3.6.5 Target Alert (TGT) Pushbutton.................................. 3.12.6 MFD-85A Multifunction Display Failure......................... 3-61
3.6.6 Hold (HLD) Pushbutton......................................... 3-13 3-61
3-13 3.12.7 Attitude Switching
3.6.7 Stabilization (STB) Enable Pushbutton ...........................

3.12.8 Compass Switching .........................................

3-61
3.7 WXP-850( Weather Radar Panel ) ..............................
3-13
3.13 Summary of EFIS-85B Symbology .............................
3-62
3.7.1 MODE Control.................................................. 3-13
3-15 3.14 Summary of MFD-85A Annunciators and Flags................ 3-72
3.7.2 GAIN Control ..............,...................................

3.7.3 TILT Control ...................................................

3-15 3.15 Programming MFD-85A Page (PGE) and Emergency (EMG)
3.7.4 RANGE Control ................................................
3-15 Data Using the RDP-300 Remote Data Programmer ...........
3-73
5 Sd (Hro d Clutbter Suppression) Pushbu on .

RDP-300 Remote Data Programmer............................ 3-75

3.16
3.16.1 Programming the MFD-85A Multifunction Display 3-77
3.7.7 SLV (Slave) Pushbutton 3-16 ...............

....................................

3.16.2 Programming a New MFD-85A Multifunction Display 3-77

3.7.8 AUTO (Autotilt) Switch 3-16 ............

3.7.9 Stabilization (STB) Push utton 3-16 3.16.3 Changing an Already Programmed MFD-85A Multifunction
..................................

Display 3-81
3.7.10 SEC (Sector) Pushbutton .......................................
3-16 .....................,....,............................

3.17 Programming MFD-85A Page (PGE) and Emergency (EMG)

3.8 Electronic Attitude Director Indicator (EADJ) Formats Using 3-81
Data with the CEU-85/85A Checklist Entry Unita..............
EFD-85/86( Electronic Flight Display ) .....
3-16
FMM-85 Fan Monitor Module.................................. 3-82
3.8.1 Attitude Display ....................... ........................
3-17 3.18

NOTICE: This section replaces second edition dated 6 April 1989.

 List of Effective Pages *The asterisk indicates pages changed, added, or deleted by the current change.

Page No Issue

*Title............................. 30 Aug 93
*List of Effective Pages ......... 30 Aug 93
*3-1
thru 3-82....................30 Aug 93
*3-83
Added...................... 30 Aug 93
*3-84
Blank Added............... 30 Aug 93

RETAIN THIS RECORD IN THE FRONT OF MANUAL.

Record of Revisions ON RECEIP" OF REVIS ONS, INSERT REVISED PAGES IN THE MANUAL,
AND ENTE DATE INS GRTED AND INITIALS.

REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER

NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED

1st Ed 15 Sep 86 None

2nd Ed 6 Apr 89 None

3rd Ed 30 Aug 93 SIL 1-90

 section
operation

3.1 GENERAL MFD-85A Multifunction Display. Appropriate DCP

mode status information (ie, decision height, HSI
This section of the EFIS instruction book contains a mode, and status of the auxiliary data, bearing
description of the EFIS controls and indicators- pointer, and course arrow/deviation bar) will be
Each unit is discussed in the following paragraphs· stored in nonvolatile memory when power is
removed from the system. This information is used
3.2 DCP-85E/G DISPLAY CONTROL PANEL to initialize the EFIS-85B system in the same config-
(DCP), DISPLAYS AND CONTROLS uration that it was in prior to power down.
DESCRIPTION

Following is a brief description of the DCP controls· 3.2.1 HSI-ARC-MAP Format Switch
Refer to figure 3-1.

The DCP provides the pilot with the controls needed The 3-position HSI-ARC-MAP format switch con-
to select the various operating formats and functions trols the EHSI display format. In the HSI position,
for the EHSI. The DCP also provides EADI and the EHSI full compass rose format is displayed in a
EHSI dimming controls. The only other DCP con- manner very similar to the conventional elec-
trols associated with the EADI are the DH SET knob tromechanical HSI. Information displayed includes
and the radio altimeter test (RA TST) pushbutton. In compass heading, selected heading, selected VOR,
addition to the front panel controls, the DCP receives localizer, MAZ, or LNAV course and deviation
and stores course and heading information from the (including annunciation of deviation type), naviga-
CHP in nonvolatile memory and transmits it to the tion sensor annunciation, digital selected course/
DPU-85G/86G Display Processor Unit associated desired track readout, excessive ILS deviation (when
with that DCP. This same information is also trans- Category II configured), heading sensor annuncia-
mitted to the MPU-85G/86G Multifunction Proces- tion, ILS and heading comparator warnings (ILS
sor Unit, where it is processed for display on the only if Category II configured), to/from information,

T P6- 3l26- Ol7

DCP-85E/G Display Control Panel, Controls and Indicators

Figure 3-1

Revised 30 August 1993 3-1

 operation 523-0773943

back localizer annunciation, distance to station/way- copilot, the onside sensors are VOR 2, LNV
point, glideslope, MGP, or VNAV deviation (if a 2, DME 2 etc, and the cross-side sensors are
VNAV is installed in the aircraft), ground speed, VOR 1, LNV 1, DME 1, etc.
time-to-go,elapsed time or wind, preset course infor-
mation and source annunciation from a second navi- 3.2.2 Range (SEL/RNG) Knob
gation sensor, weather radar target alert, waypoint
alert when LNAV or RNAV is the navigation source, Rotating the SEL/RNG knob selects range on the
and a bearing pointer that can be driven by VOR, EHSI when in ARC or MAP format when weather
LNAV, or ADF sensors as selected on the DCP. radar mode (RDR button) is not selected, and when
the knob is not being used to select a navigation sen-
The ARC position selects an expanded compass seg- sor. A single cyan dashed range mark is in the center
ment (approximately 80 degrees) across the top of of the display and one-half of the full-scale range is
the display with the airplane symbol at the bottom. displayed at the right end of the range arc. Available
This format gives the pilot information similar to full-scale ranges are 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, 200, 300, and
that presented in the full compass rose mode, in an 600 nmi.
enlarged, easily readable format. The preset second
course navigation sensor (if selected by the CRS PRE 3.2.3 Select (SEL/RNG) Knob
button on the DCP) is shown by the VOR or waypoint
symbol and identifier placed in proper rho-theta Rotating the SEL/RNG knob allows the available
position with respect to the aircraft symbol and EHSI navigation sensors to be scanned when the
selected range. Weather radar information can also appropriate menu mode is selected as described
be displayed in this format. below.

The MAP position also uses the expanded compass 3.2.4 Course Active (CRS ACT), Course Preset
segment but places onside VOR and/or waypoint (CRS PRE), and Bearing (BRG) Buttons
symbols for both active selected course and preset
second course in proper rho-theta position with The three DCP buttons (CRS ACT, CRS PRE, and
respect to the aircraft symbol and selected range. A BRG) are used in conjunction with the SEL/RNG
selected course line is drawn through the VOR sym- knob to control the selection of navigation sensors to
bol with its position controlled by the CRS knob on be connected to the EHSI active selected course
the CHP. The station ident is displayed next to the arrow, the preset second course arrow, and the bear-
VOR symbol on the side nearest the center of the ing pointer. Strapping in the interconnect wiring
display. Waypoint strings (up to three waypoints) allows only a certain subset of the possible naviga-
are shown with the waypoint number next to the tion sources to be scanned by the SEL/RNG knob
symbol and with the symbols connected by desired and selected by the CRS ACT, CRS PRE, or BRG
track lines. Weather radar information can also be pushbutton. Once a selection has been made, that
displayed in this format. selection is retained until changed by the user, even
when power is removed from the system.
For both the ARC and MAP formats, range is
selected from the DCP when weather radar mode is a. Course Active (CRS ACT) Button
not selected, or from the WXP when weather radar
The CRS ACT button is used in conjunction with
mode is selected.
the SEL knob to select the navigation source for
the active (solid) selected course arrow. Pushing
Note
the CRS ACT button once selects the menu mode
. and causes the last selected navigation sensor to
The following defimtions of onside sensors
.

appear nonflashing in white in a flashing white

and cross-side sensors are used throughout
box at the left center of the display. Depending on
.

this operation section: The onside sensor is

wiring strapping, rotating the SEL/
.

Interconnect
the navigation sensor normally associated
RNG knob will scan the available navigation sen-
with the side on which the displays appear.
.

sors and cause the available sensors to appear

For example, for the pilot, the onside sen-
flashing in the white box as follows:
sors are VOR 1, LNV 1, DME 1, etc. The
cross-side sensors for the pilot are VOR 2, VOR1 LOC1 TCN1 RNV1 LNV1 INS1 VLF1 LRN1 MLS1
LNV 2, DME 2, etc. Conversely, for the VOR2 LOC2 TCN2 RNV2 LNV2 INS2 VLF2 LRN2 MLS2

Revised 30 August 1993 3-2

 operation 523-0773943

Note Depending on interconnect wiring strapping,

rotating the SEL/RNG knob will sean the availa-
Only those navigation sensors enabled by ble navigation sensors and cause the available
strapping in the interconnect wiring will be sensors to appear as follows:
shown as possible selections.
ADF1 VOR1 TCN1 RNV1 LNV1 INS1 VLF1 LRN1 MLS1
i When the desired sensor is displayed, pushing the ADF2 VOR2 TCN2 RNV2 LNV2 INS2 VLF2 LRN2 MLS2
CRS ACT button a second time connects that sensor
to the active (solid) selected course arrow, and the Note
white box will be replaced with the appropriate non-
flashing annunciator. If the navigation sensor is Only those navigation sensors enabled by
onside VOR/LOC,the navigation sensor annunciator strapping in the interconnect wiring will be
is green. If the navigation sensor is an onside LNAV, shown as possible selections.
the annunciator is white. The annunciators are yel-
low for all cross-side navigation sensors. The infor- Rotating the SEL/RNG knob will cause the sensor
mation shown on the active selected course arrow is annunciation to change from one sensor to the next.
being supplied to the onside flight control system. Pushing the BRG button again connects that source
Pushing the CRS ACT button twice, without rotating to the bearing pointer. Pushing the BRG button a
the SEL/RNG knob, reenables the previous naviga- twice without rotating the SEL/RNG knob will
tion sensor. When the selection is incomplete, the remove the bearing pointer from the EHSI display.
box will flash.
3.2.5 Course Transfer (CRS XFR) Button
b. Preset Second Course (CRS PRE) Button
The preset second course may be automatically
The CRS PRE button is also used in conjunction =
selected as the active selected course by pushing the |
with the SEL/RNG knob to select a second navi-
CRS XFR button. When the CRS XFR button is
gation sensor for the cyan colored preset (dual m
pushed, the current active course arrow and its iden-
.

dashed line) second course arrow. The selection i

tifier are removed from the EHSI display, the preset
.

procedure is similar to that for the active selected

course arrow becomes a single solid line, the color
course arrow except that if the CRS PRE button
changes to the active color, and the navigation sensor
I is pushed twice without rotating the SEL/RNG
annunciator is moved to the upper (active) location.
knob, the preset course arrow will be removed
. The previous active selected course sensor now
from the EHSI display. This feature allows
becomes the preset second course and is removed
presetting a course and then recalling it when
from the display. It may be recalled as the dual
desired. The preset second course is used for ref-
dashed cyan preset second course by pushing the i
erence only. The information shown is not availa-
CRS PRE button twice.
ble to the flight control system and VOR
deviation is always angular. The navigation sen~ Note
sor selected for the preset second course appears
in cyan in a box at the left of the display immedi-
Depending on the aircraft installation, if
ately below the navigation
.

sensor annunciation
the FCS is not in HDG mode and the source
for the active selected course.
for the active course arrow is changed or if
c. Bearing (BRG) Button the CRS XFR function is selected on the
DCP, the FCS will automatically clear to
The BRG button operates the same as the CRS heading hold mode and the NAV mode must
PRE button except, when first pushed, it calls up be reengaged if desired.
a magenta bearing pointer and a navigation sen-
sor annunciator for the bearing pointer. The sen- 3.2.6 Decision Height Set (DH SET) Knob
sor annunciation is in the lower left with the
letters BRG, in magenta, above the sensor type. If The DH knob is used to set the decision height dis-
the sensor is an onside VOR or ADF, the sensor played in the lower right-hand corner of the EADI.
annunciation is green. If the sensor is an onside Clockwise rotation of the knob increases decision
LNAV, the sensor annunciation is white. All height. The DH set value is held in nonvolatile mem-
cross-side sensors are annunciated in yellow. ory when power is removed from the unit.

Revised 30 August 1993 3-3

 operation 523-0773943

3.2.7 Radio Altimeter Test (RA TST) and can be used with any configuration of the EFIS-
Pushbutton 85B system. The panels also provide for selection of
course direct-to and heading sync. Additionally,
The RA TST pushbutton is a momentary action ground speed, time-to-go, elapsed time, and wind
switch that enables the radio altimeter test function· direction/speed are selected from the CHP. An ET
When pushed, the EADI displays the radio altitude button for initiating and completing timing func-
that is output by the radio altimeter when it is in tions is also provided. The CHP-85D provides dual
self-test. DH annunciation is displayed if the DH set independent ground speed, time-to-go, elapsed time,
value is greater than the test altitude- and wind direction/speed capabilities. In the 5-tube
EFIS system, one CHP-85D or two CHP-86Bs are
3.2.8 Weather Radar (RDR) Pushbutton required.

The RDR button adds weather radar information to 3.3.1 Heading Select (HDG) Knob
the EHSI when ARC or MAP format is being dis-
played and WX or NORM mode (WXP-85( )) or WX, A single HDG knob in the center of the CHP-85D is
I WX+T or TURB mode (WXP-850( )) has been
selected on the WXP. At power on, radar data is not
used to simultaneously position the heading cursors
on both of the EHSIs. The HDG select knob on the
displayed. The first push of the RDR button adds CHP-86B controls the heading cursor on only one
weather radar information to the display. The sec- side of the aircraft (two CHP-86Bs are required for a
ond push removes the weather radar information. 5-tube EFIS-85B system). In an installation with two
CHP-86Bs, the HDG knob on the left side CHP also
When weather radar information is being displayed, controls the heading cursor on the MFD unless con-
range is controlled by the RANGE switch on the trol has been transferred to the right side. Dual
WXP-85( )/850( ) Weather Radar Panel. The range increment/decrement encoders are attached to the
will appear at the right end of a solid cyan range HDG knob(s). Each of the encoders controls circuits
mark (center of the EHSI) and the weather radar in one of the DCPs, where the actual selected heading
mode will appear at the left end of the range mark· value is stored in nonvolatile memory.

3.2.9 DIM Control 3.3.2 Heading Sync (PUSH HDG SYNC)

Button
The DIM control consists of a pair of concentric
knobs that control each crt's intensity. One knob con- The HDG knob includes a PUSH HDG SYNCbutton
trols the EADI; the other controls the EHSI. The which, when pushed, causes the heading cursor to
knobs are sized so that they normally turn together, rotate and match the airplane heading under the lub-
but may be turned independently to balance the dis- ber line on the EHSI.
plays.
3.3.3 Course Select (CRS) Knob
3.3 CHP-85D/86B COURSE HEADING PANEL
(CHP), DISPLAYS AND CONTROLS Two selected CRS knobs (CRS 1 and CRS 2) are
DESCRIPTION located on the CHP-85D, one for the course arrow on
the pilot's EHSI and one for the copilot's EHSI. The
Following is a brief description of the CHP controls. single CRS select knob on the CHP-86B controls the
Refer to figure 3-2. course arrow on only one side of the aircraft (two
CHP-86Bs are required for a 5-tube EFIS-85B sys-
The CHP provides control of the course and heading tem). Each CRS knob is connected to an increment/
select functions for various configurations of the decrement encoder. Each of the encoders controls
EFIS-85B systems. The CHP provides outputs to the circuits in one of the DCPs, where the actual selected
DCPs, where the data is stored in nonvolatile mem- course values are stored in nonvolatile memory.
ory and sent to the respective DPU-85G/86G Display
Processor Unit associated with that DCP. 3.3.4 Course Direct-To (PUSH CRS DIRECT)
Button
The CHP-85D provides two CRS select controls (one
for each half of a 5-tube system) with a common The CRS knob includes a center PUSH CRS DIRECT
HDG select function. The CHP-86B provides a single button which provides a direct-to function. When the
CRS select control and a single HDG select control, PUSH CRS DIRECT button is pushed, the course

Revised 30 August 1998 8-4

 operation 523-0773943

CHP- 85D

CHP- 86 B

TP6-45 \3-017-0

CHP-85D and CHP-86B Course Heading Panels, Controls and Indicators

Figure 3-2

arrow associated with the CRS CTL button is auto- 3.3.6 Navigation Data (NAV DTA) Pushbutton
matically rotated directly toward the station until
the VOR deviation is zero. The NAV DTA button provides sequential display of
TTG (time-to-go), GSP (groundspeed), ET (elapsed
time), or wind information (if available) in the upper
3.3.5 Course Control (CRS CTL) Button
right corner of the EHSI. Time-to-go and ground
speed are associated with the navigation sensor cur-
The CRS CTL button determines whether the course
rently driving the active selected course arrow. The
knob is controlling the active selected course arrow legends and readouts follow the same color as the
or the preset second course arrow. An appropriately
primary course arrow annunciation. Wind, time-to-
-

colored, knob-shaped course control annunciator

go, and ground speed displays are dashed in the
.

symbol (greenfor VOR/LOC, white for LNAV, or yel- DPU/MPU -001

status configured units if valid data

low for active selected course, depending on whether is not being received. Time-to-go and ground speed
the navigation sensor is onside or cross-side, or cyan displays are blanked in the status DPU/MPU
-002

for preset second course) is displayed next to the

units
navigation sensor annunciation to indicate which go
course arrow is currently being controlled by the
CRS knob. 4 y

Revised 30 August 1993 3-5

 operation 523-0773943

3.3.7 Elapsed Timer (ET) Mode Control 3.4 DSP-85A DISPLAY SELECT PANEL (DSP),
DISPLAYS AND CONTROLS
When ET mode has been selected by pushing the DESCRIPTION
NAV DTA button, the output from an elapsed timer
is displayed on the EHSI. The timer is controlled by
the ET button on the CHP. The timer has three Following is a brief description of the DSP controls.
modes: reset, start, and stop. Each time the external Refer to figure 3-3.
switch is actuated, the timer advances to the next
mode in the sequence. In reset mode, the display will
indicate 00:00. When start mode is initiated, the The DSP provides for pilot input of selected heading
timer begins counting. Minutes and seconds are dis- and selected course for the EFIS system. It also pro-
played in XX:XX format from 00:00 to 59:59. Continu- vides the user with the controls needed to select the
ing from 59:59, the format switches to HZ:XX, various operating formats and functions for the
displaying hours and minutes from H1:00 to H9:59. EHSI. The DSP controls associated with the EADI
Beyond H9:59, the display indicates (overrun).
-÷-
are the DH SET knob, the radio altimeter test (TST)
Going to stop mode stops the timer, and the present pushbutton, and the VNAV button (if the airplane is
count on the display is held until the timer sequence equipped with a VNAV system). In addition to the
is advanced to reset mode again. After the timer is front panel controls, the DSP stores course and head-
counting, TTG; GSP, or wind can be selected via the ing information in nonvolatile memory and trans-
NAV DTA button without disturbing the ET count. mits it to the DPU-85G/86G Display Processor Unit
NAV DTA selection is stored in nonvolatile memory associated with that DSP. This same information is
and the last selection will appear at the next power also transmitted to the MPU-85G/86G Multifunction
on. If ET is that selection, the display will reset to Processor Unit, where it is processed for display on
00:00 at power on. the MFD-85A Multifunction Display.

I
i
i
i

TP 6 -

3125 -Ol7

DSP-85A Display Select Panel, Controls and Indicators

Figure 3-3

Revised 30 August 1993 3-6

 operation 523-0773943

3.4.1 FORMAT Switch For both the APPR and ENR formats, range is
selected from the DSP when weather radar mode is
The 3-position FORMAT switch controls the EHSI not selected or from the WXP when weather radar
display format. In the ROSE position, the EHSI full mode is selected.
compass rose format is displayed in a manner very
similar to the conventional electromechanical HSI. Note

Information displayed includes compass heading, The following definitions of onside sensors
selected heading, selected VOR, localizer, MAZ, or and cross-side sensors are used throughout
LNAV course and deviation (including annunciation this operation section: The o.nside sensor is
of deviation type), navigation source annunciation, the navigation sensor normally associated
digital selected course/desired track readout, exces- with the side on which the displays appear.
sive ILS deviation (when Category II configured), For example, for the pilot, the onside sen-
heading source annunciation, ILS and heading com- sors are VOR 1, LNV 1, DME 1, etc. The
parator warnings (ILS only if Category II con- cross-side sensors for the pilot are VOR 2,
figured), to/from information, back localizer LNV 2, DME 2, etc. Conversely, for the
annunciation, distance to station/waypoint, copilot, the onside sensors are VOR 2, LNV
glideslope, MGP, or VNAV deviation (VNAV is not 2, DME 2 etc, and the cross-side sensors are
available when certain statuses of the DSP are used), VOR 1, LNV 1, DME 1, etc.
ground speed, time-to-go, elapsed time or wind,
course information and source annunciation from a 3.4.2 Range (RNG) Knob
second navigation source, weather radar target alert,
waypoint alert when LNAV or RNAV is the naviga- The RNG knob, concentric with the FORMAT switch,
tion source, and a bearing pointer that can be driven selects range on the EHSI when in APPR or ENR
by VOR, LNAV, or ADF sources as selected on the format and when weather radar mode (WX button)
display select panel. is not selected. A single cyan dashed range mark is in
the center of the display and one-half of the full-
The APPR (approach) position selects an expanded scale range is displayed at the right end of the range
compass segment (approximately 80 degrees) across are. Available full-scale ranges are 5, 10, 25, 50, 100,
the top of the display with the airplane symbol at the 200, 300, and 600 nmi.
bottom. This format gives the pilot information sim-
ilar to that presented in the full compass rose mode, 3.4.3 Course (CRS) Switch
in an enlarged, easily readable format. The second
course navigation sensor (if selected by the 2ND CRS The rotary CRS switch selects the navigation sensor
button on the DSP) is shown by the VOR or waypoint to be displayed on the primary course arrow (solid
symbol and identifier placed in proper rho-theta single bar course arrow) on the EHSI. The three pos-
position with respect to the airplane symbol and sible selections are OFF, VOR/LOC, and LNAV (lat-
selected range. Weather radar information can also eral navigation system). The applicable navigation
be displayed in this format. sensor is annunciated at the left center of the dis-
play. In the OFF position, no course arrow is dis-
The ENR (enroute) position also uses the expanded played, but a magenta heading line connects the
compass segment but places VOR and/or waypoint airplane symbol and the heading cursor if in APPR
symbols for both primary and second course in or ENR format. The sensors driving the primary
proper rho-theta position with respect to the air- course arrow in the VOR/LOC and LNAV positions
plane symbol and selected range. A selected course are strapped for sensor 1 or sensor 2 at the time of
line is drawn through the VOR symbol with its posi- installation.
tion controlled by the CRS knob on the DSP. The
station ident is displayed next to the VOR symbol on 3.4.4 Bearing (BRG) Switch
the side nearest the center of the display. Waypoint
strings (up to three waypoints) are shown with the The rotary BRG switch selects the navigation sensor
waypoint number next to the symbol and with the to be displayed on the EHSI bearing pointer. The five
symbols connected by desired track lines. Weather possible selections are OFF (no bearing pointer dis-
radar information can also be displayed in this for- play), VOR 1, VOR 2, WPT, and ADF. The sensors
mat. driving the bearing pointer in the WPT and ADF

Revised 30 August 1993 3-7

 operation 523-0773943

positions are strapped for sensor 1 or sensor 2 at the without disturbing the ET count. NAV DTA selection
time of installation. is stored in nonvolatile memory and the last selec-
tion will appear at the next power on. If ET is that
3.4.5 Decision Height Set (DH SET) Knob selection, the display will reset to 00:00 at power on.

The DH SET knob is used to set the decision height 3.4.8 Second Course (2ND CRS) Pushbutton
displayed in the lower right-hand corner of the
EADI. Clockwise rotation of the knob increases deci- The 2ND CRS button allows information from a sec-
sion height. The DH SET value is held in nonvolatile ond navigation source to be displayed on the EHSI.
memory when power is removed from the unit. The second course arrow is displayed in cyan as a
solid arrowhead with a dual dashed shaft. The appli-
3.4.6 Radio Altimeter Test (TST) Pushbutton cable navigation sensor is annunciated in cyan below
the primary course arrow sensor annunciator. At
The TST pushbutton (part of DH SET knob) is a power on, no second course is displayed. The first
momentary action that enables the radio
switch push of the 2ND CRS button annunciates LNV1 and
altimeter test function. When pushed, the EADI dis- the selected sensor is LNAV 1. The second push of the i
plays the radio altitude that is output by the radio 2ND CRS button annunciates LNV2 and the selected
altimeter when it is in self-test(50 ft for ALT-50/55)· sensor is LNAV 2 (this selection may be inhibited as
DH annunciation is displayed if the DH SET value is an installation option). The third push of the 2ND
greater than the test altitude· CRS button annunciates VOR1, and the fourth push
annunciates VOR2. The next push of the 2ND CRS
3.4.7 Navigation Data (NAV DTA) Pushbutton button turns the second course arrow off again.
The NAV DTA button provides sequential display of 3.4.9 Weather (WX) Pushbutton
TTG (time-to-go), GSP (groundspeed), ET (elapsed
time), or wind information (if available) in the upper The WX button adds weather radar information to
right corner of the EHSI. Time-to-go and ground the EHSI when APPR or ENR format is being dis-
speed are associated with the navigation sensor cur- played and WX or NORM mode (WXP-85( )) or WX,
rently driving the primary course arrow. The legends WX+T or TURB mode (WXP-850( )) has been i
and readouts follow the same color as the primary selected on the WXP. At power on, radar data is not
course arrow annunciation. Wind, time-to-go, and displayed. The first push of the WX button adds
ground speed displays are dashed in the DPU/MPU weather radar information to the display. The sec-
-001
status configured units if valid data is not being ond push removes the weather radar information.
received. Time-to-go and ground speed displays are
blanked in the status DPU/MPU units.
-002 When weather radar information is being displayed,
range is controlled by the RANGE switch on the
When ET mode has been selected by pushing the WXP-85( )/850( ) Weather Radar Panel. The range
NAV DTA button, the output from an elapsed timer will appear at the right end of the cyan range mark
is displayed on the EHSI. The timer is controlled by (center of the EHSI) and the weather radar mode
an external airframe-supplied switch. The timer has will appear at the left end of the range mark.
three modes: reset, start, and stop. Each time the
external switch is actuated, the timer advances to 3.4.10 Vertical Navigation (VNAV) Pushbutton
the next mode in the sequence. In reset mode, the (Optional, will not be on all DSP-85As)
display will indicate 00:00.
The VNAV button enables the presentation of verti-
When start mode is initiated, the timer begins count- cal navigation data on the EHSI. At power on, verti-
ing. Minutes and seconds are displayed in XX:XX for- cal navigation data is displayed. The first push of the
mat from 00:00 to 59:59. Continuing from 59:59, the VNAV button removes vertical navigation data to
format switches to HZ:XX, displaying hours and the display. The second push adds the vertical navi-
minutes from H1:00 to H9:59. Beyond H9:59, the dis- gation data.
play indicates (overrun). Going to stop mode
--:--

stops the timer, and the present count on the display When using a digital VNAV unit, it is possible to
is held until the timer sequence is advanced to reset receive VNAV and glideslope data at the same time.
mode again. After the timer is counting, TTG, GSP, In this case, glideslope will be displayed on the EADI
or wind can be selected via the NAV DTA button and VNAV on the EHSI. When glideslope capture

Revised 30 August 1993 3-8

 operation 523-0773943

occurs, VNAV will automatically be replaced by GS continuously variable and the selected course value
on the EHSI. It should be noted that VNAV data will is stored in nonvolatile memory. This value is
never appear on the EADI. retained if OFF or LNAV is selected and/or power is
lost.
3.4.11 Heading Select Knob

The heading knob is used to position the heading 3.4.14 Course Direct-To (PUSH CRS DIRECT)
cursor on the onside EHSI. The heading knob on the
Button
left side DSP also controls the heading cursor on the
MFD unless control has been transferred to the right
side. The heading knob is continuously variable, and The course knob includes a center PUSH CRS
the selected heading value is stored in nonvolatile DIRECT button which provides a direct-to function.
memory. This value is retained if power is lost' When the PUSH CRS DIRECT button is pushed and
if VOR is the navigation sensor being displayed on
3.4.12 Heading Sync (PUSH HDG SYNC)
the primary course arrow, the course arrow is auto-
Button
matically rotated directly toward the station until
The heading knob includes a PUSH HDG SYNC but. the VOR deviation is zero.
ton which, when pushed, causes the heading cursor to
rotate and match the airplane heading under the lub-
ber line on the EHSI. 3.5 MFD-85A MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY,
OPERATING CONTROLS
3.4.13 Course Select Knob

The course knob controls the position of the VOR Following is a brief description of the MFD and its
course arrow for the onside VOR. The course knob is controls. Refer to figure 3-4.

TP6-2368-Ol7

MFD-85A Multifunction Display, Operating Controls

Figure 3-4

Revised 30 August 1993 3-9

 operation 523-0773943

The multifunction display is a multicolor ert display INT Provides an adjustable intensity
unit that mounts in the instrument panel in the (intensity) control for MFD display brightness.
space normally occupied by the weather radar indi- .

Display select The four unlabeled pushbuttons on

cator. Standard display functions include weather
radar, pictorial navigation map, and page data.
pushbuttons the right provide additional display
Additional functions are available when the mul- control for navigation, page, emer-
tifunction display is used with a flight management gency, and remote modes of opera-
system such as the Collins FMS-90, and include way- tion. Appropriate "labels" are
point definition, display of multiple waypoints, and displayed to the left of these buttons
remote data. when procedures dictate menu fune-

PWR (power) Used to turn the MFD on or off. The tions such as index or sensor selec-
mode that was selected when power tion.
is turned off will be automatically Joystick The "joystick" is a multiple position
reselected when power is reapplied- switch (lower right corner) which is
. used in NAV, RMT, PGE, and EMG
Warnmg
mode operations. In NAV mode, the
Turning power off to the MFD or selecting a joystick locates an MFD enterable
mode other than the RDR mode on the MFD waypoint that can be transferred to
does not turn off or change the operating the lateral navigation system, if
mode of the radar receiver/transmitter. The capable of receiving data. In RMT
WXP controls the weather radar receiver/ mode, the joystick can be used to
transmitter operating modes. For installa- slew through pages or chapters of
tions with a WXP-85( ) the radar transmits data if the remote system has the
when the WXP-85( ) MODE switch is set to proper interface. In PGE or EMG
the WX, NORM, or MAP modes. For instal¯ mode, the joystick is used to view
lations with a WXP-850( ) the radar trans¯ different chapter titles and to move
mits when the MODE switch is set to the to new chapters.
TGT, MAP, WX, WX+T, or TURB modes.
Line reverse Moves the cursor back (up the list)
RDR (radar) Allows detectable weather to be dis-
(delta, A) in the PGE or EMG mode and
played (can be used with NAV but-
increases NAV map range when
ton).
RDR is not selected.
NAV Enables navigation data to be
(navigation) selected and displayed (can be used Line advance Moves the cursor ahead (down the
with RDR button). (inverted list) in the PGE or EMG mode and
delta, V) decreases NAV map range when
RMT (remote) Enables up to four remote sources of
RDR is not selected.
page data to be selected and dis-
played one at a time· Note
PGE (page) Allows user selection, control, and
or EMG entry of alphanumeric information. The line advance and reverse buttons
(emergency) Up to 100 pages of information are change the navigation map range when the
selectable for combined page and radar display is not active. 5- and 600-nmi
emergency use. ranges are also available, with midrange
DATA jack Allows for remote programming, mark annunciations of 2.5 and 300 nmi,
indexing, and revision of page and respectively, when RDR is not selected.
emergency data. The Collins RDP. When RDR is selected and the WXP mode
300 Remote Data Programmer or switch is in TEST, WX, NORM, or MAP
the CEU-85/85A Checklist Entry position, the radar range control has prior-
Unit is plugged into the DATA jack. ity over the navigation map range.

Revised 30 August 1993 3-10

 operation 523-0773943

RCL (recall) Allows viewing of previously skip- 3.6 WXP-85( ) WEATHER RADAR PANEL
ped lines when in the PGE or EMG
mode. If in PGE or EMG mode and The WXP-85( ) Weather Radar Panel provides the
NAV or RMT is selected, then push_ data processing, mode control, range selection, and
system operating controls for the display of weather
ing RCL immediately returns the
radar information on the MFD-85A Multifunction
display to the line in the PGE or
-

Display and the EFD-85/86( ) Electronic Flight Dis-

EMG chapter that was being dis-
play. The WXP-85C and -85D are identical in appear-
played prior to selecting NAV or
ance to earlier WXP-85A and -85B versions, but are
RMT
different in function. The WXP-85C and -85D both
SKP (skip) Moves the cursor past a line in the provide a 4-color (green,yellow, red, and magenta)
PGE or EMG mode without chang- display with PAC Alert (Path Attenuation Correc-
ing its color. This line is recallable tion).
at any time prior to chapter exit.
The following paragraphs describe the WXP-85C and
CLR (clear) Resets all lines of a selected chapter -85D. If a WXP-85A or -85B is installed, there will be
to yellow when in the PGE or EMG no fourth color (magenta) or PAC Alert feature.
mode. Refer to figure 3-5.

MODE © GAIN @ TILT © RANGE

WXP-85A/C

MODE RANGE
5 O
OSFF 1025 203000
MAP

GAMIN MAX

TILT
Collins -10

WXP-85B/D
TP6-l982-Oll

WXP-85( ) Weather Radar Panel, Controls and Indicators

Figure 3-5

Revised 30 August 1993 3-11

 operation 523-0773943

3.6.1 MODE Control behind it may not be displayed. With the PAC Alert
feature, a yellow band will occasionally appear at the
The MODE control is a rotary switch that is used to outer perimeter of the range being displayed. When-
select the various operating modes of the weather ever this band appears, that portion of the radar's
radar system. These modes are as follows: scan may be missing certain distant targets that are
masked by intervening areas of rainfall.
OFF -
Removes power from the weather radar
receiver/transmitter. (The MFD has a separate NORM -
Same as WX mode except automatic cyclic
PWR switch that must be on in order for the MFD to contour circuits are disabled. The most reflective
operate.) targets will appear in magenta, and indicate rainfall
rates of 2 inches per hour or more. The next most
STBY Power is applied to the radar system and a
-

reflective targets will appear in solid red (will not

60-second warmup period is initiated for the WXT- alternate between red and black). NORM is displayed
250B receiver/transmitter. The weather display, in the upper left of the MFD and at the left end of the
radar transmitter, and radar antenna scan drive cir¯ range mark on the EHSI if weather radar is selected.
cuits are inhibited during the 60-second warmup
period and whenever STBY is selected. Approxi- MAP -

Selecting MAP mode also disables the auto-

mately 20 seconds after turning the MFD PWR matic cyclic contour circuits. MAP and range annun-
switch on, one cyan range mark, a white airplane ciators will be displayed in cyan. Ground targets will
symbol, a white compass sector, the MFD's green appear in cyan, yellow, and magenta (least reflective
I operating mode annunciators, and the word STBY
should all appear on the MFD (adjust INT control on
to most reflective). The range mark is green.

the MFD as required). STBY will also appear at the 3.6.2 GAIN-MAX/MIN Control
left end of the range mark on the EHSI if weather
radar is selected. The GAIN-MAX/MIN control is a 5-position switch
that controls the gain of the radar receiver. The
TEST Initiates the radar self-test function. After
- highest gain occurs in MAX position, with each of
system warmup time (approximately 60 seconds) has the other four positions reducing receiver sensitivity
elapsed, the radar self-test display should appear. by 6 dB for a total reduction of 24 dB in the MIN
For a normal-size test pattern, the 25-nmi RANGE position. The GAIN-MAX/MIN control can be used
should be selected. Selecting other ranges will with the WX, NORM, and MAP modes. The ability of
increase or decrease the test pattern size, resulting a target to be displayed is dependent on the particu-
in an incomplete test pattern. TEST will be displayed lar GAIN setting used. All detectable targets will be
in the upper left of the MFD and at the left end of the shown in one of four distinct colors: green, yellow,
range mark on the EHSI if weather radar is selected. red, and magenta (least reflective to most reflective)
for WX and NORM; or cyan, yellow, and magenta
WX -
The radar antenna begins to scan and, after (least to most reflective) for MAP, plus the black
the 60-second warmup period has elapsed, the radar indicator screen. If any GAIN position except MAX
transmitter is energized. This position also selects is selected, the mode annunciator (upper left corner
the weather detection mode and enables the auto- of MFD and left end of range mark on EHSI if
matic cyclic contour circuits. Contouring storm cells weather radar is selected) will alternate between
alternate between red and black at a 1-Hz rate. GAIN and the selected mode at a 1-Hz rate (that is,
Detectable weather will appear as one of four colors: GAIN-MAP-GAIN-MAP, etc). The alternating
green, yellow, red, and magenta (least reflective to words serve to remind the user that the system is
most reflective). The radar's STC (sensitivity time operating in a reduced gain condition and some
control) circuit allows distant targets to appear with targets may not be displayed.
the same relative brightness or intensity as close-in
targets. 3.6.3 TILT Control

When using a WXP-85C or -85D with WX mode The radar antenna is fully stabilized in both the
selected, the PAC Alert (Path Attenuation Correc- pitch and roll axis. The TILT control manually
tion) feature is automatically enabled. The purpose adjusts the pitch axis of the stabilized radar antenna
of PAC Alert is to alert the pilot when the radar from approximately +15 to -15 degrees to allow the
encounters a target having rainfall rates heavy best target presentation. (When stabilization (STB)
enough to attenuate the beam so much that targets is on, the TILT control continues to function.)

Revised 30 August 1993 3-12

 operation 523-0773943

3.6.4 RANGE Control pilot that the system is in the HOLD mode and the
weather radar display is not being updated.
The RANGE control is a rotary switch that is used to
select the maximum display range of the weather Note
radar system. All of the selected ranges provide one
range mark in the center of the display with half- If the GAIN-MAX/MIN control is not at
scale range annunciation at the right-hand end of MAX gain and hold (HLD) is selected, the
the range mark. The selectable ranges and range weather radar mode annunciator in the
mark annunciations are as follows: upper left corner of the MFD and the left
end of the EHSI range mark will alternate
SELECTED RANGE, RANGE MARK
between GAIN and HOLD at a 1-Hz rate
nmi (MAXIMUM) ANNUNCIATION .

with no operating mode displayed.

10 5
3.6.7 Stabilization (STB) Enable Pushbutton
25 12.5
50 25 The latching push on/push off STB switch enables or
100 50 disables the radar antenna pitch and roll stabiliza-
200 100 tion circuits. The switch is normally pushed in to the
300 150 on position. The switch is out for the off position, in
case of gyro input signal failure to the radar
3.6.5 Target Alert (TGT) Pushbutton antenna.
The target alert feature notifies the user when a
return signal of contour strength is detected within 3.7 WXP-850( ) WEATHER RADAR PANEL
60 to 160 nmi and ±15 degrees of dead ahead, regard-
The WXP-850( ) Weather Radar Panel provides data
less of RANGE selected. The TGT pushbutton is a
processing, mode control, range selection, and other
latching push-on/push-off switch. If RDR has been
system operating controls for the TWR-850 Turbu-
selected on the MFD with target alert enabled on the
lence Weather Radar System. The WXP-850A and
WXP and not in OFF, STBY, or MAP mode, a non- WXP-850B both provide a 4-color (green,yellow, red,
flashing yellow box with the yellow letter T inscribed
and magenta, plus the black screen) display with the
will appear to the right of the lubber line on both the
following features: air turbulence detection, PAC
EHSI and the MFD. The T annunciation will flash
Alert (Path Attenuation Correction), target alert,
when a target is detected. The target alert function is
and GCS (groundclutter suppushion).
automatically enabled on the MFD (but not the
EHSI's) for all other MFD formats (NAV, RMT, The following paragraphs describe the WXP-850A
PGE, and EMG), regardless of the position of the and -850B. Refer to figure 3-6.
WXP TGT pushbutton. If the TGT switch is on and
MAP mode is selected, the target alert circuits are 3.7.1 MODE Control
disabled (T will not be displayed) but will again
become functional when WX or NORM mode is The MODE control is a rotary switch that is used to
reselected on the WXP. select the various operating modes of the weather
radar system. These modes are as follows:
3.6.6 Hold (HLD) Pushbutton
OFF -
Removes power from the TWR-850 system
Pushing the nonlatching momentary action HLD receiver/transmitter/antenna. OFF will be dis-
button allows the weather display on the MFD and played in cyan in the upper left of the MFD. OFF
EHSI (if weather radar is selected) to be frozen until does not remove power from the WXP-850( ) control
the button is pushed again or until power is removed panel. (The MFD has a separate PWR switch that
from the system. Target updating will not occur must be on in order for the MFD to operate.)
when operating in the HOLD mode. The weather
radar mode annunciator (upper left corner of MFD STBY Power is applied to the RTA-85X Receiver-
-

and left end of range mark on EHSI if weather radar Transmitter-Antenna with a short (approximately
is selected) will alternate between HOLD and the 3-second) initialization period. During the initializa-
selected mode at a 1-Hz rate (HOLD-WX-HOLD- tion process, the RTA drives its antenna to the
WX, etc). The alternating words serve to remind the boresight position (0 degree azimuth and 0 degree

Revised 30 August 1993 3-13

 operation 523-0773943

WXP-8508

WXP-850A

MODE SELECT
(ROTARY SMTCH) RANGE SELECT
(TURB POSIMON IS (ROTARY SWTCH)
SPRING LOADED)
SECTOR SCAN SELECT
GROUND CLUTTER SUPPRESSION (PUSH ON/OFF)
(PUSH ON/OFF) (ON ± 30 SCAN)
=

RECEIVER GAIN SELECT _

STABILIZABON SELECT
(ROTARY SWTCH) (PUSH ON/OFF, IN = ON)

HOLD MODE SELECT ANTENNA BLT CONTROL

(PUSH ON/OFF) (-15° TO +15 FROM 0)

INFLIGHT STAB1LIZABON MODE SELECT AUTO T1LT CORRECEON SELECT

(RECESSED PUSH BUTTON) (PUSH ON/OFF, OUT ON)
=

SLAVE/MASTER CONTROL SELECT

(PUSH ON/OFF, IN ON
=
SLAVE)
= CGO-0273-01-AC-0

WXP-850A/B Weather Radar Panel, Controls and Indicators

Figure 3-6

tilt). The antenna will stay in this position as long as level of turbulence. The last are at the perimeter is
STBY is selected. The weather display, radar trans- yellow and represents PAC Alert. TEST will be dis-
mitter, and, after initialization, the radar antenna played in cyan in the upper left of the MFD and at
scan drive circuits are inhibited whenever STBY is the left end of the range mark on the EHSI if
selected. Approximately 20 seconds after turning the weather radar is selected.
MFD PWR switch on, one cyan range mark with the
word STBY in cyan at its left end, a white airplane TGT -
Target alert mode allows weather targets to
symbol, a white compass sector, and the MFD oper- be detected and annunciated when the MFD is being
ating mode (ie, RDR), in green, at the upper-left cor- used to display other data (eg, checklists, remote
ner should all appear on the MFD. It may be data, etc). When target mode is selected, the radar
necessary to adjust the INT (intensity) control on the transmitter is energized, the antenna scans, and a
MFD. nonflashing yellow box with TGT inscribed appears
to the right of the lubber line on the MFD. Target
alert range is from 7 to 200 nmi (50-nmi maximum
TEST -
Initiates the radar self-test function and range for turbulence detection) and ±15 degrees of
causes the radar self-test display to appear. Any dead ahead, regardless of range selected on WXP.
range can be selected for the self-test function. The TGT flashes when a precipitation target is detected
radar self-test display consists of eight colored arcs within range. The TGT annunciation alternates with
evenly spaced across the full sector of the display. TRB when turbulence is detected. This function is
Each are represents a distinct precipitation intensity enabled on the MFD and EHSI whenever the TGT
level. The inner two arcs are the black screen itself mode is selected on the WXP-850( ).
and represent no detectable moisture. The next are is
green and represents the least intense precipitation MAP Selecting MAP mode automatically disables
-

level. Progressing outward, the fourth are is yellow, the PAC alert and GCS features. MAP and range
followed by a red are and a double ring of magenta. annunciators will be displayed in cyan, and the range
Magenta represents the most intense precipitation arc will be displayed in white (the range are is cyan

Revised 30 August 1993 3-14

 operation 523-0773943

in all other radar modes). Ground targets will appear 3.7.2 GAIN Control
in cyan, green, yellow, and magenta (least reflective
to most reflective). MAP will be displayed in cyan in The GAIN control is a 7-position switch that controls
the upper left of the MFD. the gain of the radar receiver. Each of the minus
settings (-1,
-2, -3) reduces receiver sensitivity below
WX --

Selecting WX mode allows the weather radar the CAL level by 6 dB for a total reduction of 18 dB
when in the position. Adjusting the GAIN control
to operate in the weather detection mode.
-3

system
Detectable weather is color coded; the black screen in the clockwise (+ direction) increases the system
represents no detectable moisture, while detectable sensitivity by appropriating sensitivity factors from
weather appears as one of four colors: green, yellow,
other features. The GAIN control can be used in the
red, or magenta (least reflective to most reflective).
MAP, WX, WX+T, and TURB modes. The ability of a
MAP will be displayed in cyan in the upper left of the target to be displayed is dependent on the particular
MFD. GAIN setting used. All detectable targets will be
shown in one of four distinct colors: green, yellow,
red, and magenta (least reflective to most reflective).
When using a WXP-850A or -850B with WX mode If any GAIN position except CAL is selected (CAL is
selected, the PAC Alert (Path Attenuation Correc- not annunciated), the selected GAIN is annunciated
tion) feature is automatically enabled. The purpose (G-1, G+3, etc) in the upper left corner of the MFD
of PAC Alert is to alert the pilot when the radar and lower left corner of the EHSI.
encounters a target having rainfall rates heavy
enough to attenuate the beam so much that targets
3.7.3 TILT Control
behind it may not be displayed. With the PAC Alert
feature, a yellow band will occasionally appear at the
outer perimeter of the range being displayed. When. The radar antenna is fully stabilized in both the
ever this band appears, that portion of the radar's pitch and roll axis. The TILT control manually
sean may be missing certain distant targets that are adjusts the pitch axis of the stabilized radar antenna
masked by intervening areas of rainfall. from approximately +15 to -15
degrees to allow the
best target presentation. (When stabilization (STB)
is on, the TILT control continues to function.) The tilt
WX+T -
Same as WX mode except that precipita- angle is displayed in tenths of a degree (eg, +10.7,
tion-related turbulence is detected and displayed in _5.3, etc) in cyan at the right end of the range mark
the 5, 10, 25, and 50 nmi RANGE switch positions· on the MFD and EHSI.
Turbulence cannot be detected at ranges greater
than 50 nmi. Detectable weather is color coded; the
black screen represents no detectable moisture, 3.7.4 RANGE Control
while detectable weather appears as one of four
colors: green, yellow, red, and magenta (least reflec- The RANGE control is a rotary switch that is used to
tive to most reflective). Detected turbulence will be select the maximum display range of the weather
displayed in magenta and consist of precipitation radar system. All of the selected ranges provide one
areas where horizontal wind velocity shifts in excess range mark in the center of the display with half-
of 16.40 feet per second (5 metres per second) are scale range annunciation at the right-hand end of
detected. WX+T will be displayed in cyan in the the range mark. The selectable ranges and range
upper left of the MFD. mark annunciations are as follows:

SELECTED RANGE, RANGE MARK

TURB TURB mode removes all weather radar
-

nmi (MAXIMUM) ANNUNCIATION

targets from the display except for areas of turbu-
.

lence which appear in magenta. This position of the

MODE switch is spring loaded; the operator must 5 2.5
hold the MODE switch in the TURB position. Releas- 10 5
ing the MODE switch returns it to the WX+T posi- 25 12.5
tion and restores the full weather display. As in the 50 25
WX+T mode, the TURB mode can display turbulence 100 50
only in the 5, 10, 25, and 50 nmi RANGE switch posi- 200 100
tions. 300 150

Revised 30 August 1993 3-15

 operation 523-0773943

3.7.5 GCS (Ground Clutter Suppression) in the standby mode, and STBY is annunciated on
Pushbutton the MFD and EHSIs. Momentarily pushing the SLV
button a second time returns the system to normal
The ground clutter suppression feature is enabled by operation.
pushing the GCS button. This button is a nonlatch-
ing momentary action pushbutton switch which is 3.7.8 AUTO (Autotilt) Switch
operable only in the WX and WX+T modes. When
selected, GCS reduces the intensity of ground Autotilt is selected by pulling outward on the AUTO
returns so that most of them disappear from the switch (located concentric with the TILT control).
display, allowing better definition of precipitation When autotilt is on and a different mode or range is
targets. Any MODE or RANGE change automati- selected, or the aircraft changes altitude, the RTA-
cally cancels GCS. GCS should only be used to iden- 85X automatically tilts the antenna to maintain the
tify ground targets (clutter).In most systems, GCS is same relationship between beam deflection and dis-
configured to operate only while the button is play. Altitude information is internally derived from
pushed. In other systems, momentarily pushing the ground return data and tilt angle. Pushing the
GCS button enables the GCS feature for approxi. AUTO switch back to its in position turns off the
mately 12 seconds, after which normal operation is autotilt feature. The system powers up with autotilt
restored automatically. This is selectable at installa. not selected. Autotilt is annunciated with an A pre-
tion by means of a special grounding strap. When ceding the tilt angle in tenths of a degree (eg, A+10.7,
selected, GCS is displayed in cyan in the upper left of A-5.3, etc) in cyan at the right end of the range mark
the MFD and lower left of the EHSI. on the MFD and EHSI.

3.7.6 Hold (HLD) Pushbutton 3.7.9 Stabilization (STB) Pushbutton

The latching push on/push off STB button enables or

Pushing the nonlatching momentary action HLD
. disables the radar antenna pitch and roll stabiliza-
button allows the weather display on the MFD and
tion circuits. The button is normally pushed in to the
EHSI (if weather radar is selected) to be frozen until
on position. The button is out to the off position to
i the button is pushed again, or until power is removed
disable stabilization. If stabilization is not selected,
. .

from the system. Target updating will not occur

USTB is displayed in cyan at the right end of the
.

when operating in the HOLD mode. The weather

range mark on the MFD. If stabilization is selected,
radar mode annunciator (upper left corner of MFD
there is no annunciation. If an attitude fault is
and left end of range mark on EHSI if weather radar
is selected) will alternate between HOLD and the
detected, the USTB annunciation appears and
flashes for 10 seconds, then becomes steady.
selected mode at a 1-Hz rate (HOLD-WX-HOLD-
WX, etc). The alternating words serve to remind the
3.7.10 SEC (Sector) Pushbutton
pilot that the system is in the HOLD mode and the
weather radar display is not being updated· The sector scan switch is a nonlatching momentary
switch located concentric with the RANGE control.
3.7.7 SLV (Slave) Pushbutton Sector scan is selected by pushing in on the SEC
switch. When SEC is selected, the antenna azimuth
The SLV (slave) mode is available only in those scan angle is reduced 50 percent from ±60 degrees to
installations that have dual WXP-850( ) panels· ±30 degrees on either side of the nose of the aircraft.
Pushing the SLV button on the WXP-850( ) selects The reduced scan angle doubles the weather radar
the slave mode and causes the EHSI on that side to display update rate. Sector mode is annunciated by
display the MODE, RANGE, TILT, and GAIN narrowing the range mark to the new reduced sector
selected by the cross-side WXP-850( ). (Weather scan area.
radar must be selected on the EHSI's control panel
along with a sector format.) All annunciations 3.8 ELECTRONIC ATTITUDE DIRECTOR
except range become yellow on the slaved EHSI dis- INDICATOR (EADI) FORMATS USING
play. An amber X is displayed in front of the selected EFD-85/86( ) ELECTRONIC FLIGHT
radar mode to indicate cross-side control. The HLD DISPLAY
function is still available from the onside WXP-
850( ) when control has been transferred. Selecting The EFD is a high-resolution, multicolor crt display
SLV on both WXP-850( ) panels places the TWR-850 unit that contains the crt, deflection yoke, video and

Re'vised 30 August 1993 3-16

 operation 523-0773943

deflection amplifiers, and a high-voltage power sup- 3.8.1 Attitude Display

ply. Both stroke writing and raster scanning tech-
niques are used to provide large area color Pitch and roll attitude are indicated by the position
background and sharp alphanumeries and symbols of the blue sky and brown ground area containing the
with greater than normal illumination. An EFD may pitch scale with reference to the airplane symbol
be used as either an electronic attitude director indi- (figure 3-7). The airplane symbol is either a yellow
cator (EADI) or an electronic horizontal situation
triangular-shaped outline with a black interior (V-
indicator (EHSI). An inclinometer may be mounted bar option) or a figure consisting of a square nose
to either EFD. With the addition of the inclinometer, flanked by L-shaped wings (crosspointer option).
that EFD normally becomes the EADI. Precise pitch attitude is indicated by the position of
the pitch scale with reference to the nose of the air-
plane symbol, and precise roll attitude is indicated
The EADI has one basic mode of operation which by the position of the moving roll pointer with refer-
provides attitude, FCS mode annunciation, autopilot ence to the bank scale.
engage status, attitude comparator warnings, and
decision height set. Several additional parameters DPU-85G/86G (-001)and MPU-85G/86G (-001):As
are available as a function of pilot selection or opera- pitch-up attitude exceeds +30 degrees, a downward
tional mode of the airplane, and include the follow- pointing red chevron pops into view between the +50
ing: and +65 degree pitch markings. The larger, second
downward red chevron appears between the +65 and
+90 degree pitch markings. At excessive pitch-down
a. Attitude source (ATT1 or ATT2)
b. Flight director commands attitude, the three upward pointing red chevrons
c. Vertical deviation (GS, MGP, or preselected alti- appear first between and degree pitch marks,
-40 -55

tude deviation, including altitude alert) second between the and degree markings, and
-55 -70

d. Lateral deviation (VOR, LOC, MAZ, TCN, RNV, the last between the and degree pitch mark-
-70 -90

ings.
INS, VLF, LRN, or LNV)
e. LOC/GS or MAZ/MGP deviation displayed only
-

DPU-85G/86G (-002) and MPU-85G/86G (-002):

when an LOC/MLS frequency is tuned and not in Pitch tape changes include the upper chevron pop-
back LOC/MLS. LOC/MAZ deviation -

displayed ping into view at +30 degrees, but pulled from view
in back LOC/MAZ mode. GS/MGP not dis¯
-

when pitch drops to +25 degrees. The two downward

played pointing chevrons are relocated between the +40 and
f. Radio altitude displayed only when the radio
-

+60 degree pitch-down markings; and the +60 to +90

altimetersystem is within range or in test degree marks. Also, the lower chevron pops into view
g. Category II excessive deviation and comparator when pitch attitude is -20 degrees and out of view at
warning -15
degrees. The three upward pointing chevrons are
h. Speed deviation from digital airspeed (includes located between the and degree,
-30
and -45 -45 -60

display of reference airspeed), angle-of-attack degree, and -60 and degree pitch-up markings.
-90

system, or analog airspeed

i. Marker beacon annunciation Should the attitude source fail, the attitude display
j. Air data information (indicated airspeed, air- and command bars (if in view) will disappear and a
speed trend) red box with the letters ATT inscribed will appear
above the airplane symbol. ATT will flash for 10
In addition, interconnect wiring straps allow several seconds, then become steady. This flag will remain
until an alternate source is supplied or until the fault
EADI format changes to be made. These are:
is cleared.

k. V-bar commands or crosspointer commands (and 3.8.2 Attitude Sensor Annunciator

airplane symbol style)
1. Inhibit speed command display Attitude sensor annunciation is displayed at all
m. Rising runway symbol or no rising runway sym- times by MPU/DPU units (-001status) not incorpo-
bol rating service bulletin 25. The annunciator is located
n. Composite format or no composite format in in the lower right portion of the EADI to the left and
reversionary mode adjacent to the bottom dot of the vertical deviation
o. Inhibit display of digital air data parameters scale. ATT1 is displayed for any attitude source,

Revised 30 August 1993 3-17

 operation 523-0773943

Collins

ALTS VS15504 HDG LOC1

GS i i
, 1750
A P/L \ /
YD 4 20 > GS AND MGP
DEV SYMBOL

1o
[ö¯]
DH

ALT DEV
10 ATT2 SYMBOL
Se

LOC DEV
SYMBOL

VOR DEV LNAV DEV

SYMBOL SYMBOL CGO-2508-14-AC-1

collinsC

LTS VS15504 HDG

GS , t i 1250
,
A P/L \ /
YD 4 20 &

DH - --10

[öfi]
140

10 ATT2 o
So

AOA DH
200

CGO-2508-14-AC-2

EADI Display Formats With Integrated Commands (Top) or Crosspointer Commands (Bottom)
Figure 3-7

Revised 30 August 1993 3-18

 operation 523-0773943

either gyro or AHS (attitude/heading system), asso- 3.8.4 Vertical Deviation Display
ciated with the left input ports of the system. And
ATT2 is displayed for any attitude source, gyro or A scale and pointer on the right side of the EADI
AHS, associated with the right input ports of the indicates deviation from a selected vertical path. The
system. Onside attitude sensor annunication is dis- scale consists of two white dots above and below a
played in white in normal and drive (MPU) transfer. yellow center index.
ATT with its number is shown in yellow for cross-
When the lateral deviation source is a VOR/MLS and
side attitude.
LOC/MLS frequency is tuned and the system is not
in a back LOC condition, then GS/MGP deviation is
MPU/DPU units (-002status) with service bulletin displayed. If a LOC/MLS frequency is not tuned, the
25 incorporated, do not display attitude sensor scale and pointer are removed from view.
annunication (ATT1 or ATT2) in normal drive. In
drive (MPU) transfer, ATT1 (or ATT2) is shown in 3.8.4.1 Glideslope Deviation
yellow. ATT with its number is shown in yellow for
cross-side attitude (ATT2 on the left side and ATT1 The glideslope deviation pointer is a dual green tri-
angle for the onside sensor and a dual yellow triangle
on the right side).
for the cross-side sensor. The glideslope pointer rep-
resents the center of the glideslope beam, and the
3.8.3 Flight Director Command Bar Display center of the glideslope scale represents airplane
position relative to beam center. Each of the inner
scale dots represents a ¼-degree displacement; each
The magenta command bars will be in view when the of the outer scale dots represents a ½-degree dis-
flight director is being used and are removed when placement. If a Category II approach is being con-
the flight director is turned off or flagged, or if the ducted, the pointer changes to yellow and flashes
attitude is extreme. With a zero command input, the when glideslope deviation exceeds the Category II
integrated command bars will flank the airplane limits. If a failure of the glideslope receiver is
symbol. The command bars will move up or down to detected, a red box with the letters GS inscribed
command ±15 degrees of pitch. If the pitch command appears to the left of the scale above the center index
exceeds ±15 degrees, the command bars will remain and flashes for 10 seconds before becoming steady.
at the ±15-degree position until the command The flashing can be eliminated by pushing the
decreases to that value. At that time, the command master warn reset. The glideslope scale is removed
bars and the pitch scale will move in unison. The from view when in back localizer mode and is
integrated command bars will also rotate with replaced with B/L annunciation.
respect to the airplane symbol to command 15
degrees of right or left bank. If the bank command 3.8.4.2 MGP (MLS Glidepath) Deviation
exceeds 15 degrees of right or left bank, the com-
15-degree The MLS glidepath deviation scale and pointer are
mand bars will remain at the respective . .

identical to the glideslope scale and pointer. The

position until the command decreases to that value.
MLS scale is removed when in back LOC mode but no
Alternate crosspointer command bars can be
annunciation is displayed. There is no Category II
obtained as a strapping option in the interconnect
logic for MLS. If a failure of the MLS system is
wiring. For crosspointers, the roll steering bar moves
detected, a red box with the letters MGP inscribed
left or right to command left or right bank, and the
appears to the left of the scale above the center index
pitch steering bar moves up or down to command
and flashes for 10 seconds before becoming steady.
pitch-up or pitch-down. The commands are satisfied
The flashing can be eliminated by pushing the
when the steering bars are centered over the air- warn reset.
master
plane reference symbol. Should the flight director
system fail, the command bars will disappear and a 3.8.4.3 Altitude Deviation
red box with the letters FD inscribed will appear to
the left of the left tip of the airplane symbol, and will Deviation from preselected altitude is displayed by a
flash for 10 seconds before becoming steady. The FD green bracket-shaped pointer with an A inscribed.
flag will not appear if the flight director has been The altitude pointer represents the preselected alti-
turned off, unless the failure occurs when in FCS tude, and the center of the scale represents airplane
approach mode. position relative to that altitude. Each of the inner

Revised 30 August 1993 3-19

 operation 523-0773943

scale dots represents a 250-foot displacement; each of altitude failure is detected, the pointer continues to
the outer scale dots represents a 500-foot displace- display deviation, but the runway symbol will not
ment. The scale and pointer are removed from view expand vertically or laterally.
when the altitude deviation is greater than 1000 feet
above or below the preselected altitude.If a failure of 3.8.5.2 VOR/TCN/RNV Deviation
the air data system is detected, the altitude scale and
pointer are removed from view and a red box with When displaying VOR/TCN deviation, the pointer is
the letters ALT inscribed appears to the left of the a green octagon-shaped symbol with two vertical
scale above the center index and flashes for 10 center lines for the onside sensor and a yellow sym-
seconds before becoming steady. The flashing can be bol for the cross-side sensor. When displaying RNV
eliminated by pushing the master warn reset. When deviation, the pointer is a green star-shaped symbol
an altitude alert input is received from the air data for the onside sensor and a yellow symbol for the
system, the letters ALT, in yellow, appear to the left cross-side sensor. The symbols move laterally left or
of the scale above the center index· right and have the same scale factor as the course
deviation scale on the EHSI.
3.8.5 Lateral Deviation Display
3.8.5.3 LRN/VLF/INS/LNV Deviation
A scale and pointer in the bottom center of the EADI
indicate deviation from a selected lateral navigation The LRN/VLF/INS/LNV deviation pointer is a
path. The scale consists of two white dots on either white star-shaped symbol for the onside sensor and a
side of a white center index. If a sensor failure is yellow symbol for the cross-side sensor. The symbol
detected by loss of the valid signal or by an internal moves laterally left or right and has the same scale
monitor, the appropriate red letters (LOC, MAZ, factor as the course deviation scale on the EHSI.
RNV, VOR, LRN, TCN, LNV, VLF, or INS) appear
above the scale, flash for 10 seconds, and then 3.8.6 Radio Altitude Display
become steady. The flashing can be eliminated by
pushing the master warn reset. The VOR/TCN/RNV Radio altitude is displayed in the upper right corner
pointer is removed if the internal VOR/TCN/RNV in green digits. The radio altitude display appears
bearing synchro monitor detects a fault. The LNV/ automatically when the radio altitude system is
VLF/INS/LRN pointer is removed if the internal within range (2500 feet with the ALT-55 or standard
LNV/VLF/INS/LRN bearing or track synchro ARINC Radio Altimeter System or 2000 feet with the
monitors detect a fault. The pointers are not ALT-50 Radio Altimeter System). For decreasing
removed if the valid signal from the sensor is lost· altitude values, the display changes in 50-foot incre-
ments above 1000 feet and 10-foot increments below
3.8.5.1 LOC/MAZ (MLS Azimuth) Deviation 1000 feet. For increasing altitude values, there is a
50-foot hysteresis before the display increments. If a
The LOC/MAZ deviation pointer is a green trape- failure of the radio altimeter system is detected, the
zoid-shaped runway symbol for the onside sensor radio altitude display will disappear and a flashing
and a yellow runway symbol for the cross-side sen red box with the letters RA inscribed will appear for
sor. The runway symbol moves laterally left or right 10 seconds before becoming steady. The flashing can
and has the same scale factor as the course deviation be eliminated by pushing the master warn reset. DH
scale on the EHSI. As an interconnect wiring option set and the DH annunciator are also removed.
(determined at the time of installation), after
descending to a radio altitude of 200 feet agl, the 3.8.7 Decision Height Display
runway symbol begins to expand both vertically and
laterally until, at 0-foot altitude, the top edge of the Decision height is displayed in the lower right corner
runway symbol just touches the bottom edge of the of the display with the letters DH above the digits.
airplane symbol. The bottom edge of the runway This indication is cyan in color if set from the onside
deviation symbol remains adjacent to the deviation DSP (or DCP) or yellow if from the cross-side DSP
scale. If a Category II approach is being conducted, (or DCP). The decision height digits will flash when
the runway symbol changes to yellow and flashes the airplane is between decision height +50 feet and
when localizer deviation exceeds the Category II lim- decision height. The decision height display is
its. There is no Category II logic for MAZ. If a radio removed if the radio altimeter system fails.

Revised 30 August 1993 3-20

 operation 523-0773943

3.8.8 Decision Height Annunciator If a failure of the digital air data system is detected,
the IAS readout will disappear and a red box with
When decision height is reached during descent, the the red letters SPD inscribed will appear flashing for
letters DH will appear in the upper left center por- 10 seconds before becoming steady. The flashing can
tion of the display (adjacent to the pitch scale in the be eliminated by pushing the master warn reset.
blue sky portion of the display) in yellow, will flash
for 5 seconds, and then become steady. The DH 3.8.11 Airspeed Trend
annunciator will extinguish when radio altitude is 5
feet or less. The decision height annunciator is The airspeed trend is shown by two magenta lines
removed if the radio altimeter system fails. The DH which extend from the T-shaped box surrounding the
annunciator may be removed by setting DH SET to 0. IAS readout. The trend lines éxtend upward for
increasing airspeed and downward for decreasing
Note airspeed. The airspeed trend is removed from view at
radio altitudes of less than 30 feet.
Service bulletins 25 incorporated in MPU/
configured units disable the dis- The airspeed trend vector starts at the top or bottom
DPU -002

of the IAS display and extends up or down approxi-

play of the DH annunicator and the flashing
mately 1 inch. The vector starts when acceleration is
DH SET digits when the aircraft is flying
from an altitude of six feet or less up to an increasing or decreasing 0.1 knot/second and limits
altitude of DH +50 feet. The effect of this at 1.3 knots/second, at which time a horizontal line is
feature is to disable the DH function on added to the end of the vector to indicate the limit. If
climb out. a failure of the digital air data system or cross-side
data is detected, the trend vector is removed.

3.8.9 Radio Altitude Test 3.8.12 Speed Deviation Display

When the TST button on the DSP (or RA TST on the Any of three sensors may be selected as the input for
DCP) is pushed, the system supplies a test initiate to speed deviation. The selection is via interconnect
the radio altimeter. Radio altitude test causes the wiring options and is made at the time of installa-
radio altimeter to output a fixed test value. If the tion. The three sensors are: digital air data system,
decision height happens to be set higher than this angle of attack, or analog air data system.
value, the DH annunciator is also displayed during
the test. The speed deviation scale is located adjacent to, and
to the right of, the IAS readout. It consists of a yel-
low center reference mark with white letters F and S
3.8.10 Indicated Airspeed
located above and below the center reference. Two
. intermediate dots are located between the letters
IAS as transmitted by a digital air data system is
. .

. and the center reference. The speed deviation pointer

shown digitally at the left center of the EADI in
.

. . is green and consists of two concentric squares which

green digits surrounded by a green T-shaped box on a
move in relation to the scale, so that if the pointer is
black background. Approximately two-thirds of the
.

. next to the upper dot, actual airspeed is 10 knots

next higher and lower units digits are displayed and
higher than desired.
the units digits appear to roll smoothly through the
box. The tens and hundreds digits also appear to roll With a digital air data system, the EFIS-85B com-
smoothly through the box. At airspeeds below 30 pares actual IAS with the reference airspeed being
knots, the readout is replaced by three green dashes· received from the air data system and positions the
pointer accordingly. With either the AOA or analog
If at the present acceleration, Vmo would be air data input, the EFIS-85B positions the pointer
exceeded in 10 seconds or less, the IAS readout with reference to the analog voltage received from
changes to yellow and the box changes to yellow and the respective system.
flashes. If Vmo +2 knots is exceeded, the IAS readout
changes to yellow and the box changes to red and If the speed deviation is from a digital air data sys-
flashes at twice the previous rate. A cross-side data tem, the reference airspeed is displayed in cyan dig-
failure inhibits the warning prior to Vmo but the its below the letter S on the speed scale. If the speed
greater than Vmo +2 knots warning is still active. deviation is AOA based, the letters AOA, in cyan,

Revised 30 August 1993 3-21

 operation 523-0773943

appear below the speed scale. If the speed deviation When a new active mode is displayed, either by being
is analog air data based, the letters SPD, in cyan, selected or automatic capture, it will flash for 5
appear below the speed scale. seconds before becoming steady.

If the speed deviation is digital airspeed referenced 3.8.14 Autopilot/Yaw Damper and Trim
and a failure of the digital air data system is
Annunciation
detected, the speed deviation scale, pointer, and ref-
erence airspeed digits are removed from view and a
Damper
.

3.8.14.1 Autopelot/Yaw Annunciation

red box with the letters SPD inscribed appears below
the scale and flashes for 10 seconds before becoming
The autopilot and yaw damper annunciation is dis-
steady. The flashing can be eliminated by pushing .

played on lines 3 (autopilot) and 4 (yaw damper) in

the master warn reset. .

the upper left corner of the EADI. The autopilot and

If an AOA failure is detected when displaying AOA yaw damper engaged annunciation is AP and YD for
based speed deviation, the speed deviation pointer a single flight control system and AP/L or AP/R and
and scale are removed from view and a red box with YD for a dual flight control system. The engage
the letters AOA inscribed appears below the scale annunciators are green.
and flashes for 10 seconds before becoming steady.
The flashing can be eliminated by pushing the If a disengagement occurs for the FCS-85/86 (for
master warn reset.
both the autopilot and yaw damper), the engage
messages turn red and flash until acknowledged by
If the speed deviation is analog airspeed referenced the crew (acknowledge logic is in the FCS). When the
and a failure of the analog air data system is acknowledge occurs, the message disappears for a
detected, the speed deviation pointer and scale will single flight control system or turns white and
disappear, and a red box with the letters SPD becomes steady for a dual flight control system.
inscribed will appear at the left center of the EADI
and flash for 10 seconds before becoming steady. The If a disengagement occurs for the FCS-80 (for both
flashing can be eliminated by pushing the master the autopilot and yaw damper), the autopilot engage
warn reset. message turns red and flashes until acknowledged by
the crew (acknowledge logie is in the FCS). The yaw
3.8.13 Flight Control Mode Annunciation damper engage message turns yellow and flashes for
5 seconds then is removed from the display. When
The following paragraphs show the flight control the acknowledge occurs, the autopilot message disap-
mode annunciations for the Collins FCS-85/86, the pears for a single flight control system or turns
Collins FCS-80, and the Collins FCS-65 Flight Con- white and becomes steady for a dual flight control
trol Systems. The annunciation locations on the system.
EADI are the same for each flight control system,
with the vertical modes located on the first two lines If a disengagement occurs for the FCS-65 (for both
to the left of the lubber line and the lateral modes the autopilotand yaw damper), the engage messages
located on the top line to the right of the lubber line. flash between green and yellow and disappear when
The active vertical and lateral modes are shown in the FCS-65 system times out.
green, and the armed modes and submodes in white.
The vertical mode commanded reference data are The same operation occurs if the autopilot is inde-
shown in green, and the advisory reference data are pendent of the yaw damper.
shown in white when available. Refer to figures 3-8
through 3-13. 3.8.14.2 Trim Annunciation

The Collins FCS-85/86 is the only system which has Trim annunciation is displayed on line 3 in the upper
the capability of three vertical arm modes of ALTS, right corner of the EADI.
VNAV, and GS/MGP. The FCS-85/86 has dependent
glideslope/microwave glide path capture (ie, the sys- For the FCS-85/86, the trim annunciation is a boxed
tem must capture the localizer/microwave azimuth message in yellow which indicates the axis that is
before arming the glideslope/microwave glide path). mistrimmed (A aileron, E elevator, and R rud-
= = =

Therefore, for the FCS-85/86, the GS/MGP arm der). The annunciation will flash for 5 seconds each
mode will be displayed in white (to the left) on line 2. time a mistrim occurs and is removed from view

Revised 30 August 1993 3-22

 operation 523-0773943

ANNUNCIATION DESCRIPTION OF ANNUNCIATION

GS-------------- GLIDESLOPE CAPTURE.

MGP-- ----------
MICROWAVE GLIDEPATHCAPTURE.
ALTS###L-------- ALTITUDEPRESELECTWITH LOWSPEED CLIMB PROFILE AND PRE-PROGRAMMED IAS.
ALTS###M-------- ALTITUDEPRESELECTWITH MID SPEED CLIMB PROFILE AND PRE-PROGRAMMEDIAS.
ALTS###H-------- ALTITUDE PRESELECTWITH HIGH SPEED CLIMB PROFILE AND PRE-PROGRAMMED
IAS.
ALTS L-------- ALTITUDE PRESELECTWITH LOWSPEED CLIMB PROFILE.
ALTS M----- ALTITUDE PRESELECTWITH MID SPEED CLIMB PROFILE.
--

ALTS H-------- ALTITUDE PRESELECTWITH HIGH SPEED CLIMB PROFILE.

ALTS GA--------- ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMAND GO-AROUND.
ALTS PITCH------ ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMAND PITCH HOLD.
ALTS VS***0†---- ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMANDVERTICAL SPEED MODESHOWINGFEET PER MINUTEUP.
ALTS VS***04---- ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMANDVERTICAL SPEED MODESHOWINGFEET PER MINUTEDOWN.
ALTS IAS ***---- ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMAND INDICATEDAIRSPEED HOLDSHOWINGREFERENCEDAIRSPEED.
ALTS MACH.**---- ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMAND INDICATED AIRSPEED HOLDSHOWINGMACHNUMBER.
ALTS DES***0---- ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMANDDESCENDMODESHOWINGRATE OF DESCENTIN FEET PER MINUTE.
ALTS CLM***L---- ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMAND CLIMB MODEWITH LOWSPEED CLIMB PROFILE AND PRE-PROGRAMMEDIAS.
ALTS CLM***M---- ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMAND CLIMB MODEWITH MID SPEED CLIMB PROFILE AND PRE-PROGRAMMED
IAS.
ALTS CLM***H---- ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMAND CLIMB MODEWITH HIGH SPEED CLIMB PROFILE AND PRE-PROGRAMMED
IAS.
ALTS CLM.**L---- ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMANDCLIMB MODEWITH LOWSPEED CLIMB PROFILE AND PRE-PROGRAMMED MACH.
ALTS CLM.**M---- ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMANDCLIMB MODEWITH MID SPEED CLIMB PROFILE AND PRE-PROGRAMMEDMACH.
ALTS CLM.**H---- ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMAND CLIMB MODEWITH HIGH SPEED CLIMB PROFILE AND PRE-PROGRAMMED
MACH.
ALTS VNV-------- ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMANDVERTICAL NAV MODE.
ALTS ALT###L- ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMANDALTITUDE HOLDMODEWITH LOWSPEED CLIMB PROFILE AND
---

PRE-PROGRAMMED IAS.
ALTS ALT###M---- ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMANDALTITUDE HOLDMODEWIfH MID SPEED CLIMB PROFILE AND
PRE-PROGRAMMED IAS.
ALTS ALT###H---- ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMANDALTITUDE HOLDMODEWITH HIGH SPEED CLIMB PROFILE AND
PRE-PROGRAMMED IAS.
(BLANK)--------- NO VERTICAL MODESSELECTED.

* = GREEN ARM (WHITE) CAPTURE(GREEN)

NUMBERSARE ADVISORYVALUESFROMFCS-85/86.

HLTS V51550 HDG LOC1

- SP/L L250
\ /
y YD A ----20
>
¯¯

ARM (WHITE) 4N

ANNUNCIATION DESCRIPTION OF ANNUNCIATION ----10

ATT2e
So
GS-------------- GLIDESLOPEARM- V4 DH
MGP------------- MICROWAVE GLIDEPATHARM. 38 e o e e 200

GS VNV---------- GLIDESLOPEANDVERTICALNAVARM.
MGP VNV--------- MICROWAVE GLIDEPATHANDVERTICAL NAVARM.
VNV------------- VERTICAL NAVARM.
CGO-2508-14-AC-3

Vertical Mode Annunciation (FCS-85/86)

Figure 3-8

Revised 30 2(ugust 1998 8-28

 operation 523-0773943

ANNUNCIATION DESCRIPTION OF ANNUNCIATION

GA------------- GO AROUNDMODE.
LOC1- - --------
NAV MODE, NUMBER1 LOCALIZERCAPTURE.
LOC2----------- NAVMODE, NUMBER2 LOCALIZERCAPTURE.
VOR1--------- --
NAVMODE, NUMBER1 VOR CAPTURE.
VOR2----------- NAV MODE, NUMBER2 VOR CAPTURE.
TCN1- - -- - --
NAVMODE, NUMBER1 TACANCAPTURE.
TCN2------ - -
NAV MODE, NUMBER2 TACANCAPTURE.
LNV1- -- -- - -
NAVMODE, NUMBER1 LATERALNAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
LNV2--------- -
NAV MODE, NUMBER2 LATERALNAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
INS1--------- -
NAVRODE, NUMBER1 INERTIAL NAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
INS2---------- -
NAVMODE, NUMBER2 INERTIAL NAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
VLF1--------- -
NAVMODE, NUMBER1 VERY LOWFREQUENCYNAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
VLF2--------- NAVMODE, NUMBER2 VERY LOWFREQUENCYNAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
RNVl--------- -
NAVMODE, NUMBER1 AREANAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
RNV2--------- -
NAVMODE, NUMBER2 AREANAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
LRNi----------- NAVMODE, NUMBER1 LONGRANGENAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
LRN2--------- -
NAV MODE, NUMBER2 LONGRANGENAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
RAZi--------- --
NAV MODE, NUMBER1 MICROWAVE AZIMUTHCAPTURE.
MAZ2--------- -
NAVMODE, NUMBER2 MICROWAVE AZIMUTHCAPTURE.
DR------- DEADRECKONINGMODE(YELLOW). DR CAN BE DISPLAYEDWITH CAPTUREMODESVOR1 THROUGH
LRN2, BUT NOT WITH GA, LOC1, LOC2, MAZ1, OR MAZ2.
ROLL--------- -
ROLL HOLDMODE.
HDG----------- -
HEADINGCAPTURE.
HDG ****- - - -
HEADINGCAPTUREWITH ARMEDLATERAL(NAV) MODES. **** THE ARMEDLATERALMODEANNUNCIATIONS
=

ARE THE SAMEAS THE CAPTUREMODEANNUNCIATIONSOF LOCl THROUGHMAZ2AS SHOWNABOVE.

XXXXXXXX---- -
IF A NAV MODE(e.g. VOR1, LOC2, ETC) IS CAPTUREDOR ARMEDANDTHE ACTIVE COURSEARROWIS
TURNEDOFF VIA THE DSP-85A, THEN X's WILL APPEAR.
(BLANK) NO LATERALMODEIS SELECTED.

CAPTURE (GREEN) ARM (WHITE)

coi

HDb
AP/L \
YD ¿\ ----20

ATT2
----10

o
Se

v• fil DH
38 o 200

CGO-2508-14-AC-4

Lateral Mode Annunciation (FCS-85/86)

Figure 3-8

evised 30 24247ust 1993 3-24

 operation 523-0773943

ANNUNCIATION DESCRIPTION OF ANNUNCIATION

GS------------ GLIDESLOPECAPTURE.
MGP -----
MICROWAVE GLIDEPATHCAPTURE. --

GA- --
GO AROUNDMODE.
-- -------

ALTS GA------- ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMANDGO AROUNDMODE.

PITCH--------- PITCH HOLDMODE.
ALTS PITCH---- ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMAND PITCH HOLDRODE.
VS--- VERTICALSPEED HOLDMODE.
--------

ALTS VS------- ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMANDVERTICAL SPEED HOLDMODE.

IAS -
INDICATEDAIRSPEED HOLDMODE.
- ------

ALTS IAS------ ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMAND INDICATEDAIRSPEED HOLDMODE.

MACH---------- MACHHOLDMODE.
ALTS MACH------ ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMAND MACHHOLDMODE.
VNV----------- VERTICALNAVRODE.
ALTS VNV------ ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMANDVERTICAL NAVIGATIONMODE.
ALT --------
ALTlTUDE HOLDMODE.
ALTS ALT--- ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMANDALTlTUDE HOLDMODE.
--

ALTS------- ALTITUDE PRESELECT MODE. --

(BLANK)- NO VERTICAL PODES SELECTED. --

ARM (YM12) -CAPRJRE (GREEN)

ALTO VG HDG LOC1

PL X '20

ANNUNCIATION DESCRIPTION OF ANNUNCIATION

----10

ATT2•
GS -- ------- -
GLIDESLOPEARM.
MGP--------- -
MICROWAVEGLIDEPATHARM.
VNV--------- -
VERTICALNAVARM, 38 e o
| • • 200

CGO-2508-14-AC-5

Vertical Mode Annunciation (FCS-80)

Figure 3-10

Revised 30 fugnist 1993 3-25

 operation 523-0773943

ANNUNCIATION DESCRIPTION OF ANNUNCIATION

GA- - - --- - -
GO AROUNDMODE.
LOCl- -- - - -
NAV MODE, NUMBER1 LOCALIZERCAPTURE.
LOC2- -- - - - - NAVMODE, NUMBER2 LOCALIZERCAPTURE.
VOR1- ---- --- -
NAVMODE, NUMBER1 VOR CAPTURE.
VOR2- -- - --- -
NAVMODE, NUMBER2 VOR CAPTURE.
TCN1--- NAV MODE, NUMBER1 TACANCAPTURE.
TCN2----- -
NAVMODE, NUMBER2 TACANCAPTURE.
LNV1----- -
NAV MODE, NUMBER1 LATERALNAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
LNV2- -- -
NAVMODE, NUMBER2 LATERALNAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
INS1--------- NAVMODE, NUMBER1 INERTIAL NAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
INS2---- --- -
NAVMODE, NUMBER2 INERTIAL NAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
VLF1----- -- - NAVMODE, NUMBER1 VERY LOWFREQUENCYNAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
VLF2-- --- -- -
NAVMODE, NUMBER2 VERY LOWFREQUENCYNAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
RNVl--------- -
NAVMODE, NUMBER1 AREANAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
RNV2------- -
NAVMODE, NUMBER2 AREANAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
LRNl----- --- -
NAVMODE, NUMBER1 LONGRANGENAVIGAll0N SYSTEMCAPTURE.
LRN2----- --- -
NAVMODE, NUMBER2 LONGRANGENAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
AZ1- --- - - - NAVMODE, NUMBERl MICROWAVE AZIMUTHCAPTURE.
RAZ2------- - -
NAVMODE, NUMBER2 MICRDWAVE AZIMUTHCAPTURE.
DR- - -
DEADRECKONINGMODE(YELLOW). DR CAN BE DISPLAYEDWITH CAPTUREMODESVOR1 THROUGH
LRN2, BUT NOT WITH GA, LOC1, LOC2, MAZl, OR MAZ2.
ROLL--------- -
ROLL HOLDMODE.
HDG - ----- -
HEADINGCAPTURE.
HDG ****---- - - HEADINGCAPTUREWITH ARMEDLATERAL(NAV) MODES. **** THE ARMEDLATERALMODEANNUNCIATIONS
=

ARE THE SAMEAS THE CAPTUREMODEANNUNCIATIONSOF LOC1 THROUGHMAZ2AS SHOWNABOVE.

XXXXXXXX---- -
IF A NAVMODE(e.g. VOR1, LOC2, ETC) IS CAPTUREDOR ARMEDANDTHE ACTIVE COURSEARROWIS
TURNEDOFF VIA THE DSP-85A, THENX's WILL APPEAR.
(BLANK) NO LATERALMODEIS SELECTED.

CAPTURE (GREEN) ARM (WHITE)

AP/L \
YD da -----20

>
F•" o
DH
¯

----10

ATT2 o
----10

so

38 o 200

CGO-2508-14-AC-4

LateralAfode Annunciation GFCS-80,

Figure 3-11

lievised 30 4247ust 1993 3-26

 operation 523-0773943

ANNUNCIATION DESCRIPTION OF ANNUNCIATION

GS ----- ----
GLIDESLOPE CAPTURE.
AGP------ - -
MICROWAVE GLIDEPATHCAPTURE.
GA -- - -- -
GO AROUNDMODE.
ALTS GA----- -
ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMANDGO AROUNDMODE.
ALTS-- ----- - ALTITUDE PRESELECTARM.
VS---------- -
VERTICALSPEED HOLDMODE.
ALTS VS----- -
ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMAND VERTICALSPEED HOLDMODE.
IAS--- - - - INDICATEDAIRSPEED HOLD500E.
ALTS IAS ---

ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMAND INDICATEDAIRSPEED HOLDMODE.

VNV--------- -
VERTICALNAVMODE.
ALTS VNV - ---
ALTITUDE PRESELECTARMANDVERTICALNAVIGATIONMODE.
ALT- - - - - -
ALTITUDE HOLDRODE.
CLIMB- ---- -
CLIMB MODE.
ALTS CLIMB---- ALTITUDEPRESELECT ARMAND CLIMB MODE.
DESCEND------- DESCENTMODE.
TEST---------- FCS-65 SELF TEST.

ARM ) CAPWRE (GREEN)

ALT HUG LOCi

ANNUNCIATION DESCRIPTION OF ANNUNCIATION

GS------------
----10

ATT2•
GLIDESLOPEARM. g,
MGP----------- MICRDWAVE GLIDEPATHARM.
GS VNV----- ---
GLIDESLOPEANDVERTICALNAVARM. 138 o o e o 200
MGP VNV-- ----
MICRDWAVE GLIDEPATHANDVERTICAL NAVARM.
VNV ----------
VERTICAL NAVARM.

CGO-2508-14-AC-5

Vertical Afode Annunciation DECS-65)

Figure 3-12

Revised 30 rinsatst 1993 3-27

 operation 523-0773943

ANNUNCIATION DESCRIPTION OF ANNUNCIATION

GA------------- GO AROUNDMODE.
LOC1----------- NAVMODE, NUMBER1 LOCALIZERCAPTURE.
LOC2----------- NAV MODE, NUMBER2 LOCALIZERCAPTURE.
VOR1-------- --
NAVMODE, NUMBER1 VOR CAPTURE.
VOR2----------- NAV MODE, NUMBER2 VOR CAPTURE.
TCN1----------- NAV MODE, NUMBER1 TACANCAPTURE.
TCN2----------- NAVMODE, NUMBER2 TACANCAPTURE.
LNV1----------- NAVMODE, NUMBER1 LATERALNAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
LNV2----------- NAV MODE, NUMBER2 LATERALNAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
INS1----------- NAVMODE, NUMBER1 INERTIAL NAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
INS2------ ----
NAVMODE, NUMBER2 INERTIAL NAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
VLF1----------- NAV MODE, NUMBER1 VERY LOWFREQUENCYNAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
VLF2----------- NAVMODE, NUMBER2 VERY LOWFREQUENCYNAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
RNV1 - --------
NAVMODE, NUMBER1 AREANAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
RNV2----------- NAVMODE, NUMBER2 AREANAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
LRN1-- - - ---
NAV MODE, NUMBER1 LONGRANGENAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
LRN2 - --------
NAV MODE, NUMBER2 LONGRANGENAVIGATIONSYSTEMCAPTURE.
MAZ1 - -- ------
NAVMODE, NUMBER1 MICROWAVE AZIMUTHCAPTURE.
MAZ2----------- NAV MODE, NUMBER2 MICROWAVE AZIMUTHCAPTURE.
DR--- - --
DEADRECKONINGMODE(YELLOW). DR CAN BE DISPLAYEDWITH CAPTUREMODESVOR1 THROUGH
LRN2, BUT NOT WITH GA, LOC1, LOC2, MAZ1, OR MAZ2.
ROLL----------- ROLL HOLDMODE.
HDG------- ----
HEADINGCAPTURE.
HDG **** ---- ---
HEADINGCAPTUREWITH ARMEDLATERAL(NAV) MODES. **** THE ARMEDLATERALMODEANNUNCIATIONS
=

ARE THE SAMEAS THE CAPTUREMODEANNUNCIATIONSOF LOC1 THROUGHMAZ2AS SHOWNABOVE.

BC------------- BACKCOURSEMODE.
XXXXXXXX------ IF A NAVMODE(e.g. VORT, LOC2, ETC) IS CAPTUREDOR ARMEDANDTHE ACTIVE COURSEARRDWIS
TURNEDOFF VIA THE DSP-85A, THEN X's WILL APPEAR.
(BLANK) NO LATERALMODEIS SELECTED.

CAPTURE (GREEN) ARM (WHITE)

\comosj

HUS LOC1

----10

ATT2e
S•

CGO-2508-14-AC-4

LateralAfode Annunciation QPCS-65)

Figure 3-18

evised 30 24ugust 1993 3-28

 operation 523-0773943

immediately when the input is removed. The follow- a. ROSE Format (DSP-85A)/HSI Format
ing annunciations can appear: (DCP-85E/G)

-
E (boxed)
-

A -

(boxed)
-
This format selects a display very similar to the
-

R (boxed)
-
conventional electromechanical HSI presenta-
A ER (boxed) tion. Information displayed includes compass
A R (boxed)
-

heading and sensor type annunciation, selected

A E (boxed)-

heading, selected VOR, localizer, or LNAV course

-

ER (boxed) and deviation (including annunciation of devia-

SYNC (yellow) tion type), navigation source annunciation, to/
(blank) from information, distance to station/waypoint,
digital selected course/desired track readout,
For the FCS-80 system, TRIM is displayed in yellow, glideslope or VNAV deviation (VNAV not availa-
which can indicate either an elevator or aileron mis-
ble when certain statuses of the DSP are used),
trimmed condition (determined during installation). ground speed, time-to-go, elapsed time or wind (if
As an option, both the elevator and aileron mistrim
available), course information and sensor annun-
annunciator outputs from the FCS-80 can be wired
ciation from the second course source, weather
together to give the TRIM annunciation whenever
radar target alert, waypoint alert, DR and MSG
the elevator or the aileron is mistrimmed. Refer to
(if available) when LNAV is the navigation
the Airplane Flight Manual Supplement for further
information. The annunciator will flash for 5 seconds source, excessive ILS deviation (when Category II
each time it turns on, and is removed immediately configured), ILS and heading comparator warn-
when the input is removed. ings (ILS only if Category II configured), back
localizer annunciation, DME hold annunciation,
For the FCS-65 system, TRIM is not displayed. and a bearing pointer that can be driven by VOR,
SYNC is displayed when the pilot actuTesthe SYNC LNAV, or ADF sources as selected on the display
button. select panel.

3.8.15 Marker Beacon Display b. Approach (APPR) Format (DSP-85A)/ARC

yel- Format (DCP-85E/G)
Marker beacon passage is indicated by a cyan or
low box with OM (cyan) or MM (yellow) inscribed,
appearing on the inside of the roll scale on the right
In this format, an expanded compass segment
side (opposite the DH annunciator). Airway or inner
(approximately 80 degrees) is located across the
marker will appear as a white box with no inscrip- .

tions. These will flash as long as active. top of the display with the airplane symbol
located at the bottom center of the display. This
.

format gives the pilot information similar to that

3.8.16 Inclinometer
presented in the full compass rose mode, in an
The inclinometer or slip indicator consists of a enlarged, easily readable display. In addition, a
weighted ball in a liquid-filled curved tube. It is preset second navigation sensor may be displayed
attached to the lower front of the unit, can be either if selected by the 2ND CRS button on the DSP (by
lighted or unlighted, and is used as an aid to coordi- the CRS PRE button and SEL/RNG knob on the
nate turns. DCP). The second sensor is shown by the VOR or
waypoint symbol and identifier placed in rho-
3.9 ELECTRONIC HORIZONTAL SITUATION theta position with respect to the airplane symbol
INDICATOR (EHSI) FORMATS USING and selected range. Range is selected from the
EFD-85/86( ) ELECTRONIC FLIGHT DSP (or DCP) when weather radar is not selected
DISPLÄY or from the WXP when weather radar mode is
selected. Pushing the WX button on the DSP (or
The EHSI can display three formats that are the RDR button on the DCP) causes weather
selected by the DSP-85A Display Select Panel or the radar data to be superimposed on the APPR for-
DCP-85E/G Display Control Panel. These are: mat (or ARC format).

Revised 30 August 1993 8-29

 operation 523-0773943

c. Enroute (ENR) Format (DSP-85A)/MAP Format the heading synchro monitor detects a failure, the
(DCP-85E/G) HDG flag appears and the compass card is frozen in
position.
This format also uses the expanded compass seg-
ment, but places VOR and/or waypoint symbols
for both primary and second course in proper rho 3.9.1.2 Active (Primary) Selected Course
theta position with respect to the airplane symbol Display
and selected range. DME ident is shown next to EFIS-85B(2)/86B(2): The data shown by the primary
the VOR symbols and selected course lines are (solid) selected course arrow is the information that
drawn through the symbols. Waypoint strings is being supplied to the flight control system. Pri-
(up to three waypoints) are shown with the way-
mary selected course is shown by the relationship of
point number next to the symbol and with the
the solid single bar course arrow with respect to the
symbols connected by desired track lines. Range . -

compass card and is repeated digitally in the lower

is selected from the DSP (or DCP) when weather right of the display with the letters CRS super-
radar is not selected or from the WXP when
scribed. The course is selected with the CRS knob on
weather radar mode is selected. Pushing the WX
the DSP when in VOR, LOC, RNV, TCN, or MLS
button on the DSP (or the RDR button on the .

mode, or is automatically set by an appropriate

DCP) causes weather radar data to be superim-
.

LNAV (lateral navigation system) such as LNV, INS,

posed on the enroute (or MAP) format.
VLF, or RNV.
3.9.1 ROSE Format (DSP-85A)/HSI Format EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12): The data shown by the active
(DCP-85E/G) (solid) selected course arrow is the information that
The ROSE format is selected by positioning the DSP is being supplied to the flight control system. Active
FORMAT switch to ROSE mode. The HSI format is selected course is shown by the relationship of the
selected by positioning the DCP HSI-ARC-MAP solid single bar course arrow with respect to the
switch to HSI. Refer to figure 3-14. compass card and is repeated digitally in the lower
right of the display with the letters CRS super-
3.9.1.1 Compass Display scribed. After selecting the active course navigation
. sensor using the CRS ACT button and the SEL/RNG
The compass display is a full 360-degree rose with
knob on the DCP, the actual course is selected by
letters at the cardinal points and numbers at the 30-
first pushing the CRS CTL button on the CHP until
.

degree marks. Airplane heading is read against the

.

lubber line. Markings are also provided every 45

the knob-shaped course control annunciator symbol
is adjacent to the active navigation sensor annuncia-
degrees around the periphery of the card. The com-
pass card, reference marks, lubber line, and refer-
tor at the left center of the display. This indicates
ence airplane symbol are white. If true heading is
that the active selected course arrow is being con-
trolled by the CHP-85D's onside CRS knob or by the
being used, TRUE is annunciated in white above the
onside CHP-86B's CRS knob. The course is then
lubber line. The heading source in the DPU/MPU
(-001)configured units is annunciated by displaying
-
selected with the appheable CRS knob on the CHP
when in VOR, LOC, RNV, TCN, or MLS mode, or is
HDG1 in white for the onside source or HDG2 in
automatically set by an appropriate LNAV (lateral
yellow for the cross-side source. DPU/MPU (-002)
navigation system) such as LNV, INS, VLF, or RNV.
units, configured with service bulletins 25, do not
annunciate the heading source unless a drive trans- The selected navigation sensor is annunciated at the
fer or cross-side heading is selected. Then the annun¯ left center of the display. If the navigation sensor is
ciation HDG1 or HDG2 in yellow appears in the incompatible with the type of heading (true or mag-
lower right corner of the display. An external netic), the sensor annunciation flashes until a com-
installer-supplied switch may be used to place the patible selection is made. If a localizer frequency has
compass system in directional gyro mode, which is been tuned, VOR/LOC has been selected, and the
annunciated by placing the letters DG over the lub- selected course is more than 105 degrees from the
ber line. If a failure of the compass system occurs, a lubber line, the LIN/ANG legend to the right of the
red box with HDG inscribed will appear above the lubber line automatically changes to B/L (back local-
compass card, replacing the lubber line (and the izer).
TRUE annunciator if present). The letters will flash
for 10 seconds, then become steady. The flashing can The center portion of the course arrow is the lateral
be eliminated by pushing the master warn reset. If deviation bar and moves laterally with respect to the

Revised 30 August 1993 3-30

 operation 523-0773943

Collins(

DIST Ÿ LIN TTG

BRG II CRS
LNW1 055

CGO-2508-14-AC-6

ROSE (or HSI) Format

Figure 3-14

course arrow and the white deviation dots to indicate Warning

deviation from the selected course. If Category II is
configured and localizer deviation is excessive, the Do not fly
linear deviation for an
lateral deviation bar changes to yellow and flashes approach when the VOR/DME station
(Category II logic is not available for MLS). The lat- used for the approach is on the airport.
eral deviation bar is removed if a synchro input fail- Deviation may be inhibited when close to
ure is detected. the station. Use only angular deviation
when the VOR/DME is on the airport. The
Warning remote LIN/ANG switch must be set to
ANG.
Do not fly VOR linear deviation for an
approach without the aid of an autopilot
set to the approach mode. The deviation
scale for linear deviation is 5 nautical miles The LIN annunciator shows to the right of the lubber
per dot unless an engaged autopilot is set to line when the linear deviation mode is selected.
the approach mode. In the approach mode, Selection of the linear mode requires a valid DME
the scale for linear deviation is 1 nautical not in DME hold and the remote installer-supplied
mile per dot.

Revised 30 August 1993 3-31

 operation 523-0773943

LIN/ANG switch set to the linear mode. (The normal From. This To/From display indicates that the
position for this switch is ANG.) selected VOR course is either To or From the selected
VOR station. The To/From display can also indicate
EFIS linearizes deviation out to the usable reception the course To the next waypoint or the course From
range of the VOR. In linear deviation mode, a full- an overflown waypoint when an LNAV such as an
scale deflection of the lateral deviation bar (2 dots) is INS, LRN, VLF, or other navigation system is the
equivalent to approximately 10 miles offset from the navigation data source. If a compatible LNAV is
selected course in VOR mode and approximately 2 installed and LNAV is selected, the To arrow flashes
miles offset from the selected course when an to indicate waypoint alert. The To/From display dis-
engaged autopilot is set to the approach (APPR) appears when a localizer frequency is selected or if a
mode· failure is detected by the VOR bearing, LNAV bear-
ing, or LNAV track synchro monitors.
Linear deviation gives capability for flying an air-
craft along a flight path that is offset and parallel to
If the navigation sensor is an onside VOR/LOC, the
a selected course. When flying parallel to the course arrow, deviation bar, To/From indicator (in
-

selected course with an autopilot engaged, HDG

VOR), digital course readout,
- .

navigation sensor
mode (preferred) or manual autopilot mode (no lat-
.

distance display, data display, and

. .

annunciator,
eral mode selected) must be used. Engaging the
LIN/ANG annunciation are green. If the navigation
autopilot with VOR mode selected, returns the air-
. .

sensor is an onside LNAV, these displays are white.

. . .

plane to the actual VOR course.

The displays are yellow for all cross-side navigation
sensors.
Note
If a selected navigation sensor valid is lost, the navi-
During a VOR approach, select APPR
gation sensor annunciation turns red, becomes
mode only when within normal approach
boxed, and flashes for 10 seconds before becoming
distances and not until after VOR cap- steady. The flashing can be eliminated by pushing
ture occurs. During a VOR approach, the the master warn reset. If one of the LNAVs is the
autopilot automatically goes to dead reck-
failed sensor, the To/From display also disappears.
oning (DR) mode when a VOR station is
crossed. DR is not a recommended approach If a failure is detected by the VOR bearing, LNAV
mode. If the VOR approach is one that bearing, or LNAV track synchro or the bus parame-
crosses the VOR on the way to the air¯ ter monitors, the corresponding flag appears and the
port, select HDG mode at station passage
deviation bar and the To/From arrow are removed
instead of continuing with NAV or APPR
from the display. The annunciator flashes if heading
mode (ensure the heading cursor on the and navigation sensors are incompatible.
EHSI is under the lubber line before
selecting HDG mode). The reason for this
3.9.1.3 Preset Second Course Display
is that if the distance between the VOR and
the airport is short, the system may not
When the preset second course arrow has been
have time to come out of DR mode after .

selected for display, it will appear in cyan as a double

passing the station.
dashed line course arrow with a solid arrowhead. The
Tuning a localizer frequency in either VOR or APPR double dashed center portion of the course arrow is
mode inhibits linear deviation. When VOR is selected the lateral deviation bar. Displayed VOR deviation is
as the active source the deviation changes from LIN always angular and is never linearized. Also, no
to ANG (such as would occur if the DME is lost or deviation scale or To/From indicator is provided for
DME hold is selected), the ANG annunciator flashes the preset second course arrow. The navigation sen-
for 10 seconds, then stays on. Push the master warn sor for the preset second course is also annunciated
reset to stop the flashing prior to the 10 second time in cyan and appears below the navigation sensor
out. annunciation for the active selected course arrow.

The To/From indication is a triangle that appears on EFIS-85B(2)/86B(2): The navigation sensor for the
the head side of the lateral deviation bar, pointing second course arrow is selected by sequentially push-
toward the head of the course arrow to indicate To ing the 2ND CRS button on the DSP. At power on, no
and toward the tail of the course arrow to indicate second course is displayed. The first push of the 2ND

Revised 30 August 1993 3-32

 operation 523-0773943

CRS button annunciates LNV1 and the selected sen- CRS XFR button on the DCP. When the CRS XFR
sor is LNAV 1. The second push of the 2ND CRS button is pushed, the current active course arrow and i
button annunciates LNV2 and the selected sensor is its identifier are removed from the EHSI display, the
LNAV 2 (this selection may be inhibited as an instal- preset course arrow becomes a single solid line, the
lation option). The third push of the 2ND CRS button color changes to the active color, and the navigation
annunciates VOR1, and the fourth push annunciates sensor annunciator is moved to the upper (active)
VOR2. The next push of the 2ND CRS button turns location. The previous active selected course sensor
the second course arrow off again. If the second now becomes the preset second course and is
course is the onside VOR or LOC, the onside DSP's removed from the display. It may be recalled as the
selected CRS knob controls the course setting. If the dual dashed cyan preset second course by pushing
second course is the cross-side VOR or LOC, the the CRS PRE button twice.
cross-side DSP's selected CRS knob controls the
course setting. This also applies even though the Note
applicable DSP's primary course selection is LNAV
or OFF. EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12): Depending on the
airplane installation, if the FCS is not in
EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12): The navigation sensor for the HDG mode and the source for the active
preset second course arrow is selected using the CRS course arrow is changed or if the CRS XFR
PRE button and the SEL/RNG knob on the DCP· function is selected on the DCP, the FCS
After selecting the preset second course navigation will automatically clear to heading hold
sensor, the actual course is selected by first pushing mode and the NAV mode must be reengaged
the CRS CTL button on the CHP until the knob- if desired.
shaped course control annunciator symbol is adja-
cent to the preset second course navigation sensor If a navigation sensor failure is detected while it is
annunciator (located below the active course naviga- selected for second course, the second course naviga-
tion sensor annunciator). This indicates that the tion sensor annunciator becomes red and boxed and
preset second course arrow is being controlled by the flashes for 10 seconds before becoming steady. The
CHP-85D's or the CHP-86B's CRS knob. The course second course arrow deviation bar is removed from
is then selected with the applicable CRS knob on the view if the failure was from the internal VOR syn-
CHP when in VOR, LOC, RNV, TCN, or MLS mode, chro monitor or from the LNAV bus parameter moni-
or is automatically set by an appropriate LNAV such tor. The flashing can be eliminated by pushing the
as LNV, INS, VLF, or RNV. master warn reset.

When the preset second course is a VOR and its asso-

3.9.1.4 Selected Heading
ciated DME is in hold, the navigation source annun-
ciator displays VOR1 H or VOR2 H with VOR1 or
Selected heading is shown by the location of two
VOR2 in cyan and the H in yellow, with the H located
adjacent magenta rectangles with respect to the
to the right of the numeral in the sensor annuncia-
.

compass card. The DSP (or DCP) HDG knob is used

tion. If a failure of the DME associated with the
to set the heading cursor or it can be made to rotate
displayed VOR occurs, the navigation sensor annun- .

to the lubber line position by momentarily pushing

ciator remains cyan followed by a D in red, with the
the PUSH HDG SYNC button on the HDG knob. The
D located to the right of the numeral in the sensor
heading syne function can also be remotely actuated
annunciation (ie, VOR1 D). MPU/DPU (-002status) .

by various mode logic from some digital autopilots.

service bulletin 25 changes the D color from red to
yellow. If a localizer frequency has been tuned, the
3.9.1.5 Bearing Pointer Display
sensor annunciator displays LOC1 or LOC2.

If the second course navigation sensor is incompati. When selected on the DSP (or with the BRG button
ble with the heading sensor (true or magnetic), the and the SEL/RNG knob on the DCP), a magenta
navigation sensor annunciator flashes until a com- bearing pointer is displayed on the EHSI along with
patible selection is made. the sensor annunciation. The sensor annunciation is
in the lower left with the letters BRG, in magenta,
EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12): The data being displayed on above the sensor type. If the sensor is an onside VOR
the preset second course arrow may be automatically or ADF, the sensor annunciation is green. If the sen-
selected as the active selected course by pushing the sor is an onside LNAV, the sensor annunciation is

Revised 30 August 1993 3-33

 operation 523-0773943

white. All cross-side sensors are annunciated in yel- localizer mode occurs when a localizer frequency is
low. The head of the bearing pointer is also shape- tuned, and the difference between airplane heading
coded, depending on the sensor that is connected to and the primary course arrow exceeds approximately
the pointer. If the sensor is VOR, the pointer is octa- 105 degrees.)
gon-shaped. If the sensor is an area navigation sys-
tem or a long-range navigation system, the pointer is a. Glideslope Deviation
star-shaped. When ADF is the sensor, the pointer is
cross-shaped. The bearing pointer tail is a line with a The glideslope deviation pointer is a dual green
V superimposed, pointing to the station. The VOR triangle for the onside sensor and a dual yellow
bearing pointer is removed if a localizer frequency is triangle for the cross-side sensor. The glideslope
tuned. pointer represents the center of the glideslope
beam, and the center of the glideslope scale repre-
If ADF has been selected with true heading being sents airplane position relative to beam center.
displayed, the bearing annunciation will flash for 10 Each of the inner scale dots represents a ¼-
seconds before becoming steady. The flashing can be degree displacement; each of the outer scale dots
eliminated by pushing the master warn reset. If VOR represents a ½-degree displacement. If a Cate-
or LNAV has been selected with an incompatible gory II approach is being conducted, the pointer
heading sensor, the bearing sensor annunciator changes to yellow and flashes when glideslope
flashes until a compatible selection has been made. deviation exceeds the Category II limits. If a fail-
ure of the glideslope receiver is detected, a red
In the event of a sensor failure, the bearing pointer box with the letters GS inscribed appears in the
will be removed from view and the sensor annuncia- center of the scale and flashes for 10 seconds
tion will become red, boxed, and flash for 10 seconds before becoming steady. The flashing can be elim-
before becoming steady. The flashing can be elimi- inated by pushing the master warn reset.
nated by pushing the master warn reset. If VOR has
been selected and a localizer frequency is tuned, the b. Vertical Navigation Deviation
bearing pointer and the pointer annunciation are .

removed but the letters BRG remain in view.

Deviation from a selected vertical navigation
path is displayed by a white star-shaped pointer
If an ADF lock signal is not received, the ADF for the onside sensor or a yellow star-shaped
pointer is removed and the ADF flag appears. pointer for the cross-side sensor. The VNAV
pointer represents the center of the vertical navi-
3.9.1.6 Vertical Deviation Display gation path, and the center of the scale represents
airplane position relative to the path. Each of the
A scale and pointer on the right side of the EHSI inner scale dots represents a 200-foot displace-
indicate deviation from a selected vertical path. The ment; each of the outer scale dots represents a
scale consists of two white dots above and below a 400-foot displacement. If a failure of the vertical
center index. navigation system is detected, the scale and
pointer are removed from view and a red box with
If an onside localizer frequency is tuned and VNAV is the letters VNV inscribed is displayed. This flag
not selected and enabled (if a VNAV system is will flash for 10 seconds before becoming steady.
installed in the airplane), then glideslope deviation is The flashing can be eliminated by pushing the
displayed. When VNAV is selected on the DSP and master warn reset.
enabled, deviation from a selected vertical naviga-
tion path is displayed. During an ILS or MLS 3.9.1.7 Distance Display
approach, the VNAV display automatically switches
to display GS or MGP deviation at GS or MGP cap- The distance to the VOR or waypoint selected for
ture (capture logic is from the flight control system). display on the primary course arrow is shown digi-
If in back localizer mode, B/L will be displayed to the tally below the letters DIST in the upper left of the
right of the lubber line. B/L will also be displayed in EHSI. The distance display will be the same color as
place of the glideslope scale if in back localizer and the primary course display. Resolution is to 0.1 nmi
not displaying VNAV. (Back localizer mode is auto- below 100 nmi and 1 nmi above 100 nmi. When DME
matically sensed within EFIS by comparing present hold has been selected, the letter H, in yellow,
airplane heading with the localizer front course set appears to the right of the digits. If a DME failure is
by the primary course arrow on the EHSI. Back detected when VOR is selected or an LNAV sensor

Revised 30 August 1993 3-34

 operation 523-0773943

failure is detected when LNAV is selected, the digits regardless of the primary course selection. No com-
are replaced with red dashes which flash for 10 puted data is shown as white dashes.
seconds and then become steady. The flashing can be
eliminated by pushing the master warn reset. No 3.9.1.9 Weather Annunciation
computed data is shown as dashes in the same color
as the DIST legend. MPU/DPU (-002status) service When the target alert function is selected on the
bulletin 25 blanks the digits for no computed data. WXP-85( )/WXP-850( ) and the mode selection is
not in standby, map, or off, a yellow box with "T"
3.9.1.8 Data Display ("TGT" for WXP-850( )) inscribed appears to the
right of the lubber line. This display is steady unless
Elapsed time, ground speed, or time-to-go is dis- a weather target is detected at which time the
played in the upper right below the letters ET, GSP, annunciator flashes. If turbulence is detected, the
or TTG as applicable. Wind speed and direction, if "TGT" changes to "TRB" and alternates between
available as an input, can also be displayed. The data "TGT" and "TRB".
displayed is selected by sequentially pushing the
NAV DTA button on the DSP (or CHP). The last one 3.9.1.10 Navigation Annunciation
selected is stored in nonvolatile memory and will
reappear on power up. If the primary course display is derived from an
LNAV, XTK and DR annunciations appear to the
Ground speed and time-to-go are derived from the right of the lubber line, and MSG appears to the left
same sensor driving the primary course display and of the lubber line as received from the LNAV system.
will be the same color. If that source is VOR, the XTK is white if from the onside LNAV or yellow if
calculation occurs in the EFIS system. Otherwise, from the cross-side LNAV. DR and MSG are yellow
the data is transmitted by the navigation system. If a and MSG flashes continuously.
DME failure is detected when VOR is selected or an
LNAV sensor failure is detected when LNAV is 3.9.1.11 Compatibility Between Navigation/
selected, the digits are replaced by red dashes which Bearing Display and Heading Source
flash for 10 seconds before becoming steady. The
flashing can be eliminated by pushing the master Depending on selected navigation sensors and the
warn reset. No computed data is shown as dashes in selection of magnetic or true heading sources, com-
the same color as the legend. MPU/DPU (-002sta- patibility problems can occur. Table 3-1 defines the
tus) service bulletin 25 blanks the digits for failure or conditions which are incompatible and the EHSI
no computed data. annunciations that are provided to alert the pilot of
those conditions.
EFIS-85B(2)/86B(2): Elapsed time is shown in min-
utes and seconds up to 59:59 and then in hours and 3.9.1.12 Heading Sensor Annunciator
minutes up to H9:59. Above H9:59, the display is
dashed. The ET display is green for the onside DSP Heading sensor annunciation is displayed at all
and yellow for the cross-side DSP. An external times by MPU/DPU units (-001status) not incorpo-
installer-supplied switch is used to control the reset/ rating service bulletin 25. The annunciator is located
start/stop cycle of the timer. in the lower right portion (to the left of the bottom
dot on the lateral deviation scale) of the EHSI.
EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12): Elapsed time is shown in HDG1 is displayed for any heading source, either
minutes and seconds up to 59:59 and then in hours compass or AHS (attitude/heading system), associ-
and minutes up to H9:59. Above H9:59, the display is ated with the left input ports of the system. HDG2 is
dashed. The ET display is green for the onside half of displayed for any heading source, either compass or
the CHP and yellow for the cross-side CHP. The AHS, associated with the right input ports of the
reset/start/stop cycle of the time is controlled by the system. Onside heading sensor annunciation is dis-
ET button on the CHP. played in white in normal and drive (MPU) transfer.
HDG with its number is shown in yellow for cross-
Wind speed, if available as an input, is displayed side heading.
digitally in knots. Wind direction is shown by an
arrow depicting the direction of the wind relative to MPU/DPU units (-002status) with service bulletin
the airplane symbol. This display is white and is 25 incorporated do not display heading sensor
derived from the onside LNAV system. It is displayed annunciation (HDG1 or HDG2) in normal drive. In

Revised 30 August 1993 3-35

 operation 523-0773943

drive (MPU) transfer, HDG1 (or HDG2) is shown in All other functions of the compass display (colors,

l
yellow. HDG with its number is shown in yellow for
cross-side heading (HDG2 on the left side and HDG1
on the right side).

3.9.2 Approach (or ARC) Format (Figure 3-15)

annunciationof true heading, directional gyro mode,
onside or cross-side heading source, heading flag,
and comparator warning) are the same as described
for the ROSE format.

3.9.2.2 Primary (Active) Selected Course

EFIS-85B(2)/86B(2): The approachformat is Display
selected by positioning the DSP FORMAT switch to
APPR. Primary selected course (or active selected course) is
shown by a solid single bar course arrow related to
EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12): The ARC format is selected the compass segment with a deviation bar near the
airplane symbol. A deviation scale which rotates
by positioning the DCP HSI-ARC-MAP switch to
with the course arrow is also displayed. The devia-
ARC
tion bar and scale rotate with the selected course
throughout the full 360-degree range. The deviation
3.9.2.1 Compass Sector Display bar and scale will be wholly or partially out of view
for some selected courses.
The expanded compass sector displayed in the
approach (or ARC) format is similar to the full com- To/From is indicated by the letters TO or FR appear-
pass card displayed in the ROSE (or HSI) format, ing in the lower right of the display near the digital
except that the EHSI displays a ±40-degree compass course readout. If LNAV is the selected course and
segment at the top of the display and the airplane the LNAV outputs a waypoint alert, the TO annunci-
symbol is placed at the bottom center of the display- ator flashes.
The compass sector, onside course arrow, heading
cursor, and bearing pointer rotate with respect to the All other functions and colors of the selected course
intersection of the wings and fuselage of the airplane display are the same as described for the ROSE for-
symbol. mat.

Table 3-1. Selected Course and Bearing Pointers Vs Heading Sensors.

COURSE BEARING
PILOT'S
BEARING OR HEADING SENSOR HEADING SENSOR
PRIMARY
COURSE #1 MAG MAG TRUE TRUE #1 MAG MAG TRUE TRUE
#2 MAG TRUE MAG TRUE #2 MAG TRUE MAG TRUE

VOR 1/2 OK OK A A OK OK A A

ADF 1/2 N/A N/A N/A N/A OK OK D D

LRN 1 MAG OK OK B B OK OK B B

LRN 1 TRUE B B OK OK B B OK OK

LRN 2 MAG OK C A B OK C A B

LRN 2TRUE B A C OK B A C OK

A -
flash until sensors compatible
B -
flash only if MAGVAR associated with LRN sensor is invalid
C -
flash unless MAGVAR associated with LRN sensor is invalid
D -
flash for 10 seconds, then steady

Ret>ised 30 August 1993 3-36

 operation 523-0773943

Colli ns

DIST TTG
18.4 \ 3.4

LO
O SHG
1

0
R NORP1 25
2
°
BRG CRS
TO

CGO-2508-14-AC-7

Approach (or ARC) Format

Figure 3-15

3.9.2.3 Second Course Display and the H in yellow. If a failure of the DME associ-
ated with a displayed VOR occurs, the VOR symbol is
A second course may be selected using the 2ND CRS removed from view and the sensor annunciator
button on the DSP as described for the ROSE for- remains cyan followed by a D in red (ie, VOR1 D) for
mat. The selected second course is displayed in cyan MPU/DPU status configuration.
-001

MPU/DPU
and its sensor is annunciated in cyan below the pri- -002

status unitsincorporate service bulletin 25

mary selected course sensor on the left side of the changing the color of the D from red to yellow.
EHSI.
If the second course is a VOR and a localizer fre-
When the selected second course is a VOR, a cyan
quency is tuned, no symbol is displayed and the sen-
.

octagonal symbol is placed in proper rho-theta posi-

displays LOC1 or LOC2.
.

sor annunciator
tion with respect to selected range and airplane
heading. The station ident is displayed next to the
VOR symbol on the side nearest the vertical center When the second course is an LNAV, the to waypoint
line of the display. is displayed as a star-shaped cyan symbol shown in
its proper rho-theta position with respect to selected
When the second course is a VOR and its associated range and airplane heading. The waypoint is identi-
DME is in hold, the VOR symbol is removed from fied by its waypoint number, also in cyan, with the
view and the navigation sensor annunciator displays number being next to the waypoint symbol on the
VOR1 H or VOR2 H with the VOR1 or VOR2 in cyan side nearest the vertical center line of the display. If

Revised 30 August 1993 3-37

 operation 523-0773943

the LNAV is compatible, the waypoint symbol four colors: green, yellow, red, and magenta (least i
flashes for waypoint alert. reflective to most reflective). When using a WXP-
85C or -85D with WX mode selected, the PAC Alert
If the second course navigation sensor is incompati- (Path Attenuation Correction) feature is automati-
ble with the heading sensor (true or magnetic), the cally enabled. With the PAC Alert feature, a yellow
navigation sensor annunciator flashes until a com- band will occasionally appear at the outer perimeter
patible selection is made· of the range being displayed. Whenever this band
. appears, that portion of the radar's scan may be
If a navigation sensor failure is detected while it is
missing certain distant targets that are masked by
selected for second course, the navaid symbol (VOR .

Intervening areas of rainfall. When weather radar is

or waypoint) is removed from view and the second a solid cyan range mark will appear at
selected,
course navigation sensor annunciator becomes red midrange on the display with the midrange distance
and boxed and flashes for 10 seconds before becom-
(5, 12.5, 25, 50, 100, and 150) shown in cyan digits at
ing steady. The flashing can be eliminated by push- end of the range mark. Full-scale
the right-hand
ing the master warn reset.
range extends to the periphery of the compass seg-
ment. The range is selected using the RANGE con-
3.9.2.4 Selected Heading trol on the WXP-85( ) Weather Radar Panel.
Selected heading is shown by the location of two
adjacent magenta rectangles with respect to the
The weather radar mode (STBY, TEST, WX, NORM '
compass sector when on scale. When selected head- MAP, GAIN, HOLD, or FAULT) as selected on the
ing is off scale, a digital readout (magenta) will
WXP is shown in cyan at the lower left end of the
appear at the appropriate end of the compass sector cyan range mark. If any GAIN position except MAX
closest to the selected heading value and a magenta is selected, the mode annunciator will alternate
line will appear from the center of the airplane sym- between GAIN and the selected mode at a 1-Hz rate
bol to the edge of the display at the selected heading (ie, GAIN-WX-GAIN-WX, etc). The alternating
angle. If no primary course is being displayed, the words serve to remind the user that the system is
heading line will be displayed. If the heading cursor operating in a reduced gain condition and some
is on scale, the heading line connects the cursor and targets may not be displayed. If weather radar hold
the airplane symbol. is selected, the weather radar mode annunciator will
alternate between HOLD and the selected mode at a
1-Hz rate (HOLD-WX-HOLD-WX, etc). The alter-
3.9.2.5 Range
nating words serve to remind the pilot that the sys-
When approach (or ARC) format is being displayed tem is in the HOLD mode, and the weather radar
without weather radar information, range is selected display is not being updated.
by the RNG knob on the DSP (or SEL/RNG knob on
the DCP). Range is displayed as a dashed cyan range If the WXP is turned off or a loss of data from the
mark located halfway between the compass sector WXP is detected when weather radar information is
and the airplane symbol. Half of the full-scale range being displayed, the range mark and weather dis-
is displayed in cyan digits at the right-hand end of plays are removed from view and the range will
the range mark. Selectable full-scale ranges are 5, 10, default to 300 nmi.
25, 50, 100, 200, 300, and 600 nmi. Half-scale annunci-
ated ranges are 2.5, 5, 12.5, 25, 50, 100, 150, and 300 WXP-850( ): Adding a weather radar display to the
nmi. approach (or ARC) format is accomplished by having
WX or WX+T mode selected on the WXP-850( ) and
3.9.2.6 Weather Radar Display then pushing the WX pushbutton on the DSP (or
RDR on the DCP). A second push of the DSP WX E
WXP-85( ): Adding a weather radar display to the button (or the DCP RDR button) will remove the
approach (or ARC) format is accomplished by having weather radar display. When using a WXP-850A or
WX or NORM mode selected on the WXP and then -850B with WX or WX+T mode selected, detectable
pushing the WX pushbutton on the DSP (or DCP). A weather will appear as one of four colors: green, yel-
second push of the DSP WX button (or the DCP RDR low, red, and magenta (least reflective to most reflec-
button) will remove the weather radar display. When tive). The weather radar mode (STBY, TEST, TGT,
using a WXP-85C or -85D with WX or NORM mode MAP, WX, WX+T, or TURB) as selected on the WXP
selected, detectable weather will appear as one of is shown in cyan (yellow when slaved) at the lower

Revised 30 August 1993 3-38

 operation 523-0773943

left end of the cyan range mark. If weather radar the ROSE format except that the GS and LOC com-
hold is selected, the weather radar mode annuncia- parator warnings are relocated.
tion flashes, alternating between the mode annunci-
ation and HOLD. The alternating words serve to 3.9.3 Enroute (or MAP) Format (Figure 3-16)
remind the pilot that the system is in the HOLD
mode and the weather radar display is not being EFIS-85B(2)/86B(2): The enroute format is selected
updated. Ground clutter suppushion (GCS) is annun- by positioning the DSP FORMAT switch to ENR.
ciated below the radar mode annunciator in cyan
(yellow if slaved). Weather radar gain is annunciated
EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12): The MAP format is selected
in the lower left of the EHSI in cyan. Gain is shown by positioning the DCP HSI-ARC-MAP switch to
for G-3 through G+3, with the center CAL position MAP.
blanked. When weather radar is selected, a dashed
cyan range mark will appear at midrange on the dis- 3.9.3.1 Compass Sector Display
play, with the midrange distance (5, 12.5, 25, 50, 100,
All functions and colors of the enroute format com-
and 150) shown in cyan digits at the right-hand end
. .

pass display are the same as described for the

of the range mark. Full-scale range extends to the
approach format.
periphery of the compass segment. The range is
selected using the RANGE control on the WXP-
850( ) Weather Radar Panel. TILT is annunciated 3.9.3.2 Primary (Active) Selected Course
below the range distance in cyan (ie, +10.5). When Display
using a WXP-850( ) with WX or WX+T mode
When the primary selected course is a VOR, an
selected, the PAC Alert (Path Attenuation Corree- octagonal VOR symbol is placed in proper rho-theta
tion) feature is automatically enabled. With the PAC position with respect to selected range and the air-
Alert feature, a yellow band will occasionally appear plane symbol. The station ident is displayed next to
at the outer perimeter of the range being displayed the VOR symbol on the side nearest the vertical
Whenever this band appears, that portion of the center line of the display. A selected course line is
radar's scan may be missing certain distant targets
drawn through the VOR symbol with its position
that are masked by intervening areas of rainfall. controlled by the CRS knob on the DSP (or CHP).
The course line is solid on the To side of the symbol
If the WXP is turned off or a loss of data from the
and dashed on the From side. If the VOR symbol is
WXP is detected when weather radar information is
off scale with respect to selected range and/or bear-
being displayed, the range mark and weather dis-
.

ing, the course line is drawn with an arrow pointing

.

plays are removed from view and the range defaults

toward the station, and the station ident is displayed
to 300 nmi.
on the line. The navigation sensor is annunciated at
the left center of the display. The VOR symbol,
3.9.2.7 Bearing Pointer Display course line, station identifier, and navigation sensor
annunciation are green if from onside and yellow if
All functions and colors of the bearing pointer dis-
from cross-side. If the primary selected course is
play are the same as described for the ROSE (or HSI)
RNV, the operation is the same as just described but
format except that the pointer rotates around the
the symbol is star-shaped.
relocated airplane symbol.
If a localizer frequency is tuned, the VOR symbol,
3.9.2.8 Vertical Deviation Display station identifier, and course line are removed from
view. The navigation sensor annunciator displays
All functions and colors of the vertical deviation dis- LOC1 or LOC2 in the same color as the VOR annunci-
play are the same as described for the ROSE (or HSI) ator.
format.
When the primary selected course is VOR and its
3.9.2.9 Peripheral Displays associated DME is in hold, the VOR symbol, station
identifier, and course line are removed from view. In
All functions and colors of the distance display, data this condition, the navigation sensor annunciator
display, weather annunciation, navigation annuncia- still displays the selected VOR, and DME hold is
tion, and compatibility between navigation sensors indicated by a yellow H next to the distance readout
and heading sources are the same as described for in the upper left corner of the display.

Revised 30 August 1993 3-39

 operation 523-0773943

\coliins

TRUE
IST

s \ 6
1

0
R NORM 150
2
BRG CRS

CGO-2508-14-AC-8

Enroute (or MAP) Format

Figure 3-16

When the primary selected course is an LNAV, star- sensor annunciator flashes until a compatible selec-
shaped waypoint symbols (up to three) are located in tion is made.
their proper rho-theta positionwith respect to the
selected range and airplane symbol. The waypoints If a navigation sensor failure is detected while it is
are identified by waypoint numbers next to the way- selected for primary selected course, the navaid sym-
point symbol on the side nearest the vertical center bols (VOR or waypoint) and connecting lines are
line of the display. Waypoint symbols are connected removed from view, and the navigation sensor
by track lines as output by the LNAV system. An annunciator becomes red and boxed and flashes for
arrow is drawn on the track line pointing at the To 10 seconds before becoming steady. The flashing can
waypoint. If the To waypoint is off scale, an arrow is be eliminated by pushing the master warn reset.
drawn on the track line pointing at the To waypoint,
and WPT # is displayed on the line. The To waypoint 3.9.3.3 Second Course Display
symbol flashes to indicate waypoint alert. The navi-
A second course may be selected in the same manner
gation sensor annunciation is displayed at the left
center of the display. The waypoint string and navi- as described for the ROSE (or HSI) format. The
.

. selected second course is displayed in cyan and its

gation sensor annunciator are white if from onside,
sensor is annunciated in cyan below the primary
or yellow if from cross-side.
selected course sensor on the left side of the EHSI.

If the navigation sensor is incompatible with the When the selected second course is a VOR, a cyan
type of heading (true or magnetic), the navigation octagon symbol is placed in proper rho-theta position

Revised 30 August 1993 3-40

 operation 523-0773943

with respect to selected range and station bearing. If a navigation sensor failure is detected while it is
The station ident is displayed next to the VOR sym- selected for selected second course, the navaid sym-
bol on the side nearest the vertical center line of the bols (VOR or waypoint) and connecting lines are
display. A selected course line is drawn through the removed from view and the second course navigation
VOR symbol with its position controlled by the CRS sensor annunciator becomes red and boxed and
knob on the associated DSP (or CHP). The course flashes for 10 seconds before becoming steady. The
line is solid on the To side of the symbol and dashed flashing can be eliminated by pushing the master
on the From side. If the VOR symbol is off scale with warn reset.
respect to selected range and/or bearing, the course
line is drawn with an arrow pointing toward the sta- 3.9.3.4 Selected Heading
tion, and the station ident is displayed on the line. If
the selected second course is an RNV, the operation All functions and colors of the selected heading dis-
is as just described but the symbol is star-shaped. play are the same as described for the approach (or
ARC) format.
If DSP (or DCP) control is transferred and the cross-
side VOR second course (relative to the in use DSP or 3.9.3.5 Range
DCP) is selected, the VOR symbol remains in view
but no course line is drawn. All functions and colors of the range display are the
same as described for the approach (or ARC) format.
When the second course is a VOR and its associated
DME is in hold, the VOR symbol and course line are 3.9.3.8 Bearing Display
removed from view and a yellow H is placed to the
right of the numeral in the VOR sensor annuncia- All functions and colors of the bearing display are
tion. If a failure of the DME associated with a dis- the same as described for the approach (or ARC)
played VOR occurs, the VOR symbol and course line format.
are removed from view and in MPU/DPU status
-001

units a red D is placed to the right of the numeral in 3.9.3.7 Other Enroute (or MAP) Format
the VOR sensor annunciation. MPU/DPU status
-002

Displays
units change the D color from red to yellow. If the
second course is a VOR and a localizer frequency is All functions and colors of the vertical deviation dis-
tuned, no symbol or course line is displayed, and the play, distance display, data display, weather annun-
sensor annunciator displays LOC1 or LOC2 in cyan. ciation, navigation annunciation, compatibility
between navigation sensors and heading sources, and
When the selected second course is an LNAV, star- comparator warnings are the same as described for
shaped waypoint symbols (up to three) are located in the ROSE (or HSI) format.
their proper rho-theta position with respect to the
selected range and airplane symbol. The waypoints 3.10 EFIS COMPARATORS AND MASTER
are identified by waypoint numbers next to the way- WARN
point symbol on the side nearest the vertical center
line of the display. Waypoint symbols are connected Comparator monitoring is performed in each DPU
by track lines as output by the LNAV system. An and MPU in the EFIS system. onside data is read,
arrow is drawn on the track line pointing at the To converted to digital form, and stored by each DPU
waypoint. If the To waypoint is off scale, the track and MPU. The MPU sends its information to the
line is still drawn at the proper angle with WPT # DPUs so that each of the processors has the informa-
displayed on the line. The To waypoint symbol tion required to perform the comparison function.
flashes to indicate waypoint alert. The navigation When the MPU is being used to drive the EADI and
sensor annunciation is displayed at the left center of EHSI, it provides the comparator function in place of
the display. The waypoint string and navigation sen- the failed DPU. The failed DPU could still be output-
sor annunciator are cyan for the selected second ting comparator messages unless its breaker is
course. pulled or the DPU/MPU outputs are externally
switched.
If the second course navigation sensor is incompati-
ble with the heading sensor (true or magnetic), the If the MPU is driving the MFD, its only comparator
navigation sensor annunciator flashes until a com- function is heading, which is displayed on the MFD
patible selection is made. to the left of the lubber line when in the NAV and

Revised 30 August 1993 3-41

 operation 523-0773943

RDR modes. The MPU does not output any other with the letters GS or MGP inscribed appears near
comparator warnings in this mode. the vertical deviation scale.

3.10.1 Master Warn If a localizer or MLS azimuth comparator warning is

detected and Category II is enabled, a yellow box
with the letters LOC inscribed appears near the lat-
A master warn output is provided from each DPU
and from the MPU when in drive transfer. These eral deviation scale.

outputs are used to enable external installer-sup-

plied master warning annunciators. If a radio altitude coraparator warning is detected
and Category II is enabled, a yellow box with the
letters RA inscribed appears next to the radio alti-
Momentarily actuating an installer-supplied master
warn reset switch stops the flashing of the EADI and tude readout.
EHSI comparators and of the external installer-sup-
plied attitude, heading, and Category II compara-
These comparator messages will flash until the
master warn has been reset, at which time they
tors, and extinguishes the master warning
become steady. The messages will disappear when
annunciator.
the external comparator reset switch is actuated, if
the comparator error is no longer present. There are
3.10.2 Comparator Reset no MAZ and MGP comparators for MLS.

In addition to the comparator warnings displayed on

3.10.4 EHSI Comparator Warnings
the EADI and EHSI, the EFIS provides external
comparator warning outputs for attitude, heading,
If a heading comparator warning message is
and Category II (the Category II comparator annun-
received,the letters HDG, boxed and yellow, will
ciator illuminates when Category II is enabled and if
appear to the left of the lubber line.
the two localizer or glideslope deviations or the two
radio altitudes differ by a predetermined amount)
If a glideslope or MLS glidepath comparator warning
from each DPU and from the MPU when in drive
is detected and Category II is enabled, a yellow box
transfer. These external comparator warning out-
with the letters GS inscribed appears at the lower
puts are used to enable external installer-supplied
right of the vertical deviation scale.
.

annunciators.
If a localizer or MLS azimuth comparator warning is
Momentarily actuating an installer-supplied compa-
.

detected and Category II is enabled, a yellow box

rator reset switch extinguishes the EADI/EHSI with the letters LOC inscribed appears at the right of
comparator warning displays and the external com-
the airplane symbol.
parator warning annunciator(s). If the condition
which caused the compare error has been removed,
These messages will flash until the master warn has
the EADI/EHSI comparator warning display and
.

been reset, at which time they become steady. The

the external comparator warning annunciator(s) messages will disappear when the condition is cor-
remain off when the comparator reset switch is
rected and the comparator reset input is received.
released. If the warn condition is still present when
the comparator reset switch is released, the EADI/
3.10.5 Heading Comparator
EHSI comparator warning display and the external
comparator warning annunciator(s) illuminate
again, but the master warn annunciator does not, a. Enable Logic

The heading comparator is enabled full time

3.10.3 EADI Comparator Warnings unless:

If a pitch or roll comparator warning is detected, the e Either side has a flag condition.
letters PIT and/or ROL, boxed and in yellow, will e One side is using true heading and the other
appear in the lower left portion of the display. side is using magnetic heading.
e A cross-side data failure is detected.
If a glideslope or MLS glidepath comparator warning e Attitude is valid and the roll angle is greater
is detected and Category II is enabled, a yellow box than 20 degrees.

Revised 30 August 1998 3-O

 operation 523-0773943

Note c. Annunciation

DG (directional gyro) mode does not inhibit When a comparator warning is detected, a yellow
the heading compare function if both head- box with ROL inscribed is displayed in the lower
ings are magnetic. left portion of the EADI. The letters and box
flash for 10 seconds before becoming steady or
b. Comparator Limits will stop sooner if the pilot resets master. The g
master warn and roll compare discretes are ener-
A comparator warning is annunciated when: gized.

GS SENSOR HDG DIFFERENCE d. Comparator Activation Delay

CAPTURED CONFLICT GREATER THAN .

Activation of the roll comparator is delayed 0.75

second.
Yes Conflict Off
Yes OK 4° + [½ roll angle]
3.10.7 Pitch Comparator
No Conflict Off
No OK 6° + [½ roll angle] a. Enable Logic
[ ] is the absolute value of the roll angle.
The pitch comparator is enabled full time unless:
c. Annunciation
e Either side has a flag condition.
When a comparator warning is detected, a yellow e A cross-side data failure is detected.
box with HDG inscribed is displayed to the left of
the lubber line on the EHSI. The letters and box b. Comparator Limits
flash for 10 seconds before becoming steady or
A comparator warning is annunciated when:
will stop sooner if the pilot resets master. The
master warn and heading compare discretes are GS SENSOR PITCH DIFFERENCE
energized· CAPTURED CONFLICT GREATER THAN

d. Comparator Activation Delay Yes Conflict 5°

Yes OK 3°
Activation of the heading comparator is delayed No Conflict 6°
0.75 second (5 seconds for source change)· No OK 4°

3.10.6 Roll Comparator c. Annunciation

.
When a comparator warning is detected, a yellow
a. Enable Logic box with PIT inscribed is displayed in the lower
The roll comparator is enabled full time unless: left portion of the EADI. The letters and box
flash for 10 seconds before becoming steady or
e Either side has a flag condition. will stop sooner if the pilot resets master. The i
e A cross-side data failure is detected. master warn and pitch compare discretes are
energized.
b. Comparator Limits
d. Comparator Activation Delay
A comparator warning is annunciated when: Activation of the pitch comparator is delayed 0.75
second.
GS SENSOR ROLL DIFFERENCE
CAPTURED CONFLICT GREATER THAN 3.10.8 Category II Comparators

Yes Conflict 5° The EFIS-85B system provides special visual cues to

Yes OK 3° indicate excessive localizer and glideslope deviation
No Conflict 6° on the EADI and EHSI during a Category II
No OK 4° approach. The system also provides all of the logic

Revised 30 August 1998 8-48

 operation 523-0773943

circuits necessary to provide additional annunciator more than 30 µA + ½ [LOC 1 + LOC 2]. ([ ] is the
outputs to inform the crew of the status/availability absolute value of the localizer deviations.)
of the Category II function. The pilot's and copilot's
Category II select switches, switching relays, and c. Annunciation
annunciator lights (usually a Category II green and
amber light on both sides and a Category II compa- When a comparator warning is detected, a flash-
ing yellow box with LOC or MAZ inscribed
rator on both sides) are installer-supplied items and
are not furnished as part of the EFIS-85B system. appears by the vertical deviation pointer on the
EADI and the airplane symbol on the EHSI. The
The installer-supplied external Category II compara- letters and box flash for 10 seconds before becom-
tor annunciator illuminates when Category II is ena- ing steady or will stop sooner if the pilot resets
bled and if the two localizer or glideslope deviations master. The master warn and Category II com- E
or the two radio altitudes differ by a predetermined pare discretes are energized.
amount. The EADI annunciates localizer, glideslope,
d. Comparator Activation Delay
and radio altimeter comparators. The EHSI annun-
ciates localizer and glideslope comparators. An Activation of the localizer comparator is delayed
installer-supplied master warn annunciator also 0.75 second.
illuminates when any of the above comparators is
tripped 3.10.8.2 Glideslope or MLS Glidepath
Comparator
The Category II function, comparator warning, and
annunciator logic are performed simultaneously and a. Enable Logic
independently by the two display processor units.
These functions will also be performed by the mul- A comparison of the two glideslope or MLS
tifunction processor unit during reversionary modes glidepath deviation signals is performed when all
when the MPU-85G/86G is driving either, but not of the following conditions are met:
both, the pilot's and copilot's displays.
e onside Category II request discrete is received.
3.10.8.1 Localizer or MLS Azimuth Comparator e onside radio altitude is valid and less than 1000
feet.
a. Enable Logic e Both DSPs (or DCPs) are valid and their active
courses are VOR/LOC or MLS.
A comparison of the two localizer deviation sig- e Cross-side data is valid.
nals is performed when all of the following condi- e Both glideslope signals are valid and both local-
tions are met: izer signals are tuned and valid or both MGP
and MAZ signals are tuned and valid.
e onside Category II request discrete is received.
e Cross-side DSP (or DCP) is not selected on
e onside DSP (or DCP) is valid and its active
either side.
course is VOR/LOC or MLS.
e Both sides are not in back course mode.
e onside radio altitude is valid and less than 1000
• Go around is not selected on either side.
feet.
e Cross-side data is valid· b. Comparator Limits
e Both localizer signals are tuned and valid or
both MLS signals are tuned and valid (data A comparator warning is annunciated when the
must be tuned and valid on both VORs or both enable logic is satisfied and the two glideslope or
MLSs). MLS glidepath deviations differ by more than 40
e Cross-side DSP (or DCP) is not selected. µA + ½ [GS 1+ GS 2]. ([ ] is the absolute value of
e Back course is not selected on either side. the glideslope deviations.)
e Go around is not selected on either side.
c. Annunciation
b. Comparator Limits
When a comparator warning is detected, a flash-
A localizer comparator warning is annunciated ing yellow box with GS or MGP inscribed appears
when the enable logic is satisfied and the two by the lower two dots of the GS scale on both the
localizer or MLS azimuth deviations differ by EADI and the EHSI. The letters and box flash for

Revised 30 August 1993 3-44

 operation 523-0773943

I 10 seconds before becoming steady or will stop

sooner if the pilot resets master. The master
warn and Category II compare discretes are ener-
amber output, with each output driving the appro-
priately colored external annunciator. A green Cate-
gory II annunciator indicates that all of the
conditions listed below have been satisfied. (It is the
gized.
pilot's responsibility to determine if the approach is
d. Comparator Activation Delay to be made.) An amber Category II annunciator indi-
cates that one or more of the conditions listed below
Activation of the glideslope comparator is have not been satisfied, and the approach should not
delayed 0.75 second· be continued to Category II limits.

3.10.8.3 Radio Altitude Comparator All of the following conditions must be satisfied
before a green Category II annunciator output can be
a. Enable Logic obtained:
The radio altitude comparator is enabled when:
a. Cross-side data valid for both sides
e onside Category II request discrete is received. b. Localizer tuned and valid for 15 seconds on both
e Cross-side data is valid. sides
e Both DSPs (or DCPs) are valid and their active c. Glideslope valid for 15 seconds on both sides
courses are VOR/LOC or MLS. d. Back localizer not detected for either side
e Both radio altitudes are valid. e. Radio altimeter valid and on scale for both sides
e Cross-side DSP (or DCP) is not selected on f. Attitude valid for both sides
either side. g. Heading valid for both sides
e Go around is not selected on either side. h. Alternate attitude source not selected on either
side
b. Comparator Limits i. Alternate heading source not selected on either
side
A comparator warning is annunciated when the j. Analog VNAV not enabled on either side
enable logic is satisfied, both radio altitudes are k. VOR/LOC selected as DSP (or DCP) primary
on scale, or the onside radio altitude is less than course on both sides
1000 feet and the difference between the two 1. DSP (or DCP) valid and not alternate DSP (or
radio altitudes is 30 feet plus a predetermined de- DCP) selected for either side
sense value. If the radio altitude is off scale, its m. Enroute format not selected on either DSP (or
value is set to the maximum for comparison pur- DCP)
poses. n. Command bars in view on either EADI
o. True heading not selected on either side
c. Annunciation p. Dual drive transfer not selected
q. Go-around not selected on either side
When a comparator warning is detected, a flash' r. Radio altitude is less than 600 feet
ing yellow box with RA inscribed appears to the
left of the radio altitude display on the EADI. The If a problem occurs after the green annunciator is
letters and box flash for 10 seconds before becom~ illuminated, the green annunciator turns off and the
ing steady or will stop sooner if the pilot resets
I master. The master warn discrete is energized·
amber annunciator illuminates. This should indicate
to the pilot that the approach should not be contin-
ued to Category II limits. If 400 feet radio altitude is
d. Comparator Activation Delay
reached and the green annunciator has not yet illu-
Activation of the radio altitude comparator is minated, it will not do so at a lower altitude. This
delayed 0.75 second. should also indicate that the approach should not be
continued to Category II limits.
3.10.9 Category II Outputs
3.10.10 Category II Excessive Deviation
The EFIS-85B provides two Category II outputs that Warnings
are used to aid the pilot in determining if Category II
approach monitoring requirements are met. These When the appropriate Category II logic enables are
outputs are referred to as the green output and the present, localizer, MLS azimuth, glideslope, and MLS

Revised 30 August 1993 3-45

 operation 523-0773943

glidepath deviations are compared to prescribed lim- e Onside radio altitude is between 100 and 600
its and appropriate warnings are displayed on the feet.
EADI and EHSI when these limits are exceeded. • Onside glideslope or MLS glidepath is valid.
• Onside localizer is tuned or MLS is selected.
3.10.10.1 Excessive Localizer or MLS Azimuth e Onside back course is not detected.
Deviation e VNAV is not selected onside.
e Onside DCP (or DSP) is valid and cross-side
a. Enable Logic DCP (or DSP) is not selected.
e Go around is not selected on either side.
The onside localizer or MLS azimuth deviation is
compared to the limit when all of the following b. Monitor Limits
conditions are met:
An excessive deviation warning is annunciated
Onside Category II request discrete is received.
.

e
when the enable logic is satisfied and the devia-
Onside VOR/LOC or MLS is the active course
.

e
on both sides.
tion exceeds 65 µA. The onside excessive deviation
warning is also displayed when the cross-side sys-
.

e Onside radio altitude is between 100 and 600

tem has detected an excessive deviation condi-
feet
tion, cross-side data is valid, and a glideslope or
Onside localizer is tuned and valid or MLS azi-
-

•
MLS glidepath scale is in view.
muth is valid.
e Onside back course is not detected.
c. Annunciation
Onside DSP (or DCP) is valid and cross-side
.

•
DSP (or DCP) is not selected. .

When the enable logic conditions are satisfied

• Go around is not selected on either side.
and excessive glideslope deviation is detected, the
.

b. Monitor Limits vertical deviation pointers on the EADI and

EHSI change to yellow and flash. The flashing
An excessive deviation warning is annunciated continues until the deviation signal is below the
when the enable logic is satisfied and the devia- limit and then it automatically reverts to a nor-
tion exceeds 20 µA. The onside excessive deviation mal display.
warning is also displayed when the cross-side sys-
tem has detected an excessive deviation condi- 3.10.11 EFIS System Flags
tion, cross-side data is valid, and a localizer or
MLS azimuth scale is in view. The EFIS system contains internal monitoring
which can cause various flags to appear. If the dis-
c. Annunciation play processor unit (DPU) fails, the words DPU FAIL
will appear in red above the airplane symbol on both
When an excessive localizer deviation is detected,
the EADI and EHSI. If the displays are being driven
the deviation pointer on the EADI and the devia-
by the multifunction processor unit (MPU), the flag
tion bar on the EHSI change to yellow and flash.
is MPU FAIL. If either flag remains in view for more
The flashing continues until the deviation signal
than 5 seconds, the display blanks except for the fail
is below the limit and then it automatically
. . .

message.
to display.
.

reverts a normal
EFIS-85B(2)/86B(2): If a display select panel (DSP)
3.10.10.2 Excessive Glideslope or MLS
failure is detected, the letters DSP will appear in red,
Glidepath Deviation
and boxed, in place of the DH SET readout on the
a. Enable Logic
EADI (lower right corner) and in place of the digital
course readout on the EHSI (lower right corner).
The onside glideslope or MLS glidepath deviation
is compared to the limit when all of the following EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12): If a display control panel
conditions are met: (DCP) failure is detected, the letters DCP will appear
in red, and boxed, in place of the DH SET readout on
• Onside Category II request discrete is received. the EADI (lower right corner) and in place of the
• Onside VOR/LOC or MLS is the active course digital course readout on the EHSI (lower right cor-
on both sides. ner).

Revised 30 August 1993 3-46

 operation 523-0773943

If a failure of the cross-side data bus occurs, the when a target is detected. The target alert function is
letters XDTA will appear in red, and boxed, in the automatically enabled on the MFD (but not on the
lower left portion of the EADI and EHSI. Data from EHSI's) for all other MFD formats (NAV, RMT,
the cross-side sensors is no longer available, and any PGE, and EMG), regardless of the position of the
display driven by cross-side data is flagged. The WXP TGT pushbutton. If the TGT switch is on and
trend vector, reference airspeed, and digital F/S MAP mode is selected, the target alert circuits are
scale are removed. disabled (T will not be displayed) but will again
become functional when WX or NORM mode is
The DSP and XDTA flags (or DCP and XDTA flags) reselected on the WXP. The weather radar mode is
flash for 10 seconds before becoming steady. The displayed in cyan in the upper left corner in all MFD
flashing can be eliminated by pushing the master formats.
warn reset.
3.11.1.2 Navigation Information
3.11 MFD-85A MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY -

DISPLAY FORMATS A pictorial navigation map showing the location of

two VOR/DME stations and/or the active waypoint
Standard functions displayed by the MFD include from the LNAV may be selected. The map display
weather radar, pictorial navigation map, and page may be selected with or without the overlay of
data. Additional functions are available when the weather radar information. Map range is determined
multifunction display is used with the Collins FMS- by the control settings on the WXP when radar is
90 Flight Management System or equivalent (hereaf- selected. In NAV only modes, range may be selected
ter referred to as LNAV). Additional functions avail- by using the line advance (inverted delta, V) or line
able include waypoint definition, display of multiple reverse (delta, A) key along the bottom edge of the
waypoints, and remote data· MFD front panel. When entering the NAV only
mode, the range will be the last range selected in this
3.11.1 Standard MFD-85A Functions mode.

3.11.1.1 Weather Radar 3.11.1.3 Page Data

Weather from the weather
information radar 100 pages of user information may be stored in non-
receiver-transmitter is processed by the WXP-85( ) volatile memory in the MFD. This data may be
or -850(

) Weather Radar Panel and is available for arranged in chapters and can be designated as either
display on the MFD. The WXP-85A and -85B display normal page (PGE) or emergency (EMG) data. All
only three colors (green,yellow, and red) and do not 100 pages can be input and modified by the user
provide the PAC Alert feature. The WXP-85C and using either the handheld RDP-300 Remote Data
-85D are identical in appearance to earlier WXP-85A
Programmer or the CEU-85/85A Checklist Entry
and -85B versions, but are different in function. The Units.
WXP-85C/D and g
) provide a 4-color (green,
-850(

yellow, red, and magenta) weather radar display 3.11.2 Additional MFD-85A Functions
with PAC Alert (Path Attenuation Correction). The
purpose of PAC Alert is to alert the pilot when the When used in conjunction with an LNAV, the MFD
radar encounters a target having rainfall rates provides the following additional functions.
heavy enough to attenuate the beam so much that
targets behind it may not be displayed. With the PAC 3.11.2.1 Waypoint Definition
Alert feature, a yellow band will occasionally appear
at the outer perimeter of the range being displayed. When the NAV display mode has been selected, the
Whenever this band appears, that portion of the joystick at the lowerright corner of the MFD may be
radar's scan may be missing certain distant targets used to move a cursor around the MAP display. The
that are masked by intervening areas of rainfall. bearing and distance data associated with the cursor
waypoint can be digitally transferred to the LNAV.
If RDR has been selected on the MFD with target
alert enabled on the WXP and not in OFF, STBY, or 3.11.2.2 Display of Multiple Waypoints
MAP mode, a yellow box with the yellow letter T (or
TGT) inscribed will appear nonflashing to the right The EFIS-85B EHSIs and the MFD can display mul-
of the lubber line. The T annunciation will flash tiple (up to three) waypoints dependent on selected

Revised 30 August 1993 3-47

 operation 523-0773943

range. Waypoints are interconnected and are identi- and is located in the upper left-hand corner of the
fied on the displays by their designated waypoint display. The radar mode of the MFD is indicated by
number. Waypoints are transmitted by the LNAV in the letters RDR in green next to the RDR button.
either ascending or descending order dependent on Pushing the RDR button allows weather to be dis-
the route selected. played on the MFD in the form selected on the WXP.
A second push of the RDR button deletes the
3.11.2.3 Remote Data weather display. The weather radar target alert is in
the upper right-hand corner and is yellow. The white
The LNAV transmits pages of navigation informa- airplane symbol is in the bottom center and the
tion which can be displayed on the MFD when the white compass sector is across the top of the display.
proper remote port is selected. The different pages of A magenta heading cursor will also be displayed if
data (and associated colors) are controlled by select- the selected heading is within the range of the dis-
ing different modes on the LNAV's CDU. With some played compass sector. Weather intensity is color
LNAVs, the joystick and select keys can be used to coded, with the black screen representing no detecta-
select other pages of information. (With four remote ble moisture, minimum moisture levels displayed in
ports available, alphanumeric data from two FMS-90 green, the next level in yellow, the next in red, and
systems plus two (or three if only one FMS-90 is the heaviest levels of rainfall shown in magenta. The
installed) additional data sources can be displayed PAC Alert feature operates as previously described.
one at a time if available in the system configura- If MAP mode is selected on the WXP, the red is
tions.) replaced by magenta, and green is replaced by cyan.
If RDR and NAV modes are selected, the range mark
3.11.3 MFD-85A Display Formats remains solid. If NAV mode is selected without RDR,
the range mark is dashed. If the WXP is turned off or
3.11.3.1 Radar (RDR) Format a loss of signal from the WXP is detected and radar
mode is selected, the range mark is removed and the
The weather radar only format has a solid range range is set to 300 nmi.
mark with half of the selected range annunciated in
cyan at the right-hand end of the arc. Refer to figure If a failure of the heading sensor is detected, a red
3-17. The range mark is green in MAP mode and cyan box with the letters HDG inscribed appears to the
in the other modes. The weather radar range is right of the lubber line. If the MPU-85G/86G detects
selected on the WXP. The weather mode is in cyan a heading comparator warn, a yellow box with the

coilins

GAU 0174 017

Radar (RDR) Format

Figure 3-17

Revised 30 August 1993 3-48

 operation 523-0773943

letters HDG inscribed appears to the left of the lub- is removed. The course line is solid on the To side of
ber line. If a fault is detected in the weather radar the VOR and dashed on the From side. If the VOR
system, FAULT replaces the radar mode annuncia- symbol is off scale with respect to selected range
tion. and/or bearing, the course line is drawn with an
arrow pointing toward the station and an IDENT is
3.11.3.2 Navigation (NAV) Format displayed on the line. The digital course and station
identifier are shown in the lower left corner for
Refer to figure 3-18. NAV symbology is superimposed VOR1 or lower right for VOR2. Left side (pilot's)
on a basic display consisting of a lubber line (white), VORs are green and right side (copilot's) are yellow.
a ±40-degree compass sector (white), an intermediate
range arc (cyan), and an airplane symbol (white). If a VOR is selected for display and a localizer fre-
Two VORs, one LNAV, and a heading line may be quency is tuned, no symbol is displayed and the sen-
displayed simultaneously. If the WXP is on and RDR sor annunciator displays LOC1 or LOC2. If the
mode is selected, the range is selected on the WXP paired DME is placed in hold or fails, the VOR sym-
and the range mark is solid. If RDR mode is not bol and station identifier are removed and the sensor
selected, the range is selected using the line advance annunciator displays bearing. The colors for these
(inverted delta, V) or line reverse (delta, A) key along annunciators are the same as the primary course
the bottom edge of the MFD front panel and the annunciators.
range mark is dashed.
A selected LNAV waypoint string (up to three ways
VOR stations as selected by the MFD NAV menu are points) is displayed as star-shaped symbols with
shown by octagon-shaped symbols placed in proper track lines placed in the proper rho-theta position.
rho-theta position with respect to airplane heading The course to the next LNV1 waypoint and its way-
and selected range. A selected course line is drawn point number are annunciated in the lower left cor-
through the station symbol with its position con- ner below the VOR1 course annunciation. The sensor
trolled by the CRS knob on the corresponding DSP for the next LNV2 waypoint and its waypoint num-
(or CHP). The selected course line may be rotated ber are annunciated in the lower right corner below
with the DSPs (or CHPs) selected CRS knob even if the VOR2 course annunciation. LNV1 displays are
the primary course is LNAV or OFF. If DSP (or DCP) white and LNV2 are cyan. If the next waypoint is off
control is transferred, the corresponding course line scale, the course line is still displayed with an arrow

CRS 192 MOL

GAO-Ol75-027-1

Navigation (NAV) Format

Figure 3-18

Revised 30 August 1993 3-49

 operation 523-0773943

pointing toward the To waypoint. If the distance from the display. Compatibility between NAV sen-
between the first and second or second and third sors and HDG sources is the same as described in
waypoints is greater than 511 nmi (the maximum paragraph 3.11.4.3 for MFD-85A NAV operation.
value), a line is drawn as if the waypoint was off
scale. The To waypoint flashes to indicate waypoint 3.11.3.3 Remote (RMT) Format
alert from the LNAV.
Refer to figures 3-19 and 3-20. When RMT is selected,
data from one of four remote inputs can be displayed.
With LNAV data being displayed, the joystick can be
Selection of the input is made from the line select
used to position a new waypoint in a compatible
keys. The data displayed depends on the position(s)
LNAV system. As soon as the joystick is moved, the
of the sensor's control(s). Weather radar mode and
third line select key (from the top) is labeled ENTER
target alert status remain on the display in this for-
and is used to insert the new waypoint in the way-
mat.
point string of the selected LNAV as the To way-
I point. If the ENTER button is not pushed and the
joystick is not moved for 30 seconds, the joystick 3.11.4 MFD-85A Multifunction Display (MFD)
Operation
data and ENTER are removed from the display.
The following paragraphs describe the operation of
The heading cursor is shown by two adjacent the MFD. The MFD is a flight planning unit which is
magenta rectangles when selected heading is on used to augment and add to the operational capabili-
scale. When selected heading is off scale, a digital ties of the EFIS-85B system.
readout (magenta) will appear at the appropriate
end of the compass sector closest to the selected If none of the mode buttons on the left side of the
heading value and a magenta line will appear from MFD are pushed, the display consists of the airplane
the center of the airplane symbol to the edge of the symbol, compass sector with lubber line, and heading
display at the selected heading angle. If desired, the cursor (if on scale). (If selected heading is off scale, a
lower line select key in NAV menu mode (labeled digital readout (magenta) will appear at the appro-
HDG) can be pushed to display the selected heading priate end of the compass sector closest to the
line. Selected heading is controlled by the HDG knob selected heading value, and a magenta line will
on the left side DSP (or CHP) unless control has been appear from the center of the airplane symbol to the
transferred to the right side. edge of the display at the selected heading angle.)
The selected heading function is controlled by the
The weather radar mode (cyan) is shown in the upper HDG knob on the left side DSP (or CHP) unless con-
left corner. The target alert (yellow) is shown in the trol has been transferred to the right side DSP (or
upper right. The NAV mode of the MFD is annunci_
CHP).
ated by the green letters NAV in the upper left of the
display below the weather radar mode. With both 3.11.4.1 Radar (RDR)
RDR and NAV selected, weather radar information Pushing the RDR button allows the weather radar
is superimposed on the selected navigation display. mode selected on the WXP-85( ) or -850(

) Weather
Weather colors are as previously described. Radar Panel to be displayed on the MFD. The display
is weather only or can be selected in conjunction with
If a failure of the heading sensor is detected, a red the NAV mode. If in weather only, selecting the NAV
box with the letters HDG inscribed appears to the function adds the NAV modes previously selected to
right of the lubber line. If the failure was from an the weather display. If weather (RDR) is pushed
internal synchro monitor, the compass sector display again, the display reverts to NAV only. If in NAV
is frozen. If the MPU-85G/86G detects a heading only, selecting RDR will add weather to the NAV
comparator warn, a yellow box with the letters HDG display. The display consists of an airplane symbol in
inscribed appears to the left of the lubber line· the bottom center of the display, a compass segment
and lubber line at the top, a single cyan range mark
If a failure of a selected navigation sensor is displayed at midrange, with the midrange distance
detected, the annunciation in the lower left (left side (5, 12.5, 25, 50, 100, and 150) shown in cyan digits at
course) or lower right (right side course) changes to the right-hand end of the range mark (2.5- and 300-
VOR/LOC or LNV as applicable and turns red. The nmi midrange distances (5- and 600-nmi full-scale
navaid symbols and connecting lines are removed ranges) are available in NAV only mode), weather

Revised 30 August 1993 3-50

 operation 523-0773943

Collins

NORM

RMT1

RMT2

RMT3

RMT4

GAO-Ol76-OI7

Typical RMT Format, RMT Menu

Figure 3-19

Collins

NORM

03 K3 CID NWD TO
N41.53.2/WO 1.42.1

DTK 329T XTK 005. 1L

TK 329T S× 00.0L |
DA 044L WAR 005E
WIND 020/42

GAO-0177-Ol7

Typical RMT Format, RMT Display

Figure 3-20

Revised 30 August 1993 3-51

 operation 523-0773943

radar mode, heading cursor (if on scale), and heading VOR2 Yellow, same data as VOR1
line if selected along with the weather radar display.
If in RDR only or in a combined RDR-NAV mode, the LNV1 White, includes waypoint symbol(s) and
range mark is solid and weather range is selected on connecting lines, digital course, and way-
the WXP, as is the radar mode. If in NAV only, the point numbers
range mark is dashed and the range is selected using
LNV2 Cyan, same data as LNV1
the a or V key along the bottom edge of the MFD.
Weather colors and PAC Alert are as previously Heading Magenta (heading cursor is also magenta)
described. If MAP mode is selected on the WXP, red line
is replaced by magenta, and green is replaced by
cyan. The range mark also changes from cyan to cons
green.
NORM
3.11.4.2 Navigation (NAV) PORT

Refer to figures 3-21 and 3-22. When the NAV button ENTER
POR2
is pushed, the navigation mode will appear, showing
the navaids last selected along with the airplane LNW1/LNV2
symbol in the lower center, compass segment and
lubber line at the top, and the cyan range mark at HDG
midrange. In NAV only, the range mark is dashed
and the range displayed at the right end of the cyan
range mark is selected by the a or V key along the
bottom edge of the MFD. A second push of the NAV ,

button removes the navigation display.

CGO-0425-01 AC-1
The upper line select key (the key on the right-hand
side of the display with the green boxed arrow point- Typical NAV Display, NAV Mode Select
ing toward it) allows the pilot to change the source of Figure 8-D
the navaids. When this key is pushed, the MFD goes
into the NAV menu mode and the NAV display is
replaced by key labels as follows (from top to bot- /"
tom): VOR 1, VOR 2, LNV1/LNV2, and HDG. The NORM
' ' ' E¯B
word ENTER also appears in green to the right of NW , \ N / /

' N
the NAV button. To select sensors for the NAV dis- s ',
'
play, the desired line select buttons opposite the sen-
sor are pushed, with sensor selection indicated by a
color change to green if selected and white if not ,
' '
selected. Pushing the HDG button adds/deletes a
Iso
selected heading line. For the LNV1/LNV2 key, suc-
CRS 029
cessive pushes will alternate between both off CRS 030 WPTS
(LNV1/LNV2 both white), LNV1 selected (LNV1 is
DATA
green), LNV2 selected (LNV2 is green), and back to
both off. (Only one LNAV may be selected for display
A RŒ SKP ŒR
at a given time. However, it may be selected in con- O O
junction with two VOR's.) Following selection of the
MFD-85A
desired sensor(s), pushing the NAV button (labeled CGO-2305-28-AC-8

ENTER) returns the display to the sector display Typical NAV Display, NAV Mode Display
with the selected sensor(s) shown. Color coding for Figure 3-22
the selected NAV sources are as follows:

VOR1 Green, includes map symbol, course line

(if selected), digital course and bearing,
station ident, and To/From

Revised 30 August 1993 3-52

 operation 523-0773943

Note 3.11.4.5 Remote Data (RMT)

If dual area navigation systems are Refer to figures 3-24 and 3-25. Pushing the RMT but-
installed and operating, the two key labels ton will cause four labels (RMT 1, RMT 2, RMT 3,
at the upper right of figure 3-21 would RMT 4) to appear next to the line select keys. Push-
change from VOR 1 to RNV 1 and from VOR ing the appropriate line select key will cause data a
2 to RNV 2 respectively. from the selected remote input to be displayed on the
MFD. The displayed data depends upon the position
When digital course is displayed, it will be shown to a of the controls on the selected remote system. If no
whole number of degrees only. If VOR is the selected remote device is connected or if the selected system
sensor, then the position of the corresponding course does not output remote data for the line select key
line is controlled by the CRS knob on the applicable pushed, a message NO DATA FROM REMOTE Ë
DSP. The course line may be rotated with the DSPs DEVICE #X will be displayed after approximately 5
(or CHPs) selected CRS knob even if the primary seconds.
course is LNAV or OFF. If HDG is the selected sen-
sor, a magenta line will connect the heading cursor to 3.11.5 Page (PGE) and Emergency (EMG)
the airplane symbol. This line will rotate with the Procedures
heading cursor. Heading select operates exactly as
on the EHSI with the DSP (or CHP) HDG knob con- Note
trolling this function. When displaying the NAV for-
mat, weather radar information may be added/ Procedures for programming data (PGE,
deleted by pushing the RDR button. EMG, chapter titles) into the MFD-85A
using the RDP-300 Remote Data Program-
3.11.4.3 Compatibility Between Navigation mer are located in the back of this section.
Display and Heading Source Procedures for programming data (PGE,
EMG, chapter titles) into the MFD-85A
sources and the using the CEU-85/85A Checklist Entry Unit
Depending on selected navigation
selection of magnetic or true heading sources, com- are located in its instruction book.
patibility problems can occur. Table 3-2 defines the
100 pages of combined page and emergency proce-
conditions which are incompatible and the MFD
annunciations that are provided to alert the pilot to
dures are available. Each page has a 13-line-per-
page, 20-character-per-line format. The top line on
those conditions.
each page is reserved for weather radar mode and
target alert, leaving 12 lines available for program-
3.11.4.4 Joystick Operation ming data. The data can be chapterized as required
by the user to organize the data. If the data is not
Refer to figure 3-23. In NAV mode, the joystick can chapterized, then the 100 pages can be accessed one
be used to locate an MFD defined waypoint for entry page at a time starting with page 1 whenever the
in a compatible LNAV system if installed. As soon as PGE or EMG button is pushed. The following proce-
the joystick is moved in any direction, the label dure for using the PGE and EMG functions assumes
ENTER appears next to the third line select key that the data has been chapterized. Refer to figures
(from the top). As the green waypoint symbol is 3-26 through 3-29.
being positioned on the display, its position (course
and distance) from the airplane symbol is shown in a. When page (PGE) is selected and the joystick is
green digits in the lower left center of the display. A moved downward or upward, up to four chapter
green dashed line interconnects the waypoint symbol titles will appear next to the line select keys on
and the center of the airplane symbol to aid in orien- the right side of the MFD. Movement of the joy-
tation. Once the waypoint has been positioned, it can stick upward will cause the next set of up to four
be inserted in the selected LNAV waypoint string by chapter titles to be displayed. Movement of the
pushing the line select key labeled ENTER. Only one joystick downward will cause the previous four
LNAV waypoint string may be selected at one time chapter titles to be displayed.
(selecting one will deselect the other) and joystick b. If one of these four chapter titles is needed, push-
information will be transmitted to the selected ing the appropriate line select key causes the first i
LNAV only. page of the selected chapter to be displayed. If

Revised 30 August 1993 3-53

 operation 523-0773943

Table 3-2. MFD Map.

COURSE

SELECTED
HEADING SENSOR
MAP
COURSE
#1 MAG MAG TRUE TRUE
#2 MAG TRUE MAG TRUE

VOR 1/2 OK OK A A

ADF 1/2 N/A N/A N/A N/A

LRN1MAG OK OK B B

LRN 1 TRUE B B OK OK

LRN 2 MAG OK C A B

LRN 2 TRUE B A C OK

A -
flash until sensors compatible
B -
flash only if MAGVAR associated with LRN sensor is invalid
C -
flash unless MAGVAR associated with LRN sensor is invalid

NORM V /

/ 8 \
150
CRS 029

MFD-85A CGO-2305-28-AC-8

Locating a Waypoint Using the Joystick

Figure 3-23

Revised 80 August 1998 3-54

 operation 523-0773943

Collins

NORM

RMT1 <

RMT2 <

RMT3 <

RMT4 <

GAO-Ol76-Ot7
Typical RMT Format, RMT Menu
Figure 3-24

Collins

NORM

03 K3 CID NPD TO
N41. 53. 2/WO 1. 42. 1

DTK 329T XTK 005. 1L

TK 329T SX 00. OL
DA 044L PAR 005E

o o
GAO-0177-OI7

Typical RMT Format, RMT Display

Figure 3-25

Revised 30 August 1993 3-55

 operation 523-0773943

Collins

NORM

CRUISE 4

PREDESCENT 5

LANDING 6
¯

APPROACH 2

GAO-OI80-Ol7

Typical PGE Data Chapter Titles

Figure 3-26

Collins

NORM
APPROACH 2
ALTIMETER SET/CK
CAB PRESS FT SET

FUEL CKO
SPEED SET
CAB SIGS/DOOR SET
FEED/TRANS SHUT
NW STRG CLEAR

GAO-OISI-OI7

PGE Checklist Example

Figure 8-27

8-56
Revised 30 August 1993
 operation 523-0773943

Collins

NORM

ENGINE FIRE 20

ENGINE SHUT DOWN 21

DEPRESSURIZATION 23 |

CABIN FIRE/SMOKE 25

GAO-OIS2-017

Typical EMG Chapter Titles

Figure 3-28

Collins

NORM
ENGINE FIRE 20
FUEL HP SHUT
FUEL LP SHUT

BELL ISOLATE
WAIT 10 SEC
EXTINGUISH SHOT 1

WAIT 30 SEC
EXTINGUISH SHOT 2
[IF NECESSARY]

GAO-Ol83-Ol7

EMG Checklist Example

Figure 3-29

Revised30August1993 3-57
 operation 523-0773943

other chapter titles are required, movement of SKP button. The line that was being consid-
the joystick downward will cause the next four ered remains the color it was prior to being
chapter titles to be displayed. Movement of the considered, and the next line becomes cyan.
joystick upward will cause the previous four
chapter titles to be displayed. 2. Line reverse (delta, a) -
Push this button to
c. When the desired chapter title is found and the back the cursor up one line of data without
first page has been called up by pushing the acknowledgement. The cyan line becomes yel-
appropriate line select key, the keys along the low and the next line above (excluding blanks)
bottom of the MFD are used to control the page becomes cyan. If the cursor is on the first line
data. These keys are used as follows: and the a button is pushed, the display backs
up to the bottom line of the preceding page
Note within the selected chapter.
3. Skip (SKP) -
Push this button to select the
When the first page of a chapter is called next lower line of data without acknowledging
up, the first line will be cyan and the rest the current line of data. The cyan line (current
yellow. line being considered) remains as it was
before becoming cyan (if yellow it remains
yellow, if green it remains green) and the next
i 1. Line advance (inverted delta, V) Push this
-

line below becomes cyan.

button to acknowledge a line of data and move
down one line (does not have to be pushed for When a line is skipped, it is identified in the
any blank lines). The old line becomes green MFD as an uncompleted line and is subject to
and the next line below becomes cyan. If the later recall as long as you do not change chap-
I last line is cyan and the V button is pushed, ters. All skips will be lost if the chapter is
the display advances to the next page. If the changed prior to completing the checklist
line being considered is the result of pushing (using the recall button). For this reason,
the RCL button (to reconsider skipped lines), some operators may prefer to put the entire
pushing the V button acknowledges that line checklist in one chapter rather than breaking
and automatically advances the cyan line to the checklist out into different chapters. After
the next line that was skipped, regardless of skipping a line, follow normal procedures to
which page within the selected chapter that complete the checklist.
line falls on. Should all data checks be
acknowledged, pushing the V button will cause If the line being considered is the result of
all of the lines within the selected chapter to pushing the RCL (recall) button, then pushing
be scanned, and will return to page 1 of the SKP will skip over that line without acknowl-
selected chapter. edging it and automatically go to the next
skipped line or the top line on the first page of
Note the selected chapter, whichever occurs first.
4. Recall (RCL) - When in the PGE or EMG
Each page may contain as many as 12 lines mode, push this button at any time to recall
of data with each line having up to 20 char- previously skipped lines (lines not yet
acters. Each line may be individually con- acknowledged) as long as you do not change
sidered, acknowledged, or skipped if that chapters (see skip paragraphs above). The
page is to be used as a checklist. Lines recall function immediately displays the first
already considered or acknowledged are page in the selected chapter which has a skip-
green. Lines not yet considered are yellow. ped (yellow) line. That line becomes cyan. If
The line currently being considered is cyan, the line is to be acknowledged, push the V but-
a blue-green color. If the line being consid- ton as before. The line is acknowledged and
i ered (cyan) is to be acknowledged, then push the system resumes searching for the next
the V button. The line that was being con- skipped line. If a skipped line is not yet to be
sidered becomes green and the next line acknowledged, push the SKP button as before.
becomes cyan. If the line being considered is The system still identifies that line as uncom-
not yet to be acknowledged but is to be pleted and resumes searching for the next
reconsidered at a later time, then push the skipped line. If all of the skipped lines are

Revised 30 August 1993 3-58

 operation 523-0773943

acknowledged (9), the display returns to the addition of the differential 10- and 20-degree incre-
first page within the selected chapter. Note ments causes the comparator logic in the DPU-85G/
that anytime the PGE or EMG mode is 86G Display Processor Unit to give flashing PIT
selected and the RCL button is pushed, the (pitch), ROL (roll), and HDG (heading) comparator
system returns to the top line of the first page warning messages. A copyright message also
within the selected chapter and begins search- appears during test.
ing for skipped lines. Going to another chapter
cancels all skipped lines and checklist in the The Category II comparator and excessive deviation
previous chapter. If in PGE or EMG mode and warnings may also be tested. If the Category II select
NAV or RMT is selected, then pushing RCL switch is actuated and the onside localizer is tuned,
immediately returns the display to the line the Category II warning annunciators are displayed.
(either being considered, acknowledged, or These include GS compare, LOC compare, RA com-
skipped) in the PGE or EMG chapter that was pare, glideslope excessive deviation, and localizer
being displayed prior to selecting NAV or excessive deviation.
RMT.
5. Joystick up/dn -

Moves to next page (down) If the self-test switch is held for longer than 4
or prior page (up) within the selected chapter. seconds, the pitch, roll, and heading increments are
Automatically rolls over in either direction removed from view and all flags associated with the
within chapter. EADI and EHSI displays are brought into view.
6. Joystick right/left -
Moves display to the When the self-test switch is released, the displays
first page of next chapter (right) or the first will return to normal operation. An external
page of prior chapter (left), installer-supplied comparator reset button or switch
d. Emergency procedures (EMG) are handled must be actuated to reset the PIT, ROL, and HDG
exactly as with the PGE operation. The 100 pages comparator warning messages. Actuating master
can be divided as needed between PGE and EMG. reset once stops the PIT, ROL, and HDG indications
Emergency procedures can also be chapterized as from flashing. Actuating comparator reset will elim-
discussed in PGE operation. inate the comparator messages if the condition caus-
e. Exiting from either PGE or EMG is accomplished ing the comparator warning has been eliminated.
by initiating any other selection. If in PGE or
EMG mode and NAV or RMT is selected, then 3.12 REVERSIONARY MODES OF
pushing RCL immediately returns the display to OPERATION
the line (either being considered, acknowledged,
or skipped) in the PGE or EMG chapter that was The EFIS-85B Electronic Flight Instrument System
being displayed prior to selecting NAV or RMT. provides system operational capability in the event
Going from PGE to EMG and vice versa is direct of the failure of a system element. The following
with key selections. paragraphs describe this capability with reference to
f. Data entry is made using the handheld RDP-300 any operational differences which may be required.
Remote Data Programmer, as described in para- All external switches for reversionary switching are
graph 3.16. Data entry may also be made using supplied as part of the installation by the installer.
the CEU-85/85A Checklist Entry Unit, as Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual Supplement for
described in its instruction book. additional information, switch labels, etc.

3.12.1 EFD-85/86 ( ) Electronic Flight Display

3.11.6 EFIS Self-Test
(EFD) Failure

The self-test sequence is initiated by actuating an Refer to figure 3-30. In the event of an EFD failure,
external installer-supplied switch or switches (EFIS an external switch can be actuated to cause either
TEST or similar). When self-test is first initiated, an the EADI display to transfer to the EHSI in compos-
increment of 10 degrees is added to the current val- ite format or the EHSI to transfer to the EADI to
ues of pitch and roll, and 20 degrees is added to head- form the same composite format and an EHSI for-
ing. A positive increment is added to the pilot's side mat to transfer to the MFD. Another interconnect
and a negative increment is added to the copilot's wiring option allows the EADI to be transferred
side. The word TEST, in red, will appear on the unchanged to the EHSI and the EHSI to be trans-
EADIs and the MFD while the test is in process. The ferred to the MFD.

Revised 30 August 1998 3-59

 operation 523-0773943

Collins(

ALTS VS isso‡ HDG LOC1

0
o C DH
38 ° °
200

CGO-2508-14-AC-9

Typical Composite Format

Figure 3-30

3.12.2 DPU-85G/86G Display Processor Unit 3.12.3 DSP-85A Display Select Panel (DSP)
(DPU) Failure Failure

Detected DPU failures are annunciated by the red For detected DSP failures, the letters DSP, red and
words DPU FAIL centered laterally and immediately boxed, replace the decision height readout on the
above the vertical center of both the EADI and the EADI and the digital course readout on the EHSI.
EHSI. If a DPU failure occurs, an external switch Also, the FCS mode data received through the DSP
can be actuated that allows the MPU-85G/86G Mul- are removed from the EADI. If a DSP failure occurs,
tifunction Processor Unit (MPU) to provide the con- an external switch can be actuated that will cause
trol to the affected EADI and EHSI. Since the MPU the DPU on the side with the failed DSP to be con-
has access to the DSP-85A Display Select Panel (or trolled by the opposite side DSP. This transfer condi-
DCP-85E/G Display Control Panel) controlling the tion is annunciated by the letters XDSP, yellow and
failed DPU, no degradation in EADI or EHSI per- boxed, located in the lower right corner of the EADI
formance occurs. When the MPU replaces a DPU, the next to the decision height readout.
MFD-85A displays either an EHSI or a composite
format. Except for the PWR pushbutton and the INT Under the transfer condition, all display parameters
control, none of the controls on the MFD are opera- (except FCS mode annunciation) are controlled by
tional in this mode. the opposite side DSP. Parameters controlled by the
DSP are displayed in yellow on the side with the
failed DSP.

If the DSP is transferred and the onside DSP does

not have a detected failure,the onside FCS modes

Revised 30 August 1993 3-60

 operation 523-0773943

are displayed. If the onside DSP has a detected fail- 3.12.8 MFD-85A Multifunction Display Failure
ure, the FCS mode annunciation is removed.
In the event of an MFD-85A failure, there is no com-
plete backup capability for this display. Navigation
i 3.12.4 DCP-85E/G Display
(DCP) Failure
Control Panel and weather radar information is available for dis-
play on the EHSIs. Checklist and remote data func-
tions are lost.
For detected DCP failures, the letters DCP, red and
boxed, replace the decision height readout on the 3.12.7 Attitude Switching
EADI and the digital course readout on the EHSI.
Also, the FCS mode data received through the DCP
are removed from the EADI. If a DCP failure occurs, a. Pilot's side -

Actuating an external switch

an external switch can be actuated that will cause replaces the pilot's side data with the copilot's
the DPU on the side with the failed DCP to be con- side data on the pilot's EADI as the primary atti-
trolled by the opposite side DCP. This transfer condi- tude. When this function is selected, the letters
tion is annunciated by the letters XDCP, yellow and ATT2, in yellow, appear to the left of the radio
boxed, located in the lower right corner of the EADI altitude display in the upper right center of the
next to the decision height readout. pilot's EADI. The PIT and ROL attitude compa-
rator function remains active but uses the same
data.
Under the transfer condition, all display parameters b. Copilot's side Actuating an external switch
-

(except FCS mode annunciation) are controlled by replaces the copilot's side data with the pilot's
the opposite side DCP. Parameters controlled by the side data on the copilot's EADI as the primary
DCP are displayed in yellow on the side with the attitude. When this function is selected, the let-
failed DCP- ters ATT1, in yellow, appear to the left of the
radio altitude display in the upper right center of
the copilot's EADI. The PIT and ROL attitude
If the DCP is transferred and the onside DCP does
comparator function remains active.
not have a detected failure, the onside FCS modes
are displayed. If the onside DCP has a detected fail-
ure, the FCS mode annunciation is removed. 3.12.8 Compass Switching

a. Pilot's Side Actuating an external switch

-

3.12.5 MPU-85G/88G Multifunction Processor

replaces the pilot's side data with the copilot's
Unit (MPU) Failure
side data on the pilot's EHSI as the primary
heading. When this function is selected, the let-
A detected MPU failure results in the words MPU ters HDG2, in yellow, appear to the left of the
FAIL being displayed in red on the MFD-85A, and on digital CRS display in the lower right of the
the EFDs if they are being driven by the MPU. If the pilot's EHSI. The HDG comparator function
single MPU fails, external switching of the digital remains active.
bus lines is required to maintain cross-side data and b. Copilot's side Actuating an external switch
-

comparator functions on either side EADI or EHSI. replaces the copilot's side data with the pilot's
If the fault causing the MPU FAIL is present for side data on the copilot's EHSI as the primary
longer than 10 seconds, the displays being driven are heading. When this function is selected, the let-
blanked except for the words MPU FAIL. Backup ters HDG1, in yellow, appear to the left of the
drive for the EFDs is lost, as well as the MFD dis- digital CRS display in the lower right of the
play. The weather radar modes are still available on copilot's EHSI. The HDG comparator function
the EHSIs. remains active.

Revised 30 August 1993 3-61

 operation 523-0773943

3.13 SUMMARY OF EFIS-85B SYMBOLOGY

The following illustrations (figures 3-31 through 3-35) show the location and color of the EADI and EHSI
annunciators, special displays, and flags.

2 3 4 5 6

\ \ \ Collins

LTS VS1550 $ HDG LOC1 er 6"

..------YD 20 AER 9
24 4
TEST o

22- ALT
21-
140 11

20 S
1LOOC
ATT
Se 12
PIT
AOA ROL
DH 13
200

// / \ \ 14

CGO-2508-14-AC-10
18 17 16 15 No

EADI Symbology, Annunciators and Special Displays

Figure 3-31

1 FCS ARMED VERTICAL MODE (paragraph 3.8.13) --

For FCS-85/86, see figure 3-8. For FCS-80,

see figure 3-10. For FCS-65, see figure 3-12.

2 FCS ACTIVE VERTICAL MODE (paragraph 3.8.13) --

For FCS-85/86, see figure 3-8. For FCS-80,

see figure 3-10. For FCS-65, see figure 3-12.

3 FCS MODE TEST --

For FCS-80, PASS (yellow) means all modes available. FAIL (red) means one
or more modes unavailable. TEST is written for FCS-85/86 and FCS-65.

Revised 30 August 1993 3-62

 operation 523-0773943

4 FCS ACTIVE LATERAL MODE (paragraph 3.8.13) --

For FCS-85/86, see figure 3-9. For FCS-80,

see figure 3-11. For FCS-65, See figure 3-13.

I 5 RADIO ALTITUDE COMPARATOR WARNING (YELLOW)

or stops sooner if master reset by pilot.
--

Flashes for 10 seconds then steady

6 FCS ARMED LATERAL MODE (paragraph 3.8.13) --

For FCS-85/86, see figure 3-9. For FCS-80,

see figure 3-11. For FCS-65, see figure 3-13.

7 RADIO ALTITUDE (GREEN) --

2500 feet is maximum.

yes ,,, ce yr
TRIM ANNUNCIATOR (paragraph gro c
8 3.8.14.2)

outer middle airport

9 MARKER BEACON --
OM (cyan), MM (yellow), (white)

10 ALTITUDE ALERT (YELLOW) (paragraph 3.8.4.3) --

Preselector altitude

11 VERTICAL DEVIATION SOURCE --

( Glideslo (green),if Category II, flashing yellow

while deviation
is excessive. 4 MGP (green). Altitude (green).

12 GLIDESLOPE COMPARATOR WARNING (YELLOW) --

Flashes for 10 seconds then steady or
stops sooner if master reset by pilot.

13 ATTITUDE SOURCE ANNUNCIATOR (paragraph 3.8.2) --

ATT1 or ATT2.

14 DECISION HEIGHT SET (CYAN) --

999 feet is maximum. Èlashesbetween DH +50 feet and DH.

15 CONTROL TRANSFERRED TO CROSS-SIDE (YELLOW)

16 LOCALIZER COMPARATOR WARNING (YELLOW) --

Flashes for 10 seconds then steady or stops

sooner if master reset by pilot.

17 LATERAL DEVIATION SOURCE --

i Localizer (green),if Category II, flashing yellow

while deviation is excessive. MAZ (green).Runway symbols rise in LOC and MAZ modes
with decreasing radio altitude. VOR (green). LNAV (white).

18 PITCH AND ROLL ATTITUDE COMPARATOR WARNING (YELLOW) --

Flashes for 10 seconds

then steady or stops sooner if master reset by pilot.

VO
19 SPEED COMMAND SOURCE (paragraph 3.8.12) (CYAN) --

### (reference airspeed), SPD (analog

airspeed), or AOA (angle of attack)

20 INDICATED AIRSPEED DISPLAY --

Green digits surrounded by a.green T-shaped box on a black
background (paragraph 3.8.10)

21 AIRSPEED TREND LINE (MAGENTA) Extends upward --

for increasing airspeed and downwards

for decreasing airspeed (paragraph 3.8.11)

22 DECISION HEIGHT ANNUNCIATOR (paragraph 3.8.8) (YELLOW)

23 EFIS SELF TEST ANNUNCIATOR (RED)

24 YAW DAMPER ANNUNCIATOR (paragraph 3.8.14)

25 AUTOPILOT ENGAGE (paragraph 3.8.14)

Revised 30 August 1993 3-63

 a e operation 523-0773943
o

\ \ \ \¢ollinst

DIST\¾ DR TTG
18.4H 3.

O
O

14 13 12 11 CGO-2508-14-AC-11

EHSI Symbology, Annunciators and Special Displays (Rose Format Shown)

Figure 8-82

1 SHAPE-CODED BEARING POINTER (MAGENTA) --

Q VOR, þLNAV, ADF.

HEADING COMPARATOR WARNING (YELLOW) Flashes for 10 seconds then steady or stops
I 2 --

sooner if master reset by pilot.

3 HEADING DATA (WHITE) --

v = magnetic source, TRUE = true heading source, DG =

directional gyro. pgaX v v

4 DEVIATION TYPE (SEE NOTE) LIN, ANG, or XTK. If DME is lost or in hold when flying lin-
--

earized VOR, changes to ANG and flashes for 10 seconds. If in back localizer and VNAV is ena-
bled, B/L is displayed. f von to MR Así « á w dof ;a up ca

5 DEAD RECKONING (YELLOW)

6 WEATHER RADAR TARGET ALERT (YELLOW) Flashes when target is detected T on WXP- --

85( ), TGT or TRB on WXP-850( ). 7AU R cood M RAM w/o yo fa cAR

7 NAV DATA (SEE NOTE) TTG time-to-go, ET

--
= = elapsed time, GSP = ground spee¿l, and ###g
=wind speed (digits) and direction from (arrow).

8 WAYPOINT ALERT (WHITE) -

To/From indicator flashes.

Revised 30 August 1993 3-64

 operation 523-0773943

9 VERTICAL DEVIATION SOURCE --

Glideslop (green),if Category II, flashing yellow

while deviation is excessive. MGP (green). VNAV (white).

If in back localizer and VNAV is not enabled, B/L is displayed in place of the glideslope scale.

10 GLIDESLOPE COMPARATOR (YELLOW) --

Flashes for 10 seconds then steady or stops sooner if
master reset by pilot.

11 HEADING SENSOR ANNUNCIATOR (paragraph 3.9.1.12) --

HDG1 or HDG2.

12 LOCALIZER COMPARATOR (YELLOW) --

Flashes for 10 seconds then steady or stops sooner if
master reset by pilot.

13 LATERAL DEVIATION --

If Category II, flashing yellow while deviation is excessive.

14 BEARING POINTER SOURCE --

Green for onside VOR/ADF, white for onside LNAV, and yellow
for all cross-side sources.

15 SECOND COURSE ARROW SOURCE (CYAN) If VOR is selected with DME in hold, VOR1 H
--

or VOR2 H is displayed with VOR1 or VOR2 in cyan and H in yellow. If VOR is selected and the
DME fails, VOR1 D or VOR2 D is displayed with VOR1 or VOR2 in cyan and D in red. MPU/DPU
(-002)service bulletin 25 changes the D color from red to yellow.
16 PRIMARY COURSE ARROW SOURCE --
Green for onside VOR/LOC, white for onside LNAV,
and yellow for all cross-side sources.

17 COURSE CONTROL SYMBOL Displayed, in appropriate color, next to navigation sensor annun-
--

ciation to indicate which course arrow is being controlled by the CRS knob of the CHP/DSP.

Note

The following legends/readouts follow the same color coding as the primary course arrow source:

distance time-to-go
ground speed digital course
primary course arrow deviation source annunciator
To/From B/L

ET (elapsed time) is green for onside VOR, white for onside LNAV, and yellow for cross-side VOR and
LNAV.

18 DME HOLD (YELLOW) (paragraph 3.9.1.7)

Revised 30 August 1993 3-65

 operation 523-0773943

Collins\

LO

3
4

8 M
S 25
TURB
LOC\
TO CRS

CGO-2508-14-AC-12
6 5

EHSI Symbology, Annunciators (Approach Format Shown)

Figure 3-33

1 HEADING BUG (MAGENTA) --

Shown on scale.
2 WEATHER RADAR OR NAV RANGE MARK With weather radar enabled, range mark is solid
--

cyan for STBY, TEST, WX, and NORM modes. Range mark is solid green for MAP mode. With
navigation only (no weather radar), range mark is dashed cyan.

3 GLIDESLOPE COMPARATOR (YELLOW) Flashes for 10 seconds then steady or stops sooner if

I
--

master reset by pilot.

4 WEATHER RADAR OR NAV RANGE 5, 12.5, 25, 50, 100, or 150 indicates one-half of range
--

selected on WXP when radar is selected on the DSP (or DCP). 2.5, 5, 12.5, 25, 50, 100, 150, or 300
indicates one-half of range selected with RNG knob on the DSP (or SEL/RNG on the DCP) when
weather radar is not enabled.

Revised 30 August 1993 3-66

 operation 523-0773943

5 TO/FROM ANNUNCIATOR (APPLIES TO APPR FORMAT ONLY) The To/From pointer visible
--

on the ROSE format is replaced by the letters TO or FR when the EHSI is displaying the APPR
format. The letters are green for an onside VOR source, yellow for a cross-side source, and white
for LNV. If an LNAV is the primary selected course, the TO annunciation flashes to indicate way-
point alert. If an LNAV is the second selected course, the star-shaped To waypoint symbol (cyan)
flashes to indicate waypoint alert.

6 LOCALIZER COMPARATOR (YELLOW) --

Flashes for 10 seconds then steady or stops sooner if

masterreset by pilot.

7 WEATHER RADAR MODE, WXP-85( ) (CYAN) OFF, STBY, TEST, NORM, WX, MAP, or
--

FAULT. (Indicates weather radar mode selected on WXP when radar is selected on the DSP or
DCP.) The following annunciations will alternate at a 1-Hz rate: NORM/GAIN, WX/GAIN, MAP/
GAIN, TEST/HOLD, NORM/HOLD, WX/HOLD, MAP/HOLD, and HOLD/GAIN.

WEATHER RADAR MODE, WXP-850( ) (CYAN) OFF, STBY, TEST, TGT, MAP, WX, WX+T, or
--

TURB. (Indicates weather radar mode selected on WXP when radar is selected on the DSP or
DCP.) If slaved, mode annunciation turns yellow and an X is placed before the mode annunciation.
All modes will alternate with FAULT if a fault is detected. All modes except TGT will alternate to
HOLD if the HOLD feature is selected.

8 WAYPOINT ALERT AND TO/FROM DISPLAY (APPLIES TO ENR FORMAT ONLY) If an

--

LNAV is the primary selected course, the star-shaped To waypoint symbol flashes to indicate way-
point alert. The waypoint symbols and track lines are white if selected from the onside sensor or
yellow if selected from the cross-side sensor.

If an LNAV is the second selected course, an arrow is drawn on the track line pointing to the To
waypoint. The star-shaped To waypoint symbol flashes to indicate waypoint alert. The waypoint
symbols, track lines, and arrows are cyan for the second selected course.

Also unique to the enroute format (but not shown on the illustration) is the To/From display
when a VOR is the primary or secondary course. The VOR is shown by an octagon-shaped symbol
with the station identifier displayed next to the VOR symbol on the side nearest the vertical
center line of the display. A selected course line is drawn through the VOR symbol with its posi-
tion controlled by the CRS knob on the DSP (or CHP). The course line is solid on the To side of
the symbol and dashed on the From side. If the VOR symbol is off scale with respect to selected
range and/or bearing, the course line is drawn with an arrow pointing toward the station. For the
primary selected course, the VOR symbol, station identifier, course line, and navigation source
annunciator are green for the onside source or yellow for the cross-side source. For the second
selected course, the VOR symbol, station identifier, course line, and navigation source annunciator
are cyan.

Note

Only the differences from the ROSE (or HSI) format are shown/described.

Revised 30 August 1998 8-67

 operation 523-0773943

1 2 3

Collins

DPU FAIL M
10
SPD

LOC
DTAI 4 4 DCP|
8

CGO-2508-14-AC-13
7 6

EADI Symbology, Flags

Figure 8-84

1 DISPLAY PROCESSOR UNIT FLAG (RED). --

Blanks rest of display after 5 seconds.

2 ATTITUDE FLAG (RED) --

Removes raster, roll scale, roll pointer, pitch scale, and command
bars.

3 RADIO ALTITUDE FLAG (RED) --

Removes radio altitude display, DH, and DH SET.

4 VERTICAL DEVIATION FLAG (RED) --

GS or MGP removes nothing. ALT removes pointer and

scale.

Revised 30 August 1993 3-68

 operation 523-0773943

5 DISPLAY CONTROL PANEL FLAG (RED) --

Removes DH set display and FCS mode annuncia-

tors.

6 LATERAL DEVIATION FLAG (RED) LOC or MAZ removes nothing. VOR, TCN, and RNV
--

remove the pointer if the internal VOR/TCN/RNV bearing synchro monitor detects a fault. LNV,
VLF, INS, and LRN remove the pointer if the internal bearing or track synchro monitors detect a
fault.

7 CROSS-SIDE DATA BUS FLAG (RED) --

Removes all cross-side data and flags it.

8 SPEED COMMAND FLAG (RED) --

AOA or SPD removes pointer and scale.

9 FLIGHT DIRECTOR FLAG (RED) --

Removes command bars.

10 AIR DATA FLAG (RED) --

Removes IAS display, speed command pointer and scale, reference air-
speed readout, speed trend vector, and altitude deviation.

Note

All flags except DPU FAIL flash for 10 seconds then become steady (DPU FAIL is on steady). May stop
flashing with MASTER RESET.

Revised 30 August 1993 3-69

 operation 523-0773943

10 3
\ / CoIlins

8
LRN1 XDTA |

CGO--2508-14-AC-14
7 6

EHSI Symbology, Flags, ROSE Format

Figure 3-35

1 HEADING FLAG (RED) --

Compass card is frozen if heading data is lost.

2 DISPLAY PROCESSOR UNIT FLAG (RED) --

Blanks rest of display after 5 seconds.

TIME-TO-GO, GROUND SPEED, OR WIND FLAG Replaces data with red dashes for DPU/
I 3 --

MPU -001
units. Data is blanked out for DPU/MPU -002
configured units.

4 VERTICAL DEVIATION FLAG (RED) --

GS or MGP removes nothing, VNV removes pointer and

scale.

5 DISPLAY SELECT PANEL FLAG (RED) --

Removes DH set display and FCS annunciators.

Revised 30 August 1993 3-70

 operation 523-0773943

6 CROSS-SIDE DATA BUS FLAG (RED) --

Removes all cross-side data and flags it.

7 BEARING POINTER SENSOR FLAG (RED) --

Removes bearing pointer.

8 SECOND COURSE ARROW FLAG (RED) (SEE NOTE 1)

9 PRIMARY COURSE ARROW FLAG (RED) (SEE NOTE 1)

I 10 DISTANCE FLAG Replaces data with red dashes for DPU/MPU units. Data is blanked out
-- -001

for DPU/MPU configured units.

-002

Note

1. Loss of LNV valid removes To/From. Loss of VOR valid removes nothing.

If a failure is detected by the VOR bearing, LNV bearing or LNV track synchro, or bus param-
eter monitors, then the deviation bar and To/From are removed.

2. All flags except DPU FAIL flash for 10 seconds then become steady (DPU FAIL is on steady).
May stop flashing by MASTER RESET.

3. ROSE format is shown. Other formats are handled in the same manner.

Revised 30 August 1993 3-71

 operation 523-0773943

3.14 SUMMARY OF MFD-85A ANNUNCIATORS AND FLAGS

Refer to tables 3-3 and 3-4 for a summary of MFD-85A annunciators and flags.
Table 3-3. MFD-85A Annunciators.

ANNUNCIATOR DISPLAY LOCATION OPERATION

Weather radar WXP-85( ) (cyan) -

Upper left Indicates weather radar mode (except OFF) in all MFD
mode STBY, TEST, NORM, WX, formats.
MAP, GAIN, HOLD,
FAULT

WXP-850( ) (cyan) -

OFF, STBY, TEST, TGT,

MAP, WX, WX+T, TURB

Weather radar WXP-85( ) T Upper right On steady when selected (not in OFF, STBY, or MAP)
target alert (yellow) in all MFD formats. Flashes when target is detected.

WXP-850( ) TGT
(yellow)

Radar format RDR (green) Upper left Indicates radar format has been selected for display,
although no weather may be indicated.

NAV format NAV (green) Upper left Indicates NAV format has been selected for display,
although no sensors may have been selected.

NAV menu ident -+

(green) Opposite top line select Indicates line select key used to call up NAV menu.
key

Test TEST (red) Centered Indicates MPU-85G/86G is in test mode.

Range 5, 12.5, 25, 50, 100, 150 Right end of cyan range Indicates one-half of selected range. Selected from
(cyan) are WXP-85( )/850( ) when in RDR or RDR/NAV format
or from MFD-85A A or V key in NAV only mode. (2.5-
and 300-nmi midrange distances are also available in
NAV only mode.)

BRG/DIST to 000/999 (white) Lower left Indicates bearing/distance to joystiek defined

insertable insertable waypoint.
waypoint

Waypoint enter ENTER (white) Opposite third line select Indicates line select key used to insert the MFD
key key from top defined waypoint (joystiek) into a compatible long-
range navigation system.

Table 3-4. MFD-85A Flags.

MALFUNCTION FLAG LOCATION OPERATION

VOR1 or LOC1 if tuned, VOR1 Lower left Replaces course (bearing) readout. Removes VOR or waypoint symbol
or RNV1 or (red) and course line.
RNV1

VOR2 or LOC2 if tuned, VOR2 Lower right Replaces course (bearing) readout. Removes VOR or waypoint symbol
or RNV2 or (red) and course line.
RNV2

LNV1 LNV1 (red) Lower left Replaces course readout. Removes waypoint symbol and course line.

Revised 30 August 1993 8-72

 operation 523-0773943

Table 3-4. MFD-85A Flags (Cont).

MALFUNCTION FLAG LOCATION OPERATION

LNV2 LNV2 (red) Lower right Replaces course readout. Removes waypoint symbol and course line.

MPU-85G/86G FAIL (red) Centered Nothing removed.

3.15 PROGRAMMING MFD-85A PAGE (PGE) 85A is new (never programmed before), pushing the
AND EMERGENCY (EMG) DATA USING PGE button causes the display to read:
THE RDP-300 REMOTE DATA
PROGRAMMER NO PAGE
CHAPTERS FOUND. PLUG
Before beginning any programming operation, write IN RDP-300 TO EDIT.
down and lay out exactly what the chapter titles are
to be, and exactly what will be placed on each page or pushing the EMG button will cause the display to
read:
within that chapter.

NO EMERGENCY
Note
CHAPTERS FOUND. PLUG
IN RDP-300 TO EDIT.
Refer to figure 3-46 for a sample program-
ming grid that can be duplicated on any
In either case, simply plug in the RDP-300 to enter
office copier and used to write out each page into the edit mode. If the above messages do not
of data. The grid will aid in keeping track of appear after pushing the respective PGE or EMG
characters and lines available/used per
button, then the MFD-85A has been programmed (or
page· at least a chapter has been defined) during an earlier
procedure and the following should be used to get
Keep in mind that there are 100 available pages and into edit mode. If there are chapter titles shown next
each page has 12 lines of 20 characters each. Also to the line select keys on the MFD-85A and a change
indicate which chapters, if any, will be emergency to one of these chapters is desired, then push the line
chapters. Chapter length depends on user require- select key next to the desired chapter title, plug in
ments. You may have 1 chapter of 100 pages or 100 the RDP-300, and make the changes. If the desired
chapters of 1 page or any combination in between. It chapter title is not displayed, then move the joystick
is recommended that pages be numbered consecu- up or down until the chapter title is found for the
tively within a chapter. It is also suggested that one chapter that needs to be changed. Then push the line
or two blank pages be left between chapters to select key next to the desired chapter title, plug in
accommodate additional information in the future· the RDP-300, and make the changes. If you do not
Note also that with multiple chapters, all skips will know the chapter title of what you want to change
be lost if another chapter is selected prior to com¯ and the NO PAGE CHAPTERS FOUND or the NO
pleting the checklist (using the recall button) in the EMERGENCY CHAPTERS FOUND message does
existing chapter. For this reason, some operators not appear, then push the top line select key, plug in
may prefer to put the entire checklist in one chapter the RDP-300, and find the page(s) you want to
rather than breaking the checklist out into different change (you are now in edit mode).
chapters. The information programmed into the
MFD-85A will not be erased by power removal. Any- Whether you are in PGE edit mode (pushed the PGE
thing programmed during an earlier procedure will button to enter) or in EMG edit mode (pushed the
remain until reprogrammed. EMG button to enter), all 100 pages of the checklist
memory can be changed. The only time you need to
Before any data can be programmed into the MFD- know which edit mode you are in is when you want to
85A, the unit must be put into the edit mode. There make a title page. If you want to make a PGE chap-
are two ways to enter into the edit mode, depending ter title page, then the PGE edit mode must be
on the data currently in the MFD-85A. If the MFD- entered. If you want to make an EMG chapter title

Revised 30 August 1993 3-73

 operation 523-0773943

page, then the EMG edit mode must be entered. regardless of whether it is a PGE title page or an
Deleting chapter title pages from PGE or EMG can EMG title page. The cursor will be in the upper left
be done in either PGE or EMG edit mode. of the display.

A title page can be created at any time. To make a

PGE title page, enter the PGE edit mode, find the Because there are only 100 available pages in the
MFD-85A, a title page should be part of the checklist
page you wish to make into a title page, then position
the cursor over the first character on the first of the page (ie, the entire page should be used for part of
12 lines on the page (upper left-most character on the the checklist). How to create a title page has already
page). With this done, push the top line select key at been described. It should be noted that the very top
the upper right of the MFD. The cursor will move one line of the title page is what will show next to the line
character position to the right. This signifies that a select keys when either the PGE or EMG button is
PGE title page has been created. To make an EMG pushed. The line will appear exactly like what is
title page, enter the EMG edit mode and repeat the entered (via the RDP-300) into the particular check-
above procedure. list (only PGE titles will appear for PGE, and EMG
titles for EMG mode). Therefore, the top line of the
A title page can also be removed at any time. To page should contain enough information to describe
delete any title page, enter either PGE or EMG edit the chapter checklist contents. It is suggested that
mode (either mode works for deleting a PGE or EMG the top line be right justified so that it appears next
title page). Find the title page by moving the joystick to the appropriate line select key. Otherwise, fill in
to the left or right, position the cursor over the first with periods (.)to the right of the line. This will help
character of the first line of the displayed page, and you select the correct title page.
retype the character that is under the cursor using
the RDP-300. The cursor will move one character to Figure 3-36 shows how a typical written layout of
the right and the page will no longer be a title page. chapters and pages might appear.
The joystick can be used in edit mode to help find
pages or chapter titles more easily. If chapters have Note
already been entered into the MFD-85A, then push-
ing the PGE or EMG button may give up to four The page numbers for all pages (1 through
titles, one next to each of the line select keys. Note 100) have been visually and internally num-
that only PGE chapters will appear when the PGE bered at the factory for convenience. The
visual page numbers will appear at the
I button is pushed and only EMG chapters will appear
when the EMG button is pushed. If the next set of
four titles is desired, then pushing the joystick down
upper right of each page. These page num-
bers can be relocated on the page, elimi-
will display the next set of up to four titles. Continue nated, or (not recommended) changed to a
pushing the joystick down as needed to view succes- different number as desired.
sive sets of titles. If the previous set of four titles was
desired, then push the joystick up to display the pre- Note
vious set of up to four titles. Continue pushing the
joystick up as needed to view previous sets of titles. Those who choose to use the MFD-85A for
checklist purposes must consider it an aid
Once in edit mode (a line select key is pushed and the only and realize that it contains only the
RDP-300 is plugged in), the joystick can be used data that someone has programmed into it.
again. Moving the joystick down will cause the next The Airplane Flight Manual contains the
page to be displayed even if the next page is a title approved checklists.
page for the next PGE or EMG chapter. The cursor
will be in the upper left of the display. Pushing the Caution
joystick up causes the previous page to be displayed.
The cursor will be in the lower right of the display. To prevent the loss of data, it is essential
Pushing the joystick to the right causes the next title that the programming procedure is followed
page to appear, regardless of whether it is a PGE carefully and in the order given. Make cer-
title page or an EMG title page. The cursor will be in tain that the RDP-300 is connected to or dis-
the upper left of the display. Pushing the joystick to connected from the MFD-85A only while
the left causes the previous title page to appear, continuous power is applied to the system.

Revised 30 August 1993 3-74

 operation 523-0773943

TYPICAL CHAPTER AND PAGE LAYOUT

CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 3 CHAPTER 4

'PREFLIGHT' 'CRUISE' 'PREDESCENT' 'ENGINE FIRE'
(PGE DATA) (PGE DATA) (PGE DATA) (EMG DATA)

PAGE 1 PAGE 7 PAGE 12 PAGE 17

PAGE 2 PAGE 8 PAGE 13 PAGE 18

PAGE 3 PAGE 9 PAGE 14 PAGE 19

PAGE 4 PAGE 15 PAGE 20

PAGES 5AND6 PAGES10 AND 11 PAGE 16 PAGE 21

ARE SKIPPED ARE SKlPPED IS SKIPPED

TP6-4692-Ol4-0

Typical Chapter and Page Layout

Figure 3-36

Warning Note

The MFD-85A EMG function displays only There are eight keys on the RDP-300 that
what has been programmed into memory as can be held down, causing the function
emergency data. The user must realize that assigned to that key to be continuously
this data may or may not be applicable to an repeated. The eight keys are PF, PR, LF,
actual emergency. The airplane flight man- LR, -
(dash, located above 1), BLK (blank),
ual emergency checklist must be referred to SP (space), and (dot). The SH key does not
.

for proper corrective actions to be taken in have to be held down when holding one of
various emergency situations. the uppercase function keys down.

3.16 RDP-300 REMOTE DATA Note

PROGRAMMER
If the SH key is pushed and then it is
decided not to use the uppercase function,
The RDP-300 (figure 3-37) is a portable, handheld push the SH key a second time to cancel the
unit, similar to a calculator, that is used to input shift.
data into the memory of the MFD-85A. The RDP-300
should be stored in a location that is accessible to the
flight crew if on-airplane programming is desired.
The various RDP-300 keys and their functions are
described in figure 3-38.

Revised 80 August 1998 8-75

 operation 523-0773943

TP64889-Ol7

RDP-800 Remote Data Programmer

Figure 3-87

A-LETTERS AND PUNCTUATION CAN BE ALTERNATELY SELECTED BY

SHIFTING, MUCH LIKE UPPER AND LOWER CASE ON A TYPEWRITER.
PR-PAGE REVERSE CYCLES TO NEXT PAGE BACK.
PF-PAGE FORWARD ADVANCES DISPLAY TO NEXT PAGE FORWARD.
Collins LR-LINE REVERSE. GO BACK TO A LINE TO CORRECT OR REVISE.
LF- LINE FORWARD. MOVE TO LINES DOWN THE PAGE.

BS-BACK SPACE. MOVE BACKWARDON A LINE.

Q R S BLK-BLANK.ERASES CHARACTERS FOR EDITING OR INSERTING SPACE
< = >
' BETWEEN CHARACTERS.
U V 8 SP- SPACE. MOVES CURSOR ONE SPACE, WITHOUT ERASURE.
°
PR PF $
4 6
'
SH SHIFT. SELECTS "UPPER CASE" PUNCTUATION OR FUNCTION
-

LR LF -
/ + SHOWN BY YELLOW MARKINGS ABOVE THE KEYS. EXCEPT AS NOTED
1 BELOW, THE SH KEY MUST BE PRESSED ONCE EACH TIME PRIOR TO
BLK PRESSING THE KEY FOR THE DESIRED "UPPER CASE" PUNCTUATION
BS SP OR FUNCTION. (UNLIKE A TYPEWRITER, THE SHIFT KEY IS NONLOCKING).

RDP-300
GAO-0235-062-0

RDP-300 Key Description

Figure 8-88

Revised 30 August 1998 8-76

 operation 523-0773943

3.16.1 Programming the MFD-85A Multifunction Display

The MFD-85A provides various keys to aid the user when in the edit mode. The following paragraphs describe
the functions of these keys.

Line advance (inverted delta, V) Similar to the SH and the LF keys on the RDP-300. Pushing the V key will
-

advance the cursor 1 line down the display.

Line reverse (delta, A) Similar to the SH and the LR keys on the RDP-300. Pushing the
-
a key will cause the
cursor to move 1 line up the display.

Joystick up -
Similar to the SH and the PR keys on the RDP-300. Causes the MFD-85A to go back to the
previous page. The cursor will be at the lower right-hand corner.

Joystick down Similar to the SH and the PF keys on the RDP-300. Causes the MFD-85A to go forward to the
-

next page. The cursor will be at the upper left-hand corner.

Joystick right Causes the MFD-85A to search forward and display the next chapter title page (whether it is a
-

PGE chapter title page or an EMG chapter title page). The cursor will be in the upper left-hand corner of the
display.

Joystick left Causes the MFD-85A to search backward and display the previous
-
chapter title page. The cursor
will be in the upper left-hand corner of the display.

Top line select key If the cursor is positioned at the upper left corner of the display, pushing this key makes
-

the page shown a chapter title page. If in PGE edit mode, it will be a PGE chapter title page. If in EMG edit
mode, it will be an EMG chapter title page.

3.16.2 Programming a New MFD-85A Multifunction Display

Note

The following procedures assume that the MFD-85A is new and this is the first time it has been
programmed. Procedures for changing an already programmed MFD-85A follow this section.

I a. Turn on airplane power. Ensure that the MFD-85A circuit breakers are in. Push the PWR button at the
upper left of the MFD-85A. Position the WXP-85( )/850( ) MODE switch to OFF (the WXP-85( )/850( ) is
not required during programming of the MFD-85A). Allow 15 seconds for the MFD-85A to warm up. Adjust
the INT control at the upper right of the MFD-85A as desired.
b. Push the PGE button on the MFD-85A. The display will show:

NO PAGE
CHAPTERS FOUND. PLUG
IN RDP-300 TO EDIT.

c. Plug the RDP-300 Remote Data Programmer into the MFD-85A DATA jack. Note that the first line of page 1
is displayed adjacent to the top line select key. The characters on this first line should be: a red cursor in the
upper left, followed by yellow dots, with PAGE 1 in the upper right.

Revised 30 August 1993 3-77

 operation 523-0773943

d. If steps a through c were followed, the top line on the MFD-85A should look like figure 3-39:

LINES CHARACTERS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

i eeeeeeeeee P'AGE I

GAO-0235-062-0

Figure 3-39

The cursor (red at (@)symbol) should be in the upper left corner. If not, push the SH (shift) key then the PR
(page reverse) key on the RDP-300 until the cursor is displayed in the lower right corner of the display. Note

I the current page number and push SH then PF (page forward) until the cursor is at the upper left corner of
page 1. After pushing the SH key, the PF or PR key can be held down for repeated function.
e. Assume the first PGE chapter title is to be called PREFLIGHT. (You MUST have a chapter title at the top
of the first page to be used even if the title is PAGE 1 as shown after performing following steps 1 and 2.) To
enter PREFLIGHT as a chapter title, perform the following:

Note

Whatever is on the top line of the title page (in this example it will be PREFLIGHT) is what is shown
beside the line select keys when chapter titles are called up.

1. Push the RDP-300 BLK (blank) key once then push the BS (back space) key once. The cursor will be back
in the upper left corner but the dot (period) that was in the upper left has now been erased.
2. Push the top line select key at the right side of the MFD-85A. Note that the cursor moves one character
position to the right and that the space to the left of the cursor is blank. This page is now designated as a
PGE chapter title page. The top line of the display should now look like figure 3-40.

LINES CHARACTERS ---+

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

i e......ee PAGE \
2

GAO-0235-062-0

Figure 3-40

Revised 30 August 1993 3-78

 operation 523-0773943

3. Figure 3-41 is a repeat of figure 3-40 in step 2 except the example chapter title (PREFLIGHT) is now
shown justified to the far right-hand side of the display.

LINES CHARACTERS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 eeeeeeeee PAGE I

2 PREFLI GH.T

3
GAO-0235-062-0

Figure 3-41

The purpose of the above illustration is to show what now must be done in order to enter PREFLIGHT as
a chapter title. Note that PREFLIGHT has nine letters and will fully occupy the area now taken up by
PAGE 1 and the associated spaces. The only thing that must be done is to erase the yellow dots in spaces 2
(there is a dot beneath the cursor) through 11 of the first line and move the cursor to position 12. This is
done by pushing the RDP-300 BLK key 10 times and then pushing the SP (space) key once. The top line
I should now look like figure 3-42.

LINES CHARACTERS -+

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 P A G E i

2
3
GAO-0235-062-0

Figure 3-42

4. Complete the chapter title entry procedure by using the RDP-300 keyboard to key in the word PREF-
LIGHT. The letters will write over the data (PAGE 1) currently occupying spaces 13 through 20 and the
cursor will automatically advance to the first space in line 2. The display should now look like figure 3-43.

LINES CHARACTERS I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 PREFL I GHT
2 @

GAO-0235-062-0

Figure 3-43

Revised 30 August 1998 8-79

 operation 523-0773943

5. Continue using the RDP-300 to type in the desired PREFLIGHT checklist beginning on line 2 of the
chapter title page (the chapter title page should be used as part of the checklist). Use as many pages as
necessary to complete the PREFLIGHT checklist. It should be noted that all 12 lines can be used for
checklist data on nontitle pages.

Note

A blank (BLK) is considered a character. The space (SP) key is not considered a character and should
be used instead of blanks to separate words, symbols, numbers, etc. A BLK should only be used to erase
a character as was done in step 1.

f. It is suggested that a couple of unprogrammed pages be left at the end of each chapter. This allows for
expansion at a later date. To do this, push the joystick down twice or use the SH and PF keys on the RDP-
300.
g. Repeat steps e and f to create a new PGE chapter title. Continue repeating steps e and f until all PGE
chapters have been programmed.
h. To program EMG chapters, push the EMG button on the MFD-85A. The display should show the PREF-
LIGHT checklist title page that was previously programmed into MFD-85A as a PGE chapter title page. Use
the joystick down or the RDP-300 SH and PF keys to find a page where you want to put the first EMG title
page. Remember to skip all of the pages previously programmed during the PGE checklist programming
procedure. Then repeat steps e through g above for the EMG chapter checklists.
i. This completes the programming of new checklists procedure. Disconnect the RDP-300 from the MFD-85A.
Verify that data just programmed is accessible and correct by first pushing the PGE or EMG button on the
MFD, then push the appropriate line select key to display the first page of the selected chapter. Use the
joystick as described in paragraph 3.16.1 to view the various pages and/or select new chapter title pages.

Note

The information programmed into the MFD-85A will not be erased by power removal.

Revised 30 August 1993 3-80

 operation 523-0773943

3.16.3 Changing an Already Programmed Note

MFD-85A Multifunction Display
The information programmed into the
Note MFD-85A will not be erased by power
removal. Anything programmed during an
The following procedures assume that the earlier procedure will remain until
MFD-85A has already been programmed reprogrammed.
and it is desired to change some of the text.

3.17 PROGRAMMING MFD-85A PAGE (PGE)

a. Turn on airplane power. Ensure that the MFD- AND EMERGENCY (EMG) DATA WITH
85A circuit breakers are in. Push the PWR button THE CEU-85/85A CHECKLIST ENTRY
at the upper left of the MFD-85A. Position the UNITS

I WXP-85( )/850( ) MODE switch to OFF (the

WXP-85( )/850( ) is not required during pro-
gramming of the MFD-85A). Allow 15 seconds for The handheld CEU-85/85A is used to enter 100 pages
the MFD-85A to warm up. Adjust the INT control of combined checklist page and emergency page data
into the MFD instead of entering it manually with
at the upper right of the MFD-85A as desired.
the RDP-300. It is normally used before preflight,
b. Push the PGE or EMG button (depending on
rarely during flight. The CEU-85/85A is shown in
what is to be changed) on the MFD-85A.
figure 3-44. The checklist is loaded into the CEU-85
.

c. When PGE or EMG is selected, up to four chapter

unit from an *Apple® II Plus/IIe/IIe Enhanced com-
titles will appear next to the line select keys on puter that contains a Collins Pro Line II Interface
the right side of the MFD-85A. If data in one of Card and checklist processing disk software. Unlike
I these four chapters is to be changed, pushing the the CEU-85, the CEU-85A is designed to operate
appropriate line select key causes the first page of with an IBM PC or compatible computer by connect-
the selected chapter to be displayed. If other ing directly to the computer's RS-232 serial port
chapter titles are required, movement of the joy¯ using the CEU cable. A checklist is loaded into the
stick upward will cause the next set of up to four CEU-85A by an IBM PC or compatible computer
chapter titles to be displayed. Movement of the using the software stored on the Checklist Editor
joystick downward will cause the previous four Disk. Once loaded, the CEU-85/85A is carried to the
chapter titles to be displayed· aircraft and plugged into the MFD-85A DATA jack.
d. When the desired chapter is found and the first
page has been called up, plug the RDP-300
Remote Data Programmer into the MFD-85A
DATA jack and make the necessary changes. If
you do not know the title name and/or nothing is
displayed on the MFD-85A, push the top line
select key, plug in the RDP-300, and make the
necessary changes. If all of the 100 available
pages have not been used, new PGE or EMG
chapters can be created by searching for a group
of unprogrammed pages and then making a title
page and entering checklist data as required.
e. When the desired data has been entered, discon-
nect the RDP-300 from the MFD-85A. Verify that
data just programmed is accessible and correct °¯°

I by first pushing the PGE or EMG button on the

MFD, then push the appropriate line select key to
display the first page of the selected chapter. Use
CEU-85/85A Checklist Entry
Figure 3-44
Unit
Il
the joystick as described in paragraph 3.16.1 to
view the various pages and/or select new chapter *Apple is a registered trademark of Apple Com-
title pages. puter, Inc.

Revised 30 August 1993 3-81

 operation 523-0773943

The process of transferring a checklist into the 3.18 FMM-85 FAN MONITOR MODULE

I MFD-85A is initiated by inserting the CEU-85/85A

data plug into the MFD-85A front panel DATA jack.
This connection causes application of +5 V de to the
The FMM-85 Fan Monitor Module mounts directly
onto any one of the four fan frame sides and is used
CEU-85/85A from the MFD-85A which enables the to monitor fan motor speed. If fan motor speed falls

I CEU-85/85A microcomputer
data to the MFD-85A.

Note
to transfer checklist below a preset level, the FMM-85 will sense this
change and provide a ground to energize an installer-
furnished, instrument-panel-mounted, LOW FAN
SPEED annunciator. The FMM-85 is shown in figure
3-45.
The MFD-85A top select, bottom select, and

I
line reverse keys must be pushed simultane-
ously after inserting the CEU-85/85A data
plug into the MFD-85A DATA jack. If this is
not done, the MFD-85A will not be able to
receive data from the CEU-85/85A.

The checklist data transfer begins 15 seconds after

the CEU-85/85A receives power from the MFD-85A
and operates without interaction. Normal checklist
transfer time is approximately 11 minutes; then the
prlemode screen reappears after data transfer is
co

To prevent loss of data, it is essential that

the CEU-85/85A is connected to or discon-
I nected from the MFD-85A only while power
is applied to the system.

Note TP6-3954-Oi7

Those who choose to use the MFD-85A for

FMM-85 Fan Monitor Module
checklist purposes must consider it an aid
Ftgure 3-45
only and realize that it contains only the
data that someone has programmed into it.
The Airplane Flight Manual contains the
approved checklists.

Revised 30 August 1993 3-82

 operation 523-0773943

LINES CHARACTERS -

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

1 O

1 2

COMMENTS/ 1NSTRUCTlONS:

MFD-85A SER.NO: A/C TAIL NO:

L1 ES CHARA4CTERS
1 2 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

1 O

1 1

1 2

COMMENTS/INSTRUCTIONS

MFD-85A SER. NO: A/C TAIL NO

TP6-4691-014-0

Programming Grids for PGE and EMG Data

Figure 3-46

Revised 30 August 1993 s-83/(3-84blank)

Collins EFIS-85B(2/12)
and EFIS-86B(2/12) Rockwell
International
Electronic Flight
Instrument SystemS theory of operation
Collins General Aviation Division

Printed in USA e523-0773944-003118

3rd Edition, 30 August 1993

table of contents

Paragraph Page Paragraph Page

4.1 General .................. .............

4-1 4.3.2.4 Phosphor Protection Monitor.................... 4-19
4.3.2.5 High-Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) ............
4-20
4.3 Functional Theory Of Operation ..... .
4-1 4.3.3 MPU-85G/86G Multifunction Processor Unit
(MPU).......................... ...................
4-20
4.2.1 DPU-85G/86G Display Processor Unit 4.3.3.1 Input/Output (I/O) Interface Cards A7, A8, A9,
4-1 and A10 4-20
(DPU)...... ................... ......................

4-1 4.3.3.2 Display Processor Card A4 4-26

4.2.2 EFD-85/86( ) Electronic Flight Display (EFD)... ......................

4.3.3.3 Symbol Generator Card A5...................... 4-26

4.2.3 MPU-85G/86G Multifunction Processor Unit
(MPU)...... 4-1 4.3.3.4 Sky/Ground Raster Generator and Multiplexer
Card A6 4-27
4.2.4 MFD-85A Multifunction Display (MFD) ..........
4-1 ....................... .... .............

4-2 4.3.3.5 MPU Power Supply Card A3 4-28

4.2.5 Control Panels .....................................
....................

4.3.3.6 Trend Vector Card All 4-28

4.2.5.1 CHP-85D and CHP-86B Course Heading Panels 4-2 ..........................

4.3.3.7 MPU Monitor Operation......................... 4-28

4.2.5.2 DCP-85E/G Display Control Panel.............. 4-2
4.2.5.3 DSP-85A Display Select Panel ..................
4-2 4.3.4 MFD-85A Multifunction Display (MFD) ..........
4-29
4.3.4.1 Video Amplifiers................................. 4-30
4.2.5.4 WXP-85( )/-850( ) Weather Radar Panel....... 4-2
4-2 4.3.4.2 Phosphor Protection Monitor 4-30
4.2.6 Inclinometer ....................

4.3.4.3 High-Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) A12

................. .. .............

.......
4-30
4.3.4.4 Low-Voltage Power Supply Card A4 ............
4-30
4.3 Detailed Theory of Operation 4-6
....................

4.3.5 CHP-85D Course Heading Panel (CHP) ..........

4-32
4.3.5.1 Direction/Movement Detector
4.3.1 DPU-85G/86G Display Processor Unit (DPU) ....
4-6
Encoders .................. ..................
4-32
4.3.1.1 Input/Output (I/O) Interface Cards A7 and A8 4-6 4-32
4.3.5.2 Switches....................... ..................

4.3.1.2 Display Processor Card A4 4-14

..... .

4.3.6 CHP-86B Course Heading Panel (CHP)........... 4-32

4.3.1.3 Symbol Generator Card A5...... 4-14
..

4.3.7 DCP-85E/G Display Control Panel (DCP) ........

4-34
4.3.1.4 Sky/Ground Raster Generator and Multiplexer 4.3.7.1 General Description.............................. 4-34
Card A6...... 4-16 4-34
..

4.3.7.2 Card Descriptions................................

4.3.1.5 Power Supply Cards A3 and A9...... 4-17
..

4.3.8 DSP-85A Display Select Panel (DSP)............. 4-36

4.3.1.6 Relay Card A10 4-17 4-36
..................................

4.3.8.1 General Description..............................

4.3.1.7 DPU Monitor Operation 4-18 4-36
.........................

4.3.8.2 Card Descriptions.................. .............

4.3.2 EFD-85/86( ) Electronic Flight Display 4.3.9 RDP-300 Remote Data Programmer ..............
4-38
(EFD) 4-19 4-39
..............................................

4.3.10 CEU-85( ) Checklist Entry Unit .................

4.3.2.1 CRT Assembly 4-19

.................... ..............

4.3.11 FMM-85 Fan Motor Monitor (FMM) .............

4-40
4.3.2.2 Deflection Amplifiers ............................
4-19
4.3.2.3 Video Amplifiers................................. 4-19

NOTICE: This section replaces second edition dated 6 April 1989.

 List of Effective Pages *The asterisk indicates pages changed, added, or deleted by the current change.

Page No Issue

*Title............................. 30 Aug 93
*List of Effective Pages ......... 30 Aug 93
*4-1
thru 4-40....................30 Aug 93
*4-41
thru 4-42 Added ........... 30 Aug 93

RETAIN THIS RECORD IN THE FRONT OF MANUAL.

Record of Revisions ON RECEIPT OF REVISIONS, INSERT REVISED PAGES IN THE MANUAL,
AND ENTER DATE INSERTED AND INITIALS.

REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER

NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED

1st Ed 15 Sep 86 None

2nd Ed 6 Apr 89 None

3rd Ed 30 Aug 93 SIL 1-90

 section IV
theory of operation

4.1 GENERAL mask, using a black matrix surrounding pigmented

phosphor dot trios, providing high resolution and
This section provides the information required to contrast ratio. A custom design multibandpass opti-
understand the operation of the EFIS units· cal filter is used to provide enhanced contrast. Both
stroke and raster scanning techniques are mul-
4.2 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION tiplexed to provide large area color background and
sharp alphanumeries and symbols with greater than
Refer to figures 4-1 through 4-8. normal illumination. Two units stacked use the same
panel space as the FIS-85 electromechanical units.
4.2.1 DPU-85G/88G Display Processor Unit Air behind the cockpit panel must be circulated to
(DPU) ensure optimal performance. Recommendations
regarding this installation are detailed in the instal-
The DPU-85G is the drive box for the EFD-85; the
DPU-86G, for the EFD-86( ). Each DPU contains the lation section of this instruction book. All EFDs are
identical internally and may be used for either the
I/O section, memory, display processor, symbol gen-
.

EADI or EHSI function.

erator, sky/ground raster generator, WX raster gen-
erator, multiplexers, and power supply. The
An inclinometer may be mounted to either EFD to
processor is a 12-bit TTL machine designed specifi-
.

provide that function.

cally for fast real-time processing for ert applica-
tions. The DPU is capable of driving two EFDs with
different displays. Each of these outputs has positive 4.2.3 MPU-85G/86G Multifunction Processor
switching on the video to provide a data path for the
Unit (MPU)
backup drive signal in the event of a failure. The
.
The MPU contains all the functions of a DPU (refer
DPU also provides an isolated backup drive output
to previous DPU-85G/86G description) plus isolated
which allows each DPU to drive four crt's with iden-
inputs for a second set of sensors. The MPU not only
tical EADI and EHSI displays.
. .

provides the drive for the MFD but can provide the
The DPU I/O section can interface with a designated drive to an EADI and EHSI in the event either DPU
set of sensors including VOR, glideslope, localizer, fails. This allows the MPU to completely replace one
long-range navigation, heading, attitude, air data, DPU without any loss in I/O capability or display
ADF, and flight director/autopilot without external functions. This unit can also provide the drive for all
switching. Some external switching may be required four EFDs in a 5-crt configuration in the unlikely
by other functions in the aircraft for these sensors. event that both DPUs fail. For 3- and 5-crt configu-
These interfaces are described in more detail in par_ rations it also provides the data to the DPU to allow
agraph 4.4. Each DPU also provides comparator/ the selection and display of cross-side data.
warning outputs and display capability for attitude,
heading, localizer, glideslope, and radio altitude. For 4.2.4 MFD-85A Multifunction Display (MFD)
this function, I/O data from an MPU or another DPU
is required. The MFD contains the crt, the deflection yoke, the
video and deflection amplifiers and the high-voltage
4.2.2 EFD-85/88 ( ) Electronic Flight Display power supply. The crt is a Collins specified custom
(EFD) high-resolution color tube. The crt has an in-line gun
with shadow mask using a black matrix surrounding
Each EFD contains a crt, deflection yoke, video and pigmented phosphor dot trios providing high con-
deflection amplifiers and high-voltage power supply. trast along with high resolution. A custom design
The crt is a Collins specified custom high-resolution multibandpass optical filter is used to provide
color tube. The tube has an in-line gun with shadow enhanced contrast. Both stroke and raster scanning

Revised 30 August 1993 4-1

 theory of operation 523-0773944

techniques are used to provide large area color back- in the system provides the basics for display modes
ground for weather and distinct alphanumeries and switching capability built into the EFIS system. One
symbols with high brightness. Mode select and dis- DCP-85E/G is required for 2- and 3-crt systems; two
play control functions are located on the display DCP-85E/Gs are required for 4- and 5-crt systems.
bezel. The memory and associated logic for up to 100
pages of checklist data are also contained in the
MFD. 4.2.5.3 DSP-85A Display Select Panel

4.2.5 Control Panels The DSP-85A provides navigation sensor selection,

bearing pointer selection, format selection, naviga-
tion data selection, and the selection of VNAV,
There are several control panels which may be asso- weather or cross-side course on the EHSI. DH set
ciated with an EFIS system. They are the DCP-85E/
I 85G, CHP-85D, CHP-86B, DSP-85A, and WXP-85A/
85B/85C/85D or WXP-850A/850B·
and selection of VNAV display on the EADI are pro-
vided. Additional course, heading, direct to, and
heading syne are selected from the DSP-85A. One
DSP-85A is required for 2-and 3-crt systems; two
DSP-85As are required for 4- and 5-crt systems. The
4.2.5.1 CHP-85D and CHP-86B Course Heading
Panels ET control function must be provided from an exter-
nal switch.

The CHP-85D and CHP-86B provide course and

heading select functions for various configurations 4.2.5.4 WXP-85()/-850() Weather Radar
of EFIS-85B(12) and EFIS-86B(12) systems. The Panel
CHP-86B panel can be used with any configuration
(two required for 4- and 5-crt systems). The CHP-
85D provides separate course selection capability for The weather control panel provides the weather data
each half of a 4- or 5-crt configuration with a com- outputs required to display weather on either the
mon heading select function. The panels also provide
EHSI or MFD. This panel provides all the necessary
control functions, as well as outputs to the weather
a NAV DTA button for selection of time-to-go (TTG),
ground speed (SPD), wind, and elapsed time (ET), as
radar rt and antenna. The WXP-85( ) and WXP-
850( ) interfaces with and is a part of elements of
well as an ET button for initiating and completing
Collins weather radar systems ONLY. The controls
time functions. CHP-85D provides dual independent
.

TTG-SPD-ET-WIND capability. The CHP-85D and are available in standard panel or Dzus mount com-
CHP-86B interface with the DCP-85E or DCP-85G. patible configurations.

4.2.5.2 DCP-85E/G Display Control Panel 4.2.6 Inclinometer

The DCP-85E/G provides EHSI display sensor selec- The inclinometer is a separate element which is
tion control, EHSI display format control, EADI and mounted to the proper EFD. Refer to the general
EHSI display dimming, and EADI radio altitude information section, table 1-1, for a list of available
decision height set capability. Inclusion of this panel inclinometers.

Revised 80 August 1998 4-2

 theory of operation 523-0773944

EFD-85/86( ) EFD-85/86( )
(EADI) (EADI)

EAÅER EA ER
RADAR RADAR
SYSTEM SYSTEM
I WEATHER
I I WEATHER
I
EFD-85/86( ) RADAR EFD-85/86( ) | RADAR
(EHSI) (EHSI) I I
R/T, ANT R/T, ANT

WXP-85( )/ WXP-85( )/
WXP-850( ) WXP-850( )

DPU-85G/86G I DPU-85G/86G I

DSP-85A DCP- 85E/G

CHP-86B

AIRCRAFT AIRCRAFT
SYSTEMS TP6-4522-083-1 SYSTEMS TP6-4522-OB3-2

EFIS-85B(2)/86B(2) 2-Tube System, Block Diagram EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12) 2-Tube System, Block Diagram
Figure 4-1 Figure 4-2

EFD-B5/86( ) MFD-85A
(EADj) EFD-85/86( ) MFD-85A +--
(EADI)

E A HER --- ---

RADAR SYSTEM EATHER

RADAR SYSTEM

EFD-85/86( ) WEATHER
WEATHER
(EHSI)
RADAR EFD-85/86( ) RADAR
I R/T, ANT I (EHSI)
R/T, ANT I

WXP-85( )/
WXP-850( ) I WXP-85( )/
WXP-850( )

VIDEO
VIDEO
-
DPU-85G/86G MPU-85G/86G
DATA --- DPU-85G/86G MPU-85G/86G ----

DATA

DSP-85A
DCP-85E/G

NO.1 NO.2
AlRCRAFT A1RCRAFT NO. 1 NO. 2
SYSTEMS SYSTEMS AIRCRAFT CHP-868 AIRCRAFT
SYSTEMS SYSTEMS
TP6-4522-O83-3
TP6-4522-OS3-4

EFIS-85B(2)/86B(2) 3-Tube System, Block Diagram EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12) 8-Tube System, Block Diagram
Figure 4-8 Figure 4-4

Revised 30 August 1993 .4-3

 theory of operation 523-0773944

EFD-85/86( ) EFD-85/86( )
(EADI) (EADI)

EA ER
RADAR SYSTEM

WEATHER
EFD-85/86( ) RADAR EFD-85/86( )
(EHS1) (EHSI)
R/T, ANT

WXP-85( )/
WXP-850( )

VIDEO
I e
DPU -85G/86G DPU-85G/86G
DATA

DSP-85A DSP-85A

NO 1 NO. 2
AIRCRAFT AlRCRAFT
SYSTEMS SYSTEMS

TP6-4522-083-5

EFIS-85B(2)/86B(2) J-Tabe System, Block Diagram

Figure 4-5

EFD-85/86( ) EFD-85/86( )
(EADI) (EADI)

EA ER
RADAR SYSTEM

WEATHER
EFD-85/86( ) RADAR
EFD-85/86( )
(EHSI) (EHSI)
R/T, ANT

WXP-85( )/
WXP-850( )

V1DEO
DPU -85G/86G DPU-85G/86G
DATA

DCP -85E/G I CHP-85D DCP-85E/G

NO 1 ' NO. 2
AIRCRAFTI CHP-86B I I CHP-868 I AIRCRAFT
SYSTEMS L __ _ J I_ ..I SYSTEMS

TP6-4522-083-6

EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12) 4-Tube System, Block Diagram

Figure 4-6

Revised 30 August 1993 4-4

 theory of operation 523-0773944

MFD-85A

EFD-E8A5/D86( ) EFD-E8A5/D86( )
EA HER
RADAR SYSTEM

WEATHER
EFD-85/86( ) RADAR EFD-85/86( ) ÛCI

(EHSI) R/T, ANT (EHSI)

1 E DATA DATA
DPU-B5G/86G MPU 85G/86G DPU-85G/86G
VlDEO VIDEO .

DSP-85A eces c DSP-85A

NO 1 ou c ev Ed NO 2
AIRCRAFT AIRCRAFT
SYSTEMS p/t,O SYSTEMS
et
TP6-4522-083 7

EFIS-85B(2)/86B(2) 5-Tube System, Block Diagram

Figure 4-7 MXn 3 E

MFD-85A +--

EFD-85/86( ) EFD-85/86( )
(EADI) (EADI) (3
EATHER
RADAR SYSTEM

RENR

) D
EFD-EH5S/l86( EFD-E8H5 6( )

/ /

WXP-85( )/
WXP-850( )

¯¯¯'

DATA
DPU-85G/86G
DATA
,
' . MPU-85G/86G DPU-85G/86G
---*
VIDEO VIDEO

DCP-85E/G CHP-85D DCP-85E/G

NO. 1 ¯1 |¯ NO. 2
A1RCRAFT
¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯

] AIRCRAFT
SYSTEMS I CHP-86B i i CHP-868 i SYSTEMS
L-----_I L------I
TP6-4522-083-8
/

EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12) 5-Tube System, Block Diagram

Figure 4-8

Revised 30 August 1993 4-5

 theory of operation 523-0773944

4.3 DETAILED THEORY OF OPERATION e Roll steering command

e Pitch steering command
4.3.1 DPU-85G/86G Display Processor Unit e AOA/Fast/slow deviation
(DPU) e ADF bearing
e Vertical deviation
The DPU generates the necessary deflection and
video signals to draw the desired display on the elec- 3. DC Discrete Inputs
tronic flight displays (EFDs). The DPU contains an
I/O interface to an aircraft system, a display proces- • To/From
sor, a symbol generator to provide stroke-writing, an e Instrument flags
ADI/sky raster generator and multiplexer circuit, e Instrument modes
and power supplies. Refer to figure 4-9. • EFIS and I/O straps
e Marker beacon
e FCS modes
4.3.1.1 Input/Output (I/O) Interface Cards A7
I and A8
• CAT II request
e Localizer mode
Analog I/O card A7 and digital I/O card A8 comprise • VOR test
the I/O interface section of the DPU. These cards e DME hold
receive analog and digital data from aircraft systems e DG mode
and other EFIS units, format the data, and provide e Master warn reset
that data to the display processor. In addition to col- • Comparator reset
lecting data for display, the I/O section also calcu- · Accelerometer monitor
lates new data based upon previously received data . .

and outputs this information in an appropriate form 4. Serial Digital Inputs

to other equipments. There are also a number of digi- e DME distance
tal EFIS communication channels which are super- e Long-range navigation information
vised by the DPU I/O system.
e DPU cross-side data
e DCP/DSP data
a. Inputs
e Air data computer information
The I/O section is capable of receiving data from e Vertical navigation information
several different aircraft sources. In addition, e FCS modes
there are several intra-EFIS data sources which e Altitude/heading
must be accommodated. Altogether, five general e WXP data
data formats are received, digitized, filtered, and e REF airspeed
formatted by the I/O section as follows: .

5. Audio Identification Input

1. AC Analog Inputs .

e DME audio identification

e Desired track or track angle error + drift

6. AC Discretes
angle
e Drift angle/bearing to waypoint e Marker beacon (inner, middle, outer)
e VOR/RNV bearing
e Roll angle b. Outputs
e Pitch angle
• Heading Along with receiving data, the DPU also provides
e ADF bearing several outputs to other EFIS units and to other
aircraft systems. The I/O section provides these
2. DC Analog Inputs outputs in various formats. These formats and
data are listed as follows:
e Radio altitude
e Localizer or MLS azimuth deviation
I e Glideslope,
deviation
MLS glide path, or VNAV
1. AC Analog

e Heading error
e Crosstrack deviation e Course datum

Revised 30 August 1993 4-6

 theory of operation 523-0773944

To write data to the MPRAM, the display line. During the time that the MSQline to that
processor performs a write to external mem- IOP is low, the multiplexed I/O port-polling
ory sequence. Processor control line decoding logic recognizes the IOP's request, and control
provides a signal to the MPRAM, this time to of the multiplexed I/O port latches and 8-bit
the input port. The processor is signaled to data bus is given to the IOP. Each IOP has six
hang up and the MPRAM is notified of the latch control lines to control the MPRAM
pending input transfer. When the port is address, the I/O handshake logie, the most
polled, the processor's 8-bit address is passed significant 8 bits, and least significant 8 bits
to the MPRAM along with 12 bits of data. The of the input or output data. By using these
MPRAM controller performs the required control signals in the proper sequence, the
RAM write sequence and then releases the IOP can quickly perform data transfers to and
processor, completing the transfer. Due to a from the MPRAM.
decoding ambiguity at the display processor, a
superfluous output request is also generated When the appropriate data transfer is com-
but the data is ignored by the display proces- plete, the IOP removes the multiplexed service
sor. request signal and the service query polling
sequence continues.
In the cross-side data receiver and its input
port, serial data is received by a series of shift 3. I/O Processors
registers in a form directly compatible with
the input port. When a valid word is received, The I/O processors, or IOPs, are the main data
a data strobe is generated which transfers the collectors for the I/O section. They provide
address and data fields to the input port primarily for the acquisition of data in a vari-
latches. The same signal notifies the MPRAM ety of forms from the aircraft systems and
port of a pending input data transfer. When other EFD units. This data is digitized,
the MPRAM polls the port, the RAM write filtered, formatted and written into the
sequence is performed, which transfers the MPRAM to be used by the display processor.
data from the port to the RAM· In addition to inputting data, new information
. must be calculated based upon previously
There is also an I/O port which interfaces the .

input data. These mathematical calculations

I/O processors to the MPRAM. Again, this
are also performed by the IOPs. Along with
input/output port pair appears to be two sepa- calcu-
inputting information and performing
rate ports, one for input and one for output, as
lations, some data must be generated and then
viewed by the MPRAM. Not only does this I/O
output to other aircraft units such as the
port provide for bidirectional data flow
autopilot system. The output data may be
between the MPRAM and the I/O processors,
required in a number of forms ranging from
but also it provides an important interface
serial digital to ac analog. Supervision of this
between a series of 8-bit-wide buses and a
24-bit-wide (16 data + 8 address) MPRAM sys- function is part of the IOP's responsibility.
tem. Since many I/O operations to be per-
are
This multiplexed I/O port is actually a polling formed every second with data being handled
controller very similar in operation to the in many forms, the data is partitioned by data
MPRAM controller described previously. type and assigned an individual microproces-
Where the MPRAM controller coordinates sor to handle each data partition. The result is
high-speed 24-bit accesses with the MPRAM, a series of IOPs all working in parallel to pro-
this controller handles slower 8-bit accesses vide data to the MPRAM. Two things should
with a 24-bit port, which in turn is handled by be noted. First, since there is a series of slower
the MPRAM controller. parallel IOPs rather than a single high-speed
IOP, the data-gathering process is less suscep-
The polling logie issues an active low MUX tible to a single processor failure. For exam-
SERVICE QUERY (MSQ)polling pulse to ple, if a single IOP were to fail, only the data
each IOP in turn. If a data transfer is to take partition associated with that IOP would be
place, the IOP will place a low level on the lost and at least partial data flow to and from
active low MUX SERVICE REQUEST (MSR) the MPRAM would continue. Second, since all

Revised 30 August 1993 4-9

 theory of operation 523-0773944

the IOPs and the display processor can com- This data is referred to as cross-side data
municate with the same MPRAM, there exists because it originates at the aircraft sen-
a channel of bidirectional communication sors on the opposite side of the aircraft
between each of the IOPs and any other IOP, from the side of the DPU which receives
as well as with the display processor. the serial data.
The following three data format partitions are The serial digital data is received as a
used by the I/O section with a single IOP for string of 24-bit words each separated by a
each partition: 24-bit time gap. Each 24-bit word is made
up of 8 address and 16 data bits.
(a) AC Analog/DC Analog/DC Discrete
This data is provided to the DPU primarily
e Synchro/digital for use in data comparison and monitoring,
• Resolver/digital and to provide display data to the DPU
e Digital/synchro when the DCP-85( ) is in CONTROL
e Analog/digital TRANSFER mode.
• Digital/analog
e Modes This high-speed receiver and its MPRAM
e Flags interface run totally without intervention
• Straps on the part of the display processor or any
of the I/O processors.
(b) Serial Digital
4.3.1.1.1 AC Analog Input/Output Descriptions
• UART based
e Low-Speed Pro Line II The DPU receives and processes ac analog attitude
e ARINC 6-wire and heading inputs/outputs on analog I/O card A7.
e Manchester
a. Pitch data input is 3-wire synchro format from a
(c) Audio Identification 332D-11 Vertical Gyro. Pitch analog voltage X to
Y (11.8 V rms)(sine of the pitch angle). The X to
=

e DME audio identification Y voltage is out of phase with the 400-Hz power
when in a nose up condition.
Each IOP also has an interface from the
b. Roll data input is 3-wire synchro format from a
microcomputer to the MPRAMs mul¯ 332D-11 Vertical Gyro. Roll analog voltage X to Y
tiplexed I/O port. This interface consists of = (11.8 V rms)(sine of the bank angle). The X to Y
an 8-bit bidirectional data bus buffer and
voltage is out of phase with the 400-Hz power
an 8-bit tristate buffer for the seven I/O
.

. when in a right bank condition.

port control lines.
c. Heading data input is 3-wire synchro format
from an MC-103/MCS-65 Magnetic Compass.
The remainder of the circuit associated
with each IOP is concerned only with han- Heading analog voltage is +11.8 V rms maximum.
dling the particular data partition The X to Y voltage is out of phase with the 400-Hz
power when in a right heading.
assigned to that IOP.
d. ADF bearing (ac) input is 3-wire reference to
(d) Cross-Side Data Receiver ground signal from an ADF-60A/B. Bearing ana-
log voltage X to Y (11.8 V rms)(sine of the bear-
=

Another source of input data to the ing angle).

MPRAM is provided by a high-speed, syn- e. VOR bearing input is 4-wire sin/cos format from
chronous, serial digital receiver. The infor- a NAV receiver. Analog voltage +11.8 V rms, 400
=

mation received here originates in the Hz.

other DPU or the MPU and is transmitted f. Desired track input is 3-wire synchro format
to the DPU on a single 6-wire serial bus. from an analog long range navigation system.
The information on this bus consists of Heading analog voltage X to Y (11.8 V rms)(sine
=

cross-side data which is received in its nat- of the heading angle). The X to Y voltage is out of
ural form by the MPU IOPs and is then phase with the 400-Hz power when in a right
passed to the DPU in serial digital form. heading deviation condition.

Revised 30 August 1993 4-10

 theory of operation 523-0773944

g. Bearing to waypoint input is 3-wire synchro for- g. Glideslope deviation input is 2-wire de, polarity
mat from an analog long range navigation sys- reversing signal from an analog NAV receiver.
tem. Analog voltage X to Y (11.8 V rms)(sine of
=
Analog signal voltage: 75 µA/dot, 2 dots full scale.
the bearing angle). The X to Y voltage is out of h. Crosstrack deviation input is 2-wire de, polarity
phase with the 400-Hz power when in a right reversing signal from an analog LNAV. Analog
bearing deviation condition. signal voltage: 75 µA/dot, 2 dots full scale.
h. Heading error output is a reversible phase 400-Hz i. Lateral deviation output is 2-wire de, polarity
analog signal which is proportional to the differ- reversing signal to a FCS-80( ) or FCS-65( ).
ence between the aircraft heading and the Analog signal voltage: ±0.5 V de, 75 mV/degree.
selected heading. Heading error voltage is 11.8-V Angular (ANG) lateral deviation is proportional
ac maximum (500 mV p-p/degree). The signal to the angular displacement of the aircraft from
voltage is in phase with the reference when the selected VOR (5 degrees/dot) or localizer course
heading bug is left of the lubber line. (0.0775DDM/dot). Linear (LIN) lateral deviation
i. Course datum error output is a reversible phase is proportional to the lateral displacement of the
400-Hz analog signal which is proportional to the aircraft from selected VOR course (5 nmi/dot, 1
difference between the aircraft heading and the nmi/dot if in FCS approach mode)) or localizer
selected course. Course datum voltage is 11.8-V ac course (0.0775 DDM/dot). For long range naviga-
maximum. Analog signal is 30SING, where 0 is the tion systems, this signal is crosstrack deviation
angle between lubber line and course. Course and is proportional to the lateral displacement of
datum error is in phase with the reference when the aircraft from the desired track.
the course line is left of the lubber line.
4.3.1.1.3 Discrete Input/Output Descriptions
4.3.1.1.2 DC Analog Input/Output Descriptions
The DPU receives and processes discrete inputs/out-
puts on analog I/O card A7.
The DPU receives and processes de analog inputs/
outputs on analog I/O card A7· a. Strap data is read by the I/O microprocessor
from a latch circuit. Rear connector pins are
a. Radio altitude input is 2-wire single polarity de strapped to ground according to which sensors
analog signal from an ALT-50/55 or AL-101 are connected to EFIS. This tells the microproces-
Radio Altimeter. Analog voltage: to 500 ft: V
-20 =
sor which navigation data labels should be pre-
0.02h + 0.4; at 500 ft and greater: V 0.003(h 500)
= -

sent.
+ 10.4. b. The following are 1-wire discrete valid inputs.
b. Pitch command input is 2-wire de, polarity Valid +28 V de, invalid
= ground.
=

reversing signal from a FCS-80( ) or FCS-65( ).

Analog signal voltage: FCS-80( ) 150 mV/degree; 1. Radio altitude valid input is from the ALT-50/
FCS-65( ) 150 mV/degree; FCS-A 120 mV/degree; 55 or AL-101.
FCS-B 50 mV/degree. 2. ADC valid input is from the ADC-80/82/85
c. Roll command input is 2-wire de, polarity revers- Air Data Computer.
ing signal from a FCS-80( ) or FCS-65( ). Analog 3. Fast/slow valid input is from the MSI-80C/D/
signal voltage: FCS-80( ) 150 mV/degree; FCS- E or ASI-80D/F.
65( ) 150 mV/degree; FCS-A 66 mV/degree; FCS- 4. ILS mode input is from the VIR-32/432.
B 50 mV/degree. 5. Glideslope valid input is from the VIR-30/32.
d. ADF bearing input is 3-wire de resolver (sin/cos) 6. VOR/LOC valid input is from the VIR-30/32.
signal from an ADF-60A/B. Analog signal volt- 7. DME valid input is from the DME-40/42.
age: 8 V de maximum. 8. ADF valid input is from the ADF-60A/B.
e. Fast/slow deviation input is 2-wire de, polarity 9. LNV valid input is from the analog long range
reversing signal from a MSI-80C/D/E or ASI- navigation system.
80D/F. Angle of attack deviation input is from 10. Attitude valid input is from the 332D-11 Ver-
the aircraft AOA system. Analog signal voltage: tical Gyro.
1.1 volts/dot or 1.1 volts/10 knots too fast. 11. Heading valid input is from the MC-103Mag-
f. Localizer deviation input is 2-wire de, polarity netic Compass.
reversing signal from an analog NAV receiver. 12. FD valid input is from the FCS-80( ) Flight
Analog signal voltage: 75 µA/dot, 2 dots full scale. Control System.

Revised 30 August 1998 4-11

 theory of operation 523-0773944

c. DME hold input is a 1-wire discrete from the o. The following 1-wire discretes are connected to
DME-40/42. Hold open, not hold ground.
= = external annunciators. Ground when the annun-
d. DG mode input is a 1-wire discrete from the MC- ciator is on. Open at all other times.
103/MCS-65Magnetic Compass. DG mode +28 V =

de, slaved ground.

= 1. Category II comparator
e. FD in view bias input is a 1-wire discrete from the 2. Category II amber
FCS-80( ) Flight Control System. In view +28 V = 3. Category II green
de, out of view open. = 4. Comparator master warn
f. Command bars off input is a 1-wire discrete from 5. Heading comparator
the FCS-80( ) Flight Control System. FD on +28 = 6. Attitude comparator
V de, FD off ground.
= 7. Decision height
g. VOR/LOC 1 and 2 mode outputs are 1-wire dis-
cretes to an analog flight control system.+28 V de p. Radio altimeter test output is a 1-wire discrete to
when any VOR or LOC has been selected as the an ALT-50/55 Radio Altimeter System. Ground
active NAV sensor. Open at all other times. when RA test has been selected on the DCP/DSP.
h. LNV 1 and 2 mode outputs are 1-wire discretes to Open at all other times.
an analog flight control system. +28 V de when
any LNV has been selected as the active NAV sen- 4.3.1.1.4 Serial Digital Input/Output
sor. Open at all other times. Description
i. NAV valid output is a 1-wire discrete to an analog
flight control system. +28 V de when the flag The DPU receives and processes serial digital inputs
being received from the active NAV sensor is and outputs on digital I/O card A8. The serial digital
valid. Open at all other times including no course bus formats include commercial standard digital bus
selected. (CSDB), Manchester bus, and ARINC 6-wire buses.
j. LOC tuned output is a 1-wire discrete to an ana-
log flight control system. Ground when either a. Commercial Standard Digital Bus (CSDB)
VOR has been selected as the active NAV sensor
and a LOC frequency tuned input from the appli- Refer to figure 4-10 for a description of this bus.
cable NAV receiver has been received. Open at all CSDB is a binary, 2-level waveform. The bus con-
other times. sists of a 2-wire twisted shielded pair, one wire
k. Back course output is a 1-wire discrete to an ana- labeled A and the other B, with both lines driven
per Electronic Industries Association (EIA) RS-
log flight control system. +28 V de when either
VOR has been selected as the active NAV sensor
422A standard logic definition. The driving
source applies a signal between A and B to pro-
and a LOC frequency tuned input from the appli-
cable NAV receiver has been received and the
duce the following two states:
selected course is greater than 105 degrees from
Logic 0 state = line A positive with respect to line
the aircraft heading. Open at all other times.
l. Linear deviation output is a 1-wire discrete to an
Logic 1 state = line B positive with respect to line
analog flight control system. +28 V de when any
LNV has been selected as the active NAV sensor.
Open at all other times. A receiver measures differentially between wires
m. FCS clear output is a 1-wire discrete to an analog A and B to discriminate against common-mode
flight control system. +28 V de pulse for 250 ±20 noise. The total load on the CSDB bus output
milliseconds when active. Open at all other times
shall be 500 ohms or greater. Maximum shunt
The clear pulse shall not be generated if LNV is capacity should not exceed 12 000 pF. The driving
the active source and magnetic variation is
source applies a signal between A and B to pro-
absent from the bus· duce the following states:
n. TO/FROM output is a 2-wire discrete to an ana-
log flight control system. Signal voltage is ±0.36 V BUS LEVEL HI LO
de ±0.06 V de. TO indicated when DPU P2-126 is
- ---

positive with respect to P2-130. FROM indicated A to B +5 V de -5

V de
when DPU P2-130 is positive with respect to P2- A to gnd +5 V de 0 V de
126. E to gnd 0V de +5 V de

Revised 30 August 1993 4-12

 theory of operation 523-0773944

TYPICAL BUS STRUCTURE INCREASING TIME

,

FRAME TIME (ti)

SYNC BUS MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE SYNC

BLOCK IDLE BLOCK "N" BLOCK w2 BLOCKgl BLOCK

TYPlCAL MESSAGE BLOCK

2 16-BIT DATA WORDS, 6 TOTAL BYTES

DATA 2 DATA 2 DATA 1 DATA 1 STATUS ADDRESS

M.S. BYTE L.S. BYTE M.S. BYTE L.S. BYTE BYTE BYTE

- -
--

TYPICAL BYTE STRUCTURE

(STATUS BYTE SHOWN)

STOP PARITY BIT B]T BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT START
BIT (ODD) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 O BIT

VALID IDENT MODE IDENT SOURCE 1DENT

,",RMAAME
TPDMAETE
'3
: RATE BIT 1 =
VALlD BlTS 1 =
MODE ON BIT*
SOURCE
a FOR # O =
MODE OFF
t2 = INTERBLOCK T1ME 4,3 (OR PAD)
(NO RESTRICTIONS) 7 DATA#1 O O UNKNOWN

13 =
BUS tDLE TIME 6 DATAx2 O 1 UNIT al
(11 81T-TIMES MINIMUM)
¯¯¯

TEST 1DENT
5 DATA«3
t4 = INTERBYTE TIME gy 1 =
TEST
1 1 UNITy3
(NO RESTRICTIONS) # O =
NORMAL
2 (OR PAD) GAO-0243-Ol3-0

Commercial Standard Digital Bus (CSDB) Structure

Figure 4-10

1. AHS CSDB input is a 2-wire serial digital bus updated approximately 17 times per second and
from an AHC-85 Attitude/Heading Com- each word is followed by a 12-bit silence.
puter. Data transfer rate is 50 kBaud/second.
2. VNAV CSDB input is a 2-wire serial digital The bus uses a twisted shielded pair, one wire
bus from a VNI-80B/D Vertical Navigation high and the other a return. The driving source
Indicator. Data transfer rate is 12.5 kBaud/ applies a signal (+12V noniinal) to the high side
second. wire while the return wire remains at ground. A
3. FCS CSDB inputs are 2-wire serial digital receiver measures differentially between them to
buses from an analog FCS-65 or digital APS- discriminate against common-mode noise. The
85( ) Flight Control System. Data transfer total load on the Manchester bus shall be 2000 0
rate is 12.5 kBaud/second. or greater. Maximum shunt capacity should not
4. EFIS to FCC CSDB output is a 2-wire serial exceed 6 000 pF.
digital bus to the APS-85( ) Autopilot System.
Data transfer rate is 12.5 kBaud/second. 1. ADC Manchester input is a 2-wire serial digi-
tal bus from an ADC-80/81A/82/85 Air Data
Computer.
b. Manchester Digital Bus
c. ARINC 6-Wire Bus (561, 568, 582)
The Manchester digital bus is a serial binary bit
stream using Manchester coding to generate a 24- ARINC 6-wire bus is a binary, 32-bit, 2-level
bit data word. The binary 2-level waveform for- waveform. The ARINC 6-wire waveform format
mat is shown in figure 4-11. The first 8 bits are is shown in figure 4-12. The bus consists of three
used for a 4-bit pad and a 4-bit address and the 2-wire twisted shielded pairs. The functions of
remaining 16 bits are used for data. Data is the three circuits are serial data transmission,

Revised 30 August 1993 4-13

 theory of operation 523-0773944

SERIAL DATA (MANCHESTER)

"O" PAD (4 BITS) ADDRESS (4 BITS) DATA (16 BITS) a

l i

o lo o lo o i i l lo lo I \ ll i lo I i I

1 OV
I NOM

T PERIOD (T) 100 ± I µSEC

PULSE DURATION (tp) 50 ± 0.5 µSEC (OR MULTIPLES OF SAME)

RISE TIME AND FALL TIME: BETWEEN 5 AND 10 µSEC GAO-1282-Ol1

Digital Signal Format (Manchester Digital Bus)

Figure 4-11

word synchronization, and the clock signal. The Instructions are first loaded from a program ROM
serial data transmission is encoded as binary into the instruction register which addresses a con-
coded data (BCD) and binary data. The first 8 bits trol ROM. The control ROM in turn generates the
are used for address and the remaining 24 bits are necessary control signals to sequence the processor
used for data. The word synchronization signal through the execution of the instruction. Logical and
provides a continuous binary one logic state arithmetic operations are performed on A and B reg-
simultaneously with the first bit of the data isters by an ALU. Shift and rotates are done by a
word. The sync signal is interrupted for a period shift register. The multiplexers perform two func-
of ½ bit during the last ½ of the eighth bit period tions. They can select either the program counter
to mark the end of address/label field in order to output (PC bus) or the shift register output (S bus) to
provide a data gate signal. The word synchroniza- be loaded into an A or B register, or they can output
tion signal returns to a binary zero logic state data on the I/O bus (A bus) for use by peripheral
simultaneously with the last data field bit. The devices.
elock signal consists of an 11 ±3.5 kHz/s square
wave signal having a rise and decay time within The PC bus can directly access 16K of program ROM.
the range of 2 to 6 microseconds. The driving The S bus is used to address a sine lookup table and
source applies a signal to produce the following scratch-pad RAM.
logic states: logie one equals +11 to +14 V de and
logie zero equals 0 ±0.5 V dc. Output of data to peripherals is accomplished by put-
ting the data on the A bus and strobing the desired
output line from the I/O decoder. This enables the
1. DME input is a 6-wire ARINC 561 serial digi-
peripherals onto the A bus and the data is loaded
tal bus from a DME-40/42 Distance Measur
into an A or B register. Status flags can also be read
ing Equipment.
2. LNV input is a 6-wire ARINC 561 serial digi- directly into the processor from the status multi-
plexer. In the case of input, output, and status lines '
tal bus from an analog long range navigation
all device decoding is done within the processor.
system.
A reset control circuit provides a power-on reset as
4.3.1.2 Display Processor Card A4 well as an automatic processor reset, which resets
the processor if improper operation is detected.
Display processor card A4 receives input data from
the aircraft system from the I/O cards through the 4.3.1.3 Symbol Generator Card A5
MPRAM. It controls the operation of the symbol
generator and ADI/MUX cards in the DPU. The Symbol generator card A5 creates the signals
processor is a discrete 12-bit TTL machine. It is required to draw characters and lines on the EFDs.
designed to be a fast real-time processor for ert dis- The symbol generator contains a character generator
play applications. to draw letters and symbols, a vector generator to

Revised 30 August 1998 4-14

 theory of operation 523-0773944

BIT NO. I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 il l2 l3 \4 l5 16 \7 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 3l 32

SERIAL

I I I I I I I
I I i I I I |
| | | | |
SERIAL
WORD
SYNC
(i) I | | | 1 | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
L

i
BCDWORD l OOOOOO I OOOOOOOO l OO l I OlO I 1 000 1 00

BCD WORD
LABEL PAD HUNDREDTHS TENTHS UN1TS TENS
PURPOSE STAT
DRE S
I I I
BMCEDANWNORD D
DME DISTANCE LABEL PAD O 9 5 3 2
I I I I I

32 3l 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 2l 20 l9 [8 l7 l6 \5 14 \3 12 11 IO 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

NAOL

li
(REVERSED)
1
| |
| | |
SERIAL
WORD
SYNC
(REVERSED)

| | | |
::RL

(REVERSED)

BCDWORD OO 0001 I 01 01 I 00 I 00000000 000000 I

BCDRPWOOSRED
I I I
STAT TENS UNITS TENTHS HUNDREDTHS PAD LABEL
ES
I I 1 | | | 1 I I
BMCEDANWNOGRD
LIAD
2 3 5 9 O PAD DME DISTANCE LABEL
I 1 | | | | | |

NOTES:
WAVEFORM AS SEEN ON AN OSCILLOSCOPE. BIT
31 32
WAVEFORM SHOWN IN ORDER OF SIGNIFlCANCE.
O O NO TEST-VALlD
I O TEST VALID
O 1 lNVALID
I I UNDEFINED

GAO-0468-Ol4-0

Typical ARINC 6-Wire Serial Word Waveform

Figure 4-12

Revised 30 August 1993 4-15

 theory of operation 523-0773944

draw lines, a coordinate converter to rotate charac- b. Vector Generator

ters and lines and a video circuit to turn the crt beam
on and off. The vector generator serves two purposes; first, it
positions the deflection so that characters can be
drawn anywhere on the screen; second, it controls
a. Character Generator
the video so that it can draw solid or dashed lines
as it moves along.
The character generator provides X and Y deflec-
tion and video outputs to draw alphanumeric When a new X or Y position is loaded into the
characters and other symbols on the EFD dis- vector generator from the display processor, the
plays. The character generator draws characters comparator compares the new position with the
a stroke at a time, much like one would draw on present position. Depending on whether the new
paper (as opposed to a raster format). The char- position is greater or less than the old position,
acter generator can draw variable sized and italic the position counter counts up or down at a fixed
alphanumeric characters, and can string letters rate until the present position equals the new
together for printing words and labels. position. At this point, the vector is complete and
the vector generator stops. The digital output
The display processor card controls the character from the X and Y position counters are converted
generator by loading data from its F bus into the to an analog voltage at the output. The vector
character generator stroke counter. This sets the generator sends a busy signal to the processor to
starting address of the data in the character indicate when it is vectoring. Solid or dashed
ROM. Each location in the ROM provides 1 video lines can also be selected by software.
bit, 4 bits indicating the direction of each stroke,
and 3 bits defining the length of the stroke. The c. Coordinate Converter
X-Y counter controller provides the necessary
To be able to draw characters and symbols on the
clock pulses to increment or decrement the X and crt, the output of the character and vector gener-
Y position counters to form the characters. Each ators could be added together and sent directly to
time a new piece of data is output from the char~ the displays. In the EFIS, however, there is also a
acter ROM (corresponding to a new character need for rotating lines and symbols about an ori-
stroke) the stroke length is loaded into the stroke gin, such as in the case of the tick marks on the
length counter. As the stroke is drawn, the stroke compass rose. The coordinate converter performs
length counter increments until the end-of-stroke this function.
decoder detects that the present stroke is done. It
then outputs an end-of-stroke signal (EOS) which Given an initial coordinate (X,Y) the position of
increments the stroke counter to address the next this point after rotation through an angle 0 is:
location in ROM, and the new stroke data is
loaded into the stroke length counter. The end of X' = Xeos0 -
Ysin0 + X org
the character is detected by a dummy stroke of Y' = Yeos0 + Xsind + Y org
length zero. This stops the operation of the char-
acter generator. Depending on which character 4.3.1.4 Sky/Ground Raster Generator and
load input was used to draw the character, the Multiplexer Card A6
position counter will either reset to the starting
position or hold the present state to allow string- a. Sky/Ground Raster Generator
ing several characters together· The sky/ground raster generator, part of ADI/
MUX card A6, produces the deflection and video
X and Y outputs are formed by d/a converters blanking signals needed for the sky/ground por-
that produce analog voltages corresponding to tion of the EADI display. The raster generator
the outputs of the X and Y position counters. The receives control signals and angular data from
character generator also outputs a character gen- display processor card A4. From this digital data,
erator busy signal (CGB) which tells the display analog deflection and digital blanking signals are
processor when the character generator is active- generated to produce a full-screen cyan-colored
sky and brown ground presentation. The vertical
Character sizes are varied by changing the volt- position of the horizon line is determined by the
age reference. aircraft pitch angle. In addition, the entire sky/

Revised 30 August 1998 4-16

 theory of operation 523-0773944

ground raster is rotated by an amount equal to busy. Deflection and video signal drivers are used
the aircraft roll angle. on the multiplexer outputs to provide a low-impe-
dance source for driving the EFDs.
The raster is produced by deflecting the crt beam
along parallel lines perpendicular to the horizon 4.3.1.5 Power Supply Cards A3 and A9
line. A total of 288 raster lines composed of two
sets of 144 lines are interleaved on every other There are three power supplies in the DPU, one on
refresh cycle. An analog integrator deflects the power supply card A3 and two on power supply card
beam along a raster line from left to right. A A9. Power supply card A9 supplies power to the EFD
blanking pulse is generated to return the beam to displays.
the left with video off.
a. Power Supply Card A3
To produce the angular rotation of the sky/
Aircraft +28 V de is input to power supply card
ground horizon line, the X and Y raster voltages
A3. Power supply card A3 provides +5, +15, and
are passed through a coordinate converter which -15
V de to circuits within the DPU. The circuit
controls the video signals to generate a horizon
.

consists of a +28-V de to +15-V de series-switching

.

line with the proper angle. The display processor

controls the amount of rotation based on the air-
regulator that supplies constant voltage to a
push-pull inverter. The push-pull inverter then
craft roll angle.
outputs regulated and filtered +5, +15 and -15
V
The display processor provides control and data de to cards A4 through A8 in the DPU.
for the sky/raster generator. Data is output to b. EFD Power Supply Card A9
the raster generator in two parts, roll angle and
pitch angle. The pitch angle is output last since Aircraft +28 V de is input to power supply card
the strobe signal used to load the raster latches A9. Power supply card A9 contains two indepen-
also signals the raster logic to produce one raster dent and identical power supplies on one card. It
cycle. A raster busy signal is output to the display provides ±30, +160, ±25, ±11, +5, and -6
V de to the
processor card for the duration of the raster EHSI and EADI. The circuit consists of a +28-V
cycle. A single raster cycle takes 8 milliseconds to de to +15-V de series-switching regulator that
complete. supplies constant voltage to a push-pull inverter.
The push-pull inverter uses a transformer with
b. Multiplexer multiple windings on its secondary to output reg-
ulated and filtered ±30, +160, ±25, ±11, +5, and V-6

The multiplexer, part of ADI/MUX card A6'

de
allows the DPU to drive two EFDs with different
deflection and video signals. The DPU can put an The EFIS system will provide normal operation
ADI on one display while drawing an HSI on down to +18 V de. When the voltage drops below
another. This is done by switching the symbol +18 V de, the crt's will blank. Normal operation is
generator, sky raster, and WXR raster signals to resumed automatically when the voltage rises
the proper display at the proper time with the above +18 V de.
multiplexer circuit.
When there are short power interruptions (a few
An ADI deflection multiplexer switches between seconds), there is no warmup time; the crt's show
symbol generator and sky raster signals. The HSI a blank state and turn on as soon as power is
multiplexer switches between symbol generator, restored.
WXR, and sky raster (sky raster is needed to pro-
duce a composite display on the EFD unit nor- 4.3.1.6 Relay Card A10
mally having an HSI). The video multiplexer
performs a similar function with the digital video Relay card A10 provides the relay switching for iso-
signals. lated backup drive output which allows each DPU to
drive four crt's with identical EADI and EHSI dis-
A multiplexer controller selects the proper multi- plays. Relay card A10 receives deflection and video
plexer inputs depending on the selected display signals from the DPU and the cross-side DPU. The
modes, the state of the symbol generator, and relays switch each signal to select the normal or
whether or not the weather and sky rasters are backup cross-side DPU outputs for the EADI and

Revised 30 August 1993 4-17

 theory of operation 523-0773944

EHSI. Relay card A10 consists of 16 relays, seven are 3. Activity Monitors
used to select the EADI drive source, eight are used
to select the EHSI drive source, and one selects the The digital buses being received by the I/O
EFIS to FCS data source. Grounding the DPU drive sections are monitored for activity. If no activ-
transfer line causes all 16 relays to select the cross- ity is detected for the appropriate period for
side drive source. that bus, a no data condition or a flag is set
depending on the bus.
4.3.1.7 DPU Monitor Operation 4. Synchro Monitor

a. Comparator and Master Warn All synchros are monitored for valid voltage
levels. If an invalid condition is detected, the
Comparator monitoring may be done in the DPU appropriate flag is set.
as well as MPU. Data compared includes pitch,
5. Checksum Monitor
roll, and heading. On-side data is read, converted
to digital form, and may be sent to each DPU. In The I/O and display processors periodically
5-tube configurations, the MPU may send cross- verify their program checksums. If an incor-
side data to the DPUs. Test words are transmit- rect checksum is calculated, the test words as
ted to ensure data path accuracy. Each of the described above are not generated resulting in
processors compares the data, and a comparator a DPU/MPU fail condition.
warn message will be displayed on the EFDs.
Additional outputs are supplied for use by exter- 6. RAM Monitor
nal annunciators. A master warn discrete is also
provided, as an output from each side of the DPU, During each power up sequence, the I/O and
which serves as an overall compare function display processors test their private RAM
annunciation. The master warn discrete can be storage and generate test words. If the test
reset independent of the individual comparator words are not generated, a DPU/MPU fail
outputs by momentarily grounding strap 22. The condition results.
comparator outputs are resettable using a sepa-
c. Self-Test Mode
rate input pin (strap 12). The comparator warn
outputs are latching and have built-in hysteresis In addition to the on-line monitors, the DPU can
to avoid troublesome intermittent warnings. The be placed in the self-test mode with the use of an
comparator function may be inhibited by ground- external airframe switch. When the test mode
ing straps 22 and 12 on the DPU· has been activated, the button and knobs on the
DCP-85( ) or DSP-85A select various submodes.
b. On-Line Monitoring The test functions include the following:

On-line monitoring of the EFIS system is accom 1. Confidence Test

plished in the following ways:
When the DPU test input is grounded, an
increment of 10 degrees is added to current
1. Keep-Alive Monitor
values of pitch and roll and 20 degrees is added
to heading. Positive increments are added to
Circuits are included with each of the system the pilot side data and negative increments to
processors to monitor a periodic signal gener¯ the copilot side. The word TEST in red charac-
ated by the processor. If the signal is not gen- ters is written across the EADI displays while
erated, the circuit will cause a flag condition
in the test process. The addition of 10- and 20-
and attempt to restart the processor degree increments is done in the I/O section
and causes the comparator logic in the display
2. Test Words processor to give roll, pitch, and heading mis-
compare messages.
A series of test words is transmitted between
EFIS subsystem components to verify integ- If the DPU test input is grounded for longer
rity of the data paths. Detection of a bad data than 4 seconds, the increments are removed
transmission will cause a flag condition. and all EADI and EHSI flags are brought into

Revised 30 August 1998 4-18

 theory of operation 523-0773944

view. This flag condition will remain until The crt is an in-line gun, shadow mask type which
either the ground is removed from the test uses a black matrix surrounding pigmented
line or the RA TST button on the DCP-85( ) or phosphors to achieve maximum contrast ratio.
DSP-85A is pushed to enter a sequence of
diagnostic and maintenance routines (DMRS). The multibandpass optical filter, which is not bonded
The test sequence is terminated and normal to the crt face, is matched to the phosphors in the
operation is resumed as soon as the ground is tube to achieve a high control ratio and improve sun-
removed from the test line. light readability.

Horizontal and vertical deflection amplifiers provide

2. Diagnostics/Maintenance Routines (DMRS) the drive currents to the deflection yoke windings to
magnetically position the electron beam on the
To enter the diagnostics/maintenance rou-
active phosphor area. The deflection yoke is designed
tines for each DPU, push and hold the on-side to be self-converging so that no additional deflection
EFIS TEST switch and push the radio altime- signal processing is required to correct for miscon-
ter test switch on the on-side DCP. Once the vergence. Beam positioning on the screen is done in
first page of the routine is displayed, the EFIS either of two techniques, stroke (or random position-
TEST switch may be released. Page sequenc- ing) and raster scanning. Raster scanning is used for
ing is done by repeatedly pushing the radio illuminating large portions of the screen such as that
altimeter test switch on the on-side DCP· required for weather radar and sky background.
Stroke-writing is used to produce sharp straight
(a) Multiport RAM -
presents the data being lines, alphanumeries and symbols.
received from and transmitted to aircraft
systems. Data is in digital form and will No in-house adjustments of the crt assembly are nee-
aid in new installation checkouts as well as essary because the unit arrives fully coverged and
LRU fault isolation. adjusted for maximum purity.
(b) RAM -
displays the contents of the dis-
play processor RAM. 4.3.2.2 Deflection Amplifiers
(c) Alignment Tests -

displays fixed data

patterns in fixed colors to provide verifica- The horizontal and vertical deflection amplifiers are
tion of symbol generator functions and to identical circuits designed entirely with discrete
allow for adjustment of display size, posi- components.
tion, and color. Program revision status is
also displayed. 4.3.2.3 Video Amplifiers
(d) FCS Diagnostics -
displays APS-85/86
There are three separate video amplifiers in each
diagnostics text if available.
EFD. These amplifiers are used to turn the electron
beams on and off at speeds up to 2 MHz by output-
4.3.2 EFD-85/86( ) Electronic Flight Display ting either of two discrete voltage levels. The voltage
(EFD) levels that turn the video guns on and off are depen-
dent on the voltage applied to grid 2. In our particu-
The EFD is used as an EADI or an EHSI. Refer to lar case, grid 2 is biased at 400 V de giving us video on
figure 4-13. (Von) 560 V de and video off (Voff) 2150 V de. The
intensities of each beam can be adjusted separately
by lowering Von.
4.3.2.1 CRT Assembly
4.3.2.4 Phosphor Protection Monitor
The integrated crt assembly consists of the following
components: It is necessary to protect the crt phosphor from being
damaged due to either deflection or video amplifier
e High-resolution multicolor tube failure. This is done by continuously monitoring the
e Self-converging deflection yoke deflection yoke return lines and video power supply
e Static convergence and purity magnets line. If a failure is detected in these lines, the
e Multibandpass optical filter phosphor protection monitor will signal the high-
e Potted anode and base connectors voltage supply to shut down.

Revised 30 August 1993 .4-19

 theory of operation 523-0773944

4.3.2.5 High-Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) • Roll angle

e Pitch angle
The HVPS provides three output voltages, 15 kV for e Heading
the anode, +2.5 to +4.5 kV de for focus, and +400 V de
for grid 2. The anode and focus voltage regulators are 2. DC Analog Inputs
independent of each other in order to ensure output
regulation. The oscillator section of the HVPS is con- e Radio altitude
tained in the anode section. This oscillator is also e Localizer or MLS azimuth deviation
used to drive the focus transformer primary. Having e Glideslope, MLS glide path, or VNAV
the anode and focus oscillations synchronized deviation
reduces emi. e Crosstrack deviation
e Roll steering command
4.3.3 MPU-85G/86G Multifunction Processor e Pitch steering command
Unit (MPU) e AOA/Fast/slow deviation
e ADF bearing
The MPU generates the necessary deflection and e Vertical deviation
video signals to draw the desired display on the mul-
tifunction display unit (MFD). The MPU contains an 3. DC Discrete Inputs
aircraft system I/O interface for two sets of sensors,
a display processor, a symbol generator to provide e To/From
stroke-writing, an ADI/sky raster generator and e Instrument flags
multiplexer circuit, and power supplies. Refer to fig- e Instrument modes
ure 4-14. • EFIS and I/O straps
e FCS modes
4.3.3.1 Input/Output (I/O) Interface Cards A7, e Marker beacon
A8, A9, and A10 e CAT II request
e Localizer mode
Analog I/O cards A7 and A9 and digital I/O cards A8 e VOR test
and A10 comprise the I/O interface section of the e DME hold
MPU. These cards receive analog and digital data e DG mode
from aircraft systems and other EFIS units, format e Master warn reset
the data, and provide that data to the display proces- e Comparator reset
sor. In addition to collecting data for display, the I/O e Accelerometer monitor
section also calculates new data based upon previ-
ously received data and outputs this information in 4. Serial Digital Inputs
an appropriate form to other equipments. There are
also a number of digital EFIS communication chan- e DME distance
nels which are supervised by the MPU I/O system. e Long-range navigation information
e DPU cross-side data
a. Inputs e DCP/DSP data
e Air data computer information
The I/O section is capable of receiving data from • Vertical navigation information
several different aircraft sources. In addition, e FCS modes
there are several intra-EFIS data sources which e Altitude/heading
must be accommodated. Altogether, five general • WXP data
data formats are received, digitized, filtered, and • REF airspeed
formatted by the I/O section as follows:
5. Audio Identification Input
1. AC Analog Inputs
e DME audio identification
e Desired track or track angle error + drift
angle 6. AC Discretes
e Drift angle/bearing to waypoint
• VOR/RNV bearing e Marker beacon (inner, middle, outer)

Revised 30 August 1998 4-20

 theory of operation 523-0773944

b. Outputs transferred from the port to the RAM, the ISR

signal is low. The controller reads an 8-bit
Along with receiving data, the MPU also provides address and 16-bit data from the input port
several outputs to other EFIS units and to other and performs a write sequence to the RAM.
aircraft systems. The I/O section provides these When data is transferred to the port from the
outputs in various formats. These formats and RAM, the OSR is low. In this case, the control-
data are listed as follows: ler reads the 8-bit address from the port,
reads data from the RAM, and latches the 16-
1. AC Analog
bit data in the output port. In either case,
e Heading error after the operation is complete, the polling
e Course datum pulse is removed from the port, which in turn
resets the service request signal and the poll-
2. DC Analog ing sequence continues. All transfers between
the MPRAM and the ports take place on a 24-
e Crosstrack deviation bit bus with 8 address bits and 16 data bits.

3. DC Discrete The MPRAM controller can support up to nine

ports. If fewer than nine are actually used, the
e Comparator warns controller can be strapped to ignore the
e Cat II lights unused port positions and there will be no loss
e Master warn of polling efficiency due to empty port slots.
e To/From
o Back localizer 2. MPRAM I/O Ports
e Modes/status/flags
e Overtemperature Interfacing the MPRAM to the other blocks of
e Decision height the I/O section is accomplished through a set
e Radio altimeter test of I/O ports. There are two input/output ports
and one input port. From this point on, all
4. Serial Digital references to MPRAM I/O ports will be made
with respect to the MPRAM. That is, an input
e DCP/DSP control
port is used to transfer data to the MPRAM
e FMS-90 WPT load
while an output port is used to transfer data
e Cross-side data
from the MPRAM.
e FCS data
Coordination of the data transfers to and from
c. Functional Blocks
the MPRAM is controlled by a simple polling
The I/O section is divided into four functional sequence. This polling sequence views each
blocks. These consist of a 256- by 16-bit multiport I/O port at two ports, one for input and one
RAM (MPRAM), a digital high-speed serial digi- for output; thus, where two I/O ports and one
tal transmitter/receiver to transmit MPU cross- input port are shown, the controller actually
side data and to receive DPU/MPU cross-side treats these as five separate ports.
data, an array of microprocessor based I/O
There are two types of I/O ports, the I/O port
processors (IOPs) and high-speed input and out-
connected to the display processor and the
.

put ports. These combine with the MPRAM to

multiplexed I/O port connected to the I/O
provide high-speed multiaccessing features.
processors. From the point of view of the
1. Multiport RAM (MPRAM) MPRAM, these two I/O ports are identical; in
actual operation they differ, since each inter-
At the center of the MPU I/O section is a 256- faces to different processor bus schemes.
by 16-bit high-speed RAM and multiaccess
controller. This RAM and controller are The 12-bit display processor interfaces to the
referred to as the multiport RAM or MPRAM. 8-bit address and 16-bit data bus used by the
I/O port and the MPRAM. To read data from
The 256- by 16-bit RAM is comprised of four RAM, the display processor performs a read
256- by 4-bit bipolar RAMs. When data is from external memory sequence. Decoding of

Revised 30 August 1993 4-23

 theory of operation 523-0773944

the processor control signals provides a signal Where the MPRAM controller coordinates
to the MPRAM output port that causes the high-speed 24-bit accesses with the MPRAM,
processor to hang up and signals the MPRAM this controller handles slower 8-bit accesses
of a pending output request. When the port is with a 24-bit port, which in turn is handled by
polled, the 12-bit address present at the the MPRAM controller.
processor address bus passes through the port
buffers and accesses data in the MPRAM. This The polling logic issues an active low MUX
data is then latched at the output port and the SERVICE QUERY (MSQ)polling pulse to
display processor is released. The read cycle is each IOP in turn. If a data transfer is to take
now completed by the processor. place, the IOP will place a low level on the
active low MUX SERVICE REQUEST (MSR)
To write data to the MPRAM, the display line. During the time that the MSQline to that
processor performs a write to external mem- IOP is low, the multiplexed I/O port-polling
ory sequence. Processor control line decoding logic recognizes the IOP's request, and control
provides a signal to the MPRAM, this time to of the multiplexed I/O port latches and 8-bit
the input port. The processor is signaled to data bus is given to the IOP. Each IOP has six
hang up and the MPRAM is notified of the latch control lines to control the MPRAM
pending input transfer. When the port is address, the I/O handshake logic, the most
polled, the processor's 8-bit address is passed significant 8 bits, and least significant 8 bits
to the MPRAM along with 12 bits of data. The of the input or output data. By using these
MPRAM controller performs the required control signals in the proper sequence, the
RAM write sequence and then releases the IOP can quickly perform data transfers to and
processor, completing the transfer. Due to a from the MPRAM.
decoding ambiguity at the display processor, a
superfluous output request is also generated When the appropriate data transfer is com-
but the data is ignored by the display proces- plete, the IOP removes the multiplexed service
sor. request signal and the service query polling
sequence continues.
In the cross-side data receiver and its input
port, serial data is received by a series of shift 3. I/O Processors
registers in a form directly compatible with
the input port. When a valid word is received, The I/O processors, or IOPs, are the main data
a data strobe is generated which transfers the collectors for the I/O section. They provide
address and data fields to the input port primarily for the acquisition of data in a vari-
latches. The same signal notifies the MPRAM ety of forms from the aircraft systems and
port of a pending input data transfer. When other EFD units. This data is digitized,
the MPRAM polls the port, the RAM write filtered, formatted and written into the
sequence is performed, which transfers the MPRAM to be used by the display processor.
data from the port to the RAM. In addition to inputting data, new information
must be calculated based upon previously
There is also an I/O port which interfaces the input data. These mathematical calculations
I/O processors to the MPRAM. Again, this are also performed by the IOPs. Along with
input/output port pair appears to be two sepa- inputting information and performing calcu-
rate ports, one for input and one for output, as lations, some data must be generated and then
viewed by the MPRAM. Not only does this I/O output to other aircraft units such as the
port provide for bidirectional data flow autopilot system. The output data may be
between the MPRAM and the I/O processors, required in a number of forms ranging from
but also it provides an important interface serial digital to ac analog. Supervision of this
between a series of 8-bit-wide buses and a 24- function is part of the IOP's responsibility.
bit-wide (16 data + 8 address) MPRAM sys-
tem. Since many I/O operations are to be per-
formed every second with data being handled
This multiplexed I/O port is actually a polling in many forms, the data is partitioned by data
controller very similar in operation to the type and assigned an individual microproces-
MPRAM controller described previously. sor to handle each data partition. The result is

Revised 30 August 1993 4-24

 theory of operation 523-0773944

a series of IOPs all working in parallel to pro- (d) Cross-Side Data Receiver
vide data to the MPRAM. Two things should
be noted. First, since there is a series of slower Another source of input data to the
parallel IOPs rather than a signal high-speed MPRAM is provided by a high-speed, syn-
IOP, the data gathering process is less suscep- chronous, serial digital receiver. The infor-
tible to a single processor failure. For exam- mation received here originates in the
ple, if a single IOP were to fail, only the data MPU and is transmitted to the DPU on a
partition associated with that IOP would be single 6-wire serial bus. The information
lost and at least partial data flow to and from on this bus consists of cross-side data
the MPRAM would continue. Second, since all which is received in its natural form by the
the IOPs and the display processor can com- MPU IOPs and is then passed to the DPU
municate with the same MPRAM, there exists in serial digital form. This data is referred
a channel of bidirectional communication to as cross-side data because it originates
between each of the IOPs and any other IOP, at the aircraft sensors on the opposite side
as well as with the display processor. of the aircraft from the side of the DPU
which receives the serial data.
The following three data format partitions are
used by the I/O section with a single IOP for The serial digital data is received as a
each partition: string of 24-bit words each separated by a
24-bit time gap. Each 24-bit word is made
(a) AC Analog/DC Analog/DC Discrete up of 8 address and 16 data bits.

This data is provided to the DPU primarily

e Synchro/digital
for use in data comparison and monitoring,
• Resolver/digital
and to provide display data to the DPU
e Digital/synchro
when the DCP-85( ) is in CONTROL
e Analog/digital
TRANSFER mode.
e Digital/analog
e Modes This high-speed receiver and its MPRAM
e Flags interface run totally without intervention
e Straps on the part of the display processor or any
of the I/O processors.
(b) Serial Digital
4.3.3.1.1 Analog Input/Output Description
e UART based
e Low-Speed Pro Line II The MPU receives and processes analog inputs and
e ARINC 6-wire outputs from no 1 side on analog I/O card A7. The
e Manchester MPU receives and processes analog inputs and out-
puts from no 2 side on analog I/O card A9. Refer to
(c) Audio Identification paragraph 4.3.1.1.1 for ac analog input/output
descriptions, paragraph 4.3.1.1.2 for de analog input/
e DME audio identification output descriptions, and paragraph 4.3.1.1.3 for dis-
crete input/output descriptions.
Each IOP also has an interface from the
microcomputer to the MPRAM's mul- 4.3.3.1.2 Serial Digital Input/Output
tiplexed I/O port. This interface consists of Description
an 8-bit bidirectional data bus buffer and
an 8-bit tristate buffer for the seven I/O The MPU receives and processes serial digital inputs
port control lines. and outputs from no 1 side on digital I/O card A8.
The MPU receives and processes serial digital inputs
The remainder of the circuit associated and outputs from no 2 side on digital I/O card A10.
with each IOP is concerned only with han- Refer to paragraph 4.3.1.1.4 for descriptions of the
dling the particular data partition commercial standard digital bus (CSDB),
assigned to that IOP. Manchester bus, and ARINC 6-wire buses.

Revised 30 August 1993 4-25

 theory of operation 523-0773944

4.3.3.2 Display Processor Card A4 characters and other symbols on the EFD dis-
plays. The character generator draws characters
Display processor card A4 receives input data from a stroke at a time, much like one would draw on
the aircraft system from the I/O cards through the paper (as opposed to a raster format). The char-
MPRAM. It controls the operation of the symbol gen- acter generator can draw variable sized and italic
erator and ADI/MUX cards in the MPU. The proces- alphanumeric characters, and can string letters
sor is a discrete 12-bit TTL machine. It is designed to together for printing words and labels.
be a fast real-time processor for crt display applica-
tions· The display processor card controls the character
generator by loading data from its F bus into the
Instructions are first loaded from a program ROM character generator stroke counter. This sets the
the instruction register which addresses a con-
.

mto
starting address of the data in the character
trol ROM. The control ROM in turn generates the ROM. Each location in the ROM provides 1 video
necessary control signals to sequence the processor
bit, 4 bits indicating the direction of each stroke,
through the execution of the instruction. Logical and and 3 bits defining the length of the stroke. The
arithmetic operations are performed on A and B reg- X-Y counter controller provides the necessary
isters by an ALU. Shift and rotates are done by a clock pulses to increment or decrement the X and
shift register. The multiplexers perform two fune-
Y position counters to form the characters. Each
tions. They can select either the program counter time a new piece of data is output from the char-
output (PC bus) or the shift register output (S bus) to acter ROM (corresponding to a new character
be loaded into an A or B register, or they can output
stroke) the stroke length is loaded into the stroke
data on the I/O bus (A bus) for use by peripheral length counter. As the stroke is drawn, the stroke
.

devices.
length counter increments until the end-of-stroke
decoder detects that the present stroke is done. It
The PC bus can directly access 16K of program ROM.
then outputs an end-of-stroke signal (EOS) which
The S bus is used to address a sine lookup table and
increments the stroke counter to address the next
scratch-pad RAM.
location in ROM, and the new stroke data is
Output of data to peripherals is accomplished by put- loaded into the stroke length counter. The end of
ting the data on the A bus and strobing the desired the character is detected by a dummy stroke of
output line from the I/O decoder. This enables the length zero. This stops the operation of the char-
peripherals onto the A bus and the data is loaded acter generator. Depending on which character
into an A or B register. Status flags can also be read load input was used to draw the character, the
directly into the processor from the status multi- position counter will either reset to the starting
plexer. In the case of input, output, and status lines, position or hold the present state to allow string-
all device decoding is done within the processor. ing several characters together.

A reset control circuit provides a power-on reset, as X and Y outputs are formed by d/a converters
well as an automatic processor reset, which resets that produce analog voltages corresponding to
the processor if improper operation is detected. the outputs of the X and Y position counters. The
character generator also outputs a character gen-
4.3.3.3 Symbol Generator Card A5 erator busy signal (CGB), which tells the display
processor when the character generator is active.
Symbol generator card A5 creates the signals
required to draw characters and lines on the EFDs· Character sizes are varied by changing the volt-
The symbol generator contains a character generator age reference.
to draw letters and symbols, a vector generator to
draw lines, a coordinate converter to rotate charac-
b. Vector Generator
ters and lines and a video circuit to turn the crt beam
on and off.
The vector generator serves two purposes; first, it
a. Character Generator positions the deflection so that characters can be
drawn anywhere on the screen; second, it controls
The character generator provides X and Y deflec- the video so that it can draw solid or dashed lines
tion and video outputs to draw alphanumeric as it moves along.

Revised 30 August 1993 M6

 theory of operation 523-0773944

When a new X or Y position is loaded into the sets of 144 lines are interleaved on every other
vector generator from the display processor, the refresh cycle. An analog integrator deflects the
comparator compares the new position with the beam along a raster line from left to right. A
present position. Depending on whether the new blanking pulse is generated to return the beam to
position is greater or less than the old position, the left with video off.
the position counter counts up or down at a fixed
rate until the present position equals the new To produce the angular rotation of the sky/
position. At this point, the vector is complete and ground horizon line, the X and Y raster voltages
the vector generator stops. The digital output are passed through a coordinate converter which
from the X and Y position counters are converted controls the video signals to generate a horizon
to an analog voltage at the output. The vector line with the proper angle. The display processor
generator sends a busy signal to the processor to controls the amount of rotation based on the air-
indicate when it is vectoring. Solid or dashed craft roll angle.
lines can also be selected by software.
The display processor provides control and data
c. Coordinate Converter for the sky/raster generator. Data is output to
the raster generator in two parts, roll angle and
To be able to draw characters and symbols on the pitch angle. The pitch angle is output last since
crt, the output of the character and vector gener- the strobe signal used to load the raster latches
ators could be added together and sent directly to also signals the raster logic to produce one raster
the displays. In the EFIS, however, there is also a
.

cycle. A raster busy signal is output to the display

need for rotating lines and symbols about an ori-
processor card for the duration of the raster
gin, such as in the case of the tick marks on the
cycle. A single raster cycle takes 8 milliseconds to
compass rose. The coordinate converter performs complete.
this function.

Given an initial coordinate (X,Y) the position of b. Multiplexer

this point after rotation through an angle 0 is:
The multiplexer, part of ADI/MUX card A6,
X' = Xeos0 -
Ysin0 + X org allows the MPU to drive two EFDs and an MFD
Y' = Yeos8 + Xsin0 + Y org with different deflection and video signals. The
MPU can put an ADI on one EFD, draw an HSI
Raster Generator on another EFD, and at the same time drive the
4.3.3.4 Sky/Ground and
Multiplexer Card A6 MFD. This is done by switching the symbol gener-
ator, sky raster, and WXR raster signals to the
proper display at the proper time with the multi-
a. Sky/Ground Raster Generator
plexer circuit.
The sky/ground raster generator, part of ADI/
MUX card A6, produces the deflection and video An ADI deflection multiplexer switches between
blanking signals needed for the sky/ground por- symbol generator and sky raster signals. The HSI
tion of the EADI display. The raster generator multiplexer switches between symbol generator,
receives control signals and angular data from WXR, and sky raster (sky raster is needed to pro-
display processor card A4. From this digital data, duce a composite display on the EFD unit nor-
analog deflection and digital blanking signals are mally having an HSI). The video multiplexer
generated to produce a full-screen cyan-colored performs a similar function with the digital video
sky and brown ground presentation. The vertical signals.
position of the horizon line is determined by the
aircraft pitch angle. In addition, the entire sky/ A multiplexer controller selects the proper multi-
ground raster is rotated by an amount equal to plexer inputs depending on the selected display
the aircraft roll angle. modes, the state of the symbol generator, and
whether or not the weather and sky rasters are
The raster is produced by deflecting the crt beam busy. Deflection and video signal drivers are used
along parallel lines perpendicular to the horizon on the multiplexer outputs to provide a low-impe-
line. A total of 288 raster lines composed of two dance source for driving the display units.

Revised 30 August 1993 4-27

 theory of operation 523-0773944

4.3.3.5 MPU Power Supply Card A3 b. On-Line Monitoring

Aircraft +28 V de is input to power supply card A3. On-line monitoring of the EFIS system is accom-
Card A3 provides +5, +15, and -15 V de to circuits piished in the following ways:
within the MPU. The circuit consists of a +28-V de to
+15-V de series-switching regulator that supplies 1. Keep-Alive Monitor
constant voltage to a push-pull inverter. The push-
pull inverter then outputs regulated and filtered +5, Circuits are included with each of the system
+15, and V de to cards A4 through All in the
-15
processors to monitor a periodic signal gener-
MPU. ated by the processor. If the signal is not gen-
erated, the circuit will cause a flag condition
The EFIS system will provide normal operation and attempt to restart the processor.
down to +18 V de. When the voltage drops below +18
V de, the crt's will blank. Normal operation is 2. Test Words
resumed automatically when the voltage rises above
+18 V de. A series of test words is transmitted between
EFIS subsystem components to verify integ-
When there are short power interruptions (a few rity of the data paths. Detection of a bad data
seconds), there is no warmup time; the crt's show a transmission will cause a flag condition.
blank state and turn on as soon as power is restored.
3. Activity Monitors
4.3.3.6 Trend Vector Card A11 .

The digital buses being received by the I/O

.

The trend vector card All receives longitudinal sections are monitored for activity. If no activ-
acceleration from an LAC-80 and IAS reference data ity is detected for the appropriate period for
from the no 1 and no 2 MSI-80F. The magenta trend that bus, a no data condition or a flag is set
vector bar displayed on the EADI is calculated on depending on the bus.
trend vector card All.
4. Synchro Monitor
4.3.3.7 MPU Monitor Operation
All synchros are monitored for valid voltage
a. Comparator and Master Warn levels. If an invalid condition is detected, the
appropriate flag is set.
Comparator monitoring may be done in the MPU
5. Checksum Momtor
.

as well as DPU. Data compared includes pitch,

roll, and heading. On-side data is read, converted
The I/O and display processors periodically
. .

to digital form, and may be sent to each DPU. In

.

5-tube configurations, the MPU may send cross- verify their program checksums. If an incor-
rect checksum is calculated, the test words as
side data to the DPUs. Test words are transmit-
described above are not generated, resulting
ted to ensure data path accuracy. Each of the
in a DU/MPU fail condition.
processors compares the data, and a comparator
warn message will be displayed on the EFDs.
6. RAM Monitor
Additional outputs are supplied for use by exter-
nal annunciators. A master warn discrete also is During each power up sequence, the I/O and
provided as an output from each side of the MPU, display processors test their private RAM
which serves as an overall compare function storage and generate test words. If the test
annunciation. The master warn discrete can be words are not generated, a DPU/MPU fail
reset independent of the individual comparator condition results.
outputs by momentarily grounding strap 22. The
comparator outputs are resettable using a sepa- c. Self-Test Mode
rate input pin (strap 12). The comparator warn
outputs are latching and have built-in hysteresis In addition to the on-line monitors, the MPU can
to avoid troublesome intermittent warnings. The be placed in the self-test mode with the use of an
comparator function may be inhibited by ground- external airframe switch. When the test mode
ing straps 22 and 12 on the MPU. has been activated, the button and knobs on the

Revised 30 August 1993 4-28

 theory of operation 523-0773944

DCP-85( ) or DSP-85A select various submodes. allow for adjustment of display size, posi-
The test functions include the following: tion, and color. Program revision status is
also displayed.
1. Confidence Test (e) FCS Diagnostics displays APS-85/86
-

diagnostics text if available.

When the MPU test input is grounded, an
increment of 10 degrees is added to current 4.3.4 MFD-85A Multifunction Display (MFD)
values of pitch and roll and 20 degrees is added
to heading. Positive increments are added to Refer to figure 4-15. The multifunction processing
the pilot side data and negative increments to unit (MPU) receives serial data from the MFD and
the copilot side. The word TEST in red charac- then transmits the necessary deflection and video
ters is written across the EADI and MFD dis- signals to define a picture on the MFD. The serial
plays while in the test process. The addition of data received by the MPU is a single page of data to
10- and 20-degree increments is done in the be displayed on the screen and the control mode
I/O section and causes the comparator logic in switch information. The control mode switch infor-
the display processor to give roll, pitch, and mation will be used by the MPU to determine the
heading miscompare messages· mode and thus transmit the necessary signals.

If the MPU test input is grounded for longer The MFD has control mode switches (pushbuttons)
than 4 seconds, the increments are removed on the left-hand side of the screen. The pushbuttons
and all EADI and EHSI flags are brought into are interlocking, and only one button may be pushed
view. This flag condition will remain until at a time. The exceptions to this are the RDR and
either the ground is removed from the test NAV mode buttons. These may be pushed for any
line or the RA TST button on the DCP-85( ) or of the two buttons.

I
combination
DSP-85A is pushed to enter a sequence of
diagnostic and maintenance routines (DMRS). The data is stored in RAM if the selected mode is
The test sequence is terminated and normal RMT. The RAM temporarily stores a page of data. If
operation is resumed as soon as the ground is power is turned off the page information is lost. The
removed from the test line. data received from the external source has a starting
address followed by a stream of data. The processor
2. Diagnostics/Maintenance Routines (DMRS) decodes the address and loads the data into the
RAM.
To enter the diagnostics/maintenance rou-
tines for the MPU, push and hold the onside Page data is stored in the EEPROM if the selected
EFIS TEST switch and push the radio altime- mode is PGE or EMR. The EEPROM retains the data
ter test switch on the onside DCP. Once the even if the power is turned off. One byte of serial
first page of the routine is displayed, the EFIS data is received each time a key is depressed on the
TEST switch may be released. Page sequenc- RDP-300. The processor stores the byte of data at the
ing is done by repeatedly pushing the radio appropriate address in the EEPROM. The EEPROM
altimeter test switch on the onside DCP· requires extensive control signals to input data.
Logic is used external to the processor to control the
(a) Multiport RAM -
presents the data being EEPROM.
received from and transmitted to aircraft
systems. Data is in digital form and will Independent of the two storage methods mentioned
aid in new installation checkouts as well as above, if the selected mode is RMT, PGE, or EMR,
LRU fault isolation- one page of data must be transmitted to the MPU.
(b) RAM displays the contents of the dis-
-

The data is transmitted serially, one byte at a time.

play processor RAM. The switch information will be transmitted in the
(c) MFD -
displays the contents of the RAM same manner.
that holds the MFD page data, joystick
data and status. This mode is not entered The MPU receives the data on the falling edge of
by a DPU. each clock. The address is used to define a location
(d) Alignment Tests -
displays fixed data within a RAM. Each byte of data must have an 8-bit
patterns in fixed colors to provide verifica- address associated with it to define a spot within the
tion of symbol generator functions and to RAM. One page worth of data requires 240 bytes to

Revised 30 August 1993 4-29

 theory of operation 523-0773944

fill the memory. The remaining 16 bytes of RAM are line. If a failure is detected in these lines, the
used for MFD switch storage. phosphor protection monitor will signal the high-
voltage supply to shut down.
The crt assembly and deflection amplifiers are the
same as the EFD.
4.3.4.3 High-Voltage Power Supply (HVPS)
A12
4.3.4.1 Video Amplifiers

There are three separate video amplifiers in each The HVPS provides three output voltages, 15 kV for
MFD. These amplifiers are used to turn the electron the anode, +2.5 to +4.5 kV de for focus, and +400 V de
beams on and off at speeds up to 2 MHz by output_ for grid 2. The anode and focus voltage regulators are
ting either of two discrete voltage levels. The voltage independent of each other in order to ensure output
regulation. The oscillator section of the HVPS is con-
levels that turn the video guns on and off are depen-
dent on the voltage applied to grid 2. Grid 2 is biased tained in the anode section. This oscillator is also
at +400 V de, giving us video on (Von) 560 V de and used to drive the focus transformer primary. Having
video off (Voff) 2150 V dc.
the anode and focus oscillations synchronized
reduces emi.
4.3.4.2 Phosphor Protection Monitor
4.3.4.4 Low-Voltage Power Supply Card A4
It is necessary to protect the crt phosphor from being
damaged due to either deflection or video amplifier Aircraft +28 V de is input to power supply card A4.
failure. This is done by continuously monitoring the Card A4 provides +5, ±11, ±25, and +28 V de to circuits
deflection yoke return lines and video power supply within the DPU.

Revised 30 August 1993 4-30

 theory of operation 523-0773944

ENCODER INTERCONNECT
CIRCUITCARD A2 CIRCUITCARD A I

TTG TIME-TO-GO
SPD SPEED
ET ELAPSED TIME
SWITCHES

CRS I COURSE DIRECTlONNO. I

DIRECTlON/
ENCODER MOVEMENT H
OURSE NO. 1
DETECTOR L)
I I
C
COURGE DIRECT NO. I
SS
OSCILLATOR
DIRECT

DIRECTION/ HEAD1NGDIRECTIONNO. I
ENCODER MOVEMENT H
HEADlNGNO. \
DETECTOR L)

HDG
I I
--
D1RECTION/ HEADING DIRECTION NO. 2
ENCODER MOVEMENT H)
DETECTOR L) HEADING NO. 2

ic
HDG SYNC
PUSH
HS - OSClLLATOR
NC

D1RECT10N/ COURSE DIRECTION NO. 2

CRS 2 --
ENCODER MOVEMENT H
COURSE NO. 2
DETECTOR CLOURCE

DIRECT NO. 2

PUSH
-

CRS
DIRECT

POWER + 28 V DC LIGHTING IN
CONVERTER
+ 5 V DC L1GHT1NGIN
LIGHTING |
SWITCH

WITCH t
TO ANNUNCIATORS
i
CIRC T CARD AND PANEL LAMPS
ET SWITC IEC TIMER CONTROL

NAV DTA CRS CTL I

SWITCHES COURSE CONTROL
SWITCHES
NAV DATA
.L _ _J
NOTES:
NOT USED ON CHP-85A.

o NOT USED ON CHP-85D

TP6-2422-Ol4
USED ONLY ON CHP-85D

CHP-85D Block Diagram

Figure 4-16

Revised 30 August 1993 4-33

 theory of operation 523-0773944

4.3.7 DCP-85E/G Display Control Panel (DCP) Power supply card A2 converts an input of +28 V de
into -28
V de, +15 V de, +5 V de, a power-up signal,
and a power-down signal. The power-up signal resets
4.3.7.1 General Description
the microprocessor on the Al card upon system ini-
tialization. The power-down signal notifies the Al
The primary function of the DCP is to provide pilot card of possible loss of power. This card also reads
control of the EFIS system. The DCP processor scans the strapping of the rear connector and sends this
the DCP and CHP front panel switches for pilot data in serial form to the Al card.
inputs. The switches provide pilot selection of NAV
sensors, display modes, decision height, course, and
heading values. Processing of inputs is done by deter- Interconnect card A3 contains rear connectors Jl
mining valid changes in switch status, and then exe-
and J2. The card provides interface between these
cuting a routine to process the new data. Along with
rear connectors and between the other cards in the
the switch inputs, the DCP processor also monitors
pCp
autopilot annunciators. After processing by the DCP,
input data is then transferred to the DPU/MPU dis-
play computers via a serial data link. Refer to figure
Rotary switch card A4 contains the rotary switches,
.

4-17
DH SET, mode (HSI-ARC-MAP), and SEL/RNG.
Connections with card A5 pass through A4.
4.3.7.2 Card Descriptions

Pushbutton switch card A5 contains the pushbutton

Inputs to processor card Al consist of parallel switch
position data, serial rear connector strapping data switches, RA TST, RDR, CRS XFR, CRS ACT, CRS
from the A2 card, and serial autopilot annunciator PRE, and BRG. Circuit card A5 also contains the
data from the A6 card. The parallel switch data is lighting for the pushbuttons.
serialized, combined with the serial strapping data,
and monitored by the microprocessor. When a switch
changes status, the microprocessor executes a rou- Autopilot annunciator data (24 inputs) from the
tine to process the new data before sending it to the flight control computer are input to auxiliary card
DPU. The course sensor, bearing sensor, selected A6. The parallel inputs are buffered and converted
course, selected heading, and decision height data into serial data for transmission to the DPU/MPU.
are stored in nonvolatile memory (EAROM) for Card A6 also has a LIGHTING switch labeled 5V or
power interruption protection. The microprocessor 28V. This switch selects panel lighting from one of
also monitors the autopilot annunciator data but two input sources, external +5 V de or internal +5 V
transfers it to the DPU without preprocessing, de generated from +28-V de input.

Revised 30 August 1998 4-84

 theory of operation 523-0773944

UXILIARY CARD A6 LIGHTING

TO PANEL LIGHTS
+5VDC
LIGHTING
POWER +28VDC 28V I
+28VDC (DCP-85EONLY) . TO45VDC
CONVERTER

DA ASR
AUTOPILOT
-

PARALLEL TO SERIAL -

DANNA
(N2C4NPORTS) BUFFERS (SHCFONVREERG
SERESRS)

+12 V TO +5 V DC

|
+12 V DC
+l5 V DC ---
LEVEL CONVERTER
REGULATOR
-U9F

ROCESSOR CARD Al

HDG/CRS
FROM DATA CONTROL
CHP HDG/CRS VIA
DIRECTION

DATA FROM DPU

I DPU/MPU

DATA FROM MPU

Il SELECT

DRIVE XFR

SERIAL GND
REAR PARALLEL TO STRAP DATA PARALLEL TO
CONNECTOR SERIAL CONVERTER DATA OUT TO
I SERIAL CONVERTER COMPUTER
SD AAPPING i MPU/DPU
(SHIFT REGISTERS) (SHIFT REGISTERS)

PWR SPLY - -

UP/DOWN

POWER -28

V DC
+28VDC SUPPLY +I5VDC
+5 VDC
ERA2SUPPLY

PUSH ADI/HS1
I BUTTON
SWITCHES I
ROTARY
SWITCHES
O INTENSITY

PUSHBUTTON ROTARY SWITCH P/O

TCH CARD A5 RD A4 NT PANEL
+5VDCOUT
TO CHP
INTERCONNECT CARD A
TP6-3051-014-2

DCP-85E/G Block Diagram

Figure 4-17

Revised 30 August 1993 4-35

 theory of operation 523-0773944

4.3.8 DSP-85A Display Select Panel (DSP) notifies the computer when the power supply is in its
normal operating range. The power-down signal
warns the computer of possible loss of power.
4.3.8.1 General Description
Shift registers on the A2 eard are not used.
The primary function of the DSP-85A is to provide
pilot control of the EFIS system. To accomplish this Interconnect card A3 contains rear connectors Jl
task, the DSP-85A processor scans DSP front panel and J2. The A3 card also provides interface between
switches for pilot inputs and monitors autopilot the other cards and the rear connectors.
annunciator signals. After processing by the DSP,
input data is then transferred to the DPU/MPU dis- Pushbutton switch card A4 contains the front panel
play computers via a serial data link. Refer to figure pushbutton switches along with pushbutton lighting.
4-18.

Auxiliary card A5 inputs consist of parallel switch

4.3.8.2 Card Descriptions position data from the DSP-85A front panel, data Ñ
from the course and heading optical encoders, paral-
lel autopilot annunciator data, and a mux select line
Processor card Al inputs consist of: parallel rear from the computer. The optical decoder converts the
connector strapping data, course and heading data, digital pulses from the optical encoder into two sig-
serial switch position data from auxiliary card A5, nals; one indicates the direction of rotation while the
and serial autopilot annunciator data from auxiliary other shows the amount of rotation. The auxiliary
card A5. Shift registers on the card Al convert the card also contains shift registers that convert the
parallel rear connector strapping data into serial parallel autopilot annunciator data and front switch
information supplied to the computer. The computer position information into serial data for the com-
monitors the serial switch position data along with puter. The parallel autopilot annunciator data uses
the course and heading data. When a switch changes 12-V logic and the shift registers and multiplexer are
status, the computer executes a routine to process powered by +12 V de. The serial switch data uses 5-V
the new data before transmitting it. The computer logic and therefore is converted to 12-V logic before
also monitors the autopilot annunciator data but being applied to the multiplexer. The mux select line
sends it out without preprocessing. from the computer also is converted into 12-V logic
before being applied to the multiplexer. The mux
select line from the computer selects to read either
Power supply card A2 converts an input of 28 V de the autopilot annunciator data or switch position
into -28 V de, +15 V de, +5 V de, a power-up signal, data. The selected data is converted from 12-V levels
and a power-down signal. The power-up signal to 5-V logic before being applied to the computer.

Revised 30 August 1993 4-36

 theory of operation 523-0773944

DSP-85 ( )
HBUTTON SWITCH CARD A4

DH SET PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES

FORMAT CRS DIRECT

CRS OPTICAL --

ENCODER
RNG CRS SENSOR

HDG OPTICAL -

HDG SYNC BRG ENCODER

DISCRETE SW INFO

XILIARY CARD A5
+l5V DC
" ¯~ -

\RSSTOERS)
NOAUNCLOATOR COCDAELR
BUFFERS
REG LATOR
(24 INPUTS)

-
+5 V

PARALLEL TO
SERIAL +5 V TO + 12 V
REEG MULTIPLEXER LSEHFELER
SH T TERS)

MUX

+|2 V TO +5 V
LEVEL
CONVERTER

DRIVE XFR

AA
DDTAAFRR
00MMDM
PUU MPS DC
TU
E

PROCESSOR CARD Al i
SERIAL GND
PARALLEL TO STRAP DATA
REAR CONNECTOR r SERIAL
STRAPPING DATA i CONVERTER COMPUTER DATA OUT TO
,
(SHlFT REGISTERS) MPU/DPU

ER SUPPLY CARD A2
PARALLEL TO
SERIAL
CONVERTER
(SHIFT REGlSTERS)
(NOT USED)
POWER SUPPLY
¡ UP/DOWN
---+
+ 15 VDC
POWER ---- -28
V DC
+ 28 V DC :
SUPPLY + 5 V DC
15VDC
OUT

TP6-3052-Ol4-2

DSP-85A Block Diagram

Figure 4-18

Revised 30 August 1993 4-37

 theory of operation 523-0773944

4.3.9 RDP-300 Remote Data Programmer computer switches the data strobe line low. The data
(RDP) is then converted from parallel to serial and sent out
through the serial out line. The serial output is buf-
Refer to figure 4-19. Integrated circuit Ul, an 8748 fered by two cascaded inverts of U3. The transmis-
computer, scans the keyboard switch matrix to find a sion rate is controlled by the transmitter clock (TCP)
pushed key. When a pushed key is found, the com- line. This line operates at 16 times the serial data
puter determines the code to be sent and places it on rate. The transmitter clock line operates at 360 kHz
the data bus. The computer also determines if the causing serial data to be sent at 22.5 kHz.
select key is one of the keys with automatic repeat.
This allows certain keys (PR, PF, LR, LF, BS, SP,
BLK, period and dash) to repeat by holding the key The transmitter clock for the UART comes from a
down instead of repeated pushings. monostable multivibrator, triggered by the 8748
computer address latch enable (ALE) line. The
Integrated circuit U2 is a universal asynchronous monostable multivibrator is used to generate the
receiver-transmitter or UART. Information on the necessary square-wave outut to operate the UART
data bus is transferred to the UART when the properly.

COLUMNS
(5 LINES)

KEYBOARD 8748 AY-3-iOl5

MICROPROCESSOR UART
UI
U2

DBO Del 74LSO4 BUFFER

U3A U3B
DATA BUS SERIAL OUT
SO TOPI
ROWS
(8 LINES) (8 LINES)
DB7 DB8
22.5 kHz DATA

DATA STROBË -
360 kHz PULSES

ALE TCP
74LSI23
ONE-SHOT
U4

TP6-0907-Ot3

RDP-300 Block Diagram

Figure 4-19

Revised 30 August 1993 4-88

 theory of operation 523-0773944

4.3.10 CEU-85( ) Checklist Entry Unit (CEU) a 12.5-kilobaud rate. Connecting CEU-85( ) remote
data plug to the MFD-85( ) leaves CEU-85( ) J1
Refer to figure 4-20 for a detailed block diagram of open. Thus, the U2 T1 input is pulled to +5 V de. With
the CEU-85( ). CEU-85( ) Checklist Entry Unit T1 at +5 V de, the U2s internal software enables a
operation is controlled by an 8748 microcomputer U2· 22.5-kilobaud data rate. Also, transistor Q1 is for-
U2 contains the central processing unit and 1K × 8 ward biased by the logic 0 reset signal. The resulting
words of ROM program memory and 64 words of current flow through Q1applies a logic 1 to the EEP-
RAM data memory required to have a functional ROMs WR inputs, preventing erroneous data write
microcomputer. The CEU-85( ) mode of operation is signals that could accidentally change the EEPROM
determined by the logic status of U2 T1 input. Appli- data.
cation of power to the CEU-85( ) from the MFD-
85( ) (via the data jack) enables U1A to apply a logic
0 reset signal to U2 internal master reset (MR) input. Microcomputer U2 stores checklist data in three 8K ×
The reset signal causes the U2 internal operation 8 EEPROMs: U4, U5, and U6. The checklist address
program to examine the logic status of the T1 input. location data received from the computer is 16 bits
Connecting a Pro Line II Interface Card connector J2 long. Bits 1 through 13 provide the physical memory
to CEU-85( ) Jl generates a logic 0 (ground)at the address locations of each EEPROM. Bits 14 and 15
T1 input. With T1 grounded, U2s internal operating are used as logic control signals by 3-line to 8-line
software enables it to receive serial data at the T0 decoder U3. The signals are decoded by U3 to enable
input and transmit serial data from the P27 port a specific EEPROM during the data read or write
output. The serial data is received and transmitted at cycle.
+5 DC

IK
UlC
REMOTE
+5 DC DATA
JACK

IOK

+5VDC

UID DATA OUT

(JI-4/l7)
+5 DC L

+5VDC
IOK U2

DATA IN
(Jl-I /r4)
+5 V DC
L
10K 04 US U6
IOK
A/DO. EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM
T A/D7 L-
Mí?Pf6PP.SWR OE -
OE -
OE -

A AO- -\ AO- A AO-

LOAD(GND) Al2 Al2 Al2
(JI-II)

DO- DO- ?-- DO-

07 D7 % D7 \-

WE CE WE CE WE CE

I I I I I I
100

IK I

+5vDC
U3
+ 5 v DC DECODER
CR2 A O 3

C
I2OK

CRI -390K
UIA
E 7)
+

4.7 UF l50K

TP6-4534-OI4- I

I CEU-85( ) Detailed Block Diagram

Figure 4-20

Revised 30 August 1998 4-89

 theory of operation 523-0773944

4.3.11 FMM-85 Fan Motor Monitor (FMM) The FMM-85 (-001)is designed to indicate a fan
underspeed condition when the fan motor rpm drops
The purpose of the FMM is to control an external under approximately 1818 rpm, which is a fan sensor
annunciator which indicates if the fan cooling the output of 30 Hz. The 30-Hz signal is sensed at J1-3
EFIS equipment is operating properly. The FMM-85 and applied to a retriggerable monostable mul-
(-001)mounts on the side of the cooling fan. The tivibrator. The trip level is set by the RC circuit of R4
FMM-85 (-002)is attached to the UMT-14B Universal and C5 tied to the trigger input of monostable mul-
Mount blower plenum with an adapter bracket. Refer tivibrator U2. The RC time constant of this monost-
to figure 4-21 for the FMM-85 (-001)and to figure 4- able multivibrator is not retriggered before its
22 for the FMM-85 (-002)schematic diagrams. timeout period and its Q output switches to logic 0.
Thus NAND gate U1B is not able to retrigger
Note multivibrator U2B. The timeout period of U2B is
approximately 5 seconds. This wait period ensures
The FMM-85 (-001)is compatible with the that fan motor speed is staying below 1818 rpm and
following tube-axial fan: Rotron part num- that an aircraft power surge did not cause fan motor
ber 032105 (CPN 009-1965-030). The FMM- speed to be reduced. After the 5-second wait, relay
85 (-002)is compatible with the following Kl is deenergized and applies a ground to light a fan
tube-axial fan: Rotron part number 504558 failure annunciator. FMM-85 (-002)operation is
(CPN 009-0271-010). identical to FMM-85 (-001) operation except U2A is
set to detect fan motor rpm of less than 3075 rpm
The fan motor provides a fan sensor signal to FMM- which is a fan sensor signal of approximately 134 Hz.
85 J1-3. The fan sensor signal is a positive going sig- U2A timeout wait is set to 3.74 ms, one-half of 134 Hz
nal with frequency and amplitude being directly pro- period.
portional to the fan motor rpm. The FMM-85 (-001)is
designed to operate with Rotron pn 032105 tube-axial A self-test signal (ground)is applied to J1-4 to simu-
fan that has a nominal speed of 3150 rpm which late the loss of a fan motor. This ground energizes
translates to a fan sensor output of approximately 55 relay K2 which opens the fan sensor circuit. In
Hz. The FMM-85 (-002)is designed to operate with a approximately five seconds the RC circuit of R5 and
Rotron pn 504558 tube-axial fan that has a nominal C6 times out and turns off Q2.This causes relay Kl
speed of 19300 rpm, which translates to a fan sensor to deenergize which lights an external annunciator
output of approximately 780 Hz. to indicate a fan motor failure.

Revised 30 August 1993 4-40

Collins EFIS-85B(2/12)
and EFIS-86B(2/12) Rockwell
Intemational
Electronic Flight
Instrument Systems maintenance
Collins General Aviation Division

Printed in USA e523-0773945-003118

3rd Edition, 30 August 1993

table of contents

Paragraph Page

5.1 General.................. ............

5-1

5.2 Maintenance Schedule .................. ............

5-1

5.2.1 EFIS Brightness Test/Measurements................... ............

5-1
5.2.2 Routine CRT Cleaning ................. .............
5-2

5.3 Test Equipment and Power Requirements ................. .............

5-3

5.3.1 Test Equipment .................. ..............

5-3
5.3.2 Power Requirements .................. .............
5-3

5.4 Testing/Troubleshooting ................. .............

5-3

5.4.1 Final Performance (Acceptance) Test ................. ............

5-3

5.5 BITS Mode Self-Test Guide.................. ...............

5-32

5.5.1 Introduction .................. ..............

5-32
5.5.2 BITS Mode.................. ...............
5-32
5.5.2.1 Enter BITS Mode.................. ..............
5-32
5.5.2.2 Exit BITS Mode ................. ................
5-33

NOTICE: This section replaces second edition dated 6 April 1989.

 List of Effective Pages *The asterisk indicates pages changed, added, or deleted by the current change.

Page No Issue

*Title............................. 30 Aug 93
*List of Effective Pages ......... 30 Aug 93
*5-1
thru 5-64....................30 Aug 93
*5-65
thru 5-71 Added ........... 30 Aug 93
*5-72
Blank Added............... 30 Aug 93

I
RETAIN THIS RECORD IN THE FRONT OF MANUAL.
Record of Revisions ON RECEIPT OF REVISIONS, INSERT REVISED PAGES IN THE MANUAL,
AND ENTER DATE INSERTED AND INITIALS.

REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER

NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED

1st Ed 15 Sep 86 None

2nd Ed 6 Apr 89 None

3rd Ed 30 Aug 93 SIL 1-90

 section
maintenance

5.1 GENERAL a. Turn on power to the EFIS system. Wait 15 min-

utes for the EFIS displays to stabilize.
This section provides procedures for testing and b. Select and set up the display to be checked.
troubleshooting the EFIS-85B(2/12) and EFIS-
86B(2/12) Electronic Flight Instrument Systems. EFD Display Setup
The test procedures provide fault isolation down to a
unit while the system is installed in the aircraft. Push and hold the pilot's or copilot's EFIS TEST
Faulty units can then be tested and repaired by using button and push the RA button on the DCP (or
the bench procedures given in the associated unit DH SET button on the DSP) for the same side, to
instruction books. turn on the EFIS test mode for the EFDs. Release
the EFIS TEST button. Push the RA button (or
DH SET) twice to select the calibration mode.
5.2 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The calibration mode shows page numbers in
white in the upper right corner of the display.
Maintenance requirements are ON CONDITION. No
Turn the DH SET knob on the DCP (or DSP) to
periodic maintenance is required on EFIS units.
select page 15. The display shows either an all-
.

EFIS units should not be removed from the aircraft

brown or all-red screen. Older EFIS systems
unless repair is required.
show the brown display and newer EFIS systems
show the red display.
5.2.1 EFIS Brightness Test/Measurements
MFD Display Setup
Perform a brightness test on each EFD-85/86 (EADI
and EHSI) and the MFD-85( ) at approximately 5000 Push and hold the pilot's EFIS TEST button and
hours of aircraft operation since the last brightness push the copilot's RA button on the DCP (or DH
test, or anytime the display brightness seems ques- SET button on the DSP) to turn on the EFIS test
tionable. All exchange and repaired units have a mode for the MFD. Release the EFIS TEST but-
brightness test routinely performed at the service ton. Push the RA button (or DH SET) three times
center. to select the calibration mode. The calibration
mode shows page numbers in white in the upper
Measure the brightness of each EFIS crt using the right corner of the display. Turn the DH SET
Minolta LS-100 Luminance Meter 1° equipped with knob on the DCP (or DSP) to select page 15. The
the Minolta 1804-'741 close-up lens, or the Minolta display shows either an all-brown or all-red
Luminance Meter 1° equipped with the Minolta 6031- screen. Older EFIS systems show the brown dis-
530 close-up lens. The (new) Minolta LS-100 Lumi- play and newer EFIS systems show the red dis-
nance Meter 1° is available for purchase at Minolta play.
camera dealers. c. Set the display brightness controls for maximum
crt brightness.
Note
Note
The aircraft cockpit must be in low ambient
light, such as inside a hangar, to perform Perform step d (below) if using the Minolta
the EFIS brightness measurements. To per- LS-100 Luminance meter. Otherwise skip to
form the measurement while the aircraft is step e.
on the ramp in sunlight, the cockpit win-
dows must be covered with an opaque cloth d. Set up the Minolta LS-100 Luminance meter as
to lower the ambient light level. follows.

Revised 30 August 1993 5-1

 maintenance 523-0773945

1. With the LS-100 Luminance meter power Note

turned off, set the following parameters:
Perform the brightness measurement with
the meter perpendicular to the EFIS display
PARAMETER VALUE surface within ±15 degrees. If this angle is
increased, the luminance measurements
will not be accurate.
RESPONSE SLOW
CALIBRATION VARI f. To exit the EFIS test mode, push and hold the RA
MEASURING MODE ABS button on the DCP (or DH SET knob on the DSP)
for approximately two seconds. The EFIS dis-
2. Turn on the meter power. plays return to normal operation. Reset the dis-
3. The meter display should show C.C.F. on the play brightness controls to normal crt brightness.
left side and fL on the right side. If ed/m g. Record the results of the brightness test in the
shows the right side, remove the battery cover aircraft logbook or other permanent aircraft
from the top of the meter and push the switch maintenance record.
to fL (footlambert). Replace the battery cover.
4. If PEAK shows on the display, turn it off as 5.2.2 Routine CRT Cleaning
follows: Push and hold the F button and push
the PEAK/CONT button. CAL shows on the The EFIS-85B (2/12) and EFIS-86B (2/12) contain
several panel-mounted units which have glass (crt)
display while the meter is changing.
5. If LUMI shows on the display, turn it off as displays. These displays should be routinely cleaned.
follows: Push the F button and the C.C.F./ Use the cleaning materials (or equivalent substi-
LUMI button at the same time. Repeat until tutes) as follows:
(only) C.C.F shows on the left side of the dis- -

Window-glass cleaner.
play.
6. Enter a color-correction factor into the lumi- Lens tissue or a soft low-lint cloth.
nance meter. If the display has an all-brown
screen, the factor is 1.246. If the display has an Caution
all-red screen, the factor is 1.052. Enter this
factor as follows: Push the C.C.F./LUMI but- Do not use solvent to clean optic filter (face)
ton to show the stored color-correction factor· of crt. The glass is coated with an antireflec-
To change this value, push the C.C.F./LUMI tive coating that may be damaged using sol-
button until the arrow points at the digit to be vents.
changed. Push and hold the F button, then
push the UP arrow to change this digit· Caution
Repeat until each digit is set to the correct
value. To save the color-corrected factor in the Use care at all times when cleaning the crt
meter's memory, push and hold the F button to prevent damage to the antireflective
and switch the CALIBRATION button from coating. Make sure that cleaning tissue is
VARI to PRESET and then back to VARI. The flat and not creased when used. Doing this
display then shows CAL and then C.C.F. and reduces pressure points that could cause
streaking or damage to the crt filter coat-
e. At 1.5 to 2 feet from the face of the EFIS display ing.
to be tested, direct the luminance meter lens
toward the center of the display. Adjust the lumi- Make sure that a cleaning cloth (if used) is
nance meter focus or the measurement distance soft and practically lint free. Some cloth
for a clear image of the all-brown or all-red dis- materials could damage the crt filter coat-
play. Push and hold trigger for luminance read- ing.
ing. The luminance reading must be at least 9.0
footlambert for the all-brown screen, or at least a. Clean dust and light fingerprints from the crt
5.0 footlambert for the all-red screen. If the read- face as follows. Wipe the crt face with a nonabra-
ing is below the minimum brightness value, sive, lint-free lens tissue that is available in most
replace the EFD/MFD. photographic stores.

Revised 80 August 1993 5-2

 maintenance 523-0773945

b. Remove oily fingerprints or any residue from the this chart before performing the test procedures in
ert face as follows. Apply glass cleaner to the lens either table 5-2 or table 5-3.
tissue (or to the soft cloth); do not apply the liquid
directly to the crt. This prevents the liquid from 5.4.1 Final Performance (Acceptance) Test
running between the crt and bezel. Use several
layers of the tissue as necessary for strength. Rub
the wet tissue around the display face to remove The final performance test (or acceptance test) pro-
cedures in table 5-2 are used to help isolate a defee-
any residue or fingerprints. After display face is
clean, use a clean dry tissue to remove excess liq-
tive unit in the EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12) system. The
uid and any streaks.
final performance test (or acceptance test) proce-
dures in table 5-3 are used to help isolate a defective
unit in the EFIS-85B(2)/86B(2) system. The tests are
5.3 TEST EQUIPMENT AND POWER
written around a 5-tube system. The final perform-
REQUIREMENTS
ance test (or acceptance test) for any EFIS unit con-
sists of operating the unit and verifying that it works
5.3.1 Test Equipment
before installing it in an aircraft. The best way to
Table 5-1 lists the test equipment required to per- check an EFIS unit is to connect it to a systems rig
form the EFIS test procedures. Equivalent test that is wired like the customer's aircraft, then oper-
equipment can be substituted for that listed. ating the unit the way it should function for that
installation. If an entire shipset of equipment is
available, test the unit according to table 5-2 or table
5.3.2 Power Requirements 5-3.
All power required to perform the system tests and
troubleshooting is provided by the aircraft in which Note
the system is installed.
The following test procedures assume that
the aircraft interconnect wiring has been
verified and is correct.
Table 5-1. Test Equipment Required.
Some general hints and reminders are provided
EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS DESIRED below.

Collins 972Q-4 Must have provisions for testing the a. When more than one EADI and EHSI is con-
VOR/ILS/MB localizer signal to 0.155 DDM and the nected to the system, they can be used to cross-
ramp test set glideslope signal to 0.175 DDM. These check the outputs of the DPU-85G Display
(CPN 622- modulation levels produce 2-dot indications
2211-002) or on localizer and glideslope deviation
Processor Unit (DPU). If both EADIs or EHSIs
equivalent displays. connected to the system give the same erroneous
indication, the DPU is probably at fault. How-
Collins CTS-9 The CTS-9 is compatible with Thinline ever, if only one indicator gives an erroneous indi-
Breakout Box full-height 160-pin connectors cation, that particular indicator is probably
Test Set Recommended for any EFIS system switch-
defective. Each aircraft has reversionary
(CPN 622- troubleshooting that requires the use of a . .

6720-001) breakout box. ing wired into the interconnect. Refer to the
Flight Manual Supplement for the aircraft in
Multimeter Fluke 8010A, 3-½ digit accuracy. Measure question. Use the reversionary and cross-switch-
ac and de voltages ing information found there to help isolate a fault
Oscilloscope Tektronix 455, 2235, 2236, de to 10 MHz.
to either the display (EFD, MFD) or to the driv-
.

Meaure serial logic levels. ing source (DPU, MPU).

b. Use the block diagrams (figures 5-2 through 5-7)
found at the end of this section to aid in under-
5.4 TESTING/TROUBLESHOOTING standing system operation.
c. A failed bus may be caused by the transmitting
Aircraft down time may be reduced if an inoperative LRU, the receiving LRU, or by a loose wire in a
unit is quickly identified. An EFIS quick-check mating connector contact. Check a suspect bus for
troubleshooting chart is provided in figure 5-1. Use continuity, 2-wire activity, and isolation from

Revised 30 August 1993 5-3

 maintenance 523-0773945

ground potential. Typical bus levels (in V de) are d. Refer to the system interconnect, system
provided below. schematics, and mating connector pin assign-
ments provided in the installation section of this
CSDB manual. These diagrams show pin numbers and
interconnections for each LRU, and are designed
BUS LEVEL HI LO
to be a troubleshooting aid.
e. Refer to the operation section of this manual to
A to B +5 V de -5
V de verify proper control action and display response.
This section is not intended for the pilot, but is
A to GND +5 V de 0 V de meant to be used during flight-line trouble-
shooting.
B to GND 0 V de +5 V de

EFIS
'~
INOP

CAUTION -

REMOVE ALL POWER TO UNITS CHECK ALL EFIS

AND/OR EQUIPMENT MOUNTS CIRCUIT BREAKERS
BEFORE INSTALLING OR REMOVING AND FUSES
THEM.

DEOFDIS
NO
ALL
LIGHT

YES

DOES BOTH ONE

NO MFD OR BOTH
LIGHT BLANK

IS YES ONE
YEE
XDTA FLAGGED
ON EFD'
DOES GO TO MPU
NO NO DRIVE
DCP FUNCTIO 3
PROPERLY I
GO TO
MPU DRIVE
YES
SOT
NO L
EFD'S DOES IS YES
NO SELECT RADAR NO
DISPLAY XP FUNCTIO DCP FLAGGED
PROPERLY MODE ON HSI PROPERLY ON EF YES

YES YES NO
SWAP
EFD'S
REPLACE Ì LOOK FOR "FAIL" OR
MFD FLAGGED ANNUNCIATIONS
AND TAKE APPROPRIATE

OD NO ,

YES
WT POSITON STILL

YES YES
REPLACE NO
DCP
REPLACE REPLACE REPLACE
MU WP BLANK EFD
REPDLACE

TP6-3488-024 1

EFIS Quick-Check Troubleshooting Chart

Figure 5-1

Revised 30 August 1993 5-4

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-2. EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures.

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

1.0 POWER UP

Connect the aircraft battery, apply power to the EFIS system, and turn on the air Verify that EADI and EHSI
blowers. Apply power to any other systems that supply data to the EFIS system (such displays are normal. Replace any
as flight control system, radio altimeter system, navigation receivers, DME receivers, blown fuses and reset any circuit
glideslope receivers, and AHRS). breakers that tripped.

1.1 Turn on the MFD-85A by pushing the PWR button on the MFD front panel. Verify that a picture appears on
the MFD.

Note

The EADI attitude and EHSI/MFD heading displays will be random but should be steady.

2.0 DCP-85/CHP-85 OPERATION

Note

Unless otherwise specified, the steps in this section refer to one side only but should be completed on each side.

2.1 Intensity

Adjust DCP DIM intensity control. Verify that it controls the

brightness of the EADI and
EHSI.

2.2 Decision Height

2.2.1 Adjust DCP-85 DH SET knob.

2.2.2 Verify that it controls the DH display in lower right corner of EADI. First turn knob Each click of knob should change
slowly and observe displayed DH; then turn knob fast. displayed DH by 1 foot when
turned slowly and by larger steps
when turned fast.

2.2.3 Verify DH SET range is 0 to 999 feet. DH flashes at 0 foot.

2.3 HSI Mode

I
2.3.1 Set DCP mode switch to HSI position. Verify that a conventional
compass rose shows on EHSI.

2.3.2 Set DCP mode switch to ARC position. Verify that an expanded compass
display shows on EHSI.

Revised 30 August 1993 5-5

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-2. EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures (Cont).

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

to MAP position. Set WXP-85( )/-850( ) to

I
2.3.3 Select RDR on DCP. Set DCP mode switch Verify that the expanded
TEST. compass display remains and the
radar test pattern appears.
Message in lower left on EHSI
reads same as radar mode
selected.

2.3.4 Return DCP mode switch to HSI position.

Warning

The area within the scan are and within 5 meters (15 feet) of an operating weather radar system constitutes a
hazardous area. Do not operate the system in any mode other than standby (STBY) or test (TST) when the
antenna might scan over personnel within that range. Never turn the transmitter on while in a hangar. FAA
Advisory Circular 20-68B provides additional details regarding the radiation hazards associated with ground
operations of airborne weather radar.

2.4 Active Course Selection

2.4.1 Initial Setup

a. If a preset course annunciator is displayed on EHSI, push the DCP CRS PRE
button twice.

b. If a bearing source annunciator is displayed on EHSI, push the DCP BRG button
twice.

2.4.2 Active Course Menu

a. Verify that an active green course annunciator is displayed at left of center on

EHSI.

b. Push DCP CRS ACT button and verify on EHSI. The active course annunciator
changes to white inside a
flashing white box.

c. Rotate the DCP SEL knob. Verify four possible choices (VOR 1, VOR 2, LRN 1, and VOR 1, VOR 2, LRN 1, and LRN
| LRN 2) appear annunciated in white on EHSI. 2 appear in white (flashing)
boxes (if system is strapped for
all sources).

d. Select VOR 1 in the box.

e. Push DCP CRS ACT button. Verify annunciation

I
on EHSI. VOR 1 flashing white box is
deleted and VOR 1 annunciator
changes to steady green.

Revised 30 August 1993 5-6

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-2. EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures (Cont).

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

2.4.3 Preset Course Menu

a. Push DCP CRS PRE button. Verify on EHSI display. A white preset course

I annunicator inside a flashing

white box appears at lower left
side of EHSI.

b. Rotate DCP SEL knob. Verify that up to four possible choices (VOR 1, VOR 2, LRN VOR 1, VOR 2, LRN 1, and LRN
Ë 1, and LRN 2) appear annunciated in white on EHSI. 2 appear in a flashing white box.

c. Select VOR 2 in the box.

I d. Push DCP CRS PRE button. Verify annunciation

e. Verify new course arrow that appears on EHSI.

on EHSI. The VOR 2 flashing white box is
deleted and VOR 2 annunciator
appears in steady cyan.

A dashed cyan course arrow

appears on EHSI.

f. Push DCP CRS PRE button twice. The cyan course arrow and its
annunciator are blanked.

g. Push the CRS PRE button twice. The course arrow returns.

2.4.4 Course Selection (Pilot and Copilot)

a. Push CHP-85 CRS CTL button repeatedly. Verify that the knob-shaped
symbol alternates and points to
the selected active course
annunciator.

b. Place the cursor on the active course annunciator. Rotate CHP-85 CRS knob. Verify that the green course
arrow on the EHSI rotates and
that the EHSI digital course
counter tracks the arrow.

c. Push CHP-85 CRS CTL button to position the cursor to the preset annunciator.

d. Rotate the CHP-85 CRS knob. Verify that the dashed cyan
preset course arrow rotates.

e. Push CRS DIRECT button. Verify course arrow syncS to

north or direct to VOR station if
present and is valid.

Revised 30 August 1993 5-'7

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-2. EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures (Cont).

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

2.4.5 Course Transfer

a. Set the course arrows so they are not superimposed and note their location and
annunciations.

b. Push DCP-85 CRS XFR button. Verify that: 1. Preset course arrow and
annunciator are deleted.

2. Active course arrow rotates to

the position previously held
by the preset arrow.

3. Active course annunciator is

changed to the source that
had been in preset.

c. Push DCP-85 CRS PRE button twice. Verify that preset course arrow appears in
I location previously held by the active arrow and the preset annunciator is set to
the previously active source.
Verify annunicator is steady
cyan after second push.

d. Push DCP-85 CRS PRE button twice to delete the preset course arrow.

2.4.6 Bearing Pointer Select (if enabled)

a. Push the DCP BRG button. Verify that a white bearing

annunciator appears inside a

I white flashing box in lower left

corner of EHSI below magenta
BRG label.

b. Rotate DCP-85 SEL knob. Verify that up to six possible

bearing sources appear in the
box. (Strapping for aircraft)

c. Select VOR 1. Push DCP-85 BRG button. Verify that the white box is
deleted and that the VOR 1
bearing annunciator and bearing
pointer appear in magenta.

d. Push BRG button twice. Verify that the magenta bearing

pointer and annunciator are
deleted.

2.4.7 Heading Select (Pilot)

a. Rotate CHP-85 HDG knob. Verify that the magenta heading

bug rotates on pilot's EHSI.

b. Push HDG SYNC button. Verify heading bug synes under

lubber line.

Revised 30 August 1993 5-8

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-2. EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures (Cont).

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

Data Select (Pilot)

I
2.4.8

a. Push CHP-85 NAV DTA button. Verify that dashes appear or

00.00 appears in upper right
corner of EHSI and label
changes from ET, TTG, GSP, and
(for wind direction).

b. Sequentially push the ET button to start, stop, and clear the elapsed timer. Verify sequential display
operation.

2.4.9 Heading Select (Copilot)

Rotate CHP-85 HDG knob. Verify that the magenta heading

bug rotates on copilot's EHSI.

2.4.10 Data Select (Copilot)

a. Push CHP-85 NAV switch. Verify that dashes appear or

00.00 appears in upper right
corner of EHSI and label
changes from ET, TTG, GSP, and
(for wind direction).

b. Sequentially push of the ET button to start, stop, and clear the elapsed timer. Verify sequential display
operation.

2.4.11 Radio Altimeter

Push DCP-85 RA TST. Verify that altimeter display

I goes to 50 feet and DH appears

if decision height is set higher
than 50 feet (ALT-50/55).

3.0 REVERSIONARY MODES OF OPERATION (IF APPLICABLE)

3.1 EADI/EHSI Composite Display

Note

The following reversionary modes are selected at the pilot/copilot switch panel. Verify that all switches are in
normal (NORM) position before the following steps are taken. These switches may be labeled differently for
various airplanes.

Revised 30 August 1993 5-9

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-2. EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures (Cont).

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

3.1.1 Pilot Switch Panel

a. Select CMPST switch to ADI. EHSI display is blanked and a

composite display is presented on
the EADI.

b. Select CMPST switch to HSI. EADI will now blank while the
EHSI shows a composite display.

e. Select CMPST switch to center position. Normal EADI and EHSI

presentations return.

3.1.2 Copilot Switch Panel

a. Select CMPST switch to ADI. EHSI display is blanked and a

composite display is presented on
the EADI.

b. Select CMPST switch to HSI. EADI will now blank while the
EHSI shows a composite display.

e. Select CMPST switch to center position. Normal EADI and EHSI

presentations return.

3.2 DCP XFER (Pedestal)

a. DCP XFER switch to no. 1. Open DCP 2 eircuit breaker. Pilot and copilot displays are
controlled by no. 1 DCP. Display
brightness for copilot side
remains under control of no. 2
DCP. FCS mode annunciation is
lost for no. 2 side. XDCP will
annunciate on EADI.

b. Reset DCP 2 circuit breaker. Select DCP switch to NORM. Normal presentations return.
XDCP annunciation disappears.

e. DCP XFER switch to no. 2. Open DCP 1 eircuit breaker. Pilot and copilot displays are
controlled by no. 2 DCP. Display
brightness for pilot side remains
under control of no. 1 DCP. FCS
mode annunciation is lost for no.
1 side. XDCP will annunciate on
EADI.

d. Reset DCP 1 eircuit breaker. Select DCP XFER switch to NORM. Normal presentations return.
XDCP annunciation disappears.

Revised 30 August 1993 5-10

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-2. EFIS-85B(1ß)/86B(1ß) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures (Cont).

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

3.3 MPU Drive Transfer (Pedestal)

a. Open DPU 1 circuit breaker. Pilot EADI and EHSI go blank.

b. Set MPU DRV switch to no. 1. Pilot EADI and EHSI displays
are restored and controlled by
no. 1 DCP. The MFD has EHSI
display.

c. Reset DPU 1 circuit breaker. Select MPU DRV switch to NORM. Normal EADI and EHSI
presentations return.

d. Open DPU 2 circuit breaker. Copilot EADI and EHSI go

blank.

e. Set MPU DRV switch to no. 2. Copilot EADI and EHSI displays
are restored and controlled by
no. 2 DCP. The MFD has EHSI
display.

f. Reset DPU 2 circuit breaker. Return MPU DRV switch to NORM. Normal EADI and EHSI
presentations return.

4.0 DATA TRANSFER SWITCHING

4.1 Verify correct switching and annunciation of data sources as selected on the pilot
switch panel:

a. Select HDG switch to NORM. Pilot display heading is supplied

by no. 1 AHRS. HDG 1 is
annunciated in white for DPU/
MPU DPU/MPU
-001.
units
-002

do not annunciate HDGl.

b. Select HDG switch to XSIDE. Pilot display heading is supplied

by no. 2 AHRS. HDG 2 is
annunciated in yellow on pilot's
EHSI.

c. Select ATT switch to NORM. Pilot display attitude is supplied

by no. 1 AHRS. ATT1 is

I d. Select ATT switch to XSIDE.

annunciated in white for DPU/
MPU -001. DPU/MPU
do not annunciate ATT1.

Pilot displayed attitude is

units
-002

supplied by no. 2 AHRS. ATT2 is

annunciated in yellow on pilot
EADI.

e. ANG DEV/LIN DEV to ANG DEV ANG is annunciated green on

pilot's EFIS display. VOR
deviation is displayed as angular.
This switch is functional only if
VOR is the navigational data
(Cont) source selected by the pilot.

Revised 30 August 1993 5-11

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-2. EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures (Cont).

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

4.1 f. ANG DEV/LIN DEV to LIN DEV With VOR selected as navigation
(Cont) data source, deviation will be
linear if a valid DME is present
and not in hold. LIN is
annunciated green on the pilot
EHSI display. If the DME is lost
or DME HOLD is selected, the
LIN annunciation on the EFIS
display is replaced by ANG
which will flash for
approximately 10 seconds; then it
remains steady.

4.2 Verify correct switching and annunciation of data sources as selected on the copilot
switch panel:

a. Select HDG switch to NORM. Copilot display heading is

supplied by no. 2 AHRS. HDG2

I b. Select HDG switch to XSIDE.

is annunciated
DPU/MPU
in white for
DPU/MPU
-001.

units do not annunciate HDG2.

Copilot display heading is

-002

supplied by no. 1 AHRS. HDG1

is annunciated in yellow on
copilot EHSI.

c. Select ATT switch to NORM. Copilot display attitude is

supplied by no. 2 AHRS. ATT2 is

I d. Select ATT switch to XSIDE.

annunciated
MPU
in white for DPU/
DPU/MPU
-001.

do not annunciate ATT2.

units

Copilot displayed attitude is

-002

supplied by no. 1 AHRS. ATT1 is

annunciated in yellow on copilot
EADI.

e. ANG DEV/LIN DEV to ANG DEV ANG is annunciated in green on

copilot EFIS display. VOR
deviation is displayed as angular.
This switch is functional only if
VOR is the navigational data
source selected by the copilot.

f. ANG DEV/LIN DEV to LIN DEV With VOR selected as navigation

data source, deviation will be
linear if a valid DME is present
and not in hold. LIN is
annunciated green on the copilot
EHSI display. If the DME is lost
or DME HOLD is selected, the
LIN annunciation on the EFIS
display is replaced by ANG
which will flash for
approximately 10 seconds; then it
remains steady.

Revised 30 August 1993 5-12

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-2. EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures (Cont).

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

5.0 EFIS TEST SWITCH

5.1 Pilot TEST Switch

Note

Pilot EFIS TEST switch is inhibited when A/P is engaged.

a. Push pilot EFIS TEST switch. The pilot EFIS TEST switch
normally places the pilot
displays and the MFD in
test mode. In test, the EADI
pitch and roll attitudes
are altered by 10 degrees
nose up and 10 degrees
roll right, and 20 degrees
are added to displayed
heading. A red TEST will
appear in center of
EADI and EHSI.

Yellow comparator flags

PIT, ROL, and HDG will
appear on both the pilot
and copilot EADI and
EHSI.

If the EFIS TEST switch is

held for 4 seconds or longer,
all flags associated will
be displayed.

b. Release switch. Displays revert to standard

operation.

c. Push comparator reset button (COMPTR WARN) which is located on pilot Comparator indications should
annunciator panel. reset.

Revised 30 August 1993 5-13

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-2. EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures (Cont).

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

5.2 Copilot TEST Switch

Note

Copilot EFIS TEST switch is inhibited when A/P is engaged.

a. Push copilot EFIS TEST switch. The copilot EADI pitch and roll
attitudes are altered by 10
degrees nose down and 10
degrees roll left, and 20 degrees
are subtracted from displayed
heading.

Yellow comparator flags PIT,

ROL, and HDG will appear on
the copilot EADI and EHSI
display.

If the EFIS TEST switch is held

for 4 seconds or longer, all flags
associated with the displays will
be displayed.

b. Release switch. Displays revert to standard

operation.

c. Push comparator reset button (COMPTR WARN). Comparator indications should

reset.

6.0 INTERFACE TESTS

6.1 VOR

a. Apply ac and de power to the VOR radio.

b. Turn on VOR signal generator and select

0°.

c. Select VOR 1 as the active course and bearing pointer on the EHSI. Verify that the NAV flag is
removed from the display and
that the bearing pointer points
to 0°.

d. Rotate the course arrow. Verify that the deviation bar on

the EHSI and the deviation
pointer on the EADI center at
180° with a FROM indication
and at 0° with a TO indication.

e. Select additional radials using the signal generator. Verify that the bearing pointer
points to the radial selected and
that the deviation bar centers
with a TO indication at the
radial selected.

Revised 30 August 1993 5-14

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-2. EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures (Cont).

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.2 Localizer

a. Apply power to VOR/LOC receiver.

b. Select localizer mode on the VOR/LOC signal generator.

c. Select an appropriate LOC frequency.

d. Select LOC 1 as the active course on the EHSI. Verify that NAV flag is removed
from the display. Verify that the
runway symbol and deviation
scale appear at the bottom of the

I EADI and that the VOR (sensor

annunciator) changes to LOC.

e. Select zero deviation on the LOC signal generator. Verify that the runway symbol
on the EADI and course
deviation bar on the EHSI are
centered.

f. Select left deviation on the signal generator. Verify that the runway and
deviation bar deflect to the left.

g. Select right deviation on the signal generator. Verify that the runway and
deviation bar deflect to the right.

6.3 Glideslope

a. Apply power to glideslope receiver.

b. Select the glideslope mode on the signal generator.

c. Select the glideslope deviations available on the signal generator. Verify that the glideslope pointer
on the EADI and EHSI track the
selected deviation.

6.4 Radio Altitude

a. Apply power to radio altimeter.

b. Select a localizer frequency. Verify that the runway symbol

appears at the bottom of the
EADI.

Revised 30 August 1993 5-15

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-2. EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures (Cont).

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.4 c. Set the DH readout at the lower right corner of EADI (with DH knob on DCP) to Verify that the DH annunciator
(Cont) 200 feet. in the center of the EADI is on
when radio altitude is below 200
feet and is off above 200 feet.

If so strapped, verify that

runway symbol begins to expand
when the radio altitude goes
below 200 feet and that it
touches the bottom of the
airplane symbol when the radio
altitude is 0 foot.

6.5 DME

a. Apply power to DME radio.

b. Turn on DME signal generator.

e. Select an appropriate frequency.

d. Select various distances on the signal generator. Verify that the DME distance
readout appears in upper left
corner of the EHSI.

6.6 ADF

a. Select ADF 1 as the bearing pointer on the EHSL

b. Select various radio stations. Verify that the ADF pointer on

the EHSI points to the proper
bearings.

7.0 MFD OPERATION

Warning

The area within the sean are and within 5 metres (15 feet) of an operating weather radar system constitutes a
hazardous area. Do not operate the system in any mode other than standby (STBY) or test (TST) when the
antenna might sean over personnel within that range. Never turn the transmitter on while in a hangar. FAA
Advisory Circular 20-68B provides additional details regarding the radiation hazards associated with ground
operation of airborne weather radar.

Revised 30 August 1993 5-16

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-2. EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures (Cont).

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

7.1 Radar Mode

a. Push RDR button on MFD-85A. MFD-85A will display the mode

selected on the WXP panel (see
below).

WXP-85( )/-850( ):
OFF system deenergized
-

STBY system energized, but

-

no transmitter output
TEST test pattern, but
-
no
transmitter output

b. Push RDR button again. Radar display is removed.

7.2 NAV Mode

a. Push NAV button on MFD-85A. Navigation format appears

showing the navaids last
selected.

b. Push MFD-85A line select key next to the boxed arrow. NAV data menu will appear.

c. Push line select key next to sources desired to be displayed. Color of selected navaids will
change to green.

d. Push NAV button on MFD-85A. Display will change to NAV

format with selected navaids on
the display. If VOR is selected on
pilot or copilot EHSI, course
lines may be moved with CRS
controls on CHP-86. If VOR info
valid, CRS and station ident for
VOR 1 will appear on bottom
left, for VOR 2 on bottom right.

LRN waypoints will appear in

proper position. CRS to waypoint
will appear below VOR 1 CRS for
LRN 1 and below VOR 2 CRS for
LRN 2 (Only one LRN can be
displayed at a time.)

7.3 Remote Data

a. Push RMT button on MFD-85A. Remote source menu will appear.

b. Push line select key of source desired. Data will appear if available. If
no data is available, after 5
seconds NO DATA from
REMOTE device # "X" will
appear.

Revised 30 August 1993 5-17

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-2. EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures (Cont).

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

7.4 MFD/HSI Mode

a. Select HSI switch to ON MFD on pilot switch panel. Pilot HSI presentation will
duplicate on the MFD-85A.

b. Select HSI switch to NORM on pilot switch panel. Normal MFD-85A display
returns.

8.0 EFIS FAN MONITORS

8.1 EFIS Fan Fail

a. Push and hold annunciator test switch in master warning panel. After 8 seconds, pilot EFD and
DPU FAN, copilot EFD and DPU
FAN, and pedestal MFD and
MPU FAN annunciators
illuminate amber.

b. Release annunciator test switch. Annunciators extinguish.

9.0 LRN APPR MODE INHIBIT CHECK

9.1 Setup Procedure

a. Set LRN-85 into SIMULATE FLIGHT mode. Set up a waypoint 50 to 100 miles
directly in front of the airplane.

b. Select LRN for display on pilot and copilot EFIS.

c. Select NAV mode on both mode select panels.

d. Engage the autopilot.

9.2 On LRN CDU, set up a parallel track 7.5 nmi left of DTRK. Course deviation bar should
move left two dots. V-bars
command a 15-degree left bank.
Autopilot moves control wheel
for a left bank.

9.3 On LRN CDU, set up a parallel track 7.5 nmi right of DTRK. Course deviation bar should
deflect right two dots. V-bars
command a 15-degree right bank.
Autopilot moves control wheel
for a right bank.

Revised 30 August 1993 5-18

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-2. EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures (Cont).

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

9.4 Deselect LRN from copilot EFIS.

9.5 Select APPR mode on pilot mode select panel. LRN data is flagged on EHSI.
V-bars indicate zero roll
command. Autopilot returns
control wheel to neutral.

9.6 Deselect APPR mode on pilot mode select panel. Deselect LRN from pilot EFIS.

9.7 Select LRN on copilot EFIS and push AP XFER on autopilot panel. Copilot course deviation bar
should be two dots to the right.
V-bars are commanding 15-
degree right bank. Autopilot
moves control wheel for a right
bank.

9.8 Select APPR mode on copilot mode select panel. LRN data is flagged on EHSI.
V-bars indicate zero roll
command. Autopilot returns
control wheel to neutral.

9.9 Deselect APPR mode. Deselect LRN from EFIS. Push AP XFER on autopilot panel.
Disengage autopilot.

Revised 30 August 1998 5-19

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-3. EFIS-85B )/86BG) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures.

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

1.0 POWER UP

Connect the aircraft battery, apply power to the EFIS system, and turn on the cooling Verify that EADI and EHSI
air blowers. Apply power to any other systems that supply data to the EFIS system displays are normal. Replace any
(such as flight control system, radio altimeter system, navigation receivers, DME blown fuses and reset any circuit
receivers, glideslope receivers, and AHRS). breakers that tripped

1.1 Turn on the MFD-85A by pushing the PWR button on the MFD front panel. Verify that a picture appears on
the MFD.

Note

The EADI attitude and EHSI/MFD heading displays will be random but should be steady.

2.0 DSP-85A OPERATION

Note
Unless otherwise specified, the steps in this section refer to one side only but should be completed on each side.

2.1 Intensity Verify that it controls the

brightness of the EADI and
Adjust external EADI DIM and EHSI DIM intensity controls. EHSI.

2.2 Decision Height

2.2.1 Adjust DSP-85A DH SET knob.

2.2.2 Verify that it controls the DH display in lower right corner of EADI. First turn knob Each click of knob should change
slowly and observe displayed DH; then turn knob fast. displayed DH by 1 foot when
turned slowly and by larger steps
when turned fast.

2.2.3 Verify DH SET range is 0 to 999 feet. DH flashes at 0 foot.

2.2.4 Push DSP TST pushbutton (part of DH SET knob). Verify that both radio altitude
and DH SET values are
displayed on EADI. Release TST
pushbutton.

Revised 30 August 1993 5-20

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-3. EFIS-85B(2)/86B(2) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures (Cont).

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

2.3 ROSE Mode

2.3.1 Set DSP FORMAT switch to ROSE position. Verify a conventional compass
rose shows on EHSI.

2.3.2 Set DSP FORMAT switch to APPR position. Verify an expanded compass
display shows on EHSI.

2.3.3 Select WX on DSP-85A. Set DSP mode switch to ENR position. Set WXP-85( )/-850( ) Verify that the expanded
to TEST. compass display remains and the
radar test pattern appears.
Message in lower left on EHSI
reads same as radar mode
selected.

2.3.4 Return DSP mode switch to ROSE position.

2.4 Active Course Selection

2.4.1 Initial Setup

a. Push DSP 2ND CRS button to remove any preset course annunciator displayed on
EHSI.

b. Rotate DSP BRG knob to OFF position to remove any bearing source annunciator
displayed on EHSI.

2.4.2 Active Course Menu Verify that navigation sources

I a. Verify
EHSI.
that an active green course annunciator is displayed at left of center on
are displayed on the EHSI.

b. Rotate DSP CRS knob to each position. Only those navigation sources
enabled by interconnect
strapping will be shown as
possible selections.

2.4.3 Preset Course Menu

a. Push DSP 2ND CRS button. Verify a dual dashed shaft course
arrow appears and a navigation
sensor is annunicated at the left
center of the EHSI display.

b. Continue pushing DSP 2ND CRS button and verify that different navigation sensors
are displayed and annunciated.

Revised 30 August 1998 5-21

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-3. EFIS-85B(2)/86B(2) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures (Cont).

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

2.4.4 Bearing Pointer and Heading Select (Pilot)

a. Rotate DSP BRG switch to all positions. Verify that magenta bearing
pointer is displayed and that
navigation annunciators appear
in the lower left of the EHSI
below BRG label.

b. Rotate DSP HDG knob. Verify that the magenta heading

bug rotates on pilot EHSI.

c. Push DSP HDG SYNC button. Verify heading bug synes under
lubber line.

d. Set DSP BRG switch to OFF. Verify that the bearing pointer
and annunciator are deleted.

2.4.5 Data Select

a. Push DSP NAV DTA pushbutton. Verify that dashes appear or

00.00 appears in upper right
corner of EHSI, and label
changes from ET, TTG, GSP, and
->

(for wind direction).

b. Verify that sequential pushing of the external ET button starts, stops, and clears
the elapsed timer.

2.4.6 Radio Altimeter

Push DSP RA TST. Verify that altimeter display

goes to 50 feet (for ALT-50/55)
and DH appears if DH SET
value exceeds the test altitude.

3.0 REVERSIONARY MODES OF OPERATION (IF APPLICABLE)

3.1 EADI/EHSI Composite Display

Note
The following reversionary modes are selected at the pilot/copilot switch panel. Verify that all switches are in
normal (NORM) position before the following steps are taken. These switches may be labeled differently for
various airplanes.

3.1.1 Pilot Switch Panel

a. Select CMPST switch to ADI. EHSI display is blanked and a

composite display is presented on
the EADI.
b. Select CMPST switch to HSI. EADI will now blank while the
EHSI shows a composite display.

c. Select CMPST switch to center position. Normal EADI and EHSI

presentations return.

i neviseaso augustisas s.se

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-3. EFIS-85B(2)/86B(2) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures (Cont).

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

3.1.2 Copilot Switch Panel

a. Select CMPST switch to ADI. EHSI display is blanked and a

composite display is presented on
the EADI.

b. Select CMPST switch to HSI. EADI will now blank while the
EHSI shows a composite display.

c. Select CMPST switch to center position. Normal EADI and EHSI

presentations return.

3.2 DSP XFER (Pedestal)

a. DSP XFER switch to no. 1. Open DSP 2 circuit breaker. Pilot and copilot displays are
controlled by no. 1 DSP. Display
brightness for copilot side
remains under control of no. 2
DSP. FCS mode annunciation is
lost for no. 2 side. XDSP will
annunciate on EADI.

b. Reset DSP 2 circuit breaker. Select DSP switch to NORM. Normal presentations return.
XDSP annunciation disappears.

c. DSP XFER switch to no. 2. Open DSP 1 circuit breaker. Pilot and copilot displays are
controlled by no. 2 DSP. Display
brightness for pilot's side
remains under control of no. 1
DSP. FCS mode annunciation is
lost for no. 1 side. XDSP will
annunciate on EADI.

d. Reset DSP 1 circuit breaker. Select DSP XFER switch to NORM. Normal presentations return.
XDSP annunciation disappears.

3.3 MPU Drive Transfer (Pedestal)

a. Open DPU 1 circuit breaker. Pilot EADI and EHSI go blank.

b. Set MPU DRV switch to no. 1. Pilot EADI and EHSI displays
are restored and controlled by
no. 1 DSP. The MFD has EHSI
display.

c. Reset DPU 1 circuit breaker. Select MPU DRV switch to NORM. Normal EADI and EHSI
presentations return.

d. Open DPU 2 circuit breaker. Copilot EADI and ESHI go

blank.

e. Set MPU DRV switch to no. 2. Copilot EADI and EHSI displays
are restored and controlled by
no. 2 DSP. The MFD has EHSI
display.

f. Reset DPU 2 circuit breaker. Return MPU DRV switch to NORM. Normal EADI and EHSI
presentations return.

Revised 30 August 1993 5-23

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-3. EFIS-85B(B)/86B(2) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures (Cont).

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

4.0 DATA TRANSFER SWITCHING

4.1 Verify correct switching and annunciation of data sources as selected on the pilot's
switch panel:

a. Select HDG switch to NORM. Pilot display heading is supplied

by no. 1 AHRS. HDG 1 is
in white for DPU/

I
annunciated
MPU DPU/MPU
-001.
units
-002

do not annunciate HDGl.

b. Select HDG switch to XSIDE. Pilot display heading is supplied

by no. 2 AHRS. HDG 2 is
annunciated in yellow on pilot
EHSI.

c. Select ATT switch to NORM. Pilot display attitude is supplied

by no. 1 AHRS. ATT1 is

I
annunciated in white for DPU/
MPU DPU/MPU
-001.
units
-002

do not annunciate ATT1.

d. Select ATT switch to XSIDE. Pilot display attitude is supplied

by no. 2 AHRS. ATT2 is
annunciated in yellow on pilot
EADI.

e. ANG DEV/LIN DEV to ANG DEV ANG is annunciated green on

pilot EFIS display. VOR
deviation is displayed as angular.
This switch is functional only if
VOR is the navigational data
source selected by the pilot.

f. ANG DEV/LIN DEV to LIN DEV With VOR selected as navigation

data source, deviation will be
linear if a valid DME is present
and not in hold. LIN is
annunciated green on the pilot
EHSI display. If the DME is lost
or DME HOLD is selected, the
LIN annunciation on the EFIS
display is replaced by ANG
which will flash for
approximately 10 seconds; then it
remains steady.

4.2 Verify correct switching and annunciation of data sources as selected on the copilot
switch panel:

a. Select HDG switch to NORM. Copilot display heading is

supplied by no. 2 AHRS. HDG2

I
is annunciated in white for
DPU/MPU DPU/MPU
-001. -002

(Cont) units do not annunciate HDG2.

Revised 30 August 1993 5-24

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-3. EFIS-85B(2)/86B(2) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures (Cont).

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

4.2 b. Select HDG switch to XSIDE. Copilot display heading is

(Cont) supplied by no. 1 AHRS. HDG1
is annunciated in yellow on
copilot EHSI.

c. Select ATT switch to NORM. Copilot display attitude is

supplied by no. 2 AHRS. ATT2 is
annunciated in white for DPU/
MPU DPU/MPU
-001.
units
-002

do not annunciate ATT2.

d. Select ATT switch to XSIDE. Copilot display attitude is

supplied by no. 1 AHRS. ATT1 is
annunciated in yellow on copilot
EADI.

e. ANG DEV/LIN DEV to ANG DEV ANG is annunciated green on

copilot EFIS display. VOR
deviation is displayed as angular.
This switch is functional only if
VOR is the navigational data
source selected by the copilot.

f. ANG DEV/LIN DEV to LIN DEV With VOR selected as navigation

data source, deviation will be
linear if a valid DME is present
and not in hold. LIN is
annunciated green on the copilot
EHSI display. If the DME is lost
or DME HOLD is selected, the
LIN annunication on the EFIS
display is replaced by ANG
which will flash for
approximately 10 seconds; then it
remains steady.

5.0 EFIS TEST SWITCH

5.1 Pilot TEST switch

Note

Pilot EFIS TEST switch is inhibited when A/P is engaged.

a. Push pilot EFIS TEST switch. The pilot EFIS TEST switch
normally places the pilot displays
and the MFD in test mode. In
test, the EADI pitch and roll
attitudes are altered by 10
degrees nose up and 10 degrees
roll right, and 20 degrees are
added to displayed heading. A
red TEST will appear in center
(Cont) of EADI and EHSI.

Revised 30 August 1993 545

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-3. EFIS-85B(2)/86B(2) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures (Cont).

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1 Yellow comparator flags PIT,

(Cont) ROL, and HDG will appear on
both the pilot and copilot EADI
and EHSI.

If the EFIS TEST switch is held

for 4 seconds or longer, all flags
associated will be displayed.

b. Release switch. Displays revert to standard

operation.

c. Push comparator reset button (COMPTR WARN) which is located on pilot Comparator indications should
annunciator panel. reset.

5.2 Copilot TEST Switch

Note

Copilot EFIS TEST switch is inhibited when A/P is engaged.

a. Push copilot EFIS TEST switch. The copilot EADI pitch and roll
attitudes are altered by 10
degrees nose down and 10
degress roll left, and 20 degrees
are subtracted from displayed
heading.

Yellow comparator flags PIT,

ROL, and HDG will appear on
the copilot EADI and EHSI
display.

If the EFIS TEST switch is held

for 4 seconds or longer, all flags
associated with the displays will
be displayed.

b. Release switch. Displays revert to standard

operation.

c. Push comparator reset button (COMPTR WARN). Comparator indications should

reset.

6.0 INTERFACE TESTS

6.1 VOR

a. Apply ac and de power to the VOR radio.

b. Turn on VOR signal generator and select 0°.

c. Select VOR 1 as the active course and bearing pointer on the EHSI. Verify that the NAV flag is
removed from the display and
that the bearing pointer points
(Cont) to 0°.

Revised 30 August 1993 5-26

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-3. EFIS-85B )/86B ) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures (Cont).

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.1 d. Rotate the course arrow. Verify that the deviation bar on
(Cont) the EHSI and the deviation
pointer on the EADI center at
180° with a FROM indication
and at 0° with a TO indication.

e. Select additional radials using the signal generator. Verify that the bearing pointer
points to the radial selected and
that the deviation bar centers
with a TO indication at the
radial selected.

6.2 Localizer

a. Apply power to VOR/LOC receiver.

b. Select localizer mode on the VOR/LOC signal generator.

c. Select an appropriate LOC frequency.

d. Select LOC 1 as the active course on the EHSI. Verify that NAV flag is removed
from the display. Verify that the
runway symbol and deviation
scale appear at the bottom of the

I EADI and that the VOR (sensor

annunciator) changes to LOC.

e. Select zero deviation on the LOC signal generator. Verify that the runway symbol
on the EADI and course
deviation bar on the EHSI are
centered.

f. Select left deviation on the signal generator. Verify that the runway and
deviation bar deflect to the left.

g. Select right deviation on the signal generator. Verify that the runway and
deviation bar deflect to the right.

6.3 Glideslope

a. Apply power to glideslope receiver.

b. Select the glideslope mode on the signal generator.

c. Select the glideslope deviations available on the signal generator. Verify that the glideslope pointer
on the EADI and EHSI track the
selected deviation.

6.4 Radio Altitude

a. Apply power to radio altimeter.

b. Select a localizer frequency. Verify that the runway symbol

appears at the bottom of the
(Cont) EADI.

Revised 30 August 1993 5-¤

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-3. EFIS-85B(2)/86B(2) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures (Cont).

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.4 c. Set the DH readout at the lower right corner of EADI (with DH knob on DSP) to Verify that the DH annunciator
(Cont) 200 feet. in the center of the EADI is on
when radio altitude is below 200
feet and is off above 200 feet.

If so strapped, verify that

runway symbol begins to expand
when the radio altitude goes
below 200 feet and that it
touches the bottom of the
airplane symbol when the radio
altitude is 0 foot.

6.5 DME

a. Apply power to DME radio.

b. Turn on DME signal generator.

c. Select an appropriate frequency.

d. Select various distances on the signal generator. Verify that the DME distance
readout appears in upper left
corner of the EHSI.

6.6 ADF

a. Select ADF 1 as the bearing pointer on the EHSI.

b. Select various radio stations. Verify that the ADF pointer on

the EHSI points to the proper
bearings.

7.0 MFD OPERATION

Warning
The area within the scan arc and within 5 metres (15 feet) of an operating weather radar system constitutes a
hazardous area. Do not operate the system in any mode other than standby (STBY) or test (TST) when the
antenna might scan over personnel within that range. Never turn the transmitter on while in a hangar. FAA
Advisory Circular 20-68B provides additional details regarding the radiation hazards associated with ground
operation of airborne weather radar.

7.1 Radar Mode

a. Push RDR button on MFD-85A. MFD-85A will display the mode

selectedon the WXP panel (see
below).

WXP-85( )/-850( )
OFF system deenergized
-

STBY system energized, but

-

no transmitter output
TEST test pattern, but no
-

(Cont) transmitter output

Revised 30 August 1993 5-28

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-3. EFIS-85B(B)/86B(B) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures (Cont).

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

7.1 b. Push RDR button again. Radar display is removed.

(Cont)

7.2 NAV Mode

a. Push NAV button on MFD-85A. Navigation format appears

showing the navaids last
selected.

b. Push MFD-85A line select key next to the boxed arrow. NAV data menu will appear.

c. Push line select key next to sources desired to be displayed. Color of selected navaids will
change to green.

d. Push NAV button on MFD-85A. Display will change to NAV

format with selected navaids on
the display. If VOR is selected on
pilot or copilot EHSI, course
lines may be moved with CRS
controls on CHP. If VOR info
valid, CRS and station ident for
VOR 1 will appear on bottom
left, for VOR 2 on bottom right.

LRN waypoints will appear in

proper position. CRS to waypoint
will appear below VOR 1 CRS for
LRN 1 and below VOR 2 CRS for
LRN 2. (Only one LRN can be
displayed at a time.)

7.3 Remote Data

a. Push RMT button on MFD-85A. Remote source menu will appear.

b. Push line select key of source desired. Data will appear if available. If
no data is available, after 5
seconds NO DATA from
REMOTE device # "X" will
appear.

7.4 MFD/HSI Mode

a. Select HSI switch to ON MFD on pilot switch panel. Pilot HSI presentation will
duplicate on the MFD-85A.

b. Select HSI switch to NORM on pilot switch panel. Normal MFD-85A display
returns.

Revised 30 August 1993 5-29

 vnaintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-3. EFIS-85B(2)/86B(2) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures (Cont).

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

8.0 EFIS FAN MONITORS

8.1 EFIS Fan Fail

a. Push and hold annunciator test switch in master warning panel. After 8 seconds, pilot EFD and
DPU FAN, copilot EFD and DPU
FAN, and pedestal MFD and
MPU FAN annunciators
illuminate amber.

b. Release annunciator test switch. Annunciators extinguish.

9.0 LRN APPR MODE INHIBIT CHECK

9.1 Setup Procedure

a. Set LRN-85 into SIMULATE FLIGHT mode. Set up a waypoint 50 to 100 miles
directly in front of the airplane.

b. Select LRN for display on pilot and copilot EFIS.

c. Select NAV mode on both mode select panels.

d. Engage the autopilot.

9.2 On LRN CDU, set up a parallel track 7.5 nmi left of DTRK. Course deviation bar should
move left two dots. V-bars
command a 15-degree left bank.
Autopilot moves control wheel
for a left bank.

9.3 On LRN CDU, set up a parallel track 7.5 nmi right of DTRK. Course deviation bar should
deflect right two dots. V-bars
command a 15-degree right bank.
Autopilot moves control wheel
for a right bank.

9.4 Deselect LRN from copilot EFIS.

9.5 Select APPR mode on pilot mode select panel. LRN data is flagged on EHSI. V-
bars indicate zero roll command.
Autopilot returns control wheel
to neutral.

9.6 Deselect APPR mode on pilot mode select panel. Deselect LRN from pilot EFIS.

Î Revised 30 August 1993 5-30

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-8. EFIS-85B(2)/86B(2) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures (cont).

DESIRED RESULTS/
TEST PROCEDURE
TROUBLESHOOTING

9.7 Select LRN on copilot EFIS and push AP XFER on autopilot panel. Copilotcourse deviation bar
shouldbe two dots to the right.
V-bars are commanding 15-
degreeright bank. Autopilot
moves control wheel for a right
bank.

9.8 Select APPR mode on copilot mode select panel. LRN data is flagged on EHSI. V-
bars indicate zero roll command.
Autopilot returns control wheel
to neutral.

9.9 Deselect APPR mode. Deselect LRN from EFIS. Push AP XFER on autopilot panel.
Disengage autopilot.

Revised 30 August 1993 5-31

 maintenance 523-0773945

5.5 BITS MODE SELF-TEST GUIDE Page routine sequencing is done by repeatedly push-
ing the radio altimeter test switch of the onside DSP
5.5.1 Introduction or DCP.

This BITS mode self-test guide is an operator refer- To enter the diagnostics/maintenance routines for
ence to information stored in RAM memory in the the MPU in a 5-tube system, push and old the pilot's
following EFIS equipments: DPU-85G/86G Display EFIS TEST switch and push the radio altimeter test
Processor Unit (DPU), MPU-85G/86G Multifunction switch on the co-pilot's DSP or DCP. Again, gTound
Processor Unit (MPU), and the MFD-85A Multifune- test entry has been achieved when MPR is observed
tion Display (MFD). The stored information may be on the MFD. The EFIS TEST switch may be released
used as a troubleshooting aid to help identify a faulty once the first page of this routine has been displayed.
unit in the system. Refer to the block diagrams found Page sequencing is accomplished by repeatedly push-
at the end of this section. ing the radio altimeter test switch on the co-pilot's
DSP or DCP.
The EFIS crt's (the EADI, EHSI, and MFD) are used
to display the parameters of this stored information. Release of the EFIS and radio altimeter TEST
Some of these parameters are translated from exter- switches permits the EADI, EHSI, and the MFD to
nal inputs; others are passed across from the off-side display columns of data. Refer to figure 5-2 for the
or result from internal operations. These parameters MPR bits display. The two left columns display a 3-
are stored in what is called Multiport RAM (MPR) digit (DEC) decimal and 2-digit (HEX) locations. The
locations in the DPU and MPU. A second routine, middle columns display binary l's and 0's of the MPR
RAM, displays the contents of the display processor data contained in each memory address. The last
RAM. Another routine is separate to the MFD and (right) column displays the type/value of the data.
provides for the display of the RAM contents that The DH SET knob is turned to change the MPR data
hold the MFD page data, joystick data, and status. A in view (one click for each location). There are 256
common final routine for all crt's provides for a locations (000through 255). Locations 000 through
series sequence of alignment/calibration tests. To 127 are for the number 1 (left-side) sensor locations
view this data, the BITS must be entered. and 128 through 255 are for the number 2 (right-side)
sensors.
5.5.2 BITS Mode
Push and release DSP (or DCP) radio altimeter test
The BITS mode is a ground test usually performed by switch once. The word "RAM" should be displayed
flight-line maintenance personnel. In general, the over the fourth column from the left. The first col-
data displayed in the BITS mode is not self-reading umn (DEC) displayed a 3-digit decimal address loca-
and requires instructions to interpret. Refer to table tion and the second column (HEX) displays the
5-4 for a numerical listing of the displayed MPR data hexadecimal address location. The third through
or to table 5-5 for an alphabetical listing. Table 5-6 fifth columns display binary l's and 0's of the data
contains descriptions of the data stored in each contained in each memory address. The sixth column
DPU/MPU MPR location. Table 5-7 contains displays address information.
descriptions of the data stored in each MFD RAM
location'
Only the MPU is able to display the "MFD RAM"
routine. This procedure is the same as described
5.5.2.1 Enter BITS Mode .

above for the displays processor RAM routine.

Again, push and release DSP (or DCP) radio altime-
Locate the EFIS system TEST switch. To enter the ter test switch twice. The word "MFD" should be
diagnostics/maintenance routines for each DPU, displayed over the third/fourth column from the left.
push and hold the installer-supplied EFIS TEST The first column (DEC) displays a 4-digit decimal
switch and push the radio altimeter test (RA TST) address location and the second column (HEX) dis-
switch of the onside DSP or DCP. Ground test entry plays the hexadecimal address location. The third
has been achieved when MPR is observed on the through fifth columns display binary l's and 0's of
EADI and EHSI. Once the first page of the routine is the data contained in each memory address. The
displayed, the EFIS TEST switch may be released. sixth column displays address information.

Revised 30 August 1993 5-32

 maintenance 523-0773945

To enter the alignment/calibration routine, push and the DPU/MPU will exit the test mode and the nor-
release DSP (or DCP) radio altimeter test switch mal EADI, EHSI, and MFD display will return.
again. Rotate the DH SET knob clockwise and vari-
ous screens will appear. The same screen should Note
appear on both the EADI and EHSI. These screens
are used mainly for calibration procedures during Cycling power to the box will also exit the
test. The same is true for the MFD alignment/cali- ground test sequence.
bration checks.

5.5.2.2 Exit BITS Mode

Repeatedly push and release the radio altimeter test

(RA TST) switch. After the last test in the sequence,

DEC HEX (1PR

68 44 0100 0111 OOOO OOOO
196 C4 OOOO 1001 1001 OOOO
69 45 OOOO OOOO 0001 0.0 DEG
192 C5 OOOO OOOO 0001 0.0 DES
20 46 OOOO OOOO 0100 0.3 DEG
198 C6 OOOO OOOO 0100 0.3 DEG
21 42 OOOO OOOO OOOO 0.0 DEG
199 C2 OOOO OOOO OOOO o.o DEG
22 48 0010 0010 1001 229 HEX
200 C8 OOOO 0010 1001 029 HEX
23 49 OOOO OOOO OOOO 000 HEX
201 CS OOOO OOOO OOOO ooO HEX
24 4A OOOO 1110 OOOO OEO HEX
202 CA OOOO 1110 OOOO OEO HEX

CGO-1102-01-AC-0

Diagnostic/Maintenance Routines (DMRS), Multiport RAM (MPR) Format

Figure 5-2

Revised 30 August 1998 5-88

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-4. EFIS-85B(2/12)/86B(2/12) Multiport RAM (MPR) Numerical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

000/128 00/80 AIOP STATUS

001/129 01/81 DIOP STATUS
002/130 02/82 DISPLAY PROCESSOR STATUS
003/131 03/83 SYNCHRO VALID BITS
004/132 04/84 ADF ANGLE
005/133 05/85 DESIRED TRACK
006/134 06/86 BEARING-TO-WAYPOINT
007/135 07/87 VOR ANGLE
008/136 08/88 RADIO ALTITUDE (FILTERED)
009/137 09/89 ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE DEVIATION
010/138 0A/8A GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION
011/139 0B/8B DME GROUND SPEED (BINARY)
012/140 0C/8C DME TIME-TO-GO (BINARY)
013/141 0D/8D CROSSTRACK DEVIATION
014/142 0E/8E DISCRETES, STRAPS (1-12)
015/143 OF/8F DISCRETES, STRAPS (13-24)
016/144 10/90 DISCRETE INPUTS
017/145 11/91 DISCRETE INPUTS
018/146 12/92 DISCRETES, CALCULATED
019/147 13/93 DISCRETES, CALCULATED
020/148 14/94 DISCRETES, CALCULATED
021/149 15/95 DISCRETES, CALCULATED
022/150 16/96 ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE TIME-TO-GO (BINARY)
023/151 17/97 ACT DCP ELAPSED TIME MIN/SEC
024/152 18/98 ACT DCP ELAPSED TIME HR/MIN
025/153 19/99 ACT DCP DECISION HEIGHT
026/154 1A/9A ACT BEARING SOURCE BEARING ANGLE (CASE RELATED)
027/155 1B/9B DISCRETE INPUTS/ACT DCP RANGE
028/156 1C/9C ACT LATL SOURCE GROUND SPEED (BINARY)
029/157 1D/9D PRESET LATL SOURCE DESIRED TRACK
030/158 1E/9E ACTIVE LATL SOURCE DESIRED TRACK
031/159 1F/9F CASE RELATED SELECTED HEADING
032/160 20/100 ADC IAS (FILTERED)
033/161 21/101 DME DIST (BINARY MAP)
-

034/162 22/102 ADC TAS

035/163 23/103 DME DISTANCE (BCD)
036/164 24/104 DISCRETES, CALCULATED
037/165 25/105 ADI ACTIVE VERTICAL DEVIATION
038/166 26/106 DISCRETES, ADI MODE
039/167 27/107 DISCRETES, HSI MODE
040/168 28/108 ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE DISTANCE (BINARY)
041/169 29/109 SPEED DEVIATION OR AOA DEVIATION IN VGU
042/170 2A/10A TWR-850 MODES
043/171 2B/10B ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE BEARING-TO-WAYPOINT
044/172 2C/10C LOC DEVIATION
045/173 2D/10D PRESET LATERAL SOURCE BEARING-TO-WAYPOINT
046/174 2E/10E PRESET LATERAL SOURCE LATERAL DEVIATION
047/175 2F/10F DISCRETES, CALCULATED
048/176 30/110 DISCRETES, CALCULATED
049/177 31/111 DISCRETES, CALCULATED
050/178 32/112 DISCRETES, CALCULATED
051/179 33/113 NOT ASSIGNED
052/180 34/114 PRO LINE II BUS STATUSBITS
053/181 35/115 ACTIVE DISTANCE FOR EFIS XMIT BUS (BINARY)
054/182 36/116 ACTIVE DCP MODES

Revised 30 August 1993 5-34

 maintenance 523-0773945

Ta'>le 5-4. EFIS-85B(2/12)/86B(2/12) Multiport RAM (MPR) Numerical Index (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

055/183 37/117 JOYSTICK CURSOR BEARING

056/184 38/118 JOYSTICK CURSOR DISTANCE
057/185 39/119 MFD KEY STATUS
058/186 3A/11A STEERING COMMAND, SCALED, FILTERED PITCH
059/187 3B/11B STEERING COMMAND, FILTERED ROLL
060/188 3C/11C ACCELERATION VECTOR IN VGU
061/189 3D/11D DME IDENT PROCESSOR ACTIVITY SR
062/190 3E/11E LRN STATUS
063/191 3F/11F RADIO ALT (UNFILTERED) FOR CAT II
064/192 40/120 DIGITAL VNAV DEVIATION
065/193 41/121 PITCH STEERING COMMAND (RAW)
066/194 42/122 ROLL STEERING COMMAND (RAW)
067/195 43/123 HEADING ERROR (RAW)
068/196 44/124 TVG REF AIRSPEED (RAS)
069/197 45/125 PITCH ATTITUDE (RAW)
070/198 46/126 ROLL ATTITUDE (RAW)
071/199 47/127 HEADING ANGLE (RAW)
072/200 48/128 FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES
073/201 49/129 FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES
074/202 4A/12A FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES
075/203 4B/12B FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES
076/204 4C/12C FCC-85/86 REFERENCES
077/205 4D/12D DCP/DSP MODES
078/206 4E/12E ACTIVE/PRESEL DCP/DSP SELECT MASKS
079/207 4F/12F DCP/DSP ELAPSED TIME MIN/SEC
-

080/208 50/130 DCP/DSP ELAPSED TIME HR/MIN

-

081/209 51/131 DCP/DSP ACTIVE BEARING MASK

082/210 52/132 DCP/DSP PRESET COURSE SENSOR MASK
083/211 53/133 DCP ACTIVE COURSE SENSOR MASK
084/212 54/134 DCP MENU MASK
085/213 55/135 ACTIVE WXP MODES
086/214 56/136 FD ANNUNCIATORS
087/215 57/137 DCP ACTIVE COURSE
088/216 58/138 DCP PRESET COURSE
089/217 59/139 DCP SELECTED HEADING
090/218 5A/13A ACTIVE SELECTED HEADING DIGITAL DISPLAY DATA
091/219 5B/13B DCP DECISION HEIGHT DATA (RAW)
092/220 5C/13C AIOP TEST SHIFT REGISTER
093/221 5D/13D DIOP TEST SHIFT REGISTER
094/222 5E/13E DISPLAY PROCESSOR TEST SHIFT REGISTER
095/223 5F/13F ACTIVE PITCH ANGLE (UNSCALED) FOR TVG CALC
096/224 60/140 CAT II DP COMPARATORS
097/225 61/141 MULTIPLEXED FCS DIAGNOSTIC DATA PORT
098/226 62/142 CAT II DP COMPARATOR STATUS
099/227 63/143 TREND VECTOR GENERATOR SHIFT REGISTER
100/228 64/144 TREND VECTOR STATUS
101/229 65/145 DISCRETES, CALCULATED
102/230 66/146 ACTIVE HEADING ANGLE
103/231 67/147 ACTIVE ROLL ANGLE
104/232 68/148 ACTIVE PITCH ANGLE
105/233 69/149 LRN DISTANCE TO GO
106/234 6A/14A LRN DISTANCE TO GO
107/235 6B/14B ADC IAS (RAW)
108/236 6C/14C LRN TIME TO GO
109/237 6D/14D ACTIVE SELECTED HEADING ERROR

Revised 30 August 1993 5-85

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-4. EFIS-85B(2/12)/86B(2/12) Multiport RAM (MPR) Numerical Index (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

110/238 6E/14E LRN GROUND SPEED

111/239 6F/14F VNI-80 STATUS BITS
112/240 70/150 LRN BANK COMMAND
113/241 71/151 DME IDENT
114/242 72/152 FD ANNUNCIATORS
115/243 73/153 ACTIVE SELECTED COURSE ERROR
116/244 74/154 ACTIVE LATERAL DEVIATION
117/245 75/155 TVG (ACCELERATION + 10 SEC)
118/246 76/156 ACTIVE VERTICAL DEVIATION
119/247 77/157 IAS DISPLAY BASE OFFSET IN VGU's
120/248 78/158 FULL-TIME LOCALIZER DEVIATION
121/249 79/159 FULL-TIME GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION
122/250 7A/15A EFIS XMIT BUS DISCRETES
123/251 7B/15B SCALED HSI VNAV DEVIATION
124/252 7C/15C FD ANNUNCIATORS
125/253 7D/15D ACTIVE/PRESET SOURCE TYPE
126/254 7E/15E BEARING/MENU SOURCE TYPE
127/255 7F/15F MULTIPLEXED LRN MAP DATA

Table 5-5. EFIS-85B(2/12)/86B(2/12) Multiport RAM (MPR) Alphabetical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

ACCELERATION VECTOR IN VGU 060/188 3C/11C

ACTIVE BEARING SOURCE BEARING ANGLE (CASE RELATED) 026/154 1A/9A
ACTIVE DCP DECISION HEIGHT 025/153 19/99
ACTIVE DCP ELAPSED TIME HRS/MIN 024/152 18/98
ACTIVE DCP ELAPSED TIME MIN/SECONDS 023/151 17/97
ACTIVE DCP MODES 054/182 36/116
ACTIVE DISTANCE FOR EFIS XMIT BUS (BINARY) 053/181 35/115
ACTIVE HEADING ANGLE 102/230 66/146
ACTIVE LATERAL DEVIATION 116/244 74/154
ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE BEARING-TO-WAYPOINT 043/171 2B/10B
ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE DESIRED TRACK 030/158 1E/9E
ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE DEVIATION 009/137 09/89
ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE DISTANCE (BINARY) 040/168 28/108
ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE GROUND SPEED (BINARY) 028/156 1C/9C
ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE TIME-TO-GO (BINARY) 022/150 16/96
ACTIVE PITCH ANGLE 104/232 68/148
ACTIVE PITCH ANGLE (UNSCALED) FOR TVG CALC 095/223 5F/13F
ACTIVE ROLL ANGLE 103/231 67/147
ACTIVE SELECTED COURSE ERROR 115/243 73/153
ACTIVE SELECTED HEADING DIGITAL DISPLAY DATA 090/218 5A/13A
ACTIVE SELECTED HEADING ERROR 109/237 6D/14D
ACTIVE VERTICAL DEVIATION 118/246 76/156
ACTIVE WXP MODES 085/213 55/135
ACTIVE/PRESEL DCP/DSP SELECT MASKS 078/206 4E/12E
ACTIVE/PRESET SOURCE TYPE 125/253 7D/15D
ADC IAS (FILTERED) 032/160 20/100
ADC IAS (RAW) 107/235 6B/14B

Revised 30 August 1993 5-36

 rnaintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-5. EFIS-85B(2/12)/86B(2/12) Multiport RAM (MP1) Alphabetical Index (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

ADC TAS 034/162 22/102

ADF ANGLE 004/132 04/84
ADI ACTIVE VERTICAL DEVIATION 037/165 25/105
AIOP STATUS 000/128 00/80
AIOP TEST SHIFT REGISTER 092/220 5C/13C
BEARING-TO-WAYPOINT 006/134 06/8
BEARING/MENU SOURCE TYPE 126/254 7E/15E
CASE RELATED SELECTED HEADING 031/159 1F/9F
CAT II DP COMPARATOR STATUS 098/226 2/142
CAT II DP COMPARATORS 096/224 60/140
CROSSTRACK DEVIATION 013/141 0D/8D
DCP ACTIVE BEARING MASK 081/209 51/131
DCP ACTIVE COURSE SENSOR MASK 083/211 53/133
DCP ACTIVE COURSE 087/215 57/137
DCP DECISION HEIGHT DATA (RAW) 091/219 5B/13B
DCP ELAPSED TIME HR/MIN
-
080/208 50/130
DCP ELAPSED TIME MIN/SEC
-
079/207 4F/12F
DCP MENU MASK 084/212 54/134
DCP MODES 077/205 4D/12D
DCP PRESET COURSE SENSOR MASK 082/210 52/132
DCP PRESET COURSE 088/216 58/138
DCP SELECTED HEADING 089/217 59/139
DESIRED TRACK 005/133 05/85
DIGITAL VNAV DEVIATION 064/192 40/120
DIOP STATUS 001/129 01/81
DIOP TEST SHIFT REGISTER 093/221 5D/13D
DISCRETE INPUTS 016/144 10/90
DISCRETE INPUTS 017/145 11/91
DISCRETE INPUTS/ACTIVE DCP RANGE 027/155 1B/9B
DISCRETES, ADI MODE 038/166 26/106
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 018/146 12/92
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 019/147 13/93
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 020/148 14/94
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 021/149 15/95
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 036/164 24/104
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 047/175 2F/10F
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 048/176 30/110
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 049/177 31/111
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 050/178 32/112
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 101/229 65/145
DISCRETES, HSI MODE 039/167 27/107
DISCRETES, STRAPS (1-12) 014/142 0E/8E
DISCRETES, STRAPS (13-24) 015/143 OF/8F
DISPLAY PROCESSOR STATUS 002/130 02/82
DISPLAY PROCESSOR TEST SHIFT REGISTER 094/222 5E/13E
DME DISTANCE (BCD) 035/163 23/103
DME DISTANCE (BINARY MAP) -
033/161 21/101
DME GROUND SPEED (BINARY) 011/139 0B/8B
DME IDENT PROCESSOR ACTIVITY SR 061/189 3D/11D
DME IDENT 113/241 71/151
DME TIME-TO-GO (BINARY) 012/140 0C/8C
EFIS XMIT BUS DISCRETES 122/250 7A/15A
FCC-85/86 REFERENCES 076/204 4C/12C
FD ANNUNCIATORS 086/214 56/136
FD ANNUNCIATORS 114/242 72/152
FD ANNUNCIATORS 124/252 7C/15C

Revised 30 August 1993 5-37

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-5. EFIS-85B(2/12)/86B(2/12) Multiport RAM (MPl') Alphabetical Index (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES 072/200 48/128

FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES 073/201 49/129
FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES 074/202 4A/12A
FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES 075/203 4B/12B
FULL-TIME GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION 121/249 79/159
FULL-TIME LOCALIZER DEVIATION 120/248 78/158
GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION 010/138 0A/8A
HEADING ANGLE (RAW) 071/199 47/127
HEADING ERROR (RAW) 067/195 43/123
IAS DISPLAY BASE OFFSET IN VGU 119/247 77/157
JOYSTICK CURSOR BEARING 055/183 37/117
JOYSTICK CURSOR DISTANCE 056/184 38/118
LOC DEVIATION 044/172 2C/10C
LRN BANK COMMAND 112/240 70/150
LRN DISTANCE TO GO 105/233 69/149
LRN DISTANCE TO GO 106/234 6A/14A
LRN GROUND SPEED 110/238 6E/14E
LRN STATUS 062/190 3E/11E
LRN TIME-TO-GO 108/236 6C/14C
MFD KEY STATUS 057/185 39/119
MULTIPLEXED FCS DIAGNOSTIC DATA PORT 097/225 61/141
MULTIPLEXED LRN MAP DATA 127/255 7F/15F
NOT ASSIGNED 051/179 33/113
PITCH ATTITUDE (RAW) 069/197 45/125
PITCH STEERING COMMAND (RAW) 065/193 41/121
PRESET LATERAL SOURCE BEARING TO WAYPOINT 045/173 2D/10D
PRESET LATERAL SOURCE DESIRED TRACK 029/157 1D/9D
PRESET LATERAL SOURCE LATERAL DEVIATION 046/174 2E/10E
PRO LINE II BUS STATUS BITS 052/180 34/114
RADIO ALTITUDE (FILTERED) 008/136 08/88
RADIO ALTITUDE (UNFILTERED) FOR CAT II 063/191 3F/11F
ROLL ATTITUDE (RAW) 070/198 46/126
ROLL STEERING COMMAND (RAW) 066/194 42/122
SCALED HSI VNAV DEVIATION 123/251 7B/15B
SPEED DEVIATION OR AOA DEVIATION IN VGU 041/169 29/109
STEERING COMMAND, FILTERED ROLL 059/187 3B/11B
STEERING COMMAND, SCALED, FILTERED PITCH 058/186 3A/11A
SYNCHRO VALID BITS 003/131 03/83
TREND VECTOR GENERATOR SHIFT REGISTER 099/227 63/143
TREND VECTOR STATUS 100/228 64/144
TVG (ACCELERATION + 10 SEC) 117/245 75/155
TVG REF AIRSPEED (RAS) 068/196 44/124
TWR-850 MODES 042/170 2A/10A
VNI-80 STATUS BITS 111/239 6F/14F
VOR ANGLE 007/135 07/87

Revised 30 August 1993 5-38

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

000/128 00/80 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY AIOP STATUS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- AIOP TEST MODE
14- AIOP FLAGS TEST
13- AIOP INCREMENTAL DATA TEST
12- AIOP IN CAT II TEST
11- NOT DEFINED
10- NOT DEFINED
9- NOT DEFINED
8- AIOP REV NUMBER
7- AIOP REV NUMBER
6- AIOP REV NUMBER
5- AIOP REV NUMBER
4- AIOP REV NUMBER
3-0- PADS 0
=

001/129 01/81 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DIOP STATUS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DCP VALID
14- WXP BUS VALID
13- AHRS BUS VALID
12- FCS BUS VALID
11- VNI BUS VALID
10- INS BUS VALID
9- DME BUS VALID
8- DIOP REV NUMBER
7- DIOP REV NUMBER
6- DIOP REV NUMBER
5- DIOP REV NUMBER
4- DIOP REV NUMBER
3-0- PADS 0
=

002/130 02/82 DISPLAY ANALOG I/O DISPLAY PROCESSOR STATUS

PROCESSOR AND DIGITAL 15- DPU/MPU IN TEST MODE
I/O 14- DPU/MPU ROLLING MONITOR CHECK FAULT
PROCESSORS 13- DP MPRAM WRITE CHECK FAULT
12- DPU/MPU IN CONTROL 0/1 =

11- BOX TYPE: DPU/MPU 0/1=

10- HEADING COMPARATOR VALID

9- PITCH COMPARATOR VALID
8- ROLL COMPARATOR VALID
7- ROMO1 CHECK SUM FAULT
6- ROM23 CHECK SUM FAULT
5- ROM45 CHECK SUM FAULT
4- ROM67 CHECK SUM FAULT
3-0- PADS 0
=

Revised 30 August 1993 5-39

 maintenance 523-0773945

Ta>le 5-6. DPU/M°U Multiport RA/PI (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

003/131 03/83 ANALOG I/O GENERAL SYNCHRO VALID BITS

PROCESSOR 15- PITCH SYNCHRO/AHRS PARAMETER VALID
14- ROLL SYNCHRO/AHRS PARAMETER VALID
13- HEADING SYNCHRO/AHRS PARAMETER VALID
12- VOR BEARING SYNCHRO VALID
11- ADF SYNCHRO VALID
10- BEARING-TO-WAYPOINT SYNCHRO VALID
9- DESIRED TRACK SYNCHRO VALID
8- NOT DEFINED
7- DCP SELECTED HEADING SYNC 1 =

6- DP DR ANNUN IN VIEW CTL BIT

5- DP MSG ANNUN IN VIEW CTL BIT
4- DP XTK ANNUN IN VIEW CTL BIT
3- ACTIVE DISTANCE ELEVATION CORRECTION
2- ACTIVE DISTANCE VALID
1- ACTIVE DATA ORIGIN
0- FULL-TIME ILS DATA ORIGIN

004/132 04/84 ANALOG I/O GENERAL ADF ANGLE

PROCESSOR 15- (-180.0)DEGREES
14- 90.0 DEGREES
13- 45.0 DEGREES
12- 22.5 DEGREES
11- 11.25 DEGREES
10- 5.625 DEGREES
9- 2.8125 DEGREES
8- 1.40625 DEGREES
7- 0.703125 DEGREE
6- 0.3515625 DEGREE
5- 0.17578125 DEGREE
4- 0.087890625 DEGREE
3- 0.043945313 DEGREE
2- 0.021972656 DEGREE
1- 0.010986328 DEGREE
0- 0.005493164 DEGREE

005/133 05/85 ANALOG I/O GENERAL DESIRED TRACK

DIGITAL I/O STD ANGULAR BINARY DATA FORMAT
PROCESSORS 15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 004/132

006/134 06/86 ANALOG I/O GENERAL BEARING-TO-WAYPOINT

DIGITAL I/O STD ANGULAR BINARY DATA FORMAT
PROCESSORS 15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 004/132

007/135 07/87 ANALOG I/O GENERAL VOR ANGLE

PROCESSOR STD ANGULAR BINARY DATA FORMAT
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 004/132

Revised 30 August 1993 5-40

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-6. DPU/M°U Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

008/136 08/88 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY RADIO ALTITUDE (FILTERED)

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- 2048 FEET
14- 1024 FEET
13- 512 FEET
12- 256 FEET
11- 128 FEET
10- 64 FEET
9- 32 FEET
8- 16 FEET
7- 8 FEET
6- 4 FEET
5- 2 FEET
4- 1 FOOT
3- 0.5 FOOT
2- 0.25 FOOT
1- 0.125 FOOT
0- 0.0625 FOOT

009/137 09/89 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE DEVIATION SCALED FOR DISPLAY
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- (-2048)VGU
14- 1024 VGU
13- 512 VGU
12- 256 VGU
11- 128 VGU
10- 64 VGU
9- 32 VGU
8- 16 VGU
7- 8 VGU
6- 4 VGU
5- 2 VGU
4- 1 VGU
3- 0.5 VGU
2- 0.25 VGU
1- 0.125 VGU
0- 0.0625 VGU

010/138 0A/8A ANALOG I/O GENERAL GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION

PROCESSOR 15- (-8) DOTS
14- 4 DOTS
13- 2 DOTS
12- 1 DOT
11- 0.5 DOT
10- 0.25 DOT
9- 0.125 DOT
8- 0.0625 DOT
7- 0.03125 DOT
6- 0.015625 DOT
5- 0.0078125 DOT
4- 0.00390625 DOT
3- 0.001953125 DOT
2- 0.000976563 DOT
1- 0.000488281 DOT
0- 0.000244141 DOT

Revised 30 August 1993 5-41

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-6. DPU/M°U Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

011/139 0B/8B ANALOG I/O GENERAL DME GROUND SPEED (BINARY)

PROCESSOR 15- 2048 KNOTS
14- 1024 KNOTS
13- 512 KNOTS
12- 256 KNOTS
11- 128 KNOTS
10- 64 KNOTS
9- 32 KNOTS
8- 16 KNOTS
7- 8 KNOTS
6- 4 KNOTS
5- 2 KNOTS
4- 1 KNOT
3-0- 0 KNOT

012/140 0C/8C ANALOG I/O GENERAL DME TIME-TO-GO (BINARY)

PROCESSOR 15- 204.8 MINUTES
14- 102.4 MINUTES
13- 51.2 MINUTES
12- 25.6 MINUTES
11- 12.8 MINUTES
10- 6.4 MINUTES
9- 3.2 MINUTES
8- 1.6 MINUTES
7- 0.8 MINUTE
6- 0.4 MINUTE
5- 0.2 MINUTE
4- 0.1 MINUTE
3- 0.05 MINUTE
2- 0.025 MINUTE
1- 0.0125 MINUTE
0- 0.00625 MINUTE

013/141 0D/8D ANALOG I/O GENERAL CROSSTRACK DEVIATION

DIGITAL I/O 15-0- (DOTS) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 010/138
PROCESSORS

014/142 0E/8E ANALOG I/O GENERAL DISCRETES, STRAPS (1-12)

PROCESSOR 15- STRAP 1 (FCS TYPE)
14- STRAP 2 (FCS TYPE)
13- STRAP 3 (FCS TYPE)
12- STRAP 4 (LRN MAG/TRUE)
11- STRAP 5 (NAV PORT TYPE)
10- STRAP 6 (NAV PORT TYPE)
9- STRAP 7 (RADIO ALT TYPE)
8- STRAP 8 (RADIO ALT TYPE)
7- STRAP 9 (XDTA FLAG DISPLAY ENABLE 1) =

6- STRAP 10 (VOR PORT TYPE; WITH STRAP 24)

5- STRAP 11 (SIDE)
4- STRAP 12 (COMPARATOR WARN CANCEL)
3- STRAP 13 (SPEED DEVIATION SOURCE SEL)
2- STRAP 14 (GYRO TYPE)
1- STRAP 15 (ADF TYPE; 3W/4W DC)
0- STRAP 16 (LRN SYNCHRO TYPE)

Revised 30 August 1993 5-42

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-6. DPU/M°U Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

015/143 OF/8F ANALOG I/O GENERAL DISCRETES, STRAPS (13-24)

PROCESSOR 15- STRAP 13 (SPEED DEVIATION SOURCE SEL)
14- STRAP 14 (GYRO TYPE)
13- STRAP 15 (ADF TYPE; 3W/4W DC)
12- STRAP 16 (LRN SYNCHRO TYPE)
11- STRAP 17 (TRUE/MAG)
10- STRAP 18 (VNAV ON)
9- STRAP 19 (COMPOSITE/NO COMPOSITE)
8- STRAP 20 (V-BAR/CROSSPOINTER)
7- STRAP 21 (LINEAR DEVIATION ENABLE)
6- STRAP 22 (MASTER WARN RESET)
5- STRAP 23 (SPEED DEVIATION SOURCE SEL)
4- STRAP 24 (VOR PORT TYPE; WITH STRAP 10)
3-0- PADS 0
=

016/144 10/90 ANALOG I/O GENERAL DISCRETE INPUTS

PROCESSOR 15- DELAYED ILS MODE
14- VOR SELF-TEST FLAG
13- LRN 6-WIRE ONLY 0; STRAP 31
=

12- DME HOLD (HOLD 1) =

11- DRIVE TRANSFER

10- COMPOSITE/OFF
9- OFF/COMPOSITE
8- AIR DATA DISPLAY DISABLE; STRAP 27
7- FLIGHT DIRECTOR OFF
6- FLIGHT DIRECTOR IN-VIEW BIAS
5- FLIGHT DIRECTOR VALID HIGH FLAG
4- LRN/INS VALID
3- SPARE
2- ADF VALID 1 =

1- DUAL CHP; STRAP 30

0- DG/SLAVED 0/1 =

017/145 11/91 ANALOG I/O GENERAL DISCRETE INPUTS

PROCESSOR 15- RADIO ALTIMETER VALID
14- DME VALID
13- ATTITUDE VALID
12- HEADING VALID
11- AIR DATA COMPUTER VALID
10- VOR/LOC VALID
9- GLIDESLOPE VALID
8- SPEED/AOA VALID
7- NOT DEFINED
6- ADF VALID =1

5- DUAL CHP; STRAP 30

4- DG/SLAVED 0/1 =

3-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 30 August 1993 543

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-6. DPU/M°U Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

018/146 12/92 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, CALCULATED

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP SPEED DEVIATION FLAG IN VIEW
14- DP SPEED DEVIATION SCALE IN VIEW
13- DP V-BARS IN VIEW
12- DP V-BAR AIRCRAFT IN VIEW
11- DP CROSS POINTERS IN VIEW
10- DP CROSS POINTER AIRCRAFT IN VIEW
9- DP FLIGHT DIRECTOR FLAG IN VIEW
8- FLIGHT DIRECTOR COMMANDS IN VIEW
7- DP EXTREME ATTITUDE MODE IN VIEW
6- DP XSIDE DATA FLAG IN VIEW
5- DP DCP FLAG IN VIEW
4- DP ALTERNATE DCP ANNUN IN VIEW
3-0- NOT DEFINED

019/147 13/93 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, CALCULATED (ALS ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE)
=

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP HSI DEVN BAR/ADI DEVN POINTER IN VIEW

14- DP HSI DEVN SCALE/ADI DEVN SCALE IN VIEW
13- DP COURSE POINTER IN VIEW
12- DP ALS FROM POINTER IN VIEW
11- DP ALS TO POINTER IN VIEW
10- DP HSI NAV DEVIATION FLAG IN VIEW
9- DP ALS MENU MODE
8- DP COURSE CONTROL DOT
7- NOT DEFINED
6- LRN FROM STATUS
5- LRN TO STATUS
4- ANALOG VNI ON
3- DELAYED GS/MLS/ANALOG VNI VALID 1 =

2- HEADING ERROR VALID

1- ACTIVE HEADING ERROR VALID
0- ALS XSIDE DATA BEING USED

020/148 14/94 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, CALCULATED

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP DEVIATION BAR IN VIEW
14- NOT DEFINED
13- DP COURSE POINTER IN VIEW
12- DP PLD DME FLAG IN VIEW CTL BIT
11- DP PLD DME HOLD IN VIEW CTL BIT
10- DP PRESEL LATERAL SOURCE NAV FLAG
9- DP PRESEL LATERAL SOURCE MENU MODE
8- DP COURSE CONTROL DOT
7-1- NOT DEFINED
0- PRESEL LATERAL SOURCE XSIDE DATA BEING USED

021/149 15/95 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, CALCULATED

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- ACTIVE BEARING SOURCE LRN MODE
14- ACTIVE BEARING SOURCE VOR MODE
13- ACTIVE BEARING SOURCE ILS MODE
12- ACTIVE BEARING SOURCE ADF MODE
11- DP ACTIVE BEARING SOURCE POINTER IN VIEW
10- DP ACTIVE BEARING SOURCE NAV FLAG
9- DP ACTIVE BEARING SOURCE MENU MODE
8- MENU BOX/MASTER FLASH CONTROL BIT
7-1- NOT DEFINED
0- ACTIVE BEARING SOURCE XSIDE DATA BEING USED
I

Revised so August rass s-44

 maintenance 523-0773945

Ta>le 5-6. DPU/M U Multiport RAV (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

022/150 16/96 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE TIME-TO-GO (BINARY)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (MIN) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 012/140

023/151 17/97 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE DCP ELAPSED TIME MIN/SEC
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- M/S 80
14- M/S 40
13- M/S 20
12- M/S 10
11- M/S 8
10- M/S 4
9- M/S 2
8- M/S 1
7- ROM FAULT
6- RAM FAULT
5- SW SR FAULT
4- AUX SR FAULT
3- SW SR FAULT
2- NOT DEFINED
1- CAT II REQUEST
0- DCP/DSP IDENT 0/1

024/152 18/98 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE DCP ELAPSED TIME HR/MIN
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- H/M 80
14- H/M 40
13- H/M 20
12- H/M 10
11- H/M 8
10- H/M 4
9- H/M 2
8- H/M 1
7-0- NOT DEFINED

025/153 19/99 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE DCP DECISION HEIGHT

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- PAD 0=

14-PAD=0
13- 512 FEET
12- 256 FEET
11- 128 FEET
10- 64 FEET
9- 32 FEET
8- 16 FEET
7- 8 FEET
6- 4 FEET
5- 2 FEET
4- 1 FOOT
3-0- 0 FOOT

026/154 1A/9A ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE BRG SOURCE BEARING ANGLE (CASE RELATED)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR STD ANGULAR BINARY DATA FORMAT
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 004/132

Revised 30 August 1993 5-45

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-6. DPU/M°U Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

027/155 1B/9B ANALOG I/O GENERAL DISCRETE INPUTS/ACTIVE DCP RANGE

PROCESSOR 15- STRAP 25 (ALTERNATE ATT)
14- STRAP 26 (ALTERNATE HEADING)
13- STRAP 28 (ALTERNATE DCP)
12- STRAP 29 (RISING RUNWAY INHIBIT)
11- OUTER MARKER
10- MIDDLE MARKER
9- INNER MARKER
8- LRN TO/FROM
7- ALTITUDE ALERT
6- DCP RANGE D2
5- DCP RANGE D1
4- DCP RANGE DO
3- DCP WIND SWITCH
2- DCP VNAV ENABLE SWITCH
1- DCP WXR ENABLE SWITCH
0- NOT DEFINED

028/156 1C/9C ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE GROUND SPEED (BINARY)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- 2048 KNOTS
14- 1024 KNOTS
13- 512 KNOTS
12- 256 KNOTS
11- 128 KNOTS
10- 64 KNOTS
9- 32 KNOTS
8- 16 KNOTS
7- 8 KNOTS
6- 4 KNOTS
5- 2 KNOTS
4- 1 KNOT
3- 0.5 KNOT
2- 0.25 KNOT
1- 0.125 KNOT
0- 0.0625 KNOT

029/157 1D/9D ANALOG I/O DISPLAY PRESET LATL SOURCE DESIRED TRACK
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR STD ANGULAR BINARY DATA FORMAT
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 004/132

030/158 1E/9E ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE LATL SOURCE DESIRED TRACK
PROCESSPR PROCESSOR STD ANGULAR BINARY DATA FORMAT
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 004/132

031/159 1F/9F ANALOG I/O DISPLAY CASE RELATED SELECTED HEADING

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR (ACTIVE FILTERED HEADING ERROR)
STD ANGULAR BINARY DATA FORMAT
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 004/132

Revised 30 August 1998 5-46

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-6. DPU/M°U Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

032/160 20/100 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ADC IAS (FILTERED)

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- (-512)KNOTS
14- 256 KNOTS
13- 128 KNOTS
12- 64 KNOTS
11- 32 KNOTS
10- 16 KNOTS
9- 8 KNOTS
8- 4 KNOTS
7- 2 KNOTS
6- 1 KNOT
5- 0.5 KNOT
4- 0.25 KNOT
3- 0.125 KNOT
2- 0.0625 KNOT
1- 0.03125 KNOT
0- 0.015625 KNOT

033/161 21/101 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DME DIST (BINARY -

MAP)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- 256 MILES
14- 128 MILES
13- 64 MILES
12- 32 MILES
11- 16 MILES
10- 8 MILES
9- 4 MILES
8- 2 MILES
7- 1 MILE
6- 0.5 MILE
5- 0.25 MILE
4- 0.125 MILE
3- 0.0625 MILE
2- 0.03125 MILE
1- 0.015625 MILE
0- 0.0078125 MILE

034/162 22/102 ANALOG I/O TREND ADC TAS

PROCESSOR VECTOR 15-0 (KNOTS) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 032/160
GENERATOR

Revised 30 August 1993 5-47

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-6. DPU/M°U Multiport RANI (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

035/163 23/103 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DME DISTANCE (BCD)

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- STATUS
14- STATUS
13- 200 MILES
12- 100 MILES
11- 80 MILES
10- 40 MILES
9- 20 MILES
8- 10 MILES
7- 8 MILES
6- 4 MILES
5- 2 MILES
4- 1 MILE
3- 0.8 MILE
2- 0.4 MILE
1- 0.2 MILE
0- 0.1 MILE

036/164 24/104 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, CALCULATED

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE ANNUN IN VIEW
14- DP PRESET LATERAL SOURCE ANNUN IN VIEW
13- DP ACTIVE BEARING SOURCE ANNUN IN VIEW
12- DP ATT SOURCE; ATT1/ATT2 0/1 =

11- DP BACK LOC ANNUN IN VIEW CTL BIT

10- DP ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE DME HOLD
9- GROUND SPEED DATA VALID
8- TIME-TO-GO DATA VALID
7- ACTIVE ATT SOURCE VALID
6- ACTIVE HEADING SOURCE VALID
5- ACTIVE HEADING TRUE/MAG STRAP 0/1 =

4- ACTIVE HEADING DG/SLAVED 0/1 =

3- HEADING TRUE/MAG 0/1=

2-0- NOT DEFINED

037/165 25/105 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ADI ACTIVE VERTICAL DEVIATION

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (VGU) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/137

038/166 26/106 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, ADI MODE

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP VMO ALERT IN VIEW CTL BIT
14- DP VMO WARN IN VIEW CTL BIT
13- DP VMO YELLOW DIGITS IN VIEW CTL BIT
12- DP HSI VERTICAL DEVIATION SCALE IN VIEW
11- DP HSI VERTICAL DEVIATION POINTER IN VIEW
10- DP HSI VERTICAL DEVIATION FLAG IN VIEW
9- DP DH ANNUN IN VIEW
8- DP DH SET IN VIEW
7- DP RADIO ALTITUDE IN VIEW
6- DP RADIO ALTITUDE FLAG IN VIEW
5- DP ATT SCALE IN VIEW (SKY RASTER ALSO)
4- DP ACTIVE ATT FLAG IN VIEW
3- BACK LOC MODE
2- ACTIVE GS VALID
1- NOT DEFINED
0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 30 August 1993 5-48

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-8. DPU/M°U Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

039/167 27/107 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, HSI MODE

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP DIGITAL SEL COURSE DATA IN VIEW
14- DP TRUE LUBBER IN VIEW
13- DP MAG LUBBER IN VIEW
12- DP HEADING FLAG IN VIEW
11- DP ACTIVE LATL SOURCE LIN ANNUN IN VIEW
10- DP HEADING SOURCE: HEADINGl/HEADING2 0/1 =

9- DP REVERSE ADI LATL DEVIATION POINTER SENSING

8- DP ACTIVE LATL SOURCE ANG ANNUN IN VIEW
7- DP SECTOR MODE SHDG LINE IN VIEW CTL BIT
6- DP DG ANNUN IN VIEW CTL BIT
5- DP ACTIVE MAP VALID CTL BIT
4- DP PRESEL MAP VALID CTL BIT
3-0- NOT DEFINED

040/168 28/108 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE DISTANCE (BINARY) VARIABLE
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR RESOLUTION
15- 2048 OR 204.8 MILES
14- 1024 OR 102.4 MILES
13- 512 OR 51.2 MILES
12- 256 OR 25.6 MILES
11- 128 OR 12.8 MILES
10- 64 OR 6.4 MILES
9- 32 OR 3.2 MILES
8- 16 OR 1.6 MILES
7- 8 OR 0.8 MILE
6- 4 OR 0.4 MILE
5- 2 OR 0.2 MILE
4- 1 OR 0.1 MILE
3- 0.5 OR 0.05 MILE
2- 0.25 OR 0.025 MILE
1- 0.12 OR 0.012 MILE
0- 0.06 OR 0.006 MILE

041/169 29/109 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY SPEED DEVIATION OR AOA DEVIATION IN VGU
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0 (VGU) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/137

Revised 30 August 1993 5-49

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-6. DPU/M°U Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

042/170 2A/10A DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY TWR-850 MODES

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR MPU/DPU SERVICE BULLETINS 25 AND 35 ADD THE TWR-850
MODES.
Note

THIS LOCATION WILL EQUAL FFFF WHEN A WXP-85

IS SELECTED (OR WXP-850 IS TURNED OFF).
15- G4 BITS: G4 G2 G1 GAIN
14- G2 0 0 0 G-3
13- Gl 0 0 1 G-2
010G-1
0 1 1 BLANK
1 0 0 G+1
1 0 1 G+2
1 1 0 G+3
12- STAB 1 BLANK, 0 DISPLAY USTB
= =

11- AUTOTILT 0 BLANK, 1 DISPLAY A

= =

10- TILT SIGN 0 +, 1

= = -

9- TILT 8.00 DEGREES MAGNITUDE

8- TILT 4.00 DEGREES
7- TILT 2.00 DEGREES
6- TILT 1.00 DEGREE
5- TILT 0.50 DEGREE
4- TILT 0.25 DEGREE
3-0- PADS 0
=

043/171 2B/10B ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE BEARING-TO-WAYPOINT

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR STD ANGULAR BINARY DATA FORMAT
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 004/132

044/172 2C/10C ANALOG I/O GENERAL LOC DEVIATION

PROCESSOR 15-0- (DOTS) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 010/138

045/173 2D/10D ANALOG I/O DISPLAY PRESET LATERAL SOURCE BEARING-TO-WAYPOINT

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR STD ANGULAR BINARY DATA FORMAT
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 004/132

046/174 2E/10E ANALOG I/O DISPLAY PRESET LATERAL SOURCE LATERAL DEVIATION
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR SCALED FOR DISPLAY
15-0- (VGU) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/137

Revised 30 August 1993 5-50

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-6. DPU/M°U Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

047/175 2F/10F ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, CALCULATED

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP DCP/DSP ANNUN IDENT BIT 0/1 =

14- LRN TRUE/MAG 1/0

=

13- LRN DISTANCE VALID 1 =

12- DP BRG1 XSIDE DATA USED ANNUN IN VIEW

11- DP ACTIVE LATL SOURCE DIST DATA-X-1
10- DP ACTIVE LATL SOURCE DIST DATA-X-0.1
9- DP ACTIVE LATL SOURCE DIST NCD IN VIEW
8- DP ACTIVE LATL SOURCE DIST FLAG IN VIEW
7- LRN VALID 1 =

6- LRN BEARING VALID 1 =

5- LRN MAP DISPLAY VALID 1 =

4- LRN AP DEVIATION VALID 1 =

3- LRN AP SOURCE DATA VALID 1 =

2- LRN AP NAV SOURCE VALID 1 =

1- LRN GROUND SPEED VALID 1 =

0- LRN TIME TO GO VALID 1 =

048/176 30/110 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, CALCULATED

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP ADI VERTICAL DEVN SCALE/POINTER IN VIEW
14- DP ADI VERTICAL DEVN FLAG IN VIEW
13- DP ADI B/L ANNUN IN VIEW
12- DP HSI B/L ANNUN IN VIEW
11- DP HSI VNAV COLOR; 0/1 ON-SIDE/XSIDE
=

10- DP ADI LATERAL DEVN FLAG IN VIEW CTL BIT

9- NOT DEFINED
8- DP ACT LATL SOURCE XSIDE SOURCE ANNUN IN VIEW
7- DP ADI VERTICAL DEVIATION SOURCE TYPE
6- DP ADI VERTICAL DEVIATION SOURCE TYPE
5- DP HSI VERTICAL DEVIATION SOURCE TYPE
4- DP HSI VERTICAL DEVIATION SOURCE TYPE
3-1- NOT DEFINED
0- ALTITUDE DEVIATION ENABLE 1 =

049/177 31/111 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, CALCULATED (ALS ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE)
=

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- ALS LRN PORT

14- ALS VOR PORT
13- ALS ILS PORT
12- ALS LOC MODE AND ILS PORT
11- ACTIVE APPROACH MODE
10- ALS TRUE/MAG: 0/1
9- ACTIVE BEARING SOURCE TRUE/MAG: 0/1
8- PRESEL LATL SOURCE TRUE/MAG:0/1
7- DP HEADING TRUE/MAG CONFLICT 1 =

6-0- NOT DEFINED

050/178 32/112 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, CALCULATED

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP NAV DATA FLAG IN VIEW
14- DP ALS GROUND SPEED NAV DATA IN VIEW
13- DP ALS TIME-TO-GO NAV DATA IN VIEW
12- DP ALS GROUND SPEED NCD IN VIEW
11- DP ALS TIME-TO-GO NCD IN VIEW
10- DP ALS OUTER MARKER IN VIEW
9- DP ALS MIDDLE MARKER IN VIEW
8- DP ALS INNER MARKER IN VIEW
7-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 30 August 1993 5-51

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-6. DPU/M°U Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

051/179 33/113 NOT ASSIGNED

052/180 34/114 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL PRO LINE II BUS STATUS BITS
PROCESSOR 15- NOT DEFINED
14- NOT DEFINED
13- NOT DEFINED
12- AHRS ATT VALID
11- AHRS HEADING VALID
10- FCS PITCH STEERING VALID
9- FCS ROLL STEERING VALID
8- NOT DEFINED
7- AHRS IN TEST MODE
6- NOT DEFINED
5- MAG VAR VALID
4- LRN STATUS VALID
3- LRN 6-WIRE BEARING-TO-WAYPOINT VALID = 1
2- LRN 6-WIRE DESIRED TRACK VALID 1 =

1- LRN 6-WIRE DISPLAY DEVIATION VALID 1 =

0- NOT DEFINED

053/181 35/115 ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O ACTIVE DISTANCE FOR EFIS XMIT BUS (BINARY)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- (-2048)MILES
14- 1024 MILES
13- 512 MILES
12- 256 MILES
11- 128 MILES
10- 64 MILES
9- 32 MILES
8- 16 MILES
7- 8 MILES
6- 4 MILES
5- 2 MILES
4- 1 MILE
3- 0.5 MILE
2- 0.25 MILE
1- 0.125 MILE
0- 0.0625 MILE

054/182 36/116 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE DCP MODES

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- RA TEST
14- DH SET ON
13- ENROUTE MODE
12- APPROACH MODE
11- ROSE MODE
10- ET
9- SPD
8- TTG
7- WIND SWITCH
6- VNAV SWITCH
5- WX SWITCH
4- NOT DEFINED
3- ALTITUDE ALERT CTL BIT
2- RANGE D2
1- RANGE D1
0- RANGE D0

Revised 30 August 1993 5-5ß

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-6. DPU/M°U Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

055/183 37/117 DISPLAY DIGITAL I/O JOYSTICK CURSOR BEARING

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR STD ANGULAR BINARY DATA FORMAT
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 004/132

056/184 38/118 DISPLAY DIGITAL I/O JOYSTICK CURSOR DISTANCE

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- (-512)MILES
14- 256 MILES
13- 128 MILES
12- 64 MILES
11- 32 MILES
10- 16 MILES
9- 8 MILES
8- 4 MILES
7- 2 MILES
6- 1 MILE
5- 0.5 MILE
4- 0.25 MILE
3-0- PADS 0
=

057/185 39/119 DISPLAY DIGITAL I/O MFD KEY STATUS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- SELO
14- SEL1
13- SEL2
12- SEL3
11- J3
10- J2
9- J1
8- JO
7-4- NOT DEFINED
3-0- PADS 0=

058/186 3A/11A ANALOG I/O DISPLAY STEERING COMMAND, SCALED, FILTERED PITCH
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (VGU) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/137

059/187 3B/11B ANALOG I/O DISPLAY STEERING COMMAND, FILTERED ROLL

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR STD ANGULAR BINARY DATA FORMAT
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 004/132

060/188 3C/11C TREND DISPLAY ACCELERATION VECTOR IN VGU

VECTOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (VGU) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/137
GENERATOR

061/189 3D/11D AUDIO DISPLAY DME IDENT PROCESSOR ACTIVITY SR

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- NOT DEFINED

062/190 3E/11E DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O LRN STATUS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-12- NOT DEFINED
11- LRN 6-WIRE HSI VALID 1 =

10- LRN 6-WIRE TRUE MODE 1 =

9- FROM IN VIEW
8- TO IN VIEW
7- MSG
6- XTK
5- DR
4- ALERT
3-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 80 August 1993 5-53

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-6. DPU/M°U Multiport RA¥ (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

063/191 3F/11F ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O RADIO ALT (UNFILTERED) FOR CAT II
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (FEET) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 008/136

064/192 40/120 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DIGITAL VNAV DEVIATION

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- (-8192)FEET
14- 4096 FEET
13- 2048 FEET
12- 1024 FEET
11- 512 FEET
10- 256 FEET
9- 128 FEET
8- 64 FEET
7- 32 FEET
6- 16 FEET
5- 8 FEET
4- 4 FEET
3- 2 FEET
2- 1 FOOT
1- 0.5 FOOT
0- 0.25 FOOT

065/193 41/121 ANALOG I/O GENERAL PITCH STEERING COMMAND (RAW)

PROCESSOR STD ANGULAR BINARY DATA FORMAT
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 004/132

066/194 42/122 ANALOG I/O GENERAL ROLL STEERING COMMAND (RAW)

PROCESSOR STD ANGULAR BINARY DATA FORMAT
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 004/132

067/195 43/123 ANALOG I/O GENERAL HEADING ERROR (RAW)

PROCESSOR STD ANGULAR BINARY DATA FORMAT
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 004/132

068/196 44/124 TREND DISPLAY TVG REF AIRSPEED (RAS)

VECTOR PROCESSOR 15- PAD 0
=

GENERATOR 14- PAD 0

=

13- PAD 0
=

12- 256 KNOTS

11- 128 KNOTS
10- 64 KNOTS
9- 32 KNOTS
8- 16 KNOTS
7- 8 KNOTS
6- 4 KNOTS
5- 2 KNOTS
4- 1 KNOT
3-0- PADS 0=

069/197 45/125 ANALOG I/O GENERAL PITCH ATTITUDE (RAW)

PROCESSOR STD ANGULAR BINARY DATA FORMAT
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 004/132

070/198 46/126 ANALOG I/O GENERAL ROLL ATTITUDE (RAW)

PROCESSOR STD ANGULAR BINARY DATA FORMAT
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 004/132

Revised 30 August 1993 5-54

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-6. DPU/M°U Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

071/199 47/127 ANALOG I/O GENERAL HEADING ANGLE (RAW)

PROCESSOR STD ANGULAR BINARY DATA FORMAT
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 004/132

072/200 48/128 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR APS-65/85/86 MODES
15- GS EXTENSION
14- GS CAPTURE
13- GS ARM
12- NAV-1 CAPTURE
11- NAV-1 ARM
10- SPEED HOLD
9- ALTITUDE PRESEL CAPTURE
8- ALTITUDE PRESEL ARM
7- APPR CAPTURE
6- APPR ARM
5- SYNC SWITCH
4- REPORT CODE BAD
3- ALTITUDE HOLD
2- IAS HOLD
1- MACH HOLD
0- TEST

FGC-80 MODES
15- ALTITUDE PRESEL
14- VNAV CAPTURE
13- VNAV ARM
12- GLIDESLOPE CAPTURE
11- GLIDESLOPE ARM
10- HEADING HOLD
9- YD ENGAGE; YELLOW/GREEN = 1/0
8- DR
7- APPROACH
6- LATERAL CAPTURE
5- LATERAL ARM
4- HEADING SELECT
3-0- NOT DEFINED

073/201 49/129 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR APS-65/85/86 MODES
15- VS
14- CLIMB
13- GA PITCH
12- GA ROLL
11- PITCH
10- ROLL
9- VNAV CAPTURE
8- VNAV ARM
7- BC
6- DR
5- HEADING SELECT
4- HEADING HOLD
3- TRB
2- XFER
1- DESCENT
(Cont) 0- HALF BANK

Revised 30 August 1993 5-55

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-6. DPU/M°U Multiport RANI (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

073/201 FGC-80 MODES

(Cont) 15- ANNUNCIATOR TEST
14- ALTITUDE CAPTURE
13- TRIM
12- AP DISCONNECT STEADY
11- AP DISCONNECT FLASHING
10- AP TRANSFER
9- GA
8- PITCH HOLD
7- VS HOLD
6- IAS HOLD
5- MACH HOLD
4- ALTITUDE HOLD
3-0- NOT DEFINED

074/202 4A/12A DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR APS-65/85/86 MODES
15- RUD OUT OF TRIM
14- AIL OUT OF TRIM
13- ELE OUT OF TRIM
12- YD DISCONNECT
11- AP DISCONNECT
10- V-BAR IN VIEW
9- STEERING VALID
8- NOT DEFINED
7- HEADING SYNC
6- HEAVY
5- MEDIUM
4- LIGHT
3- YD ENGAGE
2- AP ENGAGE
1- DESCENT
0- NOT DEFINED

075/203 4B/12B DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR APS-65 MODES
15- VS REFERENCE
14- IAS REFERENCE
13- MACH REFERENCE
12- NOT DEFINED
11- NOT DEFINED
10- NOT DEFINED
9- NOT DEFINED
8- NOT DEFINED
7- DCP/DSP STRAP 24 (AP ENGAGED GND 1) = =

6- DCP/DSP STRAP 23
5- DCP/DSP STRAP 22 (YD ENGAGED GND 1) = =

4- DCP/DSP STRAP 21
3- DCP/DSP STRAP 20 (TRIM IN MOTION GND 1) = =

2- DCP/DSP STRAP 19 (AP XFER GND 1) = =

1- DCP/DSP STRAP 18 (SINGLE/DUAL, DUAL GND = =

1)
(Cont) 0- DCP/DSP STRAP 17 (SYNC SWITCH GND 1) = =

Revised 30 August 1993 5-56

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-6. DPU/M°U Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

075/203 FCC-85/86 MODES

(Cont) 15- VS REFERENCE
14- IAS REFERENCE
13- MACH REFERENCE
12- NOT DEFINED
11- NOT DEFINED
10- NOT DEFINED
9- NOT DEFINED
8- NOT DEFINED
7- DCP/DSP STRAP 24 (RUD TRIM ANNUN GND 1) = =

6- DCP/DSP STRAP 23 (AIL TRIM ANNUN GND 1) = =

5- DCP/DSP STRAP 22 (ELEV TRIM ANNUN GND 1) = =

4- DCP/DSP STRAP 21
3- DCP/DSP STRAP 20
2- DCP/DSP STRAP 19
1- DCP/DSP STRAP 18
0- DCP/DSP STRAP 17

076/204 4C/12C DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY FCC-85/86 REFERENCES

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR IF VS REFERENCE, THEN:
15- (-20480)FT/MIN
14- 10240 FT/MIN
13- 5120 FT/MIN
12- 2560 FT/MIN
11- 1280 FT/MIN
10- 640 FT/MIN
9- 320 FT/MIN
8- 160 FT/MIN
7- 80 FT/MIN
6- 40 FT/MIN
5- 20 FT/MIN
4- 10 FT/MIN
3- 5 FT/MIN
2- 2.5 FT/MIN
1- 1.25 FT/MIN
0- 0.625 FT/MIN

IF IAS REFERENCE, THEN:

15- (-512)KNOTS
14- 256 KNOTS
13- 128 KNOTS
12- 64 KNOTS
11- 32 KNOTS
10- 16 KNOTS
9- 8 KNOTS
8- 4 KNOTS
7- 2 KNOTS
6- 1 KNOT
5- 0.5 KNOT
4- 0.25 KNOT
3- 0.125 KNOT
2- 0.0625 KNOT
1- 0.03125 KNOT
(Cont) 0- 0.015625 KNOT

Revised 30 August 1993 5-57

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-6. DPU/M°U Multiport RA4f (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

076/204 IF MACH REFERENCE, THEN:

(Cont) 15- (-1.024)MACH
14- 0.512 MACH
13- 0.256 MACH
12- 0.128 MACH
11- 0.064 MACH
10- 0.032 MACH
9- 0.016 MACH
8- 0.008 MACH
7- 0.004 MACH
6- 0.002 MACH
5- 0.001 MACH
4- 0.0005 MACH
3- 0.00025 MACH
2- 0.000125 MACH
1- 0.0000625 MACH
0- 0.00003125 MACH

077/205 4D/12D DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DCP/DSP MODES

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-RATEST
14- DH SET ON
13- ENROUTE MODE
12- APPR MODE
11- ROSE MODE
10- ET
9- SPD
8- TTG
7- WIND SWITCH
6- VNAV SWITCH
5- WX SWITCH
4- NOT DEFINED
3- ALTITUDE ALERT CTL BIT
2- RANGE D2
1- RANGE D1
0- RANGE DO

078/206 4E/12E ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE/PRESEL DCP/DSP SELECT MASKS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- ACTIVE LRN2 SELECTED
14- ACTIVE LRN1 SELECTED
13- ACTIVE ADF2 SELECTED
12- ACTIVE ADF1 SELECTED
11- ACTIVE V/L2 SELECTED
10- ACTIVE V/L1 SELECTED
9- PRESEL LRN2 SELECTED
8- PRESEL LRN1 SELECTED
7- PRESEL ADF2 SELECTED
6- PRESEL ADF1 SELECTED
5- PRESEL V/L2 SELECTED
4- PRESEL V/L1 SELECTED
3-0- NOT DEFINED

I
Revised 30 August 1998 5-58
 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RA¥ (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

079/207 4F/12F DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DCP/DSP ELAPSED TIME -

MIN/SEC
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- M/S 80
14- M/S 40
13- M/S 20
12- M/S 10
11- M/S 8
10- M/S 4
9- M/S 2
8- M/S 1
7- ROM FAULT
6- RAM FAULT
5- SW SR FAULT
4- AUX SR FAULT
3- SW SR FAULT
2- NOT DEFINED
1- CAT II REQUEST
0- DCP/DSP IDENT 0/1

080/208 50/130 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DCP/DSP ELAPSED TIME - HR/MIN
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- H/M 80
14- H/M 40
13- H/M 20
12- H/M 10
11- H/M 8
10- H/M 4
9- H/M 2
8- H/M 1
7-0- NOT DEFINED

081/209 51/131 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DCP/DSP ACTIVE BEARING MASK
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- LRN2
14- LRN1
13- ADF2
12- ADF1
11- VOR/LOC2
10- VOR/LOC1
9- MENU MODE
8- SPARE
PILOT SIDE
7- BIT 3 (15-0) OF MPRAM (DH)
6- BIT 1 (15-0) OF MPRAM (DH)
5- BIT 0 (15-0) OF MPRAM (DH)
4- BIT 2 (15-0) OF MPRAM (DH)
3-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 30 August 1998 5-59

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-6. DPU/M°U Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

082/210 52/132 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DCP/DSP PRESET COURSE SENSOR MASK
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- LRN2
14- LRN1
13- ADF2
12- ADF1
11- VOR/LOC2
10- VOR/LOC1
9- MENU MODE
8- COURSE CONTROL FLAG
COPILOT SIDE
7- BIT 3 (15-0) OF MPRAM (DH)
6- BIT 1 (15-0) OF MPRAM (DH)
5- BIT 0 (15-0) OF MPRAM (DH)
4- BIT 2 (15-0) OF MPRAM (DH)
3-0- NOT DEFINED

083/211 53/133 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DCP ACTIVE COURSE SENSOR MASK
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- LRN2
14- LRN1
13- ADF2
12- ADF1
11- VOR/LOC2
10- VOR/LOC1
9- MENU MODE
8- COURSE CONTROL FLAG
7-0- NOT DEFINED

084/212 54/134 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DCP MENU MASK

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- LRN2
14- LRN1
13- ADF2
12- ADF1
11- VOR/LOC2
10- VOR/LOC1
9- SPARE 0
=

8- SPARE 0
=

7-0- NOT DEFINED

085/213 55/135 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE WXP MODES

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- TGT .AND. TGT ENABLE
14- R4
13- R2
12- R1
11- M8
10- M4
9- M2
8- M1
7- TGT
6-0- PADS 0 =

086/214 56/136 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY FD ANNUNCIATORS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- PAD 0
=

14-10- VERTICAL CAPTURE ANNUN

9-PAD=0
8-4- LATERAL CAPTURE ANNUN
3-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 30 August 1993 5-60

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-6. DPU/M°U Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

087/215 57/137 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DCP ACTIVE COURSE

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR STD ANGULAR BINARY DATA FORMAT
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 004/132

088/216 58/138 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DCP PRESET COURSE

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR STD ANGULAR BINARY DATA FORMAT
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 004/132

089/217 59/139 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DCP SELECTED HEADING

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR STD ANGULAR BINARY DATA FORMAT 15-0- (DEGREES) SAME
AS DEC LOCATION 004/132

090/218 5A/13A ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE SELECTED HEADING DIGITAL DISPLAY DATA
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR
Note
DATA IS 0 TO 359 DEGREES INCLUSIVE.

15-PAD=0
14- PAD 0
=

13- PAD 0
=

12- 256 DEGREES

11- 128 DEGREES
10- 64 DEGREES
9- 32 DEGREES
8- 16 DEGREES
7- 8 DEGREES
6- 4 DEGREES
5- 2 DEGREES
4- 1 DEGREE
3-0- NOT DEFINED

091/219 5B/13B DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DCP DECISION HEIGHT DATA (RAW)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (FEET) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 025/153

092/220 5C/13C ANALOG I/O DISPLAY AIOP TEST SHIFT REGISTER

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR

093/221 5D/13D DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DIOP TEST SHIFT REGISTER

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR

094/222 5E/13E DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY PROCESSOR TEST SHIFT REGISTER

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR

095/223 5F/13F ANALOG I/O TREND ACTIVE PITCH ANGLE (UNSCALED) FOR TVG CALC
PROCESSOR VECTOR 15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 004/132
GENERATOR

Revised 30 August 1993 5-61

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-6. DPU/M°U Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

096/224 60/140 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY CAT II DP COMPARATORS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP LOCALIZER COMPARATOR IN VIEW CTL BIT
14- DP GLIDESLOPE COMPARATOR IN VIEW CTL BIT
13- DP RADIO ALTITUDE COMPARATOR IN VIEW CTL BIT
12- DP PITCH COMPARATOR IN VIEW CTL BIT
11- DP ROLL COMPARATOR IN VIEW CTL BIT
10- DP HEADING COMPARATOR IN VIEW CTL BIT
9- DP *** SPARE COMPARATOR IN VIEW
8- DP *** SPARE COMPARATOR IN VIEW
7-2- NOT DEFINED
1- LOCALIZER EXCESSIVE DEVN TRIP VALID
0- GLIDESLOPE EXCESSIVE DEVN TRIP VALID

097/225 61/141 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MULTIPLEXED FCS DIAGNOSTIC DATA PORT
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR DIOP TO DISPLAY PROCESSOR:
BITS 15-8- WILL CONTAIN ASCII CHARACTERS FROM THE DIOP
BITS 7-4- WILL CONTAIN HANDSHAKE DATA FROM THE DIOP
BITS 3-0- NOT DEFINED

DISPLAY PROCESSOR TO DIOP:

BITS 15-4 WILL CONTAIN HANDSHAKE DATA FROM THE DP
BITS 3-0- NOT DEFINED
098/226 62/142 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY CAT II DP COMPARATOR STATUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP LOC EXCESS DEVIATION IN VIEW CTL BIT
14- DP GS EXCESS DEVIATION IN VIEW CTL BIT
13- NOT DEFINED
12- LOC VALID FOR 15 SEC
11- GS VALID FOR 15 SEC
10- NOT DEFINED
9- CAT II REQUEST
8- CAT II LIGHT CONDITIONS
7- RADIO ALT .LT. 50 FT
6- AL-101 AND GREATER THAN 480 FT
5- CAT II GA MODE
4- CAT II REQUEST VALID
3- RADIO ALT .LT. 1000 FT
2- RADIO ALT .LT. 600 FT
1- RADIO ALT .LT. 400 FT
0- RADIO ALT VALID AND ON SCALE

099/227 63/143 TREND DISPLAY TREND VECTOR GENERATOR SHIFT REGISTER

VECTOR PROCESSOR
GENERATOR

100/228 64/144 TREND DISPLAY TREND VECTOR STATUS

VECTOR PROCESSOR 15- LONGITUDINAL ACCELEROMETER VALID
GENERATOR 14- ACCELERATION VECTOR CALCULATION VALID
13- ACCELERATION VECTOR LIMIT, DRAW BAR
12- REFERENCE AIRSPEED VALID
11- TVG IN TEST MODE
10- SPARE
9- SPARE
8-4- TVG REV NUMBER
3-0- NOT DEFINED

I |
Revised 30 August 1998 5-62
 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-6. DPU/M°U Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

101/229 65/145 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, CALCULATED

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP AOA FLAG IN VIEW CTL BIT
14- ADC IAS VALID
13- DP REF AIRSPEED ANNUN IN VIEW CTL BIT
12- DP AOA ANNUN IN VIEW CTL BIT
11- DP IAS DATA IN VIEW CTL BIT
10- DP TVG DATA IN VIEW CTL BIT
9- ADC PRESEL ERROR VALID
8- DP ANALOG F/S SPEED ANNUN IN VIEW CTL BIT
7- DP ANALOG F/S SPEED FLAG IN VIEW CTL BIT
6- NOT DEFINED
5- ADC VMO VALID
4- ADC TAS VALID
3-0- NOT DEFINED

102/230 66/146 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE HEADING ANGLE STD ANGULAR BINARY DATA
FORMAT
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 004/132

103/231 67/147 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE ROLL ANGLE

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR STD ANGULAR BINARY DATA FORMAT
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 004/132

104/232 68/148 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE PITCH ANGLE

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (VGU) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/137

105/233 69/149 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O LRN DISTANCE TO GO

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR (BCD 1, 0.1)
-

15- 8 MILES
14- 4 MILES
13- 2 MILES
12- 1 MILE
11- 0.8 MILE
10- 0.4 MILE
9- 0.2 MILE
8- 0.1 MILE
7-0- NOT DEFINED

106/234 6A/14A DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O LRN DISTANCE TO GO

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR (BCD 1000, 100, 10)
-

15- STATUS
14- STATUS
13- 2000 MILES
12- 1000 MILES
11- 800 MILES
10- 400 MILES
9- 200 MILES
8- 100 MILES
7- 80 MILES
6- 40 MILES
5- 20 MILES
4- 10 MILES
3-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 30 August 1993 5-63

 maintenance 523-0773945

Ta.>le 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAY (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

107/235 6B/14B ANALOG I/O TREND ADC IAS (RAW)

PROCESSOR VECTOR 15-0- (KNOTS) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 032/160
GENERATOR

108/236 6C/14C DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O LRN TIME-TO-GO

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR (BCD 100, 10, 1, 0.1)
-

15- STATUS
14- STATUS
13- 200 MINUTES
12- 100 MINUTES
11- 80 MINUTES
10- 40 MINUTES
9- 20 MINUTES
8- 10 MINUTES
7- 8 MINUTES
6- 4 MINUTES
5- 2 MINUTES
4- 1 MINUTE
3- 0.8 MINUTE
2- 0.4 MINUTE
1- 0.2 MINUTE
0- 0.1 MINUTE

109/237 6D/14D ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O ACTIVE SELECTED HEADING ERROR
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 004/132

110/238 6E/14E DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O LRN GROUND SPEED

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR (BCD 1000, 100, 10, 1)
-

15- STATUS
14- STATUS
13- 2000 KNOTS
12- 1000 KNOTS
11- 800 KNOTS
10- 400 KNOTS
9- 200 KNOTS
8- 100 KNOTS
7- 80 KNOTS
6- 40 KNOTS
5- 20 KNOTS
4- 10 KNOTS
3- 8 KNOTS
2- 4 KNOTS
1- 2 KNOTS
0- 1 KNOT

111/239 6F/14F DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O VNI-80 STATUS BITS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- PITCH COMMAND VALID 1 =

14- VERTICAL DEVIATION VALID =

1
13- VERT CLEAR
12- VNI-80 STANDBY MODE 1 =

11- FCS VNAV CAPTURE 1 =

10- CAPTURE ALERT ON 1 =

9- VNI-80 LRN IDENT

8- VNI-80 DATA IDENT
7-0- PADS 0=

Revised 30 August 1993 5-64

 maintenance 523-0773945

Ta3le 5-6. DPU/M'U Multiport RA/PI (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

112/240 70/150 DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O LRN BANK COMMAND

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- (-180.0)DEGREES
14- 90.0 DEGREES
13- 45.0 DEGREES
12- 22.5 DEGREES
11- 11.25 DEGREES
10- 5.625 DEGREES
9- 2.8125 DEGREES
8- 1.40625 DEGREES
7- 0.703125 DEGREE
6- 0.3515625 DEGEREE
5- 0.17578125 DEGREE
4- 0.087890625 DEGREE
3- BANK COMMAND VALID 1 =

2- BANK COMMAND AVAILABLE = 1

1-0- NOT DEFINED

113/241 71/151 AUDIO DISPLAY DME IDENT

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- CHARACTER IDENT
14- CHARACTER IDENT
13- OFFSET ASCII 6 (MSB)
12- OFFSET ASCII 5
11- OFFSET ASCII 4
10- OFFSET ASCII 3
9- OFFSET ASCII 2
8- OFFSET ASCII 1 (LSB)
7-4- AUDIO IOP REV NUMBER
3-0- NOT DEFINED

114/242 72/152 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY FD ANNUNCIATORS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- PAD 0
=

14-PAD=0
13- THIRD VERTICAL ARM
12-4- LATERAL ARMED ANNUN
7- YD ANNUN
6- YD ANNUN
5-PAD=0
4- BC ANNUN IN VIEW
3-0- PAD 0 =

115/243 73/153 ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O ACTIVE SELECTED COURSE ERROR
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 004/132

116/244 74/154 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O ACTIVE LATERAL DEVIATION

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (DOTS) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 010/138

117/245 75/155 TREND ANALOG I/O TVG (ACCELERATION + 10 SEC)

VECTOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (KNOTS) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 032/160
GENERATOR

118/246 76/156 ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O ACTIVE VERTICAL DEVIATION

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (DOTS) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 010/138

119/247 77/157 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY IAS DISPLAY BASE OFFSET IN VGU's
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (VGU) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/137

Revised 30 August 1993 5-65

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-6. DPU/M°U Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions (Cont).

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

120/248 78/158 ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O FULL-TIME LOCALIZER DEVIATION

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (DOTS) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 010/138

121/249 79/159 ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O FULL-TIME GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (DOTS) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 010/138

122/250 7A/15A ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O EFIS XMIT BUS DISCRETES
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- NAV PULSE
14- GS DISPLAY ON
13- VNAV DISPLAY ON
12- ACTIVE LIN/ANG
11- ACTIVE SCRS VALID
10- CRS ERROR VALID
9- ACTIVE LNAV SCALE CODE
8- ACTIVE LNAV SCALE CODE
7- ACTIVE TO
6- ACTIVE FROM
5- DH TRIP
4- ACTIVE LATERAL DEVN VALID
3- ACTIVE VERTICAL DEVN VALID
2- ACTIVE DME HOLD
1- FULL-TIME LOCALIZER VALID
0- FULL-TIME GLIDESLOPE VALID

123/251 7B/15B ANALOG I/O DISPLAY SCALED HSI VNAV DEVIATION

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (VGU) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/137

124/252 7C/15C ANALOG I/O DISPLAY FD ANNUNCIATORS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- FCC-85 RUD TRIM ANNUN
14- FCC-85 AIL TRIM ANNUN
13- FCC-85 ELEV TRIM ANNUN
12- APS-65 TRIM ANNUN
11- SYNC ANNUN
10- FIRST VERT ARMED ANNUN
9- FIRST VERT ARMED ANNUN
8- SECOND VERT ARMED ANNUN
7-4- AP ENGAGE ANNUN
3-0- PADS 0 =

125/253 7D/15D ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE/PRESET SOURCE TYPE

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- PAD 0
=

14-10- ACTIVE SOURCE TYPE

9-PAD=0
8-4- PRESET SOURCE TYPE
3-0- PAD 0 =

126/254 7E/15E ANALOG I/O DISPLAY BEARING/MENU SOURCE TYPE

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- PAD 0
=

14-10- BEARING SOURCE TYPE

9- PAD 0
=

8-4- MENU SOURCE TYPE

3-0- PAD 0 =

127/255 7F/15F DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MULTIPLEXED LRN MAP DATA

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-8- MULTIPLEXED DATA
7-4- DATA LABEL
3-0- NOT DEFINED

I nevissaso aussse rass s-se

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-7. MFD RAM Decimal Locations With Definitions.

DECIMAL
DEFINITION
LOCATION

000-239 The 240 characters last displayed on the MFD in PAGE, EMG, or RMT mode. (Upper 8
bits only.)

240 (Note 1) X position of joystick

241 (Note 1) Y position of joystick

242 MFD MODES

11- Enter joystick position (active for 20 ms)
10- Not used
9- Not used
8- Radar
7- NAV
6- Remote
5- Page
4- Emergency
3-0 Not used

243 Remote Mode Joystick and Select

11- RMT 1
10- RMT 2
9- RMT 3
8- RMT 4
7- Joystick left
6- Joystick down
5- Joystick right
4- Joystick up
3-0 Not used

244 Remote Mode Selected Device

11-8 Not used
7- RMT 1
6- RMT 2
5- RMT 3
4- RMT 4
3-0 Not used

245 Selected Range When No Radar

HEX RANGE (NM)

700 600
600 300
500 200
400 100
300 50
200 25
100 10
000 5

246 Menu Mode (RMT or NAV only)

11- Menu Mode Active
10-0 Not used

Revised 30 August 1993 5-67

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-7. MFD RAM Decimal Locations With Definitions (Cont).

DECIMAL
DEFINITION
LOCATION

247 Selected NAV Sources

11- Not used
10- Not used
9- HDG
8- Not used
7- LRN 1
6- LRN 2
5- VOR 1
4- VOR 2
3-0 Not used

248 (Note 2) MFD Internal Test 1

Word
253 (HEX)
010 RD1 Register
020 MDE Register
030 See Word 253
040 Lower RAM "1" Check address
050 Lower EEPROM Address
060 Lower EEPROM Address

249 (Note 2) MFD Internal Test 1

Word
253 (HEX)
010 RD2 Register
020 JOYSW Register
030 See Word 253
040 Lower RAM "1" Check address
050 Upper EEPROM Address
060 Upper EEPROM Address

250 (Note 2) MFD Internal Test 1

Word
253 (HEX)
010 RD3 Register
020 PGESW Register
030 See Word 253
040 Diagnostic Data
050 No Data
060 No Data

251 (Note 2) MFD Internal Test 2, SELSW Register

252 (Note 2) MFD Internal Test 2, RDPSW Register

253 (Notes 2 and 3) MFD Internal Test 1 Mode Counter

HEX VALUE
010 RD Register Contents Displayed
020 MDE, JOYSW, PGESW Registers Contents Displayed
030 Joystick X and Y Position Data Displayed (240 and 241)
040 RAM and Diagnostic Data Displayed
050 EEPROM Addresses Displayed (Data out of MFD)
060 EEPROM Addresses Displayed (Data into MFD)

254 Not used

Revised 30 August 1993 5-68

 maintenance 523-0773945

Table 5-7. MFD RAM Decimal Locations With Definitions (Cont).

DECIMAL
DEFINITION
LOCATION

255 MFD Software REV Number

11-4 REV Number
3-0 Not used

Note 1: All words use upper 8 bits of MPR except these which use all 12 bits.

Note 2: These words are only valid if the MFD is placed in self-test.

Note 3: The test mode counter is incremented by holding the top select button for longer than 5
seconds.

Revised 30 August 1993 5-69

 maintenance 523-0773945

A/C EDGE GND

LIGHENG

28 Y DC PWR DPU OATA IN

DPU MPU DPU •--
c

RSEn/ ALDATA
CROSS-SIDE DATA
CHP Co DG DCP CON O
SWITCH POSITIONS

NO. 1 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE NO. 1 SlDE NO. 2 SIDE MPU DATA IN
DATA DATA DATA DATA MPU •-9

LOCATONS LOCATONS LOCATONS LOCATONS (EITHER)

0 128 0 128
ANNN AT/OR DISCRETES
DISCRETES

127 255 127 255

LCR

I NO. 1 SYSTEMS

RAM Map
Figure 5-3
NO. 2 SYSTEMS
CGO-2206-06-AC-1
N
AT/OR

DISCRETES
ANNUNCIATOR

Control Interface
Figure 5-4
SERIALDATA BUS

CGO-2206-06-AC-2

DEFLECTON,
PWR MON
DN N AnCE
EADI

DEFLECTON,
PWR GRN INTENSlTY,
MON VIDEO,RETRACE
GND MDEO, ETC GND
STRAPS TO EFD'S STRAPS

EADI PWR
PWR S LY PWR S LY
N
EHSI PWR -

DPU MPU
A DEF, GRN INT, VIDEO
DISPLAY
PROCESSOR N NO. 1
SYSTEMS - I
AND RETRACEFOR AUX DRIVE
A
NO. 2 SYSTEMSCROSS-S1DE DATA
DPU PWR----• DPU POWERSPLY SERIAL OATA
TO DCP

DPU
NO. 2

NORMAL/
AUX DRIVE CGO-2206-06-AC-3 CGO-2206-06-AC-4

DPU to EFD (ADI and HSI) Interface MPU to DPU Interface

Figure 5-5 Figure 5-6

Revised 30 August 1998 5-70

 maintenance 523-0773945

28 V DC MFD

CONTROL AND DEFLECTION,

CHECKLIST DATA GRN INTENSITY,
MDEO, RETRACE

NO. 1 AND NO. 2

AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS SERIAL DATA
TO DPU
GND STRAPS
MPU
28 V DC
SERIAL DATA
WXR DATA
FROM WXP
CHP/DCP
DCDATA

CHP
CGO-2206-06-AC-5

MPU to MFD Interface

Figure 5-7

RT ON, STBY
PRF +MOD TIMING
STC FIXED +5 V DC
GAIN

VIDEO 0, 1, 2, 3
RADAR RT FAULT DPU
WXT +5, -12 V DC

WXR CLK, DATA MDEO,

RADAR RETRACE, RANGE MARK
WXP-85/850
RETURNS

STAB |
RADAR TlLT | MPU
ANTENNA SCAN DRIVE A,B

CGO-2206-06-AC-6

Radar Interface
Figure 5-8

Revised 30 August 1993 5-71/(5-72 blask)

Collins EFIS-85B(2/12)
and EFIS-86B(2/12) Rockwell
International
Electronic Flight
Instrument SystemS bulletins
Collins General Aviation Division

Printed in USA e523-0773946-003118

3rd Edition, 30 August 1993

Service Bulletins and Service Information Letters

(Refer to latest edition/addendum of the General
Aviation Equipment Service Bulletin/Information
Letter Index 523-0766944 for up-to-date listing.)

SB/SIL
Number Unit Title Date

1-83R2 EFIS-85/86 Forced Air Cooling System Installation Jun 30/87

1-87 EFIS-85( )/86( ) EFIS Crt Maintenance Schedule and Brightness Measurements Oct 2/87
2-83 EFIS-85 Cross-Side Data Noise Problem Oct 15/83
3-83 EFIS-85 EFIS Interchangeability Oct 16/83
2-89R2 EFIS-85( )/86( ) Identification of EFIS System, Associated System Installation May 31/90
Manual, and Pilot's Guide
1-90 EFIS-85( )/86( ) LAC Lateral Accelerometer Installations Jun 22/90
1-93 All Avionics Removal of Protective Covers Jun 1/93

NOTICE: This section replaces second edition dated 6 April 1989.

 ínstallation523-0773942

P C P
Os TO ÔT sO

O2c"O O"o2O
L ÛY Q WÛ F F ÛW Q YÛ L
OxO×OoO OoO×OxO
o 6°6 ° ° 6°6 °

MAING CONNECTOR MAING CONNECTOR

(AS VIEWEDFROM WIRE SIDE) (AS VIEWEDFROM MABNG SIDE)

FOR CHP-868
P1 PIN ASSIGNMENTS

A COURSE DIRECEON P +5 V DC PWR (FROM DCP)

B HEADING DIRECTION R SIGNAL GND
C SPARE S CHASSIS GND
D SPARE T +5 V LIGHTING
E SPARE U +28 V UGHENG
F TIMER CONTROL V UGHENG GROUND
G COURSE CONTROL W SPARE
H COURSE SYNC X NAV DATA
J HEADING SYNC Y SPARE
K COURSE H Z SPARE
L COURSE L a SPARE
M HEADING H b SPARE
N HEADING L c SPARE

CGO-2560-01-AC-1

POOOc cOÔOs
Os TO OT sO

L Y W F F W Y L U
Og O×O O O O×O O s E E
s O
OOH O OO O OO
ôo H
ob ð¿6 66ð
MATING CONNECTOR MABNG CONNECTOR MATING CONNECTOR MABNG CONNECTOR
(AS VIEWEDFROM WIRE SIDE) (AS VIEWEDFROM MATING SIDE) (AS VIEWEDFROM WIRE SIDE) (AS VIEWEDFROM MABNG SIDE)

FOR CHP-85D
P1 PIN ASSIGNMENTS FOR CHP-85D
P2 PIN ASSIGNMENTS

A COURSE DIRECTIONNO. 1 P +5 V DC PWR NO. 1 (FROM DCP 1) A COURSE DIRECEON NO. 2 P +5 V DC PWR NO. 2 (FROM DCP 2)
B HEADING DIRECEON NO. 1 R SIG GND NO. 1 B HEADING DIRECTION NO. 2 R SIG GND NO. 2
C SPARE S CHASSIS GND C SPARE S NAV DATA NO. 2
D SPARE T +5 V UGHENG D SPARE T SPARE
E SPARE U +28 V UGHENG E SPARE U SPARE
F EMER CONTROL NO. 1 V LIGHTINGGROUND F EMER CONTROL NO. 2 V SPARE
G COURSE CONTROL NO. 1 W SPARE G COURSE CONTROL NO. 2
H COURSE SYNC NO. 1 X NAV DATA NO. 1 H COURSE SYNC NO. 2
J HEADING SYNC NO. 1 Y SPARE J HEADING SYNC NO. 2
K COURSE NO. 1 H Z SPARE K COURSE NO. 2 H
L COURSE NO. 1 L a SPARE L COURSE NO. 2 L
M HEADING NO. 1 H b SPARE M HEADING NO. 2 H
N HEADING NO. 1 L c SPARE N HEADING NO. 2 L

CGO-2559-01-AC-1

Mating Connector Pin Assignments (CHP-86B Course Heading

Panel (Top) and CHP-85D Course Heading Panel (Bottom))
Figure 2-3 (Sheet 1 of 10)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-23

 installation523-0773942

oo OO
oo OO
oo OO
oo OO
oo OO
oo OO
oo OO
oo OO
Oo OO
oo OO
Oo OO
Oo OO
oo OO
oo OO
oo OO

50 17 17 50

33 33

MABNG CONNECTOR MABNG CONNECTOR

(AS VIEWEDFROM WIRE SIDE) (AS VIEWEDFROM MABNG SIDE)

FOR DCP-85E/85G
P1 AND P2 ASSIGNMENTS

P1 PIN ASSIGNMENT P2 PIN ASSIGNMENT

1 KEY 18 ANNUN 5 34 SPARE 1 DPU DATA IN H 18 COURSE DIRECEON 34 ADI INTENSITY H

2 ANNUN 7 19 ANNUN 23 35 ANNUN 12 2 DPU DATA IN L 19 HEADING DIRECTlON 35 ADI INTENSITY CONT

3 ANNUN 15 20 ANNUN 20 36 ANNUN 9 3 RESERVED 20 RESERVED 36 ADI INTENSITY L

4 ANNUN 4 21 ANNUN 3 37 ANNUN 17 4 MPU DATA IN H 21 DCP DATA TO DPU H 37 ADI INTENSITY SHIELD

5 ANNUN 2 22 ANNUN 1 38 ANNUN 10 5 MPU DATA IN L 22 DCP DATA TO DPU L 38 HSI INTENSITY H

6 ANNUN 16 23 ANNUN 8 39 ANNUN 21 6 RESERVED 23 RESERVED 39 HSI INTENSITY CONT

7 ANNUN 6 24 ANNUN 14 40 ANNUN 22 7 NAV DATA 24 DCP DATA TO MPU H 40 HSI INTENSITY L

8 ANNUN 11 25 STRAP GND 41 ANNUN 24 8 RESERVED 25 DCP DATA TO MPU L 41 HSI INTENSITY SHIELD

9 STRAP GND 26 * STRAP 13 CRS SEL ENABLE MLS 1 42 ANNUN 13 9 RESERVED 26 CHASSIS GND 42 DRIVE TRANSFER

10 STRAP 9 BRG PNTR ENABLE ADF 1 27 * STRAP 14 CRS SEL ENABLE MLS 2 43 ANNUN 19 10 TlMER CONTROL 27 +28 Y DC PRI PWR RTN 43 CAT II REQUEST

11 STRAP 10 BRG PNTR ENABLE ADF 2 28 STRAP GND 44 ANNUN 18 11 COURSE CONTROL 28 +28 Y DC PRI PWR 44 ALT ALERT

12 STRAP GND 29 STRAP 3 RESERVED 45 STRAP 16 RESERVED FOR TEST 12 COURSE SYNC 29 +5 Y DC TO CHP 45 SPARE

13 STRAP 11 BRG PNTR ENABLE LRN 1 30 STRAP 4 RESERVED 46 * STRAP 15 CAT II A/B SEL 13 HEADING SYNC 30 +5 Y DC RTN TO CHP 46 SPARE

14 STRAP 12 BRG PNTR ENABLE LRN 2 31 STRAP GND 47 STRAP GND 14 COURSE IN H 31 +5-V LIGHENG 47 KEY

15 STRAP GND 32 STRAP 7 BRG PNTR ENABLE VOR 1 48 KEY 15 COURSE IN L 32 +28-V UGHENG 48 SPARE

16 STRAP 6 CRS SEL ENABLE LRN 2 33 STRAP 8 BRG PNTR ENABLE VOR 2 49 STRAP 2 CRS SEL ENABLE VOR 2 16 HEADING IN H 33 UGHENG GND 49 SPARE

17 STRAP 5 CRS SEL ENABLE LRN 1 50 STRAP 1 CRS SEL ENABLE VOR 1 17 HEADING IN L 50 SPARE

NOTE:
* STRAPS 13, 14, AND 15 RESERVED ON DCP-85E CGO-2562-01-AC-1

Mating Connector Pin Assignments (DCP-85E/G

Display Control Panel)
Figure 2-3 (Sheet 2)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-24

 installation523-0773942

18 18

o o o o
o
oo ogo o o o o
oo og o o o o
o o o OO
o oO o o o o
o oO oo oo
o 00 o o o o
oo oO o o o o
oo oO o o o o

MABNG CONNECTOR MABNG CONNECTOR MABNG CONNECTOR MABNG CONNECTOR

(AS VIEWEDFROM WIRE SIDE) (AS VIEWEDFROM MABNG SIDE) (AS VIEWEDFROM WIRE SIDE) (AS VIEWEDFROM MATlNG SIDE)

FOR DSP-85A
P1 AND P2 PIN ASSIGNMENTS

P1 PIN ASSIGNMENTS P2 PIN ASSIGNMENTS

1 ANNUN 24 14 ANNUN 11 1 DPU DATA IN H 18 SPARE 34 SPARE

2 ANNUN 23 15 ANNUN 10 2 DPU DATA IN L 19 SPARE 35 SPARE

3 ANNUN 22 16 ANNUN 9 3 RESERVED 20 RESERVED 36 SPARE

4 ANNUN 21 17 ANNUN 12 4 MPU DATA IN H 21 DSP DATA TO DPU H 37 SPARE

5 ANNUN 20 18 ANNUN 13 5 MPU DATA IN L 22 DSP DATA TO DPU L 38 SPARE

6 KEY 19 ANNUN 14 6 RESERVED 23 RESERVED 39 STRAP GND

7 ANNUN 19 20 ANNUN 15 7 STRAP 4 LNV 1/2 CRS SELECT 24 DSP DATA TO MPU H 40 STRAP GND

8 ANNUN 18 21 ANNUN 16 8 STRAP 5 LNV2 2ND CRS INHIB 25 DSP DATA TO MPU L 41 STRAP GND

9 ANNUN 17 22 ANNUN 2 9 CAT II REQUEST 26 CHASSIS GND 42 DRIVE TRANSFER

10 ANNUN 1 23 ANNUN 3 10 STRAP 6 RESERVED 27 +5 V DC RTN (NOT USED) 43 ELAPSED TlME

11 ANNUN 4 24 ANNUN 5 11 STRAP 1 VOR 1/2 CRS SELECT 28 +28 V DC PRI PWR 44 ALT ALERT

12 ANNUN 6 25 ANNUN 7 12 STRAP 2 LNV 1/2 BRG SELECT 29 +5 V DC (NOT USED) 45 ELAPSED EME SWITCH GND

13 ANNUN 8 13 STRAP 3 ADF 1/2 BRG SELECT 30 +28 V DC PRI PWR RTN 46 SPARE

14 SPARE 31 RESERVED 47 KEY

15 SPARE 32 +28-V UGHENG 48 SPARE

16 SPARE 33 LIGHENG GND 49 SPARE

17 SPARE 50 SPARE

CGO-2563-01--AC-1

Mating Connector Pin Assignments (DSP-85A

I Display Select Panel)

Figure 2-3 (Sheet 3)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-25

 installation 523-0773942

DARKENED SEGMENT INDICATES BLOCKED

PORTON OF KEYING INSERT; WHITE SEGMENT
INDICATES KEYING INSERT CAVITY.
P1 MATlNGCONNECTOR FOR THE DPU-85G|86G
PIN ASSIGNMENTS 4 4 3 2 1

1 EADI BACK-UP X DEFL OUT H 2 EHSI BACK-UP X DEFL OUT H 3 EADI BACK-UP X DEFL IN H 4 XSIDE CLOCK IN H 5 8 8 7 6 5
5 EADI BACK-UP X DEFL OUT L 6 EHSI BACK-UP X DEFL OUT L 7 EADI BACK-UP X DEFL IN L 8 XSIDE CLOCK IN L 9 12 12 11 10 9

9 EADI BACK-UP Y DEFL OUT H 10 EHSI BACK-UP Y DEFL OUT H 11 EADI BACK-UP Y DEFL IN H 12 XSIDE DATA IN H 13 16 16 15 14 13

13 EADI BACK-UP Y DEFL OUT L 14 EHSI BACK-UP Y DEFL OUT L 15 EADI BACK-UP Y DEFL IN L 16 XSIDE DATA IN L 17 20 20 19 18 17
17 EADI BACK-UP GREEN VIDEO OUT H 18 EHSi BACK-UP GREEN VIDEO OUT H 19 EADI BACK-UP GREEN VIDEO IN H 20 LINEAR DEV DISCRETE (+28 V DC) 21 24 24 23 22 21
21 EADI BACK-UP GREEN VIDEO OUT L 22 EHSI BACK-UP GREEN VIDEO OUT L 23 EADI BACK-UP GREEN VIDEO IN L 24 NAV VALID OUT (+28 V DC) 25 28 28 27 26 25
25 EADI BACK-UP RED VIDEO OUT H 26 EHSI BACK-UP RED VIDEO OUT H 27 EADI BACK-UP RED VIDEO IN H 28 DPU TO DSP/DCP DATA H 29 32 32 31 30 29

29 EADI BACK-UP RED VIDEO OUT L 30 EHSI BACK-UP RED VIDEO OUT L 31 EADI BACK-UP RED VIDEO IN L 32 DPU TO DSP/DCP DATA L 33 36 36 35 34 33

33 EADI BACK-UP BLUE VIDEO OUT H 34 EHSI BACK-UP BLUE VIDEO OUT H 35 EADI BACK-UP BLUE VIDEO IN H 36 DSP/DCP TO DPU DATA H 37 40 40 39 38 37

37 EADI BACK-UP BLUE VIDEO OUT L 38 EHSI BACK-UP BLUE VIDEO OUT L 39 EADI BACK-UP BLUE VIDEO IN L 40 DSP/DCP TO DPU DATA L 41 44 44 43 42 41
41 EADI BACK-UP GREEN INT OUT H 42 EHSI BACK-UP GREEN INT OUT H 43 EADI BACK-UP GREEN INT IN H 44 XSIDE CLOCK OUT L 45 48 48 47 46 45
45 EADI BACK-UP GREEN INT OUT L 46 EHSi BACK-UP GREEN INT OUT L 47 EADI BACK-UP GREEN INT IN L 48 XSIDE CLOCK OUT H 49 52 52 51 50 49
49 EADI BACK-UP RETRACE OUT H 50 EHSI BACK-UP RETRACE OUT H 51 EADI BACK-UP RETRACE IN H 52 XSIDE DATA OUT H 53 56 56 55 54 53
53 EADI BACK-UP RETRACE OUT L 54 EHSI BACK-UP RETRACE OUT L 55 EADI BACK-UP RETRACE IN L 56 XSIDE DATA OUT L 57 60 60 59 58 57
57 MPU TO DPU FCC CSDB A 58 MPU TO DPU FCC CSDB B 59 EHSt BACK-UP X DEFL IN H 60 VOR/LOC 1 MODE (+28 V DC) 61 64 64 63 62 61
61 EHSI RETRACE OUT H 62 EHSI BACK-UP SHADOW OUT H 63 EHSI BACK-UP X DEFL IN L 64 EHSI RETRACE OUT L 65 68 68 67 66 65
65 EHSI Y DEFL OUT H 66 EHSI BACK-UP SHADOW OUT L 67 EHSI BACK-UP Y DEFL IN H 68 EADI RETRACE OUT H 69 72 72 71 70 69
69 EADI RETRACE OUT L 70 EHSI BACK-UP SHADOW IN H 71 EHSI BACK-UP Y DEFL IN L 72 EHSI SHADOW OUT H 73 76 76 75 74 73
73 EHSI SHADOW OUT L 74 EHSI BACK-UP SHADOW IN L 75 EHSI BACK-UP GREEN VIDEO IN H 76 EHSI Y DEFL OUT L 77 80 80 79 78 77

77 WX RED VIDEO IN H 78 VOR/LOC 2 MODE (+28 V DC) 79 EHSI BACK-UP GREEN VIDEO IN L 80 EADI Y DEFL OUT H
81 WX RED VIDEO IN L 82 +28 V DC DPU PRI PWR 83 +28 V DC DPU PRI PWR 84 EADI Y DEFL OUT L 81 84 84 83 82 81
85 WX BLUE VIDEO IN H 86 +28 V DC DPU PRI PWR RTN 87 +28 V DC DPU PRI PWR RTN 88 EHSI GREEN INT OUT L 85 88 88 87 86 85
89 WX BLUEVIDEO IN L 90 ADF VALID (+28 V DC) 91 DPU TEST (GND) 92 EHSI GREEN INT OUT H 89 92 92 91 90 89
93 WX GREEN VIDEO IN H 94 DRIVE TRANSFER RELAY PWR 95 DG MODE (GND) 96 EHSI GREEN VIDEO OUT L 93 96 96 95 94 93
97 WX GREEN VIDEO IN L 98 DRIVE TRANSFER RELAY GND 99 STRAP 30 (HDG SEL) 100 EHSI GREEN VIDEO OUT H 97 100 100 99 98 97
101 WX CONTROL H 102 HIGH TEMP WARN (GND) 103 S7RAP 25 (ATTlTUDE SOURCE) 104 EHSI RED VIDEO OUT L 101 104 104103102101
105 WX CONTROL L 106 XSIDE SYNC IN H 107 STRAP 26 (HDG SOURCE) 108 EHSI RED VfDEO OUT H 105 108 108107106105
109 LRN 2 MODE (+28 V DC) 110 XSIDE SYNC IN L 111 STRAP 27 (AIR DATA ENABLE) 112 EHSI BLUE VIDEO OUT H 109 112 112 111 110 109
113 FCS CLEAR PULSE 114 EADI GREEN VIDEO OUT L 115 EADI GREEN VIDEO OUT H 116 EHSI BLUE VIDEO OUT L 113 116 116 115 114 113
117 WX RETRACE IN H 118 LNV 1 MODE (+28 V DC) 119 EADI GREEN INT OUT L 120 EADI GREEN INT OUT H 117 120 120 119 118 117
121 WX RETRACE IN L 122 DME SYNC H (6-WIRE) 123 EADI RED VIDEO OUT H 124 EADI RED VIDEO OUT L 121 124 124 123 122 121
125 WX RANGE MARK H 126 DME SYNC L (6-WIRE) 127 EHSI X DEFL OUT L 128 EHSI X DEFL OUT H 125 128 128127126125
129 WX RANGE MARK L 130 DME CLK L (6-WIRE) 131 EADI BLUE VIDEO OUT H 132 EADI BLUE VIDEO OUT L 129 132 132 131 130 129
133 WX DATA IN H 134 DME CLK H (6-WIRE) 135 STRAP 28 (DSP/DCP SOURCE) 136 EHSI BACK-UP RED VIDEO IN H 133 136 136 135134133
137 WX DATA IN L 138 DME DATA L (6-WIRE) 139 STRAP 29 (RISING RUNWAY ENABLE) 140 EHSI BACK-UP RED VIDEO IN L 137 140 140 139138137
141 WX CLOCK IN H 142 DME DATA H (6-WIRE) 143 WX SHADOW IN H 144 EHSI BACK-UP BLUE VIDEO IN H 141 144 144 143 142 141
145 WX CLOCK IN L 146 DME VALID (+28 V DC) 147 WX SHADOWIN L 148 EHSI BACK-UP BLUE VIDEO IN L 145 148 148147146145
149 WX BUSY H 150 EADI X DEFL OUT H 151 EADI X DEFL OUT L 152 EHSI BACK-UP GREEN INT IN H 149 152 152 151 150 149
153 WX BUSY L 154 DME AUDIO IDENT H 155 XSIDE SYNC OUT L 156 EHSI BACK-UP GREEN INT IN L 153 156 156 155154153
157 XSIDE SYNC OUT H 158 DME AUDIO IDENT L 159 EHSI BACK-UP RETRACE IN L 160 EHSi BACK-UP RETRACE IN H 157 160 160 159158157

MABNG CONNECTOR MABNG CONNECTOR

(AS VIEWEDFROM WIRE SIDE) (AS VIEWEDFROM MABNG SIDE)

CGO-0457-02-AC-1

Mating Connector Pin Assignments (DPU-85G/86G

I Revised 30 August 1998

Display Processor Unit)
Figure 2-3 (Sheet 4)

2-26
 installation 523-0773942

OO DARKENED SEGMENT INDICAKS BLOCKED

PORRON OF KEYING INSERT; WHIK SEGMENT
FOR THE DPU-85G|86G INDICAKS KEYING INSERT CAVITY.
P2 MATING CONNECTORPIN ASSIGNMENTS 1 0 0 0 0 4 4 3 2 1

1 PITCH CMD (+DN) L 2 PITCH CMD (+UP) H 3 GLIDESLOPE DEVN (+DN) L 4 GLIDESLOPE DEVN (+UP) H 5 8 8 7 6 5
5 RADIO ALT L 6 RADIO ALT H 7 AHRS CSDB A 8 VNAV CSDB A 9 12 12 11 10 9
9 ANALOG FCS (26 V AC) REF H 10 ANALOG FCS (26 V AC) REF C 11 AHRS CSDB B 12 VNAV CSDB B 13 16 16 15 14 13
13 OUKR MARKER - 14 ADF DC SIN/ADF X 15 FCC CSDB A 16 EFIS TO FCC CSDB A 17 20 20 19 18 17
17 MIDDLE MARKER 18 ADF DC COS/ADF Z 19 FCC CSDB B 20 EFIS TO FCC CSDB B 21 24 24 23 22 21
21 INNER MARKER 22 ADF DC COM/ADF Y 23 LNV BRG TO WPT X 24 LNV DATA H (6-WIRE) 25 28 28 27 26 25
25 COURSE DATUM H 26 COURSE DATUM L 27 LNV BRG TO WPT Y 28 LNV DATA L (6-WIRE) 29 32 32 31 30 29

29 CAT II COMPARATOR WARN (GND) 30 CAT II AMBER (GND) 31 LNV BRG TO WPT Z 32 LNV CLK H (6-WIRE) 33 36 36 35 34 33
33 VOR LOCAUZER (+RT) H 34 VOR LOCALIZER (+LT) L 35 COMPARATOR MASTER WARN (GND) 36 LNV CLK L (6-WIRE) 37 40 40 39 38 37
37 ROLL CMD (+LT) L 38 ROLL CMD (+RT) H 39 LNV (26 V AC) REF H 40 LNV SYNC H (6-WIRE) 41 44 44 43 42 41
41 VOR (26 V AC) REF H 42 VOR (26 V AC) REF C 43 LNV (26 V AC) REF C 44 LNV SYNC L (6-WIRE) 45 48 48 47 46 45
45 ATT (26 V AC) REF H 46 ATT (26 V AC) REF C 47 LNV DESIRED TRACK X 48 LNV DESIRED TRACK Y 49 52 52 51 50 49
49 CAT II GREEN (GND) 50 +28 V DC PRI PWR TO EADI 51 +28 V DC PRI PWR TO EADI 52 LNV DESIRED TRACK Z 53 56 56 55 54 53
53 RESERVED 54 +28 V DC PRI PWR RTN TO EADI 55 +28 V DC PRI PWR RTN TO EADI 56 HDG (26 V AC) REF C 57 60 60 59 58 57
57 RESERVED 58 RESERVED 59 +26.5 V PWR RTN TO EADI 60 HDG (26 V AC) REF H 61 64 64 63 62 61
61 STRAP 1 (APS TYPE SEL) 62 +26.5 V PWR TO EADI 63 RESERVED 64 HDG ERROR L 65 68 68 67 66 65
65 HDG COMPARATOR (GND) 66 RESERVED 67 ±25 Y PWR RTN TO EADI 68 HDG ERROR H 69 72 72 71 70 69
69 LATERAL DEV (+RT) H 70 +25 V (DEFL) PWR TO EADI 71 -25
V (DEFL) PWR TO EADI 72 VOR DC SIN 73 76 76 75 74 73
73 LATERAL DEV (+LT) L 74 +11 V (DEFL) PWR TO EADI 75 -11
V (DEFL) PWR TO EADI 76 VOR DC COS 77 80 80 79 78 77

77 ATTITUDE COMPARATOR (GND) 78 RESERVED 79 ±11 V PWR RTN TO EADI 80 VOR DC COM
81 ATT ROLL Z 82 +28 V DC PRI PWR TO EHSI 83 +28 V DC PRI PWR TO EHSI 84 ATT PITCH Y 81 84 84 83 82 81
85 ATT ROLL Y 86 +28 V PRI PWR RTN TO EHSI 87 +28 V DC PRI PWR RTN TO EHSI 88 ATT PITCH X 85 88 88 87 86 85
89 ATT ROLL X 90 RESERVED 91 +26.5 V PWR RTN TO EHSI 92 ATT PITCH Z 89 92 92 91 90 89
93 AIR DATA (MANCHESTER) H 94 +26.5 V PWR TO EHSI 95 RESERVED 96 HDG X 93 96 96 95 94 93
97 AIR DATA (MANCHESTER) L 98 RESERVED 99 ±25 V PWR RTN TO EHSI 100 HDG Z 97 100 100 99 98 97
101 ILS MODE (GND) 102 +25 V (DEFL) PWR TO EHSI 103 -25
V (DEFL) PWR TO EHSt 104 HDG Y 101 104 104103102101
105 SNAP 31 (LNV DATA) 106 +11 V (DEFL) PWR TO EHSI 107 -11
V (DEFL) PWR TO EHSI 108 NAV TEST IN (GND) 105 108 108107106105
109 ADS FAST/SLOW (+SLOW/INCREASE) 110 RESERVED 111 ±11 V PWR RTN TO EHSI 112 DME HOLD (OPEN) 109 112 112 111 110 109
113 GUDESLOPE VAUD (+28 V DC) 114 ADS FAST/SLOW VALID (+28 V DC) 115 SNAP 2 (APS TYPE SEL) 116 STRAP 24 (VOR PORT TYPE SEL) 113 116 116 115 114 113
117 ATT VALID (+28 V DC) 118 HDG VALID (+28 V DC) 119 VOR/LOC VAUD (+28 V DC) 120 ADC VAUD (+28 V DC) 117 120 120 119 118 117
121 SNAP 3 (APS TYPE SEL) 122 RADIO ALT TEST (GND) 123 SNAP 4 (NAV DATA REF) 124 RADIO ALT VAUD (+28 V DC) 121 124 124 123 122 121
125 ADI COMPOSITE/HS1 OFF 126 TO/FROM OUT H 127 BACK COURSE MODE (+28 V DC) 128 SNAP 5 (LNV PORT ANN) 125 128 128127126125
129 ADI OFF/HSI COMPOSITE 130 TO/FROM OUT L 131 LOC TUNE (GND) 132 STRAP 6 (LNV PORT ANN) 129 132 132 131 130129
133 STRAP 7 (RAD ALT TYPE SEL) 134 STRAP 8 (RAD ALT TYPE SEL) 135 SNAP 9 (XSIDE DATA FLAG) 136 STRAP 10 (VOR PORT TYPE SEL) 133 136 136 135134133
137 FD IN-VIEW BIAS (+28 V DC) 138 COMMANDBARS OFF (GND) 139 DECISION HEIGHT (GND) 140 STRAP 11 (DPU LEFT/RIGHT) 137 140 140 139138137
141 STRAP 12 (COMPAR RESET/INHIB) 142 STRAP 13 (SPD DEV TYPE SEL) 143 FD VAUD (+28 V DC) 144 ADS FAST/SLOW (+FAST/DECREASE) 141 144 144 143 142 141
145 STRAP 14 (ATT/HDG TYPE SEL) 146 STRAP 15 (ADF TYPE SEL) 147 STRAP 16 (LNV SYNCHRO) 148 STRAP 17 (HDG MAG/TRUE) 145 148 148147146145
149 LNV TO/FROM (+TO) 150 LNV XTRK DEV (+RT) H 151 STRAP 18 (VNAV) 152 STRAP 19 (REVERSIONARY DISPLAY) 149 152 152 151 150 149
153 LNV TO/FROM (+FROM) 154 LNV XTRK DEV (+LT) L 155 STRAP 20 (COMMAND BARS) 156 STRAP 21 (LINEAR DEVIAT10N) 153 156 156 155154153
157 LNV VALID IN (+28 V DC) 158 STRAP 22 (MASTER WARN RESET/INHIBIT) 159 STRAP 23 (SPD DEV TYPE SEL) 160 CHASSIS GND 157 160 160 159158157

MABNG CONNECTOR MABNG CONNECTOR

(AS VIEWEDFROM WIRE SIDE) (AS VIEWEDFROM MATlNG SIDE)

CGO-0457--02-AC-2

Mating Connector Pin Assignments (DPU-85G/86G

I Display Processor Unit)

Figure 2-3 (Sheet 5)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-2'l

 installation 523-0773942

v368 edóðv
o x 6 O × O

MATING CONNECTOR MATING CONNECTOR

(AS VIEWEDFROM WlRE SIDE) (AS VIEWEDFROM MATING SIDE)

FOR EFD-85/86(
P1 PIN ASSIGNMENTS )
A PWR +25 V DC (DEFL) Y GREEN INT L
B PWR +11 Y DC (DEFL) Z GREEN INT H
C PWR RTN +11 Y DC a GREEN VIDEO L
D PWR RTN +25 Y DC b RED VIDEO L
E PWR -11
Y DC (DEFL) c BLUE VIDEO L
F PWR -25
Y DC (DEFL) d BLUE VIDEO H
G RESERVED e RESERVED
H RESERVED f INTENSITY CONTROL H
J RESERVED g TEMP SENSOR (EFD-85/86( )
AND ABOVE ONLY)
-021

K RESERVED
hX DEFL L
L CHASSIS GND
i X DEFL H
M INTENSITYCONTROL L
N INTENSITY CONTROL C j RETRACE L
k Y DEFL H
P INCLINOMETERUGHTING H (EFD-85/86( )
-021
AND ABOVE ONLY) m SHADOW H (OPEN ON EADI)
R POWER MONITOR (+28 Y DC) n GREEN VIDEO H
S RESERVED p RED VIDEO H
T RESERVED q RESERVED
U INCUNOMETER UGHTING L (EFD-85/86( ) r RESERVED
AND ABOVE ONLY)
-021

s Y DEFL L
V PWR RTN (HV) t SHADOW L (OPEN ON EADI)
W PWR +26.5 V DC (HV)
X RETRACE H
CGO-2561-01--AC-1

Mating Connector Pin Assignments (EFD-85/86( )

Electronic Flight Display)
Figure 2-3 (Sheet 6)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-28

 installation 523-0773942

32g 2¾ gi 17e O25 32

o o1° 1°o o*
'Toooos 'oooo*
ooo ooo
oooo oooo
OOOOO OOOOO
OOOO OOOO
OOOOO OOOOO
OOOO OOOO

OOOO OOOO
OOO OOO
OOOO 90000
52 52
16 16
024 2 O
39

MATING CONNECTOR MATING CONNECTOR

(AS VIEWEDFROM WIRE SIDE) (AS VIEWEDFROM MATlNG SIDE)

FOR MFD-85A/858
P1 PIN ASSIGNMENTS

1 MFD Y DEFL L 19 MFD RETRACE H 37 RESERVED

2 MFD GREEN INT L 20 TEST 38 RESERVED
3 MFD GREEN INT H 21 RESERVED 39 UGHTlNG GND
4 MFD X DEFL H 22 MFD SHADOW H 40 REMOTE DATA SENSOR 1 L
5 MFD Y DEFL H 23 MFD BLUE VIDEO H 41 REMOTE DATA SENSOR 3 H
6 MFD GREEN VIDEO L 24 POWER GND 42 EXTERNAL PAGE CONTROL IN
7 MFD GREEN VIDEO H 25 REMOTE DATA SENSOR OL 43 EXTERNAL CHAPTERS FORWARD
8 +28 Y DC PRI PWR 26 MFD RETRACE L 44 MFD SYNC TO MPU L
9 +28 Y DC PRI PWR 27 SPARE 45 RESERVED
10 MFD X DEFL L 28 SPARE 46 +5 Y UGHTING H/28 Y UGHTING STRAP
11 REMOTE DATA SENSOR 2 L 29 SPARE 47 CHASSIS GND
12 RESERVED 30 MFD SHADOW L 48 RESERVED
13 MFD RED VIDEO L 31 +28-V UGHTlNG H 49 EXTERNAL UNE FORWARD IN
14 MFD RED VIDEO H 32 REMOTEDATA SENSOR 1 H 50 EXTERNAL PAGE FORWARD IN
15 MFD BLUE VIDEO L 33 REMOTEDATA SENSOR 3 L 51 MFD SYNC TO MPU H
16 POWER GND 34 RESERVED 52 28 Y TO 5 Y CONVERT STRAP
17 REMOTE DATA SENSOR OH 35 HIGH TEMP WARN 53 MFD CLK TO MPU H
18 REMOTE DATA SENSOR 2 H 36 MFD DATÁTO MPU L 54 MFD CLK TO MPU L
55 MFD DATA TO MPU H
CGO-2558-01-AC-1

Mating Connector Pin Assignments (MFD-85A Multifunction Display)

Figure 2-3 (Sheet 7)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-29

 installation 523-0773942

DARKENED SEGMENT INDICATES BLOCKED

PORRON OF KEYlNG INSERT; WHITE SEGMENT
P1 MATINGCONNECTOR
PIN ASSIGNMENTS
FOR MPU-85G|86G INDICATES KEYING INSERT CAVITY.
1 4 4 3 2 1

1 PITCH CMD 1 (+DN) L 2 PITCH CMD 1 (+UP) H 3 GLIDESLOPE DEVN 1 (+DN) L 4 GLIDESLOPE DEVN 1 (+UP) H 5 8 8 7 6 5

5 RADIO ALT 1 L 6 RADIO ALT 1 H 7 AHRS 1 CSDB A B VNAV 1 CSDB A 9 12 12 11 10 9

9 ANALOG FCS 1 (26 V AC) REF H 10 ANALOG FCS 1 (26 V AC) REF C 11 AHRS 1 CSDB B 12 VNAV 1 CSDB B 13 16 16 15 14 13

13 OUTER MARKER 14 ADF 1 DC SIN/ADF X 15 MPU TO DPU 1 FCC CSDB A 17 20 20 19 18 17

FCC 1 CSDB A 16
17 MIDDLEMARKER 18 ADF 1 DC COS/ADF Z 19 FCC 1 CSDB B 20 MPU TO DPU 1 FCC CSDB B 21 24 24 23 22 21
21 INNER MARKER 22 ADF 1 DC COM/ADF Y 23 LNV 1 BRG-TO-WPT X 24 LNV 1 DATA H (6-WIRE) 25 28 28 27 26 25

25 COURSEDATUM 1 H 26 COURSE DATUM 1 L 27 LNV 1 BRG-TO-WPT Y 28 LNV 1 DATA L (6-WIRE) 29 32 32 31 30 29

29 LINEAR DEV 1 DISCRETE (+28 V DC) 30 NAV 1 VALID OUT (+28 V DC) 31 LNV 1 BRG-TO-WPT Z 32 LNV 1 CLK H (6-WIRE) 33 36 36 35 34 33

33 VOR 1 LOCAUZER (+RT) H 34 VOR 1 LOCALlZER (+LT) L 35 COMPARATOR MASTER WARN 1 36 LNV 1 CLK L (6-WIRE) 37 40 40 39 38 37

37 ROLL CMD 1 (+LT) L 38 ROLL CMD 1 (+RT) H 39 LNV 1 (26 V AC) REF H 40 LNV 1 SYNC H (6-WIRE) 41 44 44 43 42 41

41 VOR 1 (26 V AC) REF H 42 VOR 1 (26 V DC) REF C 43 LNV 1 (26 V AC) REF C 44 LNV 1 SYNC L (6-WIRE) 45 48 48 47 46 45
45 ATT 1 (26 V AC) REF H 46 ATT 1 (26 V DC) REF C 47 LNV 1 DESIRED TRACK X 48 LNV 1 DESIRED TRACK Y 49 52 52 51 50 49
49 EADI 1 BACK-UP RED VIDEO H 50 EADI 1 BACK-UP X DEFL H 51 EHSI 1 BACK-UP X DEFL H 52 LNV 1 DESIRED TRACK Z 53 56 56 55 54 53

53 EADI 1 BACK-UP RED VIDEO L 54 EADI 1 BACK-UP X DEFL L 55 EHSI T BACK-UP X DEFL L 56 HDG 1 (26 V AC) REF C 57 60 60 59 58 57

57 EADI 1 BACK-UP BLUE VIDEO H 58 EADI 1 BACK-UP Y DEFL H 59 EHSI 1 BACK-UP Y DEFL H 60 HDG 1 (26 V AC) REF H 61 64 64 63 62 61
61 EADI 1 BACK-UP BLUE VIDEO L 62 EADI 1 BACK-UP Y DEFL L 63 EHSI 1 BACK-UP Y DEFL L 64 HDG 1 ERROR L 65 68 68 67 66 65
65 RESERVED 66 EADI 1 BACK-UP GREEN VIDEO H 67 EHSI 1 BACK-UP GREEN VIDEO H 68 HDG 1 ERROR H 69 72 72 71 70 69
69 LATERAL DEV 1 (+RT) H 70 EADI 1 BACK-UP GREEN VIDEO L 71 EHSI 1 BACK-UP GREEN VIDEO L 72 VOR 1 DC SIN 73 76 76 75 74 73
73 LATERAL DEV 1 (+LT) L 74 RESERVED 75 RESERVED 76 VOR 1 DC COS 77 80 80 79 78 77

77 RESERVED 78 +28 V DC PRI PWR NO. 2 H 79 +28 V DC PRI PWR NO. 2 H 80 VOR 1 DC COM
81 ATT 1 ROLL Z 82 +28 V DC PRI PWR NO. 1 H 83 +28 V DC PRI PWR NO. 1 H 84 ATT 1 PITCH Y 81 84 84 83 82 81
85 ATT 1 ROLL Y 86 +28 V DC PRI PWR NO. 1 RTN 87 +28 V DC PRI PWR NO. 1 RTN 88 ATT 1 PITCH X 85 88 88 87 86 85
89 ATT 1 ROLL X 90 +28 V DC PRI PWR NO. 2 RTN 91 +28 V DC PRI PWR NO. 2 RTN 92 ATT 1 PITCH Z 89 92 92 91 90 89
93 AIR DATA 1 (MANCHESTER) H 94 RESERVED 95 RESERVED 96 HDG 1 X 93 96 96 95 94 93
97 AIR DATA 1 (MANCHESTER) L 98 EADI 1 BACK-UP RETRACE H 99 EHSi 1 BACK-UP RETRACE H 100 HDG 1 Z 97 100 100 99 98 97
101 ILS 1 MODE (GND) 102 EADI 1 BACK-UP RETRACE L 103 EHSI 1 BACK-UP RETRACE L 104 HDG 1 Y 101 104 104 103 102 101
105 STRAP 31L (LNV DATA) 106 RESERVED 107 EHSI 1 BACK-UP SHADOW H 108 NAV 1 TEST IN (GND) 105 108 108107106105
109 DISPLAY DRIVE TRANSFER (GND) 110 HIGH TEMP WARN (GND) 111 EHSI 1 BACK-UP SHADOW L 112 DME 1 HOLD (OPEN) 109 112 112 111 110 109
113 GUDESLOPE 1 VALID (+28 V DC) 114 ADS 1 FAST/SLOW VALID (+28 V DC) 115 VOR/LOC 1 MODE (LEFT) (+28 V DC) 116 RESERVED 113 116 116 115 114 113
117 ATT 1 VAUD (+28 V DC) 118 HDG 1 VALID (+28 V DC) 119 VOR/LOC 1 VALID (+28 V DC) 120 ADC 1 VAUD (+28 V DC) 117 120 120 119 118 117
121 VOR/LOC 2 MODE (LEFT) (+28 V DC) 122 RADIO ALT 1 TEST (GND) 123 RESERVED 124 RADIO ALT 1 VAUD (+28 V
DC) 121 124 124 123 122 121
125 ADI COMPOSITE/HSI OFF 126 TO/FROM OUT H 127 BACK COURSE 1 MODE (+28 V DC) 128 EADI 1 BACK-UP GREEN INT H 125 128 128127126125
129 ADI OFF/HSI COMPOSITE 130 TO/FROM OUT L 131 LOC TUNE 1 (GND) 132 EADI 1 BACK-UP GREEN INT L 129 132 132131130129
133 ADF 1 VAUD (+28 V DC) 134 STRAP 30L (HEADING SELECT) 135 DG 1 MODE (+28 V DC) 136 EHSI 1 BACK-UP GREEN INT H 133 136 136 135134133
137 FD 1 IN-VIEW BIAS (+28 V DC) 138 COMMANDBARS OFF (GND) 139 RESERVED 140 EHSI 1 BACK-UP GREEN INT L 137 140 140 139138137
141 CAT II COMPARATOR (LEFT) (GND) 142 CAT II GREEN (LEFT) (GND) 143 FD 1 VALID (+28 V DC) 144 FCS 1 CLEAR PULSE 141 144 144 143 142 141
145 ATTITUDE COMPARATOR 1 (GND) 146 HEADING COMPARATOR 1 (GND) 147 LNV 1 MODE (LEFT) (+28 V DC) 148 EHSI 1 BACK-UP BLUE VIDEO H 145 148 148147146145
149 LNV 1 TO/FROM (+TO) 150 LNV 1 XTRK DEV (+RT) H 151 JOYSBCK DATA 1 CSDB A 152 EHSI 1 BACK--UP BLUE VIDEO L 149 152 152 151 150 149
153 LNV 1 TO/FROM (+FROM) 154 LNV 1 XTRK DEV (+LT) L 155 JOYSBCK DATA 1 CSDB B 156 EHSI 1 BACK-UP RED VIDEO H 153 156 156 155154153
157 LNV 1 VALID IN 158 LNV 2 MODE (LEFT) (+28 V DC) 159 EHSI 1 BACK-UP RED VIDEO L 160 CHASSIS GND 157 160 160 159158157

MABNGCONNECTOR MABNG CONNECTOR

(AS VIEWEDFROM WlRE SIDE) (AS VIEWEDFROM MAllNG SIDE)

CGO-0456-03-AC-1

Mating Connector Pin Assignments (MPU-85G/86G

Multifunction Processor Unit)
Figure 2-3 (Sheet 8)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-30

 installation 523-0773942

DARKENED SEGMENT INDICAKS BLOCKED

PORRON OF KEYING INSERT; WHIK SEGMENT
P2 MATINGCONNECTORPIN ASSIGNMENTS
FOR MPU-85G|86G 1 4
INDICAKS KEYING INSERT CAVITY.
4 3 2 1

1 STRAP 1L (APS TYPE SEL) 2 MPSTP1 MPU KST 3 STRAP 26L (HEADING SOURCE) 4 STRAP 1R (APS TYPE SEL) 5 8 8 7 6 5
5 STRAP 2L (APS TYPE SEL) 6 IAS REF DATA 1 H 7 STRAP 27L (AIR DATA ENABLE) 8 STRAP 2R (APS TYPE SEL) 9 12 12 11 10 9

9 STRAP 3L (APS TYPE SEL) 10 IAS REF DATA 1 L 11 STRAP 28L (DCP/DSP SOURCE) 12 STRAP 3R (APS TYPE SEL) 13 16 16 15 14 13

13 STRAP 4L (NAV DATA REF) 14 STRAP 25L (ATTITUDE SOURCE) 15 STRAP 29L (RISING RUNWAY) 16 STRAP 4R (NAV DATA REF) 17 20 20 19 18 17
17 DME 1 DATA H (6-WIRE) 18 X-SIDE DATA 2 H 19 X-SIDE SYNC 2 H 20 DME 2 DATA H (6-WIRE) 21 24 24 23 22 21
21 DME 1 DATA L (6-WIRE) 22 X-SIDE DATA 2 L 23 X-SIDE SYNC 2 L 24 DME 2 DATA L (6-WIRE) 25 28 28 27 26 25

25 DME 1 CLK H (6-WIRE) 26 X-SIDE CLOCK 2 H 27 IAS REF CLK 1 H 28 DME 2 CLK H (6-WIRE) 29 32 32 31 30 29

29 DME 1 CLK L (6-WIRE) 30 X-SIDE CLOCK 2 L 31 IAS REF CLK 1 L 32 DME 2 CLK L (6-WIRE) 33 36 36 35 34 33

33 DME 1 SYNC H (6-WIRE) 34 DCP 1 TO MPU H 35 DCP 2 TO MPU H 36 DME 2 SYNC H (6-WIRE) 37 40 40 39 38 37
37 DME 1 SYNC L (6-WIRE) 38 DCP 1 TO MPU L 39 DCP 2 TO MPU L 40 DME 2 SYNC L (6-WIRE) 41 44 44 43 42 41
41 DME 1 VALID (+28 V DC) 42 MPU TO DCP 1 H 43 MPU TO DCP 2 H 44 DME 2 VALID (+28 V DC) 45 48 48 47 46 45
45 DME 1 AUDIO IDENT H 46 MPU TO DCP 1 L 47 MPU TO DCP 2 L 48 DME 2 AUDIO IDENT H 49 52 52 51 50 49
49 DME 1. AUDIO IDENT L 50 MFD SHADOW H 51 MFD SHADOW L 52 DME 2 AUDIO IDENT L 53 56 56 55 54 53
53 STRAP 5L (LNV TYPE SEL) 54 MFD X DEFL H 55 MFD X DEFL L 56 STRAP 5R (LNV TYPE SEL) 57 60 60 59 58 57
57 STRAP 6L (LNV TYPE SEL) 58 MFD Y DEFL H 59 MFD Y DEFL L 60 STRAP 6R (LNV TYPE SEL) 61 64 64 63 62 61

61 STRAP 7L (RAD ALT TYPE SEL) 62 MFD RED VIDEO L 63 MFD RED VIDEO H 64 STRAP 7R (RAD ALT TYPE SEL) 65 68 68 67 66 65
65 STRAP 8L (RAD ALT TYPE SEL) 66 MFD BLUE VIDEO L 67 MFD BLUE VIDEO H 68 STRAP 8R (RAD ALT TYPE SEL) 69 72 72 71 70 69
69 STRAP 9L (XSIDE DATA FLAG) 70 MFD GREEN VIDEO L 71 MFD GREEN VIDEO H 72 STRAP 9R (XSIDE DATA FLAG) 73 76 76 75 74 73
73 STRAP 10L (VOR PORT TYPE SEL) 74 MFD RETRACE H 75 MFD RETRACE L 76 STRAP 10R (VOR PORT TYPE SEL) 77 80 80 79 78 77

77 IAS REF DATA 2 H 78 MFD GREEN INT L 79 MFD GREEN INT H 80 IAS REF DATA 2 L
81 STRAP 12L (COMPARATOR RESET/INHIBIT) 82 RESERVED 83 RESERVED 84 IAS REF CLK 2 H 81 84 84 83 82 81
85 STRAP 13L (SPEED DEV TYPE SEL) 86 RESERVED 87 RESERVED 88 STRAP 13R (SPEED DEV TYPE SEL) 85 88 88 87 86 85
89 STRAP 14L (ATT/HDG TYPE SEL) 90 RESERVED 91 RESERVED 92 STRAP 14R (ATT/HDG TYPE SEL) 89 92 92 91 90 89
93 STRAP 15L (ADF TYPE SEL) 94 RESERVED 95 LONG ACCELEROMETERH 96 STRAP 15R (ADF TYPE SEL) 93 96 96 95 94 93
97 STRAP 16L (LNV SYNCHRO) 98 LONG ACCELEROMETERL 99 RESERVED 100 STRAP 16R (LNV SYNCHRO) 97 100 100 99 98 97
101 RESERVED 102 STRAP 17L (HDG MAG/TRUE) 103 STRAP 17R (HDG MAG/TRUE) 104 LONG ACCEL MONITOR (+12 V DC) 101 104 104103102101
105 X-SIDE DATA 1 H 106 STRAP 18L (VNAV) 107 STRAP 18R (VNAV) 108 IAS REF CLK 2 L 105 108 108107106105
109 X-SIDE DATA 1 L 110 STRAP 19L (REVERSIONARY DISPLAY) 111 STRAP 19R (REVERSIONARY DISPLAY) 112 MFD TO MPU DATA H 109 112 112 111 110 109
113 X-SIDE CLOCK 1 H 114 STRAP 20L (COMMAND BARS) 115 STRAP 20R (COMMAND BARS) 116 MFD TO MPU DATA L 113 116 116 115 114 113
117 X-SIDE CLOCK 1 L 118 STRAP 21L (LIN DEV) 119 STRAP 21R (LINEAR DEV) 120 MFD TO MPU CLK H 117 120 120 119 118 117
121 X-SIDE SYNC 1 H 122 STRAP 22L (MASTER WARN RESET/INHIBIT) 123 RESERVED (TREND VECTOR GEN TEST) 124 MFD TO MPU CLK L 121 124 124 123 122 121
125 X-SIDE SYNC 1 L 126 STRAP 23L (SPEED DEV TYPE SEL) 127 STRAP 23R (SPEED DEV TYPE SEL) 128 MFD TO MPU SYNC H 125 128 128127126125
129 RESERVED 130 STRAP 24L (VOR PORT TYPE SEL) 131 STRAP 24R (VOR PORT TYPE SEL) 132 MFD TO MPU SYNC L 129 132 132 131 130 129
133 WX DATA H 134 WX RETRACE H 135 WX CONTROL H 136 WX RED VIDEO H 133 136 136135134133
137 WX DATA L 138 WX RETRACE L 139 WX CONTROL L 140 WX RED VIDEO L 137 140 140 139138137
141 WX CLOCK H 142 RESERVED 143 ADS 1 FAST/SLOW (+FAST/DECR) 144 WX BLUE VIDEO H 141 144 144 143 142 141
145 WX CLOCK L 146 ADS 1 FAST/SLOW (+SLOW/INCR) 147 ADS 2 FAST/SLOW (+FAST/DECR) 148 WX BLUE VIDEO L 145 148 148147146145
149 WX BUSY H 150 WX RANGE MARK H 151 WX SHADOW H 152 WX GREEN VIDEO H 149 152 152 151 150 149
153 WX BUSY L 154 WX RANGE MARK L 155 WX SHADOW L 156 WX GREEN VIDEO L 153 156 156 155154153
157 ADS 2 FAST/SLOW (+SLOW/INCR) 158 DECISION HEIGHT 1 (GND) 159 RESERVED 160 CAT II AMBER (LEFT) (GND) 157 160 160 159158157

MABNG CONNECTOR MABNG CONNECTOR

(AS VIEWEDFROM WIRE SIDE) (AS VIEWEDFROM MABNG SIDE)

CGO-0456-03-AC-2

Mating Connector Pin Assignments (MPU-85G/86G

I Multifunction Processor Unit)

Figure 2-3 (Sheet 9)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-31

 installation 523-0773942

DARKENED SEGMENT INDICAES BLOCKED

/
PORTON OF KEYING INSERT; WHIE SEGMENT
P3 MATlNGCONNECTORPIN ASSIGNMENTS
FOR THE MPU-85G|86G INDICAES KEYING INSERT CAVITY.
1 4 4 3 2 1

1 PITCH CMD 2 (+DN) L 2 PITCH CMD 2 (+UP) H 3 GUDESLOPE DEVN 2 (+DN) L 4 GLIDESLOPE DEVN 2 (+UP) H 5 8 8 7 6 5
5 RADIO ALT 2 L 6 RADIO ALT 2 H 7 AHRS 2 CSDB A 8 VNAV 2 CSDB A B 12 12 11 10 9
9 ANALOG FCS 2 (26 V AC) REF H 10 ANALOG FCS 2 (26 V AC) REF C 11 AHRS 2 CSDB B 12 VNAV 2 CSDB B 13 16 16 15 14 13
13 OUER MARKER 14 ADF 2 DC SIN/ADF X 15 FCC 2 CSDB A 16 MPU TO DPU 2 FCC CSDB A 17 20 20 19 18 17
17 MIDDLEMARKER 18 ADF 2 DC COS/ADF Z 19 FCC 2 CSDB B 20 MPU TO DPU 2 FCC CSDB B 21 24 24 23 22 21
21 INNER MARKER 22 ADF 2 DC COM/ADF Y 23 LNV 2 BRG-TO-WPT X 24 LNV 2 DATA H (6-WIRE) 25 28 28 27 26 25
25 COURSE DATUM 2 H 26 COURSE DATUM 2 L 27 LNV 2 BRG-TO-WPT Y 28 LNV 2 DATA L (6-WIRE) 29 32 32 31 30 29

29 UNEAR DEV 2 DISCRETE (+28 V DC) 30 NAV 2 VAUD OUT (+28 V DC) 31 LNV 2 BRG-TO-WPT Z 32 LNV 2 CLK H (6-WIRE) 33 36 36 35 34 33
33 VOR 2 LOCAUZER (+RT) H 34 VOR 2 LOCAUZER (+LT) L 35 COMPARATOR MASTER WARN 2 (GND) 36 LNV 2 CLK L (6-WIRE) 37 40 40 39 38 37

37 ROLL CMD 2 (+LT) L 38 ROLL CMD 2 (+RT) H 39 LNV 2 (26 Y AC) REF H 40 LNV 2 SYNC H (6-WIRE) 41 44 44 43 42 41
41 VOR 2 (26 V AC) REF H 42 ATT 2 (26 V AC) REF C 43 LNV 2 (26 V AC) REF C 44 LNV 2 SYNC L (6-WIRE) 45 48 48 47 46 45
45 ATT 2 (26 V AC) REF H 46 ATT 2 (26 V AC) REF L 47 LNV 2 DESIRED TRACK X 48 LNV 2 DESIRED TRACK Y 49 52 52 51 50 49
49 EADI 2 BACK-UP RED VIDEO H 50 EADI 2 BACK-UP X DEFL H 51 EHSI 2 BACK-UP X DEFL H 52 LNV 2 DESIRED TRACK Z 53 56 56 55 54 53
53 EADI 2 BACK-UP RED VIDEO L 54 EADI 2 BACK-UP X DEFL L 55 EHSI 2 BACK-UP X DEFL L 56 HDG 2 (26 V AC) REF L 57 60 60 59 58 57
57 EADI 2 BACK-UP BLUE VIDEO H 58 EADI 2 BACK-UP Y DEFL H 59 EHSI 2 BACK-UP Y DEFL H 60 HDG 2 (26 V AC) REF H 61 64 64 63 62 61
61 EADI 2 BACK-UP BLUE VIDEO L 62 EADI 2 BACK-UP Y DEFL L 63 EHSI 2 BACK-UP Y DEFL L 64 HDG 2 ERROR L 65 68 68 67 66 65
65 RESERVED 66 EADI 2 BACK-UP GREEN VIDEO H 67 EHSI 2 BACK-UP GREEN VIDEO H 68 HDG 2 ERROR H 69 72 72 71 70 69
69 LATERAL DEV 2 (+RT) H 70 EADI 2 BACK-UP GREEN VIDEO L 71 EHSI 2 BACK-UP GREEN VIDEO L 72 VOR 2 DC SIN 73 76 76 75 74 73
73 LATERAL DEV 2 (+LT) L 74 RESERVED 75 RESERVED 76 VOR 2 DC COS 77 80 80 79 78 77

77 STRAP 27R (AIR DATA ENABLE) 78 SNAP 29R (RISING RUNWAY) 79 SNAP 28R (DCP/DSP SOURCE) 80 VOR 2 COM
81 ATT 2 ROLL Z 82 SNAP 26R (HEADING SOURCE) 83 SNAP 25R (ATTITUDE SOURCE) 84 ATT 2 PlTCH Y 81 84 84 83 82 81
85 ATT 2 ROLL Y 86 DECISION HEIGHT 2 (GND) 87 RESERVED 88 ATT 2 PITCH X 85 88 88 87 86 85
89 ATT 2 ROLL X 90 CAT II AMBER (RIGHT) (GND) 91 SPARE 92 ATT 2 PITCH Z 89 92 92 91 90 89
93 AIR DATA 2 (MANCHESTER) H 94 RESERVED 95 RESERVED 96 HDG 2 X 93 96 96 95 94 93
97 AIR DATA 2 (MANCHESTER) L 98 EADI 2 BACK-UP RENACE H 99 EHSI 2 BACK-UP RENACE H 100 HDG 2 Z 97 100 100 99 98 97
101 ILS 2 MODE (GND) 102 EADI 2 BACK-UP RENACE L 103 EHSI 2 BACK-UP RETRACE L 104 HDG 2 Y 101 104 104 103 102 101
105 STRAP 31R (LNV DATA) 106 RESERVED 107 EHSI 2 BACK-UP SHADOW H 108 NAV 2 TEST IN (GND) 105 108 108107106105
109 DISPLAY DRIVE TRANSFER (GND) 110 RESERVED 111 EHSI 2 BACK-UP SHADOW L 112 DME 2 HOLD (OPEN) 109 112 112 111 110 109
113 GUDESLOPE 2 VAUD (+28 V DC) 114 ADS 2 FAST/SLOW VAUD (+28 V DC) 115 VOR/LOC 1 MODE (RIGHT) (+28 V DC) 116 RESERVED 113 116 116 115 114 113
117 ATT 2 VALID (+28 V DC) 118 HDG 2 VAUD (+28 V DC) 119 VOR/LOC 2 VALID (+28 V DC) 120 ADC 2 VAUD (+28 V DC) 117 120 120 119 118 117
121 VOR/LOC 2 MODE (RIGHT) (+28 V DC) 122 RADIO ALT 2 TEST (GND) 123 RESERVED 124 RADIO ALT 2 VAUD (+28 V DC) 121 124 124123122121
125 ADI COMPOSITE/HSI OFF 126 TO/FROM OUT H 127 BACK COURSE 2 MODE (+28 V DC) 128 EADI 2 BACK-UP GREEN INT H 125 128 128127126125
129 ADI OFF/HSI COMPOSITE 130 TO/FROM OUT L 131 LOC TUNE 2 (GND) 132 EADI 2 BACK-UP GREEN INT L 129 132 132 131 130129
133 ADF 2 VAUD (+28 V DC) 134 STRAP 30R (HDG SEL) 135 DG 2 MODE (+28 V DC) 136 EHSI 2 BACK-UP GREEN INT H 133 136 136135134133
137 FD 2 IN-VIEW BIAS (+28 V DC) 138 COMMANDBARS OFF (GND) 139 RESERVED 140 EHSI 2 BACK-UP GREEN INT L 137 140 140 139138137
141 CAT Il COMPARATOR (RIGHT) (GND) 142 CAT Il GREEN (RIGHT) (GND) 143 FD 2 VALID (+28 V DC) 144 FCS 2 CLEAR PULSE 141 144 144143142141
145 ATTITUDE COMPARATOR 2 (GND) 146 HEADING COMPARATOR 2 (GND) 147 LRN 1 MODE (RIGHT) (+28 V DC) 148 EHSI 2 BACK-UP BLUE VIDEO H 145 148 148147146145
149 LNV 2 TO/FROM (+TO) 150 LNV 2 XTRK DEV (+RT) H 151 JOYSBCK DATA 2 CSDB A 152 EHSI 2 BACK-UP BLUE VIDEO L 149 152 152 151 150149
153 LNV 2 TO/FROM (+FROM) 154 LNV 2 XTRK DEV (+LT) L 155 JOYSTICK DATA 2 CSDB B 156 EHSI 2 BACK-UP RED VIDEO H 153 156 156 15 154153
157 LNV 2 VALID IN 158 LNV 2 MODE (RIGHT) (+28 V DC) 159 EHSI 2 BACK-UP RED VIDEO L 160 CHASSIS GND 157 160 160159158157

MABNGCONNECTOR MABNG CONNECTOR

(AS VIEWEDFROM WIRE SIDE) (AS VIEWEDFROM MABNG SIDE)

CGO-0456-03-AC-3

I Mating Connector Pin Assignments (MPU-85G/86G

Mult¢unction Processor Unit)
Figure 2-3 (Sheet 10)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-32

 EFIS-85B(2/12)/86B(2/12)
NOTES:

READ ALL NOTES BEFORE USING THE INTERCONNECT. COMPLETE INTERCONNECTS ARE SHOWN FOR THE FOLLOWINGEQUIPMENT:

•DUAL EADI (EFD-85/86/86A)

•DUAL EHSI (EFD-85/86/86A)
•DUAL DPU-85G (DPU-85G|86G)
•SINGLE MPU-85G (MPU-85G/86G)
•SINGLE MFD-85A
•SINGLE CHP-85D
•DUAL DCP-85E/G OR DSP-85A

ALL WlRING AND COMPONENT SELECEON MUST BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH FAA AC 43.13-1A AND INDUSTRY ACCEPTED PRACTCES.

WlRING IDENTIFICATIONMAY BE AT DISCREBON OF INSTALLABON AGENCY.

CIRCUIT BREAKERS, TERMINAL STRIPS AND ASSOCIATED HARDWARE MAY BE SELECTED TO MATCH LIKE COMPONENTS OF THE INDIVIDUALAIRCRAFT.

IF ADF 28-V POWER IS NOT SWITCHED, RELAY SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO ADF CIRCUIT BREAKER. CURRENT REQUIREMENTFOR RELAY SHOULD NOT EXCEED 40 mA.

SHIELDS OF SHIELDED WlRES MUST BE GROUNDED AT BOTH ENDS UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. SHIELDS BROKEN AT BULKHEADS OR TERMINALSTRIPS/J BOXES MUST BE GROUNDED
AT EACH END OF THEIR SECEON IF POSSIBLE OR CARRIED THROUGH ON SEPARATE PINS. SHIELD GROUND WIRES SHOULD BE 7.62 CM (3.0 IN) OR LESS. ALL SHIELD GROUND WIRES
MUST BE CONNECTED INDIVIDUALLYTO GROUND (DO NOT CONNECT IN SERIES). ACCEPTABLE PREFERRED AND ALTERNATE METHODS FOR GROUNDING THE SHIELDS OF ALL TYPES
OF SHIELDED WIRES ARE SHOWN BELOW.

2.54 CM
PREFERRED
(1.0 IN.) 5.08 CM (2.0 IN.) MAX
MAX

INSTALL HEAT
SHRINK SLEEVING
SOLDER
OVER OUTER JACKET
SLEEVE
AND SHIELDING

20 AWG, 7.62 CM (3.0 IN) MAX LENGTH

CONNECT SHIELD GROUND WIRE TO UMT-XX GROUND BRACKET,

AIRFRAME GROUND OR CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. LRU MOUNTS
(AND CONNECTOR BACKSHELLS AS REQUIRED) SHOULD BE
CONNECTED TO PRIMARY STRUCTURE USING RF GROUND STRAPS
WITH A LENGTH TO WIDTH RABO OF NOT MORE THAN 5 TO 1.
REFERENCE DOT/FAA AC 43.13-1A FOR GOOD BONDING JUMPER
INSTALLABON PRACBCES.

ALTERNATE
7.62 CM (3.0 IN.) MAX

SOLDER
SLEEVE

20 AWG, 7.62 CM (3.0 IN) MAX LENGTH

CONNECT SHIELD GROUND WIRE TO UMT-XX GROUND BRACKET,

AIRFRAME GROUND OR CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. LRU MOUNTS
(AND CONNECTOR BACKSHELLS AS REQUIRED) SHOULD BE
CONNECTED TO PRIMARY STRUCTURE USING RF GROUND STRAPS
WITH A LENGTH TO WIDTH RABO OF NOT MORE THAN 5 TO 1.
REFERENCE DOT/FAA AC 43.13-1A FOR GOOD BONDING JUMPER
INSTALLABON PRACBCES.

NOTE: USE ALTERNATE METHOD ONLY WHEN THE PREFERRED METHOD

ABSOLUTELY CANNOT BE ACCOMPLISHED. THE ALTERNATE METHOD
PROVIDES LESS SHIELDING AND ITS EFFECTVENESS IS SUBSTANRALLY
REDUCED AT RADAR AND HIGHER FREQUENCIES.

AC SIGNAL INPUTS AND THEIR ASSOCIATED REFERENCE MUST BE OF THE SAME PHASE.

ALL WlRING TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 24 AWG IS ACCIPTABLE IN SOME INSTALLABONS IF THE THE CEREFYlNG AGENCY WILL ACCEPT THIS WIRE SIZE. POWER AND GROUND
WlRES TO BE 20 AWG.

NO SWITCH SECEON MAY SHARE A COMMON GROUND.

o SWITCHES MARKED MUST BE EITHER INDIVIDUALOR CONSTRUCTED SO THAT NO SINGLE FAULT CAN AFFECT MORE THAN ONE SECEON.

g SWITCHES MARKED MUST BE CONSTRUCTED SO THAT STUCK CONTACTS OR FAILURE TO TRANSFER ALL POLES SIMULTANEOUSLYARE VERY UNLIKELY.

o SIDE 1 AND SIDE 2 WlRING MUST NOT SHARE COMMON WIRES, TERMINALS, OR JUNCTON BLOCKS FOR GROUNDS.

IF LRN DOES NOT HAVE APPROACH CAPABILITY THEN APPROACH MODE MUST BE INHIBITED WHEN LRN IS SELECTED ON DISPLAY.

EFIS DISCRETES, 150 mA MAXIMUM,FOR BOTH +28 V AND GND OUTPUTS.

REFER TO SPECIFIC AIRCRAFT INTERCONNECT FOR CONNECEONS.

THE DRIVE TRANSFER SELECT AS SHOWN PREVENTS SIMULTANEOUSSELECEON OF MPU DRIVE BY BOTH PILOTS. IF THIS SELECT FUNCTON IS PROVIDED USING INDIVIDUALSWITCHES, THE
SAME INTERLOCK MUST BE RETAINED. IF PUSHBUTTONS ARE USED, IT IS RECOMMENDEDTHAT THEY BE MOMENTARYCONTACT TYPES DRIVINGLATCHING RELAYS, WITH A
"FIRST-TO-SELECT" INTERLOCK LOGIC. IN ALL CASES SUITABLE ANNUNCIABON MUST BE PROVIDED.

ALL CONNECTORS ON AIRCRAFT HARNESS ARE DESIGNATED AS P( ). UNIT CONNECTORS MAY BE INDENTFIED AS EITHER J( ) OR P( ).
TIE POINTS LISTED ARE COMMON INTERFACES TO OTHER SYSTEMS. EE POINTS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY.

DIODES TO BE IN4002 OR EQUIVALENT.

MAKE CONFIGURATION/LOGlC JUMPER STRAPS AS SHORT AS P0SSIBLE, BUT NOÌ TO EX0EED 15.24 ÓM (6.0 IN.) SHIELDING.
1ÑITHÖUÌ STRAP WIRES LONGER THAN 15.24 CM (6.0 IN.)
INCLUDINGTHOSE REMOTELYSWITCHED, SHOULD BE SHIELDED USING THE GUIDELINESDESCRIBED IN NOTE 5.

AC REFERENCE POWER MUST USE TWISTED SHIELDED PAIR WIRE AS SHOWN WITH RETURN CONNECTED TO GROUND LOCATED AT THE RESPECRVE CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL OR RETURN
SOURCE.

DG MODE (+) (FREE GYRO) 28 V DC INPUT NOT REQUIRED IF USING CSDB ATTITUDE/HEADING SOURCE. WHEN USING ARINC 429 OR ANALOG (X, Y, Z) ATTITUDE/HEADING SOURCE,
28 V DC INPUT IS REQUIRED FOR DG MODE (+) (FREE GYRO) FUNCTON.

OPRONAL FAN MONITOR FMM-85, CPN 622-7154-001 IS COMPABBLE WITH THE TUBEAXIALFAN ROTRON PART NUMBER 032105 (CPN 009-1965-030) AS SHOWN. IF THE INSTALLER
USES UMT-148/15B MOUNENG TRAYS, OPRONAL FAN MONITOR FMM-85, CPN 622-7154-002 MUST BE USED. THIS MONITOR IS COMPABBLE WITH THE TUBEAXIALFAN, ROTRON
PART NUMBER 504558 (CPN 009-0271-010). THIS INSTALLATON MUST BE WIRED AS FOLLOWS:

EXISBNG INSTALLABONS MAY BE WIRED AS SHOWN WITH EFD/MFD SHIELD WIRES DAISY CHAINED AND TERMINATEDINTERNALLY. NEW INSTALLABONS MUST HAVE ALL SHIELDS
CONNECTED TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL USING THE GUIDELINESDESCRIBED IN NOTE 5.

UMT-148

OR
FMM-85 (-002) UMT-15B

-------------------------
28 V DC 1 B (RED) +28 V DC
-------------------------
28 V DC 2
---------------------
FAN SENSOR 3 C (BROWN)
-------------------
POWER GROUND 9 A (BLACK)
NO
-------------------
ANN SELF TEST 4 O C

-------
ACI¯T
FAN FAIL ANN (GND = FAIL) 6 DIMMINGBUS
-------------------
POWER GROUND 5
--------------------
ANN COMMON 8
 EFIS-85B(2)/86B(2)

N 1/86G N 2/86G
+2NSO. 1DC DSNP 815A DSNP 825A +2N80. 2DC
DPU MFD-85A MPU-85G/86G DPU
.

FUNCTONS PWR BUS PWR BUS

--------------
(AWG 20
DSP PWR 28 9 I
--------------
AWG 20 AWG 20
MFD PWR 8 82 28
--------------
AWG 20
DPU PWR 78 83

·-------------
(AWG 20)
MPU PWR 02 94
AWG 0 AWG 0)
EHSI PWR

PWR G 30
(AWG 20) G 20)
PWR GND 90 30
(AWG 20) AWG 2
PWR OFID DE 86
87 I 87
(AWG 20) (AWG 20)
EHSI PWR CflC
(AWG 20) I (AWG 20)
EADI PWR TrlC

PWR GND BUS PWR GND BUS

(AWG 20) (AWG 20) (AWG 20) (AWG 20) (AWG 20)
'I (AWG 20) (AWG 20)
----------------------------- ---
CHASSIS GND 26 160 47 160 160 160 26

120 V LICIITlflC (LECEND) 32 32

----------------------------- ---
LEGEND GND 33 30 33
NO. 1 i NO. 1 NO. 2 NO. 2
I i EADI i EHSI I EHSI i EADI I
I EFD-85/ EFD-85/ EFD-85/ I I EFD-85/ I
86( ) 86( ) 86( ) 86( ) 'I

I r i I I
----------------------------- --------------------------
CHASSIS GND L L l L L I
(AWG 20 (AWG 20) I
R R
(AWG 20 (AWG 20)
2 SECTlON, EXT R R
POT (2 kû, 10%, 1 W) T T q q q q T T
ZINTH-EADI f I f 2 SECTlON, EXT
ZINTCONT-EADI N N POT (2 kû, 10%,
IrlTL EADI M I M 1 W)
--------- --------
SHIELD I I
T I
ZINTH-EHSt f f
ZINTCONT-EHSI N I N
INTLœIIISI l.I M

109 10
-- +-
TO SHEE 7 SHEET 7
OM

DRIVE XFER------

42
NORM 42 8

RH
LH I XFER
XFER I RELAY
RELAY ¡
3 SWITCHES I
T T
'
-----------------
LF PILOT O 49
----------------
PF PILOT O 50 OPRONAL WIRES THAT MAY BE REMOTED FOR
-----------------
UNE FORWARD, PAGE FORWARD, AND CHAPTER FORWARD.
CF PILOT O 43
PILOT GND 12

+28 Y CONVERT (UGHENG) 52 FOR 28-V LIGHENG, CONNECT PIN 31 TO 28-V LIGHENG BUS AND
5 Y (UGHENG) 16 JUMPER PIN 52 TO 46. FOR 5-V LIGHENG, CONNECT PIN 46 TO
27.5 (LIGHENG) 31 5-V LIGHTlNG BUS, AND LEAVE PINS 31 AND 52 OPEN.

NO. 1 NO. 1 NO. 2 NO. 2

DSP-85A DPU-85G/86G BE PRE-80 MPU--85G/86G DPU-85G/86G DSP-85A

---------------
DPU DATA H 1 28 28 1
---------------
DPU DATA L 2 32 32 2

i I I
---------------
DSP DATA H 21 36 36 21
---------------
DSP DATA L 22 40 I I 40 22

I I 47
---------------
MPU DATA H 4 12 4
---------------
MPU DATA L 5 16 5

I I 35 I
39
DSP DATA H 21 31 24
DSP DATA L 25 30 25
16
ALT ALERT 'OND-ALEPT) 11 TOC 3
11
I
ET ET
i SPRING-LOADED
SPRING-LOADED
1
i SWITCH SWITCH I
N.O.
' CAT II RFQUFST SWITCH OR STRAP OPTION & N.O.
'
--------------
ELASPED EME 43 REQUEST IS ENABLED WITH PIN 9 TO GND, DISABLED WHEN OPEN. B 43
---------- L.H. R.H
ELASPED EME GND 45 SWITCH MAY BE ENABLING OR DISABLING FUNCTON OR PIN 9 45
------------
CAT II REQUEST 9 d MAY BE STRAPPED TO GND OR LEFT OPEN PERMANENTLY, O 9
·---------------------
GND 41 AS DESIRED. 41

NO. 1 NO. 2
DSP-85A DSP-85A

----------
1 CRS SEL 0=VOR1, 1=VOR2--------------------- 11 11
---------------------------
2 WPT BRG SEL, 0=LNV1, 1=LNV2 12 12
3 MFD BRG SEL, 0=ADF1, 1=ADF2---------------------------13 13
------------------------
4 LNAV CRS SEL, 0=LNAV1, 1=LNAV2 7 -

*STRAP - ---------------
14
5 LNAV 2 2ND CRS ENABLE 1=LNAV 2 ENABLE 8 8
---------------------------------------
6 RESERVED (TEST) 10 I 10
--------------------------------------------------
39 39
Ce
GNDJ1-------------------------------------------------- FCC-86
40 | 40
*0=GND, 1=0PEN I
I
-------------
AILERON MISTRIM (AP/FD ANNUN 22) 3 48 48 3
------------
ELEVATOR MISTRIM (AP/FD ANNUN 23) 2 52 52 2
-------------
RUDDER MISTRIM (AP/FD ANNUN 24) 1 47 47 1
-------------------------------
AP/FD ANNUN 1 10 10
-------------------------------
AP/FD ANNUN 2 22 22
-------------------------------
AP/FD ANNUN 3 23 23
-------------------------------
AP/FD ANNUN 4 11 11
-------------------------------
AP/FD ANNUN 5 24 24
-------------------------------
AP/FD ANNUN 6 12 12
-------------------------------
AP/FD ANNUN 7 25 25
-------------------------------
AP/FD ANNUN 8 13 13
-------------------------------
AP/FD ANNUN 9 16 16
------------------------------
AP/FD ANNUN 10 15 GND TO ACTlVATE 15
------------------------------ -
AP/FD ANNUN 11 14 (ACTlVATE = 14
ENABLE/DELETE)
------------------------------
AP/FD ANNUN 12 17 17
------------------------------
14 19
AP/FD ANNUN 13 18 18
------------------------------
AP/FD ANNUN 14 19 19
------------------------------
AP/FD ANNUN 15 20 20
·-----------------------------
AP/FD ANNUN 16 21 21
------------------------------
AP/FD ANNUN 17 9 9
------------------------------
AP/FD ANNUN 18 8 8
------------------------------
AP/FD ANNUN 19 7 7
------------------------------
AP/FD ANNUN 20 5 5
------------------------------
AP/FD ANNUN 21 4 4
 EFD-NEOA5D/ EFD-NEOH5 EFD-NEOH EFD-80
N 1/86G N 2/86G
FUNCTlONS DPU 1286( D286( DPU
6( ) 6( ) ) )
I I I i I I i
i
i I i i i
INCUNOMETER UGHT H (5 OR 28 V DC) i P P I i
INCUNOMETER UGHT L (5 OR 28 Y DC) U U
---------------------------------
(AWG 20 WG 20)
EHSI +26.5 V (HV) H 94 W W 94
-11 ---------------------------------
(AWG 20 I
WG 20
EHSI +11, V RTN 111 C C I 111
---------------------------------------102
(AWG 20 WG 20
EHSI +25 DEFL A A 102
,
---------------------------------------106
(AWG 20) WG 20
EHSI +11 DEFL I 106
-25 ---------------------------------
AWG 20 i
WG 20
EHSI +25, V RTN 99 D D
-25 ---------------------------------------103
AWG 20 WG 20
EHSI DEFL F F 103
-11 ---------------------------------------107
AWG 20 m WG 20
EHSI DEFL E E i 107
-----------------------------------
G 20 ,
WG 20
EHS) +26.5 V RTN 91 i 91
---------------------------------
WG 20 i
WG 20
EADI +26.5 V (HV) H 62 W W 62
-11 -----------------------------------
WG 20 WG 20
EADI +11, RTN 79 C I C
---------------------------------------
EADI +25 DEFL 70 (AWG 20 I A I WG 20 i
A 70
---------------------------------------
74 AWG 20 I WG 20
EADI +11 DEFL 74
-25 ---------------------------------
AWG 20 WG 20
EADI +25, V RTN 67 D I I D 67
-25 ---------------------------------------
71 AWG 20 I I WG 20
EADI DEFL F F 71
-11 ---------------------------------------
75 AWG 20 WG 20
EADI DEFL E E 75
EADI +26.5 V RTN ------------------------------------
59 AWG 20) WG 20
y 59
P I P P I P
EHSI X DEFL H 120 128
---------------------------127
EHSI X DEFL L h h 127
i
P P P I P
'
---------------------------
EHSI Y DEFL H 65 65
---------------------------
EHSI Y DEFL L 76 76

P I P P I P
'
--------------------------
EHSI RETRACE H 61 X X 61
----- --------------------
EHSI RETRACE L 64 j J 64
SHIELD I r r
P I P P I P
EHSI GRN VIDEO H 100 n n 100
------------------------
EHSI GRN VIDEO L 96 a a 96
SHIELD I e e i
P I P P I P
EHSI RED VIDEO H 108 108
EHSI RED VIDEO L 101 b b 104
i i
P I P P I P
'
-----------------------112
EHSI BLUE VIDEO H d d 112
-----------------------116
EHSI BLUE VIDEO L c c 116

P I P P I P
--------------------------
EHSI SHADOW H 72 m m 72
--------------------------
EHSI SHADOW L 73 t t 73
SHIELD q q
--------------------------
EHSI GRN INT H 92 Z Z 92
-------- --------
EHSi GRN INT L 88 Y Y 88

---------------------------150
EADI X DEFL H 150
---------------------------
EADI X DEFL L 151 h h 151

---------------------------
EADI Y DEFL H 80 80
---------------------------
EADI Y DEFL L 84 84

P P P P
--------------------------
EADI RETRACE H 68 X X 68
--------------------------
EADI RETRACE L 69 j j 69
r r
P P P P
------------------------115
EADI GRN VIDEO H n n 115
------------------------114
EADI GRN VIDEO L a a 114
I I
P P P P
'
------------------------123
EADI RED VIDEO H 123
------------------------124
EADI RED VIDEO L b b 124

P P P P
-----------------------
EADI BLUE VIDEO H 131 d d 131
-----------------------132
EADI BLUE VIDEO L c c 132

P P P P
--------------------------120
EADI GRN INT H 120
--------------------------119
EADI GRN INT L Y Y 119

DPU--N 1/86G G2/86G

MPU-85G/86G DPU 8

-------------

EADI XH 3
------------
7 5
EADI XL

-------------

EADI YH 11
-------------
15 6
EADI YL

-----------

EADI GRN H 10 I
-----------

EADI GRN L 23

-----------
23
EADI RED H 2
-----------

EADI RED L 31

----------
335
EADI BLUEH 35
----------

EADI BLUE L 30

EADI GRN INT H 13

EADI GRN INT L 17

-------

EADI RETRACE H 51
5 1 102
EADI RETRACE L
NO. 2
NS E1 SE
51 51 593
EHSI XH 50 -

3AEC 03 55 55
EHSI XL DARCKUP
UP
D
-------------
67
EHSI YH 67
-------------

EHSI YL 71

---------

EHSI GRN H 75 I
---------

EHSI GRN L TO

EHSI RED H 130

EHSI RED L 1 10

EHSI BLUE H 1‡1

EHSI BLUE L 118

11
EHSI GRN INT H 152 6
150 0
EHSI GRN INT L

90
EHSI RETRACE I I 10
1 3 1 3
EHSI RETRACE L 150

-------
107 107 70
EHSI SHADOW H 7C
-------
71 111 111
EHSI SHADOW L
 MFD-85A MPU-85G/86G
FUNCTlONS A1
P P
---------------------------
MFD X DEFL H 4 54
---------------------------
MFD X DEFL L 10 55

P P
---------------------------
MFD Y DEFL H 5 50
---------------------------
MFD Y DEFL L 1 59

P P
'
--------------------------
MFD RETRACE H 19 74
--------------------------
MFD RETRACE L 26 75
----------------------------------
SHIELD 21
P P
'
------------------------
MFD GRN VIDEO L 6 70
------------------------
MFD GRN VIDEO H 7 71
i i

------------------------
MFD RED VIDEO L 13 62
------------------------
MFD RED VIDEO H 14 63

-----------------------
MFD BLUE VIDEO L 15 60
-----------------------
MFD BLUE VIDEO H 23 67
----------------------------------
SHIELD 12
P P
'
---------------------------
MFD GRN INT L 2 78
--------------------------
MFD GRN INT H 3 79
----------------------------------
SHIELD 37
H 550
:: :::::
----------------------------- 112
MFD DATA H 55
----------------------------- 116
MFD DATA L 36

5t3
-----------------------------

MFD CLK H 120

----------------------------- 121
MFD CLK L 54
i I

-----------------------------

MFD SYNC H 51 128

----------------------------. 132
MFD SYNC L 44
---------------------------------- TlE
SHIELD 34
POINTS

------------------------ 737
REMOTE DATA OH 17
------------------------ 730
REMOTE DATA OL 25

------------------------ 1311
REMOTE DATA 1 H 32 -
FROM LRN SYSTEMS
REMOTE DATA 1 L 10 1312

------------------------ 1500
REMOTE DATA 2 H 18
------------------------ 1500
REMOTE DATA 2 L 11

NO. 1 NO. 2
DPU-85G/86G MPU-85G/86G DPU-85G/86G

P P
-------------------
R TO L DATA H 12 105
-------------------
R TO L DATA L 16 109

-------------------------------- ---------------- ---------

L TO R DATA H 18 12
-----------------------------------------------------------
L TO R DATA L 22 16
I I
' P I I P I
--------------------
R TO L CLK H 4 I 113 I
CROSS --------------------
R TO L CLK L 8 117
SIDE ,
I I
DATA I I I i i i
-------------------------------- ---------------- ---------
L TO R CLK R 26 4
------------------------------------------------------------
L TO R CLK L 30 8
I
'I P i I P
--------------------106
R TO L SYNC H 121
--------------------110 +28 V DC
R TO L SYNC L 125 I

I I P P i
------------------------------------------------------------
L TO R SYNC H 19 106 i COPILOTS PILOTS
----------------------------------------------------------- I
L TO R SYNC L 23 I 110

------------------- ----------
ATT COMPARATOR 77 145 145 i 77

------------------------------
HDG COMPARATOR 65 146 146 65

---------------------------------
CAT II GREEN 49 142 142 49

---------------------------------
CAT II AMBER 30 160 90 I 30

---------------- ----------
CAT II COMPARATOR 29 141 141 29

81 I I

L l
s°="10R RESET 111

35
MASTER WARN 35

1 2
I 150 O

MASTER WARN RESET 150

(SEAP 22)

g NO. 1 I I g (MPU TEST CON OLLED

DPU TEST BY SEŒCTION)
C 91 91 O O-
ANH EENNGAGE MPU TEST
3
S

P/O NAV/DME P/O RH ' #ENGAGE

TEST INHIBIT RELAY I XFER RLY

NO NO P/O COPILOTS CROSS-SIDE

P/O PILOTS CROSS-SIDE
B103 14 83 103 3 _ AHRS ATT SEŒCT
AHRS ATT SEŒCT
(SEAP 25)

NO NO P/O COPILOTS CROSS-SIDE

P/O PILOTS CROSS-SIDE
B107 3 82 107 O - AHRS HDG SELECT
AHRS HDG SEŒCT
(SEAP 26)

NO NO P/O COPILOTS CROSS-SIDE

P/O PILOTS CROSS-SIDE
· B135 11 79 135 O DSP/DCP SELECT
DSP/DCP SELECT
(STRAP 28)
 NO. 1 NO. 2
DPU-85G/86G MPU-85G/86G DPU-85G/86G
FUNCTIONS & D E &
I i I i i
I i I i I i
--------- ---------- ------------------------
STPL1 61 1
STRAP 1 ----------------------------------------------- --------- ----------- --------- ----------
STPR1 4 61
--------------------115------------------------
STPL2 5
STRAP 2 AUTOPILOT TYPE ----------------------------------------------- --------------------- --------------------115
STPR2 8
-------------------- ------------------------
STPL3 121 9
STRAP 3 ----------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------121
STPR3 12
I I
--------------------123------------------------
STPL4 13
NAV DATA REF,
STRAP 4
MAG/TRUE
----------------------------------------------- ------------------------------- ----------123
STPR4 16
I I I I I
i i
--------------------128------------------------
STPL5 53
-------- ------ -------------------------------------------128

STRAP 5 STPRS 56
--------------------132------------------------

LNV PORT ANNUN STPL6 57

STRAP 6 I I I I I i
i I i I i
-----------------------------------------------60 -------------------------------------------132
STPR6
I I
--------------------133------------------------
STPL7 61
--------- -------- -------------------------------------------133

STRAP 7 STPR7 64
--------------------134 -----------------------

RAD ALT TYPE STPL8 65

STRAP 8 I 1 I I I
----------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------134
STPRS 68
I I I I I
--------------------135 -----------------------

X-SIDE DATA FLAG STPL9 69

STRAP 9 -----------------------------------------------72 ------------------------------------------135
STPR9
I I
-------------------136 -----------------------
STPL10 73
STRAP 10 ---------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------136
STPR10 76
VOR PORT ANNUN -------------------116 -----------------------130
STPL24
STRAP 24 ----------------------------------------------131 ------------------------------------------116
STPR24
I I I I
-------- --------- --------- ---------140
STRAP 11 DPU LEFT/RIGHT 140 (MUST BE OPEN)
STRAP 12 COMP CANCEL/RESET
(SEE SHEET 5) I
-------- ----------142-------------- ---------
STPL13 85 I
STRAP 13
I I
---------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------142

-
STPR13 88
SPD DEV DISPLAY

-------- ----------159-------------- ---------126

STRAP 23 STPL23
----------------------------------------------127-------------------------------------------159
STPR23
I I i I I
i 1 I
-------------------145----------------------- i
STPL14 89 i i
STRAP 14 ATTITUDE/HEADING --------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------145
STPR14 92

-------- ----------14-------------- -------

STPL15 93
STRAP 15 ADF TYPE I I I
-------- ----------- - - ---------- -------- --------- ---------------------- ----------146
[STPR15 96

----------------- 147-----------------------
STPL16 97
STRAP 16 LNV COURSE I I I i
--------------------------------------------- 100-------------------------------------------147
[STPR16
I i I
-------------------148-----------------------
STPL17 102
STRAP 17 HEADING ----------------------------------------------103-------------------------------------------148
STPR17
I I I I
-------------------151------------------------106
STPL18
STRAP 18 VNAV ----------------------------------------------107-------------------------------------------151
STPR18
I I I I I
i i I
-------------------152 -----------------------110
REVERSIONARY STPL19
STRAP 19 ----------------------------------------------111-------------------------------------------152
DISPLAY STPR19
i i
-------------------155------------------------114
STPL20
STRAP 20 COMMANDBARS --------------------------------------------- 115-------------------------------------------155
STPR20
I I r i i
i i I
-------------- 156-------------------
STPL21 118 I
- I -
STRAP 21 ANG/LIN DEV I I I
--------------------------------------------- -------------------------- ----------156
STPR21 119

MASTER WARN RESET I

STRAP 22 I
(SEE SHEET 5) i
I I
ATTlTUDE SOURCE I I
STRAP 25
(SEE SHEET 5)
I
HEADING SOURCE I
STRAP 26
(SEE SHEET 5)

STRAP 27 AIRSPEED TREND - --------- --------------------

27 77 1 1

DCP SELECT I I
STRAP 28 I
(SEE SHEET 5) I
I I I
----139----------------------------------- I I
STPL29 15 I
STRAP 29 RISING RUNWAY ----------------------------------------------------- --------------------139
STPR29 78
i i I
---- -------------------------134
STPL30 99
STRAP 30 HDG SELECT ------------------------------------------------------134 --------------------
STPR30 99

----------------105-------------105
STPL31
STRAP 31 LNV DATA ------------------------------------------------------105-------------------------------

STPR31 105

NO. 1 NO. 1 NO. 2 NO. 2

VIR-32 DPU-85G/86G MPU-85G/86G DPU-85G/86G VIR-32
FPA-80

I TI T TT TT TIT
---------------------------
VOR SIN 36 72 72 72 72 36
--------------------------
VOR COS 34 76 76 76 . 34
76
--------------------------
VOR COM 30 80 80 I 80 80 30

VOR REF H 42 41 41 41 41 42
46
P P

3 3 3

19 39û 39û 39
39û i 39û 39 I 1 W 1 W 1 W
1W I 1W TW I
---------------------
MM 15 17 17 I 17 17 15 i
---------------------

OM 12 13 13 13 13 12 I
--------------------- i
IM 16 21 21 21 21 16
----------------------
VOR/LOC VALID 18 119 119 I 119 119 18
--------------------
ILS MODE (GND) 40 101 101 101 101 40
P P P P
5 5

----------
GSI/GS2 VALID 17 113 113 I 113 113
o NAV TEST (FROM CTL) 9 108 108 108 108 9
.
127 i NAV TEST
----------------------------------- I
BACK LOC (+28 V) 23 I (FROM CTL)
127

-------------------------------------
LOC TUNE (GND) 19 I
131
139
--------------------------------------------
DH (GND)
1 8
 NO. 1
NO. 1 NO. 1 NO. 2 NO. 2 NO. 2 OTHER
ALT-55 CTL-32 DPU-85G/66G FCC-86 MPU-85G/86G CTL-32 ALT--55 DPU-85G/86G TE ACFT
FUNCTONS A A E A E A E A E A E F-Q¾Il SYSTEMS
iirill I i

------- -------
TEXT INHIBIT

I I
I i 122 I 122 I I
----
RAD ALT TEST 25
RAD ALT TEST
-
I 122 122

-
12 AP ENGAGED
I NAV/DME
TEST INHIBIT
i RELAY \ i I i i i
I i I i i I
----
RAD ALT VAUD 49 124 124 124 49 I 124

H 6 6 6 6
RAD ALT
I
---------------------
LAT NAV VALID OUT (+28 V) 24 I

110

---------------------------------11
VERT VALID OUT (+26 V) I

61

--------------------------------
LIN DEV (+28 V) 20 i

-----------------------
VOR LOC 1 MODE (+28 V) 60 i

----------------------
VOR LOC 2 MODE (+28 V) 78 I

117

LNV MODE (+28 V) 118 I

I I 1 11]

LNV 2 MODE (+28 V) 100

DLEAR PULSE (i20 V) 113 I

111 127

P P P P
---------------------------------------
PITCH CMD (+DN) 1 1 30G
--------------------------------------
PITCH CMD (+UP) 2 2 365

P P P P
'
----------------------------------------
ROLL CMD (+LT) 37 37 300
----------------------------------------
ROLL CMD (+RT) 38 30 300
I
I ' '
P P P P
-------------------------------------
FCS 26 V AC REF H 9 9 221
-------------------------------------
FCS 26 V AC REF C 10 10 10G

P P
------------------------------------
VERT DEV OUT (+UP) 58 p p
62
-------- ------- ------------
VERT DEV OUT (+UP) 74 ANALOG
-------------------------------------
VERT DEV OUT (+DN) 63 -
LO
63
-------- ---------
S M
VERT DEV OUT (+DN) 75

' P P i
---------------------------------------
COURSE DATUM H 25 I p p
i P P 1
-------------------------------------------- ------------
COURSE DATUM H 25
----------------------------------------
COURSE DATUM C 26
100
--------------------- --------------- -- ------------------
COURSE DATUM C 26

P P
---------------------------------------
HDG ERROR OUT H 68 p p
102
------------------------------------------- ------------
HDG ERROR OUT H 68 I
I I
--------------------------------------64
HDG ERROR OUT C

-------------------------- -------------------------------
HDG ERROR OUT C 64

P P I
------- --------
LAT DEV OUT (+RT) 69 p p
108
-------- -------- ------------ - -O 1
LAT DEV OUT (+RT) 69 ,

-------------------------------------
LAT DEV OUT (+LT) 73

-------- --------
LAT DEV OUT (+LT) 73 OI

TO/EllOM ( I TC) 12C I p p

411
-------- ------- ------------126
To/FRoM (+To)
TO/FROM (+FROM) 130
1 2
------- -------130
SL TO/FROM (+FROM)

P/O LH DRIVE
XFER RELAY (SH 3)

ED VAILD (120 V) 113 1 3 301

P P P P
-------------------------------------- NO. 1
VNI 1 CSDB A 8 8 1251
o -------------------------------------- VERT
VNI 1 CSDB B 12 12 1252
NAV
MPU-85G/86G

P P P P
--------------------------------------------100
+FAST 116 856 NO. 1
--------------------------------------------111
+SLOW 113 855 AIR
DATA
OR AOA
o E/.OT SLCW VI.UD 111 111 CET
 NO. 2
DPU-85G/86G OA FER
FUNCTlONS MPU-85G/86G TIE
ORLS SYSTEMS

--------------------
LAT NAV VALID OUT (+28 V) 30

VERT VALID OUT (+28 V) €5

11 72

------------------------------

LIN DEV (+28 V) 29

---------------------115
VOR LOC 1 MODE (+28 V)

---------------------121
VOR LOC 2 MODE (+28 V)

--------------------------147
LNV 1 MODE (+28 V)

11 1055

-------------------------158
LNV 2 MODE (+28 V)

-------------------------111
CLEAR PULSE (+28 V)
113 133
I
P P P P
'
-----------------------------
PITCH CMD (+DN) 1 100G
-----------------------------
PITCH CMD (+UP) 2 2 1085
I
P P P P
'
------------------------------
ROLL CMD (+LT) 37 37 1003
------------------------------
ROLL CMD (+RT) 38 38 1002

P P P P
'
---------------------------
FCS 26 V AC REF H 9 9 271
---------------------------

FCS 26 V AC REF C 10 10 520

------- ---------
VERT DEV OUT (+UP) 58 p p ANALOG
P I P 73 AUTO-
YERT CEY CUT ( I UP) 71 -
PILOT
-------- --------- ----------------------------------------- SYSTEM
VERT DEV OUT (+DN) 63
I 4 SIDE 2
--------------------------
VERT DEV OUT (+DN) 75 C

P P I
-------- -------- i
COURSE DATUM H 25 p p
1068
CURCE DATUI.I Il 25
--------------------------------- - --------- ---------
COURSE DATUM C 26
1 69
cOURSE DATUM C 26

P P I
-------- --------- i
HDG ERROR OUT H 68 p p
1065
1100 ERROR DUT ll 28 i i
I I
-------------------------------- ----------------------------------------- i
HDG ERROR OUT C 64 i
1066
HDG ERROR OUT C 61

P P
------ --------
LAT DEV OUT (+RT) 69 p p
1120
LAT DEY CUT (IRT) 60
-------- --------- -------------------- --------------------
LAT DEV OUT (+LT) 73

- ---------------------------
LAT DEV OUT (+LT) 73

P P i

TO/FROM (+FROM) 13D

P/O LH DRIVE
XFER RELAY (SH 3)
----------------------137
FD IN VIEW BIAS (+28 V) 137 1081

FD VAILD (120 V) 113 113 1980

P P P P
--------------------------------- NO. 2
VNI 1 CSDB A 8 1276 (o
-
--------------------------------- VERT
VNI 1 CSDB B 12 12 1277 g
NAV :::::

MPU G

I EACT 1 0 05E Nu i
i SLOW 117 111 055 DAATRA
·

OR AOA
-4
I EAST/CL W VALID 111 111 957
 WIRINGREQUIRED WITH SINGLE WEATHER RADAR CONTROL

NO. 1 NO. 2
DPU-85G/86G MPU-85G/86G DPU-85G/86G TlE
ERMIS
I I I I
I
P P P P P
-----------------------------133
WXP DATA H 133 133 352
-----------------------------137
WXP DATA L 137 137 353

' P P
' P P
' P
------------------------------

WXP CLK H 141 141 141 349

------------------------------145
WXP CLK L 115 145 350

i I
' P P
'I P P
'I P
----------------------125
WXP RANGE MARK H 150 125 328
----------------------129
WXP RANGE MARK L 154 120 329

i
' P P
'i P P
'I P
-----------------------------149
WXR BUSY H 149 112 346
-----------------------------153
WXR BUSY L 153 153 347

I I i I
'P P'P P'P 'TO
--------------------------117
WXR RETRACE H 134 117 331 WEATHER
--------------------------121
WXR RETRACE L 130 121 332 RADAR
SYSTEM
(FOR
--------------------------143
WXR SHADOW H 151 143 325 SINGLE
--------------------------147 • RADAR
WXR SHADOW L 155 147 326
CONTROL)
I
'i P P
'I P P
'I P
------------------------------
WXR CTR H 101 135 101 343
------------------------------105
I I I 1
WXR CTR L 130 105 344

I
'I P P
'I P P
'I P
------------------------
WXR RED VIDEO H 77 136 77 337
------------------------

WXR RED MDEO L 81 110 81 338

I
'I P P
'I P P
'I P
-----------------------

WXR BLUE VIDEO H 85 111 85 340

-----------------------

WXR BLUE VIDEO L 89 118 89 341

I
P P
'I P P
'I P
----------------------
WXR GREEN VIDEO H 93 152 93 334
----------------------

WXR GREEN VIDEO L 97 156 97 335

WIRINGREQUIRED WITH DUAL WEATHER RADAR CONTROLS

NO. 1 NO. 2
DPU-85G/86G MPU-85G/86G TlE DPU-85G/86G TlE
EQIRT.S A EDINIS
I I I I I

P P
' P P
' ' P P
'
----------------------------133
WXP DATA H 133 352 133 453
----------------------------137
WXP DATA L 137 353 137 454

' P P
' P P
' ' P P
------------------------------
WXP CLK H 141 141 349 141 456
------------------------------145
WXP CLK L 145 350 145 457

P P'P P 'P P'

----------------------125
WXP RANGE MARK H 150 328 125 459
----------------------129
WXP RANGE MARK L 154 329 129 460

do 'P P'P P 'P P

01 -----------------------------149
WXR BUSY H 149 346 149 462
-----------------------------153
WXR BUSY L 153 347 153 463

P P'P P 'P P
-------------------------117
WXR RETRACE H 134 331 TO 117 465 TO
------------------------- WEATHER WEATHER
WXR RETRACE L 121 138 332 121 466
RADAR RADAR
SEEM I -SEKM
IP P1
' IP P1 (NO. 1
'I IP P1 (NO. 2
--------------------------143
WXR SHADOW H 151 325 RADAR 143 168 RADAR
--------------------------147
WXR SHADOW L 155 326 CONTROL) 147 469 CONTROL)

'P P'P P' 'P P'

------------------------------
WXR CTR H 101 135 343 101 471
------------------------------105
WXR CTR L 139 344 105 472

------------------------
WXR RED VIDEO H 77 136 337 77 174
------------------------

WXR RED VIDEO L 81 140 338 81 475

'P P'P P' 'P P'

--------------------
WXR BLUE VIDEO H 85 144 340 85 477
--------------------
WXR BLUE VIDEO L 89 148 341 89 478

-------------------
WXR GREEN VIDEO H 93 152 334 93 480
I -------------------
WXR GREEN VIDEO L 97 156 335 97 481
 OPTlONS
OPTION 1: DISPLAY SWITCHING
NO. 1 NO. 2
MPU-85G/86G
DPU-85G/86G DPU-85G/86G

A. EHSI ON MFD I I I I I
I i
------------------
DRIVE TRANSFER 109 103
I LEFT RIGHT I
EHSI i I i EHSI
ON MFD ON MFD
D O O O
¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯ "
P/O LH _ _ _
P/O RH P/O LH P/O RH
XFR RELAY XFR RELAY XFR RELAY XFR RELAY
I I
8. EADI DISPLAY ON EHSI. AND/OR COMPOSITE DISPLAY I I
EADI DISHPLAY EADONDISHPLAY
129 129

--- - --9--
STRAP 19 152 110
L-- ------------------- ---------
111 152
I I I
125 125
125 125
THESE CONTACTS ARE
COMPOSITE o OO OO O P/O REQUIRED IF OPTION P/O O og og a COMPOSITE
------ ------ -------, e------- ------ ------ ----
DISPLAY +--- LH 1.A IS INSTALLED. RH DISPLAY
ON EHSI XFER OTHERWISE INSTALL XFER ON EHSI
COMPOSITE RELAY JUMPERS IN PLACE RELAY COMPOSITE
DISPLAY OF CONTACTS. DISPLAY
ON EADI ON EADI
OPTION 2: FMS-90/LRN-85 TRUF HFADING DISPIAY
NO.1 NO.1 NO.2 NO.2
CRU-90 AHC-85 DPU-85G/86G MPU-85G/86G DPU-85G/86G AHC-85 CRU-85

I i i I i i
------------------ --
TRUE HDG VALID 13 118 118 118 118 I 13

----------------
TRUE HDG X 43 96 96 96 96 43
----------------
TRUE HDG Y 44 104 104 104 104 44
----------------
TRUE HDG Z 45 100 100 I 100 100 45
HDG INPUT LOGIC (OPEN=MAG) 1 I 1
-----------------------------------------------· I 135-
DG MODE 95 135 95 1 i
-----------------------------------------
STRAP 14 145 89 I
----
OUTPUT SYNCHRO STRAPPING-- 63 92 145 i
------ --
STRAP 4 123 13 63
·----------------------
- 123 -
COM 15 16 15
------------------------- -------------- ------ ---
STRAP 17 148 102 I I i

103 148
MAG O u E TRUE o O MA

MAG/TRUE OUT (OPEN=TRUE) 53 i 53

AN R2EF
H H
NO. 1 26 Y ATT REF
6
-------- ---------
ATT VAUD 13 117 117 117 117 13

A 8 8

HOU.LDDATA
2 44 81 81 81 81 44

CH A A 550 88 550

---------------------------------------
PITCH DATA Z 52 92 92 92 92 52
---------------------------------------------- -
SHIELD 49 49

OPTlON 3: ANALOG VERTlCAL NAVIGATION

NO. 1 NO. 1 NO. 2 NO. 2

MPU-85G/86G
VNI-80(A/C) DPU-85G/86G DPU-85G/86G VNI-80(A/C)

----------------------------
VERT DEV H (+UP) P 4 4 4 4 P
----------------------------
oo VERT DEV L (+DN) N 3 3 3 3 N
----------------------------------
VNAV/VAUD U 113 113 113 113 U
NOTE: CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO INSURE ANALOG VERT DEV SIGNAL FROM VNI-80(A/C) IS NOT CONNECTED TO EFIS PINS AT THE SAME TIME AS GS DEV SIGNAL FROM VIR-32,
WHICH USES THESE SAME EFIS PINS.
 EFIS-85B(2/12)/86B(2/12)

SHEET INDEX

DESCRIPTIDN

1. NOTES

2. NOTES

3. POWER/REV SWITCHING

4. DISPLAY CONTROL

5. DISPLAY SELECT

6. DISPLAYS

7. WEATHERRADAR

8. SENSORS

9. AIR DATA/AUTOPILOT

1D. ATT/HDG/RAD ALT/COMPARE

11. CONFIGURATIONSTRAPS

NOTES:
READALL NDTESBEFŒE USING THE INTERCONNECT.COWLETEINTERC0mECTS
ARE SHOWN EQUIPÆNT:
FOR THE FOLLOWING

DUAL EADI (EFD-85/66/66A)

DUAL EHSI (EFD-85/66/66A)
DUAL DPU-85G|86G
SINGLE CEP-BSD/DUALCEP-86B
DUAL DCP-85E/G DUAL DSP-85A
WLTIPLE FM-85

ALL WIRINGA COMPDŒNT SELECTIONMUSTBE IN ACCORDANCE

WITHFAA AC 43.13-1A AND
I USTRYACCEPTEDPRACTICES.

AGENCY.
WIRINGIDENTIFICATIONMAYBE AT DISCRETIOFtGF INSTALLATION

HARDWARE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS,TERMINALSTRIPS A ASSOCIATED MAYBE SELECTEDTO MATCH
LIKE COWONENTSOF THE I IVIDUALAIRCRAFT.

ALL WIRINGTO BE 22 AW, ÐLESS OTHEREISENOTED.

SHIELDSOF SHIELDEDWIRESWST BE GROUEEDAT BDTHENDSUNLESSDTHERWISEI ICATED.

SHIELDSBROKENAT BULKHEADS OR TERMINAL STRIPS/J BOXESWST BE GROUNDEDAT EACHE
OF THEIR SECTIONIF POSSIBLEOR CARRIEDTHROUGH ONSEPARATEPINS. SHIELD MOUU
WIRESSHOULDBE 7.62 CM (3.0 IN) OR LESS. ALL SHIELDGROUND WIRESWST BE CONNECTED
I IVIOUALLYTO WOUND(DD NOTCONNECTIN SERIES). ACCEPTABLEPREFERREDAND
ALTERNATE METHODSFOR GROUNDINGTHE SHIELDSOF ALL TYPESOF SHIELDEDWIRESARE
SHOINBELOW.

2.54 CM PREFERRED
(1.0 IN.!
MAX ' 5.08 CMl2.0 IN.) MAX

SQLDER
SLEEVE

LS
20 AW, 7.62 CM (3.0 IN.] MAXLENGTH
ING
DVERCUTERJACKET
ANDSHIELDING CONECT SHIELDGROUmWIRE TO UNT-XX
GRDUND BRACKET,AIRFRAE GROÐD OR
CONECTORBACKSŒLL. LRU ÐTS (AND
CONWCTORBACKSHELLS AS REGUIRED)
SHOULDBE CONNECTED TO PRIMARY
STRUCTURE USINGRF GROU STRAPS
WITHA LENGTHTO WIDTHRATIOOF NOT
MORETHAN5 TO 1. REFERENCEDOT/FAA
AC 43.13-1A FOR GOOD80mlNG JUWER
INSTALLATION PRACTICES.

ALTERNATE
7.62 CM (3.0 IN.) MAX :

20 A 7.62 CM (3.0 IN.) MAXLENGTH

CONECT SHIELD GROUmWIRE TO UMT-XX

GROUmBRACKET,AIRFRAE GROUND OR
CONŒCTORBACKSHELL. LRUEUNTS (AND
CONECTORBACKSHELLS AS REQUIREDI
SHOULDBE CONECTEDTO PRIMARY
STRUCTURE USINGRF GROUND STRAPS
WITHA LENGTHTO WIDTHRATIDOF NOT
MORETHAN5 TO 1. REFERENCE00T/FAA
AC 43.13-1A FOR GOOD80mlNG JUMPER
INSTALLATION PRACTICES.

ETHOD ONLYIHEN T PREFERREDETHDD ABSOLUTELY

NOTE: USE ALTERNATE CANNOTBE ACCOWLISŒD.
TΠALTERNATE REOUCED
ETHOD PROVIDESLESS SHIELDINGA ITS EFFECTIVEESS IS SUBSTANTIALLY
AT RADARAm HIGHERFREGUENCIES.

REFERENCE
AC SIGNALINPUTSANDTHEIR ASSOCIATED MUSTBE OF THE SAMEPHASE.

THE DRIVE TRANSFERSELECTAS SHOWNPREVENTSSIMULTANEOUSSELECTIONOF XSIDE DPU BY

BOTHPILDTS, IF THIS SELECTFUNCTIONIS PROVIDEDUSING I IVIOUALSWITCHES,THE
SAE INTERLOCK MUSTBE RETAIED. IF PUSHBUTTONS AREUSED, IT IS REC0tBE ED THAT
THEYBE MOMENTARY CONTACT TYPESORIVINGLATCHINGRELAYS,WITHA •FIRST-TO-SELECT"
INTERLOCK LOGIC. IN ALL CASES, SUITABLEANNUNCIATION
MUSTBE PROVIDED,

NOSWITCHSECTIONMAYSHAREA C0itiBN GRDUND.

SD THATNOSINGLE
SWITCHESMARKEO MUSTBE EITHER ImlVIDUAL OR CONSTRUCTED
FAULTCANAFFECTMORETHATOm SECTION.

SWITCHESMARKED MUST BE CONSTRUCTEDSO THAT STUCK CONTACTSOR FAILURETO

ARE VERYUNLIKELY.
TRANSFERALL POLESSIMULTANEOUSLY

TIE PDINTS LISTED AREC0tBIONINTERFACESTD DTŒR SYSTENS. TIE POINTS AREFOR

REFERENCEONLY.

(NOTES CONTINUEDON SHEET 2)

 EFIS-85B(2/12)/86B(2/12)

NOTES CONTINUEDFROMSHEET 1

@OPTIONAL FANMONITORF--85, CPN 622-7154-001 IS COMPATIBLEWITHTHE TUBEAXIALFAN

ROTRON PART NUMBER032105 (CPN 009-1965-030) AS SHOWN. IF THE INSTALLER
USES UKT-14B/15B MOUNTING TRAYS, OPTIONALFAN MONITORF--85, CPN 622-7154 2 MUST
BE USED. THIS MONITORIS COMPA11BLEW1H THE T)BEAXIAL FAN, ROTRONPART
NUMBER 504550 (CPN 009-0271-010) THIS INSTALLATIONWST BE WIREDAS FOLLOUS: .

UKT-14B

FW-85l-0021 UKT-158
P1 P4
I I
I I
I I
-----------------1 OfREDI-+2BVOC
28VOC
-----------------2
20VDC
FANSENSOR---------------3 CIBROUNI
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
POSERGROU 9 AIBLACKl

-------------4
ANNSELFTEST

= - - - - - - - -
FAN FAIL AMHOND FAILI 6 ACFTDIMMINGBUS

--------------5
PONERGROU
ANNCC-DN---------------8

SIDE t ANDSIDE 2 WIRINGWST NOTSHARECO-ON WIRES, TERMINALS

OR JUNCTION
BLOCKSFOR GROU S.

REFERTO SPECIFIC AIRCRAFTINTERCONNECT

FOR CONECTIONS.

asvo
AS Pt
ALL CONECTORSON AIRCRAFTHARNESSAREDESIGNATED 1. UNIT CONNECTORS
MAYBE
IDENTIFIEO AS EITEER J( OR Pl 1. )
THESESWITCŒSMAYBE INDEPENDENT
OR BOTHMAYBE SWITCHEDSIMULTANEOUSLY.

REVERSIONARYDISPLAYMAYBE EITHER A COMPOSITEATT/HDGDISPLAYOR OR.Y ANATTITUDE

DISPLAY, DEPENDING
IPON THE STATEOF STRAP 19.

UNDERLIEDALPHADETICAL
PIN DESIGNATORS
INDICATELONERCASE IR = r).

DE TES PONERGROUND. DENOTESGROUND

STUDOR GROUNDTERMINALFOR PONERGROUND.
LRUPONERGROUND WIRESCONNECTED TO LRUMOUNT/AIRFRMMUSTBE AS SHORTAS POSSIBLE,
NOTTO EXCEED15.24 CM (6.0 IN.).

/Ý1DENOTESCHASSISOR AIRFRAE GROUND. DENDTESGROUND

STUDOR GROU TERMINAL É
FOR CHASSISOR AIRFRAMEGROU LRUCHASSISGROU WIRESMUSTBE AS SHORTAS POSSIBLE, .

NOT TO EXCEED15.24 CM (6.0 IN.I.

EFIS CONFIGURATION
STRAPSSELECTPIN FtJNCTIONS.

DISCRETEOUTPUTSANDAmi DRIVERSARE LIMITEDTO 150 mADRIVECAPABILITY.

DGMODEINPUTNOTREQUIREDIF USING CSDDATTITUDE/HEADING

SOURCE.

MAKECOWIGURATION/LOGIC JUMPERSTRAPSAS SHORTAS POSSIBLE, BUTNOTTO EXCEED15.24 CM

(6.0 IN.) WITHOUTSHIELDING. STRAPWIRESLONGERTHAN15.24 CM (6.0 IN.] INCLUDING
THOSEREMOTELY SWITCŒD, SHOULDBE SHIELDEDUSINGTŒ GUIDELINESDESCRIBEDIN NOTE5.

USE TWISTEDSHIELDEDPAIR WIREFOR AC PML LIGHT POWER. FOR DC PML LIGHT PONERA
SINGLEWIREWITHAIRFRM RETURNMAYBE USED IF THE AIRFRAMEIS NORMALLY USEDFOR DC
POWERRETURN. IF TΠAIRFRAIE IS NOTUSEDFOR TΠDC POWERRETURN,TWISTEDPAIR WIRE
SHOULDBE USED. IF PULSEDDC BETEEENUNITS IS USEDFOR BRIGHTNESSCONTROL,TWISTED
SHIELDEDPAIR WIRESHOULDBE USED.

AC REFERENCEPONERWST USE TWISTEDSHIELDEDPAIR WIREAS SHOWNWITHRETURNCONNECTED

TO GROUNDLOCATEDAT THE RESPECTIVECIRCUIT BREAKER
PANELOR RETURNSOURCE.

DC PRIMARYPOWERRETURNANDCHASSISGRM AT LRUMUSTBE INDIVIDUALLY CONNECTED TO

LRUMOUNT/AIRFRMGROUND AS SHOWNUSINGSEPARATEGRM POINTS. A SINGLEWIREMAY
BE USEDAS SHOUNFOR OC PRIMARYPONERIF THE DC RETURNTHROUGH AIRFRAMEGROUNDIS LESS
THAN10 MILLIOFEISOR TΠTOTALRETURNVOLTAGE DROPIS 0.5 VOLTSOR LESS. OTHERWISE
o TΠINSTALLERWST USE TWISTEDPAIR WIREWITHRETURNCONNECTED AT LRUMOUNT/AIRFRM
GRM ANDALSOCONNECTED TO TΠGRM RETURNLOCATED AT THE RESPECTIVECIRCUIT
BREAKERPANELOR RETURNSOURCE.

EXIS¶NG INSTALLATONS MAY BE WRED AS SHOWN WTH EFD/MFD SHIELD WRES DAISY
CHAINED AND TERMINATEDINTERNALLY. NEW INSTALLATONS MUST HAVE ALL SHIELDS
CONNECTED TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL USING THE GUIDELINESDESCRIBED IN NOTE 5.
 ME STER USE STER
NS G1/MG NSO N
DPU DPU /MG DPU MG DPU /MG

NO.1 2BVDCBUS * I I I I W NO.2 28VDCBUS

I I I I
DCP POWER(SHT 4) DPU-1 DPU-2 DCP POWER(SMT 4)
(DSP POWER SH 5) (DSP POWER SH 5)
82 82
.
- - - - - - - -
(AWS20] (AUG20)
DPU PER 83 03

------
--------lAWG20) I (AUG20)-------------DPUPERRTN
DPUPWRRTN

DPUXFERRLY------ ---------------94-
ee
--94 ----------------------DPUXFERRLY
EADI-1 EADI-2

- - - - - - - -
lAUG20) I I (AUG201 ----EADI
EADI PR PWR

- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
(AUS 20) _ _ _ _ _
l_ _ _ _ _ _
[AWS_20) - - - - - - - - - - - -EADI PER RTN
EADI PUR RTN

ee a o |
EHSI-1 EHSI-2

(AWG20) (AUG20)

EHSIPERRTN---------------lAWG_20)_ _ _
I _ _ _ _ __
_I__ (AWG_201-------------EHSIPERRTN

---- ---- ------- - --- - --- - - ---- - 160-

DPUCHASSISGm 180 ---------------------------DPUCHASSIS OND

REVERSIONARY I I I REVERSIONARY
DISPLAY DISPLAY
129 129

I I

-
125 125
REVERS10NARY REVERSIONARY
DISPLAY DISPLAY
ME I MEDI
I I
LH DRIVE RH WIVE
XFERRELAY XFERRELAY

98 98

LH XFER RH XFER
RELAY RELAY

LH

NORM
DRIVE
XFER
SELECT

oooo nu

NO 1 NO. 1 NO. 2 NO. 2

EHSi EA01 EAD) EHS1

I I I I
I I I I
I I I I
I (AW 201 -
n (AW 20) "
PER NITE R R -PUR UNITOR

------ - AUG20)--L (AW 01 ----------------CHASSISO

CHASSISO L
(AUG20] a (AWS20) A -
- - - - - - -- - -- -
PER NITM R R -PUR UNITOR

- - - - - -
(AW 20) (AUS 2 ) - - - - - - -
CHASSIS Go L L -CHASSIS Gm

EFD-1 EFD-2
FBI-85 FBI-85
FAN FAN
I

am--
- - - - - - - - - - - - RED- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
FAN NITm PER 1 RED 1 -FAN MONITU PW
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---------------------------FAN
FAN POWER 2 2 PONER
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - BLU- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
FAN MONITOR- 3 BLU 3 -FAN UNITW
FANGND---------------- 9 BLK 9 BLK ------------FANGND

AmlJN TEST-1 ANNUNTEST-2

- - - - - - - - - - - -
NO i
NO " - - - --UNCIATM
ANNUNCIATOR
TEST 4 EFD-1 : 4 EFD-2 TEST

- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
FANFAIL FANFAIL -
FAN FAIL AWi S ANNBRT/DI BUS 6 M BRT/DI BUS- -FAN FAIL ANNUN
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --------------------------O
OND 5 5
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --------------------------G
GND B 8

DPU-1 DPU-2
Fm-es Fm-es
FAN FAN

- - - - - - - - RED- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
FAN MONITORPW- I RED 1 i -FAN MONITU PW
-----------2 ---------------------------FANPONER
FANPOWER 2
- - - - - - - - - - BLU- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -FAN MON1TOR
FAN WHITM- 3 BLU 3 .
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
FAN GND 9 BLK 9 i BLK -FAN ONO

AMEJNTEST-1 ANNUNTEST-2
- - - - - - - -
NO NO - - -
ANNUNCIATOR
TEST 4 4 0 -MUNCIATOR TEST
DPU-1 DPU-2
- - - - - - - - - -
FAN FAIL FANFAIL
FANFAIL M 6 ANNBRT/DI BUS 6 M BRT/DIMBUS- --FAN FAIL ANNUN
- ----------- --5 ---------------------------Go
GND 5
--------------8 --------------------------US
I US 8
 EFIS-858(12)/868(12)

NO.1 ND.2
CEP-888 CHP-88B
ISHT 3) J1 J1 ISHT 31
ND.1 NO. 1 ND.1 NO. 1 OR OR NO.2 NO. 2 NO. 2 NO.2
EFIS DCP-85E/G DCP-85E/G DPU-85G|86G CtP-850 CiP-85D DPU-85G|66G DCP-85E/G DCP-85E/G TIE EFIS OTHERACFT
PER GUS A E A g g A A E POINTS PER BUS SYSTEMS
IIIIIIIII
DCP1 DCP2

-
I (AW 20) (AW 20) I
DCP PER- 28 28

DCRTN---------- - -
27 27 (Am201

- - - - - - - - - - - - -
AW 20)
CHASSISGM) 26 26 (AW 20]
I 1 I I x=CEP-868 OR.Y I I @@ i

----------1
EY
----------48------47 48------47
KEY
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
I A CR DIMIER,
+5V PNL LIGHTS 31 T T 3\
- - - - - - - - - - - -
+28V PR. LIGHTS 32 U U 32
-- ---- ---- ---33
I BUTNOTBOTH
PNL LIGHTSGM) Y V 33
I I I I I I
------ -------1
DPUDATAH 28 28 1
- - - - - - - - - - - -
DPU DATA L 2 32 32 2

------ -------21
DCPDATAH 36 36 21
-
DCP DATA L 22 40 40 22

CRSCONT-------- ------11
G G 11
NAVDATA----------------7 X SCRXx 7
TilERCONT---------------10 F F 10
CRS-SYNC--------q-------12 H H 12
FOS-SYNC----------------13 J J 13
CRS-H ------- ------14
K K 14
CRS-L 15 L L 15

FOS-H --------- -------16

11 N 16
FOS-L 17 N N 17

- - - - - - - - - - -
CRS OIRECTION 18 A A 18
HDGDIRECTION 19 8 9 19
DCP-CEP +5VDC - - - - - - - - - - - -
29 P P 29
-
DCP-CEP RTN 30 R R 30

------ ------- ------ ------S

CHASSISGND I S =CIP-868 ONLY I I

I CAT II CAT II I
mREGUEST GND = = n
.
- - - - - - - - - - -
REGUEST GND g I
CAT II REGIEST 43 43

I I
i I
-
1fDRS SEL ENBLVOR 1)- 5D 50
-
21CRS SEL ENBLVOR21- 49 49

3(RSVDI---------29 29
4tRSVD)---------30 30

-
5(CRS SEL ENBL LRN T) 17 17
-
6(CRS SEL ENSL LRN 2) 16 16

AP COMT TOESN

10tBRG PTR ENDLADF 21 -

11
oo ao 11
-
STRAPS 11tBRG PTR ENBLLRN 1) 13 13
-
12[GRGPTR ENBLLAN2) 14 14

--------26
13RSVD 26
--------27
14RSVD 27
--------46
15RSVD 46
- - -
16(RSVOFOR TEST)- 45. 45

---------9
9

---------31
31
---------47
47

- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN1 22 22
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN2 5 5
- - - - -
AP/FO ANNUN3 21 21

- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN4 4 4
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN5 18 18
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN6 7 7

- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN7 2 2
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN8 23 23
- - - - -
AP/FD ANMlN9 36 36

- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN10 30 38
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN11 8 8
- - - - -35-
AP/FD ANNUN12 35
GM) TO ACTIVATE NiTO ACTÏVATE
(ACTIVATE ENABLEIDELETE) = =
(ACTIVATE ENABLE/DELETE]
- - · - -
AP/FD ANNUN13 42 42
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN14 24 24
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN15 3 3

- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN16 6 6
- - - - -
AP/FD ANRIN 17 37 37
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN18 44 44

- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN19 43 43
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN20 20 20
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN21 39 39

- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN22 40 40
- - ~ - -
AP/FD ANNUN23 19 19
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN24 41. 41

NO. 1 ND.1 NO 2 NO.1 EADI ND.1 EHSI NO.2 EHSI NO.2 EADI NO. 2 OTEERACFT
DPU-85G|86G DCP-85E/G DPU-85G|86G EFD-85/86( EFD-85/86( )S EFD-85/86( EFD-85/86( )S DCP-85E/G SYSTEMS
)
Cru 1D.IP W.nli PILDTC) 102
cru ic.ir uni : PIL:fD) 102 y sincKary
ANNUNICATOR
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
EADI NO. 1 1EMP WARN C,MIEL.lF
EHSI NO. 1 TEMP WARN DESIRED
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
EHSI NO. 2 TEMP WARN (GND-OVER1EMP)
----------------
EADINO.21EMPWARN

- - - - - - - - - - - -
EADI INT CONTROL
H 34 F F 34
- - - - - - - - - - - -
EADI INT CONTROL
C 35 N N 35
- - - - - - - - - - - -
EADI INT CONTROL
L 36 N M 36

- - - - - - - - - - - -
EHSI INT CONTROL
H 39 F F 38
H NR N N
 EFIS--858(2)/86B(2)
(SHT 3) ISHT 3)
ND.! NO. I ND.1 NO. 1 ND.2 NO. 2 NO. 2 ND.2
EFIS DSP-85A DSP-85A DPU-85G|86G DPU-85G/86G DSP-85A DSP-85A 71E EFIS OTFERACFT
PW BUS A E A A E POINTS PWRBUS SYSTEMS O
I I I I i I I
I I I i I i i
DSP1 i i I I i i I DSP-2
--
I (AW 20] I I I (AW 20] I
DSP PWR

DCRTN--------- - -
30 30 (AW201

- - - - - - - - - - - - -
(AW 20)
CHASSISGND 26 26 (AW 20)
I @@ I I @®
-LICI ----- ------ ------ ------------------------------ ------
gy 8
AIRCRAFTDIRER,
ICOVPIL LIGIITS 32 32
I BUT NOTBOTH
PPL LIGIFFOSU 33 33

DPU DATA H 1 28 28 1
-
DPU DATA L 2 32 32 ' I 2

------ -------21
DCPOATAH 36 36 21
--------------22
DCPDATAL 40 40 22

N.0. MOMENTMY SW N.O. MOMENTARY SW

ELAPSED 11ME ELAPSED TIME
- - - - - - - - - - - -43
ELAPSED TIME 43

-
ELAPSED TIMEGND 45 15
I I
LTT .75
- CPT:
CAT 11 CAT II
mREGUEST GND = =
- -
REGUEST GND I
CAT II REQUEST 9
c

- -
1 (VOR CRS SEL, O VOR1 1 VOR2) 11 - - 11
- - - -
2 (LNV BRG, O LNV1 1 LNV2 12- - 12
= = - - - -
3 (ADF BFG, O ADF1 1 LNV2) 13 13
- . - -
4 (LNV CRS SEL, O LNV1 1 LNV2) 7 7
5 91NV2 2ND CRS INH, O INH 1 ENBL) 8 - - 8
- - - -
6 (RSVD) 10 I 10
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -14

S APS 7 (SPME) CONNECTTO SNAP GNDS AS REOD CONNECTTO STRAP GNDS AS REQD 14 S APS
-
8 (SPME) 15 - - - - = - 15
- 0 GND, 1 OPEN O GND, 1 OPEN
-
9 (SPARE) 18 16
10(SPME)------- -------17
17
11(SPME)---------------18 18
------ --------19
12 SPAR I 19
-
13 SPAR 48 I 48
------- -------49
14 SPM | 49
-------p-------34
15 WM | 34
-16 ---------------50- -50-
(SPM

18 18
19 19

SWAP GNDS SWAP GNDS

34 I 34
50 50
41 41

- - - - -
AP/FD AMIN 1 10 10
- - - - -
AP/FD AMIN 2 22 22
- - - - -
AP/FD AlfilN 3 23 23

- - - - -
AP/FD AMIN 4 11 11
- - - - -
AP/FD ANJN 5 24 24
- - - - -
AP/FD ANJN 6 12 12

- - - - -
AP/FD AMIN 7 25 25
- - - - -
AP/FO AMIN B 13 13
- - - - -
AP/FD ANJN 9 18 18

- - - - -
AP/FD ANJN 10 15 15
- - - - -
AP/FD ARJN 11 14 14
- - - - -
AP/FD ANJN 12 17 17
TD ACTIVATE TO ACTIVATE
(ACTIVATE ENABLE/DELETE) = =
(ACTIVATE ENABLE/DELETE]
- - - - -
AP/FD AMIN 13 18 18
- - - - -
AP/FD ANJN 14 19 19
- - - - -
AP/FDAMIN 15 20 20

- - - - -
AP/FO AMIN 16 21 21
- - - - -
AP/FD ANJN 17 9 9
- - ~ - -
AP/FD ANJN 18 8 8

- - - - -
AP/FD AMIN 19 7 7
- - - - -
AP/FD ANJN 20 5 5
- - - - -
AP/FD ANJN 21 4 4

- - - - -
AP/FD ANJN 22 3 3
- - - - -
AP/FD ANJN 23 2 2
- - - - -
AP/FD ANJN 24 1 1

NO. 1 NO. 2 ND.1 EADI m.1 EHSI NO.2 ENSI ND.2 EADI OTHERACFT
DPU-85G/86G DPU-85G/86G EFD-85/86( )S EFD-85/86( ) EFD -85/86(
) EFD-85/86( ) SYSTEMS S
cru 1EIIP t•nri PILTTT) 19
DPL 1EIIP '",'DII 32 PILTTV) 102 To ainünni i
ANNUNICATOR
EADI NO 1 TEN WWI PaNEI., IF
- - - -
EHSI NO. 1 1EMP WARN DESIRED
- - - - - - - - - - - - • - - - - - ¯

Cr EHSI NO. 2 1EMP WARN (GNO-0VER1EMP)

----------------------
---•--
EADINO.2TEMPWARN

------------
EADI INTCONTROLH-----------
EADIlWrCONTROLC----------------------- N N
o
EADIIWCONTROLL----------------------- M M
I 2 SEC110N 2 SEC110N I
I I EXT POT EXT POT I I
T TI 2K10%1W 2K1D%1W j T TF
ENSIINICONTROLH---------------------------------F
EHSIINICONTROLC---------------------------------N
EHSIINTCONTROLL---------------------------------M -M
 .1 NO.1 NO.1 EADI M.1 EHSI NO.2 ENSI m.2 EADI m.2 ND.2
DPU-85G|86G DPU-85G|86G EFD-85/86( ) EFD-85/86( ) EFD-85/86( ) EFD-85/86( ) OPU-85G|86G OPU-85G|86G OTŒR ACFT
a a a a a a a a .§Y§TEW_@
llllll! I
IIIIIII I
- -
I I 5 OR 28V AC OR DC
IKLINOETER LT H (5V OR 2BV) (AC OR OC) P P
- -
i I ACFTPNL LIGHTS H
INCLINOMETER LT L (5V OR 2BV) (AC OR OC) U U
EHSI+26.5VINVIH----------- -------94
IAW20) I (AW201
--91
EHSI+26.5VRTN Y V 01

- - - - - - - - - - -
T I (AW 20) T T I I lAW 20) T
EHSI +25 DEFL 102 A A 102
-25 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
EHSI DEFL 103 F F 103
- - - - -
+25,
EHSI -25V RTN 99 0 0 93

- - - - - -
T I I (AW 20)
EHSI +11 DEFL 106 8 8 106
-11 - - - - - -
EHSI DEFL 107 E E 107
EHSI+11,-11VRTN----------- -------111
C C 111

EADI+26.5VIHV)H----------- -------62
I (AW20)
62
- -
EADI +26.5V RTN 59 59
(AW 20) I I
- - - - - - -
T I lAW 20) T
EADI +25 DEFL 70 A A 70
-25 - - - - - - -
EADI DEFL 71 F F 71
- - - - - - - - - - - -
EADI +25, -25V RTN 67 D 0 67
(AW 20)
- - - - - - - - - - - -
T I (AW 20) T
EADI +11 DEFL 74 8 8 74
-11 - -
EADI DEFL 75 E E 75
- - - - - - - - - - - -
EADI +11, -11V RTN 79 C C 79
AW E
-------------150
EADIXDEFLH I 150
-------------151
EADIXDEFLL H H 151

-------------80 -
EADIYDEFLH K 80
Y ŒFL LH

8 8
EADIRETRACEL-------------69 69

EADIGRNVIDEOH------------115 N N t15
- - - - - - - - - - - -
EADI GRNVIDEOL 114 A A 114

- - - - - - - - - - - - -
EADI RED VIDEOH 123 P P 123
EADI RED VIDEOLH

- - - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - - - - -
EADI BLUEVIDEOL 132 C C 132

EADIGRNINTH-------------120 -
Z 120
EADIGRNINTL-------------119 Y Y 119

-------------128
EHSIXDEFLH I I 128
-------------127 • • •
EHSIXDEFLL Ñ Ñ I 127

-------------65
EHSIYDEFLH K K 65
-------------76
EHSIYDEFLL S 5 76

EHSI RETRACEH-------------61 X X 61
EHSI RETRACEL-------------64 J J 64

- - - - - - - - - - - -
EHSI GRNVIDEOH 100 N N 100
- - - - - - - - - - - - •
EHSI GRNVIDEOL 96 A A 96

- - - - - - - - - - - -
EHSI RED VIDEOH 109 P P 100
- - - - - - - - - - - - • •
EHSI RED VIDEOL 104 B B 104

- - - - - - - - - - -
EHSI BLUEVIDEOH 112 0 0 112
- - - - - - - - - - -
EHSI BLUEVIDEOL 116 C C 116

-------------72
EHSISHA0011H M M 72
:HHHADOULH------------

2 92
EHSIGRNINTL-------------88 Y Y 88
y

I
I I
ND.2 ND.1
OPU-85G|86G DPU-85G|86G
I I
I I I I
I I I I
RTOLDATAH-------------12 52
---------------- --------- -----------------52
LTOROATAH 12
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
R TO L 0ATAL 16 56
----- ------56
LTOROATAL 16
I I i i
RTOLCLKH--------------4 48
CR LTORCLKH----------------- --------- -----------------48
4

-------------106
RTOLSYNCH 157
--------------- --------- -----------------157
LTORSYNCH 106

-------------3
EADIXDEFLH 1 1 3
-------------7 • • • •
EADIXDEFLL 5 5 7

-------------11
EADIYDEFLH 9 9 11
-------------15 • •
EADIYDEFLL 13 13 15

EADIGRNH---------------19 17 17 19
EADIGRNL---------------23 • • •
21 21 23

- - - - - - - - - - - -
EADI RED VIDEOH 27 25 25 27
- - - - - - - - - - - - • • •
EADI RED VIDEOL 31 29 29 31

- - - - - - - - - - -
EADI BLΠVIDEOH 35 33 33 35
- - - - - - - - - - -
EADI BLΠVIDEOL 39 37 37 39

EADIGRNINTH-------------43 41 41 43
EADIGRNINTL-------------47 • • •
45 45 47

EADIRETRAŒH-------------51 49 49 51

-------------63
EHSIXDEFLL 6 6 63
G
-------------67 67
EHSIYDEFLH 10 10
-------------71 • •
EHSIYDEFLL 14 14 71

- - - - - - - - - - - -
EHSI GRNVIDEOH 75 18 18 75
- - - - - - - - - - - -
EHSI GRNVIDEOL 79 22 22 79

- - - - - - - - - - - -
EHSI RED VIDEOH 136 26 26 136
- - - - - - - - - - - -
EHSI RED VIDEOL 140 30 30 140

- - - - - - - - - - -
EHSI BLΠVIDEOH 144 34 34 144
- - - - - - - - - -
EHSI BLΠVIDEOL - 148 38 38 148

- - - - - - - - - - - - -
EHSI GRNINT H 152 42 42 152
- - - - - - - - - - - - - •
EHSI GRNINT L 156 46 46 156

- - - - - - - - - - - - -
EHSI RETRACEH 160 50 50 160
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
EHSI RETRAŒL 159 54 54 159

- - - - - - - - - - - - -
EHSI SHADOW H 70 62 62 70
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
EHSI SHADOE L 74 66 66 74
 ND.1 ND.2
DPU-85G/86G DPU-85G/66G TIE OTŒR ACFT
A A POINTS SYSTEMS
g
I I I
I I I
i I I
WDATAH---------------133 133 352
WDATAL---------------137 • •
137 353

---------------141
WCLKH 141 349
---------------145 •
EXPCLKL 145 350

MBUSYH---------------113 149 346

EXRBUSYL---------------153 •
153 347

-------------117
MRETRACEH 117 331
-------------121
MRETRACEL 121 332

EXRSHA00EH--------------143 143 325

MSHA00EL--------------147 • •
147 326
TO WEATŒRRADARSYSTEM
(FOR SINGLERADARCONTROL)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
EXR CTR H 101 101 343 (SEE BELOWFOR DUAL RADARCONTROLS)
---------------105
EXR CTRL 105 344

------------77
MRED VIDE0H 77 337
------------81 •
EXRREDVIDEOL 81 338

:7. CLJC "ICE" I I"

IET. OLuc VICE: L 1 11

ET. 3DECHYICE3 M 53t

EXR GREENVIDEOL 07 37 35

- - - - - - - - - - - -
EXR RANGEMARKH 125 125 328
- - - - - - - - - - - - •
EXR RANGEMARKL 129 129 329

WRINGREQUIREDWTH
OPTioNAL DUAL RADAR CONTROLS

ND.1 ND.2
DPU-85G/860 TIE OTŒR ACFT DPU-85G/860 TIE OTHERACFT
POINTS SYS_TEMS & POINTS SYSTEMS
g g
i i i
I I I I
EXPDATAH---------------133 352 133 453
EXPDATAL---------------137 · • • •
353 137 454

---------------141
WXPCLKH 349 141 456
-----------~---145
EXPCLKL 50 145 7

EXRBUSYH---------------149 346 149 482

EXRBUSYL---------------153 47 153 3

- - - - - - - - - - - - -
EXR RETRACEH 117 331 117 485
-------------121
WXRRETRACEL 32 121 6

- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
H
EXR SHADON 143 325 143 488
EXRSHADOUL--------------147 26 147 9
TO WEATHERRADARSYSTEM TO NEATŒRRADARSYSTEM
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
(NO. 1 RADARCONTROL) (NO. 2 RADAR CONTROL)
EXR CTR H 101 343 101 471
---------------105
exacTRL 44 105 72

- - - - - - - - - - - -
EXR RED VIDEON 77 337 77 474
------------81
EXRREDVIDEOL 38 81 75

- - - - - - - - - - - -
EXR BLUEVIDEOH 85 340 85 477
EXRBLUEVIDEOL------------89 i 89 78

- - - - - - - - - - -
EXR GREENVIDEOH 93 334 93 480
- - - - - - - - - - -
EXR GREENVIDEOL 97 35 97 481

- - - - - - - - - - - -
EXR RANGEMARKH 125 328 125 459
- - - - - - - - - - - -
EXR RANGEMARKL 129 29 129 0
 ND.1 NO.1 ND.2 NO.2
DPU-85G/86G DPU-85G/860 DPU-85G/86G DPU-85G/860 TIE OTHERACFT
& R POINTS SYSTEMS
g
I I I I I
I I i i I
I I I I I
DM(DLUE] 13 110
154 :AlilER: 17 100
IM (WillTE) 21

VΠ0111 A 72 113
VORCOS D 70 111
vonCOMON 00

CELAYECILS MODE 101 107

I I I
VERTDEVINH(+UPl------ ------4
01 -

- - - - - - - - - - -
ND.1 NAY SYS (VIR-30/32]
VERTDEV IN L (+ DOWN) 3

VEllT DEVFLAG IN 113 03

VORLAT DEY III ICT: 33 01

VORLAT DEY III (ILT: 31

VOR2CVACREF II 11 11:
VOR26VACREF L 12 3

VOI??LOCFLAG 110 100

----- ------- ------------------------------- ------13

DMl8LUE) 160'
-lAMBERI------- -----17
158
IMlWHITEl------ ------21

----- ------- ------------------------------- ------72

VORSINA 163
----- -----76
VORCOSB 164
------80
VORCOMON-----

- - - - - - - - - - - -
DELAYEOILS MODE 101 157
I I I

-
ND.2 NAV SYS EVIR-30/321

- - - - - - - - - - -
VERTDEVFLAGIN 113 153

VORLATDEVINI+RTI------ ------- ------------------------------- ----33

154
- - - - - - - - - - -
YORLAT DEY ]N [+LT) 34 155
I I
---- ------- ------------------------------- ------41
YOR26VACREFH 169
----- -----42
VOR26YACREFL 5

--- - - - - - - -- -
VOR/LOCFLAG 119 156

CE AUDICICOIT III 151 531

CE AUDICICOIT LO 158

DE VALIC l ic

DE DATAII 112 527

CE CATAL 130
-
ND.1 DMESYS 10E-40/42)
DE SYNCIIII 122 520
DE SYNCHL 12C

DE CLI: II 131 31
DE CLK L 130

DE IICLC :00LC = CPCFD 12

MAUDIDIDENTHI------ -------- ----154

584
- - - - - - - - -
DE AUDIDIDENTLO 158 585

- - - - - - - - -
DE VALID 146 576

MDATAH------ ------142
577
MDATAL------ ------138 •
578
-

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ND.2 DMESYS EDE-40/42)
DE SYNCHH - - 122 579
----- -------- ------126
DESYNCHL

----- ------- -----134

MCLKH 581
----- ------130
MCLKL

- - - - - - - - - - - -
DE HOLDlHOLO OPENI = 112 599

ADE ON 01
ACT CO 10 003
ADF COM 22 (ADF-601
ND.1 A0F SYS ))
ACTVALID SC

----- ------------------------------- -----14

ADFSIN 826
ADFCOS------ -----18
828
- - - - - - -
ADF COM - - - 22 NO.2 ADF SYS (A0F-60( ])
- - - - - - - - -
ADFVALID 90 829

LRii BilG TO WT || 23 71:

LUI 000 TO WT Y 27 717
LRii 000 TO WT 2 31

LRii DECIDEDTRI: :: 17 713

LDIIDECIDEDTOKY 10 711
L2d CECIDECTRI: 2 52

LRN || TRI: DEY IRT 150 702

LRN X TRI: DEV ILT 151

LRN ITO 119 701

LRN IFM 153 705
NO.1 LRN SYS (6 WIRE
LRII CLI: II 32 7 EIJiTuL r uâ sinLOD:
Unli CLK L 3D 700

LRN SYNCII 10 710

LRN SYNCL II

LRNCATAIl 21 70
LRN CATAL 20

LRN VALID 157

Lail RET 09 \\ 33 730

LRN REF 26Y C 13 1137

LRNBRGTOWTX------------------------------------------------------------23 1322
LRNBRGTDWTY------------------------------------------------------------27 1323
LRNBRGTOWTZ------------------------------------------------------------31 1324

-----------------------------------------------------------47
LRNDESIREDTRKX 1318
-----------------------------------------------------------48
LRNDESIREDTRKY 1319
-----------------------------------------------------------52
LRNOESIREDTRKZ 0

LRNXTRKDEV+RT -----------------------------------------------------------150
1302
-----------------------------------------------------------154 • •
LRNXTRKDEV+LT 1301

----------------------------------------------------------------149
LRN+TO 1305 -..

----------------------------------------------------------------153
LRN+FM 1306
NO,2 LRN SYS (6 WIRE
---------------------------------------------------------------32
LRNCLKH 1311 DIGITALPLUSANALOG)
---------------------------------------------------------------36
LRNCLKL 2

LRNSYNCH-----------------------------------------------------------4D 1314
LRNSYNCL-----------------------------------------------------------44 5

LRNDATAH-----------------------------------------------------------24 1309
LRNDATAL-----------------------------------------------------------28 1309

-------------------------- -------------
--------------157
LRNVALIO 1317

--------------------------------------------------------39
LRNREF26YACH 1334
--------------------------------------------------------43
LRNREF269ACC 1139
 NO,1 NO.1 NO.2 NO,2
DPU-85G/86G DPU-85G/86G DPU-85G/86G DPU-85G/86G TIE OTFERACFT
POINTSÛ SYSTEMS
I I I
I I I
FACT.GLLI IITUT il : r...:T: 10
f...GT.GLLI IITUT L , CLat; 111
-
NO.1 ANGLEOF ATTACKSYS
FA T/CLOWVALIC 11 CS7 OR ADS INSTRUMENT

- - - - - - - - - - -
FAST/SLOWINPUT H (+ FAST) 109 956
- - - - - - - - - - - • •
FAST/SLOWINPUT L (+ SLOR) 144 955
-
NO.2 ANGLEOF ATTACKSYS
------------ ------- --- ----- --------------------- -------114
FAST/SLOWVALIO 57 ORADSINSTRUMENT

ACCTO EFIC IIAIICIECTERII 93 CSC

ACCTO EFIC NAICESTER L 97 CE:
-
NO.1 AIR 0ATASYSTEM
ACCVALIC 120 El

- - - - - - - - - - - -
ADCTO EFIS MANCHESTER
R 93 958
- - - - - - - - - - - -
ADCTO EFIS MANCHESTER
L 97 959
NO.2 AIR DATASYSTEM
- ~ - - - - - - - -
ADCVALID 120 954

- - - - - - - - - - -
VNI CSDB 1A 8 1251
•
VIII CCCC10 12 1252 119.1 'fEPT :U.'t
I
"; NO,2 VERTNAV

FCC TO ErlS tWI 0000 A 15 05

PCC TO EFIS PRI CCDD0 1: "O
01GITAL AUTOPILOT
EFIC TO FCC 0000 A 10 310 C"CTEII '2000], CIDE 1
ErlS TO FCC 0000 C 20 13

- - - - - - - - - - -
FCC TO EFIS PRI CSDBA 15 68
FCCTOEFISPRICSDBB------ -----19 • •
69
DIGITAL AUTOPILOT
- - - - - - - - - - - -
EFIS TO FCC CSDBA 16 1071 SYSTEM(CSOB), SIDE 2
EFISTOFCCCSDB8------ ------20
1072

- - - - - - - - - - - -110
VERT VAUD OUT (+28 V) 1

LAT llA'l 'lALIC QUT i 20'll 24 10

LIN DEV (120VI 20 21

Voi! LOC 1 MODEl.20V: 00 1:

CR LCC 2 MDCCi 20V: 70 17

LNV 1 MODEt.20VI 11 13

LIIV2 1.00E : 20'.1 103 20

CLEARI'ULDEI.20V) :13 127

--------------------1
PITCHCMD (+DN) 3CG
--------------------2 •
PITCHCMDE+UP) 35

ROLL IILT] 37 303

fl0LL IIIT) 30 00

--------------------9
FCS26YACREFH 221
•
FCS 26YACREF C 10 100
oo
-

IËË ANALOG AUTOPILOT,

SIDE 1@
COURSECATUM11 25 105
COUf!CECATUMC 20 DC

1100 ElliiCR DUTII CC 102

HDBERROROUTC Ci 03

LAT DEV DUT : RT: C: 100

LAT DEVDLITIILT) 73 00

TD/rBOM:ITC) 120 111

TO PROMt.FROM) 130 12

DACKLOC1.00E [120 127 11

LOC TUllE DUT [CflDJ 131 115

FD III VIEW DIA: : 2 V: 137 392

ft VAL10 II20V) 113 391

LATNAVVALIDOUT(+28Vl--------------- ------ ------ -----------------24

1052'

LINDEV(+2BV)------------------- ----- ------ -------------------20

1051

----------------- ----- -------------------------60

YORLDC1MODEl+28V) 1053

----------------- ----- ------ ------------------78

VORLOC2MODEl+28V) 1054

----------------- ----- ----- ----- -------------118

LNV1MDDEl+28V) 1055

----------------- ------ ---- ------ -------------109

LNV2MDDEl+28V) 1056

CLEARPULSEl+28VI---------------- ---- ------ ----- ---------------113

430

venivAuoouv(+2sv)---------------- ------- ----- ----- --- --------------alo

72

------------------------------------------------------------1
PITCHCMDí+0N) 1086
------------------------------------------------------------2
PITCHCMDI+UP) 1085

ROLLCM)(+LT]-------------------------------------------------------------37 1083
ROLLCIO(+RT)-------------------------------------------------------------38 • •
1082

------------------------------------------------------------9
FCS26VACREFH 274
------------------------------------------------------------10 •
FCS26VACREFC 520
ANALOG AUTOPILOTSYSTEM,
VERTDEVOUT(+UP) ----------------------------------------------------------5B 73 SIDE2@
----------------------------------------------------------63
VERTDEVOUT(+DN) 4

COURSEDATUMH-------------------------------------------------------------25 106B
COURSEDATUMC-------------------------------------------------------------26 069

------------------------------------------------------------68
HDGERROROUTH 1065
------------------------------------------------------------64
HDGERROROUTC 1066

-----------------------------------------------------------69
LATDEVOUTl+RT) 1120 Q)
------------ ---------------------------------------------73 •
LATDEVOUTl+LT) 1121

-------------------------------------------------------------12s
vo/Facur+To: 1078

BACKLOCMODEl+2BVI------------ ----- ----- ------ ----- -------------------127

1076

LOCTUNEOUTIOND)----------------- ----- ----- ---- ----- --------------131

1077

FDINVIEWBIASl+28VI--------------- ----- ----- ---- ----------------------137

081

--------------- ----- ----- ------ ----- -----------------143

FDVALIDí+28VI 1080

------------------- ------ ------------------------138

(+28VDC=ENABLE)
COMMAND8ARSOFF 1597
_Y. Y -
 NO.1 ND.1 NO.2 NO.2
DPU-85G/MG DPU-85G/MG DPU-85G/MG DPU-B5G|MG TIE OTHER ACFT
A E A E POINTS SYSTEMS S
I I I I I
I I I I
I I I I I
IIDO26VACII C 222
HDB26VACC 50 10I

1100VALIO 110 00

CC 1100E :OE , 20 1100E: II 113.1 CGIFAGGSYST0i

----------------- -------96
HOGX 203
100 Y 101 210
1100 2 100 11

----- ------- --------------- ------60

HOS26VACH 272
------ ------56
HOG26VACC 518

- - - - - - - - - - -
HDGVALID 118 258
I I I I
-

-
NO.2 C0iPASS SYSTEM
CT IlltE Œlf CC 1100E: DE I
I I I I
------- ------- --------------- -----96
HDGX 259
------- ------104
HDGY 260
------- ------100
HDGZ 61

ATT 20VACll 15 221

ATT 26VACC 10 13G

ATT VALID 117 1

I T I I T
-
NO.1 ANALOG
ATTITUDESYSTEM
ATT PITCII 2 02 I

ATT ROLLX 03 205

ATT ROLLY 05 DOC
ATT ROLL2 01 7

----- ------------------------- ------45

ATT26VACH 274
----- ------46 • •
ATT26VACC 520

- - - - - - - - - - -
ATT VALID 117 251

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
X -
NO.2 ANALOG
ATTITUDESYSTEM
----- -------- --------------- ------92
ATTPITCHZ 54

ATTROLLX------ ------- --------------- ------89

255
ATTROLLY------- ------85
256
ATTROLLZ------ ------81
57

- - - - - - - - - - - -
AIRS CSDB2A 7 220
NO.1 ATT/HDG
AmC CSCO20 11 3
SYSTEMICSDBl

AFRSCSOB2A----- ------- --- ---- --- - ------7

278
- - - - - - - - -
NO.2ATT/HDG
AIRS CSOB28 - 11 79
SYSTEM(CSOBI

I I I I I
I I I I I
PILOT'S
EFIS TEST

PILOT'S DPU TEST 01

I I I I
I I I I
COPILOT'S
EFIS TEST

- - - - - - - - - - - -
COPILOT'S OPU TEST 91

I 1 I I
I I i i

HE ALT TECT ICIIC: 122

2300 NO.1 RAOALT SYSTEM

I I I
I I I
REALTTESTIGNDI------------------- ------------- -- --------------122

240DNO.2RADALTSYSTEM

I
0
37

P/0 RAD0 TEST

INHIBIT RELAY
ild ALT FLAC 12 3 3
'
-NO.1R ALTSYSTEM
-----------------------6
REALTH 355
-----------------------5
ROALTL 35G
I I
ROALTFLAG------ ------124
1118

- - - - - - - - - -
NO.2 RADALT SYSTEM
RO ALT H 6 1115
----- - ------5
REALTL 116

PILOT'S vcR TEST 100 120

i i
COPILOT'SVORTEST------ -------------------------------108
170

ND.1 NE.2
+2EyDC +2Eg0C
I I I
PILOT
COPILOT
DECIGICII[[IGIT :::ID: 13: 392
-------------------------------------------------139
DECISIONFEIGHTIGND) 1075
I I
i
nTT CGird..TOR ::IE 77 1E¾¾
ATTC0tPARATORCOND)--------------------------------------------------77 1587
I I

------ --------------------------------65
HDGCCIPARATORE 1589

- - - - - - - - - - - -
CAT Il C0iPARATORI ] 29 1591

CAT II GilCEN10110] I" 15"2

CATIIGREENIGND)--------- -----------------------------49
1593

CAT 11 AMIER(CICl 30 1531

CATIIAMBEREGN01---------------- ----------------------------------30
1595
 NO.1 ND.1 NO.2 ND.2
DPU-85G/86G OPU-85G|86G DPU-85G|86G DPU-85G|86G
1/0 STRAPND. A E & R
I I I I i
I i I I I
I I I I I
1 61 61

AUTOPILOTTYPE 2 115 115

3 121 121

NAVDATAREF [MAG/TRUE) 4 123 123

5 128 128
LNAVPORTANNUN
6 132 132

7 133 133
RA TYPE
S 134 134

X-SIDE DATAFLAG 9 135 135

=
m N.0. CONTACTS - =
N.0. CONTACTS
10 136 SPRINGLOADED 136 SPRINGLOADED
VORPORT
24 116 116
PILDT I COPILDT
-
R
DPU LEFT/RIGHT 11 140 140 (MUST BE OPEN)
I I a n
C0iPAR RESET/ImilBIT 12 141 141

13 142 142
SPEED/ADADISPLAY
23 159 159

ATTITUDE/HEADING 14 145 145

ADF TYPE 15 146 146

LNAVDATA 16 147 147

HEADING 17 148 148

VNAVSOURCE 18 151 PILOT 151

MS R
EADI REVERSIONARY I
152 152
DISPLAY I I
I I \ \
KASTERWARNL (SND) 35 +28VDCND.1

I I
COlilANDBARS 20 155 155 COPILOT
-
MASTER
ANG/LJN DEV 21 156 156 IARN

---------- ------------------------- -------------

MASTERWARNR (GND) 35 +28VDCND.2
MASTERWARN
-
RESET 22 158 158

I I I I

PILOT
ROSS-SIDE ATT
CROSS-SIDE a I
25 103 103
ATTITUDESOURCE PILOT
COPILOT
CROSS-SIDE HOG
CROSS-SIDE a I
26 107 107
HEADINGSOURCE
COPILOT
AIR DATAffREND 27 111 111 PILOT
i ROSS-SIDE DCP
CROSS-SIDE
28 135 135
DCP SOURCE COPILDT

RISING RUNEAT 29 139 139

EADING SELECTPANEL 30 99 99

LNAV DATA 31 105 105

 EFIS-85B(2/12)/86B(2/12)
SHEET INDEX
DESCRIPTION

1 NOTES
2 NOTES
3 POWER/REYSWITCHING
4 DISPLAYCONTROL
5 DlSPLAY SELECT
6 FLIGHTDISPLAY
7 REVERSIONRYDATA
B MFO/UXR/TEiPWARN
9 VOR/DME/ADF
10 LRN/AOA/ADC/VNI
11 HDG/ATT/RAD ALT/COMPARE
12 FCC/DISPLAY SWITCHING(OPTION)
13 COWIBURATION STRAPS

NOTES:
READALL NOTESBEFOREUSING THE INTERCONNECT.COMPLETEINTERCONNECTS
ARESHOUNFOR THE FOLLOWINGEQUIPIENT:

* EADI (EFD-85/86/86A)
x EHSI (EFD-85/86/86A)
M DPU-85G/86G
x MPU-85G/86G
a MFD-85A
x CHP-868
m DCP-85E/G OR DSP-85A
a MULTIPLEF--95

ALL WIRINGA C0tPONENTSELECTIONWST DE IN ACCOROANCE

WITHFAAAC 43.13-1A AND
IM)USTRYACCEPTEDPRACTICES.

AGENCY.
WIRINGIDENTIFICATIONMY BE AT DISCRETIONOF INSTALLATION

CIRCUIT BREAKERS,TERMINALSTRIPS ANDASSOCIATED

HARDWHEMY BE SELECTE0TO MATCH
LIKE COMPONENTS
OF THE I IYIOUALAIRCRAFT.

ALL WIRINGTO BE 22 AUG, UNLESSOTHEREISENOTED.

SHIELOSOF SHIELDEDWIRESRIST BE GROUNDED AT BOTHENDSUNLESSDTHERWISEI ICATED.

SHIELDSBROKENAT BULKHEADS OR TERMINALSTRIPS/J BOXESRJST BE GROUNDEOAT EACHE
OF THEIR SECTIONIF POSSIBLEOR CORIED THROUGH ONSEPMATE PINS. SHIELDGROU
WIRESSHOULOBE 7.62 CM (3.0 IN) OR LESS. ALL SHIELDGROUM)WIRESRJST BE CONNECTED
I IVIDUALLYTD GROUND (00 NOTCONNECTIN SERIES3. ACŒPTABLEPREFERREDANDALTERNATE
METHDDSFOR GROUNDING THE SHIELDS OF ALL TYPESOF SHIELDED WIRESME SHOUNBELOK.

2.54 cu PREFERRED
(1.0 IN.)
MAX 5.08 CMl2.0 IN.) MAX :

SOLDER
SLEEVE

LS
20 AWB,7.62 CM (3.0 IN.] MAXLENGTH
VING
OVEROUTERJACKET
ANDSHIELOING CONNECT SHIELO GROUNDWIRETO UMT-XX
GROUND BRACKET,AIRFRAE GROUND OR
CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. LRUMDUNTSlAND
CONNECTOR BACKSHELLSAS REQUIREDI
SHOULDDE CONWCTE0TO PRIMARY
STRUCTURE USINGRF GROU STRAPS
WITHA LENGTHTO RIDTHRATIDOF NOT
MORETHAN5 TO 1. REFERENCEDOT/FAA
AC 43.13-1A FOR GOOD80mlNG JUMPER
INSTALLATION PRACTICES.

ALTERNATE
- -
: 7.62 CM [3.0 IN.) MAX

SOLDER
SLEEYE

20 AUG, 7.62 CM (3.0 IN.) MAXLENGTH

CONNECT SHIELO GROUNDWIRE TO UMT-XX

GROUNO BRACKET,AIRFRAE GROUND OR
CONWCTORBACKSHELL. LRUMDUNTSlAND
CONWCTORBACKSHELLS AS REQUIRED)
SHOULDDE CONWCTE0TO PRIMARY
STRUCTURE USINGRF GROU STRAPS
WITHA LENGTHTO RIDTHRATIDOF NOT
MORETHAN5 TO 1. REFERENCEDOT/FAA
AC 43.13-1A FOR GOOD80mlNG JUMPER
INSTALLATION PRACTICES.

NOTE: USE ALTERNATE

ETHOD ONLYWHENTHE PREFERREDETHOD ABSOLUTELY CANNDTBE ACCOMPLISHED.
THE ALTERNATEETHOD PROVIDESLESS SHIELDINGANDITS EFFECTIVENESSIS SUBSTANTIALLY
REOUCED
AT RADARANDHIGHERFREQUENCIES.

AC SIGNALINPUTSANDTHEIR ASSOCIATED
REFERENCE
WST DE OF THE SAMEPHASE.

RSVO

GROUNO.
NO SWITCHSECTIONMAYSHAREA COMMON

SIITCHES MARKED MUSTBE EITHER INDIVIOUALDR CONSTRUCTED

SO THATNOSINGLE
FAULTCANAFFECTMORETHANONESECTION.

SIITCHES MARKED MUSTDE CONSTRUCTED SO THATSTUCKCONTACTS

OR FAILURETO
TRANSFERALL POLES SIRJLTANEOUSLY
AREVERYUNLIKELY.

TIE PDINTS LISTED ARECOMONINTERFACESTO OTHERSYSTEMS. TIE POINTS ARE FOR

REFERENCEONLY.

OPTIONALFANMONITORFBI-85, CPN 622-7154-001 IS COMPATIBLE WITHTHE TUDEAXIAL FAN

ROTRON PART NUMBER 032105 (CPN 009-1965-030) AS SHOWN. IF THE INSTALLER
USES UNT-14B/159 MOUNTING TRAYS,OPTIDNALFANMONITORF--85, CPN 622-7154-002 RJST
BE USED. TH1S MONITORIS COMPATlBLEWITH THE TUBEAXIALFAN, ROTRON PART
NUMBER504558 (CPN 009-0271-010). THIS INSTALLATION
MUSTBE WIRE0 AS FOLLOUS:

UMT-14B
P3

FM-85(-OD2) UMT159

- - - - - - - - - -
2evoc 1 BEREDl +2GVOC
---------2
2GVDC
- - - - - - -
FANSENSOR 3 CIBROUN)
-------------- ----------------AIBLACKl
POWERGNO
- - - - - - -
SELF TEST 4 ANNTEST [GNO)
- - -
NORMAL ANNCUTPUT 6 FANFAIL ANN
=
(GM) FAIL)
-------5
POWERGNO
ANNCOWON-------B
- - - - - - -
PONERGND 9

ONSHEET2)
INOTESCONTINUEO
 EFIS-858(2/12)/86(2/12)
NOTES (CONTINUEDFROMSHEET 11:

OR JUNCTION
SIDE 1 ANDSIDE 2 WIRINGMUSTNOTSHARECDMRINWIRES, TERMINALS
BLOCKSFΠGROUNDS.

FOR CONNECTIONS.
REFER TO SPECIFIC AIRCRAFTINTERCONWCT

/Ý7DENOTESCHASSISŒ AIRFRAMEGROUND. Å OENOTESGROUNDSTUDOR GROU TERMINAL

FOR CHASSISΠAIRFRAE GROU . LRU CHASSISGROUND
WIRESRIST BE AS SHORTAS POSSIBLE,
NOTTO EXŒED 15.24 CM 16.0 IN.).

DIODESTO BE 1N4002 ΠEGUIVALENT.

RECOMENDED EADI/EHSI INTENSITYPOTENTIOETER& PARTS:

=
PDTENTICETER CPN 37G-2531-030 (1 EAl
=
KNOB, INNER CPN 634-3413-001 11 EA)
=
KNOB,OUTER CPN 634-3420-001 11 EA)
=
SETSCREE CPN 328-0370-000 (4 EA)

LAC-80 ACCELEROMETER
NOTREQUIREDIF LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATIONIS ONOIGITAL
ATTITUDESOURCEBUS. STRAP 41 MAYBE AFFECTED,DEPENDINGON DPU/MPUVERSION.

EXISTING INSTALLATIONSMAYBE WIREDAS SHOWNWITHEFD/WD SHIELDWIRES0AISY CHAINED

ANDTERMINATED INTERNALLY. NEWINSTALLATIONSMUSTHAVEALL SHIELDSCOMECTEDTO THE
CONECTΠBACKSHELL USINGTHE GUIDELIES DESCRIBEDIN NOTE5.

RSVD

ALL CONNECTORS
ON AIRCRAFTHARNESSARE 0ESIGNATEDAS P( ).
UNIT CONECTORSMAYBE IDENTIFIED AS EITHER Jf OR P( ).
)
ΠBOTHMAYBE SWITCHEDSIMULTANEOUSLY.
TŒSE SWITCHESMAYBE IM)EPENDENT

DISCRETEOUTPUTSA Am DRIVERSARE LIMITED TO 150 mADRIVE CAPABILITY.

DG MODE(+) (FREE GYRO)2BVOCIWUT NOTREGUIREDIF USING CSDBATTITUDE/ŒADINGSOURŒ.

WŒN USINGARINC 429 DR ANALOGIX,Y,Z) ATTITUDE/HEADING
SOURCE,2BVDCIWUT IS REQUIRED
FOR DG MODE(+) (FREE GYRO)FUNCTION.

MAKECONFIGURATION/LOGIC JUMPERSTRAPSAS SHORTAS POSSIBLE, BUT NOTTO EXCEED15.24 CM

16.0 IN.] WITHOUTSHIELDING. STRAPWIRESLONGERTHAN15.24 CM (6.0 IN.! INCLUDING
THOSEREMOTELY SEITCHED, SHOULDBE SHIELDEDUSINGTΠGUIDELIES DESCRIBEDIN NOTE5.

USE TWISTEDSHIELDEDPAIR WIREFOR AC PAEL LIGHT POWER. F DC PANELLIGHT PORERA

SINGLE WIREWITHAIRFRM RETURNMAYBE USEDIF TΠAIRFRM IS NORMALLY USEDFOR OC
POSERRETURN. IF THE AIRFRM IS NOTUSEDFOR THE DC PONERRETURN,TWISTEDPAIR WIRE
SHOULDBE USED. IF PULSEDDC BETWEEN UNITS IS USEDFW BRIGHTESS CONTROL,TWISTED
SHIELDEDPAIR WIRESHOULDBE USED.

AC REFERENCEPORERWST USE TWISTEDSHIELDEDPAIR WIREAS SHOWNWITHRETURNC0mECTED

TO MOUNDLOCATEDAT THE RESPECTIVECIRCUIT BREAKERPANELOR RETURNSOURCE.

OC PRIMARYPONERRETURNANDCHASSISGROUND AT LRUWST BE I IVIDUALLYCOMECTEDTO

LRU MOUNT/AIRFRMMOUNDAS SHOWN USING SEPARATEGROUND PDINTS. A SINGLEWIREMAY
BE USEDAS SHOUNFW DC PRIMARYPOWERIF THE DC RETURNTÐ0UGH AIRFRM UM IS LESS
THAN10 MILL10-S © THE TDTALRETURNVOLTAGE DROPIS 0.5 VOLTSOR LESS. OTHEREISE
TΠINSTALLERMIST USE TWISTEDPAIR WIREWITHRETURNCOMECTEDAT LRUMOUNTIAIRFRM
GROUND ANDALSOCOMECTEDTO THE MOUNDRETURNLDCATE0AT THE RESPECTIVECIRCUIT
BREAKERPAEL CR RETURNSOURŒ.

DENDTESPOWERU-. DENOTESGR- STim OR U- TERMINALFOR POWERUm

LRU POWERGR- WIRESC0mECTED TO LRUMOUNT/AIRFRMRIST BE AS SHORTAS POSSIBLE,
NOTTO EXCEED15.24 CM [6.0 IN.I.
 MPU-85G/86G
DPU-85G/86G DPU-85G/86G MFD-85A
Pm eus A E A A & Pm aus
IIIII

EFIS MASTER

-0
I I I I
ND.1 EFIS
PONERBUS
i i c
(SHT 4,5) EFIS MASTER
PONER
I I I
- - - - -
(AWG20) 1 i
MFDPM
(AW 20) 16
- - - - - - -
MFDOC RTN 24 NO.2 EFIS

- - - -
lAW 20]
DPUPW
[AW 20) 86
DPUDCRTN-------------------- 87
94

lAWS20) I I I
- - - - -
/ (AW 201 I
NPU PER
(AW 20) 86
- - - - - - - - - - IPU-R
MPUDC RTN 87
I [AIS 20)
90 [AW 20)

se
EHBI

- - - -
(AIS 20)
EHSI PUR
I (AWS I I I
----------- -------
EHBIDCRTN
IIIII
IIIII
EADI

- - - - -
lAW 20] I I I I
EADI PW

----------- -------
EADIDCRTN
IIIII

(AW 20] [AW 20) (AW 20) (AWS201

-------------- - - ----160
CHASSISGND 47 160 160
I
I I
EADI
F--85 EHSI
I '$
I I I I

i I I I
-----------------
28VDC I
-----------------2
28VDC
FANSENSOR---------------3 BLUE
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
PONERGRM BLACK

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
I I
SELF TEST 4 AWi TEST 1990
- - - - - - -
NORMAL AMMICIATOROUTPUT 6 FANFAIL ANN
PONERGRM--------------5 [GND=FAILI
- - - - - - - - - - -
AMMICIATORCOMION 8
PONERGRM--------------9

I
I
Fm-as wo
E i FAN
I I I I

I I I
28VDC-----------------1
28VDC-----------------2
FANSENSOR---------------3 BLUE
- - - - - - - - - - -
POSERGRM BLACK

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
SELF TEST 4 Ami TEST IG
- - - - - - -
NORMAL AMOICIATOROUTPUT 6 FANFAIL ANN
POSERGRW--------------5 IGND=FAIL)
- - - - - - - - - - -
AMMICIATORCOMION 8
POSERGRM--------------9

I
I

FBI-85 DPU-85G/86G
FAN

I
I I I
-----------------1
2BVOC EEE
-----------------2
28VDC
FANSENSOR---------------3 BLUE
- - - - - - - - - - - -
PoiER GROUND GUCK

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
I
SELF TEST 4 Ami TEST (GMI)
- - - - - - -
NORMAL AMAINCIATOR OUTPUT 6 FANFAIL ANN
PONERGRM--------------5 (GND-FAIL)
- - - - - - - - - - -
AMiUNCIATOR
COMION 8
POWERGRM--------------9

FBI-85 MPU-85G/86G
N
I I I
I I I I

---------1
I
28VDC RED
28VDC----------2
- - - - - - -
FANSENSOR 3 i 8LUE
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
PONERGROUND BBCK

- - - - - - -
I I
SELF TEST 4 Ami TEST DI (
- -
NORMAL AMEJNOUTPUT 6 FANFAIL Ami
- - - - -
POMERGROUND (GND FAIL)=
5
- - - - - -
ANNUNCORKIN 8
- - - - - -
PONERGRM 9
I

DCP-85E/G OR
P/0 LH DRIVE DSP-85A
XFERRELAY g
ISEE SHT 11] I
I I
I I I
I I
42

109

XFER
RELAY

NORM EADI È EHSI S

EFD-85/86( ) EFD-85/86( )
SELECT

----------------------- -------------L (AW 20] (AW 20]

CHASSISGND L
 EFIS-85B(12)/86B(12)
tsar si
NO.1
DCP-85E/G DCP-85E/G DPU-85G/86G DPU-85G/86G CHP-96B TIE
EFIS DTIER ACFT
Pm aus A & A & A PogTSO SYSTEMS
I \ \ \ \ \
DCP

-
DCP PW 28
- -
BC R1N 27

I I I I
------ -------26
A E
CHASSISGND

----------1
KEY
----------48 ------
KEY 47
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
+5V PL LIGHTS 31 T AIRCRAFTDIliER, 28V
- - - - - - - - - - - -
+28V PNL LIGHTS 32 )\ OR 5V BUTNOT60TH
-------------33
PM.LIGHTSGNO

DPlMCPDATAA----- -------1 -
28
DPlMCPDATAB------ ------2
32

DCP-OPUDATAA----- -------21
36
DCP-OPUDATAB-------------22 40
I I I I I
I I I I I
I I I I I
tPlHICPDATAA----- -------4
42
IPLMICPDATAB----- -------5 • •
46
I I I
DCP-IPU DATAA - - - - - - - -
35
DCP-IPUDATAB---- - ------------39

0CP-IPU DATAA - - - - - - - - - - - -
24 34
0CP-IPUDATAS----- -------25 • •
38

CRSCONT----------------11 G
NAVDATA----------------7 X
TltERCONT--------------10 F
CRS-SYNC----------------12 H
HDG-SYNC------ ------13
J
CRS-H 14
CRS-L • •
15 L

--------- -------16
HDB4f M
HDG-L 17 N

CRS DIRECTION 18 A
----- -------19
HDGDIRECTION 8
DCP-OP+510C ------ ------29
P
-
' ".'.N 0 R

I I
ALT ALERTIGND = ALERT] II 20: PPCSELE3
ft:..

- - - - - - - - - - - -
CAT II REŒlEST 43 m

I I
I I CAT jf
REQUEST == GND
-
i
11
' 1 (CRS SEL ENBLVOR 50
-
2 (CRS SEL ENBLVOR2) 49
3tRSYO)--------29
4tRSYO)--------30
-
5 (CRS SEL EfEL LRN 1) 17
-
6 (CRS SEL ENBLLRN2) 16
-
7 (BRG PTR ENBLVOR11 32
-
8 (BRG PTR ENBLVOR21 33
-
9 (BRG PTR ENBLADF 11 10
- - -
CONNECTTO STRAP
STRAPS 101BRGPTR EFEL ADF2) 11
-
GNDSTO ENABLE
11(BRG PTR ENBLLRN 11 13
-
12(BRG PTR ENBLLRN 21 14
13tRSYDI--------26

- - - - - - - -
141RSYO) 27

- - - - - - - -
15tRSYO) 46

- - -
161RSVDFOR TEST) 45
9

STRAPGOS I
20
31
47

- - - - -
AP/FD ANM 1 22
- - - - -
AP/FD ANM 2 5
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN3 21
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN4 4
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN5 18
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN6 7
- - - - -
AP/FD ANIRJN7 2
- - - - -
CO AP/FD ANNUN8 23
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN9 36
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN10 38
- - - - -
AP/FO ANIKIN11 8
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN12 35 GNDTO ACTIVATE
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN13 42 (ACTIVATE ENABLE/DELETE) =

- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN14 24
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN15 3
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN16 6
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN17 37
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN18 44
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN19 43
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN20 20
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN21 39
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN22 40
- - - - -
AP/FD ANNUN23 19 EADI EHSI
- - - - -
AP/FD ANIRJN24 41 EFD-85/86 EFO-85/86

EADIINTH---------------34 -
F

-------------35
EADIINTCONT N

EADI INTL---------------36 M

EHSI INTH---------------38 F

-------------39
EHSIINTCONT N

EHSIINTL---------------40 M
 EFlS-85B(2)/86B(2)
ISHT 31
DSP-85A DSP--85A DPU-85G|86G DPU-85G|860 TIE
S OTHERACFT
PW GUS A E N WS SYSTEMS
I I I I
DSP

--------
DSPPW . 28
------ --
DCRTN 30

IAWS20)
- - -
CHASSISSPD 26

-------47
ICEY ------------------S

- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
5VACPM. LTS 31 AIRCRAFTDIMR 5VAC
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
+2BY PM. LTS 32 AIRCRAFTDIMR (+28V]
-
PM. LTS GND 33
I I
OPU-DSPDATAA------ ------1
28
DPU-DSPOATAD------- ------2
32

- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
DSP-DPUDATAA 21 56
DSPdPUDATAS------ - ------22
40
I

iPU-DSPDATAA------ ------ -------4

42
IPU-DSPOATAB------ - ------5 i 46
I i
DSP-IPUDATAA------ ------35

DSP-IPUDATAB------- - ------39

DSP-IPUDATAA-------- ---- -------24

34
DSP-IPUDATAG------ ----------25
i 38
I I I
i i N.0. IIDIENTARYSE I
\ \ ELAPSEDTItE 1

- - - - - - - - - - - - -
ELAPSEDTIIE 43

- · - - - - - - - - -
ELAPSEDTIIE GND 45

- - - - - - - - - - - --
ALT ALERT(GND = ALERT) 44 896 FROMPRESELECTOR

- - - - - - - - - - - -
CAT I I REGUEST 9
c
I
CAT II
REQUEST = GND
1 (VORCRS SEL, D VORt 1 VOR2] = - 11
2tLNVERG,0=LNV11=LNV21------ 1 ------12

- - - - - - - - - - - -
3 (ADF DRG, O ADFI 1 ADF2] = = 13
- - - - - - - - - - -
4 [LNVCRS SEL, O = LNV1 1 LNV2) = 7
- - - - - - - - -
5 (LNV2 2ND CRS IMI, O Im 1 ENBL) = = 8
----- - ------10
6 (RSVD)
--------------14
7 (SPAREl--------
- - - - - - -
- - - -
8 (SPAREI 15 COMECTTO STRAPGNDSAS REG'O
STRAPS - - - - - -
- - - - - - = =
9 (SPARE) 16 0 GND, 1 OPEN
-------17
ID(SPAREl---------------
@ ------ - ------18
11 [SPARE)
-
12(SPAREl------ ------19

13tSPAREl------- - ------48

14(SPAREl-------- - ------49

15tSPAREl------ - ------34

- -
1G [SPARE) 50
35

STRAPGNDS
39
40
41

-------------10
AP/FDAMUN1
-------------22
AP/FDAMUN2
-------------23
AP/FDAMUN3
-------------11
AP/FDAMUN4
-------------24
AP/FDAMUNS
-------------12
AP/FDAmUN6
-------------25
AP/FDAMUNT
-------------13
APMDAMUNG
-------------16
APIFDAMUN9
AP/FDAMUN10-------------15
AP/FDAMUNil-------------14
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
AP/FO A-UN 12 17 GNDTO ACTIVATE
- - - - - - - - - - - - - =
APMD AMUN 13 18
_ (ACTIVATE ENABLE/DELETE
AP/FDAMUN14-------------19
APIFDAmtW15-------------20
AP/FDAMUN16-------------21
AP/FDAMUN17-------------9
AP/FDAMUN19-------------G
AP/FDAMUN19-------------7
APMDAMUN20-------------5
AP/FDAMUN21-------------4
AP/FDAMUN22-------------3
AP/FDAMUN23-------------2
APMDAMUN24-------------I

EADI EHSI
EFD-G5/86 EFD-85/86

EADIINTH---------------F

EADIIRTCONT-------------N

EADIINTL---------------M
2 SECTION
EXT PDT
2K 10% 1W
EHSIINTH-----------------------F

EHSIINTCONT ---------------------N

EHSIINTL-----------------------M
 EADI EHSI
DPU-85G|86G DPU-85G|86G EFD-85/86( EFD-85/86( ) 0TIER ACFT
) SYSTEMS
1 I I I
I 1 I
I I I I
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
INCLINOMETER
LIGHT H (5 OR 28V) P
-
INCLINOMETER
LIGHT L (5 CR 28V) U

EHSI+26.5VfHV)H---------- ------94
I (AW20]P
-------- - ------91
EHSI+26.5VRTN Y
I I
- - - - - - - - - - -
T I IAWG20) T
EHSI +25 DEFL 102 A
-25
EHSI DEFL 103 F
EHSI+25,-25VRTN------ - ------99
0
I
- - - - - - - - - - -
T I (AWG20) T
EHSI +11 MFL 106 g
EHSI-11DEFL ----- - ------107
E
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
EHSI +11, -11V RTN 111 C
I (AW 20) I I
------62
EADI+26.5V (HV) H------
---------- - ------59
EADI+26.5VRTN Y
AWS20) I

------------- ------70
EADI+250EFL A
-25 - - - - - - -
EADI DEFL 71 F
EA01+25,-25VRTN------ - ------67
0
I (AW 20) I
----- ------74
EADI+110EFL B
EADI-11DEFL ----- - ------75
E
EADI+11,-11VRTN------ - ------79
C
I I
-------------150
EADIX0EFLH 1
-------------151
EADIX0EFLL H

-------------80
EADIY0EFLH
ELH

-
Ð E
-------------69
EADI RETRACEL J
I
EADIUNVIDEOH------------115 N
- - - - - - - - - - - -
EADI GRNVIDEOL 114 A

EADIREOVIDE0H------------123 P
EADIRE0VIDEOL------------t24 B

- - - - - - - - - - -
EADI BLUEVIDEOH 131 0
- - - - - - - - - - -
EADI BLUEVIDEOL 132

EADIGRNINTH-------------120
EADIGRNINTL-------------119 Y

-------------128
EHSIXOEFLH
-------------127
EHSIX0EFLL

-------------65
EHSIY0EFLH
EDR ELH

-
I 6
EHSIRETRACEL-------------64 J

EHSImNVIDE0H------------100 N
EHSIRNVIDEOL------------96 A

EHSIREOVIDEOH------------108 P
EHSI REOŒVIDEO
LH

-----------116
EHSIBLUEVIDEOL C

-------------72
EHSISHAD0tlH M
-------------73
EHSISHAD0tlL

EHSIRNINTH-------------92
EHSIUNINTL-------------88 Y
 DPU-85G/86G MPU-85G/86G MPU -85G/86G

I I I
I I I
I I \
------ -- - ----12
R TO LOATA H 105
-------- -----16
R TOL DATAL 109

---- -------4
R TOL CLKH--- 115
- ------ --- ----8
R TOL CLK L 117
OATA

------ -------
R TOL SYNCH 106 121
-------------110 • •
RTOLSYNCL 125

-------------3
EADIXDEFLH 50
-------------7 •
EADIXDEFLL 54

-------------11
EADIYDEFLH 58
-------------15 •
EADIYDEFLL 62

EADI GRNH---------------19 66
EADI GRNL---------------23 70

EADIREDVIDEOH------------27 49
EADI RED VIDEOL------------31 53

- - - - - - - - - - -
EADI BLUEVIDEOH 35 57
- - - - - - - - - - -
EADI BLUEVIDEOL 39 61

EADI GRN INTH-------------43 128

EADI GRN INTL-------------47 132

EADI RETRACEH-------------51 90
EADI RETRACEL-------------55 102

-------------59
EFD EHSIXDEFLH 51
- - - - - - - - - - - - - •
BACKUP EHSI X DEFL L 65 55
DRIVE

-------------67
EHSIYOEFLH 59
-------------71 •
EHSIYDEFLL 65

EHSI GRNVIDEOH------------75 67
EHSIGRNV10EOL------------19 71

- - - - - - - - - - - -
EHSI RED VIDEOH 156 156
- - - - - - - - - - - -
EHSI RED VIDEOL 140 159

- - - - - - - - - - -
EHSI BLUEVIDEOH 144 148
- - - - - - - - - - - •
EHSI BLUEVIDEOL 148 152

EHSIGRNINTH-------------152 136
N O

EHSIRETRACEL-------------159 105

- - - - - - - - - - - - -
ENSI SHADDRH 70 107
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
EHSI SHADOW L 74 111
 DPU-85G|86G MFD-85A MPU-85G|86G TIE OTHERACFT
& A & POINTS SYSTEMS S
I I \ \
I I i I
I I I I
WDATAH---------------133 133 352
WXPDATAL---------------137 137

---------------141
W CLKH 141 349
---------------145
WXPCLKL 145 350

WXRBUSYH---------------149 149 346

EXRBUSYL---------------153 153

- - - - - - - - - - - - -
EXR RETRACEH 117 134 331
-------------121
IXRRETRACEL 138

IXRSHADOWH--------------143 151 325

WXRSHADOUL--------------147 •
155 326

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
m CTR H 101 135 343 -
RADARSYSTEM
TO WEATHER
---------------105
IXRCTRL 139 344

i
- - - - - - - - - - - -
WXRRED VIDEOH 77 136 337
------------81
IXRREDVIDEOL 140 338

- - - - - - - - - - ~ -
m GLΠVIDEOH 85 144 340
- - - - - - - - - - - - •
IXR BLΠVIDEOL 89 148 341

- - - - - - - - - - -
m UEEN VIDEOH 93 152 334
-----------97 •
MUEENVIDEOL 156 335

- - - - - - - - - -125
WXR RANGE MARK H 12: 328
- - - - - - - - - -12
WXR RANGE MARK L 120 329

I I I
I i I
' MFOXCEFLH----------------------4 54
MFOXCEFLL----------------------10 55
SHIELD-----------------~-------21

MFDYDEFLH----------------------5 -
58
EDEFLŒLH

- - - - - - - - - - - - -
MFO 9 74
---------------------26
MFORETRACEL 75
I
--------------------7
WDUNVIDE0H 71
--------------------s
WOWNVIDEOL 70

SHIELD-------------------------12
--------------------14
WOREDVIDE0H 63
--------------------13
WOREDVIDEOL 62
I
WDDLŒVIDEOH--------------------23 67
WOGLŒVIDEOL--------------------15 66
I
---------------------3
WDGRNINTH 79
---------------------2
WOGRNINTL 78
oo- SHIELD-------------------------37
WOSHADORH----------------------22 50
WOSHADOUL----------------------30 51
I
-------------------55
WOTOWU0ATAH 112
- - - -
WD MPUOATAL 116

WOTOWUCLKH--------------------53 -
120
WDTOWUCLKL--------------------54 124

-------------------51
WDTOWUSYNCH 128
-------------------44
WOTOWUSYNCL 132

I
--------------------17
REMOTEDATA0H 737
REMDTE0ATA0 L 25

DDICTE"ATA 1 11 32 13|1
REMOTEDATA1 L to 2 ff¾II LEI J.'OTOI3

REMDTEDATA2H--------------------1C 1500
REMOTEDATA2L--------------------11 9

LFPILOT-------- T T
c 49

- - - - - - - - ----o
PF PILDT c 50
CPTIONALWIRESTHATMAYBE REMOTED
FOR LINE
- - - - - - - -
FORMARO,PAGEFORIARDE CHAPTERFORWARO.
CF PILOT 43

-------
PILOTGIO 42

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
+28Y CONVERT(LIGHTINGI 52 FOR 289 LIGHTING, CONNECTPIN 31 TO 2BY LIGHTIE BUS
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
OT ACFT
5V LIGHTING 46 m JUilPER PIN 52 TO 46. FOR 5V LIGHTING, COISIECTPIN
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
28V LIGHTIM 31 46 TO 5V LIGHTINGBUS M LEAVEPINS 31 m 52 OPEN.
LIGHTIMOND----------------------39

EADI EHSI
MPU-85G|86G DPU-85G|86G MFD-85A EFD-85/86( EFD-85/86( ) OTHERACFT
) SYSTEMS

il TEIF WARII 110 TO AIRCRAFT

DPU TEiP EARN(PILOT'S) 102 MEMEIATOR
C TElr NARII 35 PAEL, IF
----------------------------------ß
EADIND.1TEIPEARN DESIRED
------------------------------------------0
EHSIND.1TEIPEARN (GIO-0VERTEtP)
 DPU-85G/86G DPU-85G/86G MPU-85G/86G MPU-85G/86G MPU-85G/86G TIE OTHERACFT
A E A E & POINTS Ü SYSTEMS S
IIIII I
IIIII I
- - - - - - -
OMIBLUE) 13 13 110
MIABER)------------- ------17
17 108
IMINHITEl------------ ------21
21 109

------ ------72
VORSINA 72 113
------ ------76
VORCOSS 76 114
- - - - - - - - - - - -
VORCOMON 80 80 115

- - - - - - -
DELAYEDILS MODE 101 101 107

---------- -------4
VERTOEVINHI+UP) 4 101
-
VERTDEV IN L 1 OWN) 3 3 -
I I NO.1 NAVSYS (VIR-30/32)

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
VERTDEVFLAG IN 113 113 103

VORLATDEVINE+RT]---------- -------33
33 104
- - - - - - - - - - - -
VORLAT DEV IN (+LTl 34 34 105

- - - - - - - - - - -
VOR26VACREF H 41 41 119
-----
--------------42
VDR26VACREFL 42 1133

- - - - - - - - - - - - -
VOR/LOCFLAG 119 119 106
11111
---------- ------13
OM(BLUE) 160
------ ------17
-(AIEIER) 158
------ ------21
IM (WHITE) 159

----- ------72
VORSINA 163
---- ---- ---- - -- ---76
VORCOS B 164
- - - - - - - - - - - -
VORCOMON 80 185

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
DELAYEDILS MODE 101 157

----- ------- ------- ------- ------4

VERTDEVINHi+UP) 151
- - - - - - - - - - -
VERTDEV IN L (+DOWN) 3 -
NO.2 NAVSYS (VIR-30/32)

- - - - - - - - - - - -
VERTDEVFLAGIN 113 153

- - - - - - - - - - - -
VORLAT DEV IN (+RT) 33 154
VORLATOEVINI+LT)--------- ------- ------- ------- ------34

------- ------41
VOR26VACREFH 169
- - - - - - • •
VOR26VACREF L 42 1135

- - - - - - - - - - - - -
VDR/LOCFLAG 119 156

- - - - - - - - - - -
OMEAUIO IDENTHI 154 45 534
- - - - - - - - - - -
DE AUl0 IDENTLO 158 49 i 535

---------------146
OMEVALID 41 526

OMEDATAH---------------142 17 527
OMEDATAL---------------13B 21
-
I NO.1 DE SYS (CE-40/42)
OMESYNCH---------------122 33 529
DESYNCL---------------126 37 530

---------------134
OMECLKH 25 531
---------------130
OECLKL 29

= 112 112 550

OMEHOLD(HOLD OPEN)
I I I
------- ------- ------48
DMEA IOIDENTHI----------- 584
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
DMEA IO IDENTLO 52 585

------ ------44
OMEVALID 578

OMEDATAH-------- ------20
577
OMEDATAL---------- ------- ------- -------24

I i I NO.2 OMESYS (OME-40/421

OMESYNCH--------- ------36
579
OMESYNCL------ ------- ------- ------40

I I I I
----- ------28
OMECLKH 581
------ ------- ------- ------32
OMECLKL

- - - - - - - - - - - -
= 112 599
OMEHOLD(HOLD OPEN]
I I
I I I
--------- ------14
ADFSIN 14 801
--------- ------18
ADFCOS 18 803
- - - - - - - - - - - -
ADF COM 22 22
I NO.1 ADFSYS (ADF-60( ll
---------------90
ADFVALID 133

-----------------------------------------------14
ADFSIN 828
-----------------------------------------------18
ADFCOS 828
-----------------------------------------------22
ADFCOM ND.2ADFSYSfADF-60(ll
-----------------------------------------------133
ADFVALID
 DPU-85G/86G DPU-85G/86G MPU-85G/86G MPU-85G|86G MPU-85G/86G TIE OTFERACFT
A E A & D POINTS SYSTEMS
IIIII I
IIIII I
IIIII I
LRNBRGTOUPTX------- - ------23
23 716
LRNBRGTOUPTY------------- ------27
27 717
LRNBRGTOUPTZ------ - ------31
31

- - - - - - - - - - -
LRN DESIREDTRKX 47 47 713
LRN DESIREDTRK Y 40 40 711
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
LRN DESIREDTRKZ 52 52

- - - - - - - - - - - -
LRN X TRKDEV +RT 150 150 702
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
LRNX TRKDEV +LT 154 154

----- ------149
LRN+TD 140 104
-------- - ------153
LRN+FM 153

- - - - - - - - - - - -
LRN CLK H 32 32 706
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
NO.1 LRN SYS 16 WIRE
LRN CLKL 36 30
DIGITAL PLUS ANALOG)

LRNSYNCH------ ------40
40 710
LRNSYNCL-----------------------44 44

LRNDATAH--------- -------24
24 706
LRNDATAL------- --------28
20

------------~--
------157
LRNVALID 157

LRNREF 26Y H 39 33 730

•
LRN REF 26Y C 13 13 1137

JOYSTICKH------ --------- ------151

a o 734
JOYSTICKL------ ------155

LRNBRGTOMPTX------ -----23
1322
- - - - - - - - - - - -
LRN BRGTO UPT Y 27 1323
LRNBRGTOUPTZ------ ------- ------- ------- ------31
4

----- ------- ------- ------- -----47

LRNDESIREDTRKK 131B
- - - - - -
LRN DESIREDTRK Y 48 1319
- - - - - - - - - - -
LRN DESIREDTRKZ 52 20

----- ------- ------- -------

LRNKTRKDEV+RT ------150
1302
------------------------------------ ------154
LRNK TRKDEY+LT 1

- - - - - -
LRN +TO 149 1305
------------- -----153 •
LRN+FM 1306

LRN 33 1
LRN 6N

------ ------- ------- -------

LRNSYEH------ ------40
1314
LRNSYNCL------ ------44
5

LRNDATAH--------------- ------24
1308
LRNDATAL------------ -----28 • •
1309

------ ------157
LRNVALIO 1317

- - - - - - - - - -
LRN REF 26Y H 39 1334
- - - - - - ·
LRN REF 26Y C 43 1139

- - - - - - - - -
JOYSTICKH 151 1338
- - - - - - - - -
JOYSTICKL 155 9

+FAST--------- ------109
146 856
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
+SLOW 144 143 855
.1MLE OF ATTACKSYS
OR ADS INSTRUMENT
FAST/SLOWVALIO 114 111 257
I I I
+FAST---------- ------ ------- ------- -------157 956
+SLOW- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
147 5
.2MLE OF ATTACKSYS
------------ ------- ------- ------- ------114
ORADSINSTRUMENT
FAST/SLOUVALIO

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ADCTO EFIS MANCHESTER
L 97 97
-
I I .1 AIR OATASYSTEM
- - - - - - - -
ADCVALIO 120 120 USI

ADCTDEFISMANCHESTERH-------- ------- ------- --------93

958
- - - - - - - - - - -
ADCTO EFIS MANCHESTER
L 97
I I I .2 AIR DATASYSTEM
-------- ------120
ADCVALID 954
I I
-------------- -------8
VNICSDDIA 8 1251
- - - - - - - - - - - -
VNI CSDB 18 12 12 2 NO.1 VERTNAY

----- --------------- ------8

VNI CSDB 1A 1276
----------- ------12
VNICSOB18 7 .2VERTNAV

- - - - - - - - -
MPUTO DPUFCC CSDBA 57 16
- - - - - - - - - •
IPU TO DPUFCC CSOS B 58 20

I i

FCCTOEFISPRICSOBA-----------------15 15 GS
'
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
FCC TO EFIS PRI CSDBB 19 10
DIGITAL AUTOPILOT
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
SYSTEM[CSDB), SIDE 1
EFIS TO FCC CSDBA 16 318
ErlC TC PCC CCCCD
 DPu-65G/86G DPU-85G/86G MPU-85G|86G MPU-85G|86G MPU-85G|B6G LAC-80 TIE DTHERACFT
A & A & D A ® POINTS Ü SYSTEM
IIIIII I
IIIII I

IEC 2CVACII CO 30 222

•
ÐG 26YACC SC SC 13\
oo
100 VALIC 11C 110 0û

-
ND.1 C0iPASS SYS
:: II::E : : trnEE 0170: 1 5 211

------------- ------96
GX 96 C3

---------- ----
G26YACH CD 272
----------- ------56 •
ÐB26VACC 518
oc
----------- ------118
ÐGVALID 258

-ND.2COMPASSSYS
-------- ------- ------- ------- -------135
DGMODEf+)(FREEGYRO) 4

----- ------- ------- ------- -----96

HDBX 259
----------- ------104
ÐBY 260
----- ------100
BZ 201

ATT 2CVACII 15 15 221

•
ATT 26YACC IC IC 190
oo
ATT VALID 117 117 01

T T T I I T
-
NO.1 ATTITUDESYS
ATT PITCII Z 9 92

ATT 00LL "

- - - - -
ATT 26VACH 15 271
- - - - - - - -
ATT 26YACC IS 520
oo
--------------- ------- ------ -------
-------117
ATTVALIO 51

------ ------- ------- ------- ------CO

ATTPITCHX 262 -ND.2ATTITUDESYS
- - - - - - - - - -
ATT PITCH Y 84 253
- - - - -
ATT PITCH Z 32 51

ATTROLLX-------- ------- ------- ------- -----

09 255
ATTROLLY------ ------85
250
ATTROLLZ------ ----81
57

AIIRS 2 CSDD A 226

AHRS 2 CEDB B 11 220

"NO. 1 ATT/HDG SYS (CSDB)

AHRS3CSDBA------------ ------ --------7
230
•
AHRS 3 CSDB A 11 237

AHRS3CSDBA----- ------ -- --------------------- ------7

286 È
- - - - - - - - - - - -
AHRS 3 CSDB A 11 87 NO. 2 ATT/HDG SYS (CSDB)

I
+12VDC------ ------- ------- --------------- ------A 307
-12VDC - - - - - - - - - - - -
8 308 LAC-80 POWERSOURCE
+12VDC/-12VDCGNDRETURN - - - - - - (+12VDC/-12VDC/GND)

IIIIII I
LONGITUDINALACCELH------ ------- ------- -----95
D
- - - - - - - - - - -
LONSITUDINAL
ACCELL 98 F

-- - - - - - - - - - -
LONGITUDINAL ACCELMONITOR 104 E

EFIS TEST

DPU TEST 91

MPUTEST------ 1
---------
I ------2
I I I

I i I I
DACALT FLA0 12\ 121

-NO.1RADALTSYS
-----------------------6
RADALTH 6 355
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
RADALT L 5 5 350

RA0ALTFLAG---------------------- ------- ----- -------124

118
-I---
---- ------- ------- ------6
ND.2RADALTSYS
RA0ALTH 1115
----- ------5
RADALTL 116

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
RAOALT TEST [GNDI 122 1 2
2300 NO.1 RADALT SYS

RADALTTESTlGND)------------------ ------- ------- -------122

2400 NO.2RADALTSYS

I I I I AUTCPILDTSYS
37 =
(ENGAGE +2BVOCl

P/0 RA010 TEST

INHIBIT RELAY
I NO.1 NO.2
I i i I I +28VDC +2EVDC

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
DECISIONHEIGHT(GND) 139 150 382
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
DECISIONFEIGHT (GND) 86 1075

ATT :WMtATCII 101 ( 77 ME litt

- - - - - - - - - - - -
ATT C0iPARATOR(GFO) 145 1587

IEC CCIFI."T"r TIE' 25 II: Iff?

- - - - - - - - - -
HDGCOWARATOR (G 146 1589

CAT 11 COME'?Jt?.TCl2(GilC) 23 1\1 1590

- - - - - - - - - - - -
CAT II COMPARATOR (GND) 141 1591

CAT II CITEDIICFOl 13 li: 1502

- - - - - - - - - - - - -
CAT U GREEN10ND) 142 1593

CATIIAWERIGND)---------------------- --------------------90
1595
 DPu-85G/86GDPU-85G|86G MPU-85G|86G TIE
& R A PODITS
I I i i
I I I I
I I I I
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1TO
VERT VALID OUT (+28V) 65 61

- - - - - - - -
LAT NAVVALIOCUT (+28V) 24 30 418

LINDEVl+28V)-------------20 29 421

- - - - - - - - -
VORLOC 1 EDE (+28V) 60 115 416

- - - - - - - - -
VORLOC2 EDE (+28VI 78 121 417

- - - - - - - - - - -
LNV 1 EDE [+28V) 118 147 419

- - - - - - - - - - -
LNV 2 MODE(+28V) 109 158 420

- - - - - - - - - - -
CLEARPULSE (+28VI 113 144 427

--------------------!
PITCHCMD (+0N) 386
--------------------2
PITCHC (+1PI 2

ROLLCml+LT)---------------------37 37 389
ROLLC (+RTl---------------------39 38

--------------------9
FCS26VACREFH 9 224
--------------------10 • • · •
FCS26VACREFC 10 496

I I I
- ---- -- -- ----- --25
COURSEDATUMH----- AP r
------ ---- ----- ---- - - - ---- - - ----25
COURSEDATUMH---- li |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
COURSEOATUMC 26 II I ANALOGAUTOPILOT
- ---- - --------- ---- -- - ----- --N 406
COURSEDATUMC------- SYSTEM SIDE 1

--------------------68
HDGERROROUTH nP r
---------------------- ------------68
HDGERRDROUTH
--------------------64
HDGERROROUTC | |
---------------------- -------------64
403
HDGERROROUTC

-------------------69
LATDEVOUT (+RT)
----------------------- ----------69
LATDEVOUTl+RT)
-------------------73
LATDEVOUT (+LT]
--------------------- -- ----------73
409
LATDEVOUTC+LT)

---------------------126
TO/FROMt+TO)
-----------------------
| -------------126
P nPII 411
TO/FRUf+TOI Il
--------------------130
TD/FRMl+FRU) I
---------------------- -------------130
412
TO/FRMl+FRU)

-----------------58
VERTDEVOUT(+UP) nP nP62
------------------- ------ ------74
VERTDEVOUT(+UP) \\ \\
-----------------63
VERTDEVOUT(+DN) Il ||
----- -------------75
63
VERTDEVOUT(+DN)

P/0 LH DRIVE
XFERRELAY(SHT 3)

SACKLOCMDOE(+2BV1------------------127 127

LOCTINECUTIGFOl-------------------131 131 415

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
FD IN VIEWBIAS (+28VI 137 137 392

--------------------143
FDVALID (+28V) 143 391

- - - - - - - - - - -
C0mAND BARSOFF (+2BVDC = ENABLEl 159 138 1596

mm..
OPTIONAL DISPLAY SWITCHING

DPU-85G|86G MPU-85G|86G

A. EHSI ON MFD i i

DRIVETRANSFER------ ---------- E--- -------los

3
SIMFD

LH XFER I
RELAY

B. REVERSIONARY DISPLAY SEE

REVISIONARY SHEET 3
C i 129
129
NE
C 125
125
RE 1 NAARY

ON EADI P/O THESE CONTACTS ARE REQUIRED IF OPTION A IS

o LH XFER INSTALLED, OTHERWISE INSTALL JUMPERS IN
RELAY PLACE OF CONTACTS

NOTE:REVERSIONARY DISPLAY MAY BE EITHER A COMPOSITE

ATT/HDG DISPLAY ON ONLY AN ATTITUDE DISPLAY,
DEPENDING UPON THE STATE OF STRAP 19.
 LEFT SIDE LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE RIGHT SIDE
DPU-85G/86G DPU-85G/86G MPU-85G/86G MPU-85G|86G MPU-85G/86G MPU-85G/86G
I/0 STRAPNO. A A 2 2 &
I I I I I I I
IIIIIII
I I I I I I I
1 61 I 4

AUTOPILOT TYPE 2 115 5 0

3 121 9 12
NAV DATA REF I I I
4 123 13 16
MAGflRUE 1
5 128 53 56
NAV 429 PORT
AND ANNUN
6 132 57 60

7 133 I 61 64
RA TYPE
B 134 GS 68
X-SIDE DATA
9 135 69 72
FLAG DISPLAY
I I I PILDT
10 I 136 73 76 i CMPTR
VOR PORT ANNUN I I I RESET
24 116 130 131 COPILOT
I a

OPU LEFT/RIGHT 11 140

RESETENABLE
COMPAR 12 141 81 82

13 142 85 BE
-
SPEED/AOA DISPLAY N.O. CONTACTS
23 159 126 127 SPRINGLOADED

ATTITUDE/HEADING 14 145 89 92

ADF TYPE 15 146 93 96

I
LNV COURSE 16 147 i 97 100

HEADING 17 148 102 103

VNAV SOURCE 18 151 10G 107

i I I i i
I I I i
MASLOER
REVERSIONARY
19 152 110 111
WARN
I I i i I
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
MASTERWARNL [GND) 35 35 +2BVDCND.1

I I I
COMMANDBAR 20 155 114 115
i i i Y
ANG/UN DEV 21 156 118 119
= N.D. CONTACTS
COPILOT SPRING LDADED
MASTER
I i I i i i i
WARN
IIllii
-- ------- -------- ------ ------ --- -- ------35
MASTERWARNR(GM)) i +2BVDCND.2

i i i
MASTER
22 58 22 122

PILDT
I I I a
ROSS-SIDE ATT
CROSS-SIDE
25 103 14 83
ATTITUDESOURCE
C ILOT
I I I I i I a PILDT
I I I I I I CROSS-SIDE HDB
CROSS-SIDE
2G 107 3 82
HEADINGSOURŒ
COPILOT
AIR DATADISABLE 27 111 7 77

CROSS-SIDE I
28 135 11 79
DCP SOURCE
RISING RUNWAY 29 139 15 78

HEADING SELECT 30 99 134 134

LNAV DATA 31 105 105 105

 installation 523-0773942

WIRE MARKING STANDARD MARKING FORMAT Example 2. SYSTEM IDENTIFIER DESIGNATIONS

as adopted by the 01AHO14-AX146 (Refer to figure below)
AIRCRAFT ELECTRONICS
COMMUNICATIONS 01 through 15 INSTRUMENTATION 56 through 65
ASSOCIATION, INC· This designates a wire in the No. 1 VHF Comm system VHF Comm #1 01 Vert. Gyro #1 56
running from pin 14 of the main connector on the VHF Comm #2 02 Vert. Gyro #2 . 57
This standard is suggested for use throughout the transceiver to lug 146 of the No. 2 J-box in the aircraft. VHF Comm #3 03 Direct. Gyro #1 58
general aviation industry. It provides a uniform system 4. Destination
HF Comm #1 04 Direct. Gyro #2 59
of marking all wiring used to interconnect avionics Questions or comments regarding this standard should HF Comm #2 05 Altimeter #1 60
equipment. 1. System 3. Pin be made to Aircraft Electronics Association, Inc PO Box
2. Origin 5. Pin , Audio #1 06 Altimeter #2 61
1981, independence, MO 64055 Audio #2 Air Data #1

L
07 62
intercom #1 08 Air Data #2 63
Example 1. 01AHO26-EA120 Intercom #2 09
Page 10 MONITORING SYSTEMS 66 through 75
Marking System Features NO 1 Air/Ground Telephone 11 Comparator Warning 66
1. System Identifier. The first two characters are always VHF Ground Prox. Warn 67
• Identifies the specific avionics system (VHF Comm 1, numerals. They identify the specific avionics system COMM NAVIGATION 16 through 35 Cockpit Voice Rec. 68
VHF Nav 2, DME 1, etc.) and shows the origin and (refer to listing of system identifier designations). In ANT VHF NAV #1 16 Flight Data Rec. 69
destination of each wire. this example, the 01 identifies the wire as being part VHF NAV #2 17 Annunciators 70
ER
of the No. 1 VHF Comm system interwiring. VHF NAV #3 18 Master Warning 71
= Only the system identifier (01, 17, 36, etc.) and for- ADF #1 19
mat are specified. Other numerals or letters are 2. Origin. These two characters are always letters. ADF#2 20 CABINACCESSORIES 76through80
assigned by the installer. They identify a specific connector, junction box, cir- Glide Slope #1 21 Cabin Stereo 76
cuit breaker, etc. The letters are arbitrarily assigned Glide Slope #2 22
= Imprint is limited to thirteen characters to match wire starting with AA, AB, AC, AD, etc. In the example, AG E Marker #1 23 RNAV/VNAV 81 through 85
marker limitations. refer to figure 1, the AH identifies this wire as NO 1 VHF COMM Marker #2 24 RNAV #1 81
NO 1 VHF COMM
originating at the main connector of the No. 1 VHF TRANSCE1VER Loran #1 25 RNAV #2 82
CONTROL
- Accommodates junction boxes and terminal strips as Comm Transceiver. (01) Loran #2 26 VSAV #1 83
well as unit connectors AH Inertial NAV #1 27 VNAV #2 84
3. Pin. The next three characters can be either letters Inertial NAV #2 28
= Similar to some systems currently being used. Easy or numbers. They are used to identify the specific VLF NAV #1 29 DIGITAL FREO. CONTROL 86through 90
to understand and use so no long familiarization or pin, lug, whatever the wire is connected to. In the ex- VLF NAV #2 30 DFC #1 86
training period is necessary. ample this is pin 26. Doppler NAV 31 DFC #2 87
PWR AUDIO
= Has provisions for future expansion and for spares. 4. Destination. The next two characters are letters PULSE 36 through 45 POWER DISTRIBUTION DC 91 through 94
identifying the destination connector, junction box, DME #1 36
etc. The discussion in 2. above also applies to these DME #2 37 POWER DISTRIBUTION AC 95 through 97
AX
letters. In the example, they identify the distinction of -·--- -
ATC #1 38
the wire as the mating connector for the No. 1 VHF NO 2 ATC #2 39 SPARES 98 and 99
Comm Control. JUNCTION Radio Alt. #1 40
BOX Radio Alt. #2 41
5. Pin. The last three characters can be either letters or WX Radar
. 42
numbers and identify the specific destination pin,
lug, whatever as discussed in 3. above. In the exam- FLIGHT GUIDANCE CONTROL 46 through 55
ple this is pin 120. Flight Director #1 46
Example of Simplified Interconnect Flight Director #2 47
The markings should be spaced at no greater intervals Showing Connector and J-Box Designations Auto Pilot 48
than 24 inches. Closer spacing is desirable where the Auto Throttle 49
cable harness is closely laced or clamped. Wires may SCAT 50
be marked SPARE A, SPARE B, etc., and included in a
harness to facilitate future additions or changes.

GAO-0337-OIS

Wire Marking Standard

Figure 2-7

Revised 30 August 1993 2-111

 installation 523-0773942

CHASSIS (CPN 021-0347-030) BREAKOUT BOX CE SSIS

COVER (CPN 021-0347-010)
P1 CABLE W1 P2 P3 P4 P5 CABLE W2 P6

MS3122E24-61S 12 12 BA A 12
B B
(CPN 359-0041-700) 3 3 ) C C 3
C C
MS3122E24-61P
4 D D 4 ) D D 4
MCS312365F9263 5 E E 5 E E 5
2-690)
(CPN 359-0038-640) 6 F F 6 ) F F 6
7 G G 7 : G G 7
8 H H 8 : H H 8
P4 P5 109
P2 P3 10 K K 10 K K
CABLE WI CABLE W2
1.5M (5.0 FT) 1.5M (5.0 FT) 11 L L 11 ) L L 11
12 M M ( 12 : M M 12
13 N N : 13 : N N 13
14 P P ( 14 : P P 14
15 R R : 15 ) R R 15
16 S S ( 16 : S S 16
17 T T : 17 : T T 17
18 U U ( 18 : U U 18
19 V V : 19 : V V 19
SHORTlNG BLOCK
(POMONA ELECTRONICS 20 W W ( 20 : W W 20
3452-0) 21 X X ( 21 ) X X 21
QTY-60 MS3126F24-61S DD-50P-A176-C37 22 Y Y ( 22 : Y Y 22
)
-

(CPN 359-0301-690) (CPN 371-0118-000) 23 Z Z : 23 Z Z 23

DDMF-50S-A176 24 a a ( 24 ) a a 24
(CPN 371-0182-000) 25 b b : 25 : b b 25
26 c c 26 : c c 26
27 d d ( 27 : d d 27
28 e e 28 : e e 28
29 f f ( 29 : f f 29
i e 30 9 | 30 : 9 9 30
g
31 h h ( 31 : h h 31
BLACK TlP JACK 32 i i : 32 ) i I 32
(CPN 360-0151-000)
QTY-60
33 J j ( 33 : j j 33
34 k k : 34 ) k k 34
35 m m : 35 : m m 35
RED 71P JACK
(CPN 360-0150-000) 36 n n ( 36 ) n n 36
QTY-60 37 p P : 37 : p P 37
38 q q ( 38 : q q 38
39 r r : 39 ; r r 39
40 s s : 40 1 s s 40
41 ( 41 41
42 ( 42 ) U u 42

NOTE: 45 ( 45 : × × 45
THIS BREAKOUT BOX IS DESIGNED SO THAT A VARIETY OF CABLES MAY BE FABRICATED 46 Y Y : 46 ) Y Y 46
AND USED WITH THE CHASSIS ASSEMBLY. THIS FIGURE SHOWS CABLES WHICH EXTEND 47 2 2 i 47 ) z z 47
UNITS WITH CANNON D-SUB MINIATURE50 PIN CONNECTORS. OTHER CABLES MAY BE 48 AA AA ( 48 : AA AA 48
FABRICATED AS REQUIRED TO EXTEND UNITS WITH DIFFERENT TYPES OF CONNECTORS. 49 BB BB : 49 i BB BB 49
50 CC CC ( 50 : CC CC 50
DD ( 51 > DD
EE : 52 1 EE
FF ( 53 : FF
GG : 54 : GG
P1 MATES WITH LRI.L P6 MATES WITH MABNG CONNECTOR. HH C 55 : HH
D-SUB MINIATURESOCKET CONNECTOR PARTS LIST FOR P1 (MATES WITH LRU). D-SUB MINIATUREPIN CONNECTOR PARTS LIST FOR P6 (MATES WITH MABNG CONNECTOR) JJ ( 56 ) JJ
KK : 57 : KK
QTY DESCRIPLON
COLLINS VENDOR NAME
QTY DESCRIPLON
COLLINS VENDOR NAME LL ( 58 ) LL
PART NUMBER AND PART NUMBER PART NUMBER AND PART NUMBER MM : 59 : MM
NN ( 60 : NN
PP PP
1 50-PIN CONNECTOR HOUSING P1 371-0182-000 ITT CANNON DDMF-50S-A176 1 50-PIN CONNECTOR HOUSING P6 371-0118-000 ITT CANNON DD-50P-A176-C37
----

RED JACK BLACK JACK -

1 HOOD/CABLE CLAMP 371-0148-000 ITT CANNON DD24661 1 HOOD/CABLE CLAMP 371-0148-000 ITT CANNON DD24661
1 SCREW LOCK ASSEMBLY KIT (2 PER KIT) 371-0040-040 ITT CANNON D20420-98 1 SCREW LOCK POST KIT (2 PER KIT) 371-0062-000 M24308/26-1

1 37-PIN CONNECTOR HOUSING P1 371-0167-000 ITT CANNON DCMF-37S-A176 1 37-PIN CONNECTOR HOUSING P6 371-0171-000 ITT CANNON DCM-37P-A176
1 HOOD/CABLE CLAMP 371-0147-000 ITT CANNON DC24660 1 HOOD/CABLE CLAMP 371-0147-000 ITT CANNON DC24660
1 SCREW LOCK ASSEMBLY KIT (2 PER KIT) 371-0040-010 ITT CANNON D20419-120 1 SCREW LOCK POST KIT (2 PER KIT) 371-0062-000 M24308/26-1

1 25-PIN CONNECTOR HOUSING P1 371-0166-000 ITT CANNON DBMF-25S-A176 1 25-PIN CONNECTOR HOUSING P6 371-0170-000 ITT CANNON DBM-25P-A176
1 HOOD/CABLE CLAMP 371-0146-000 ITT CANNON DB24659 1 HOOD/CABLE CLAMP 371-0146-000 ITT CANNON DB24659
1 SCREW LOCK ASSEMBLY KIT (2 PER KIT) 371-0040-010 ITT CANNON D20419-120 1 SCREW LOCK POST KIT (2 PER KIT) 371-0062-000 M24308/26-1

1 15-PIN CONNECTOR HOUSING P1 371-0165-000 ITT CANNON DAMF-15S-A176 1 15-PIN CONNECTOR HOUSING P6 371-0169-000 ITT CANNON DAM-15P-A176
1 HOOD/CABLE CLAMP 371-0145-000 ITT CANNON DA24658 1 HOOD/CABLE CLAMP 371-0145-000 ITT CANNON DA24658
1 SCREW LOCK ASSEMBLY KIT (2 PER KIT) 371-0040-010 ITT CANNON D20419-120 1 SCREW LOCK POST KIT (2 PER KIT) 371-0062-000 M24308/26-1
CGO-OS23-01-AC-0

I Breakout Box, Parts List and Schematic Diagram

Figure 2-8

Revised 30 August 1993 2-112

 installation 523-0773942

NOTES:

THIS DRAWINGAPPLIES TO FOLLOWNG EQUIPMENT: CHP-85A NUMBER 622-6318-001,

PART -002; MATING CONNECTORS: CRIMP SOCKET CONTACTS SUPPLIED WITH CONNECTORS P1 AND P2
CHP-858 NUMBER 622-6319-001,
PART -002;
CHP-85C NUMBER 622-6404-001,
PART -002; COLLINS VENDOR NAME
CHP-85D NUMBER 622-6898-001,
PART -002, DESCRIPTION QTY
PART NUMBER AND PART NUMBER
-201,-501,-202, -502;
CHP-86A PART NUMBER 622-6408-001, -002, 359-0301-320
MATING CONNECTOR P1 1 MIL. SPEC. MS3126F16-26S
-201, -202;
CONTACTS, CRIMP SOCKET 26 359-0032-020 MIL. SPEC. MS3193A20-20A
CHP-868 PART NUMBER 622-6899-001, -002. MATING CONNECTOR P2 1 359-0301-230 MIL. SPEC. MS3126F14-19S
-201, -202, -301, -302, -501, -502; CONTACTS, CRIMP SOCKET 359-0032-020 MIL. SPEC. MS3193A20-20A
19
CHP-86C PART NUMBER 622-7875-001, -002,

-201, -202;
DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS[INCHES].
TWO QUARTER TURN DZUS FASTENERS MOUNT EQUIPMENT ON STANDARD 9.52 [3.75] INCREMENT
RAILSPACES ON 136.27 [5.365] CENTERS PER MS25212. CHP-86() DOES NOT HAVE J2 CONNECTOR.
CONNECTORS: J1-P/N 371-8625-360 (PTO2E-16-26P)
J2-P/N 371-8625-060 (PTO2E-14-19P), (CHP-85(
) ONLY)

127.00 34.92
MAX i MAX
5.000 [1.375
CENTER OF GRAVITY
B,APPROX C,APPROX- EQUIPMENT APPROX WEIGHT DIM A DIM B DIM C
COLLINS PART NO.
67.3 63.5 lT.3
CHP-85A 622-6318-XXX 0.54 kg [I.2 LB [2.65] [2.50] Ç68]
J¡ J2
63.0 63.5 17.3
CHP-85B 622-6319-XXX O.59 kg [I.3 LB [2.50] [.68]
[2.48]

62.7 63.5 17.3

CHP-85C 622-6404-XXX O.59 kg [1.3 LB [2.47] [2.50] [.68]
65.0 58.7 17.3
CHP-86A 622-6408-XXX O.50kg [l.l LB [2.56] [2.31] [.68]
64.8 63.5 17.3
CHP-85D 622-6898-XXX O.59 kg 1.3 LB
[2.55] Ë2.50] [.68]
66.5 62.5 17.3
CHP-86B 622-6899-XXX O.50kg 1.1 LB
2.62 [2.46 68

CHP-86C 622-7875-XXX 585 40

O.50kg [I.I LB .8

CHP-86B 622-6879-301/-302 66.5 62.5 17.3

0.73kg (1.6 LB
165.10
MAX (2.62] (2.46] (.68]
6.500

A,
APPROX

I I

MAX PROJECTION

.56)

MAX
E
14.2

t 136.4
4.8

146.05
MAX e

647-3776
TP6-1823-Ol4

CHP-85D/86B Course Heading Panel,

Outline and Mounting Diagram
Figure 2-9

Revised 30 August 1993 2-113

 installation 523-0773942

D
E54.6
O MAX
A

14.2
00 60 6
47.62
00000
1.875

B
14.2

4.8 [ ] I 136.4 [5.37] I

38.1 MAX PROJECTION
[1.50]

NOTES:
THIS DRAiMNG APPL1ES TO FOLLOWINGEQUIPMENT:
DCP-85A PART NUMBER 622-6320-001, -002 DCP-85E PART NUMBER 622-6794-001, -002, -201, -202, -301,
-302

127.00 DCP-85B PART NUMBER 622-6021-001,-002,-003,-201,-202 DCP-85F PART NUMBER 622-8148-001, -002

E5.000] MAX DCP-85C PART NUMGER 622-6405-001, -002 DCP-85G PART NUMBER 622-8680-XXX
DCP 85H PART NUMBER 622-9165-XXX
TWO QUARTER TURN DZUS FASTNERS MOUNT EQUIPMENT ON STANDARD 0.375 INCH INCREMENT RAIL SPACES ON 5.365 INCH CENTER PER MS25212.
o50 34o
oi°" °o J1-COLLINS PART NO. 371-0385-100 (DDU-50PBF)
O CONNECTORS:
J2-COLLINS PART NO. 371-0385-100 (DDU-50PBF)
44.45 MATING CONNECTORS: MATING CONNECTOR PART NUMBER DOES NOT INCLUDE SNAP-lN CRIMP SOCKET CONTACTS.
oso 340
[.1.750] 033 J2 Iso
MAX COLLINS VENDOR NAME
oly lo O DESCRIPTION QTY
PART NUMBER AND PART NUMBER
† MATING CONNECTOR P1 1 371-0213-050 ITT CANNON DDMASOS-A183-FO
CONTACTS, CRIMP SOCKET 50 371-0213-110 iTT CANNON 031-1007-067
I C
CABLE CLAMP
SCREW LOCK ASSEMBLY
1
2
371-0148--000
371-0040--040
ITT CANNON
ITT CANNON
DD24661
D20420-12
KEY PLUG 2 629-8339-001 N/A
REAR VIEW DCP-85B AND DCP-85E
MATING CONNECTOR P2 1 371-0213-050 ITT CANNON DDMASOS-A183-FO
CONTACTS. CRIMP SOCKET 50 371-0213-110 ITT CANNON 031-1007-067
CABLE CLAMP 1 371-0148-000 ITT CANNON DD24661
SCREW LOCK ASSEMBLY 2 371-0040-040 ITT CANNON D20420-12
KEY PLUG 1 629-8339-001 N/A
127.00 ENSURE THAT THE CONNECTOR CABLE IS LONG ENOUGH TO ALLOW THE CONNECTOR SCREWS TO BE LOOSENED OR TIGHTENED.
MAX .
[5.000]
POLARIZATION ASSIGNMENT:
EACH UNIT HAS REAR CONNECTOR PlN OR PlNS THAT HAVE BEEN DESIGNED AS THE KEY PINS. THE KEY PINS IN POSITIONS 1 AND 48 ON Ji
AND IN POSITON 47 ON J2 HAVE BEEN REMOVED FROM THE CONNECTORS. MATCHING POLARIZATION IS ACCOMPLISHED ON THE CONNECTOR BY THE
O (C I 170) INSTALLER INSERENG A KEY PLUG (CPN 629-8339-001) INTO THE CORRESPONDING MATING SOCKET CONTACT. TWO KEY PLUGS AND INSTRUCTIONS
o348 J2 353oo O ARE AVAILABLE IN A CONNECTOR KEY (CPN 629-8381-001). KlT MUST BE ORDERED SEPARATELY.
7AS405
DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS[lNCHES)
ois di 33o
o34 500
DENOTES CENTER OF GRAVITY.

C EQUIPMENT NOMINAL CENTER OF GRAVITY MAX DEPTH

COLLINS P/N
WEIGHT DIM A DIM B OlM C DIM D
REAR VIEW DCP-85A ,
DCP-85C AND DCP-85F 0.86 kg 68.8 24.9 69.3 165.10
DCP-85A 622-6320-XXX
[I.9 LB] [2.70] [0.98] [2.73] [6.500]
0.91 kg 72.4 24.1 71.1 165.10
DCP-858 622-6021-XXX
[2.0 LB] [2.85] [0.95] [2.80] [6.500]

DCP-85C 622-6405-XXX O.91 kg 77.7 25.9 72.4 170.16

[2.0 LB] [3.06] [1.02] [2.85] [6.700]

DCP-85E 622-6794-XXX 020 Lkg 7 02 00]

2
0.91 kg 80.8 23.4 73.9 170.16
DCP-85F 622-8148-XXX
Ë2.0LB) Ë3.18 ËO.92) (2.91] (6.700]

DCP-85G 622-8680-XXX 0.91 kg 72.4 24.1 71.1 165.lO

[2.0 LB] [2.85] [0.95] [2.80] [6.500]

DCP-85H 622-9165-XXX O.9I kg 80.8 23.4 73.9 170.16 TP6-IS31-OI4

[2.0 LB] [3.18] [0.92] [2.91] [6.700] 647-3780
622-6794-301/ 1.14 kg 72.4 24.1 71.1 165.10
DCP-85E
-302 [2.5 LB] [2.85] [0.95] [2.80] [6.500]

DCP-85E/G Display Control Panel,

I Outline and Mounting Diagram

Figure 2-10

Revised 30 August 1993 2-114

 installation 523-0773942

2
203.2
[8.00] a
5467.5005MAX MAX
38 30

I APPROX

00 [.56]
47.62
00
1.875
23.6
[.93]
14.2 APPROX
[.56]

4.8 [.19]-* 136.4 Ë5.37.1 38.1

MAX PROJECTION
[1.50]

NOTES:

THIS DRAWINGAPPLIES TO FOLLOWINGEQUIPMENT:

DSP-84 PART NUMBER 622-9683-001, -002, -011, -012, -021, -022, -201, -202, -211, -212, -221, -222.
DSP-85 PART NUMBER 622-6795-001 THRU -004.
00000 e DSP-85A PART NUMBER 622-7728-001 THRU
[5 MAX -004.

DSP-858 PART NUMBER 622-9116-001 THRU -006, THRU -011 -016, -101 THRU -106,
-201 THRU -206, -211
THRU -216, -501
THRU -506.
DSP-85C PART NUMBER 622-9117-001 THRU -201 THRU -206,
-006, -211
THRU -216.

DSP-85D PART NUMBER 622-9118-001 THRU -006.

DSP-85E PART NUMBER 622-9119-001 THRU -006.
DSP-85F PART NUMBER 822-0457-011.
DSP-85T PART NUMBER 622-9387-001, -502.
-002, -501,

44.45 DSP-85V PART NUMBER 622-9868-001.

050 340
0.750] 025 140 033 J2 180 DSP-85W PART NUMBER 822-0413-001, -002.
MAX n S ol7 10
013 lO FOUR QUARTER TURN DZUS FASTENERS MOUNT EQUIPMENT ON STANDARD
.375INCH INCREMENT RAIL SPACES ON 5.365 1NCH CENTERS PER MS25212.
(¯) CONNECTORS:
J1-COLLINS PART NO. 371-0385-080 (ITT CANNON DBU-25PBF-A176) OR (TRW CINCH DBU-25PBF)
2 J2-COLLINS PART NO. 371-0385-100 (lTT CANNON DDU-50PBF-A176) OR (TRW CINCH DDU-50PBF)
APPROX
REAR VIEW
MATING CONNECTOR PART NUMBER DOES NOT 1NCLUDE SNAP-IN CRIMP SOCKET CONTACTS.

COLLINS VENDOR NAME

DESCRIPTION QTY
PART NUMBER AND PART NUMBER
MATING CONNECTOR P1 1 371-0213-030 ITT CANNON DBMA25S-Al83-FO
CONTACTS, CRIMP SOCKET 25 371-0213-110 ITT CANNON 031-1007-067
CABLE CLAMP 1 371-0146-000 ITT CANNON DB24659
SCREW LOCK ASSEMBLY 2 371-0040-010 ITT CANNON D20419-16
KEY PLUG 1 629-8339-001 N/A

MABNG CONNECTOR P2 1 371-0213-050 ITT CANNON DDMA50S-A183-FO

CONTACTS, CRIMP SOCKET 50 371-0213-110 1TT CANNON 031-1007-067
CABLE CLAMP 1 371-0148-000 1TT CANNON DD24661
SCREW LOCK ASSEMBLY 2 371-0040-040 ITT CANNON D20420-12
KEY PLUG 1 629-8339-001 N/A

ENSURE THAT THE CONNECTOR IS LONG ENOUGH TO ALLOW THE CONNECTOR LOCKING
SCREWS TO BE LOOSENED OR TIGHTENED.

POLARiZATION ASSIGNMENT:

EACH UNIT HAS REAR CONNECTOR PIN OR PINS THAT HAVE BEEN DESIGNED AS THE KEY PIN. THE
KEY PINS IN POSITION 6 ON Ji AND POSITION 47 ON J2 HAVE BEEN REMOVED FROM THE CONNECTORS.
MATCHINGPOLARIZATION IS ACCOMPLISHED ON THE MATING CONNECTOR BY THE 1NSTALLER INSERTING A
KEY PLUG (CPN 629-8339-001) INTO THE CORRESPONDING MATING SOCKET CONTACT. TWO KEY PLUGS AND
INSTRUCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE IN A CONNECTOR KEY KIT (CPN 629-8381-001). KfT MUST BE ORDERED SEPARATELY.

g DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS[INCHES].

DENOTES CENTER OF GRAVITY.

APPROXIMATE UNIT WEIGHT IS 1.31 kg [2.9 LB).

652-8051
TP6-2331-014

DSP-85A Display Select Panel, Outline and Mounting Diagram

Figure 2-11

Revised 30 August 1993 2-115

 installation 523-0773942

59.9
[2.36]
(F CENTER POINT OF
APPROX
DISPLAY 154.7
60.70 · [6.09]
[2.39] 193.0 [7.60] REF .
45° REF, 2 PL REF, 2 PL

30° REF

8
121.9
66 [4 80] REF

61.21 -

[2.41]

2F4
[ 9E
126.5 [4.98] REF
5.6 522 112.5 [4.43] APPROX •-63.2 [2.49]REF+
131.6 (5.18] REF
248.9 [9.80] MAX , 126.5 [4.98] I

APPROX
260.4 [10.25] MAX e 5

-3.18 [.125]
--19.8 [.78]MAX IF INCLINOMETER IS MOUNTED

Ø O.13[.005]
5.16 [.203]0, 4 HOLES
122.17 [4.810]
-
122.17 Ë4.810] I
22.94 Ë.903R, 4 PL
2.3 [.09]R, 8 PL
61,09 61.09 / 112.62
2.405 [2.405] [4.434

I 45°, 4 PL
52
28 5
5
3n] 122.17
112.62 [4.810]
[4.434] 117.73
[4.635]
I12.62 117.73
[4.434] [4.635]
77.83
[3.064)
2 PL

[162 035 HIERFD

COEVER
63.63
I 127.25 / , Ø O.13 .005 [2.505]
[5.010] I I
5.16 [.2O3] O, 4 HOLES
---
127.25 [5.010]
155.76
(MOORlNG PLATE MTG) OR
[6.129] [8-32 UNC-2B], 4 HOLES PANEL CUTOUT
(TAPPED PANEL MTG) FOR REAR MOUNTING

647-3785
PANEL CUTOUT TP6-1845
FOR FRONT MOUNTING

EFD-85 Electronic Flight Display, Outline and Mounting Diagram

I Figure 2-1ß (Sheet 1 of 2)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-116

 installation 523-0773942

INSTRUMENT PANEL
OUTLINE OF INSTRUMENT PANEL
EFD-85 EFD-85 BEZEL EFD-85W
PFNCO2
-R6570-OO1)
OPEN1NG IN
INSTRUMENT PANEL
FOR EFD-85

4 X .05
-

248.92 [9.800] MAX

MOUNTlNG SCREWS HIRF INSTALLATION DETAIL A MOUNTING SCREWS

4 X .164 4 X.164

UNC-2A NOT DETAlL B UNO-2A NOT

SUPPL1ED SUPPLIED DETAlL C

NOTES:

WEIGHT: 3.2 kg [6.6 LBS] APPROX, 3.38 [6.96 LBS] APPROX FOR EFD-85W. WHEN UNIT IS USED IN ADI APPLICATIONS, USE THE INCLINOMETERPER THE
FOLLOWINGTABLE: 431.8
REAR CONNECTOR: MS27508E20F41A (COLLINS PN 359-0667-260) (17.00]
CIRCULAR CONNECTOR.
INCLINOMETER /
MAING CONNECTOR: MS27473T20F41S (COLLINS PN 359-0635-420) EFD
OR MS27484T20F41S (COLLINS PN 359-0645-500). BOTH OF THESE PAINT LIGHTING
T/L CPN CPN
C1RCULAR CONNECTORS HAVE CRIMP REMOVABLE CONTACTS. COLOR VOLTAGE
622-6020-001/-011
634-2056-001 N.A.
STRAIN REL1EF: MS27506F20-2 (COLLINS PN 359-0637-070) STRAIGHT CLAMP 622-6464-001/-011 BLACK
TYPE OR MS27507F20 (COLLINS PN 359-0637-170) 90 DEGREE CLAMP 622-6020-002/-012
TYPE OF MS27670F20 (COLLINS PN 359-0073-240) 90 DEGREE CABLE 622-6464-002/-012 634-2056-002 GRAY N.A.
TlE TYPE.
622-6020-021/-501/-121 634-4320-001 BLACK 5 V DC
MOUNTING ARRANGEMENTS: FOR FRONT MOUNTING USE INDICATED PANEL 622-6464-021 634-4320-003
CUTOUT WITH MOORING PLATE, (COLLINS PN 634-2804-001) OR, TAP
BLACK 28 V Dc O O
PANEL FOR UNC-2A MOUNTING SCREWS 1N ACCORDANCE WITH
.164-32 622-6020-022/-502/-122 634-4320-002 GRAY 5 V DC
ARlNC SPECIFICATON 408A. FOR REAR MOUNT]NG USE INDICATED 622-6464-022 634-4320-004 GRAY 28 V DC
PANEL CUTOUT WITH MOORING PLATE, (COLLINS PN 634-2804-001).
822-0648-001 634-4320-003 BLACK 28 V DC O O
DlMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES[INCHEs} ON / O
THIS DRAWING APPLIES TO EFD-85 (COLLINS PN 622-6020-001/-002/-011/-012/
-021/-022/-501/-502
AND EFD-85A (COLLINS PN 622-6464-OO1/-002/-011/ MOUNT INCLINOMETERBY USING THE TWO SCREWS ON THE FACE OF THE UNIT.
DETAIL D
EFD-85W.
DISCARD EFD COVER PLATE WHEN USING INCLINOMETERASSY 634-4320-XXX.
-012/-021/-022)

INCLINOMETERSHALL BE LEVELED BY INSTALLER. DETAIL C AND D ARE APPLICABLE ONLY TO EFD-85W.

4 DENOTES CENTER OF GRAVITY.
OgHIRF INSTALLATION: REAR CONNECTOR FOR EFD-85W:
COOLING AIR HOLE PATTERNS ARE LOCATED ON THE TOP. BOTTOM, SIDES MS3471W20-41P(371-6368-OOO)
AND REAR SURFACE OF THE EFD-85 AND 85A. CIRCULATION OF COOLING
AIR 1S REQUIRED TO ACHIEVE OPTIMUM REL1AB1LITY.
ALL VERSIONS OF EFD-85( )
ARE POTENTlALLY SUBJECT TO HIRF PROTECTION.
MATING CONNECTOR FOR EFO-85W:
USE HIRF COVER CPN 827-6570-001 AS SHOWN IN HIRF INSTALLATION
DETA1L ON SHEET 2 MS312F20-41S (359-0062-560) MATING CONNECTOR STRAIN RELIEF IS
INCLUDED WITH THE CONNECTOR.
A1RPLANE PANEL MUST BE REWORKED AS FOLLOWS:

THE FRONT OR BACK SIDE OF THE INSTRUMENT PANEL MUST BE FREE OF PAINT AS
INDICATED BY CROSS HATCH IN DETAIL A. USE CHROMATIC CONVERSION PER
MIL-C-5541 CLASS C OR EQUlVALENT ON UNPAINTED AREAS.

HIRF MOUNING ARRANGEMENT: FOR MOUNING USE INDICATED PANEL CUTOUT WITH
MOORING PLATE (COLL1NS PN 634-2804-003) OR, TAP PANEL FOR 164-32 UNC-2A
MOUNTINGSCREWS 1N ACCORDANCE WITH ARINC SPECIFICAT10N 408A, FOR REAR
MOUNTINGUSE INDICATED PANEL CUTOUT WITH MOORING PLATE (COLLINS PN 647-3785
634-2804-003). AS INDICATED IN DETAIL B. TP6-1845

I EFD-85 Electronic Flight Display, Outline and Mounting Diagram

Figure 2-12 (Sheet 2)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-117

 installation 523-0773942

76. 2
(3.00)
APPROX
178.3
(7.0 2]
194.8 (7.67) REF i
45° REF, 2 PL -
REF, 2 PL OUTLINE OF
EFD-86 BEZEL

OPENING IN
INSTRUMENT PANEL
30 REF FOR EFD-86

[4269.85
131.6
126.5 [5.18] CG REF
[4-E98] REF

P6 ROOO

A X 4 X 0358 .

[ 0

151.9 [5.98] REF 4 X -

4 X
5.6 [.22]- 116.8 [4.60] APPROX
75.9
[2.99]REF
.38 .05

157.0 [6.18] REF

259.1 [10.20]MAX -- 151.9 [5.98] DETAIL A
180.3
(7.10] ----

270.5 [10.65) MAX -- --

REF, 2 PL
45° REF,
-*
3.18 (.125
2 PL 19.8 [.78 MAX IF INCLINOMETER IS MOUNTED

- 2.3 [.09)R, 8 PL 5.79 .228] O, 4 HOLES

O
0 0.13 [.005] 147 57 [5.810] R, 4 PL
147.57 [5.810
52 OLE.2S28]O 45°REF, 2 PL -
095] 2 05] INSTRUMENT PANEL EFD-86

HIRF COVER
(CPN 827-6914-001) N.
45°,4 PL
|
61.09 63.63 63.63
[2.405] [2.505] 0095] [2.505

122.17
[4.810] ¯¯ 127.25
I 122.17 [5.oio]
127.25 [4.810]
[5.010]
89.59 (3.527]
2PL 27

76.33
[3.005] 76.33 _____
265.43[lO.45]MAX ____ _____,
»- REF
[3.005] HlRF INSTALLATION
152.65 [6.010] - __ 0 0.13 [.005] - - MOLNTINGSCREWS 151.76 (5.975] I

152.65 (6.010] 4 X REF

179.17 6.53 (.257]O, 2 HOLES
.164

UNC-2A NOT
[7.054] SUPPLIED
2 PL PANEL CUTOUT
FOR REAR MOUNTING DETAIL B

PANEL CUTOUT 647-3786

FOR FRONT MOUNTING TP6-1846-024-1

EFD-86 Electronic Flight Display, Outline and Mounting Diagram

I Figure 2-13 (Sheet 1 of 2)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-118

 installation 523-0773942

KEYWiY ORIEFTATION CHART

EQPT TYPE NO CPN Pl TOP PI BOT P2 TOP P2 BOT WEIGHT
DPU-85 622-6022-XXX 6.2 kg [13.6 LBS]
DPU-85A 622-7244-00X 6.2 kg [13.6 LBS]
DPU-85B 622-7245-00X 6.2 kg [13.6 LBS]
DPU-85C 622-7246-00X 6.2 kg [13.6 LBS]
DPU-86A 622-7247-00X 6.2 kg [13.6 LBS]
NOTES: DPU-86C 622-7248-OOX 6.2 kg (13.6 LBS]
(i) DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES [INCHES1 DPU-86D 622-7249-00X 6.2 kg 13.6 LBS
UNIT CONNECTORS Pl AND P2 ARE FULL HEIGHT, 4 ROW COLLINS THIN LINE. DPU-85G 622-7448-XXX 6.4 kg 14.1 LBS
DPU-86G 622-77IO-OOX 6.2 kg [13.6 LBS
MATING CONNECTOR KIT: CPN 634-1020-001, QTY 2 REQUIRED.
MATING SNAP-IN CONTACT: CPN 372-2514-010 OR 372-2514-080. DPU-86K 622-7713-OOX 6.5 kg [14.3 LBS
DPU-86H 622-77Il-OOX 6.3 kg [13.9 LBS
NOMINALWEIGHT: SEE TABLE.
DPU-85H 622-7449-00X 6.2 kg [13.6 LBS
4 SURFACES NOTED CONTAIN VENTILATION HOLES. AN ADEQUATE LEVEL OF VENTILATION
DPU-85L 622-8022-00X 6.2 kg [13.6 LBS
MUST BE ESTABLISHED TO THE UNIT TO PROVIDE RELIABLE OPERAT10N.
DPU-86L 622-7873-00X 6.2 kg 13.6 LBS
-e
DENOTES CENTER OF GRAVITY.
DPU-85M 622-8444-00X 6.4 kg [14.1 LBS]
6 REFERENCE MOUNT: UMT-I4 CPN 622-617f-XXX.
DPU-85N 622-8678-XXX 6.3 kg [13.9 L8S]
THIS DRAWING APPLIES TO: SEE TABLE.
THIS UNIT REQUIRES AN AIR FLOW OF 48 L8/HOUR/lOO WATTS OF DISSIPATED ENERGY
DPU-86N 622-8713-XXX 6.2 kg Ë13.6
LBS]
DPU-85R 622-9007-OOX
WHEN THE UNIT INLET AIR TEMPERATURE IS 38°CEIOO*F3. 6.2 kg [13.6 LBS]
UNITS HAVE BEEN DESIGNED AND TESTED FOR MOUNTlNG IN A HORIZONTAL SURFACE. DPU-86R 622-9009-OOX 6.3 kg [13.9 L8S]
A CHANGE IN MOUNTlNG ATTITUDE WILL REQUIRE RETESTING AND APPROVAL BY DPU-85S 622-9283-OOX 6.2 kg [13.6 LBS]
GENERAL AVIATIONENGINEERING.
DPU-86S 622-9285-00X 6.3 kg [13.9 LBS)
REFERENCE MOUNT: UMT-I4H CPN 822-0055-001 FOR DPU-84 HELICOPTER MOUNTING.
DPU-86T 622-9374-XXX 6.2 kg [13.6 LBS]
DPU-86U 622-9930-00× 6.4 kg [14.2 LBS]
DPU-85U 622-9965-00× 6.2 kg [13.6 LBS]
DPU-84 622-9682-00X 6.3 kg [13.9 LBS
()DARKENED SEGMENT INDICATES EXTENDED PORTION
4.44 OF PIN. REF ONLY, SEE CHART FOR CORRECT DPU-85V 622-9867-XXX 6.3 kg [13.9 LBS]
[.M7A5]-a e ORIENTATION.
DPU-85W 822-0414-00× 6.2 kg [13.6 LBS]
I 8 61.0 49.15
- [.07]MAX [2.40] [1.935]
APPROX REF
Pi P2

r
o o o o 160 *160

00
Cl49 50±.OŒ2
5
5]APPROX ]
104.78 97.79± REF
125]REF 360 OVER CONNECTORS
E4 9û9 46 ±
[3.850±REF]
[3.58]
128.90 REF 123.82±0.51
E5.075]MAX E4.875±.020]
647-3724
TP6-l741-OI4

DPU-85G/86G Display Processor Unit,

Outline and Mounting Diagram
Figure 2-17

Revised 30 August 1993 2-123/(2-124 blank)

 installation 523-0773942

29.7 (\.17]REF, BEYOND THIS ROLLED EDGE

EACH SIDE, LATERAL WIRING MAYBE DRESSED

MATINGCONNECTOR
7.30 E.287] 04V M4ETM _, REAR OF FRONT PANEL MOUNTINGSURFACE
--

,_90.93[3.580] REF
19.OC.753-+
--125.73±0.61 [4.950±.0243--. DISENGAGECONN
523 322
53e2 0075 CE
I7400± 032] 9570
4.
. .0
, _ _

± J 25 ] [ 30 ]
SLOT LOCATING SCREW INTO J2 (FRONT VIEW) J1 i J1 (REAR VIEW) J2
A UNC-28 FLOATING
' r
.138-32 ¯c -- -- ..

S2ELOF
LOCCKINGONLSATENUT,

ED EDGE,
75.01 2 PL
I [6.890] R _

.\64-32 UNC-2B
3.56±0.05 [.1402.002] --
SELF LOCKINGNUTS
HOLE LOCATING SCREW APPEAR ON OPPOSITE
'FNLTOOATAING38SE32F
UNCC ' UNIT MOUNTINGSURFACE
SIDLEOF MATERIAL,
NG
PLATE NUT, 2 SOTTOM -
Ì ~

UNIT MTG .

LOCATIONS
-
SURFACE

I ¯ __
CLEARANCE FOR AIR CtRCULATION ---
1
-

-a -
12.78 [.503] REF
L[.425±
io.s±o.as L [.35]REF
8.9 AIRCRAFT MOUNTING
SURFACE
COVER
4.77 [.188] 0,
63.5 E2.503-,
.015]

-97.79±0.13 [3.850±.005] 4 HOLES

8.97±0.41 8.284 MAX-• REF
[.353±.016] ,_ 298.45±O.5t[II.750±.020]REF REF
10.47 (.412] ----
- 104.78 [4.125] REF [ 3] [.38]
REF
139.2C5.48]MAX 68.6C2.70]REF, CONNECTOR COVER
AND STRAIN RELIEF BRACKET REMOVABLE

I
(s.ie±o.os C.2os±.oo2]O
CLEARANCE HOLES IN MOUNT) NOTES:
4.76C.IS7]REF REQUIRES PLATE NUT,TAPPED HOLE OR CLEARANCE FOR
[.164](No.8)SCREW,4HOLES 1 DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES EINCHES].

¯¯¯¯¯¯
-

¯¯¯¯¯¯3
- CONNECTORMOUNTING ACCOMMODATES4ROWCOLLINSTHIN LINE TYPE,
7 NOT SUPPLIED WITH MOUNT.
APPROX WEIGHT: D.5 kg E1.2 LBJ.
I ALLOW38.1 [1.50] MIN FOR CABLE BEND IF CABLE CLAMP BRACKET
IS DELETED.
101.6 DASHED LINE INDICATES AREA OF
E4.00 CUTOUT IN MOUNT FOR AlÑFLOW AN ASSY OF THE WIRING WITH MOUNTCONNECTORSAND CABLECLAMP
REF BRACKET CAN BE SEPARATED FROMTHE REMAINING MOUNTBY LOOSENING
CONNECTORCAP SCREWS AND TWOQUARTERTURN STUDS. THE SCREWS
111.12 AND STUDS HAVE FRONT ACCESS FOR HEX DRIVER AND SCREWDRIVER.
[4.375] MOUNTINGHOLE PATTERN
.WIRING STRAIN RELIEF CLAMPS MAY BE MOUNTEDIN VARIOUS LOCATIONS,
I NOT SUPPLIED WITH MOUNT.
THIS DRAWINGAPPLIES TO UMT-I4 (CPN 622-6171-001).

GROUNDBRACKET(CPN 634-2626-001)
-- - - -.-

IS AVAILABLEAS AN OPTIONAL PART.

THIS BRACKET IS INSTALLED BETWEEN BASIC MOUNT AND MOUNTCOVER
USING EXISTING HARDWARE. BRACKETHAS 12 HOLES FOR SCREWS.
.138-32

28.7 [I.13]REF 24L3(9.50] REF

298.45 CII.750]

647-3771
TP6-IIO6

UMT-14 Mount for DPU-85( )/86( ),

Outline and Mounting Diagram
Figure 2-18

Revised 30 August 1993 2-125

 installation 523-0773942

NOTES:

DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES [INCHES].

WEIGHT: 0.95 Kg 2.1 LBS NOMINAL. WEIGHT DOES NOT INCLUDE MATING CONNECTORS.

CONNECTORMOUNTINGACCOMMODATES 4 ROW COLLINS THIN LINE TYPE, NOT SUPPLIED WITH MOUNT. SEE
INSTALLATION CONTROL DRAWINGOF PURCHASED UNIT TO FIND CONNECTORKIT PART NO. AND CRIMP
CONTACT PART NO. TYPICAL CONNECTORWT. W/0 CONTACTS IS 0.12g (3.43 0ZS. .

BRACKETS WITH HOLES ARE PROVIDED FOR SECURING STRAIN RELIEF CLAMPS AND GROUNDLUGS. STRAIN
RELIEF CLAMPS AND GROUNDLUGS ARE NOT SUPPLIED WITH MOUNT.

A CLEARANCE OF 7.6 E.30] MINIMUM MUST BE MAINTAINED BETWEEN UNIT TOP AND A SOLID SURFACE.
THIS MOUNT IS SECURED TO THE AIRCRAFT WITH TWO (.T64) NO. 8 PAN HEAD AND TWO (.164) NO.8
100* FLAT HEAD MACHINE
SCREWS. THE MOUNT THICKNESS BEFORE THE SCREWS ENTER THE AIRCRAFT
MOUNTING SURFACE IS AS FOLLOWS:
(.164) NO. 8 PAN HEAD-3.8 ± 0.8 [.15 ± .03].

(.164) NO. 8 FLAT HEAD ± 0.64 [.450 ±

-11.43
.025].

THIS DRAWING APPLIES TO UMT -14A (CPN 622-6901-001).

THIS MOUNT IS INTENDED FOR INSTALLATIONS EXTERNAL TO THE PASSENGER AND COCKPIT AREAS
WHEREBLOWER SOUND IS NOT OBJECTIONABLE. ACOUSTICAL DATA IS AVAILABLE FROM THE BLOWER
MANUFACTURER.

BLOWER INFORMATION:
MANUFACTURER: EG&G ROTRON, WOODSTOCK,N.Y. 12498
PART NUMBER: ROTRON 027685, COLLINS 009-1424-070
VOLTAGE: 115 VAC, 10, 400Hz
CURRENT: .33A NOMINAL: .45A MAX.
CAPACITOR: mFd AT 220 VAC (CPN 933-1043-690
.5 SUPPLIED WITH THE MOUNT)
SPEED: 20700 RPM

UNITS HAVE BEEN DESIGNED AND TESTED FOR MOUNTING ON A HORI20NTAL SURFACE. A CHANGE IN
MOUNTINGATTITUDE WILL REûUIRE TESTING AND APPROVAL BY GENERAL AVIATION ENGINEERING.

CENTER OF GRAVITY IS FOR UMT-14A ONLY.

DENOTES CENTER OF GRAVITY.

BLOWERCONNECTOR: CPN 371-6917-000 (MS-3112E-8-3P)

BLOWERMATING CONNECTOR: CPN 371-0401-030 (BENDIX P/N PTO6CE-8-3S) OR BENDIX PN PTO6A-8-3S
WIRING CODES: 115V 10,400 Hz TO d3-A AND B.

652-8009
TP6-2233-025

UMT-1/pl Mount for DPU-85( )/86( ),

Outline and Mounting Diagram
Figure 2-19 (Sheet 1 of 2)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-126

 installation 523-0773942

JI CG, APPROX
NOTES:

THIS DRAWNG APPLIES TO FMM-85 (622-7154-001).

¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯ ¯¯¯¯¯

PIN NUMBER FUNCTON

¯¯¯¯¯¯,
--

7 THE FMM-85 MAY BE MOUNTED ON ANY ONE OF THE FANS

1 28 V DC
FOUR SIDES. THE FAN MOTOR IS COMPATIBLE
2 28 V DC
WITH THE FOLLOWNG TUBEAXIAL FAN.
37.3
El.47]
(
\
19.56
E.770] ROTRON PART NUMBER 032105
3 FAN SENSOR
4 SELF TEST
(CPN 009-1965-030).
5 GROUND
¯¯L
|I I WEIGHT: 0.08 kg [.18 LB) 6 NORMAL ANNUNCIATOR OUTPUT
..----------------------J 7 OPRONAL ANNUNCIATOR OUTPUT
DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS[lNCHES). 8 ANNUNClATOR COMMON
9 GROUND
gg DENOTES APPROX LOCABON OF CENTER OF GRAVITY.
PIN I
E.35]
28.5820.64 9.7 CONNECTOR INFORMATON:
2.5E.IO]MAX ¯E.38]
.125±.025
UNIT CONNECTOR:
8.I±O.8 2l.3 1NCLUDEDWITH UNIT 1S A 9 P1N-D-SUBM1NIATURE
E.32±.03]¯ E.84]REF CONNECTOR 1TT CANNON, TRW CINCH PN DEU-9PAD.
4.75tO.25 14.7 OR POSITRONICS MD9M48400-516 (CPN 371-0385-010).
E.187±.010] E.58] TUBEAXIAL FAN UNIT HAS CONNECTOR LATCH POSITRON1CS PN
MD37-000-0-V3 (CPN 371-0399-190).
------ --

MATlNG CONNECTOR: MABNG CONNECTOR PART NUMBER DOES NOT INCLUDE SNAP-IN CRIMP SOCKET CONTACTS.
COLLINS VENDOR NAME
DESCR1PPON QTY
PART NUMBER AND PART NUMBER

43.7 MATING CONNECTOR P1 1 371-0213-010 ITT CANNON DEMA9S-A183-FO

E I.72] CONTACTS, CRIMP SOCKET 9 371-0213-110 ITT CANNON 031-1007-067
CABLE CLAMP/LATCH 1 371-0399-240 POSlTRONICS MD9-000-J-VL-464.1
I
I POLARIZATON ASSIGNMENT: NONE

104.78±2.54
E4.125±.010]
114.30±0.76 1
E4.500±.030 I
I
I
I

8.38±0.30
E.330±.012
' ¯

E.138]-32UNC-28 SELF LOCKING CLINCH NUT ON 652-8152

TP6-30II-024-1
INSIDE SURFACE OF TAB, 4 PLACES

FMM-85 (-001)Fan Monitor Module,

Outline and Mounting Diagram
Figure 26

Revised 30 August 1993 2-139

 installation 523-0773942

P P

+28 Y DC

(AWG 20)

J1 P1
.L
-

FMM-85 --- -

ROTRONTUBEAXIAL FAN
(-001) CPN 009-1965-030
- , e p
+28 Y DC INPUT (RED)
2 1 25 Y DC INPUT

(AWG 20) (BLACK)

5 POWER GND
POWER GND
L 9 ------

FAN SENSOR INPUT 3 (BLUE)

FAN SENSOR OUTPUT

CHASSIS
REMOTE GND
ANNUNCIATOR
AIRCRAFT =
FAIL ANNUNCIATOR OUTPUT
6 DIUMSMING
C
NO

VALID ANNUNCIATOR OUTPUT

y
K1

ANNUNCIATORCOMMON
8
OP110NAL
STRAP SELF TEST INPUT 4 O
-
SELF TEST

CGO-0907-02-AC-0

FMM-85 (-001)Fan Monitor Module,

Interconnect Diagram
Figure 2-27

Revised 30 August 1993 2-140

 installation 523-0773942

NOTES:
THIS DRAWING APPLIES TO FMM-85 (622-7154-002). THE FMM-85 MAY BE MOUNTED TO THE REAR
OF THE UMT-14B UNIVERSAL MOUNT OR UMT-15B UNIVERSAL USlNG AN ADAPTER BRACKET
(653-1303-001) THAT 1S SUPPLIED WITH THE FMM-85. THE FAN MOTOR MONITOR IS COMPATIBLE WITH
THE FOLLOWINGTUBEAXIAL FAN:
ROTRON PART NUMBER 504558 (CPN 009-0271-010).
2 WEIGHT: 0.08 kg (0.T8 lb).

3 DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILL1METERS[lNCHES].

P/O UMT-14B/15B PLENUM DENOTES APPROX LOCATION OF CENTER OF GRAVITY.

5 CONNECTOR INFORMATION:
UNIT CONNECTOR:
INCLUDED WITH UNIT IS A PIN-D-SUBMINIATURE CONNECTOR ITT CANNON, TRW C1NCH
- -
PN DEU-9PAD, OR POSITRONICS MD9M4B400-516 .(CPN 371-0385-010). UNIT HAS CONNECTOR
LATCH POS1TRONICS PN MD37-000-0-V3 (CPN 371-0399-190).

MATING CONNECTOR PART NUMBER DOES NOT INCLUDE SNAP-IN CRIMP SOCKETS CONTACTS.
CG, APPROX i

Jl LRIJNNSUMBER AENNDDORARNANMUEMBER
-_

DESCRIPTION QTY

MATlNG CONNECTOR P1 1 371-0213-010 ITT CANNON DEMA9S--A183-FO

CONTACTS, CRIMP SOCKET 9 371-0213-110 ITT CANNON 031-1007-067
CABLE CLAMP/LATCH 1 371-0399-240 POSlTRONICS MD9-OOO-J-VL-464.1
POLARIZATlON ASSIGNMENT: NONE

I
¯ PIN NUMBER .EUttCILQN.
I
1 28VDC
--

L --a

2 28 V DC
I 3 FAN SENSOR
4 SELF TEST
PIN l 5 GROUND
8 ¯[0.770]
19.56 6 NORMAL ANNUNCIATOR OUTPUT
7 6 7 OPTIONAL ANNUNCIATOR OUTPUT
9.7 8 ANNUNCIATOR COMMON
[0.38] 9 GROUND

s.38±o.3o FMM-85 ADAPTER BRACKET (CPN:653-1303-OOl):

[0.330±0.012)
8.1±0.8
[0.32±0.03.] -- -_-
_ r - -y 1·98
R 3.96
5 PL 16.76
4.75±0.25
,-- ---

[O.078Ì [0.156] [0.660]

[0.187±0.010

7.62
- -- - [O.3OO]6 PL

[4327] 963] 8530]¯ [036440]

[O
58.4
[0,138]-32UNC-2B SELF [2.300]
114.30±076 LOCKING CLINCH NUT ON 74.93
14NSILDAECSUSRFACE
OF TAB' [2.950]
[4.500±0.010] 111.76
[4.400]
120,4
[4.740]
104.78 ±2,54
[4125±0010.] FMM-85 IS ATTACHED TO ADAPTER BRACKET (NOTE 6) WITH TWO 0,138-32 X O.31 SCREWS
(343-0168-000) THAT ARE SUPPLIED WITH THE FMM-85.

FMM-85 IS MOUNTED TO UMT-14B WITH FOUR 0.112-40 X 0.31 SCREWS AND TO THE UMT-15B WITH
THREE 0.112-40 X 0.31 SCREWS. THE 0.112-40 X 0.31 SCREWS (CPN 343-0134-000) ARE SUPPLIED
WITH THE FMM-85.
-¯
- ¯ -- - -

9 FMM-85 DOES NOT MOUNT TO THE UMT-16B. USE THE SUPPLIED ADAPTER BRACKET SCREWS TO
- -

MOUNT IN ANY CONVENIENT LOCATION.

14.7
[0.58]
21.3
[0.84]
2.5 MAX 28.58±0.64 652-8152
[0.10] [1.125±0.025] TP6-3011-024-2

FMM-85 (-002)Fan Monitor Module,

Outline and Mounting Diagram
Figure 2-28

Revised 30 August 1993 2-141

 installation 523-0773942

P P
P/O UMT-148/15B/16B/ MOUNT
+28 V DC
al P1 (Awo 20) .p3 33
FMM-85 COMMUTATING MODULE
CPN 009-0271-030
(-002) (ROTRONPN504557)
+28 V DC INPUT ME12 ELA
2 -
B +28 V DC INPUT
-C K)
5 A POWER GND
POWER GND
-CE3 (BROWN)
FAN SENSOR INPUT C FAN SENSOR OUTPUT

WH/RD
1
YEL
I GN

' 5 9 PIN 'D' SUBMIN CONN

WHR
I WH
6
7
REMOTE I
ANNUNCIATOR CHASSIS

NAR
FAIL ANNUNCIATOROUTPUT
6 DI
NC
BUS
NO
P3/J3 FOR UMT-14B ROTRONTUBEAXIAL
FAN
VALID ANNUNCIATOROUTPUT DFOURMTU ON
15B N

ANNUNCIATORCOMMON

OPilONAL
STRAP SELF TEST INPUT 4 O
SELF TEST CHASSIS
GND

L 1
=
_ _I
CGO-0907-02-AC-0

FMM-85 (-002)Fan Monitor Module,

Interconnect Diagram
Figure 2-29

Revised 30 August 1993 2-142

 installation 523-0773942
J2
DPU-85G|86G NO. 1 P/O ANALOG\/0 CARD A7
10 k '
- FD IN-VIEW BIAS 137 ','
J2
RADIO ALT TEST RADIO

Il
27 k
- -
- 122 -

ALT1METER
- 29 -
CAT II COMPARATOR NO. 1
-15
V DC - 30 -
CAT II AMBER
10 k - 35 -
COMPAR MASTER WARN ->
TO
'
-4

- COMMANDBARS OFF 138 W. I LATCH -/ - 49 -

CAT 11 GREEN . PANEL
65 HDG COMPARATOR ANNUNCIATORS

ll
27 k LATCH 9 - -

9 - 77 -
ATT COMPARATOR
^'
ADDR BUS - 139 -
DECISION HEIGHT
-15
V DC 7 k 3 k
ANFACLSOG 10 k - 1321 -
LOC TUNE
- FD VALID I 143
NO. 1
27DCk 0. 7

M ANALOG I/O +28 V DC J1

-15

+DN - 1 147 k PROCESSOR 10 k - 24 -

NAV VALID
-->
PITCH CMD - 20 -
LIN DEVIABON
+UP - 2 100 k - 109 -
LNV2 MODE
LATCH 10 k
' '.' - 118 -
LNV1 MODE
100 k LATCH - 113 -
FCS CLEAR
+LT - 37 78 - 78 -
VOR/LOC2 MODE
-->
ROLL CMD 0.027 147 k 2 - 60 -
VOR/LOC1 MODE
+RT - 38

0,1 - 127 -
BACK COURSE
RAM

37.4 k
1500
-L _L 100 k CON RTER LATCH 6
5 TO/FROM
RADIO ALETUDE 100 k 51
_H
6
0 0.1
AL 37.4 k pgou ANALOG
NO. 1 FROM MUX FCS
(SHEET 2,3) NO. 1
10 k
RADIO ALT VALID 124

I
27 k 56
LATERAL DEV
-15
V DC 51.1
CONDV LAEXER
TER MUL
MULEPLEXER
ATT PITCH DC
22 k
92 RESOLVER 10

+ 10k
FCS 26 VAC REF
85 --• --
1 H
ATT ROLL 89 DC
81 RESOLVER 10 M 22 k H

10 10 k
ATT1TUDE
NO. 1 Id -
-H H 'k BUS
45
BUFFER
ATT 26 V AC REF 16.2 k

4.7 k 4.7 k

HEADING ERROR
TO TAL
10 k I/O CARD AS
AT11TUDE VALID 117 W. LATCH
8060 16.9 k
27 k
+15 V DC
15.8 k 2.7 k
-15
V DC

- -
104 - 470
-
HEADING 1060
RES VER
15
ET 2
--
COURSE DATUM ERROR -

SH: E 3 15
-H _H 'k J2
60
HAENA HDG 26 V AC REF
_C 'k
56
NO. 1 2.7 k
4.7 k 4.7 k

-15
V DC CGO-2581-09-AC-1
10 k
HEADING VALID : 118 ••

J2
J1 10 k
DG MODE . vs DPU-85G/86G Display Processor Unit, System Schematic Diagram
27 k 27 k Figure 2-30 (Sheet 1 of 9)
-15
V DC -15
V DC

Revised 30 August 1993 2-148

 DPU-85G/86G NO. 1 P/O ANALOGI/O CARD A7 installation 523-0773942
ADF DC RCVR
BUFFER
19.6 k
ADF COM/Y
19.6 k 0.1
ADF COS/Z 18
TO DC RESOLVER

I I
12.4 k
12.4 k MULTIPLEXER -

VERTER
0.1 (SHEET 1) 339.2 kk 10 k
k
Ok
BUFFER
ADF SIN/X 14 "' X
19. k
Z-- -

12.4 k 0.1
39.2 k 10 k ADF AC RCVR
STRAP 15 10 k
(ADF TYPE) 8660
ANALOG
20 k
N 1 19.6 k BUFFER
19.6 k
6 k
10 k 0.1 W.
0.1
8660
8660
6 kk
20 k 0.1

26 V AC REF- SQUARER
8660

J1 10 k
i ADF VALID 90 VA
J1
27 k

VOR COM
I
80
-15

Ok
V DC

69.8 k

BUFFER
1 C
100 k
VOR COS 76 --

69.8 k 10 pF

1
k100 k BUF
1 1 STRAP 1 APS TYPE SEL
100
-

VOR SIN 72 1 5 -
STRAP 2 APS TYPE SEL
0.1
121 -
STRAP 3 APS TYPE SEL

I
69.8 k 113 -
STRAP 4 NAV DATA REF
1 18 -
STRAP 5 LNV PORT ANN
I 1 12 -
STRAP 6 LNV PORT ANN
CTRL
1 13 -
STRAP 7 RAD ALT TYPE SEL
10 M
---
1-14 -
STRAP 8 RAD ALT TYPE SEL
115 -STRAP 9 X-SIDE DATA FLAG
27 k 1 16 STRAP 10 VOR PORT TYPE SEL
-

H
ANALOG - - 41 110 -
STRAP 11 DPU LEFT/RIGHT
VOR C
- VOR 26 VAC
C 2 k 1‡1 STRAP 12 COMPAR RESET/INHIB
--

NO. 1 ---
REF ---
42 1 52 -
STRAP 13 SPD DEV TYPE SEL
TO SHEET 1 115 STRAP 14 ATT/HDG TYPE SEL
-

I
4.7 k 4.7 k +28 Y DC 1 ‡6 STRAP 15 ADF TYPE SEL
-

117 STRAP 16 LNV SYNCHRO

-

10 k 118 STRAP 17 HDG MAG/TRUE

-

1 k 131 STRAP 18 VNAV ENABLE

10 k
-

VOR/LOC VAUD 119

LATCH 1 42 STRAP 19 REV DISPLAY
-

34 1 i5 STRAP 20 COMMANDBARS

I
27 k
--

18 k 1 i6 -
STRAP 21 LINEAR DEV
+15 Y DC
1 i8 -
STRAP 22 MASTER WARN RESET
-15
V DC
3.6 k _ _
1 i9 -
STRAP 23 SPD DEV TYPE SEL
l i6 STRAP
-
24 VOR PORT TYPE SEL
- -«
135 STRAP 31 LNV DATA
-

OUTER MARKER 13 -*

18 k LATCH 1 25 EADI COMPOSITE/EHSI OFF

-

MIDDLE MARKER 17 -e -a
en 1 19 EADI OFF/EHSI COMPOSITE
-

INNER MARKER 21 -
1 2 DME HOLD
-

0.68 1M 0.33 .2 DME

10 14 NO. 1
NAV TEST 108 --
2.2 k 1 k
LATCH 1 -
DME VALID ·
ILS MODE 101 -*

a- J1
+28 V DC 27 k
CGO-2581-09-AC-2
STRAP 30 HDG SEL -
99 -•

10 k
-15
Y DC
STRAP 25 ATT SOURCE -
103 --

SE DHADGA
SE AR 11 10 k
AIR
-

LATCH DPU-85G/86G Display Processor Unit, System Schematic Diagram

STRAP 28 DCP/DSP SOURCE -
135 --
Figure 2-30 (Sheet 2)
STRAP 29 RISlNG RUNWAY -
139 -e -

J1

Revised 30 August 1993 2-144

 installation 523-0773942
I
y
32 DPU--85G/86G NO. 1
LNV DESIRED TRACK RESDC P/O ANALOGI/O CARD A7

I
LNV BEARING TO - 23 DC -
j
WAYPOINT 31 - RESOLVER
TO A/D
CONVERTER
27 k (SHEET 1)
39
LNV 26 Y AC REF 27 k
43 "•

0.0068

II
4.7 k 4.7 k
ANALOG
LNV V 301 k
NO. 1
-L 18.2 k
+LT (L) 154 ".

LNV CROSS -+.

1060 MULTIPLEXER
TRACK DEV 18.2 k
'
+RT (H) 150
0.0068

II
301 k

10 M
10 k
+FR 153
LNV TO/FROM - 220 I
10 k -

·
+TO - 149

10 k
LNV VAUD 157 Wu
0.0068

I
27 k

-15
Y DC 301 k
---'VW---
L 18.2 k
+DN (L) - 3
GUDESLOPE - 1060
H DEV 18.2 k
+UP (H) - 4 i
-I- 0.0068

II
0.0068 301 k

ANALOG 301 k
VOR
NO. 1 L 18.2 k
+LT (L) - 34 W.

LOCALIZER 1060
H DEV 18.2 k 4.
I•
+RT (H) - 33
TO

II
0.0068 301 k
SHEET 1

10 k
GUDESLOPE VAUD 113 ½

LATCH

k
FAST/SLOW VAUD 114 W

I
27 k 27 k 0.068

-15
Y DC -15
Y DC
ADS 23.2 k
NO. 1
+FAST 2 k
- 109
FAST/SLOW
+SLOW 26.1 k
- 144
0.068 23.2 k

kl5 2ODC5k+15 20DC5

100 k MACNCHERSTER
k
H 20.5 '''
93
SHIFT 4
ANDCAHEASTER) REGISTER
-Le
( 20.5 k l'
DPU-85G/86G Display Processor Unit, System Schematic Diagram
N 1
Figure 2-30 (Sheet 3)
3240 5110

10 k
ADC VAUD 120 'M
J2
27 k

-15
Y DC CGO-2581-09-AC-3

Revised 30 August 1993 2-145

 installation 523-0773942

DPU-85G/86G NO. 1 DCP-85E/G

P/O DIGITALI/O CARD A8 as-422 NO. 1

U TO DCP -

TO ANALOG
DCP-85E/G I/O CARD A7
NO. 1
R422

DCP TO DISPLAY
DCP TO DPU BUS
-L ACIA PROCESSOR
40
BUS CARD A4

WX DATA
I BUFFER

R HIGH SPEED
WAA -422 PVER MULOPLOERTER
INPUT/OORUTPUT
REC

WX CLOCK

MULRAPMORT

I
RS-422/CSDB RECEIVER
SERIAL '
256 X 16
DIGITAL +5 Y DC
I/O
PROCESSOR 4.7 k
CSDB 26LS33
DIGITAL RcvR
AFC
FCS CSDB
A
-
19
NO. 1
4.7 k

RAM
0

VNAV CSDB EPROM

12

AAC EPROM
AHS CSDB

DIFF
DPU-85G/86G LINE DPU-85G|86G
NO. 2 SHEE 5 DRIVERS NO. 2
LS

5 H
X-SIDE DATA - X-SIDE DATA -

H H
X-CS E X-S
X-SIDE CLOCK - X-SIDE CLOCK -

H
15 6
X-SIDE SYNC - X-SIDE SYNC -

J1

I CGO-2581-09-AC-4

DPU-85G/86G Display Processor Unit, System Schematic Diagram

I Figure 2-30 (Sheet 4)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-146

 installation 523-0773942

I
DPU-85G|86G NO. 1
P/O DIGITALI/O CARD A8

J2
24
+5 Y DC
--
LNV DATA (6-WRE) -»

28 - 680 k
12 k
12 k
LNV -He 32 -

(ARINC 561) -»
LNV CLK (6-WRE) 12 k / RECEIVER
L L
36 6 ••• / 3
NO. 1 - - -

© 12 k
H H
40 -

--
LNV SYNC (6-WRE) -->

L L

-H
142 Y DC
+5
--
DME DATA (6-WRE) --

12 k
12 k
4 DME
--
DME CLK (6-WRE) 12 k / RECEIVER
L L ----.t

DME - - 130 6 ···

3
(ARINC 568) U i
_H 12 k
NO. 1 _H-- 122
--
DME SYNC (6-WlRE) -

L L

564 IEDENT
AUDI
--
DME AUDIO IDENT - PROCESSOR
-L-> 158 270

(TO S|I 4)

CGO-2581-09-AC-5

DPU-85G/86G Display Processor Unit, System Schematic Diagram

I Figure 2-30 (Sheet 5)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-147

 installation 523-0773942

WX CONEOL
I
J1
101

105
+5 V De

4.7 k

DEFLECTION
DPU-85G|86G NO. 1
P/O ADI/MUXCARD A6

4'
15 pF

+15 V DC

2.7 k
J1

5
1
EADI BACKUP X DEFl.
G 86G

J1
3
7

MULTPLEXER

I
4.7 k
--
EADI BACKUP Y DEFL
15 13

4
+5 V DC 15
--
EHSI BACKUP X DEFL
6
4.7 k
H H EADI/EHSI
149 2.7 k
VIDEO AND BLANKING
WX BUSY
_L- DEFLECTION
153 ->
EHSI BACKUP Y DEFL
-15
V DC
H H 4.7 k
77 -

WX RED VIDEO
- 81
WEATHER I H H
RADAR - 17 19
H H --
EADI BACKUP GREEN VIDEO --

85 0.125 A - 21 23
- WX BLUE VIDEO
L L
89 0.125 A i
+5 V DC H
g 11 - 25 27
H H --
EADI BACKUP RED VIDEO
93 - 29 31
4.7 k 5.1 V , 5.1 V
- WX GREEN VIDEO VIDEO
-Le - 97 MULTPLEXER
H
-H _H- 6 --*
EADI BACKUP BLUE VIDEO
117
- WX RENACE k
L -L- .7

15 F
121 - 11
H
- 41 43
H H 10 k
--
EADI BACKUP GREEN INT
143 - - 45 47
WX SHADOW
-L _L- V DC
147 - +15
I - 49 51
H H --*
EADI BACKUP RETRACE
53 55
WX RANGE 2.7 k

J1 CARD A10
--
EHSI BACKUP GREEN VIDEO --

15 22
EADI X DEFl.
4
6
15
--
EHSI BACKUP RED VIDEO

2.7 k 34 144
--
EHSI BACKUP BLUE VIDEO
-
38 148
-15
V DC EADI GREEN VIDEO
EADI RED VIDEO H H
VI O LINE
EADI BLUE VIDEO --
EHSI BACKUP GREEN INT
6
EADI GREEN INT I
H
EADI RETRACE
NOTE: EHSi GREEN VIDEO
DPU BACKUP DRIVE
/ 11 L /'22 EHSI RED VIDEO 50
H -
H
160
--
EHSI BACKUP RETRACE
OUTPUTS ARE CONNECTED EHSI BLUE VIDEO 54 - 159
ONLY IN THE 4-TUBE EHSI GREEN INT
CONFIGURATON. EHSI RETRACE
EHSI S DO
->
EHSI BACKUP SHADOW

I CGO-2581-09--AC-6

DPU-85G/86G Display Processor Unit, System Schematic Diagram

I Figure 2-30 (Sheet 6)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-148

 installation 523-0773942

NO. 1 +28 Y DC POWER

I DPU-85G|86G NO. 1
P/O DPU PORR SUPPLY CARD A3

22
SP R
-+ -15
58 VD C

Y DC

+28 Y DC RETURN

I =

HIGH TEMP WARN --

102
J1 EFD-85/86( )
EADI

I NO. 1
--------------------

P/O EFD PORR SUPPLY CARD A9

J2
62 --
+26.5 Y DC POWER W
J2 50 50 EADI i 70 -
+25 V DC DEFL A

f 50 POWER 71 Y DC DEFL F
- - -25

NO. 1 +28 Y DC POWER -

51 22 100 SUPPLY I 74 --
+11 V DC DEFL B
75 - -11
V DC DEFL E
-
54 100 V 59 -
+26.5 Y PWR RTN V
+28 Y DC RETURN -
55 79 -
±11 V PWR RTN C
67 --
±25 V PWR RTN -
D

NO. 1 +28

+28
V DC POWER

Y DC RETURN
-

-
|
86
87
J2 .
50

22
50

100

100 V
EHSI
SUOPLR
I
94
102

107
91
111
99
6
-

--

-+26.5

--

--
+26.5
+25

-11
Y DC POWER
Y DC DEFL
15 Y DDCC

V DC DEFL
DDE

Y PWR RTN-
±11 V PWR RTN
±25 Y PWR RTN -
EFD-85/86(

I
EHSI
NO. 1

J1
W
A

B
E
V
C
D
)

J2 J1

|
m

P/O PROCESSORCARD A4
+28 Y DC

OCESSOR
10 k
J1 10 k
NO DPU TEST 91
-
II
J1 +28 Y DC
MULTIPLEXER
10 k
10 k
STRAP 11 (SlDE) -
1

CGO-2581 -09-AC-7

DPU-85G/86G Display Processor Unit, System Schematic Diagram

I Figure 2-30 (Sheet 7)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-119

 installation 523-0773942

DPU G 86G
G78O (OR) DPU-85G|86G NO. 1 EFD 85/ ()
E; 1 ( 1
- -
P/O RELAY CARD A10
J1 J1
H X DEFL H J1 J1
-H
J1 150
H
X DEFL OUT
50 i 5 EADI BACKUP X DEFL IN
X DEFL L
151 -
-Le
h
L

Y DEFL H -

-H H
9
80
H
11
Y DEFL OUT
Y DEFL L -

58 13 EADI BACKUP Y DEFL IN _L

L
- --
15
62

-H RED VIDEO H -

25 -H H
123
H
27
RED VIDEO OUT -
RED VIDEO L -

49 29 EADI BACKUP RED VIDEO IN -L L

124 b
L
- --- - 31
53

66
17

21
-L
EADI BACKUP GREEN VIDEO IN
-H
I
19
GREEN VIDEO H

GREEN VIDEO L
-

-
K3

115

114
-

-La
H

GREEN VIDEO OUT -

H
n

a
-L
---- --
23
70

BLUE VIDEO H -

33 -H H
131 d
-H
35
BLUE VIDEO OUT -
-L BLUE VIDEO L -

57 37 EADI BACKUP BLUE VIDEO IN -L

132
-L
--
39
61

5
GREEN INT H -

H
41 -H
120 Z
-Ho
43
GREEN INT OUT -
-L GREEN INT L -

128 45 EADI BACKUP GREEN INT IN -L

1 9
-L

132

K6
H
49 - RENACE H -

H H
68 - ---e
X
Ho
51
L RENACE OUT
EADI BACKUP RENACE IN RENACE L -

-L
98 69
L
55 J1

102
-- MPU-85G/86G
FCC DATA -
J2
H H
J1
A A
16 - - DIGITAL
16 - 57
EFIS TO FCC CSDB->
FCS
FCC DATA -

MPU TO DPU FCC DATA CSDB -L- _L

20
20 - 58 J2

+28 V DC DRIVE BANSFER RELAY PWR 94

NOTE: MPU BACKUP OUTPUTS ARE

USED IN 3- AND 5-TUBE SYSTEMS. O-DRIVE BANSFER RELAY GND 98
I . K16

DPU BACKUP OUTPUTS ARE USED - DRIVE J1

IN THE 4-TUBE SYSTEM. XFER CGO-2581-09-AC-8

DPU-85G/86G Display Processor Unit, System Schematic Diagram

I Figure 2-30 (Sheet 8)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-150

 installation 523-0773942
DPU G '86G
8 G 8 3 (OR) DPU-85G|86G NO. 1 EFD 85þ 5( )
El al NC 1
P/O RELAYCARD A10
J1 J21
X DEFL H J1
-H- _H-
1 8
59 - X DEFL OUT
i -L X DEFL L
51 6 EHSI BACKUP X DEFL IN -L La
-
127 h
- --
-La 63
55 5

Y DEFL H -

-H H
10
65
-He 67 - Y DEFL OUT
-L Y DEFL L -

59 - 14 EHSI BACKUP Y DEFL IN . -L L

76
----- --
-La 71
63

9
H SHADOW H
Ho
70 - SHADOW OUT
SHADOW L -

107 EHSI BACKUP SHADOW IN

- --
-La 74
111 j

10
GREEN VIDEO H -

18 -H He
96 n
-H- 75 - GREEN VIDEO OUT -

-L GREEN VIDEO L -

67 22 EHSI BACKUP GREEN VIDEO IN - -L Le

100 a
- --
-L

71

RERACE H -

50 -H H-e
61 X
-H- 160 - RERACE OUT
-L RERACE L -

99 54 EHSI BACKUP RERACE IN -L

64
L
- --
- 159
103

136
42

46
-L
EHSI BACKUP GREEN INT IN
I
152
GREEN INT H

GREEN INT L
-

-
K12

92
-H

- GREEN INT OUT -

H
Z

------ -- --
- 156
140

13
34 -Ho RERACE H -

H H
112 - - d
_H- 144
L - BLUE VIDEO OUT -
RETRACE L -

148 EHSI BACKUP BLUE VIDEO IN -L _L

116
L
148
152

Kl4
H
26 - RED VIDEO H -

H H
108 - -
2
He
136
L - RED VIDEO OUT -
30 RED VIDEO L -

EHSI BACKUP RED VIDEO IN -- -L-

156 104 -
b
-Le 140 J1

159 +28 Y DC DRIVE BANSFER RELAY PWR 94

1620
NOTE: MPU BACKUP OUTPUTS ARE
O--DRIVE CHASSIS GND
USED IN 3- AND 5-TUBE SYSTEMS. TRANSFER RELAY GND 98
J2
DPU BACKUP OUTPUTS ARE USED -
¯
DRIVE J1
IN THE 4-TUBE SYSTEM. XFER SU
Ñf CGO-2581-09-AC-9

I DPU-85G/86G Display Processor Unit, System Schematic Diagram

Figure 2-30 (Sheet 9)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-151

 installation 523-0773942

I
HV SENSE
EFD--85/86( ) PRI 1
EADI NO. 1 TAP HIGH ANODE (15 kV DC)
HIGH
PRI 2 VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
FOCUS (2.5-4.5
--a

DRIVE H POWER kV DC)

REGULATOR
DPU- DRIVE L SUPPLY
85G|86G 15 V SHUT DOWN CIRCUIT
NO2 1 [1
FCROCM
EFBREAKER
PWR MONITOR (+28 V DC) -

59 +26.5 V DC PWR RTN (HV) V 10 k

CHASSIS GND L
SCREEN (+365V DC)
2A 0.1 mH =
VIDEO
VIDEO PWR
62 +26.5 V DC PWR (HV) W POWER
P2 0.1 SUPPLIES FILAMENT H
+5 V DC
P1 H H
¯ -------

115 - n 1 k
L GREEN VIDEO

23 -

E VIDEO
i RED VIDEO
124 ) - b L
131 H H
BLUE VIDEO
-
d DIFFERENEAL
L ,

+5 DC 1 k
132 LINE
1 k RECEIVERS
H _H
11 0 Z H
GREEN INTENSITY
GRN INT/SHAD
-
m L
SHADOW (OPEN ON EADI) _ _
G1 G2 G3
DCP- 1 k RED VIDEO
85E/G SHIELD GND (GRN, RED, BLU) - e GREEN VIDEO
+12 V DC VIDEO YOKE my
NO. 1 SHIELD GND (SHADOW, GRN/2) - q
BLUE VIDFLAMENT-
flTEND (
TRACE,Y) 22 k
0.125A
+12 V DC
DIM DC
E

VIDEO GUNS
P2 ' CONVERGENCE/PURITY MAGNETS
HVSDF PHOSPHOR
PROTECTlON
INCUNOMETER LIGHENG H
FROM +5 OR
EFD-86( )-021 AND ABOVE ONLY
+28 V
INCLINOMETERUGHENG L innel
EFD-86( )-021 AND ABOVE ONLY
LIGHENG BUS
DEF MON
LTS VS15504 HDS LOC1
TO AIRCRAFT
ANNUANCILATOR
[
EFD-86(
HIGH TEMP WARN
)-021 AND ABOVE ONLY 9
- ±15 V DC
-++15
Y DC
±6 V DC
-+6 V DC
DEFLECTON
Y YOKE RTN P/L
YD 4
\
·

-20
X' >
POWER POWER
V DC
MONITOR XCURSENSE r•* ¯

-+-15
V DC --6
DH -lo

i
PU
8 G/86G +5 V DC

-lo
ATT2•
CW
6 1 . RETRACE RETRACE RETRACE X YOKE RTN DH
68 -

/ CIRCUITS 3e 200

1 k

10 -

+25 V DC
TO 125 Y DC PM (CEFL) 4
1
71 25 " 00 P'. (CEFL) E
-25
V DC
1
71 111 " 00 P'.I. (CEFL) 0
+11 V DC
1 -11
V DC
75 11 Y 00 PM (CEEL) E
79 ±11 V DC PWR RTN C -- -

67 ±25 V DC PWR RTN D DEFLECEON

P2 POWER
L 10 k 15 pF
¯ - ¯
AMPUFIERS
P1 'A. 10 k XDEFH
- h OFFSET, X YOKE SEND
XDEFL
151 X DEFL GAIN, AND
X DEFLECEON
150 ) H ,
470
10 k UNEARITY Y YOKE SEND
- 1 DIFFERENRAL CIRCUITS
15 pF BUFFER

I
10 k
AMPLIFIERS

L 10 k
L 15 pF
. 10 k
Y DEFL
Y DEFLECEON 470

15 pF
10 k
NOTE: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPEClFlED, RESISTANCE VALUES ARE IN OHMS AND CAPACITANCE VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS.

CGO-2570-02-AC-1

I
EFD-85/86( ) Electronic Flight Display,
System Schematic Diagram
Figure 2-31 (Sheet 1 of 2)

Revised 30 August 1993 R- MR

 installation 523-0773942

I
HV SENSE
EFD-85/86( )
EHSI NO. 1 """
TAP HIGH ANODE (15 kV DC)
HIGH
PRI 2 VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
DRIVE H POWER FOCUS (2.5-4.5 kV DC)
REGULATOR
DPU- DRIVE L SUPPLY
85G/86G 15 V SHUT DOWN CIRCUIT
NΠ1 8 0,0 O
FROCMEFBREAKER 2
PWR MONITOR (+28 V DC) -

91 +26.5 V DC PWR RTN (HV) - V 10 k

CHASSIS GND L
SCREEN (+365 V DC)
¯

24 O H
¯
D OR
VIDEO PWR
94 +26.5 V DC PWR (HV) W
P2 SUPPLIES FILAMENTH
+5 V DC 0.1
P1 H H -------

L GREEN VIDEO 1 k
10 H
H _H
VIDEO
RED VIDEO
H H DIFFERENTIAL
112 d
L BLUE VIDEO +5 V DC 1 k LINE
116
RECEIVERS
1 k
_H
Z H
I GREEN INTENSITY 27
GRN INT/SHAD
H m A
i SHADOW (OPEN ON EADI)
-
L / G1 G2 G3 /
_ _ _ _

P1 1 k RED VIDEO
,D,
U)2) GREEN VIDEO
D :P-85E/G +12 Y DC VIDEO t-
YOKE CRT
D DO
NO. 1 r AMPLIFIERS BLUE VIDEO
SHIELD GND (X, RETRACE, Y) 22 k
0.1
+12 V DC
DIM DC
EIICI IrlTEFICITY"Of,TPOL
HEATER FILAMENT-
VIDEO GUNS

FROM +5 OR
INCLINOMETERLIGHTINGH
EFD-86( )-021 AND ABOVE ONLY
I HVSDF PHOSPHOR
PROTECTION
CONVERGENCE/PURITY MAGNETS

+28 V
INCLINOMETERLIGHTINGL
LIGHTINGBUS EFD-86( )-021 AND ABOVE ONLY U
DEF MON "I

TO AIRCRAFT [ )-021
HIGH TEMP WARN
9 Y YOKE RTN IST V L]N O 3.4
776
ANNUNCIATOR EFD-86( AND ABOVE ONLY -+15 V DC --++6 V DC I · 18.4 ill!
±15 V DC ±6 V DC DEFLECTION
PANEL
POWER POWER MONITOR XCURSENSE
--15 V DC --6 V DC

8 =G/86G +5 V DC 1-- --

40. 1 DIFF
1 k
P1 L
LINE
RCVR R
' ,p

+
L N '74,
64 2
H RETRACE RETRACE RETRACE X YOKE RTN
61 _H CIRCUITS BRe III CRs
X LNV1 I 055
1 k

1 H +25 V DC
102 +25 V DC PWR (DEFL) A
25 Y DC PWR (DEEL) E
1Qf -25
V DC
103
10 V DC
100 111 Y 00 PWR (CEFL) C f +11
1 H -11
V DC
107 -11
V DC PWR (DEFL) E
111 ±11 V DC PWR RTN C -- -

99 ±25 V DC PWR RTN D DEFLECEON

P2 POWER
L 10 k 15 pF AMPLIFIERS
P1 Y.. 10 k XDEFH
- h OFFSET, X YOKE SEND
L -
XDEFL
127 X DEFL GAIN, AND
H X DEFLECEON 470 H
128 H 10 k LINEARITY Y YOKE SEND
.

1 •
DIFFERENRAL CIRCUITS
15 pF BUFFER

I
10 k
AMPLIFIERS

L 10 k 15 pF

76 Î Y DEFL
Y DEFLECEON 470
65 ) H 10 k 4/
J1 15 pF
10 k
NOTE: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, RESISTANCE VALUESARE IN OHMS AND CAPACITANCE VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS.

I CGO-2570-02-AC-2

I EFD-85/86( ) Electronic Flight Display,

System Schematic Diagram
Figure 2-31 (Sheet 2)

Revised 30 August 1998 2-158

 installation 523-0773942

I
ai
CHP-85D
128 Y LI3IIEN3 U
ILIGHENG| 28 V

CHOOSE ONE -

+5 V LIGHENG -
\
T
I
SWITCH

| 28 V I
POWER
CONVERTER
5TO

ANADNNPANNCEIA
LOARMSPS
UGHENG GND -
V
DCP-85E/G CHASSIS GND -
S DCP-85E/G
NO. 1 NO. 2
J2 J2
J2
29 +5 V DC PWR NO. 1 r it ',' DC ,
CF ET P 15 " CT P'm fil. 2 -
29
30 SIGNAL GND NO. 1 -
R 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 R -
SIGNAL GND NO. 2 -
30

10
11

7
COURSE CONTROL NO. 1

NAV DATA NO. 1

EMER CONTROL NO. 1

-

-
I
G

X
S
CCR ND
AT
A ET ET A T
LS

S
-

-
COURSE CONTROL NO. 2

NAV DATA NO. 2

BMER CONTROL NO. 2

-
--
11

10

4049 CRS 2 4049

18 COURSE DIRECTON NO. 1 * A A - COURSE DIRECEON NO. 2 * - 18
DIRECTON/ DIRECTON/

14
I
K
26LS30
MOVEMENT
DETECTOR
ENCODER --- ----
ENCODER MOVEMENT
DETECTOR
26LS30
_HM
14
COURSE NO. 1 ** COURSE NO. 2 **

I PUSH PUSH I
CRS CRS --I--
DIRECT DIRECT
12 COURSE DIRECT NO. 1 I II II COURSE DIRECT NO. 2 - 12

19

16
HEADING DIRECEON NO. 1 * *

-
|
B

I
M
26LS30
4049
I

DIRECEON/
MOVEMENT
DETECTOR
-
OSCILLATOR

ENCODER ----------------------r--------·
HDG
OSCILLATOR

ENCODER
DIRECEON/
MOVEMENT
DETECTOR
4049

26LS30
B

M-
- HEADING DIRECEON NO. 2 * -

-H-
19

16
HEADING NO. 1 ** - HEADING NO. 2 **
17 * N , + 3 N i 17

13
-
HEADING SYNC NO. 1 ·
I I
PUSH
HDG
SYNC

J IIEADillO SYNC FIO. 2 13

I
¯

* CW ROTABON =
+5 V DC,CCW ROTABON = 0 V DC
** FIFTY-SIX 2.5 TO 5.0 V 100 µS PULSES FOR EACH 360 REVOLURON OF THE KNOB. CGO-2571-01-AC-1

I CHP-85D Course Heading Panel, System Schematic Diagram

Figure 2-32

Revised 30 August 1993 2-154

 installation 523-0773942

1+5 V LIGHTING -
I
J2
31
LIGHTING
SW
DCP-85E/G NO. 1
-

-
J1
22
5
21
-

-
ANNUN
ANNUN
ANNUN
1
2
3
FROM A/C PWR +28 V LIGHTING -

32 ( TO PANEL LIGHTS ) - 4 -
ANNUN 4
UGHTING GND -
33 --
- 18 -
ANNUN 5
RE12ULATDOCR-
Y DC 28 V +15 V DC - 7 -
A 6
+28

|
-a
TO +5 V DC
CONVERTER +12 Y DC
- 38 -
ANNUN 10
27 k - 8 -
ANNUN 11 ANALOG
PARALLEL TO 10'.",• k - 35 ANNUN 12 FCS
'
-

+15 v DC
BUFFERS
SERIAL CONVERTER | | - 42 -
ANNUN 13 NO. 1
(SHIFT REGISTERS) M 24 24 - 24 -
ANNUN 14
(CATEGORY II INPUT) -
43 -- 20 k47.5
k - 6 N
ADS J1
¯

l | /2 R¯gg - 37 -
ANNUN 17
44 j 44 ANNUN 18
PRE-80( ) 16 ALT ALERT INPUT - --

43
-

-
ANNUN 19
SHEET 2 20 -
ANNUN 20
DCP NO. 2 39 --
N
CHNP-816B CO DRC
L R
-L. TEST
J1 41 -
ANNUN 24 M
X NAV DATA i 7 ->
+5 V DC 2
SPARE • 8 ->

SPARE . 9 ¯*

10 k
F TIMER CONTROL 10 -"

10 k
EFD-85/86( )
G COURSE CONTROL . 11 - 9... EADI NO. 1
H 12 /7 7 P1
COURSE DIRECT i ->

SNEDSR CCTION
+5 V DC --
EADI INTENSITY H
A O
B HEADRINGNDIRECTION 119
1200
-- ---- ----
35 --
TE TY WIPER

L COURSE IN L 15 e - CONTROL
M NG NH /4 2 VIA

1200
EFD-85/86( )

I
EHSi NO. 1
DPU-85G/86G +5 V DC P1
NO. 1
R422 ' EHSI INTENSITY H
38 -

1200
28 DPU DATA IN H 1 g DIM 39 -
EHSI INTENSITY WIPER
DSEUMPU
' ,-'
40 -
EHSI INTENSITY L
32 DPU DATA IN L • 2
1200

MPU-85G|86G
P2

MPU DATA IN H

MPU DATA IN L
i

I
I
4

5
+5 V DC

1200
RS-422
RCVR

+15 DC
RS-422
XMTR

21
22
-

-
DCP DATA TO DPU H
DCP DATA TO DPU L
DPU-85G/86G(
NO. 1
P1
)

(DRIVE TRANSFER)
I 1200
20 k
47.5 k
RS-422
XMTR
MPU-85G/86G(
P2
)
24 -
DCP DATA TO MPU H 34
25 -
DCP DATA TO MPU L 38

PLDANDA
STRAP 1 CRS SEL ENBL VOR 1 ->

PARALLEL TO
'
.

PARALLEL TO E
STRAP 2 CRS SEL ENBL VOR 2 49 ->

SERIAL CONVERTER
SERIAL CONVERTER COMPUTER
STRAP 3 RESERVED I 29 ->

(SHIFT REGISTERS) (SHIFT REGISTERS) ----?

STRAP 4 RESERVED i 30 --

STRAP 5 CRS SEL ENBL LRN 1 17

STRAP 6 CRS SEL ENBL LRN 2 16 -> '
PWR SPLY UP/DOWN
28 - +28 V DC PRI PWR
STRAP 7 BRG PNTR ENBL VOR 1 32 ->
-28
V DC +--- POWER FROM NO. 1
27 - +28 Y DC PRI PWR RTN
STRAP 8 BRG PNTR ENBL VOR 2 33 ->

, +15 V DC - SUPPLY -L A/C POWER

STRAP 9 BRG PNTR ENBL ADF 1 10 --

+5 V DC < = 26 - CHASSIS GND

6
STRAP 10 BRG PNTR ENBL ADF 2 11 ->

STRAP 11 BRG PNTR ENBL LRN 1 13 -->

STRAP 12 BRG PNTR ENBL LRN 2 14 -,

¯¯ ¯¯

CHP-86B
26 SO NO. 1
* STRAP 13 CRS SEL ENBL MLS 1 --
ROTARY
* STRAP 14 CRS SEL ENBL MLS 2 27 -"
SWITCHES J1
SWITCHES
* STRAP 15 CAT II, EXC DEV LIM SEL 46 --

45
i 29 -
+5 V DC
STRAP 16 RESERVED (DIAGNOSTIC TEST) -- -,

- -
+5 V DC RTN
J1

* STRAPS 13, 14, AND 15 RESERVED ON DCP-85E

CGO-2573-02-AC-1

DCP-85E/G Display Control Panel,

IRevised 30 August 1993

System Schematic Diagram
Figure 2-84 (Sheet 1 of 2)

2-157
 installation 523-0773942

+5 V LIGHENG -
I
J2
31
LIGHENG
SW
DCP-85E/G NO. 2

-
J1
22
5
21
-

-
ANNUN
ANNUN
ANNUN
1
2
3
FROM A/C PWR +28 V LIGHENG -
32 ( TO PANEL LIGHTS ) - 4
18
--
ANNUN 4
5
LIGHENG GND -
33 ---- - -
ANNUN
RE1 DOCR 7 N 6
28 V
- +15 V DC -

+28 V DC
--a
TO +5 V DC - 23 -
ANNUN 8
CONVERTER +12 V DC - 36 -
ANNUN 9
38 -
ANNUN 10
27 k - 8 -
ANNUN 11 ANALOG
PARALLEL To 10 k - 35 -
ANNUN 12 FCS
+15 V DC 42 ANNUN 13
SERIAL CONVERTER | | BUFFERS - -

NO. 2
(SHIFT REGISTERS) 24 24 - 24 -
ANNUN 14
(CATEGORY ll INPUT) -
43 -

20 k 3 -
ANNUN 15
47.5 k 6 ANNUN 16
I
-

37 -
ANNUN 17
2 44 -
ANNUN 18
PRE-80( ) - ALT ALERT INPUT -
44 -

43 -
ANNUN 19
(SHEET 1) - 20 --
ANNUN 20
- 39 -
ANNUN 21
- 40 --
ANNUN 22
CHP-86B + 2 COON DRC 19 23
- -
ANNUN
L R
NO. 2 _¡_ TEST
J1 41 -
ANNUN 24 a
X NAV DATA i 7 -->
+5 V DC 2
SPARE I 8 -->

SPMAERRE 190 ¯¯*

10 k EFED-85N/86(2
F CONEOL 10 k
G COURSE CONTROL i 11 We
12
/7 P1
H COURSE DIRECT i --
7 J2
J HEADING SYNC i 13 ->

+5 V DC 34 -
EADI INTENSITY H
A COURSE DIRECTlON 18 ->

B HEADING DIRECTlON i 19 -
35 -
EADI INTENSITY WIPER
1200
K COURSE IN H I 14 - 36 -
EADI INTENSITY L
L COURSE IN L I 15 -

, CONTROL
M HEADING IN H I 16 --
/4 2 VIA
N HEADING IN L : 17 -

1200
EFD-85/86( )

I
EHSI NO. 2
DPU-85G|86G P1
+5 V DC -
|'
NO. 2 RS-422 | 38 --
EHSI INTENSITY H
P1 1200 RCVR
1 DIM | 39 -
EHSI INTENSITY WIPER
DPU DATA IN H I

DPU/MPU I,,,- 40 -
EHSI INTENSITY L
DPU DATA IN L I 2 SELECT '
1200

MPU- G|86G

MMPUU INNH
DDAATAA II
I
5
+5 V DC

1200
RS-422
R

+15 DC
RS-422

P U
DPU-85G2/86G

LH

(DRIVE TRANSFER)
I
U.
1200
20 k
47.5 k
- RS-422
XMTR
MPU-85G|86G
P2
-- J2 24 --DCP DATA TO MPU H 35
25 DCP DATA TO MPU L
-
39

J1 SERIAL GND - - - *

STRAP 1 CRS SEL ENBL VOR 1 50 --

PARALLEL TO STRAP DATA PARALLEL TO

STRAP 2 CRS SEL ENBL VOR 2 i 49 -"

SERIAL CONVERTER SERIAL CONVERTER COMPUTER

STRAP 3 RESERVED · 29 ->

(SHIFT REGISTERS)
s' (SHIFT REGISTERS)
STRAP 4 RESERVED i 30 --

STRAP 5 CRS SEL ENBL LRN 1 17 ->

PWR SPLY UP DOWN

STRAP 6 CRS SEL ENBL LRN 2 I 16 -- 28 --
+28 V DC PRI PWR
STRAP 7 BRG PNTR ENBL VOR 1 32 V DC ----- POWER FROM NO. 1
-- -28

27 «-
+28 V DC PRI PWR RTN
STRAP 8 BRG PNTR ENBL VOR 2 33 ->

,
+15 V DC --- SUPPLY _|_
A/C POWER
STRAP 9 BRG PNTR ENBL ADE 1 10 -- +5 V DC < - = 26 --
CHASSIS GND
6
STRAP 10 BRG PNTR ENBL ADF 2 11 ->

STRAP 11 BRG PNTR ENBL LRN 1 13 ->

__,_ __
____
CHP-86B
STRAP 12 BRG PNTR ENBL LRN 2 14 -"
PUSH-
ROTARY NO. 2
* STRAP 13 CRS SEL ENBL MLS 1 . 26 ->

BUTTON
SWITCHES J1
* STRAP 14 CRS SEL ENBL MLS 2 27 ¯¯*

SWITCHES
* STRAP 15 CAT II, EXC DEV LIM SEL 46 ->

I 29 --
+5 V DC
STRAP 16 RESERVED (DIAGNOSTlC TEST)-- 45 --

30 --+5
V DC RTN
J1 J2
* STRAPS 13, 14, AND 15 RESERVED ON DCP-85E
CGO-2573-02-AC-2

I DCP-85E/G Display Control Panel, System Schematic Diagram

Figure 2-34 (Sheet 2)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-158

 installation 523-0773942
DSP-85A NO. 1
ANNUN 1 -
10 -

ANNUN 2 -
22 -

ANNUN 3 -
23 - DISCRETE SWITCH INFORMATION
ANNUN 4 -
11 -

ANNUN 5 -
24 -

+15 V DC C KCNAOL
+12 V DC
HDG SYNC CRS DIRECT
ANNUN 9 -
16
ENCODER
ANNUN 10 -
15 27 k PARALLEL
ANALOG ANNUN 11 -
14
''
10 k +12 V
TO SERIAL
FCS ANNUN 12 -
17 BUFFERS
REGULATOR
CONVERERS
NO. 1 ANNUN 13 -
18 24 24 (SHIFT
ANNUN 14 -
19 -
REGISERS)
HDG KNOB
ANNUN 15 -
20
OPTICAL FORMAT SEL CRS SEL
ANNUN 16 -
21
+5 V ENCODER
ANNUN 17 -
9
ANNUN 18 -
8
POARSAELR
ALL
ANNUN 19 -
7
+5 V TO
N -
5
CONVERERS MULEPLEXER +12 V LEVEL
REGISS SHIFER
ANNUN 22 -
3 OPECAL
RS) -
DH SET RNG
ANNUN 23 --
2 DECODER 's
--
ANNUNKE24
-
6
P1
ANNUN TEST +15 V DC
-I-
O C
15 k PUSHBUTTON
BRG
P2 47.5 k SWITCHES
DRIVE TRANSFER 42 I
+5 V DC
DPU-85G/86G +12V TO
1200 RS-422
NO.1 +5 VLEVEL
H RCVR CONVERTER

--
DPU TO DSP DATA -
150 RS-422 DPU-85G/86G

+5 V DC
+5 V DC 1200
-
DSP TO DPU DATA -

MPU-85G/86G 1200 RS-422 ,

H RCVR MPU/DPU
4 COMPUTER MPU-85G/86G
-
SELECT
--
MPU TO DSP DATA -
150

-
DSP TO MPU DATA -

I =
1200

+5 V DC

10 k
SERIAL GND
STRAP DATA
POWER SUPPLY
UP/DOWN

SUO Ry
10s" , 3 -
+28 V DC PRI POWER NO. 1
D 1/ GS r RALL
6 6 TO SERIAL +5 V DC
STRAP 5 LNV2 2ND CRS INHIBIT 8 J -
+28 V DC PRI POWER RETURN
CONVERTERS
STRAP 6 RESERVED 10 &

+15 V DC

I
- REGISTERS) , 3 ---
CHASSIS GND

20 k
47.5 k
D CAT II REQUEST 9
33.2 k , 3 -
STRAP GROUND
i 3 ----
STRAP GROUND
+5 V DC .7 y -_- : 1 -
STRAP GROUND
- PARALLEL i 3 -
STRAP GROUND
ET 10 k TO SERIAL : 9 ----
STRAP GROUND
--L 10 k CONVERTERS ,
a 3 -
STRAP GROUND
C ELAPSED EME 43 w. 9 (SHIFT -1 -
STRAP GROUND
REGISTERS)
0.01
(NOT USED)
45 ...

MS
PRE-80( ) 16
di
ALETUDE ALERT -
I
44
P2
+15 V DC

20 k
47.5 '' y
33.2 k
PANEL
LIGHTING
I LIGHENG
CONVERSION --
1
2
3
f2
-

--

-
RESERVED
+28 V DC LIGHENG
LIGHTINGRETURN

CGO-2574-02-AC-1

DSP NO. 2
(SHEET 2) yy -

DSP-85A Display Select Panel, System Schematic Diagram

NOTE: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, RESISTANCE VALUES ARE IN OHMS AND CAPACITANCE VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS.
Figure 2-85 (Sheet 1 of 2)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-159

 installation 523-0773942

DSP-85A NO. 2
ANNUN 1 -
10 -

ANNUN 2 -
22 -

ANNUN 3 -
23 - DISCRETE SWITCH INFORMATION
ANNUN 4 -
11 -

ANNUN 5 -
24 -

ANNUN 6 -
12 -

ANNUN 7 -
25
+15 V DC -
CRS KNOB
N 8 -
+12 V DC
EONCOCDAELR HDG SYNC CRS DIRECT
ANNUN 10 -
15 27 k PARALLEL
ANALOG ANNUN 11 -
14 10 k TO SERIAL
+12 V
FCS ANNUN 12 -
17 ·
, BUFFERS
REGULATOR
CONVERTERS
NO. 1 ANNUN 13 -
18 24 24 (SHIFT
A - -
REGISTERS5
H GCOKCDNA
FORMAT SEL CRS SEL
V

PARALLEL
N
TO SERIAL +5 V TO
ANNUN 20 -
5
CO VEHRTERS MULRPLEXER +1SH ELERVEL
ANNUN 21 -
4
ANNUN 22 -
3 OPRCAL M
REGISTERS) -- - --
DH SET RNG
ANNUN 23 -
2 DECODER ,

ANNUNKE24 -

6
P1
ANNUN TEST +15 V DC
-I-
O C
i 15 k PUSHBUTTON
BRG
P2 47.5 k SWITCHES
DRIVE BANSFER 42 ',',•

+5VOC
DPU-85G/86G +12 V TO
1200 RS-422
NO. 2 +5 V LEVEL
H-- RCVR CONVERTER
1
-+
DPU TO DSP DATA -
150 RS-422 DPU-85G2/86G
L
+5 V DC
+5 V DC 1200
- -
DSP TO DPU DATA -

MPU-85G/86G 1200 RS-422 -

H RCVR MPU/DPU
COMPUTER MPU-85G/86G
-
SELECT
-+
MPU TO DSP DATA -
150

-
DSP TO MPU DATA -

I
1200

SERIAL GND POWER SUPPLY

+5 V DC
SNAP DATA UP DOWN
SEAP 1 VOR 1/2 CRS SEL 11 -

SNAP 2 LNV 1/2 BRG SEL 12 - 10 k -- .

POWER
10 k +15 V DC 3 -
+28 V DC PRI POWER NO. 2
SNAP 3 ADF 1/2 BRG SEL 13 - SUPPLY
,
Wu PARALLEL -28
V DC
SEAP 4 LNV 1/2 CRS SEL 7
6 COONSERRIARL +5 V DC
SEAP 5 LNV2 2ND CRS INHIBIT 8 3 -
+28 V DC PRI POWER RETURN
SEAP 6 RESERVED 10
(SHIFT
+15 V DC

I
- REGISTERS) 3 -
CHASSIS GND

CAT II REQUEST 9

33.2 k 3 -
SEAP GROUND
3 ---
STRAP GROUND
+5 V DC 4.7 V - 7 -
STRAP GROUND
PARALLEL 3 -
STRAP GROUND
ET 10 k TO SERIAL 9 -
STRAP GROUND
-L 10 k CONVERTERS 3 -
STRAP GROUND
C ELAPSED RME 43 W. (SHIFT 1 ---
STRAP GROUND
REGISTERS)
0.01
(NOT USED)
45

SHEET 1 -
ALTITUDEALERT -
|
44
P2
+15 V DC

20 k
47.5 k
,' '.

33.2 k
PANEL
LIGHRNG
E CON R ON -
1
2
3
E2
-

-
RESERVED
+28 V DC LIGHRNG
LIGHRNG RETURN

4.7 V -.-

NOTE: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, RESISTANCE VALUES ARE IN OHMS AND CAPACITANCE VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS.
CGO-2574-02-AC-2

I DSP-85A Display Select Panel, System Schematic Diagram

Figure 2-35 (Sheet 2)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-180

 installation 523-0773942
J1
MPU-85G|86G P/O ANALOG\/0 CARD A7
10 k
-FD 1 IN-VIEW BIAS 137 'u'.'.
-RADIO RADIO
122 ALT 1 TEST ,

ALT1METER

II
27 k
- -

141 -
CAT II COMPARATOR (LEFT) NO. 1
J1
-15
Y DC J2
10 k 13650 -
lARAMBAESR
LEFW
- COMMANDBARS OFF 1 138 LATCH
RN 1 NEL
'

I
27 k 142 -
CAT ll GREEN (LEFT) ANNUNCIATORS
LATCH 9 146 -
HDG COMPARATOR 1
ADDR BUS 9 145 -
ATT COMPARATOR 1
-15
V DC
ANALOG 10 k 158 -
DECISION HEIGHT 1
FD 1 VALID 143 ·,
7 k 3 k J2
NFCS1 - =

27 k 0. 7 131 -
LOC TUNE 1 i

M ANALOG I/O
-15
V DC
+DN - 1 147 k W PROCESSOR
PITCH CMD 1
+UP - 2 100, k
+28 V DC
LATCH
100, k
~

10 k
30 -
NAV 1 VALID I
+LT
12598 -
LIN D2EVIMARON a
ROLL CMD 1 0.027 147 k 2 10 k
38 LATCH
' +RT 8
/ 144 -
FCS 1 CLEAR (PULSE) i
o.1 m any 8
VOR/LOC2 MODE (LEFT)
121 -
i

115 -
VOR/LOC1 MODE (LEFT)
to 127 -
BACK COURSE 1 MODE ·
37.4 k
A/D
100 k CONVERTER
5
RADIO ALETUDE 1 100 k

0.1 37.4 500

PROM LATCH 6 - TO/FROM 1
H 51
10 k
RADIO ALT 1 VALID 124

I
27 k

-15
Y DC
562 H H
69
MULEPLEXER - LATERAL DEv 1 ANALOG
84 73
ATT 1 PITCH 88 DC 51.1 FCS
92 RESOLVER V NO. 1

Y Y -4
D/A D/A
-V CONVERTER MULTlPLEXER
ATT 1 ROLL I DC 10
81 RESOLVER
10k
A O - FCS 1 26 V AC REF
10 y
NO. 1 d i
H H k 10M 22k H
45 9 -

ATT 1 26 V AC REF 27 k
10 k

I
4.7 k 4.7 k
16.2 k
BUFUFSER
1 k
ATTTUDE 1 VALID I 117 LATCH
H H
27 k 4. - HEADING 1 ERROR

-15
V DC
TO I/O CARDS
AS, A9, A10 8060 16.9 k
-
104 AND TREND
-
- HEADING 1 96 DC +15 V DC
VECTOR CARD All
100 RESOLVER 15.8 k 2.7 k

II -H _H- 60
k
10 M
470

- HDG 1 26 V AC REF TO S IEDET2 1

_C- k
H A 56 H H
SHEET 3 COURSE DATUM 1 ERRROR
NO. 1 -
4.7 k 4.7 k
15 J1

10 k
HEADING 1 VALID 118 W.
2.7 k
10 k CGO-2579-13-AC-1
DG 1 MODE 135 W.
V Dc
J1 MPU-85G/86G Multifunction Processor Unit,
-15

27 k 27 k
System Schematic Diagram
-15
V DC -15
V Dc Figure 2-87 (Sheet 1 of 13)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-163

 MPU-85G|86G P/O ANALOGI/O CARD A7 installation 523-0773942
12.4 k ADF DC RCVR
BUFFER
J1 19.6 k
ADF 1 COM/Y 22 100 k
19.6 k 0.1
ADF 1 COS/Z 18
TO DC RESOLVER
12.4 k
MULTIPLEXER -

EVERER
0.1 kk 1
6
k
BUF
k
ADF 1 SIN/X 14 ' .6

12.4 k 0.1
39.2 k 10 k ADF AC RCVR
SNAP 15 10 k
(ADF TYPE) 8660
ANN

19.6 k BUFFER

.k

10 k 0.1
0.1
8660 ¯¯

8660

26 V AC REF- SQUARER CEL

8660

10 k
i ADF 1 VALID 133 Wu

27 k

-15
V DC

69.8 k
1
100 k BUFFER
VOR 1 COM i 80
1
(i 100 k
I
VOR 1 COS I 76 --- -

0.1
10 pF SNAP 1L APS TYPE SEL

|
69.8 k
-

69.8 k -
-
SEAP 2L APS TYPE SEL
-
SNAP 3L APS TYPE SEL
1 1i SNAP 4L NAV DATA REF
100 k BUFFER
-

t3 -
SNAP 5L LNV PORT ANN
1 i 7 SNAP 6L LNV PORT ANN
100 k
-

VOR 1 SIN 72 ". . L1 -

SNAP 7L RAD ALT TYPE SEL
0.1
t3 -
SNAP 8L RAD ALT TYPE SEL

I
69.8 k (3 -
SEAP 9L X-SIDE DATA FLAG
, 3 -
SNAP 10L VOR PORT TYPE SEL
r 1 -
SNAP 12L COMPAR RESET/INHIB
-
CEL
f3 -
SNAP 13L SPD DEV TYPE SEL
10 M
----

E9 -
SNAP 14L ATT/HDG TYPE SEL
f3 -
SNAP 15L ADF TYPE SEL
27 k - E7 -
SEAP 16L LNV SYNCHRO
H H 19 2
41 - -
SNAP 17L HDG MAG/TRUE
- VOR 1 26 V 27 k - 1 6 -
SNAP 18L VNAV ENABLE
C -C
AC REF 42 W. - 1 0 -
SNAP 19L REV DISPLAY
ANALOG TO SHEET 1 - 1 4 -
SNAP 20L COMMAND BARS
VOR 4.7 k 4.7 k +28 V DC - 118 -
SNAP 21L LINEAR DEV
NO. 1 - 112 -
SNAP 22L MASTER WARN RESET
10 k - 116 -
SNAP 23L SPD DEV TYPE SEL
- 1 10 SNAP 24L VOR PORT TYPE SEL
10 k '
-

VOR/LOC 1 VAUD - 119

LATCH - 14 -
SNAP 25L ATT SOURCE
34 5 SNAP 26L HDG SOURCE

I
-
27 k
-

.k
- 1 -
SNAP 27L AIR DATA ENABLE
+15 V DC
1 -
SNAP 28L DCP/DSP SOURCE
-15
V DC
3.6 k _ _
- 15 -
SNAP 29L RISING RUNWAY

OUTER MARKER 1 - 13 18 k LATCH - 1 4 -

SNAP 30L HDG SEL
MIDDLEMARKER 1 - 17 - 105 -
SNAP 31L LNV DATA
INNER MARKER 1 21 - 1 )9 -
DRIVE BANSFER
0.68 1M 0.33 - 115 -
EADI COMPOSITE/EHSi OFF

I
- 1 19 --
EADI OFF/EHSI COMPOSITE
2.2 k 1 k
112 -
DME 1 HOLD
a- al DME
+28 V DC 10 k NO. 1
LATCH ''' .2

:1
--
DME 1 VALID :

10 k . 2
27 k
NAV 1 TEST 108 1 k
LATCH
ILS 1 MODE 101 -
j /2
2 -15
V DC
J1

CGO-2579-13-AC-2

I Revised 30 August 1993

MPU-85G/86G Multdanction Processor Unit,
System Schematic Diagram
Figure 2-37 (Sheet 2)
2-164
 installation 523-0773942
I
J1
48 --.
MPU--85G/86G
LNV 1 DESIRED TRACK --J P/O ANALOGI/O CARD A7
1. RES VER

i I
27 - -->

l
LNV 1 BEARING 23 - DC -
p
TO WAYPOINT 31 - RESOLVER
TO A/D

-Ho
I
39
27 k
10 M
CONVERTER
(SHEET 1)

LNV 1 26 Y AC REF 27 k
_C- 43
0.0068

II
4.7 k 4.7 k
ANALOG .L
LNV V 301 k
NO. 1
L 18.2 k
'
+LT (L) - 154
LNV 1 CROSS --e
1060
18.2 k .
MULTIPLEXER
TRACK DEV
+RT (H) - 150 •

0.0068

II
301 k
L

10 M
10 k
+FR - 153
LNV 1 TO/FROM 220
10 k ..

+TO --•
149

10 k
LNV 1 VAUD I 157 VA
0.0068

I
27 k

-15
V DC 301 k

L 18.2 k
--
+DN (L) - 3 Y.

GLIDESLOPE 1060
H 1 DEV 18.2 k .¡.

+UP (H) - 4
O
0.0068 301 k

ANALOG 301 k
VOR
NO. 1 L 16.2 k
+LT (L) - 34 W.
---
LOCAUZER 1060
H 1 DEV 18.2 k
+RT (H) - 33 ', .'

0.0068 TO

II
301 k
SHEET 1

10 k
GUDESLOPE 1 VALID 113

LATCH
1 k
FAST/SLOW 1 VALID 114 W
J1 -27

k 27 k 0.068

AOA -15
Y DC -15
Y DC
OR 23.2 k
ADS 1029
NO. 1 +FAST _La 2 k
FAST/SLOW 1
+SLOW
' 26.1 k
en
_H- 144
J2
0.068 23.2 k

k15 20DC5k+15 V20DC5

100 k MACNCHESTER
k
J1 20.5
H

AIR DATA 1 SHIFT is

-Le 20.5 k REGISTER :*

(MANCHESTER) _L MPU-85G/86G Mult¢«nction Processor Unit,
NO. 1 3240 -5110
System ScleernaticDiagram
Figure 2-37 (Sheet 3)
10 k
i ADC 1 VAUD 120 Wu

27 k

I -15
Y DC CGO-2579--13-AC-3
Revised 30 August 1993 2-165
 installation 523-0773942

DCPN-851E/G
MPU-85G|86G
""¯
P/O DIGITALI/O CARD AS
SUTO DCP 1-

DCP-85E/G TO DISPLAY PROCESSOR

TO I/O CARDS A7,
NO. 1 A9, A10 AND TREND CARD A4 AND DIGITAL
RS-422
J2 VECTOR CARD All I/O CARD ATO
- 34 RS-422/CSDB RECEIVER
DCP
DCP 1 TO MPU BUS ACIA
-L
38 +5 Y DC

BUS 4.7 k
BUFFER HIGH SPEED 26LS33
INPUT/OUTPUT A
-422

PORT
H H
WX DATA 4.7 k
MULEPORT
WEATHER Rs-422 WXP L MULEPLEXER RAM
RADAR H H RCVR RECEIVER I/O PORT ' 256 X 16
WX CLOCK
-L _Le 145 CSDB
J2 XMTR

I
115
JOCYS CK DATA -

LNV
ACIA
SERIAL
DIGITAL
CSDB I/O
1J1 RCVR PROCESSOR
DIGITAL -
2 DPU-85G|86G
FCS FCS CSDB NO. 1
FCS 1 CSDB XMTR
(CSDB) ACIA
--
19
NO. 1
MPU TO DPU 1 - B
FCC DATA CSDB
J1

DIFF LINE
DRIVERS
RAM 26LS31
H
X-SIDE DATA 1

H
CLOCK 1
TSIDEL
VNAV 1 CSDB EPROM
12
LH
11 _SIDEL SYNC 1 1

X-SIDE DIFF LINE DPU-85G|86G

XMTR DRIVERS NO. 2
2
H
X-SIDE DATA 2
CSDB

AA EPROM H
AHRS 1 CSDB
TSIDE CLOCK 2
L

H
06
TSIDE SYNC 2
SHE 5 L

CGO-2579-13-AC-4

MPU-85G/86G Multifunction

I
Processor Unit,
System Schematic Diagram
Figure 2-37 (Sheet 4)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-166

 installation 523-0773942

ADF 2 COM/Y
I
J3
22
19.6 k

6 k
12.4 k
MPU-85G|86G
ADF DC RCVR

100 k
P/O ANALOGI/O CARD A9

0.1
BUFFER

ADF 2 COS/Z 18
TO

I I
12.4 k
12.4 k MULTIPLEXER ->

NVERTER
0.1 (SHEET 1)

k
k
ADF 2 SIN/X 14

12.4 k ADF AC RCVR

39.2 k 10 k STRAP 15
(ADF TYPE)
AN G

10 k 0.1

20 k 0.1

6660

10 k
ADF 2 VALID 133 \½

27 k

-15
V DC

69.8 k
1
k BUF
VOR 2 COM i 80
1 C
100 k
VOR 2 COS I 76 ---- -

0.1 e à
10 pF STRAP 1R APS TYPE SEL

\
-
69.8
-

k
69.8 k - -; -
STRAP 2R APS TYPE SEL
- 12 -
STRAP 3R APS TYPE SEL
1 - 13 STRAP 4R NAV DATA REF
BUFFER
-

100 k
'M - t3 -
STRAP 5R LNV PORT ANN
1 - 63 -
STRAP 6R LNV PORT ANN
100 k
VOR 2 SIN 72 -
",' | - E4 -
STRAP 7R RAD ALT TYPE SEL
0.1 - 68 -
STRAP 8R RAD ALT TYPE SEL

I
69.8 k 22 STRAP 9R X-SIDE DATA FLAG
| - -

6 -
STRAP 10R VOR PORT TYPE SEL
- E2 -
STRAP 12R COMPAR RESET/INHIB
-|
CTRL
i - E8 -
STRAP 13R SPD DEV TYPE SEL
10 M
----
- E2 -
STRAP 14R ATT/HDG TYPE SEL
E6 -
STRAP 15R ADF TYPE SEL
27 k - 1*10 -
STRAP 16R LNV SYNCHRO
-H__ _H-> 41 - 103 -
STRAP 17R HDG MAG/TRUE
VOR 2 26 V 27 k - 107 --
STRAP 18R VNAV ENABLE
C
AC REF -
C
42 ' - 1 1 -
STRAP 19R REV DISPLAY
ANALOG TO SHEETS - 1 5 -
STRAP 20R COMMANDBARS
VOR 4 7 k 4·7 k 6 AND 8 +28 V DC - 1 9 -
STRAP 21R LINEAR DEV
NO. 2 - 1 2 -
STRAP 22R MASTER WARN RESET
10 k - 127 -
STRAP 23R SPD DEV TYPE SEL
1 k - 1 1 -
STRAP 24R VOR PORT TYPE SEL
VOR/LOC 2 VALID - 119 10 k
LATCH
34

I
27 k 23

18 k - E3 -
STRAP 25R ATT SOURCE
+15 V DCM. - E2 -
STRAP 26R HDG SOURCE
-15
V DC
3.6 k _ _ _
- 27 -
STRAP 27R AIR DATA ENABLE
- 19 -
STRAP 28R DCP/DSP SOURCE
- --«
- 28 -
STRAP 29R RISING RUNWAY
OUTER MARKER 2 - 13 -"

18 k
-a
LATCH - 1-=4 -
STRAP 30R HDG SEL
MIDDLEMARKER 2 - 17 -->
. .
| | --e
- 105 -
STRAP 31R LNV DATA
y
INNER MARKER 2 21 --- -'
- 109 -
DRIVE TRANSFER
0.68 1M 0.33 - 1 5 -
EADI COMPOSITE/EHSI OFF

I
- 1 9 -
EADI OFF/EHSI COMPOSITE
2.2 k 1 k - 1 2 -
DME 2 HOLD
a- 23 DME
+28 V DC 1g k s2 NO. 2
LATCH 44 -
DME 2 VALID
10 k
27 k
22
MPU-85G/86G Mult¢«nction Processor Unit,
V22M DSE 1100 10 k
/
LATCH System Schematic Diagram
J3
2 2 -15
V Dc Figure 2-87 (Sheet 7)
CGO-2579-13-AC-7

Revised 30 August 1998 2-169

 I installation 523-0773942
MPU-85G|86G
LNV 2 DESIRED TRACK- 47 DC
RESOLVER
-

P/O ANALOGI/O CARD A9

52

I I
27 1
LNV 2 BEARING 23 DC
TO WAYPOINT 31 RESOLVER
TO A/D

-Ho
I
39 'k
10 M
CONVERTER
(SHEET 6)
LNV 2 26 V AC REF
_C- 43 'k
0.0066

I I
4.7 k 4.7 k
ANALOG
LNV V 301 k
NO. 2
L 18.2 k
+LT (L) - 154
LNV 2 CROSS - 1060 •

H TRACK DEV 18.2 k MULTlPLEXER

+RT (H) - 150

I I
0.0068 301 k

10 M
10 k
+FR - 153
LNV 2 TO/FROM- 220
10 k
+TO - 149 w.
10 k
LNV 2 VAUD i 157 Wu
0. 068

I
27 k

-15
Y DC 301 k

-L 18.2 k
+DN (L) - 3
GUDESLOPE 1060
H 2 DEV 18.2 k .¡.

+UP (H) - 4 i
-I- 0.0068

I
0.0068

I
301 k

ANALOG 301 k
VOR
NO. 2 _L 18.2 k
+LT (L) - 34
LOCAUZER 1060
H 2 DEV 18.2 k ..

+RT (H) - 33 •••

TO SHEETS

I I
0.0068 301 k
6 AND 7

10 k
GUDESLOPE 2 VAUD 113 WO

LATCH

k
I FAST/SLOW 2 VALID I 114 We

27 k 27 k 0.068
AOA
OR -15
V DC -15
V DC
ADS 23.2 k
NO. 2 102 2(i k
+FAST _La
FAST/SLOW 2
+SLOW
' _H- 26 k
144
0.068 23.2 k

k15 20DCS +15 20DCS

100 k MACNCHESTER
k k
J3 20.5
H
93 '
SHIFT 4
ANDCAHEAS
20.5 k REGISTER
R)
ADS MPU-85G/86G Multifunction Processor Unit,
NO. 2 3240 511o
System Schematic Diagram
10 k
- -

Fiore 2-3 (Sheet 8)

ADC 2 VAUD . 120 we
J3
27 k

-15
V DC CGO-2579-13-AC-8

Revised 30 August 1993 2-170

 installation 523-0773942

I
MPU-85G|86G
P/O DIGITAL\/0 CARD A10 DCP-85E/G
RS-422 NO. 2
XMTR
DCP-85E/G H
NO. 2 MPU TO DCP 2 -
RS-422 BUS L
RCVR
ADCCPA
DCP 2 TO MPU BUS TO I/O CARDS A7,
L
39 AS, A9 AND TREND
VECTOR CARD A11

H
WX DATA I
_Le
H
I
133

137
RS-422
RCVR
BUS
BUFFER
WEATHER s 422 wxP
RADAR H H RCVR RECEIVER
141 CSDB
WX CLOCK XMTR
-L _Le 1425
2OYS CK DATA -
1

LNV
ACIA
SERIAL
DIGITAL
CSDB I/O
d3 RCVR PROCESSOR
DIGITAL -
A -
A
15 DPU-85G/86G
FCS Fcs . a.
- FCS 2 CSDB i
CSDB NO. 2
(CSDB) B ACIA
- - 19 XMTR
NO. 2

I
MPU TO DPU 2 -
FCC DATA CSDB

RAM

CSDB

DIGITAL - -
8 ---

VNAV
VNAV - VNAV 2 CSDB
ACIA
EPROM
NO. 2 - -
12
TO DISPLAY PROCESSOR
CARD A4 AND DIGITAL
I/O CARD AB

CSDB
RcvR
DIGITAL - -
7
SA
NAHS - AHRS 2 CSDB EPROM
-
11
HIGH PEED
J3
INPUT/OUTPUT
'

I
PORT

FC
MFD-85( ) SHEE3 10
J1 02 RCVR
H H
55 - 112
MFD
- MFD DATA TO MPU
36
L -
L
116 i
' RAM
256 X 16
H H RCVR
53 - 120
MFD
- MFD CLOCK TO MPU
L L RCVR s'
54 - 124

H _H- RCVR
51 1 8
- MFD SYNC TO MPU
L _La
44 132
J2

CGO-2579-13-AC-9

I
MPU-85G/86G Multfunction Processor Unit,
System Schematic Diagram
Figure 2-37 (Sheet 9)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-171

 installation 523-0773942

I
MPU-85G|86G
P/O DIGITALI/O CARD A10

+5 V DC
LNV 2 DATA
(6-WRE) 28 680 k
12 k
12 k
LNV 32
(ARINC 561) 2RECLOCK 12 k /3 RECEIVER
6'

H H 12 k
40 -

LNV 2 SYNC -

(6-NRE) - 44 -

J3

-H _H-
|
20 V DC
+5
DME 2 DATA
-L (6-WRE) -Le 680 k
24
12 k
12 k
, DME
DMEN2R4LOCK 12 k
_Le 73 RECEIVER
DME 32 6'
(ARINC 568) U i
_H _H- 12 k
NO. 2 36 -

DME 2 SYNC -

-L (6-WRE) -Le 40 -

O 0.47 DME
H H 4700
48 'A . AUDIO IDENT
DME 2 AUDIO IDENT- PROCESSOR
-L _Le 270
52

(TO SHE T 9)

CGO-2579-13-AC-10

MPU-85G/86G Mult¢'unction Processor Unit,

System Schematic Diagram
Figure 2-37 (Sheet 10)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-172

 installation523-0773942

MPU-85G|86G
P/O ADI/MUXCARD A6
DPU-85G/86G
10 NO. 1

+15 V DC

EADI 1 BACKUP X DEFL

+5VDC 2.7k

7 *
H H
-H- EADI 1 BACKUP Y DEFL
- 135 I
15
WX CONPOL
_L- 139 4 4
ENR
4
4.7 k TO SHEET 12 15
EHSI 1 BACKUP X DEFL

2.7 k -
X. Y H
+5 Y DC 59 67
EHSI 1 BACKUP Y DEFL
- - -- -15
Y DC 63 71
4.7 k

WX BUSY BLANKING
H H
66 19
70 EADI 1 BACKUP GREEN VIDEO
J L 23
H H .7 k
136 -

WX RED VIDEO
_L- NO EO
EADI 1 BACKUP RED VIDEO
-H _H- DRIVERS
144
WX BLUE VIDEO
-L _L- H H
148
+5 V DC /11 EADI 1 BACKUP BLUE VIDEO
H H
152 4.7 k
WX GREEN VIDEO OXER
L
156 MUL
r . EADI 1 BACKUP GREEN INT
TO SHEET 12
134
WX RENACE k
L L .7

H H
138 11 ga 51
- EADI 1 BACKUP RENACE
B -
102 -
55
-H _H- 151 i
-L
WX SHADOW I
_L- 155 H H
67 75
- EHSI 1 BACKUP GREEN VIDEO
0 I / 71
H H
150 -

WX RANGE MARK
524 -
- EHSI 1 BACKUP RED VIDEO

I -H _H
148 144
- EHSI 1 BACKUP BLUE VIDEO- _L
152 - 148

I
1
EHSI 1 BACKUP GREEN INT

I
O
EHSI 1 BACKUP RENACE
10

I
1
EHSI 1 BACKUP SHADOW
J1

I CGO-2579-13-AC-11

MPU-85G/86G Mult¢°unction Processor

I
Unit,
System Schematic Diagram
Figure 2-37 (Sheet 11)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-173

 installation S23-0773942

MPU-85G|86G MPU-85G/86G
P/O ADI/MUXCARD A6 P/O ADI/MUXCARD A6
15 pF

DPL 85G|86G
1 k AO. 2

+15 ' DC
J3 J1
3
EADI 2 BACKUP X DEFL
15 pF
2.7 k

10 k+15

FROM EADI 2 BACKUP Y DEFL

15 1 V DC
DEFLECRON ,

MULRPLEXER /4 '
SHEET 11 /4
2.7 k M 1-85 )
15
EHSI 2 BACKUP X DEFL
J2
140
FROM MFD X DEFL -c

k FLEE 15
M
EHSI 2 BACKUP Y DEFL
-15
V DC
15 5
MFD Y DEFL

EADI 2 BACKUP GREEN VIDEO 2.7 k

-15
Y DC

49 27
EADI 2 BACKUP RED VIDEO
53 ---c
31

I
EADI 2 BACKUP BLUE VIDEO
H
MFD GREEN VIDEO
6

EADI 2 BACKUP GREEN INT

MFD RED VIDEO

EO EADI 2 BACKUP RETRACE EO

102 H H
DRIVERS DRIVERS MFD BLUE VIDEO

År EHSI 2 BACKUP GREEN VIDEO

MULRPI MULTlPI /6
11 2 12
SHEET 11 SHEET 11
MFD GREEN INT
2

5.1 V EHSI 2 BACKUP RED VIDEO

MFD RETRACE
5.1 V

EHSI 2 BACKUP BLUE VIDEO

J2
t}- MFD SHADOW .

EHSI 2 BACKUP GREEN INT

I
EHSI 2 BACKUP RETRACE
103

I
1
EHSI 2 BACKUP SHADOW
J3

CGO-2579-13-AC-12

MPU-85G/86G Multifunction Processor Unit,

I System Schematic Diagram

Figure 2-37 (Sheet 12)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-174

 installation523-0773942

I MPU--85G|86G
P/O POWERSUPPLY CARD A3
NO. 2 +28 V DC POWER
f= 6-
+28 V DC RETURN
f
--

-
90
91

VD
s--ELR
NO. 1 +28 V DC POWER 5
22 -15
V DC

+28 V DC RETURN

HIGH TEMP WARN -

110

CHASSIS GND -
160
J1
J3
CHASSIS GND -
160
J3

P/O TRENDVECTORCARD A11

A70 AR
O
+5 V DC

- IAS REFERENCE 4700

AOS 18 -Ho DATA 1 - 6 - L
MSI-80F , IAS REF M
NO. 1
L L
/4 H /2 ACIA B
11 - - 31 -

- IAS REFERENCE 4700

H H
24 - CLOCK 1 - 27 -

+5 V DC
J1
-L _Le
6 80 -

- lAS REFERENCE 4700

ADS 18 -Ho DATA 2 - 77 - L
MSI-80F lAS REF -¾

r
NO. 2
L
/4 H /2 ACIA
11 -Le - 108 -

- IAS REFERENCE 4700

H H
24 - CLOCK 2 - 84 -

DME

\
-

AUDIO IDENT
PROCESSOR
30.1 k

J1 49.9 k
L L
F - - 98 Wu i
- LONGITUDINAL 49.9 k
H H j' CON RTER
D - ACCEL - 95 Ru 3
LAC-80
30.1 k

33 k
E LONG ACCEL MONITOR 104 LATCH
J2
270 k

P/O PROCESSORCARD A4
OCESSOR
+28 V DC
EFIS
TEST
10 k
¯.L_ J2 10 k
NO O-MPU TEST -
2 ''' U.TlPLEMES
J2 MPU-85G/86G Multifunction Processor Unit,
System Schematic Diagram
Figure 2-87 (Sheet 18)
CGO-2579-13-AC-1

Revised 30 August 1993 2-175/(2-176 blank)

 theory of operation 523-0773944

RDP-aoo PROCESSOR
(TO DATA JACK)
CARD A7
REMOTE SERIAL DATA
EXTERNAL
MUX UART
SOURCES )
CARD A1 CARD A4(D

(FR M
MDCD I P/O
RELAY

>1't --a
ILTCE1R
C2
__,
O TAGE
POWER
1
LVRESET
1

CIRCUIT | SUPPLY
I +SV DC I
TO CARDs CARDS A9-A11 |
BREAKER) | A2,A5,A6,A7 }
----|-
I +261i V DC , SWITCHES AND/ PROCESSOR SERIAL
JOYSTICK \ y ---
SERIAL DATA AND
V DCERLlCIITIN " * CLOCK (TO MPU )
CARD A12 _______ _
OGIC
EL HERNNAL
(ONVO)
CARD A5 HV SENSE
1 PRI 1 i a HIGH
HIGH VOLTAGE I TAP I e VOLTAGE ANODE (lSk V DC ) +2615 V DC --+

\
I PRI 2 i FOCUS (2.5-4.5k V DC) FROM A4 RAM
REGULATOR a POWER +5 Y DC
--*
/
+28 Y DC I DRIVE H I a SUPPLY
LIGHTING BUS LIGHTING \ DRIVE L I
LIGHTING CONV e rIgrg]T - ----

(JUMPERED
EXTERNALLY
g
----
MEMORYCARD
TO 5VDC
LIGHTING) +12 Y ---

| CARD A6
I INTENSITY I SCREEN (+365 V DC) ) EEPROM
POWER CONTROL
SWITCH VIDEO POWER I
R1 r .

SUPPLIES | FILAMENT H (6.0 VAC)

P/O FRONT HVSDF

OF UNIT ¯¯
SCRN
SHUTDOWN
POWER SUPPLY
MONs SHRCDOWSN
DEFL/VIDEO

DEFMON
PHOSPHOR e---- "'
¯¯

PROTECTION e-- Gi G2 G3 ,/'

RADAR V DC SENSE
+160
, ) YOKE CRT
PULSSH DH
----

ZINTC
RED VlDEO
GRN VIDEO 's
ZRED VIDEO HEATER FILAMENT --
si

ZGRN AMPLIFIERS BLU VIDEO

ZBLU vlDEO GUNS
GRN/2
DCDC
FROM A4 '+26
5 ----

CAR[) A3 CONVERGENCE/PURIFY MAGNETS

DEFLECTION
CARD A2 Powes
AMPLIFIERS
XDRVH NOTES:
XDEFH ---a

I X YOKE SEND
DEFLH ADMPFFBFUERFER ONFDFSLE
NEAARI XDRVL
FROM Y (i) THERE IS A Mu METAL SHIELD BETWEEN
MPU YDEFL ---•

CIRCUITS YDRVH A4 ANDREST OF MFD. KEEP THE SHIELD

Y YOKE SEND NNPLACE WHENEVERTHE UNIT IS POWERED
YDRVL

----a
±6 V "+6 V
-«
SUPPLY 4--6 Y
XCURSENSE DEFLECTION ----

Y YOKE RTN
MUNi lUN e
+25

-25
V DC
V DC
llYYOKERTN
+5 Y DC .
I +25 V DC
+25 V DC
I i Y DC RETRACE X YOKE RTN
-25

FROM A4 -25
V DC .
+ DC CIR UITS±25
-

UPY y

TP6-3l71-OI4-!
ETRACE

MFD-85A Block Diagram

Figure 4-15

12evised 30 24247ust 1993 4-31

 theory of operation 523-0773944

4.3.5 CHP-85D Course Heading 4.3.5.2 Switches

I
Panel (CHP)

In the following discussion, refer to figure 4-16 for a

block diagram of the CHP. The CRS DIRECT, HDG SYNC, CRS CTL, ET, and
NAV DTA pushbutton switches are normally open,
and when used, apply a ground to the DCP-85E/G to
4.3.5.1 Direction/Movement Detector Encoders
activate the appropriate function. Each position of
The encoders are controlled by the knobs on the face the TTG-SP-ET toggleswitch applies a ground to the
DCP-85E/G to activate the appropriate function.
of unit. The CRS 1 knob controls the positioning of
the pilot's course arrows, the CRS 2 knob controls the The ET pushbutton is used in conjunction with the
positioning of the copilot's course arrows, and the ET position of the toggle switch and the ET function
HDG knob controls the positioning of the pilot's and of the NAV DTA pushbutton to control the elapsed
copilot's heading reference marker simultaneously. time function. When an elapsed time function is dis-
Each CRS knob controls a single encoder and the played on the EHSI each time the ET pushbutton is
HDG knob controls two encoders. When a CRS knob activated, the elapsed time counter cycles to the next
is turned, a code disk rotates. The code disk is state in the following sequence:
notched, so that when rotated, light to a phototran-
sistor is passed or blocked. The phototransistor acts a. Reset to 00:00.
as an encoder to sense direction and speed of knob b. Start elapsed time count.
rotation, and apply pulses to an associated direction/ c. Hold present reading.
movement detector. Rotating a CRS knob clockwise
sets the direction/movement detector course output
to +5 V de, and rotating the CRS knob counterclock- 4.3.6 CHP-86B Course Heading Panel (CHP)
wise sets the direction/movement detector course
direction output to 0 V dc. The direction/movement
detector also outputs a complementary serial pulse Operation of the CHP-86B controls is the same as
train that the DCP-85E/G samples to determine how described for the CHP-85D in paragraph 4.3.5. Two
fast the course arrows are to rotate. CHP-86Bs are required for a 5-tube EFIS system.

Revised 30 August 1993 4-32

 theory of operation 523-0773944

NOTES:

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, RESISTANCE

VALUES ARE IN OHMS, CAPACITANCE VALUES
P/O CIRCUIT CARD ARE 1N MICROFARADS, AND INDUCTANCE VALUES
ARE IN MICROHENRYS.
(647-6850-000
PARTIAL REFERENCE DESIGNAT]ONS ARE SHOWN:
FDR COMPLETE DESIGNATION, PREFIX WITH
UNIT AND/OR ASSEMBLY DESIGNATION.

OPTIONAL STRAP TO GND

30
TRlP FREQ.= R.P.M.
(RA) (C5)

+10 V DC

P/0
R4 JI
165 k
C 8 ANN. COMMON

MNSTBL CS B2 83
MLTVBRTR '0.! ei
+)0 DC U2A
14538 6 NORMAL ANNUNC1ATOR OUTPUT
A3
+!0 Y DC T2
+IO Y
30 7 OPTIONAL ANNUNCIATOR OUTPUT
k DD X
+26 Y DC

ISR2k
P/0
Ji 2N3700 +10 Y DC IN5Gl9
B2 83 RBk
FAN SENSOR +10 Y DC

A2 A +l0 V DC 00 k 409D3
CR3
RS
X2 XI OSM
SELF TEST 4 +28 Y DC

Q2
-+Io v oc 62
CR2 MNSTBL c5 D
IN56IB MLTVBRTR 0.47 e s
'. 145238
15 l4
+IO Y DC

+28 V DC
2 +28 Y DC

5 k

CY DC +l0 Y DC

N BSA Cl C2 C3 C7 CB
10 V O.I O.I O.I O.I O.I

5
GND

652-Bif7-OOl

FMM-85 (-001)Simplified Schematic Diagram

Figure M1

Revised 30 August 1993 4-41

 theory of operation 523-0773944

NOTES:

UNLESS OTHERW[SE SPECIF[ED, RES[STANCE

VALUES ARE 1N OHMS, CAPAClTANCE VALUES
DP/O C IRCU IT CAR ARE IN MICROFARADS, AND INDUCTANCE VALUES
ARE IN M[CROHENRYS.
(647-6850-002)
PARTIAL REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS ARE SHOWN:
FOR COMPLETE DESIGNATION, PREFlX WITH
UNIT AND/OR ASSEMBLY DESIGNATEON.

OPTIONAL STRAP TO GND

TRIP
FREOUENCY(RPM)=l3845-2.88XIO* RC.

+10 DC

P/O
74
4 k
ANN. COMMON
.

MNSTBL -LC5 e 83
MLTVBRTR *0.1
4 Bi
14532A
+|0 DC
I 2 6 NORMAL ANNUNCIATOR OUTPUT
A3
+]OY DC Al
R3
U1C +l0 Y DC 4 i # 7 OPTIONAL ANNUNCIATOR OUTPUT
4093
lOO k VOO XI
0 +28 Y DC

+10C

k
3700 DC
B2 CNR44454 +l0 Y DC
FAN SENSOR

RS
A A3 +IO Y DC IOO k 40903
CR3 R6

X2 X 05
SELF TEST 4 +28 Y DC M
CR22
-+io v oc
MNSTBL c6
(NSGIS MLTVBRT 0.47
+io V De
14536 15 14
Tl T2 UIA
SO 4093
l4
3
+28 V DC
2 +28 Y DC
C
RI 3
15 k

yg +l0 Y DC

N 58A Ci C2 C3 C7 CB
io v °·I °·l ° i

GND

I 652-8117-002

FMM-85 (-002)Simplified Schematic Diagram

Figure 4-22

Revised 30 August 1993 4-42

 theory of operation 523-0773944

2. DC Analog resets the service request signal and the poll-

ing sequence continues. All transfers between
o Crosstrack deviation the MPRAM and the ports take place on a 24-
bit bus with 8 address bits and 16 data bits.
3. DC Discrete
The MPRAM controller can support up to nine
o Comparator warns ports. If fewer than nine are actually used, the
o Cat II lights controller can be strapped to ignore the
o Master warn unused port positions and there will be no loss
o To/From of polling efficiency due to empty port slots.
o Back localizer
o Modes/status/flags 2. MPRAM I/O Ports
o Overtemperature
o Decision height Interfacing the MPRAM to the other blocks of
o Radio altimeter test the I/O section is accomplished through a set
of I/O ports. There are two input/output ports
4. Serial Digital and one input port. From this point on, all
references to MPRAM I/O ports will be made
o DCP/DSP control . with respect to the MPRAM. That is, an input
o FMS-90 WPT load port is used to transfer data to the MPRAM
o Cross-side DPU-data while an output port is used to transfer data
o FCS data from the MPRAM.

c. Functional Blocks Coordination of the data transfers to and from

the MPRAM is controlled by a simple polling
The I/O section is divided into four functional sequence. This polling sequence views each
blocks. These consist of a 256- by 16-bit multiport I/O port at two ports, one for input and one
RAM (MPRAM), a digital high-speed serial digi- for output; thus, where two I/O ports and one
tal transmitter/receiver to transmit DPU cross- input port are shown, the controller actually
side data and to receive DPU/MPU cross-side treats these as five separate ports.
data, an array of microprocessor based I/O
processors (IOPs) and high-speed input and out- There are two types of I/O ports, the I/O port
put ports. These combine with the MPRAM to connected to the display processor and the
provide high-speed multiaccessing features. multiplexed I/O port connected to the I/O
processors. From the point of view of the
1. Multiport RAM (MPRAM) MPRAM, these two I/O ports are identical; in
actual operation they differ, since each inter-
At a 256-
the center of the DPU I/O section is faces to different processor bus schemes.
by 16-bit high-speed RAM and multiaccess
controller. This RAM and controller are The 12-bit display processor interfaces to the
referred to as the multiport RAM or MPRAM. 8-bit address and 16-bit data bus used by the
I/O port and the MPRAM. To road data from
The 256- by 16-bit RAM is comprised of four RAM, the display processor performs a read
256- by 4-bit bipolar RAMs. When data is from external memory sequence. Decoding of
transferred from the port to the RAM, the ISR the processor control signals provides a signal
signal is low. The controller reads an 8-bit to the MPRAM output port that causes the
address and 16-bit data from the input port processor to hang up and signals the MPRAM
and performs a write sequence to the RAM. of a pending output request. When the port is
When data is transferred to the port from the polled, the 12-bit address present at the
RAM, the OSR is low. In this case, the control- processor's address bus passes through the
ler reads the 8-bit address from the port, port's buffers and accesses data in the
reads data from the RAM, and latches the 16- MPRAM. This data is then latched at the out-
bit data in the output port. In either case, put port and the display processor is released.
after the operation is complete, the polling The read cycle is now completed by the proces-
pulse is removed from the port, which in turn sor.

Revised 30 August 1993 4-8

 theory of operation 523-0773944

POWER r +28 V DC
ŠsvvDDCC
+28 V DC I SUPPLY r
-15VDC
ACANALOG NL CARDA3 .

DCC NSACLROETE
l/O CARD
MANCHESTER
A¯(

OCESSOR CARD A4 SYMBOL GENERATORCARD A5 ADI/MUX CARD A6 AY RD

- Hl-SPEED SABUS FBUS
PROLlNE BUS
DIGITAL I/O / / % MULTIPLEXED
/ 4 /- INPUT/
ADI VIDEO
6WXWIRE POORT y, FIFO DENFDLECTlON
/ PROCESSOR \ / \ / \ / \c OUTPUT
PORT

DME AUDlO
1DENT
DME AUDIO
PROCESSOR
/
\
\
/
ULTIPORT

\ /
I PROCESSOR
ROM
----

RAM
I I i ORIG1 X,Y
256X16 16K×[2 256×12 / TRANSLATOR

/\ /\ COORD1NATE \ DEFLECTION
XSD
CONVERTER / MULTIPLEXER TO EADI
SERIAL
X-SIDE -------A X-S1DE DATA
x-SIDE RCVR
RCVR XMTR
\ VECTOR ----o

/ GENERATOR O gy

GlTAL I/O CARD AS

EFRLECTlON BLANKING
XY
M
STATUS
CONTROL
1/O
CONTROL
I I /
CHARACTER
GENERATOR 1DEO

RGB
- - - --. .-.-....
CVIDNEORI
LOR MUDLET
PLEXER

STRAP D1SCRETE CONTROL

TO AS, A6, A8
+30 V OC TO EHS1
CARDS
650 VDC

DC
+28 V DC TO EADI

v oce
EFD POWER
SUPPLY ,+30 REVERSIONARY
V DC
CARD A9 +160 V DC DRIVE IN
+25 V DC i
DDCC
+28 V DC TO EHSI
+5 V DC
1 -6
V DC
-11
V DC TP6-2412-OI5

DPU-85G/86G Block Diagram

Figure 4-9

Revised 30 August 1993 4-'7

 installation 523-0773942
MPU-85G|86G P/O ANALOGI/O CARD A9
10 k
- FD 2 IN--VIEW BIAS I 137 · ·

Il
27 k
J3
-15
V DC - - 122 -
RADIO ALT 2 TEST . RADIO
10 k ALT1METER
- COMMANDBARS OFF 2 138 w. LATCH ---
141 --
CAT Il COMPARATOR (RIGHT) NO. 2
----
90 -
CAT 11AMBER (RIGHT)

II
27 k --
35 -
COMPAR MASTER WARN 2 TO
--
142 -
CAT II GREEN (RIGHT) PANEL
V DC ADDR BUS
-15
LATCH 9 -+
146 -
HDG COMPARATOR 2 ANNUNCIATORS
ANALOG 10 k 29 ---
145 --
ATT COMPARATOR 2
FCS ---+
FD 2 VALID 143 •.•..

--+
86 -
DECISION HEIGHT 2
NO.2 i 7k 3k
27 k 0.0 7 ---
131 -
LOC TUNE 2
k ANALOG I/O
-

. M
-15
V DC
--
+DN -+
1 ---+

147 k PROCESSOR
-+
PITCH CMD 2 Y
+UP --e
2 100 k
V DC
---

+28
--+

I ' 100 k
LATCH
10 k
/ VIAAUODN
+LT -----
37 -

--
ROLL CMD 2 0.027 147 k
' 2 10 k 158 -
D 2
LNV 2 MODE (RIGHT)
+RT 38 LATCH
-
/ 147 --
LNV 1 MODE (RIGHT)
8
/ 144 -
FCS 2 CLEAR (PULSE)
0.1 RAM ---
121 -
VOR/LOC2 MODE (RIGHT)
----
115 -
VOR/LOC1 MODE (RIGHT)
-->
127 -
BACK COURSE2 MODE
37.4 k
A/D
L L 1 k N CONVERTER
5
- RADIO ALTITUDE 2 100 k

0.1 37.4
PROM LATCH ' --+
TO/FROM 2
51
10 k
---
RADIO ALT 2 VALID 124 555

27 k

-15
V DC
56 _H _H
69
84
MULTlPLEXER & --+
LATERAL DEV 2 _L. ANALOG
--•
73
-X- DC 51.1 FCS
- ATT 2 PITCH 88 --.. ....

-Z RESOLVER V NO. 2
92

I CONDV LAEXER
-/
TER MUL 22 k
---
ATT 2 ROLL 10
8 RES
10 k
1 M - FCS 2 26 V AC REF

H H 27k 10M 22k H

- --
45
- ATT 2 26 V AC REF 27 k
C C 10 k
--
46

I
4.7 k 4.7 k
16.2 k
M BUS
ok « BU
ATTlTUDE 2 VALID 117 LATCH
H H
27 k -->
HEADING 2 ERROR

-15
V DC

TO I/O CARDS 8060 16.9 k

104 A7, AS, A10
- HEADING 2 -
96 DC +15 V DC
AND TREND
.

100 RESOLVER 15.8 k 2.7 k

. VECTOR CARD A11

i l
60
27 k
10 M
V\A 470

ANALOG c
--->HDG 2 26 v Ac REF--- 27 k
TO 54EET 7 ,15

C ;,ND
HEADING -- ---
56 r
H H
25
NO. 2
SH ET 8 -
f -+
COURSE DATUM 2 ERROR - V

I I 4.7 k 4.7 k 26 ---- --+

15 J3

1 k MPU-85G/86G Mulig'unction Processor Unit,

--
HEADING 2 VALID 118
2.7 k System Schematic Diagram
1o
---
DG 2 MODE 135 f V DC
Figure 2-37 (Sheet 6)
J3 -15

27 k 27 k
CGO-2579-13-AC-6

I -15
V DC -15
V DC

Revised 30 August 1993 2-168

 installation 523-0773942

MPU-85G/86G
P/O DIGITALI/O CARD A8

J1
H-> 24 -

+5 V DC
-+
LNV 1 DATA
(6-WIRE)
12 k
12 k

(ARINC 551) LOCK k /3 RECEIVER

R 36 -
6 -

12 k

-
LNV 1 SYNC -

(6-WIRE) -L--
44 -

J1

J2
17 V DC
+5
DME 1 DATA
(6-WIRE)
12 k

DME
1RECLOCK ·
1 k /3 RECEIVER
_L-
29 --
6
DME
(ARINC 568) 12 k
NO. 1 33 --

-->
DME1 SYNC -L-
-

(6-WIRE) 37 -

4 0 AUDIDOMEDENT

----
DME 1 AUDIO IDENT-- Le
PROCESSOR
49 270
J2

(TO SE 4)

CGO-2579-13-AC-5

MPU-85G/86G Multifunction Processor Unit,

System Schematic Diagram
Figure 2-37 (Sheet 5)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-167

 installation 523-0773942
MFD-85A/B
L L
FROA CNEL
REMOTE DATA SENSOR O
+5 V DC
L
L J
40 - 10 k
REMOTE DATA SENSOR 1 +5 V DC
32 - SERIAL DATA M
MULTTPLEXER UART
L /
-+
11 8 + 4 4.7 k 4.7 k -,4.7 k
·
REMOTE DATA SENSOR 2 -
18 10 k P1
-
10 k '" 43 PILOT CHAPTER FORWARD--O
REMOTE DATA SENSOR 3 k DL
-
49 PILOT LtNE FORWARD
10 k -L
-
I Wu 50 PILOT PAGE FORWARD O
R
800 µH LLT 215 VDDCC
+28 V DC PRI POWER -
GE I ONT P NR 42 PILOT GND
POWER ±5 V DC SWITCHES INPUT 4
--9'
AND BUFFERS
64 150
POWER GND - -
±26.5 V DC HV SENSE
---
CHASSIS GND 47 - MlfRO-
TAP HIGH ANODE (15 kV DC) M
POWER HIGH -
PROCESSOR
FROSN RCEHLAY
P FOCUS (2.5-4.5 kV DC)
REG LA R
I
PROGRAM N
-/
MEMORY B
SCREEN (+365V DC)
VIDEO
POWER -4 -4
FILAMENTH
SUPPLIES EEPROM
MPU-85G/86G +5 V DC
P2 MPU-
1 k +12 Y DC 85U/86U
L-+ SCRN SHUTDOWN P2
51 - 30 POWER EN
-+
MFD RADAR FAN POWER MON SUPPLY CONTROL RAM
50 $ SHADING PULSE (SHADOW) i 22 R1 H
DEFL/VIDEO MON SHUT DOWN 55 112
CIRCUITS (FRONT PANEL) - MFD DATA TO MPU -
1 k L------J L
as 116
H
-
H - -
63 - 14 H H
53 - 120
- MFD RED VlDEO QUAD -
L-+ - -+
V DC ----/ D--LATCH MFD CLOCK TO MPU
62 13 +5 L
54 - 124
¯
1 k G1 G2 G3 '
--
-+

H H
I RED VIDEO 51 128
- -+
.
71 5 7 MFD SYNC TO MPU
--
-
VIDEO GREEN V1DEO L
MFD GREEN VIDEO YOKE CRT 44 - 132
L _L- AMPLIFIERS
70 6 - 6 BLUE VIDEO
1 k
H _H- -
67 23
- MFD BLUE VIDEO
L _L -+
66 15 +5 Y DC +5 V DC
+160 V DC SENSE
_1 k 1 k
78 --

I
2
--
-
MFD GREEN INT 35 HIGH TEMP WARN TO EXT ANN
H -- -
79 3 NORM V /
RETRACE ,
RETRACE X YOKE RETURN
CIRCUITS N / /
gy 10 ,r ,
L_ _La
75 26
- MFD RETRACE
H4 _H- +- -
74 19 XCURSENSE - 4 - 31
' +28 V DC UGHTlNG
DEFLECT10N 28 V TO 5 V .
1 k ::1 k MONITOR UGHTlNG
Y YOKE RETURN PCE r' e
' 150 CONVERSION -•
52 -
. . 15 pF UGHTING CONVERSION
CRS 029 (JUMPHERN T TO 5
CRS 03D UPTS FROM
L- +25 Y DC -AIRCRAFT
-
55
H
- MFD X DEFLECTION

I
10 10 k FROM LOW
VOLTAGE
-25
Y DC
+11 V DC
PANEL UGHTING POWER
54 4 - 10 k POWER -11
V DC
SUPPLY
--
470 46 5 V LIGHTlNG CGO-2576-03-AC-1
_
-
10 k 39 UGHTING RETURN
L- DEFLECT10N
59 1 -
---
MFD Y DEFLECTION AMPOUERRS
10 k .
_H- ---

.---X YOKE SEND

58 5 XDEFH
P1 OFFSET GAIN, XDEFL
- -
X DEFL, Y DEFL
/ AND LINEARITY YDEFH -Y YOKE SEND
15 pF r2 MFD-85(
CIRCUITS YDEFL ) Multfunction Display, System Schematic Diagram
Figure 2-36
Revised 30 August 1993 2-161/(2-162 blank)
 installation 523-0773942

119.13 [4.690] TYP

111.96 [4.408] TYP i

'

104.78 [4.125] TYP NOTES:

1. THIS DRAWING APPUES TO TUBEAXIAL FAN (CPN: 009-1965-030),
ROTRON P/N 032105.

2. WEIGHT: 0.59 kg [1.29 LB]

3610] DIA TYP 3. DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS[INCHES).

DIA REF 2
WIRELEADS: POSITIVE LEAD RED, NEGATlVE LEAD
- -
BLACK,
FAN SENSOR LEAD BLUE/WHITE.
-

5. INPUT VOLTAGE: +28 V DC, 0.28 A NOMINAL

FINGERGUARD (CPN: 009-1766-050 OR EQUIVALENT) MAY BE USED

WITH THE TUBEAXIAL FAN TO PROTECT MAINTENANCEPERSONNEL
AND WIRING HARNESS FROM THE ROTATING BLADES.

7. THE FAN INLET REQUIRES A MINIMUMCLEARANCE OF 12.7 [0.50]

O CJ I FROM LARGE SOLID SURFACES WHICH WOULD RESTRICT AIR FLOW.

I
104.78
A [4 5)

1400]
A
DIA, TYP B PLS
[ 153]

[0.063]
VIEW A-A

1.78 ±0.51 1.02

[0.070±0.020] [0.040]MAX Ÿ ¯

9.65 1.78
[o.aeo AIR [0.070]MAX
FLOW

NAME PLATE GROUND CONNECTION CGO-0887-01-AC-1

Tubeaxial Fan (CPN 009-1965-030), Outline and Mounting Diagram

Figure 2-25

Revised 30 August 1993 2-138

 installation 523-0773942

NOTES.
THIS DRAWING DEPlCTS THE IMT-85(CPN622-6878-XXX,MFD-85A (CPN622-
100°
723-XXX), MFD-85B (CPN 622-7876-XXX), MFD-85C (CPN 622-9849-XXX) WXP-85A 1 CONNECTOt INFORMATION .138-32
FH SCREW MTG,4 PL E4.125¯)
(CPN 622-6092-XXX), WXP-85C (CPN 622-7338-XXX) AND WXP-850A (CPN 622-
e.33±0.28 104.78
[.328±.011¯]
8393-XXX). ALSO SHOWN FOR REFERENCE IS A BLOWER (CPN 009-1965-XXX)- UNIT CONNECTOR
SEE NOTE 5 BELOW. -
6.35 E.250] 4 PL
UNIT DESCRIPTION COLLINS PART ND. VENDORPART NO.
DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES EINCHES].
MFD-85() Pl: 55 PIN, A F
DENOTES CENTER OF GRAVITY- HIGH DENSITY 359-0667-200 MS27508E16F35AB LIGHTING INFORMATION -

CIRCULAR
COOLING AIR ARE LOCATED IN BOTH SIDES OF THE
HOLE PATTERNS UNIT LIGHTING VOLTAGE
MFD-85()AND INTHE TOP AND BOTTOMOF BOTH THEMFD-85()ANDWXP-85()/850() DESCRIPTION
Jt: 25 PIN 371-0385-030 DBU-25 MFD-85() Jt-46
ITT CANNON PAD 5V 5V LIGHTING
THE BLOWERDEPICTED IS A 28 Y DC FAN MANUFACTUREDBY EG&G ROTRON D-SUBMINIATURE LIGHTING GROUND Jl-39
MODEL NO. MD28XX (CPN 009-1965-XXX). THIS FAN OR AN EQUIVALENT ----12.7
E.500]4 PL
DC FAN WILL PROVIDE ADEQUATE COOLING FOR THE UNITS. THE FAN WXP-85/850 28V 28V LIGHTING Jt-31
IMT-85 J2: 37PIN NG GR46U
ORSDNE TH THE MOUNTING TRAY BUT CAN BE 371-0385-040 DCU-37 PAD
-39

D SEP E SU TURE
5V TG 142
A MOUNTING HOLE PATTERN IS PROVIDED ON THE BOTTOM OF THE TRAY FOR ROUN J2-20
FASTENING THE BLOWERON THE CENTERLINE OF THE TRAY OR ON
MATING CONNECTOR E
.250

SWITCH ON REAR OF UNIT

EITHER SIDE OF THE CENTERLINE IF NEEDED TO AVOID AIRCRAFT STRUCTURE IN 5V POSITION
UNIT
DESCRIPTION COLLINS PART NO. VENDOR PART NO. WXP-Ub/Ubu 28V VGH NæG OUNJ2-2J2-20
DRESS AND ROUTE WXP-85()/850() WIRINGHARNESOVERTHE CENTER OF THE
FAN IN A MANNER THAT WILL MINTMIZE THE RESTRICTION OF AIR FLOW SWITCH ON REAR OF UNIT
FROM THE BLOWER.
J1:55 PIN IN 28V POSITION
CAUTION: A FINGERGUARD (CPN 009-1766-050 OR EQUIVALENT) SHOULD CTRCULAR HIGH
BE USED WITH THE BLOWER TO PROTECT THE WXP-85/850 WIRING DENSITY WITH
HARNESS FROM THE ROTATING BLADES. CRIMP REMOVE-
ABLE CONTACTS 359-0635-180 MS27473Tl6F35sB
THE MINTMUM CLEARANCEAPPLIES TO LARGE SOLTD SURFACES WHICH WOULD MFD-85() -OR- -OR- -OR-
RESTRICT AIR FLOW AT THE FAN INLET OR AIR DISCHARGE AT THE TOP 55 PIN, 359-0645-170 MS27484T16F35SB
OF THE MFD-85f ) CTRCULAR HIGH 3.73 [.147 ] 0, 12 HOLES
DENSITY WITH EILOOO¯]
CLEARANCEREQUIRED UNDER MOUNTING TRAY FOR TURNLOCK .FASTENERS. GROUNDING 279.40
FINGERS &
MOUNTING INFORMATION CRIMP REMOVE- 254E1.000]
ABLE CONTACTS .138-32 0° FH SCREW MTG,
HOLE PATTERNS FOR STANDARD MOUNTING OPTION 8 BLOWER ATTACHMENT
OPTIONS QUANTITY
RE NCE
AECCRSIMP 359-0608-110 MS39029-157-354 006¯]
STANDARD A 2
-

211.22 ±0.41 E8.450±.016]

F 2 -7.62

E.300]
STRAIN 139.70 ± 0.41
ALTERNATE 1 B 2 RELTEF FOR J1: 8.33±0.28 E5.500±.016]
C 2 STRAIGHT 359-0637-050 MS27506F16-2 E.328 ±.011
E 2 359-0637-150
RIGHT ANGLE MS27507F16 y
ALTERNATE 2 A 2 Pl: 25 PIN
D 2 CRIMP CONTACT A B C DV VE
D-SUBMINIATURE 371-0213-030 CANNON.DBMA25S-A183-FO
-OR- -OR- -OR 8.33 ± 0.28
ADDITIONAL ALTERNATE MOUNTING HOLE PATTERNS MAY BE 25 PIN, SOLDER E.328 ±.011]
POSSIBLE. CONTACT COLLINS GENERAL AVIATION DIVISION. CUP
HOLES MARKED G ARE AUXILIARY TRAY-TO-AIRFRAME MOUNTINGHOLES- D-SUBMINTATURE 371-0221-000 CANNONDBM-25S
WEIGHT INFORMATION
P2: 37 PIN' 120.65
T/ION APPRE ATE [4.750¯]
ES R MN 371-0213-040 CANNON DCMA37S-A183-FO
-OR- -OR -OR 127.00
IMT-85 37 PIN, SOLDER E5.000]
WITHOUT FAN 0.27 Kg E0.60 LBS] CUP
D-SUBMINIATURE 371-0222-000 CANNONDCM-37S
IMT-85
0.86 KgE1.89LB] CANNONO31-1007-067
WITH FAN WXP-85/850 CRIMP CONTACTS 371-02TS-llO
MFD-85( ) 4.31 Kg E9.50 LBS] P1 AND P2
WXP-85()/850( ) 0.82 Kg E1.80 LBS] O 2- 629-8381-001

CENTER OF GRAVITY INFORMATION UH C

CENTER OF GRAVITY P1 & P2 )

CONFIGURATION 371-0040-010 CANNOND20419-16 A <#
APPROXIMATE LOCATION (2 REûUIRED) D E
CABLE CLAMP Pt 371-0146-000 CANNON DB24659
IMT-85. MFD-85( ) DIMENSION DIMENSION DIMENSION 371-0147-000
P2 CANNON DC24660
AND WXP-B5(1/850 A B C
HOUT FAN 79.25E3.12] 129.54E5.10] 81.79E3.22] 25.4El.ooo]
WITH FAN 79.25E3.12] 143.00E5.63] 71.88E2.83]
214.63 C 8.450]
TP6-2544-025

ALTERNATE MOUNTING HOLE PATTERNS 652-8097

IMT-85 Mounting Tray, Outline and Mounting Diagram

Figure 2-24 (Sheet 2)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-137

 installation 523-0773942
7.3010.061 MATING CONNECTOR
.2872.024]
MOUNTING SURFACE
11.4 Ë.45]MAX 90.93[3.580]REF REAR OF FRONT PANEL 29.7[l.17]REF. WlRING MAY BE DRESSED LATERALLY
OSENEMAENE 321.87±0.76 BEYOND THE ROLLED EDGE, TYPICAL EACH SIDE J4
.
192.4\tO.61 C N
[7.5751.024 53.98 [12.672±.030]
13 68 Ë2.125 " 20.3[.80] ROLLED EDGE, 2 PL REF
Ë MAX AIR DISCHARGE SURFACE 1.8[.07]MAX
O O J1 J2 J3
J3 J2 J1
SLOT LOCATING SCREW I
SS UNCC
TN NG
76
175.01
[e.t so
AIR INLET
209.0
MAX
3.56±O.05E.\40±.OO2¯|
HOLE LOCATING SCREW
SEL3F2LUNC
FLOAT N ING UNIT MOUNTING SURFACE
52.8
66.0
8.97±0.41 12.06±0.48 AIRCRAFT MOUNTING [2.60 ,
24.9
12.78[.503]REF SURFACE MAX
[.353 2.016] [.475±.019] APPROX 0.98
91.4E3.60] e-9.68E.38)¯|REF .138-32UNC-2B.SELFLOCKING,
298.45Ëll.750]REF
APPROX 1--2.OC.08¯|MAX FLOATINGNUT PLATE, 2 LOCATIONS
90.I7E3.550]REF 48.84 388.I C15.28]MAX
[1.923] (REAR VIEW)
165.lOC6.500]REF ' (5.16±0.05[.203±.OO2]Ø CLEARANCE HOLES IN MOUNT) 6
IO.46[.4I2]REF- 17L45[6.750]REF . REQUIRES PLATE NUT, TAPPED HOLE, OR CLEARANCE HOLE REF
FOR .164(NO.8) SCREWS, 4 HOLES 6
206.O[8.11]MAX
(FRONT VlEW)
177.8 i
[7.000
652-8221
TP6-3408-025
298.45C11.750
MOUNTING HOLE PATTERN
UMT-15B Mount for MPU-85( )/86( ),
Outline and Mounting Diagram
Pigure 2-23 (Sheet 2)
Revised 30 August 1993 2-135
 installation 523-0773942
¡56.72 ± 0.25 __ __ MAX-
298.58 Ell 755
eno ± oio_1 _ MAX REF
45°,4 PL- 445¯],2PL
||30 -a
-- -- C
- 2 4| 095 R MAX , B PL
STRAIGHT
OO
5964
MAX REF
\59.77 2.344
||725 O.25 MAX
[¯4.6|6± 6.29
.Cl
.||2-40 UNC-2B
FLAT HEAD SCREW 6.86 32.54
MTG,2 PL MAX
E.270 __ __ _._._ __ __ I E 28|
3.02
[¯.119
RIGHT ANGLE
3.6eE145],2 PL 42.67
MAX
4305 E.094¯] . MATING CONNECTOR AND STRAlN RELIEF
2 R [l.680]
¯\695 REF 39 , 4 PL CLAMPS FOR MFD-85A
320.0 E12.60
¯) MAX
ll.9 E 47]MAX
314.4[¯I238
,2
320 E1.26 !2.7E.50 PL -- 3.lOE.122 ] MAX
eo.oE3.is] o.ooEo.ooo] es 24.26
]REF APPROX
PERMISSABLE PANEL THKNS 072 E.955]
54
E.ioo]
|50.52 C 5.926 4.l9 E .l65 ] 32.64
]MAX I55.0956.IO6¯]REF
REF E).285 -
RECOMMENDED PANEL CUTOUT -B
,2
- 214.63[ 8450 PL
3 56 IO.77
R 8 PL I 25.40 PIN I , REF, 4 PL
2 PL 424¯]
40 |.000]'
IO65
62 APPROX
MIN ---A
.300
oo
P1N 55
20.l4
[¯4.730 MAX
16 C
oco= co
5824
l6O.9 6.23 ¯||.35 REF,4 PL
(¯6.335 MAX 447
O O CO O
MAX
DIM C
737 ± O 25 i 3
REF
E.290±.OlO
REF
MAX
.|38-32 IOO° FH MTG SCREW 4 PL PIN I
DIM A |2.7
l.5[.06_ ,
MIN I.35
- - [.500 REF • REF
2 PL MAX OIM B y l60 .053

_6|5646
--isesiES2eo MAX
io 2 40] MAX .2 PL
[
REAR VIEW WlTHOUT MTG TRAY
TPS-2544-025
326eEi2.86] MAx . 652 8097
IMT-8ö Mounting Tray. Outline and Mounting Diagram
Figure 2-24 (Sheet 1 of à
Revised 30 August 1993 2-136
 installation 523-0773942

NOTES:

DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES [INCHES].

WEIGHT: 1.18 Kg 2.6 LBS NOMINAL. WEIGHT DOES NOT INCLUDE MATING CONNECTORS.

CONNECTORMOUNTING ACCOMMODATES 4 ROW COLLINS THIN LINE TYPE, NOT SUPPLIED WITH MOUNT. SEE
INSTALLATION CONTROL DRAWING OF PURCHASED UNTT TO FIND CONNECTORKIT PART NO. AND CRTMP
CONTACT PART NO. TYPICAL CONNECTORWT. W/O CONTACTS IS 0.12g [3.43 OZS] .

BRACKETS WITH HOLES ARE PROVIDED FOR SECURING STRAIN RELTEF CLAMPS AND GROUND LUGS. STRAIN
RELIEF CLAMPS AND GROUND LUGS ARE NOT SUPPLIED WITH MOUNT.

> A CLEARANCE OF 7.6 [.30] MINIMUM MUST BE MAINTAINED BETWEEN UNIT TOP AND A SOLTD SURFACE.

) THIS MOUNT IS SECURED TO THE AIRCRAFT WITH TWO LTG4) NO. 8 PAN HEAD AND TWO (.164) NO.8
100 FLAT HEAD MACHINE SCREWS. THE MOUNT THTCKNESS BEFORE THE SCREWS ENTER THE AIRCRAFT
MOUNTING SURFACE IS AS FOLLOWS:
(.164) NO. 8 PAN HEAD-3.8 ± 0.8 [.15 ± .03].

[164) NO. 8 FLAT HEAD ± 0.64 [.450 ±

-11.43
.025].

) THIS DRAWING APPLIES TO UMT-l5B (CPN 622-7266-001)

) THTSMOUNT IS INTENDED FOR INSTALLAT10NS EXTERNAL TO .THE PASSENGER AND COCKPIT AREAS
WHERE BLOWER SOUND IS NOT OBJECTIONABLE. ACOUSTICAL DATA IS AVAILABLE FROM THE BLOWER
MANUFACTURER.

BLOWER INFORMATION:
MANUFACTURER: EGLG ROTRON, WOODSTOCK, N.Y. 12498
PART NUMBER: ROTRON 011126, COLLINS OO9-0271-OK)
VOLTAGE: 28VDC
CURRENT: 1.5A NOMINAL
SPEED:19,300 RPM

UNITS HAVE BEEN DESIGNED AND TESTED FOR MOUNTING ON A HORIZONTAL SURFACE. A CHANGE IN
MOUNTING ATTITUDE WILL REQUIRE TESTING AND APPROVAL BY GENERAL AVTATION ENGINEERING.

CENTER OF GRAVITY IS FOR UMT-15B ONLY.

-(
e DENOTES CENTER OF GRAVITY.

BLOWER CONNECTOR: CPN 371-6917-000 GAS-3112E-8-3P)

BLOWER MATING CONNECTOR: CPN 371-0401-030 (BENDIX P/N PTO6CE-8-3S) OR BENDIX PN PTO6A-8-3S
WIRING CODES:+28VDC AT d4-B;-28VDC AT J4-A AND FAN SENSOR OUTPUT AT J4-C.
INVERTER INFORMATION:
MANUFACTURER: EG+G ROTRON,WOODSTOCK,NY 12498
PART NUMBER: ROTRON 504557, COLLINS 009-0271-030.

LOWSPEED WARNINGDETECTOR:OPTIONAL
CPN:622-7154-OO2. SEE FMM-85 INSTRUCTION BOOK,

652-8221
TPS-3408-025

U3fT-15B Afauntfor AfPU-85()/88(),

Outline and Mounting Diagram
Figure2-23 (Sheet1 of4

lievised 30 izq;ust 1993 2-134

 installation 523-0773942

E¯
7.30 ±0.061 MATING CONNECTOR
[.287±.024 MOUNTING SURFACE

!!.4 [.45]MAX- 90.93[3.580 REF REAR OF FRONT PANEL 29.7[I.l7]REF, WIRING MAY BE DRESSED LATERALLY
10SENEMAENE 321.87ÍO.76 BEYOND THE ROLLED EDGE, TYPICAL EACH SIDE
192.4110.61 i C N 523.9
I [7.575 .024
13.66±0.41 [12.672±.030] ' 20.3[.BO ROLLED EDGE, 2 PL 53.3
REF
[.538±.016] MAX 5 AIRDISCHARGESURFACE I.S[.07]MAX
[2.10]
3.56±O.08[.140±.OO3]X
4.32±O.2O[.170±.008 / i |

LOUCK
G UTS
O SIDE OF MATERIAL,
o 4 PL, 2 EACH SIDE

175.01 o o
O [6.t:90
AIR INLET
O @ 209.0
[8.23]
MAX

3.56±O.05Ë.l40±.OO2]
HOLE LOCATING SCREW
INTO A .138-32UNC-28
FLOAATINNUSELFLOCKING UNIT MOUNTING SURFACE
52.8
SNURFAMCE ACP RB

8.9720.41 12.06±0.48 RRCFRAACFET

MOUNTING [2.60
--+
*---12.78E.503]REF
91.4E3.60 [.353±.016 [.475±.019] APPROX
+---- a 298.45CII.750]REF e-9.68Ë.38I
, REF
90.17C3550 REF 48.84 ** 388.ICIO.EG]MAX i i 2.OC.08]MAX
[1.923] 00
165.IOC6.500]REF (5.I6±O.05C.203±.002]O CLEARANCE HOLES IN MOUNT) .138-32UNC-2B SELFLOCKING,
IO.46C.412]REF-+ 171.45[6.750]REF REQUIRES PLATE NUT, TAPPED HOLE, OR CLEARANCE HOLE FLOATING NUT PLATE,2PL
REF
FOR .164(NO.8) SCREWS, 4 HOLES
206.OCB.11]MAX (REAR VIEW)
(FRONT VIEW)

177.8
[7.000]

652-8082

298.45[11.750 TP6-2475

MOUNTING HOLE PATTERN

UMT-15A Mount for MPU-85( )/86( ),

Outline and Mounting Diagram
Figure 2-22 (Sheet 2)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-133

 installation 523-0773942

NOTES:

DIMENSIONS ARE IN MlLLIMETRES [INCHES].

¯)

WEIGHT: 1.18 Kg 2.6 LBS NOMINAL. WEIGHT DOES NOT INCLUDE MATING CONNECTORS.

CONNECTORMOUNTINGACCOMMODATES 4 ROW COLLINS THIN LINE TYPE, NOT SUPPLIED WITH MOUNT. SEE
INSTALLATION CONTROL DRAWING OF PURCHASED UNIT TO FIND CONNECTOR KIT PART NO. AND CRIMP
CONTACT PART NO. TYPICAL CONNECTORWT. W/0 CONTACTS IS O.12g [3.43 OZS. .

BRACKETS WITH HOLES ARE PROVTDED FOR SECURING STRAIN RELIEF CLAMPS AND GROUNDLUGS. STRAIN
RELIEF CLAMPS AND GROUND LUGS ARE NOT SUPPLIED WITH MOUNT.
) A CLEARANCE OF 7.6 E.30] MINIMUM MUST BE MAINTAINED BETWEEN UNIT TOP AND A SOLID SURFACE.

) THIS MOUNT IS SECURED TO THE AIRCRAFT WITH TWO LTG4) NO. 8 PAN HEAD AND TWO (.164) NO.B
100° FLAT HEAD MACHINE SCREWS. THE MOUNT THTCKNESS BEFORE THE SCREWS ENTER THE AIRCRAFT
MOUNTING SURFACE IS AS FOLLOWS:
(.164) NO. 8 PAN HEAD-3.8 ± 0.8 [.15 : .03].

[164) NO. 8 FLAT HEAD ± 0.64 [.450 ±

-11.43
.025].

) THIS DRAWING APPLIES TO UMT-15A (CPN 622-6902-001).

THIS MOUNT IS INTENDED FOR INSTALLATIONS EXTERNAL TO .THE PASSENGER AND COCKPIT AREAS
WHERE BLOWER SOUND IS NOT OBJECTIONABLE.ACOUSTICAL DATA IS AVAILABLE FROM THE BLOWER
MANUFACTURER.

BLOWER INFORMATION:
MANUFACTURER: EG&G ROTRON, WOODSTOCK,N.Y. 12498
PART NUMBER: ROTRON 027685, COLLINS 009-1424-070
VOLTAGE: 115 YAC, 1½, 400Hz
CURRENT: .33A NOMINAL: .45A MAX.
CAPACITOR: 5 mFd AT 220 VAC (CPN 933-1043-690 SUPPLIED WITH THE MOUNT)
SPEED: 20700 RPM

UNITS HAVE BEEN DESIGNED AND TESTED FOR MOUNTING ON A HORI2ONTAL SURFACE. A CHANGE IN
MOUNTING ATTITUDE WILL REûUIRE TESTING AND APPROVAL BY GENERAL AVTATION ENGINEERING.

) CENTER OF GRAVITY TS FOR UMT-15A ONLY.

-(g-
DENOTES CENTER OF GRAVITY.
(¯þ BLOWER CONNECTOR: CPN 371-6917-000 GAS-3112E-8-3P)
BLOWER MATING CONNECTOR: CPN 371-0401-030 (BENDIX P/N PTO6CE-8-3S) OR BENDIX PN PTO6A-8-3S
WIRING CODES:115V 10,400 Hz TO J4-A AND B.

652-8082
TP6-2475

DAIT-15A Afountfor AfPU-85()/86(),

Outline and Mounting Diagram
Figure 2-22 (Sheet 1 of 2)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-132

 installation 523-0773942

29.7 E1.17]REF. BEYOND THIS ROLLED EDGE

EACH SIDE, LATERAL WIRING MAYBE DRESSED
-«
7.29 [.287]
MATINGCONNECTOR
11.4 C.45]MAX MOUNTINGSURFACE
192.4\ 90.93[3.580) REF ---e
REAR OF FRONT PANEL
REF MOVEMENTTO 19.0 E.75 -

(7.575] 4.77
DISENGAGECONN
53.98 321.87±0.76 [.188]0, 6HOLES
3 526 0 05 [ 0 0 X -
13.67 [.538] REF O REF ' E2-125J"'"
. ,

[12.672±.030
J3 J2 Jl di J2 J3
SLOT LOCATION SCREW INTO ¯1

ASE.1F3B-032 UNNC28 FELONAUT,NG ,.: L

MAX
3 TOP LOCATIONS

ROLLED EDGE,
2 PL ----

2 30

3.56 ± O.05 [.140 ± .002]

HOLE LOCATING SCREW

E )
UNIT MOUNTING SURFACE

CLEARANCE FOR AIR CIRCULATION --

UNIT MOEUNTING
10.8±0.38 8.9 AIRCRAFT MOUNTING COVER (REAR V1EW)
165.10±0.13 suR E.35]REF
[6.500 ±,005]
-a
12.78[.503]REF [.425±.015] SURFACE

10.47 171.45 _ 8.97±0.41 2

MAX-• 298.45tO.5Illi.750±.020]REF ·
REF
[.412] - -•
· [6.7503 [.353±.016] .3

REF REF 68.6[2.70]REF, CONNECTOR COVER

AND STRAIN REL1EF BRACKET REMOVABLE
206.12
MAX
[8.115]
4.76 9.6 [.381 REF -• •--

REF
(FRONT VlEW)
NOTES:
¯¯

DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES [INCHES].

MOUNT CONNECTORS J1,J2, AND J3 ARE FULL HEIGHT,4 ROW COLLINS THIN LINE.
DASHED LINE INDICATES AREA OF MATING CONNECTOR KIT:
CUTOUT IN MOUNT FOR AIR FLOW CPN 634-1020-001, QTY 3 REûUIRED.

WEIGHT: .68 kg [1.50 LBS].

ALLOW 38.1 (1.50] MIN FOR CABLE BEND IF CABLE CLAMP BRACKET IS DELETED.
AN ASSY OF THE WIRES WITH MOUNT CONNECTORS AND CABLE CLAMP BRACKET CAN BE
168.28 SEPARATED FROM THE REMAINING MOUNT BY LOOSENING CONNECTORCAP SCREWS AND
[6.625] 177.8
I MTG HOLE PATTERN RELEASING TWO QUARTER TURN STUDS. THE SCREWS AND STUDS HAVE FRONT ACCESS
[7.000]
FOR SCREW AND ALLEN HEX DRIVER.

WIRING STRAIN RELIEF CLAMPS MAY BE MOUNTED IN VARIOUS LOCATIONS; NOT

SUPPLIED WITH MOUNT.
I
I THIS DRAWING APPLIES TO UMT-15 (CPN 622-6172-001).

GROUNDBRACKET (CPN 634-2627-001) IS AVAILABLEAS AN OPTIONALPART.

THIS BRACKETIS INSTALLED BETWEEN THE BASICMOUNT AND MOUNT COVER USING
EXISTING HARDWARE. BRACKETHAS 12 HOLES FOR SCREWS. .138-32

281
REF 241.3[9.50]REF (5.16±0.05 [.203±.00230CLEARANCEHOLES IN MOUNT)
REQUIRES PLATE NUT, TAPPED HOLE OR CLEARANCE
298.45[II.750] FORE.I64](No.8) SCREWS 4 HOLES
,

647-3725
TP6-1742

UMT-15Mount for MPU-85( )/86( ),

Outline and Mounting Diagram
Figure 2-21

Revised 30 August 1998 2-131

 installation 523-0773942

7.30±0.061 REAR OF FRONT PANEL MATING CONNECTOR MOUNTING SURFACE

287±.024
03± 64
11.4 [.45]MAX --90.93E2.EBO]ncr J3
( e -

OSEENMG COONN
i
L2- 72 DJ 29.7[1.17]REF,WIRING MAYBE DRESSED LATERALLY
BEYOND THE ROLLED EDGE, TYPICAL EACH SIDE
3.5610.08 [.140f.003]X
13.97±0.41 E 5
4.3210.20 [.170±.008] 53.98
AIR DISCHARGE SURFACE 20.3 57.2
SLOT LOCATING SCREW [.550±.016] [2.125] [.80] 1.8E.07]MAX [2.25]
INTO A .138-32 UNC-28 MAX REF
J2 Jt
FLOATING SELF LOCKING
L
'' ¯
'' --
¯----

---
J1 J2
PLATE NUT - I
L O| O
ROLLED EDGE, 2 PL

194.8
[7 67].
}-
MAX

LET MAX

3.56±0.05 [.140t-OO2]
HOLE LOCATING SCREW
INTO A .138-32UNC-2B
FLOATING SELF LOCKING \ Ë
PLATE NUT n" UNIT MOUNTING SURFACE

MG APPROX
1

o o -

Bi53±.OOl46]

97.79C3.8503
---
12.78 [.503] REF
REF [47 ] REF 5 , e MAX
10.47 | 48,84 APPROX REF
[.4123 - - 104.78 (4.125] REF i
+--[\. 923 .138-32UNC-2B SELF LOCKING,
REF MAX 298.45 [11.750] REF ! FLOATINGNUT PLATE
139.2 (5.48) MAX (REAR VIEW)
??9 1 Ë1529] MAX 2.0 [.08] MAX
69.6
(2.74]
APPROX (5.16±0.05 [.2031.002] O CLEARANCE HOLES IN MOUNT) 66.0
REQUIRES PLATE NUT, TAPPED HOLE OR CLEARANCE HOLE FOR [.2.60]
(NO.8) SCREW, 4 HOLES REF
(FRONT VIEW) .164

111.12
[4.375]

298.45 [11.750] a 652-8220

MOUNTING HOLE PATTERN TP6-3407-025

UMT-14BMount for DPU-85( )/86( ),

Outline and Mounting Diagram
Figure 2-20 (Sheet 2)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-1ßÐ/(2-130 blank)

 installation 523-0773942

NOTES:

(Ï) DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES [INCHES].

(i) WEIGHT: 0.95 Kg E2.1 LBS] NOMINAL. WEIGHT DOES NOT INCLUDE MATING CONNECTORS.

CONNECTOR MOUNTINGACCOMMODATES 4 ROW COLLINS THIN LINE TYPE, NOT SUPPLIED WITH MOUNT. SEE
INSTALLATION CONTROL DRAWING OF PURCHASED UNIT TO FIND CONNECTOR KIT PART NO. AND CRIMP
CONTACT PART NO. TYPICAL CONNECTORWT.W/O CONTACTS IS 0.12g [3.43 OZS..

) BRACKETS W1TH HOLES ARE PROYIDED FOR SECURING STRAIN RELIEF CLAMPS AND GROUND LUGS. STRAIN
RELIEF CLAMPS AND GROUND LUGS ARE NOT SUPPLIED WITH MOUNT.

A _CLEARANCE OF 7.6 E.30] MINIMUM MUST BE MAINTAINED BETWEEN UNIT TOP AND A SOLID SURFACE.

MOUNT IS SECURED TO THE AIRCRAFT WITH TWO (.TG4) NO. B PAN HEAD AND TWO (.164) NO.8
THIS
100°
FLAT HEAD MACHINE SCREWS. THE MOUNT THICKNESS BEFORE THE SCREWS ENTER THE AIRCRAFT
MOUNTING SURFACE IS AS FOLLOWS:
(.164) NO. 8 PAN HEAD-3.8 ± 0.8 [.15 ± .03].

Ll64) NO. 8 FLAT HEAD -11.43

: 0.64 [.450 ± .025].

THIS DRAWING APPLIES TO UMT -148

(CPN 622-7265-001).

THIS MOUNT IS TNTENDED FOR INSTALLATIONS EXTERNAL TO THE PASSENGER AND COCKPIT AREAS
WHERE BLOWER SOUND IS NOT OBJECTIONABLE. ACOUSTICAL DATA IS AVAILABLE FROM THE BLOWER
MANUFACTURER.

BLOWER INFORMATION:
MANUFACTURER: EG&G ROTRON, WOODSTOCK. N.Y. 12498
PART NUMBER: ROTRON 011126, COLLINS 009-0271-010
VOLTAGE:28VOC
CURRENT: 1.5 NOMINAL
SPEED: 19,300 RPM

UNITS HAVE BEEN DESIGNED AND TESTED FOR MOUNTING ON A HORI20NTAL SURFACE. A CHANGE IN
MOUNTING ATTTTUDE WILL REQUIRE TESTING AND APPROVAL BY GENERAL AVTATION ENGINEERTNG.

CENTER OF GRAVITY IS FOR UMT-14B ONLY.

-gg-
DENOTES CENTER OF GRAVITY.

BLOWER CONNECTOR: CPN 371-6917-000 MS-3112E-8-3P)

BLOWER MATING CONNECTOR: CPN 371-0401-030 (BENDIX P/N PTO6CE-8-3S) OR BENDIX PN PTO6A-8-3S
WIRING CODES.+28VDC AT J3-B; VDC AT J3-A AND FAN SENSOR OUTPUT AT J3-C
-28

INVERTER INFORMATK)N:
MANUFACTURER:EG+G ROTRON, WOODSTOCK, N.Y. 12498
>ART NUMBER: ROTRON 504557,COLLINS 009-0271-030.

LOW SPEED WARNING DETECTOR: OPTIONAL

CPN:622-7154-OO2.SEE FMM-85 INSTRUCTION BOOK.

652-8220
TP6-3407-O25

UMT-14B Mount for DPU-85( )/86( ),

Outline and Mounting Diagram
Figure 2-20 (Sheet 1 of 2)

12evised30 ilugust 1993 2-128

 installation 523-0773942

7.30±0.061 REAR OF FRONT PANEL MATING CONNECTOR MOUNTING SURFACE

[.287 ±.024]
125.73±0.61 [3.530]REI¯ 321.871 0.76
I 11.4 [.45] MAX - 90.93 se
|_12.672 29.7 [1.17]REF, WIRING MAYBE DRESSED LATERALLY
--

(4.950±.024] © • •
±
MOVEMENT TO
.030]

3.5610.08 [.1401.003] BEYOND THE ROLLED EDGE, TYPICAL EACH SIDE

DISENGAGE CONN 5
4.L3210LO2CO 1G70+ 3 90 O 52 80
AIR DISCHARGE SURFACE a 1.8 Ë.07
UNC-2B
12 ] MAX [2
INTO A .138-32 MAX REF
FLGATING SELF LOCKING
J2 dl
' ¯ "
ATE NUT, J L
--' - - - -
¯

--- ----

/I ¯ -
A

ROLLED EDGE, 2 PL
'

.164-32UNC-28 SELF
LOCKING NUTS APPEAR ON
I ON OPP SIDE OF MATERIAL,
ELACH
Ë179 SIDE

MAx
O O
O 175.01
[6.890]
o o 209.0

MAX
AIR INLET

3.56±0.05 [.1401.002] -

HOLE LOCATING SCREW

INTO A .138-32 UNC-28
FLOATING SELF LOCKING
ATE NUT, UNIT MOUNTING SURFACE .

suNITFAMCEG
O O O -

o O APPROX

L 8.97±0.41 r-¯ -

[.353±.016] k_ 62.2 9.68

i
12.78 [.503] REF 12.06
97.79C3.850]
REF [.475] REF [2.45] [.381]
10.47 48.84 APPROX REF
E.412]- - 104.78 [4.125] REF [I. 923]
MAX e
.138-32UNC-28 SELF LDCKING
REF 298.45 [11.750] REF •
FLOATING NUT PLATE
139.2 [5.48] MAX
69.6 (REAR VIEW)
[2.74]
APPROX (5.16±0.05 [.203i.OO2] O CLEARANCE HOLES IN MOUNT) 66.0
REQUIRES PLATE NUT, TAPPED HOLE OR CLEARANCE HOLE FOR [2.60]
.164 (NO.8) SCREW, 4 HOLES REF
(FRONT VIEW)

111.12
[4. 375]

298.45 [11 750] 652-8009

TP6-2233-025
MOUNTING HOLE PATTERN

UMT-11,A Mount for DPU 85( )/86( ),

Outline and Mounting Diagram
Figure 2-19 (Sheet U

Revised 30 August 1993 2-127

 installation 523-0773942
298.58 EJl.755] MAX
5.94 [.234] MIN
¯¯
3.76 [.l48],4PL o°S
MAX INDICATOR FRONT FRAME I O NOTES|
°a° --
ooooo oooo oo I 48.01 THIS DRAWING DEPICTS THE MFD-85 (CPN 622-6090-XXX),
[l.890]MAX MFD-85A (CPN 622-7236-XXX), MFD-858(CPN 622-7876-XXX),
REF AND MFD-85C (CPN 622-9849-XXX) MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAYS
--
AND THE IMT-300 MOUNTING TRAY (CPN 622-4333-001/-002).
4.44
.250 R MAX,8PL [.175],2PL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS [INCHESJ.
- - - --
REF
COOLING AIR HOLE PATTERNS ARE LOCATED ON THE TOP,
BOTTOM, AND BOTH SIDES OF THE MFD-85. CIRCULATION
OF COOLING AIR IS REQUIRED TO ACHIEVE OPTIMUM
166.6 RELIABILITY. SEE INSTRUCTION BOOK.
I 117.78 I ST AIGHT
±o.as
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: MFD-85 4.17kg[s.2LB].
IMT-300 0.18 kg [0.4 LB].
59.54 MFD-85A/8/C 4.35kg E9.6 LB]
[2.3 ]MAX" -
DENOTES CENTER OF GRAVITY.
CONNECTOR INFORMATION:
,- UNIT-GONNEGTOR Pl. 5 ENSITY-CIR€Utm
CONNECTORMS27508E16F35AB (CPN 359-0667-200).
.138-32UNC-28 -- --
OO -
FLATHEADSCREWMTG,4PL _
MATING CONNECTORJ1: MS27473T16F35SB (CPN 359-0635
-180)
. 32.54 CIRCULAR HIGH DENSITY, CABLE MOUNTING PLUG
(I.28Û CONNECTORWITH CRIMP REMOVABLECONTACTS
- MS27491-22D
---. MAX (CPN 359-0608-110),
BOTTOM -OR-
3.53 _ _ MS27484T16F35SB (CPN 359-0645-170) CIRCULAR, HIGH
3.00 (.139]
[.IIS] DENSITY, CABLE MOUNTING PLUG CONNECTORWITH
RIGHTANGLE GROUNDING FINGERS AND CRIMP REMOVABLECONTACTS
MS27491-22D (CPN 359-0608-110).
150.62C5.930] REF,2PL FLOATING, SELF LOCKINGTWO LUG NUT,4PL
CPN 334-2036-020 (KAYNAR PN FI9716-06) STRAIN RELIEFS: SOTRA 7N5 2J1:CPN
156.62±0.25 MATINGCONNEC OR AND STRAIN RELIEF CLAMPS GHT S 359-
[6.166 ±.OlO] 320.0 [12.60] MAX 0637-050).
RIGHT ANGLE-MS27507F16 (CPN 359-
45°, 0637-150).
4PL
RECOMMENDEDPANELCUTOUT APPROX FOR MFD-85C "RDR" IS REPgACED BY "TFC"
32.64 3\4.4 E12.38]MAX
[1.285] .MAV" IS REPLACED BY "R/N.
-•
.9 [.47 MAX -

04
REF REF,4 PL
4]
O PERMISSIBLE PANEL THKNS
159.51 [6.280]MAX R,4PL 155.09(6.106]REF
PIN 1
[2 úËJ ^PER
-- "°¾
o oooo 000
- -
OOOO OOOO
OO -PIN55
42O 40
- -
] 14224
MAX
116.10
,/
MAX I [4 5E
CG
65.79
[2.59]
58.4 \ O
(2.30] O OOOO OOO
APPROX OOO OOOO
REF,4PL I.3(.05]REF
O.99 MAX,2PL 3.4 4
15.7
[.62]MAX,2PL
[.039] E.12]MAX
REF 3 AFPRox REAR VIEW WITHOUTMOUNTINGTRAY
33.0 325.1 [12.80] MAX
CENTER I 101.6[4.00] ' [1.30] -
[10],2PL MIN,2PL
DISPLAY
647-3646
AREA REQUIRED FOR LATCHING BAR
MFD-85A Multifunction Display and IMT-300 Mount,
Outline and Mounting Diagram
Figure 2-15
Revised 30 August 1993 2-121
 installation 523-0773942
KEYWAY ORIENTATION CHART
NOTES: 1 TOP P1 BOT P2 TOP P2 BOT P3 TOP P3 BOT EQPT TYPE CPN WEIGHT
-006, -012,
DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES[[NCHES] MPU-85 622-6091-002, -011, -021 7.4 kg [16.3 LBS)
-005.
MPU-85 622-6091-004, -00X 7.7 kg [17.0 LBS)
NOMINALWEIGHT: SEE TABLE
MPU-85A 622-7250-OOX 7.4 kg [16.3 LBS]
UNIT CONNECTORS P1, P2 AND P3 ARE FULL HEIGHT, 4 ROW COLLINS THIN LINE. MPU-858 622-7251-00X 7.7 kg [17.0 LBS]
MATING CONNECTOR KlT: CPN 634-1020-001, QTY 3 REQUlRED.
MATlNG 5NAP-lN CONTACT: CPN 372-2514-010 OR 372-2514-080. MPU-85C 622-7252-00X 7.7 kg [17.0 LBS]
MPU-86A 622-7253-00X 7.4 kg [16.3 LBS)
SURFACES NOTED CONTAIN VENTLATON HOLES. AN ADEQUAW LEVEL OF VENTlLATION
MUST BE ESTABLlSHED TO THE UN1T TO PROMDE REL1ABLEOPERATON. MPU-86C 622-7254-00X 7.7 kg [17.0 LBS]
MPU-86D 622-7255-00X 7.4 kg [16.3 LB5]
DENOTES CENTER OF Gi'AVITY.
MPU-85C 622-7454-XXX 7.7 kg [17.0 LBS]
REFERENCE MOUNT: UMT-15 CPM 622-6172-XXX .
MPU-86G 622-7715-00X 7.7 kg [17.0 LBS]
MPU-86K 622-7718-001, -002, -003
THIS DRAMNC APPLIES TO: SEE TABLE 7.6 kg [16.7 LBS]
MPU-86K 622-7718-004 7.9 kg [17.5 LBS)
THIS UNIT REQUIRES AN AlR FLOW OF 48 LB/HOUR/100 WATTS OF
[100°F]. MPU-86H 622-7716-00X 7.5 kg [16.6 LBS]
DiŠŠlPATED ENERGY WHEN THE UN1T INLET AIR TEMPERATURE IS 38°C
MPU-85H 622-7455-00× 7.4 kg [16.3 LBS]
UN11S HAVE BEEN DESIGNED AND TESTED FOR MOUNTNG ON A HORIZONTAL SURFACE.
A CHANCE IN MOUNTÏÑGÃTTITUDE \MLL REQUIRE NE lEsliNG ANU APPROVÃL BY - R-622-8023-OOX--- 7.1 kg 17.0..LBS).
GENERAL AVIAT10N ENGINEERING. MPU-86L 622-7874-00X 7.7 kg [17.0 LBS)
REFERENCE MOUNT: UMT-15H CPN 822-0056-001 FOR MPU-84 HELICOPTER MOUNTING. MPU-85M 622-8445-00X 7.7 kg [17.0 LBS]
MPU-85N 622-8679-XXX 7.9 kg [17.4 LBS)
MPU-86N 622-8714-XXX 7.7 kg [17.0 LBS]
MPU-85R 622-9008-00X 7.7 kg [17.0 LBS]
MPU-86R 622-9010-00X 7.8 kg [17.3 LBS)
MPU-855 622-9284-00X 7.7 kg [17.0 LBS]
MPU-865 622-9286-00X 7.9 kg [17.4 LBS]
MPU-85U 622-9966-00X 7.7 kg [17.0 LBS]
MPU-86U 622-9967-00X 7.7 kg [17.0 LBS)
MAX MPU-84 622-9684-OOX 7.7 kg [17.0 LBS]
49.15
88.9 APPROX [1.935]
[3.50]
r
¯[ o7]MAX REF
Pi P2 P3
194.6
o o 160 160 '!60
r
203±025 138.4 APPROX
E 080± 010T [5 45] 82.55 REF 7 62
[3.250] [.30
]REF 326
[6 OVER CONNECTORS 5 REF
MAX 190 50±O5l
[77 DARKENEDSEGMENT INDICATES EXTENDED .
PORTION OF PIN. REF ONLY SEE CHART FOR [7.500±.020]
CORRECT ORIENTAT10N 647-3726
TP6-1743-Of4
MPU-85G/86G Multifunction Processor Unit,
Outline and Mounting Diagram
Figure 2-16
Revised 30 August 1993 2-122
 installation 523-0773942

76.2

APPROX
CENTER OF
79.75 DISPLAY 178.3
(3.14] (7.02]
45°REF,2PL REF,2PL
194.8[7.67]REF ·

151.9[5.98) REF 75.9

5.6C.223-= 116.8 [4.60] APPROX [2.99]REF
157.OE6.183REF
259.ILIO.20]MAX 15I.9C5.98]
270.5 (10.65] MAX

-•
3.IBC.125]
-•
19.8 [.78.]MAX IFINCLINOMETER 1S MOUNTED

NOTES:
|¾øo.is C.oos] WEIGHT: 3.5 kg [7.7 LBS) APPROX. WHEN UNIT IS USED IN ADI APPLICATIONS, USE THE INCLINOMETERPER
-5.79E.228) 0,4HOLES
THE FOLLO½1NG TABLE:
REAR CONNECTOR: MS27508E20F41A (COLLINS PN 359-0667-260)
CiRCULAR CONNECTOR.
147.57[5.810 R,4PL
147.57[5.BIO)
2.3C,09]R,8PL EFD
INCLINOMETER
MATING CONNECTOR: MS27473T20F41S (COLLINS PN 359-0635-420)
--
OR MS27484T20F41S (COLLINS PN 359-0645-500). BOTH OF THESE T/L CPN CPN
75.79 (2 905]
[2.905] CIRCULAR CONNECTORS HAVE CRIMP REMOVABLE CONTACTS,
MS27491-20 (CPN 359-0608-030). 634-2056-001 N.A.
BLACK

622-6535-002/-012
STRAIN RELIEF: MS27506F20-2 (COLLINS PN 359-0637-070) STRAIGHT CLAMP .

634-2056-002 GRAY N.A

45*,4PL 622-6342-004/-014
| / TYPE OR MS27507F20 (COLL1NS PN 359-0637-170) 90 DEGREE CLAMP
61.09 63.63 TYPE OR MS27670F20 (COLLINS PN 359-0073-240) 90 DEGREE CABLE
[2.405] [2.505] 61.09 63.63 622-6535-021 634-4320-001 BLACK 5 V DC
TlE TYPE
[2.405] [2.505]
MOUNTING ARRANGEMENTS: FOR FRONT MOUNT1NGUSE INDICATED PANEL 622-6342-023/501 634-4320-003 BLACK 28 V DC
122.17 127.25
[4.810] CUTOUT WITH MOORING PLATE, (COLLINS PN 634-2803-001) OR, TAP
[5.010) _
PANEL FOR 10-32UNC-2A MOUNTING SCREWS IN ACCORDANCE WITH
122.17 I 127.25 622-6535-022 634-4320-002 GRAY 5 V DC
ARINC SPECIFlCATION 408A. FOR REAR MOUNTlNG USE 1NDICATED
E4.810] [5.010] PANEL CUTOUT WlTH MOORING PLATE, (COLLINS PN 634-2803-001).
622-6342-024/502 634-4320-004 GRAY 28 V DC
DIMENSlONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES[lNCHES].
89.59(3.527
2PL THIS DRAWlNG APPLIES TO EFD-86A (COLLINS PN 622-6535-001/-002/-011/-012
/-021/-022, EFD-86 (COLLINS PN 622-6342-003/-004/-013/-014/-023/-024
/-501/-502 AND EFD-86S (COLLINS PN 622-8677-001). MOUNT INCLINOMETER BY UTlLIZING THE TWO SCREWS ON THE FACE OF
-THE-UNIT--BISGARO EFB GOVER PEATE-WHEN--USING-tNGL‡NOME"? ACC'
76.33 634-4320-XXX. INCLINOMETERSHALL BE LEVELED BY INSTALLER.
y DENOTES CENTER OF GRAVITY.
[3.005] 76.33
[3.005] COOLING AIR HOLE PATTERNS ARE LOCATED ON THE TOP, BOTTOM, SlDES
152.65[6.OlOJ 0 0.13E.005] AND REAR SURFACE OF THE EFD-86A. CIRCULATION OF COOLING
179.\7 152.65C6.OIO]
5.79[.228]O,4HOLES AIR IS REQUIRED TO ACHIEVE OPT1MUM RELIABILITY.
[7.054], (MOORINGPLATE MTGlOR
2PL [10-32 UNC-2B], 4 HOLES
PANEL CUTOUT
(TAPPED PANEL MTG) FOR REAR MOUNTING

647-3855
PANEL CUTOUT TP6-1965-015
FOR FRONT MOUNTING

EFD-86 6013, -014, -023,

and EFD-86A (-011,
-024)
-012, -021, -0ß2)

Electronic Flight DisplaFaOutle e and Mounting Diagram

Revised 30 August 1993 2-120

 I

installation 523-0773942

NOTES:

WEIGHT: 3.5 kg [7.7 LBl APPROX.

REAR CONNECTOR: MS27508E20F41A (COLLINS PN 359-0667-260) ClRCULAR CONNECTOR.

MATING CONNECTOR MS27473T20F41S (COLLINS PN 359-0635-420) OR MS27484T20F41S (COLLINS PN 359-0645-500). BOTH OF THESE ClRCULAR CONNECTORS
HAVE CRlMP REMOVABLECONTACTS,

STRAIN RELIEF: MS27506F20-2 (COLLINS PN 359-0637-070) STRAIGHT CLAMP TYPE OR MS27507F20 (COLLINS PN 359-0637-170) 90 DEGREE CLAMP TYPE OR
MS27670F20 (COLLINS PN 359-0073-240) 90 DEGREE CABLE TIE TYPE.

MOUNTINGARRANGEMENTS: THE UNlT MAY BE REAR MOUNTED WITH MOORING PLATE (COLLINS PN 634-2803-001) AND 10-32 SCREWS OR FRONT MOUNTED wiTH
INSTRUMENTCLAMP PN 123-5060N-F OBTAINED FROM DEXTER-WILSON CORP., SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98103.

01MENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES[lNCHES).

THIS DRAWINGAPPLIES TO EFD-86 (COLLINS PN 622-6342-001/-002/-011/-012/-021/-022/-121/-122).

DENOTES CENTER OF GRAVITY.

COOLING AIR HOLE PATTERNS ARE LOCATED ON THE TOP, BOTTOM S]DES AND REAR SURFACE OF THE EFD-86. CIRCULATION OF COOLINGAIR IS REQUIRED TO
ACHIEVE OPTIMUM RELIABILTY.

WHEN UNIT IS USED IN AD! APPLICATIONS, USE THE INCLINOMETERPER THE FOLLOWlNGTABLE:

INCLINOMETER
EFD
T'L CPN PAINT LIGHTING
CPN
COLOR VOLTAGE
622-6342-001/-011 634-2056-001 BLACK N.A.

622-6342-002/-012 634-2056-002 GRAY N.A.

634-4320-001 BLACK 5 V DC
622-6342-021
634-4320-003 BLACK 28 V DC
634-4320-002 GRAY SV DC
622-6342-022
634-4320-004 GRAY 28 V DC
634-4320-001 BLACK 5 V DC
622-6342-121
634-4320-003 BLACK 28 V DC

634-4320-002 GRAY SV DC
622-6342-122
634-4320-004 GRAY 28 V DC

MOUNT INCLINOMETERBY UTILIZINGTHE TWO SCREWS ON THE FACE OF THE UNIT. DISCARD EFD COVER PLATE WHEN USING INCLINOMETERASSY 634-4320-XXX.
INCLINOMETERSHALL BE LEVELED BY INSTALLER.

HIRF INSTALLATION:

AIRPLANE PANEL MUST BE REWORKED AS FOLLDWS: THE FRONT OR BACKSIDE OF THE INSTRUMENT PANEL MUST BE FREE OF PAINT AS INDICATEDIN CROSS
HATCHED AREAS IN DETAIL "A". USE CHROMATE CONVERSION PER MIL-C-5541 CLASS C OR EQUIVALENT ON UNPAINTED AREAS.

HIRF MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT:

FOR MOUNTING USE INDICATEDPANEL CUTOUT WiTH MOORING PLATE (COLLlNS PN 634-2803-001) OR TAP PANEL FOR 164-32 UNC-2A MOUNTING SCREW IN
ACCORDANCE WiTH ARINC SPECIFICATIONS 408A. FOR REAR MOUNTINGUSE INDiCATED PANEL CUTOUT ½1TH MOORING PLATE (COLLINS PN 634-2803-001) AS
IND1CATEDIN DETAIL "B".
647-3786
TP6-1846-024-2

EFD-86 Electronic Flight Display, Outline and Mounting Diagram

Figure ß-13 (Sheet 2)

Revised 30 August 1993 2-119

 OTHER
NO. 1 NO. 2 ACFT
TlE
DPU--85G/86G MPU-BSG|86G DPU-85G|86G
EQiblI|i SYSTEMS
AR EDAR I

------------ ------------------ ------- 222

HDG 26 V AC H 60 0
------------ --------------------------
56 -6 191
HDG 26 Y AC C

----------------- --------------------------118 08
HDG VALID 118
NO. 1
-
COMPASS
--- ----------------- J1
DG MODE (+) (FREE GYRO) 95 135 SYS

T T T I
--------------------- -------------------------- 200
HDG X 96 96
--------------------- -------------------------·1 210
HDG Y 1 101
--------------------- --------------------------1CD 211
HDG Z 100
I

--------------------------------------- --------
------------ --------------------------- 272
HDG 26 V AC H 60 60
-------------------------------------------- ----------------
------------ 518
HDG 26 V AC C 56 56

--- --------118
-------------------------------------- 118 258
HDG VAUD
NO. 2
-
I --------------------------------------- --------135
COMPASS
------------------------------- 294
DG MODE (+) (FREE GYRO) 95 SS

i I T T T T
·-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

HDG X 96 96 259
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------104

HDG Y 104 260

-------- ------------------------------------------100 100 261
HDG Z

---------------------------------------- 224
ATT 26 V AC H 45 15
---------------------------------------- 10E
ATT 26 V AC c 46 16
I
---------------------------------------------117 117 201
ATT VALID

----------------------------------------- 202
ATT PITCH X 88 88 -
AT DE
------------------------------------------
84 8i -03
ATT PITCH Y SYS
------------------------------------------ 201
ATT PITCH Z 92 92

T T T I
------------------------------------------ 205
ATT ROLLX Sg se
-------------------------------------------

ATT ROLL Y 85 85 206

-------------------------------------------

ATT ROLL Z 81 81 207

'PP' P P1
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------- 45 274
ATT 26 Y AC H 45
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------- 46 520
ATT 26 V AC C 46
I
------------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------117 251
ATT VALID 117

---------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------- 252
ATT PITCH X 88 -A DE
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------- 84 253
ATT PITCH Y 84 US
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------- 92 254
ATT PITCH Z 92
I
T T T T
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------- 255
ATT ROLL X 89 89
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------- 85 256
ATT ROLL Y 85
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------- 81 257
ATT ROLLZ 81

G1/86G G2
PCROUMOS) LRON) DNM
DP MPU-85G/86G MPU-85G/66G DPU 8 86G -
DM 42 (PO 2
RF. EQ1MIS & R A A R E A & EORIS I P. A
II I¡¡III I il
' i 1 i
P P IP
--------
DME CLOCK H 23 131 25 28 131 23
--------
DME CLOCK L 24 120 29 32 130 24
--------------
SHIELD 21 21
312
--------- ------ -- -
LRN CLOCK H 24 708 32 32 32 1311 24
---------------- --
LRN CLOCK L 25 709 36 36 36 36 1312 1 25 I
I I I I I I
I I I I I I i
I IP PI I P PIP PI I IP
--------
DME SYNC H 39 122 33 36 122 39
-------
DME SYNC L 38 126 37 40 126 38
-------------- -
SHIELD 37 37

---------------- --
LRN SYNC H 28 710 40 40 40 40 1314 28
--------------- --
LRN SYNC L 29 711 44 44 44 44 1315 29 I
I I I I I I I I
I I I I ' 1111
I IP PI I P PIP PI I IP
-------
DME DATA H 31 142 17 20 112 31
-------
DME DATA L 30 138 21 24 123 30
-------------- -
SHIELD 29 29

-------- ------ -- -
LRN DATA H 26 706 24 24 24 24 1308 26
--------------- --
LRN DATA L 27 707 28 28 28 28 1309 9 27 I

AUDIO IDENT I
--------------
SHIELD 17 17
----------10
DMEVALID 146 41 44 lif 10
-----------
DMEHOLD 42 NO. 1 I I i NO. 2 42
i
tri CTL-32 I I CTL-32 ///
A I i i a
i I i I i I i I
------------- ----
DME HOLD MODE H 112 112 112 112 H
------------- --------------------------------------- ---------------------------------102
DPU TEMP WARN
Mru Trur wARN 110
CPU TEMP WARN 102
NO. 1 EADI NO. 1 EHSI NO. 2 EADI NO. 2 EHSI
EFD--85/86( ) EFD-85/86( ) EFD-85/86( ) EFD-85/86( MFO-85A
) TO AIRCRAFT
-
ANNUNICATOR
I I i i PANEL
MFD-85A ·------- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------35
TEMPWARN
EAD: NO. 1 TEMP WARN g
------- ------------------------
EHSI NO. 1 TEMP WARN g
------- ------------------------------------------
EADI NO. 2 TEMP WARN g
------- -----------------------------------------------------------
EHSI NO. 2 TEMP WARN g

ADNC812A AHNCO G1/86G ADNC822A ANH

i CC-86 DPU 8 MPU 86G -85
5
& a a EDMIS & R A & A EQlNIS A E faßIS &
lill I 11 i II i i i
----- - ------ ------ -------
AHRS TO DPU CSDB (A) 24 228 7 7 278 24
------- ---------------------
AHRS TO DPU CSDB (B) 22 229 11 I 11 279 22
23 | 23
----- - ------ --------------
AHRS TO MPU CSDB (A) 32 235 7 7 286 32
------- --------------------
AHRS TO MPU CSDB (B) 30 237 11 11 287 30

----122 -
FCC TO EFIS BUS A (A) 5 65 15 15
----
FCC TO EFIS BUS A (B) 131 6 66 19 19 I I

------
EFIS XMIT BUS A (A) 76 318 16
------108
EFIS XMIT BUS A (B) 319 20 I I I

------- -----122 -
FCC TO EFIS BUS 8 (A) 68 15 5 15
------- -----
FCC TO EFIS BUS B (B) 131 i 69 19 6 19

EFIC XMIT DUS B (A) 76 1071 15

•
EEIS XMT DUS B (D) 100 1072 20

------------------- - -------------
o MPU/DPU FCC BUS CSDB (A) 57 16 16 57
------------------- - ---------------

MPU/DPU FCC BUS CSDB (B) 58 20 20 58

NO. 1
VNI-80D
 NO. 1 NO. 2
NO. 1 NO. 2
MSI-80F DPU-85G/86G MPU-85G/86G DPU-85G|86G MSI-80F
TIE TIE
POINTS & POINTS
FUNCTlONS

·---------
IAS BUG DATA H 18 861 6
---------
IAS BUG DATA L 6 802 10 i
P
---------
IAS BUG CLOCK H 21 861 27
---------
lAS BUG CLOCK L 11 i 865 31 e
77 061 I 18
BC GC2 6
LAC-80
81 061 24
100 965 I 11
-------------
LONG ACC H D DE
-------------
LONG ACC L F 00 I
--------------
ACCEL MON E I 101 I

FCC 86
EADI EADI
I COMPOSITE . COMPOSITE
---------------
C 125 125 125 125 3
+15 V DC A 6
-15 --------------- 11
V DC B 6
129 129 129 129
EHSI EHSI
NO 1 I COMPOSITE 1 I COMPOSITE NO. 2
ADC 8 2A I I ADC-82A

-------------- -
ADC DATA H 3 2314 93 93 93 93 2317 32
--------------
ADC DATA L 3 r 2315 97 97 97 97 2318 31
(AUADCUS)
----------------
ADC VALID 3 120 120 120 120 37
-
ADC +28 V DC PRI PWR 3 38 28 V
II I I I I I
NO.1 i I I I I I NO.2
ADF--60( ) I I ADF-60( )
i 1 I 1 I i I
----------- ---
LO 33 801 22 22 22 22 827 33
ADF ------------
SIN 32 802 14 14 14 14 826 32
EQUIPMENT -----------
COS 28 803 18 18 18 18 828 28

I i : I i i I
-C ----
804 90 133 133 90 829

I I I I
I I
·-
ADF +28 V DC SWITCHED 48 I I I I i 48

-------
PARK (GND=PARK) 25 i i i i 25
I i I
CRU-90 REFER TO FMS-90 SYSTEM I I REFER TO LRN-85 SYSTEM CRU-85
(P/O FMS-9 ) IB FOR INSTALLATIOND FOR INSTALLATIOND (P/O LRN-85)
STRAPPING STRAPPING

T
' T T T T
' T I
-----------------------
BRG TO WPT X 11 716 23 23 23 23 1322 18
-----------------------
BRG TO WPT Y 11 717 27 27 27 27 1323 I 19
----------------------·
BRG TO WPT Z 20 718 31 31 31 31 1324 20

i T T T T T
' T I
'
---------------
LRN DESIRED COURSE X 5 713 47 47 47 47 1318 52
---------------
I I I I
LRN DESIRED COURSE Y 5 714 48 48 48 48 1319 53
---------------
LRN DESIRED COURSE Z 5 r 715 52 52 52 52 1320 54
I I I I I
I I
-· -
XTK DEV H (+RT) (LOW LEVEL) 39 702 150 150 150 150 1302 39
-- • •
XTK DEV L (+LT) (LOW LEVEL) 40 701 154 154 154 154 1301 40 I
I I I I I I I 1
---
TO/FROM (+TO) (LOW LEVEL) 41 i 704 149 149 149 149 1305 41
---
TO/FROM (+FR) (LOW LOVEL) 42 i 705 153 153 MFD-85A 153 153 1306 42
---------------
JOYSTICK DATA H (OUT) 6 734 151 A
--------------- I
JOYSTICK DATA L (OUT) 6 735 155 TEXT
32 1341 32 H MODE
40 1342 33 L (PAGE
--------------------
TEXT MODE H 3 737 17 DATA)
·-------------------
(PAGE DATA) L 3 738 25

P P P P COMPASS
---------- -----------
H 46 639 46 H
LRN REF PHASE
ASE
(26 V, 400 Hz) C---------- -----------
47 47 C, (42060
Hz)
I I
I I
I I
I I
I NO. 1 NO. 2 I
AHC-85 AHC-85
I I

T T T
'
------------------
X 9 34 34 9
MAG HDG Y------------------ 10 35 35 10

---------------
MAG HDG VALID 56 i 9 9 56
2
-
NO. 1 H 66 57 57 66 H 6
26 V HDG REF C 67 58 58 67 C HDG
-- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
REF
HDG INPUT LOGIC (OPEN=MAG) 1 1
OUTPUT SYNCHRO STRAPPING 'D 63 63
----------------
STAPPING COM 15 15
·--
MAG/TRUE OUTPUT DATA REF 53 53
CRU-90 NO. 1 NO. 2 CRU-90
NO. 1 FCC-86 NO. 2
(P/O FMS- ) DPU-85G/86G MPU-85G/86G DPU-85G/86G (P/O LRN-85)
MSP-85( ) MSP-85( )
IE . E AE& RA&AE E 1EDE
111 IIIII *
I I I
157 157 1 7 157
------------------
NAV VALID 14 14

·--------------------- ---------- - -
APPROACH MODE I ...
( ) ---O-- I
------------
APPROACH MODE 33
IRIIIIIIIIEl
----------------
V-D/VLF SW POSITION 51

P
----
L 35
126 I
AC STEERING SIGNAL P P
12C 35

·--------
AC STEERING VALID 13

13

NAV VALI
29 29
-
BANK CMD ENABLE

-----
118 LNV MODE 1 I

109-----LNV MODE 2 109

8 1 B
-
I P/O LH XFER RELAY P/O RH XFER RELAY
SH 2 FOR EFIS-85B(2)/86B(2) SH 2 FOR EFIS-85B(2)/86B(2) Cd
SH 3 FOR EFIS-858(12)/868(12) SH 3 FOR EFIS-858(12)/86B(12)
 EFlS-858(12)/86B(12)

+2N8 1DC G1/86G G2/86G +2N8

DCPN- 51E/G
DPU 8 MPU-85G|86G DPU 8 852E/G 2DC
MFD-85A CHP-85D DCP
FUNCTIONS PWR BUS & D & R & PWR BUS

--------------
AWG 20
DPU PWR 78 83
--------------
(AWG 20)
MPU PWR 22 94
94 83
-------------_
(AWG20 (AWG 20)
EHSI PWR
--------------
(AWG 20 (AWG 20)
EADIPWR
--------------
(AWG201 (AWG 20)
PWR GND 27 16 27
PWR D 21 90 (AWG 20)

AWG 20) (AWG 20)

PWS CNO . CC 66
87 87
EHSI PWR CND
EADIPWR 10 Li I I I I 54 |
- - I I
55 55
PWR GND BUS I I PWR GND BUS
1 (AWG 20) (AWG 20) I (AWG 20) (AWG 20) (AWG 20) I (AWG20) I (AWG 20) I (AWG 20) I
-------------------- -------- - - ---
CHASSIS GND 26 160 47 160 160 S 160 26

------ -------- - - ---

Á+5V LEGEND 31 T 31
CHOOSEONE ----- -------- - - ---
1+28 V LEGEND 32 U 32
-------------------- -------- - - ---33
LEGEND GND 39 V 33
1 NO. 1 NO. 1 NO. 2 NO. 2
I i EADI I EHSI I EHSI i EADI I
1 I EFD-85/ I EFD-85/ I EFD-BS/ I EFD-85/
i 86( ) i 86( ) i 86( ) 86( )
I I A1 lulAI Al I I
I i I I i I I
------------------
CHAS I NGND I. L L L

PWR I.ION O R
SHIELD I T T I
y q q q q
ZINTH-EADI -------------------- -------- -------
34 f I f 34
ZINTCONT-EADI ------------------ -------- -------
35 N N 35
ZINTL-EADI ---------------------- -------- -------
36 M I I M 36
SHIELD-------------------------- -------- -------37
37
T
ZINTH-EHSI --------------------- -------- -------
38 f f 38
ZINTCONT-EHSI ------------------ -------- -------
39 N I N 39
ZINTL-EHSi ---------------------- -------- -------
40 M M 40
-------------------------- -------- -------
SHIELD 41 41

109 10
-
TO SHEE 7 SHEET7
0 M

DRIVEXFER------

42
NORM 42 9

RH
LH I XFER
XFER RELAY
RELAY
3 SWIT HES
T T
-----------------
LF PlLOT : 49
-----------------
PF PlLOT 2 50 OPTIONALWIRES THATMAYBE REMOTEDFOR
-----------------
UNE FORWARD, PAGE FORWARD,AND CHAPTERFORWARD.
CF PlLOT Õ 13
PILOT GND 12

+28 V CONVERT (LIGHTING) 52 FOR 28-V UGHTING,CONNECTPIN 31 TO 28-V UGHTINGBUS AND

5 V (UGHTlNG) 16 JUMPER PIN 52 TO 46. FOR 5-V UGHTING,CONNECTPIN 46 TO
27.5 (LIGHTING) 31 5-V LIGHTlNGBUS, AND LEAVEPINS 31 AND 52 OPEN.

NO. 1 NO. 2
D G1/86G G2/86G DCP-85E/G
DPU 8 MPU-85G|86G DPU 8
1 J2 21. A2 & R ul Al &
-------------- ------ I
DPU DATAH 1 28 I I 28 1
-------------- -------
I I
DPU DATAL 2 32 i 32 2
I I I I i i
i i I i I i i
-------------- ------
DCP DATA H 21 36 36 21
DCP DATA L -------------- -------
1 I i i
22 40 40 22
43
I 47 i
I i
------------- -------
MPU DATA H 4 42 4
------------- -------
MPU DATA L 5 46 5
I I I

------------- -------
DCP DATA H 24 34 24
------------- -------
1 I I I
DCP DATA L 25 38 25
I I I I
--------------- ------
NAV DATA 7 X S 7
----------------- -------
MRCONT 10 F F 10
CRS-CNTL -------- ------·
11 G G 11
CRS-SYNC --------- - -------
12 H H 12
HDG-SYNC ---------------- -------
13 J J 13
CRS-H ------------------- ------
14 K K 14
CRS-L ------------------ -----
15 L L 15

HDG-H ------------------ -------

16 M M 16
HDG-L ------------------ -------
17 N N 17

------------ ------
CRS DIRECTION 18 A A 18
------------ -------
HDG DIRECTON 19 8 B 19
------------------ ------·
+5 OUT 20 P P 29
------------------ -------
+5 RTN 30 R R 30
---------------- -------
CONN KEY 47 S 47
FCC-86
PRE-80

--------- -------
ALT ALERT (GND=ALERT) 44 3
-
16
i I
-
AILERONMISTRIM (AP/FD ANN 22) 40 48 18 I 10 I
ELEVATORMISTRIM (AP/FD ANN 23) 19 52 52 19
--
RUDDERMISTRIM (AP/FD ANN 24) 41 | 47 47 41 i

LH. CAT II RFOUFST SWITCH OR STRAP

OPT10N R.H. I
------------------ ------ REQUESTIS ENABLEDWITHJ2-43 TO GND. DISABLEDWHENOPEN
CAT Il REQUEST 43 C 43
--------------------------- i SWITCHMAYBE ENABUNGOR DISABUNGFUNCTIONOR J2-43 I
GND 47 47
KEY 1 MAY BE STRAPPED TO GND OR LEFT OPEN PERMANENTLY• 1
KEY 48 AS DESlRED 48
-
1 (CRS SEL ENBL VOR 1) 50 50
-
2 (CRS SEL ENBL VOR 2) 49 49
·-----------
3 (RESERVED) 29 29
------------
4 (RESERVED) 30 30
·-
5 (CRS SEL ENBL LRN 1) 17 17
--
6 (CRS SEL ENBL LRN 2) 16 16
--
7 (BRG PTR ENBL VOR 1) 32 32
--
8 (BRG PTR ENBL VOR 2) 33 33
--
9 (BRG PTR ENBL ADF 1) 10 10
STRAP 10 (BRG PTR ENBL ADF 2) 11 STRAP 11
11 (BRG PTR ENBL LRN 1) 13 13
12 (BRG PTR ENBL LRN 2) 14 14
----------
13 (RESERVED 26 26
·----------
14 (RESERVED 27 27
-----------
15 (RESERVED 46 46
-----------
16 (RESERVED 45 45
------------------
9 9
------------------
12 12
------------------
15 15
GND ------------------
25 25
------------------
28 28

----------
AP/FD ANNUN1 22 22
----------
AP/FD ANNUN2 5 5
----------
AP/FDANNUN3 21 21
----------
AP/FD ANNUN4 4 4
----------
AP/FD ANNUN5 18 18
----------
AP/FD ANNUN6 7 7
----------
AP/FD ANNUN7 2 2
----------
AP/FD ANNUN8 23 23
----------
AP/FD ANNUN9 36 36
--------
AP/FD ANNUN10 38 GNDTO ACTIVATE 38
--------- -
AP/FD ANNUN11 8 (ACTIVATE ENABLE/DELETE) 8
---------
AP/FD ANNUN12 35 35
---------
14 19
o AP/FD ANNUN13 42 42
---------
AP/FD ANNUN14 24 24
---------
AP/FD ANNUN15 3 3
---------
AP/FD ANNUN16 6 6
---------
AP/FD ANNUN17 37 37 C)
---------
AP/FD ANNUN18 44 44 N
---------
AP/FD ANNUN19 43 43
---------
AP/FD ANNUN20 20 20
---------
AP/FD ANNUN21 39 39
 theory of operation 523-0773944

TR END
LANSA ¯

VECTOR \
RNA CARD AII I
LA I

I-- - -
, I
' POWER +2e v oc
AC ANALOG ANALOG +28 V DC I +5 V DC
DANSACLROETE +28 v oc 2 SCUAPRDLA3
l/O CARD DCC
A¯( I V
MANCHESTER
L.__J L__.i

LEFT (
NEEBUS
1 SPEED -

ROCESSOR CARD A4 SYMBOL GENERATOR CARD A5 DI/MUX CARD A6

DIGITAL I/O / MULTIPLEXED / \ /
WXP / PROCESSOR \ / \ / l/O PORT N / \ / OUTPUT SABUS FBUS
PORT ADI VIDEO
, FIFO AND
DEFECTION

MULT1P60RT
DPOECAESDS
DME AUD10 IDENT I
R
R SLATOR
ROM RAM LEFT DPU
PROCESSOR
[6KXl2 256XI2
COORDINATE DEFLECTION
MFD
/
¯¯ ¯

LEFT CONVERTER MULTlPLEXER

X-SIDE SERIAL
XMTR DATA \ VECTOR
RlGHT DPU
RIGHT / GENERATOR O

DIGITAL I/O CARD A8

EFRLECT10N BLANKING
- --
CHARACTER
' GENERATOR LDEO
AC ANALOG ANALOG
scLROETE
I/O CARD
¯ ¯

MANCHESTER AS STATUS 1/O LEFT DPU

CONTROL CONTROL
RGB
V1DEO/COLOR VIDEO
MFD
........ - ..-- ... ...-- --.....
CONTROL MULT1PLEXER

RlGHT DPU
RIGHT(
PROLlNE BUS Hl-SPEED - --- --- - - ---- --- A Î
6-W1RE DIGITAL l/O / / OUTPUT STRAP DISCRETE CONTROL
WXP / PROCESSOR \ / Ñ v' PORT TO AS, A6, AS, AIO
¯'"¯¯ •¯¯¯

\ \ CARDS
¯

WEATHER

DME AUDlO IDENT

I DME AUD10
PROCESSOR
/
\
\
/
MFD
A6MX16
I DATA IN

I
MFD RCVR
I S E /

TP6-24l3¯°15
GITAL I/O CARD AIO

MPU-85G/86G Multifunction Processor Unit, Block Diagram

Figure 4-14

Revised 30 August 1993 4-22

 theory of operation 523-0773944

HV SENSE
CARD A3
PRI 1
TAP ANODE (15 KV DC)
HIGH PRI 2 HIGH VOLTAGE
REGOUAATOR
DRIVEH POWER SUPPLY I FOCUS (2.5-4.5 KV DC)

DRIVEL |

FROM EFD PWR MON .

CIRCUIT BREAKER SHC CDOWN

SCREEN (+375 V DC}

PWR SDEOPLIES
,
+26.5 V DC FILAMENT H
POWER

FROM DPU (

CARD A4
RADAR FAN SHADING PULSE (SHAD) -,
Gl G2 G3 t'

VINT RED VIDEO

FROM DCP
ZRED GRN VIDEO
VIDEO YOKE CRT
ZGRN BLU VIDEO
AMPLIFIERS . r.

ZGR /2 HEATER FILAMENT

VIDEO GUNS
160 V DC
SENSE CONVERGENCE/PURITY MAGNETS
+5 V DC

HVSD PHOSPHOR ,
PROTECTION

I CARD A2 CARD Al
FROM DPU r i Y YOKE RTN
±15V DC -+15V DC ±6 V DC +6 V DC DEFLECTION XCURSENSE I
POWER POWER
-15
V DC -6
V DC MONITOR

RETRACE I RETRACE I X YOKE RTN

RETRACE LINE
CIRCU1TS
RECEIVER

"MT DE " CC +25 V DC

PWR -25
V DC I -25
V DC
I +11 V DC
+11 V DC
-11
V DC I -11
V DC , DEFLECTION
POWER
AMPLIFIERS
XDEFH XDEFH
X YOKE SEND
EFL NF EA \ XDEFL
DIFFERENTIAL GA D
AMPLFFFEERRS LINRECATY Y YOKE SEND

i I
TP6-3168-Ol4-1

EFD-85/86( ) Electronic Flight Display, Block Diagram

Figure 4-13

Revised 30 August 1993 441